D LJBG 8 PM3 W

WWW.DAYKEMQUYNHON.UCOZ.COM WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/DAYKEM.
QUYNHON
\ L ê V ă n Sự
Giảns viên Tiênc Anh
ƠN
Trường ð ạ i học Dân Lập Lạc Hồns
NH
UY
.Q
TP
O
ĐẠ
Học Nhanh n
NG
« 3 Cáp ðộ
HƯ
Mữ mằp !Ê ẫi MM B
TR
ẦN
QRfiDED ENGLISH GRAMMAR
00
10
(ELEMENTARY - INTERMEDIATE - 0DVfiNCED)

+3
P2
CẤ
A
Gầm: t 3 Cáp ñộ so trung cao cấp

HÓ
f Mối cáp ñộ gỏm BO bài X 3=60 bái

Í-
f Mối bài có 2 phần: lý thuyết + thục hành

-L
ậ Hoán tấ t 3 cấp ñộ trang vòng 5 tháng

ÁN
ðặc ñiếm: ♦ Phối hạp nhiều trạng tâm ngữ pháp

TO
trang 1 bái, giúp tạa câu hoàn chinh ngay tứ ñẩu

§ Giải thích có ñọng, ngán gọn, dế hiểu
NG
# Bái tập dối dào, phang phú

ƯỠ
ậ Có ñâp án cho mọi bái tập

ID
BỒ
N H À X U Ấ T B Ả N HỒ NG ðỨC
Đóng góp PDF bởi GV. Nguyễn Thanh Tú WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

WWW.DAYKEMQUYNHON.UCOZ.COM WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/DAYKEM.QUYNHON
ƠN
NH
UY
.Q
TP
O
ĐẠ
NG
HƯ
ẦN
TR
B
00
10
+3
P2
CẤ
A
HÓ
Í-
-L
ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ

ƠN
HỌC
0 NHANH 3 CAP ðỘ
NH
0
UY
NGỮ PHÁP TIẾNG ANH
.Q
TP
O
ĐẠ
Tác Giả:
NG
LÊ VĂN Sự
HƯ
ẦN
NHÀ X U Ấ T B Ả N H Ồ N G ðỨ C
TR
B
00
10
Chịu Trách Nhiệm Xuất Bản:

+3
HOÀNG CHÍ DŨNG

P2
CẤ
A
HÓ
Í-
-L
Hiêu sách Ngoe M ai giữ.M g ọuvền

ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
In 1.000 cuốn, khổ 14.5cm X 20.5cm, tại DNTN In Trần Tiến-Bến Tre,
siấ y ph ép xuất bản số: 5 5 3 /Q ð X B , cấp ngày 09/09/200X .
ID
S ố DKKHXB: 323-2008/C X B /553-24/H ð .

BỒ
In x o n s nộp lưu chiểu Quí IV N ăm 2008.

ƠN
FOREWORD
NH
D ear readers,
UY
T h is book e n title d “ G R A D ED E N G L IS H G R A M M A R ” is com piled
.Q
a To provide you learne rs o f E n g lis h w ith an in s ta n t E n g lis h
TP
gra m m a r m a te ria l.
O
ĐẠ
® To enable you to cover a ll th e e ssentia l p oints o f E n g lish
g ra m m a r in a sh o rt tim e (about 5 m onths).
NG
• To sa tis fy your need to le a rn th e E n g lis h language system
HƯ
q uick ly to save tim e fo r th e developm ent o f o th e r language
ẦN
s k ills such as lis te n in g , speaking, re a d in g and w ritin g .
TR
As its t itle suggests, th is is a graded E n g lis h g ra m m a r book w ith
three levels o f g ra m m a r know ledge and practice: E L E M E N T A R Y -
B
00
IN T E R M E D IA T E and A D V A N C E D . Each le vel com prises 20 units.

10
Each u n it has b oth explanations and exercises. V arious g ra m m a r

+3
p oints are included in the same u n it to h elp le a rn e rs create com plete

P2
sentences r ig h t a t the b e g in n in g o f the course.

CẤ
W ith concise explanations, abu ndant exercises, and answ er keys to

a ll practice p arts, the book is bound to s u it a ll th e levels o f learners.
A
HÓ
The beginners can get access to th is m a te ria l w ith o u t any

prerequisites.
Í-
-L
The w r ite r hopes th a t you w ill fin d th is book a sh o rt w ay and an

effective too l to have a good foun dation and a steady sprin gboard fo r
ÁN
your E n g lis h le a rn in g .
TO
LEVANSU
NG
Vice-Director of Dong Nai Informatics

and Foreign Languages Centre
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ

LỜI MỞ ðẦU
ƠN
B ạn ñọc th â n mến,
NH
Tập sách “NG Ữ P H Á P T IẾ N G A N H T H E O CẤP ðỘ ” này ñược
biê n soạn nhằm :
UY
• Cung cấp cho các bạn là nhữ ng học viê n tiế n g A n h m ộ t tà i liệu
học n ha nh ngữ pháp tiế n g Anh.
.Q
• G iúp các bạn bao quát t ấ t cả các trọ n g tâ m ngữ pháp tiế n g
TP
A n h tro n g m ột th ờ i gian ngắn (khoảng 5 tháng).
O
• ðáp ứng nhu cầu học n h a n h hệ thố n g ngôn ngữ tiế n g A nh ñể
ĐẠ
dành th ờ i gian tra u g iồ i các kỹ n ăng ngôn ngữ khác như nghe,
NG
nói, ñọc và viết.
N hư tựa ñề của sách, dây là m ộ t tậ p sách ngữ pháp tiế n g A n h
HƯ
soạn theo 3 cặp ñộ k iế n thức và thực h à n h từ s ơ CẤP, T R U N G CẤP
tớ i CAO CAP. M ỗ i cấp dộ gồm 20 ñơn v ị b à i học. M ỗ i ñơn v ị ñều có
ẦN
phầ n g iả i th íc h và b à i tập. N hững ñiểm ngữ pháp khác nhau ñược ñưa
TR
vào cùng m ộ t ñơn v ị bài học ñể giúp người học tạo câu hoàn chỉnh
ngay từ ñầu kh óa học.
B
00
Với những g iả i th íc h ngắn gọn, lượng b à i tập phong phú và ñáp

10
án cho các phần luyện tập, tậ p sách chắc chắn phù hợp vỡi tr ìn h ñộ
của m ọi học viê n. Những người m ới b ắ t ñầu cũng có th ể tiế p cận tà i
+3
liệ u m à kh ôn g cần ñiều k iệ n tiê n quyết nào.

P2
Người v iế t h i vọng các, bạn sẽ n h ậ n ra tập sách là con ñường ngắn

CẤ
và là công cụ hiệu quả ñể có dược m ộ t nền tả n g tố t cũng như m ộ t bàn

ñạp vững chắc cho việc học tiế n g A n h của các bạn.
A
LÊ V Ă N Sự
HÓ
Phó Giám ðốc Trung Tâm Tin Học -

Ngoại Ngữ ðồng Nai
Í-
-L
ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ

M ỤC LỤC
ƠN
FOREWORD ............................................ .............................................. .............4
NH
Part One ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR.....................................................................21
UY
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 1A............ ......................................... ............... . 22
.Q
I. P R E S E N T A T IO N .........................................................................................................22
TP
A. Giới thiệu tê n :............................... ................................. ................................. 22
B. Hỏi nghề nghiệp:............................................................................................. 22
O
c. Hỏi xuất xứ hay quốc tịc h :............................................................................... 22
ĐẠ
D. Số ñ ế m ......................................... ................................................... ............. 23
NG
E. Thì hiện tại thường của ñộng từTO BE .......................................................... 23
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 2A.................. ............................................................. 25
HƯ
I. P R E S E N T A T IO N ........................................................................................................ 25
ẦN
A. Hỏi và trả lời về ñồ v ậ t.................................... .............................................. 25
B. Mạo từ (Articles)..,......................... ........................... ...................................... 25
TR
c. Cách ñổi danh từ số ít sang số nhiều:......................... ..................................... 25
B
D. Cách ñọc tận s của danh từ số nhiều......... .................................................... 26
00
E. ðại từ chỉ thị (Demonstrative Pronouns)........................................................... 26

10
F. Tính từ sở hữu (Possessive Adjectives)............................................................. 27

+3
G. Hỏi về nghề nghiệp...................................... .................................................. 27

P2
H. Học thêm các số ñếm sau:............................................ ................................. 27

CẤ
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 3A ................................................................................29

I. P R E S E N T A T IO N .............................................................................................. 2 9
A
A. Tính tù (Adjective)........................................................................................... 29
HÓ
B. Học thêm số ñếm :............................................... ;......................................... 29

Í-
c. Mâu câu với THERE IS / A R E .......................................................................... 29

-L
D. Câu hỏi với WHERE (ở ñ âu )............................................................................ 30

E. Hòi và trả lòi về giá cả......... ........................................................................... 30
ÁN
F. Cách ñọc sô' tiền và số ñiện thoại..................................................................... 31

TO
G. Lời yêu cầu lịch sự........................................................................................... 31

NG
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 4A ................................................................................ 34

I. P R E S E N T A T IO N ........................................................................................................ 34
ƯỠ
A. Hỏi ñây / kia là a i? .......................................................................................... 34

ID
B. Hỏi về màu sắc............................................................................................... 34

c. Cấu trúc diễn tả màu sắc một hay nhiều vật..................................................... 34
BỒ
D. Sở hữu cách (The Possessive Case).................................................................. 34

E. Câu hỏi với WHOSE (= của ai) chỉ sở hữu........................................................... 3:

F. Cách dùng SOME và ANY.................................................................................... 3
ƠN
G. Câu hỏi với HOW MUCH / M A N Y ...?................................................................... 3 :
NH
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 5 A ...................................................................... 3'
I. P R E S E N T A T IO N ............................................... ..................................................... 3'
UY
A. Cách diễn tả ñiều mình muốnhay mời mọc một cách lịch sự:...........................3í
.Q
B. Câu mệnh lệnh (Imperative sentence).......................... ..... ............................ 3 .
TP
c. ðại từ nhân xưng làm tân ngữ (Object Pronouns)(liên hệ với Unit Two, phần F )3‘
D. Hỏi nhãn hiệu của một món hàng (ñ ồ )............................................................. 3Ỉ
O
E. Cách ñọc số chỉ năm ................... ..................................................................... 3Ỉ
ĐẠ
F. ðộng từ khiếm khuyết CAN (The Defective Verb CAN)........................................ 3í'
NG
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 6 A .............. ..... ........................................................... 4:
HƯ
I. P R E S E N T A T IO N ....... ............................................................................................... 4 :
A. ðộng từ kép có tân ngữ là danh từ hay ñại từ.................................................... 4 ;
ẦN
B. TO HAVE GOT................................................................................................... 4:
c. HOW MUCH/ MANY với ñộng từ HAVE GOT....................................................... 4'
TR
D. Số ñếm hàng trăm ............................................................................................ 4‘
B
E. ðại từ sở hữu (Possessive Pronouns) (x e m th ê m u n it 5 I . C ) ........................ 4 ‘i
00
F. ðại từ chỉ thị: ONE, ONES.............. .............................. .................................. 4

10
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 7A ...................................................................................;.4t

+3
I. P R E S E N T A T IO N ....................................................................................................... 4f
P2
A. ðộng từ có hai tân ngữ (Verbs with two objects)............................................... 41

CẤ
B. Cấu trúc câu có trạng từ chỉ nơi ch ố r:........................................................... 4!

c. Học thêm số ñ ếm :.......................................................................................... 4'
A
HÓ
D. Cấu trúc mô tả tính c h ấ t:.................................................................................. 4:

ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 8 A .................................... ......................................... 5:
Í-
I. P R E S E N T A T IO N ................................................................... ................................... 5;
-L
A. THE PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE (Thì hiện tại tiếp d iễn )............................... 5
ÁN
B. W h - questions with Present Continuous.............................................................. 5

TO
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 9 A ...............................................................................5:

I. P R E S E N T A T IO N .......................................................................................................5£
NG
A. Một số kiểu nói lịch sự..................................................................................... 5í

ƯỠ
B. Cách dùng TOO và E IT H E R .............................................................................. 5t

c. Thứ tự các tính từ giúp nghĩa cho một danh từ................................................... 51
ID
D. Giới từ (Prepositions)........................................................................................ 5t
BỒ
E. Câu trả lời vổi BECAUSE......................................................... ......................... 5"'

ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 10A.............................................................................59

I. P R E S E N T A TIO N ...................................................................................................... 59
ƠN
A. Cách nói giờ:.................................................................................................59
B. Số thứ tự:...................................................................................................... 60
NH
c. Thì tương lai gần (The Near Future Tense)........................................................60
UY
I. P R E S E N TA TIO N ....................................................................................................64
.Q
A. Thì hiện tại thường của ñộng từ thường (The Simple Present Tense of Ordinary
TP
V erb s)...!......... ........... ............. ............................................................... . 64
O
B. Cách dùng thì hiện tại thường:........................................................................66
ĐẠ
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 12A............................................................................. 71
NG
I. P R E S E N TA T IO N ....................................................................................................... 71
A. Trạng từ chỉ sự năng diễn (Adverbs of Frequency)............ ............................... 71
HƯ
B. Câu hỏi với HOW OFTEN:......................... ....... ............................................... 71
c. Thì hiện tại thường ñối chiếu với thì hiện tại tiếp diễn (The Simple present versus
ẦN
the Present Continuous):................................................................................72
TR
D. Trạng từ chỉ thể cách (Adverbs of m anner):....................................................72
E. Câu trả lời ngắn gọn:............. ........................................................................ 73
B
F. Số thứ tự và ngày tháng (Ordinal number and dates: See Grammar 10 again)....73
00
10
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 13A.............................................. ............................. 76

+3
I. P R E S E N TA TIO N ...................................................................................................... 76
A. Thì quá khứ thường của TO BE (The Simple Past of TO BE).............................. 76
P2
B. There was/ w ere:........................................................................................... 77

CẤ
c. Một vài cấu trúc thông dụng:............................................ ............................. 77

D. Thì quá khứ của ñộng từ TO HAVE (The Simple Past of TO HAVE).................. 77
A
HÓ
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 14A............................................................ ............... 80

I. P R E S E N TA TIO N ...................... ............................................................................... 80
Í-
A. Thì quá khứ thường của ñộng từ thường (The Simple Past of ordinary verbs).... 80
-L
B. Thêm một số ñộng từ bất qui tắc:................................................................... 81

ÁN
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 15A............................................................................ 84

TO
I. PR E SEN T A T IO N ...................................................................................................... 84
A. Tính từ chỉ số lượng (Quantitive Adjectives)...................................................... 84
NG
B. Cấu trúc câu IT TAKES / TOOK..... ...................... ............................................ 85

c. Thì quá khứ tiếp diễn (The Past Continuous Tense).......................................... 85
ƯỠ
D. Thì quá khứ của CAN (The Simple Past of CAN) (X e m lạ i G ra m m a r 5 A ).. 86
ID
E. MUST and N E E D ..................... ..................................................... ............... 86

BỒ

F. Một số kiểu nói thường jùng khi gọi ñiện thoại................................................. 86

G. Năm phần của một lá thư {Five parts of a letter).............................................. 87
ƠN
I. P R E S EN TA TIO N .......................................................................................................90
NH
A. Thì hiện tại hoàn thành (The Present Perfect Tense)........................................ 80
UY
B. Phân biệt HAVE BEEN TO và HAVE GONE TO....... .......................................... 90
c. Trạng từ JUST & ALREADY với thì Present Perfect............ ............................. 90
.Q
0. Thì Present Perfect dùng với HOW MUCH / MANY............................................ 91
TP
E. Thì Present Perfect ñối chiếu với thì Simple Past............................................. 91
O
F. Thì Present Perfect với SINCE và FOR.................................... ........................ 91
ĐẠ
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 17A.................................................. ......................... 94
NG
I. PR E S EN TA TIO N ...................................................................................................... 94
A. TOO MUCH - TOO MANY - ENOUGH............................................................... 94
HƯ
B. TO HAVE TO ................................................................................................. 95
c. Thì tương iai thường (The Simple Future Tense).......................... ...................... 95
ẦN
D. ðại từ bất ñịnh (Indefinite pronouns)............................................................... 96
TR
E. ðại từ chỉ số lượng (Quantitive pronouns)........................................................ 96
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 18A............................................................................ 98
B
00
I. PRESENTATION: Các dạng so sánh của tính t ừ .............................................98

10
A. So sánh bằng & không bằng:...... .................................................................. 98

+3
B. So sánh hdn và kém hơn:.............................................................................. 99

P2
c. So sánh nhất và kém nhất:............................................................................99

ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 19A..;........................................................................ 103
CẤ
I. PR ESEN TA TIO N .................................................................................................... 103

A
A. Mau câu có ñộng từ nguyên mẫu...................................................................103

HÓ
B. Mầu câu với TOO, ENOUGH + ñộng từ nguyên mẫu:........................................ 103

c. ðộng từ nối (Linking Verbs)......................................................................... 103
Í-
D. Câu nối kết (Connected Statements).............................................................. 104

-L
E. The Simple Past, Simple Future & Present Perfect of TO HAVE TO...................104
ÁN
F. To be able to + V: Present, Past, Future & Present Perfect............................... 105

TO
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 20A............................................................... 108

[. PRESENTATIO N ....................................................................................................108
NG
A. QiBstions with How + adjective.................................................................... 108

ƯỠ
S. Comparisons of Adverbs (dạng so sánh của t * n g từ).....................................109

c ĩag-quesílorỉs (cẫu hỏi ñuôi)......................................................................... 109
ID
0. Complex sentences having adverb clauses of time (câu phức có mệnhñề trạng từ
BỒ
ch! thdỉ gian)............................................................................................. 110

E. ðộng từ MAY....................................................... ......................................................... 111

F. ðại từ với SELF (self-pronouns)...................................................................- 1 1 1
ƠN
G. Two common expressions of invitations (2 kiểu mời mọc thông dụng)............. 112
NH
Part Two INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR............................................................. 116
UY
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR I B ........ ............................. ........... ....................... 117
I. RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS ................................... ............................................ 117
.Q
TP
II. PREPOSITIONS USED AFTER A D J E C T IV E S ..............................................117
III. SOME USEFUL EXPR ESSIO NS OF A G R E EM E N T &
O
D ISA G R EEM EN T .......................................................................... 118
ĐẠ
IV. ðỘNG TỪ CHỈ THÓI QUEN TRONG QUÁ KHỨ USED T O ....................119
NG
V. REPORTED SPEECH ........................... ........................................................... 119
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 2B............ ................... .........................................124
HƯ
I. Present 8c past participles used as adjectives.............................................. 124
ẦN
II. The verb expressing advice: SHOULD ....... ..................... ........................... 125
III. ADJECTIVE CLAUSE .......................................... ............ ...............................126
TR
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 3B ............................................. .................... . 130
B
00
I. THE PR ESEN T P ER FE C T C O N T IN U O U S ......................................................130

10
II. NOUN CLAUSE ................................................................................................... 130

+3
III. THE PR ESEN T PE R FE C T & THE PR ESEN T PER FE C T

C O N TIN U O U S ................................................................. ............ 131
P2
IV. ADVERB CLAUSE ....................................................................... ................... 132

CẤ
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 4 B ........................................... ..............................133

A
I. THE GERUND ..................................................................................................... 133

HÓ
ỈI. THE MODAL VERB “M AY” ............................................................................... 134

Í-
III. QUANTITIVE ADJECTIVES - THE VERB “G ET” .................................... 135

-L
IV. QUESTIONS IN REPORTED SPEECH W ITH DIFFERENT

INTRO DUCING V ERBS............................................................ 136
ÁN
V. ADDITIONAL NOTES ON ADJEC TIVE C LA U S E S .................................... 137

TO
VI. CONDITIONAL SEN TE N CES (Câu ñiều k iệ n )..........................................138

INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 5B ............................................. ............................141
NG
- L MORE ABOUT CONDITIONAL S E N T E N C E S ................................................. 141

ƯỠ
II. COMPOUND NOUNS ................ ............. ........................................................ 143

ID
III. BUSINESS L E TTE R S .............................. ........................................................ 144

BỒ
IV. THE PAST PERFECT ............................................ ........................................144
10

V. SIMPLE PAST & PAST P E R F E C T ................................................................... 145

VI. THE PAST PE R FEC T C O N T IN U O U S ............................................................ 145
ƠN
VII. THE PASSIVE V O IC E ..........................................................................................146
NH
VIII. REVISIO N OF PASSIVE VO ICE W ITH MODAL VE RB S...........................149
IX. THE CAUSATIVE FORM (Dạng sai bảo )........................................................15C
UY
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 6 8 ................................................................. ...... 151
.Q
I. FORMAL & INFORMAL E N G L IS H ...................................................................... 151
TP
II. TH E FUTURE CONTINUO US T E N S E ................................................................152
O
III. FUTURE PE R FE C T & FUTURE P E R FE C T C O N T IN U O U S ...................... 153
ĐẠ
/ IV. G ERU N D 154
NG
V. IN FIN ITIVE W iTH TO AND W ITHO UT T O ....................................................... 155
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 7 B .......................................................................... 158
HƯ
I. DO AND M A K E ........................................................................................................158
ẦN
ÌL IN FIN ITIVE C O N S T R U C T IO N S ...... ;............... ,................... ............................160
ill. SPECIAL PA SSIVE F O R M S ............................................................................... 161
TR
ÍV. R EVỈSÌO N OF IN FIN ITIV E W ITH TO A ND W ITH O UT T O .......................... 162
B
V. VERBS EX PR E SS IN G LIKES & P R E FE R E N C E S ........................................162
00
V!. VE RB S EX PR ES SIN G A D V IS A B IL IT Y ...........................................................163

10
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 8 B ...........................................................................165

+3
I. REVISIO N OF IN FIN ITIV ES & G E R U N D S ........................................................ 165

P2
II. SPECULATING ABOUT TH E PR ESEN T SITU A TIO N S................................166

CẤ
III. VERBS EXPR ESSIN G OBLIGATIONS OR D U TIES .................................... 168

A
IV. SPECU LATING ABOUT TH E P A S T .................................................................168

HÓ
V. REVISIO N OF PA SSIVE V O IC E .........................................................................170

Í-
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 9 B .......... ......... ......................................................170

-L
I. SPECU LATIN G ABOUT A PAST ACTION IN P R O G R E S S ..........................170

ÁN
II. APOLOGY AND R E S P O N S E ................................. ..............................................171

III. MO RE ABOUT IN FIN ITIV E AND G ER U N D - FULL FORM AND NOTE
TO
FORM ................................................................................................172
NG
IV. C O NDITIO NAL S E N T E N C E S .................................................................................. 174

ƯỠ
V. REVISIO N OF CO N DITIO NA L S E N T E N C E S ................................... ........... 175

ID
Vi. R EVISIO N OF C ON DITION AL S E N T E N C E S ................................................176

BỒ
ỈNTERMEÚÌATE GRAMMAR 10B................. .................. ......... .........................176
11

I. SENTENCE PATTERN W ITH UNREAL O BJECT...........................................176

II. IF ONLY 177
ƠN
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 11B........................................................................178
I. FUNCTIONS OF A G ERU N D P H R A SE .............................................................178
NH
II. THE USES OF “W ISH ” .......................................................... ............................ 179
UY
.Q
I. DIFFER ENT WAYS TO EXPR ESS R EG R ET ABOUT THE P A S T ......... 181
TP
II. REVISION OF W IS H E S ........................................................................................182
O
ĐẠ
I. DEFINING RELATIVE CLAUSES WITH W HO(M ), W HICH & T H A T ......183
II. RELATIVE CLAUSES W ITH W HERE & W H O S E ......................................... 184
NG
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 14B................................... ....................................185
HƯ
I. REVISION OF RELATIVE C LA U S E S ................................................................ 185
ẦN
II. NO N-DEFINING RELATIVE CLAUSES........................ ................................... 186
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 15B....................................................................... 187
TR
!. PREPOSITIONS IN RELATIVE C L A U S E S ................................... ...... .........187
B
II. REVIEW OF RELATIVE C LA U S ES ................................................................... 189
00
10
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 16B....................................... ............................... 189

+3
I. ADJECTIVES MODIFYING N O U N S................................................................... 189

P2
II. DESCRIBING P E O P L E ........................................................................................190

INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 17B.......................................................................... 191
CẤ
I. INFINITIVES EX PR ES SIN G PURPOSES: s o AS (NOT) TO - IN ORDER

A
(NOT) TO ......... .............. ............................................ .................... 191

HÓ
II. CLAUSES OF PURPOSE WITH s o THAT:..................................................192

Í-
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 18B....................... ................................................193

-L
I. OTHER WAYS TO EXPR ES S A NEGATIVE P U R P O S E ............................. 193

II. SO... THAT AND SUCH ... T H A T ....................................................................... 194
ÁN
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 19fc........ .............................................................. 195

TO
I. REVISIO N & CONSOLIDATION OF RELATIVE CLAUSES AND VERBS

NG
OF P E R C E P T IO N ................................................ ......................... 195

II. ADVERB CLAUSES OF REASONS & C O NCESSIO NS .............................. 197
ƯỠ
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 20B............................................ ................ ..........198

ID
f. PAIRED CONJUNCTIONS: NOT ONLY... BUT ALSO / EITHER... OR /

BỒ
NEITHER ... N O R ........................................................................... 198
12

II. MORE ABOUT ADVERB CLAUSES OF REASON & CONCESSION OR

C O N TR A S T.....................................................................................200
ƠN
Part Three ADVANCED GRAMMAR.......................... ....................................... 202
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 1C................................................................................. 203
NH
I. REDUCING A CLAUSE INTO A PHRASE - REVISION OF ADV CLAUSES
UY
- COMPOUND A D JE C T IV E S ...................... .............................. 203
II. RELATIVE PRONOUN “W HAT” ........................................................................ 204
.Q
III. IN TEN SIFIER S WITH E V E R .............................................................................204
TP
III. COMPOUND NOUNS & COMPOUND A D J E C T IV E S ..................................206
O
ĐẠ
I. THE FORMATION OF COMPOUND NO U N S ......................... ........................ 206
NG
II. THE FORMATION OF COM POUND A D JE C T IV E S ......................................207
HƯ
III. THE PAST S U B JU N C TIV E...............................................................................208
IV. PHRASAL VERBS WITH “PUT” ..................................................................... 209
ẦN
/ I. TR
MORE ABOUT THE PASSIVE V O IC E ..................................... 210
B
II. CAUSATIVE F O R M ............................................................................................. 214
00
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 4C........................................................................... .....216

10
I. REPORTED S P E E C H .......................................................................................... 216

+3
II. REPORTED SPEECH: MIXED T Y P E S ........................................................... 216

P2
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 5C.................................................................................... 218

CẤ
BRITISH ENGLISH & AMERICAN E N G L IS H ............... .....................................218

I. GRAMMAR 218
A
HÓ
II. VO C A B U L AR Y ............................................................... ......................................218

ill. SPELLING 220
Í-
IV. PRO NUNCIATION................................................................................................ 220

-L
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 6C................ ...... .............................................................221

ÁN
I. PREFIXES & S U F FIX E S ..................................................................................... 221

TO
II. REVIEW OF SIMPLE PAST & PAST CONTINUOUS...................................222

III. ADJECTIVES WITH “UN-”.................................................................................222
NG
IV. REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL PR O N O U N S...........................................223

ƯỠ
V. RELATIVE PRONOUS IN FORMAL S T Y L E ................................................. 223

ID
VI. ADJECTIVES WITH “IN-*......... ............. .......................................................... 224

/ VII. USES OF A R TIC LE S............................... ........................................................225
BỒ
13

VIII. A DJEC TIVES WITH IL - IR - IM - ............... .......................... .......................... 227

IX. AD JE C TV E S WITH N O N - ................................................................................ 227
ƠN
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 7 C ............ .....................................................................228
NH
I. TW O - OR TH REE-W O R D VERB OR PHRASAL VERBS W ITH “LOOK” &
“ BR EAK” . ........................................................................................ 228
UY
I!. W O RDS WITH D IS -...............................................................................................229
.Q
III. REVISION OF T E N S E S .......................................................................................229
TP
IV. PHR AS AL VERBS WITH "COM E” ................................................................... 230
O
V. WORDS WITH M I S - ....................................................................... .....................230
ĐẠ
VI. P H R AS AL VERBS WITH GO.............................................................................231
NG
VII. VERBS NOT USED IN CONTINUOUS T E N S E S ....................................... 231
VIII. REVISION OF P R E FIX E S ............................................................................... 232
HƯ
IX. PHRASAL VERBS WITH “RUN” .................................................... ............. 233
ẦN
X. ADJECTIVES WITH - Y AND - L Y ................................................. ................. 233
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 8 C ............... ................ ........ ........................................234
TR
I. PHRASAL VERBS WITH “TURN” ...................... ............................................... 234
B
II. IN TER JEC TIO N S................................................................................................... 234
00
III. SUFFIXES - LIKE TO FORM ADJS, AND -S T Y L E , -T Y P E TO FORM

10
N O U N S ..............................................................................................235
+3
!V. PHRASAL VERBS W ITH G E T ..........................................................................235

P2
V. PHRASAL VERBS WITH “TAKE” ..................................................................... 236

CẤ
VI. SUFFIXES -A B LE , -ỈB L E TO FORM ADJS...................................................236

VII. PHRASAL VERBS WITH B R IN G .................................................................... 237
A
HÓ
VIII. SUFFIXES -L E S S -F U L TO FORM A D JE C TIV E S ....................................237

ADVANCED GRAMMAR 9C ................................................................................238
Í-
I. SUFFIX -IS H TO FORM ADJECTIVES - THE M EANING OF

-L
AD VER TISIN G , PUBLICITY & P R O P A G A N D A ......................238

ÁN
ADVERTISING / PUBLICITY / PROPAGANDA...................................................... 238

II. PHRASAL VERBS WITH PU T.............................................................................239
TO
III. FORMAL & BUSINESS L E T T E R S ................................................................... 239

NG
IV. PUNCTUATION - A P O S TR O P H E S .................................................................240

ƯỠ
V. COMPOUND A D J E C T IV E S .................................................. ..............................241

VI. PHRASAL VERBS WITH K E E P ....................................................................... 242
ID
VII. SU FFIXES TO FORM ADJS OF NATIONALITY .......................................... 242

BỒ
VIII. PHRASAL VERBS WITH H O L D .................................................................... 243
14

IX. ADJECTIVES WITH -1ST -A L AND -1 C ......................................................... 243

X. PHRASAL VERBS W ITH F A L L ..........................................................................244
ƠN
XI. ADVERB CLAUSES OF FUTURE T IM E ......................................................... 244
NH
ADVANCED GRAMMAR IOC............................................................................... .245
/ I. SUFFIXES TO FORM AD JECTIVES OF Q U A LITY......................................... 245
UY
II. PHRASAL VERBS W ITH S E N D ..............:...................................................... 246
.Q
III. FUTURE T E N S E S ................................................................................................. 246
TP
IV. ADJECTIVE CLAUSES W ITH W H E R E .......................................................... 247
O
V. PREFIXES AND S U F F IX E S ............................................................................... 247
ĐẠ
VI. PHRASAL VERBS W ITH W O R K ......................................................................248
VII. SOME IDIOMATIC V E R B S ............................................................................... 248
NG
../ VIII. SUFFIXES -A T E , -E N T TO FORM A D JE C T IV E S ....................................249
HƯ
IX. PHRASAL VERBS W ITH C A LL ........................................................................249
ẦN
X. SEQ U EN C E W O R D S ...................... ..... ............................................................... 250
XI. PAST T E N S E S ...................................................................................................... 251
TR
XII. SUFFIXES TO FORM A D JE C T IV E S .............................................................. 251
B
XIII. SOME PHRASAL VERBS W ITH B E ............................................................. 252
00
ADVANCED GRAMMAR l i e ..................... .......................................................... 253

10
I. PARTICIPLES USED AS A D J E C T IV E S ........................................................... 253

+3
II. PHRASAL VERBS W ITH C A R R Y ..................................................................... 253

P2
III. COMPOUND A D JEC TIVES OF M EA S U R E M E N T..................................... 254

CẤ
IV. PHRASAL VERBS W ITH P A S S .......................................................................254

V. ADJECTIVES FROM LATIN & G R EEK W O R D S ...................... ....................255
A
HÓ
VI. PH R AS AL VE R BS W ITH M A K E ...................................................................... 256

VII. PHRASAL VERBS W ITH S T A N D ................................................................... 256
Í-
VIII. G ENDER OF N O U N S ....................................................... ...... .......................256

-L
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 12C................................. .......................... ..................258

ÁN
/ Ì. SUFFIX - I O N TO FORM AB STRACT N O U N S................................................ 258

TO
it. PH RASAL VERBS W ITH S E T ........................................................................... 259

/ I I I . SUFFIXES-TO FORM N O U N S .......................................................................... 259
NG
IV. LANGUAG E S T U D Y ................................................ ........................................... 260

ƯỠ
/ V. SUFFIX -M E N T TO FORM N O U NS.................................................................. 261

ID
Vi. PHR ASAL VERBS WITH SEE ................................................................. ...... 261

BỒ
VII. FOR.VI3 OF A D D R E S S ................................. ..................................................... 262
15

VIII. SUFFIX -N E S S TO FORM ABSTRACT N O U N S ....................................... 263

IX. PHRASAL VERBS WITH G IV E ....................................................................... 263
X. PUNCTUATION - CAPITALIZATIO N ............................................................... 263
ƠN
XI. SEN TEN CE TR A N S FO R M A T IO N ................................................................... 264
NH
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 13C........................... ............................................ . 265
UY
I. SUFFIXES TO FORM N O U N S..............................................................................265
II. PHRASAL VERBS WITH C U T ........................................................................... 266
.Q
ill. LANGUAGE STUDY: WAYS OF EXPRESSING THE P U R P O S E ........ 266
TP
IV. SUMMARY OF PHRASAL VERBS & W ORD S TU D Y ................................. 267
O
V. PHRASAL VERBS W ITH DO AND L E T ........................................................... 268
ĐẠ
VI. NOUNS WITH - Y -A C Y - A R C H Y ...................................................................269
NG
VII. SUFFIX -IL IT Y TO FORM N O U N S .................................................................270
VII.PHRASAL VERBS WITH CATCH AND D R O P ............................................. 270
HƯ
IX. SUFFIXES TO FORM NOUNS AND A D JE C T IV E S ..................................... 271
ẦN
X. PHRASAL VERBS WITH DRAW AND LA Y .................................................... 271
XI. PUNCTUATION: THE C O M M A .........................................................................272
TR
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 14C............................................................................... 273
B
00
I. SU FFIXES TO FORM N O U N S............................................................................. 273

10
II. PHRASAL VERBS A - E ..................................................................................... 273

III. EXPRESSIO NS INDICATING CER TA INTY, BELIEF / DOUBT,
+3
UNCERTAINTY AND T R U T H ...................................................... 274

P2
IV. SUFFIXES TO FORM N O U N S .......................................................................... 275

CẤ
V. PHRASAL VERBS F - M ...................................................................................... 276

A
VI. SOME VERBS W HICH TAKE TH E -IN G F O R M ......................................... 277

HÓ
VII. SUFFIXES TO FORM N O U N S .........................................................................277

VIII. PHRASAL VERBS: o - s (R E V IE W )......... ..................................................278
Í-
IX. SUFFIXES TO FORM NOUNS OF P R O FE S S IO N ...... ........................ . 278

-L
X. PHRASAL VERBS: T - W ..................................................................................... 279

ÁN
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 15C............................................................................... 280

TO
I. PHRASAL VER B S W ITH A W A Y ................................................................. 280

II. TH E O RDER OF A D JE C TIV E S ................................................................. .. 280
NG
III. PHRASAL VERBS W ITH B A CK ........................................................................281

ƯỠ
IV. W AYS OF E X P R E S S IN G ................................................................................... 281

ID
V. PHRASAL VERBS W ITH FO R W A R D .............................................................. 282

BỒ
16

VI: WAYS OF EXPRESSING “ONE AND SAME” .............................................. 282

_ VII. W AYS OF EXPRESSIN G “TW O”.................................................................. 283
VIII. PHRASAL VERBS W IT H .O U T -.....................................................................284
ƠN
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 16C........................ ............................................... .....285
NH
I. PREFIXES RELATED TO N U M B E R S ..............................................................285
UY
II. TWO-W ORD VERBS WITH FROM, INTO & T O ............................................ 286
II). SUFFIX - E N TO FORM V E R B S ....................................................................... 287
.Q
IV. TW O-W ORD VERBS WITH LIKE, WITH & W IT H O U T ...............................287
TP
V. LANGUAGE STUDY: SEVEN W AYS OF BEING RUDE IN EN G LIS H ...288
O
VI. SU FFIXES TO FORM V E R B S ................................................ ........................ 289
ĐẠ
VII. TW O-W ORD VERBS WITH AFTER, AGAINST & FO R ............................ 290
NG
VIII. LANGUAGE STUDY: WORDS SHOW ING C ON TRA S T.......................... 291
IX. VERBS ENDING IN - A T E ........................................................... .................... 291
HƯ
X. TW O-W ORD VERBS WITH A B O U T ................................................................292
ẦN
XI. THE QUESTION M A R K ............... .....................................................................293
TR
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 17C...............................................................................293
I. PREFIXES ........................................................................................................... 293
B
00
II. TW O-W ORD VERBS WITH A C R O SS ..............................................................294

10
iii. LANGUAGE STUDY: P R E C A U TIO N S........................................................... 295

IV. SUFFIXES TO FORM NOUNS OF JOBS AND SOCIAL R O LE S............295
+3
V. TW O-W ORD VERBS WITH ALO NG ................................................................295

P2
VI. PREFIXES D IS -A N D M I S - ............................................................................ 296

CẤ
VII. TW O-W ORD VERBS WITH A R O U N D .......................................................... 296

A
VIII. GIVING ADVICE & MAKING S U G G E S T IO N S ..........................................297

HÓ
IX. PREFIXES: R E - F O R E - C O - ........................................................................ 298

Í-
X. TWO-W ORD VERBS WITH BEFORE............................................................. 298

-L
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 18C...............................................................................299

I. PREFIXES O U T - U N D E R - O V E R -.................................................................. 299
ÁN
II. TWO-W ORD VERBS WITH B E H IN D ...............................................................299

TO
ill. PUNCTUATION: THE H YP H E N ...................................................................... 300

NG
(V. LANGUAGE STUDY: TALKING ABOUT ASSUMPTIONS & FACTS.....300

V. PREFIXES U N - AND D E - .......... .......................................................................301
ƯỠ
VI. TW O -W O R D VERBS WITH B Y ..................................................... ........... ;..302

ID
VII. PR EFIXES S E M I- FELLOW - E X - ................................................................303

BỒ
17

VIII. TW O -W O R D VERBS W ITH D O W N ..............................................................303

IX. PR E FIX E S A N T I- P R O -............................................................................... . 304
ƠN
X. TW O -W O R D VERBS W ITH I N - ........................................................................ 304
NH
XL PUNCTUATION: IN VE R TE D C OM MAS AND QUOTATION MARKS ... 305
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 19C................... ............................. ..............................306
UY
I. LATIN P R E F IX E S ...................................................................................................306
.Q
II. TW O-W ORD VERBS W ITH O F F ........................ .............................................. 306
TP
m. MORE LATIN P R E F IX E S .............;................. ................................................ 307
O
IV. TW O-W ORD VERBS WITH O N ....................... .............................................308
ĐẠ
V. PUNCTUATION: THE D A S H .............................. ............................................. 308
NG
VI. COMPOUND ADJECTIVES WITH - I N G . ........................................309
VII. TWO-W ORD VERBS W ITH OVER .................................... .................... 309
HƯ
VIII. N O N - STANDARD FORMS OF E N G L IS H .................................................310
ẦN
IX. PR E FIXES FROM GR EEK W O R D S ........................................ ................... 311
X. TW O -W OR D VERBS W ITH R O U N D ................. ............... .......................... 311
TR
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 20C ......... .............................. .......... ..........................312
B
I. FOREIGN SU FFIXES TO FORM PLU RA LS.................................... ............. 312
00
II. TW O-W ORD VERBS W ITH THROUGH .......................................................313

10
III. THE PUNCTUATION: BRACKETS (= P A R E N T H E S E S ).........................313

+3
IV. CONSTRUCTIONS WITH FIRST, SECOND & T H IR D ............................ 314

P2
V. TW O-W ORD VERBS W ITH U P .........................................................................315

CẤ
VI. PREFIX S E L F -.......................................... ...........................................................315

A
VII. SOME TH REE-W O RD V E R B S .......................................................................315

HÓ
VIII. PUNCTUATION: THE C O L O N .......................................................................317

ỈX. WORDS TH A T R E P R E S EN T S O U N D S ................ .......................... ..........317
Í-
-L
X. TH RE E-W O R D V E R B S ..................................................................................... 318

X I. PUNCTUATION: THE S E M I-C O L O N ............................................................. 319
ÁN
XII. SUM MARY OF WORD STUDY AND TWO-W ORD V E R B S .....................320

TO
LANGUAGE STUDY T E S T .............. ............................................................322

NG
I. PH R ASAL V E R B S ............................................................................................... 322

II. WORD BUILDING OR F O R M A T IO N ................................................. ...........323
ƯỠ
ANSWER KEYS TO PART ONE ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR..................... 326

ID
ELEM EN TAR Y G RAMM AR 1 A ............... ........................................... ..................328

BỒ
el e me n t ar y g r ammar 2 A .............................................................................. 327

ELEM ENTA RY GRAMM AR 3 A ................................... ............................... ..........328

ELEM ENTA RY GRAMM AR 4 A .............. ................................................................. 331
ƠN
ELEM ENTA RY GRAMMAR 5 A ................................................................................333
NH
ELEM ENTA RY GRAMMAR 6 A ............................................................................... 336
ELEM E N TAR Y G RAM M AR 7 A ................................................................................340
UY
ELEM E N TAR Y G RAM M AR 8 A ................................................................................ 341
.Q
E LE M E N TA R Y G RAM M AR 9 A ................................................................................343
TP
ELEMENTAR Y GRAMMAR 1 0 A ............................................................................. 345
O
ELEM E N TAR Y G RAM M AR 11A .............................................................................347
ĐẠ
ELEM E N TA R Y GRAMMAR 1 2A ............................................................................. 352
NG
E LE M E N T A R Y GRAM M AR 1 3 A .............................................................................354
E LE M E N TA R Y GRAM M AR 1 4 A _ ......................................................................... 356
HƯ
ELEM EN TAR Y G R AM M AR 1 5 A . ...........................................................................359
ẦN
ELEM ENTA R Y GRAMMAR 1 6 A ............................................................................. 361
ELEMENTAR Y GRAMMAR 1 7 A ............................................................................. 363
TR
ELEMENTAR Y GRAMMAR 1 8 A ............... ........................!................................. 365
B
E LE M E N TA R Y GR AM M AR 1 9 A ............................................................................. 367
00
ELEM EN TA RY GRAMMAR 2 0 A .............................................................................369

10
ANSWER KEYS TO PART TWO INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR........... ....... 372

+3
IN TE R M E D IA TE GRAMM AR 1B ............................................................................. 372

P2
IN TE R M E D IA TE GRAMMAR 2 B ............................................................................. 374

CẤ
IN TE R M E D IA TE GRAMM AR 3 B .............................................................................376
IN TE R M E D IA TE GRAMMAR 4 B .............................................................................377
A
HÓ
IN TE R M ED IA TE GRAMMAR 5 B ............................................................................. 381

IN TE R M E D IA TE GRAMM AR 6 B .............................................................................386
Í-
IN TE R M ED IA TE GR AM M A R 7 B .............................................................................387
-L
IN TE R M E D IA TE GRAMMAR 8 B .............................................................................390
ÁN
IN TE R M E D IA TE GRAMMAR 9B .............................................................................392
TO
IN TE R M ED IA TE GRAMMAR 10B .......................................................................... 393

IN TE R M E D IA TE GRAMM AR 11B .......................................................................... 394
NG
IN TE R M E D IA TE GRAMM AR 12B .......................................................................... 395

ƯỠ
INTER M ED IATE GRAMMAR 13B.......................................................................... 395

ID
IN TER M ED IATE GRAMMAR 14B.......................................................................... 396

IN TER M ED IA TE GRAMMAR 15B .......................................................................... 397
BỒ
19

INTERM EDIATE GRAMMAR 1 6 B ......................................................................... 398

INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 1 7 B .....................“............................................... 398
ƠN
INTERM EDIA TE GRAMMAR 1 8 B ......................................................................... 399
NH
INTER M ED IATE G RAM M AR 1 9 B .........................................................................400
INTERM EDIATE GRAMM AR 2 0 B ......................................................................... 401
UY
ANSWER KEYS TO PART THREE ADVANCED GRAMMAR........................402
.Q
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 1 C .................................................. ................................402
TP
ADVANCED GRAMM AR 2 C .................................................................................. 404
O
ĐẠ
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 4 C .................................................................................. 407
NG
HƯ
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 7 C ...................................................................................411
ẦN
TR
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 1 0 C ................................................................................417
B
00

10

ADVANCED GRAMMAR 13C .............................. ................... ........................... 424
+3
P2
ADVANCED GRAMM AR 1 4 C ................................................................................428

ADVANCED GRAMMAR 1 5 C ...................... .........................................................430
CẤ
ADVANCED GRAMM AR 1 6 C ................................................................................ 431

A
ADVANCED GRAMM AR 1 7 C ................................................................................433

HÓ

Í-

-L

ÁN
KEY TO LANGUAGE STUDY TEST (For learners of c level)...........................443

I. PHRASAL V E R B S .................................................................................................443
TO
II. W ORD BUILDING OR F O R M A T IO N ............................................................... 444

NG
REFERENCES ................................................................................................... 448

ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
20
ƠN
NH
UY
.Q
TP
O
Part One
ĐẠ
NG
HƯ
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR
ẦN
TR
B
00
10
+3
P2
CẤ
A
HÓ
Í-
-L
ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
21

ƠN
ELEMENTARY GRAMM AR11A
NH
I. PRESENTATION
UY
A. Gỉổỉ íhiệu ỉên:
.Q
I ’m D a vid C lark.
TP
L in d a M a rtin .
O
H e’s A la n S m ith .
ĐẠ
John Green.
She’s Susan S m ith .
NG
Carol Green.
HƯ
’8 . Hỗtnghể -nghiệp:--’*1^ '•
A re you a teacher? Yes, I am. No, I ’m not.
ẦN
a businessman?
a student? TR
a tourist?
B
00
Is he a teacher? Yes, he is. No, he is n ’t

10
a businessman?
a student?
+3
a tourist?
P2
Is she a teacher? Yes, she is. No, she is n ’t,

CẤ
a businessman?
A
a student?
HÓ
a tourist?
c. Hỏi xuất xứ hay quốc tịch:
Í-
-L
A re you fro m England? Yes, I am. No, I ’m not.

Canada?
ÁN
Is she fro m England? Yes, he is. No, he is n ’t.

TO
Canada?
Is she fro m England? Yes, she is. No, she is n ’t.
NG
Canada?
ƯỠ
Ã
ID
W here are you from ? I ’m fro m V ie tn a m .

France.
BỒ
22

London.
W here is he from ? H e’s fro m V ietn a m .
ƠN
France.
NH
London.
W here is she from ? She’s fro m V ie tn a m .
UY
France.
.Q
London.
TP
*
O
A re you E nglish? Yes, we are. N o, we aren’t.
ĐẠ
Vietnam ese?
NG
Ita lia n ?
M exican?
HƯ
***
ẦN
He’s fro m N ew Y ork. H e’s A m erican.
Moscow TR
Russian.
B e ijin g Chinese.
B
00
Teheran Ira n ia n .
10
She’s fro m P aris. She’s F rench.

S panish
+3
M a d rid
P2
Rome Ita lia n .

They’re fro m London. T h ey’re E n g lish .
CẤ
Tokyo Japanese.
A
D. Số ñếm
HÓ
1. one 4. four 7. seven 10. ten

Í-
2. tw o 5. five 8. e ig h t 11. eleven

-L
3. three 6. six 9. nin e 12. tw elve

ÁN
E. Thì hiện tại thường của ñộng từ TO BE

(The Simple Present tense of the verb TO BE)
TO
A f f ir m a t iv e (xác ñ ịn h ) I n t e r r o g a t iv e (n g h i vấn)
NG
I am - I ’m T ói ỉà, thà, ở A m I?
ƯỠ
You are - You’re Anh A re you?

He is - H e’s A n h ấv Is he?
ID
She is - She’s Cô ấy Is she?

BỒ
I t is - I t ’s Nó Is it?
23
We are - We’re C húng tô i A re we?

You are - You’re Các anh Are you?
ƠN
They are - T hey’re Họ, chúng A re they?
N e g a tiv e (phủ ñ ịnh)
NH
I am n ot - I ’m n o t - I ’m not.
UY
You are not - You’re n ot - You aren’t.
He is not - H e’s n o t - He is n ’t
.Q
TP
She is not - She’s n o t - She is n ’t
We are n o t - We’re n o t - W e aren’t
O
ĐẠ
You are n o t - You’re n o t - You aren’t
They are n o t - T h ey’re not - They aren’t
NG
II. PRACTICE
HƯ
A. Translate into English:
ẦN
1. X in chào. T ô i là M in h .
2. X in chào. T ô i là Lan.
TR
3. A n h có p hả i là m ột giáo viê n không? K hông, tô i kh ôn g là.
B
4. C hị có p h ả i là m ột học sinh không? P hải, tô i là.
00
5. A n h có từ nước N h ậ t ñến không? Không, tô i không.

10
6. C h ị có từ V iệ t N am ñến không? Có.

+3
7. A nh từ ñâu ñến? T ôi từ Pháp ñến.

P2
8. Chào chị. C hị có khỏe không?

9. Cám ơn anh, tô i r ấ t khỏe. Còn anh?
CẤ
10. Cám ơn tô i khỏe.

A
B. Complete this conversation (Hoàn tất bài ñối thoại này):

HÓ
A: H ello.
Í-
B : __ . (1)
-L
A: I ’m A nn a Hudson.
B : __ . (2)
ÁN
A: A re you a teacher?
TO
B: (3)
A: Oh, are you a student?
NG
B : __ .(4 )
A: Oh, are you fro m England?
ƯỠ
B : __ . (5)
ID
A: W here are you from?

B : ___, (6)
BỒ
24

c. Translate into English:

1. Các bạn có p hả i là người A n h không? Phải, chúng tô i là.
ƠN
2. Các bạn có p hả i là người Ý không? P hải, chúng tôi là.
3. Các bạn có p h ả i là người M êhicô không? Không, chúng tô i không là.
NH
4. Các bạn có p h ả i là người Nga không? K hông chúng tô i không là.
5. A n h có p h ả i là m ột thương gia không? Không, tô i không là.
UY
6. A n h ấy có p h ả i là m ột du khách không? Phải, anh ta là.
.Q
7. Cô ấy có p h ả i là m ộ t giáo v iê n không? Không, cô ta không phải.
TP
8. Các anh có p hải là những sin h viê n không? Phải, chúng tô i là.
O
ĐẠ
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 2A
NG
I. PRESENTATION
HƯ
A. Hỏi và trả lời vể ñồ vật
ẦN
• Sô' ít: W h at is it? I t ’s a car.
Nó là cái gì? Nó là m ột xe hơi.
• Sô" nhiều:
TR
W h a t are they? They are forks.
B
C húng là những cái gì? Ghúng là những cái nĩa.
00
B. Mạo từ (Articles)
10
1. M ạo từ là tiế n g ñứng trước m ột danh từ như tiế n g C Á I, CON,

+3
C H IÊ C tro n g tiế n g V iệ t.
P2
2. Có h a i lo ạ i mạo từ:
CẤ
• M ạo từ b ấ t ñ ịn h A ñứng trước m ột phụ âm, mạo từ bâ't ñ ịnh

A N ñứng trước các nguyên âm a, 0, u, i, e.
A
• M ạo từ xác ñ ịn h T H E ñứng trước m ột danh từ ñã xác ñịnh.

HÓ
ðứng trước phụ âm, T H E ñọc là /da/, dứng trước nguyên âm ñọc
Í-
là /ỗ i/
-L
Ex: I t ’s a glass. The glass /Ỗ3/

I t ’s an orange. The orange /õ i/
ÁN
c. Cách dổi danh từ số ít sang số nhiều:

TO
1. Với da số danh từ sô' ít, k h i chuyển sang số nhiều ta chỉ việc thêm
NG
s vào sau danh từ ấy.

Ex: a book - books a c h a ir - chairs
ƯỠ
2. Nếu danh từ số í t tậ n cùng bằng s, SH, CH, z, s, X hay o , ta thêm

ID
ES k h i ñổi sang số nhiều.

BỒ
25

Ex: a glass - glasses a potato - potatoes

a w atch — watches
ƠN
But: a radio - radios
NH
3. Nếu danh từ số ít tậ n cùng bàng Y, trước nó là m ộ t phụ âm , k h i ñổi
sang sô nhiều ta ñổi y -» I rồ í thê m ES.
UY
Ex: a c ity - cities
4. Nếu danh từ số í t tậ n cùng bằng F hay F E , ta ñổi F hay FE thàn h
.Q
V rồ i thê m ES.
TP
Ex: a s h e lf - shelves a w ife - wives
O
5. D anh từ sô' nhiều b ấ t quy tắc:
ĐẠ
Ex: m an - men wom an — women
child. - c h ild re n
NG
D. Cách ñọc tận s của danh từ số nhiều
HƯ
Có 3 cách ñọc:
1. s -> /s/ sau p F K T
ẦN
Ex: a map - maps /s/ a fo rk — fo rk
rkss /s/
2. ES -> /iz / sau s , SH, CH, z, s, X TR
Ex: a watch - watches /iz Í a glass - glasses / iz /
B
00
3. s -> /zI sau các trường hợp khác.

10
Ex: a c h a ir - chairs /z/ a table - tables Iz l

+3
E. ðại từ chỉ thị (Demonstrative Pronouns)

P2
1. T h is is your book: ð ây là cuo'n sách của bạn.

CẤ
Is th is your book? ð ây có p h ả i là cuốn sách của bạn không?

A
- Yes, i t is.
HÓ
- No, i t is n ’t.
2. T h a t is your book: K ia là cuốn sách của bạn.
Í-
-L
Is th a t your book? K ia có p h ả i là cuô'n sách của bạn không?

ÁN
— Yes, i t is.
- No, it is n ’t.
TO
3. These are your books: ð ây là những cuốn sách của bạn.

NG
A re these your books? ð â y có p hả i là những cuốn sách của bạn

ƯỠ
không?
ID
- Yes, th e y are.
- No, the y aren’t.
BỒ
26

4. Those are your books: K ia là nhữ ng cuốn sách của b ạn.
ƠN
A re those your books? K ia có p h ả i là những cuốn sách của bạn
NH
không?
- Yes, the y are.
UY
- No, th e y aren’t.
Tính từ sở hữu (Possessive Adjectives)
.Q
F.
TP
I My của tô i
O
You Y our của anh
ĐẠ
He H is của a nh ấy
NG
She Her +• book(s) Cuốn sách của cô ấy
It Its của nó
HƯ
We O ur của chúng tô i
ẦN
You Your của cảc anh
They T h e ir TR của ho
ðại từ iàm chủ Tính từ sở hữu ñàng
B
00
ngữ, ñứng trước trưốc danh từ số ít hay

ñộng từ số nhiều
10
G. Hỏi về nghề nghiệp

+3
P2
• W h a t’s h is job? H e’s a m anager.

N ghề nghiệp của anh ấy là gì? A n h ấ y là m ộ t g iá m ñôc.
CẤ
• W h a t’s h e r job? She’s a secretary.

Nghề nghiệ p của cô ấy là gì? Cô ấy là m ộ t th ư ký .
A
HÓ
• W h a t’s your job? I ’m a student.

B ạn là m nghề gì? T ô i là m ộ t s in h viên.
Í-
• What are th e ir jobs? T h ey are teachers.

-L
Nghề nghiệp của họ là gì? H ọ là những giáo viên.

ÁN
H. Học thêm các số ñếm sau:

13. th irte e n 19. n ineteen
TO
14. fourteen 20. tw e n ty

NG
15. fifte e n 21. tw enty-one

16. sixteen 22. tw e n ty-tw o
ƯỠ
17. seventeen 23. tw e n ty -th re e

ID
18. eighteen 24. tw e n ty -fo u r

BỒ
27

*
**
20. tw e n ty 60. s ixty
ƠN
30. th ir t y 70. seventy
40. fo rty 80. e ig hty
NH
50. fif ty 90. n in e ty
100. one hundred
UY
.Q
TP
II. PRACTICE
A. Translate into English
O
ĐẠ
1. Nó là cái gì? Nó là m ộ t cái muỗng.
2. Chúng là những cái gì? Chúng là những cái nĩa.
NG
3. Nó là cái gì? Nó là m ộ t cây kem.
HƯ
4. Chúng là những cái gì? Chúng là những chìa khóa.
5. Nó là cái gì? Nó là m ộ t cái ñồng hồ ñeo tay.
ẦN
6. Chúng là những cái gì? Chúng là những quả cam.
TR
ð. ðổi các danh từ sau sang số nhiều và xác ñịnh cách ñọc tận s
của chúng nếu có.
B
00
book ch a ir bed w indow kn ife woman

10
cup egg house orange sh e lf ch ild

+3
student um bre lla bus watch foot

P2
fo rk tra in country lo rry too th

plate glass ashtra y key m an
CẤ
c. Dịch sang tiếng Anh

A
1. A nh ấy là m nghề gì? A n h ấy là 1 giá m ñốc.

HÓ
1 n hâ n v iê n h à n h lí.
Í-
1 dầu bếp.
-L
1 p h i công.
ÁN
1 thợ máy.
1 tà i xế tắc xi.
TO
2. Cô ấy là m nghề gì? Cô ấy là 1 tiế p viên.

NG
1 thư ký
ƯỠ
1 tiế p viê n hàn g kh ôn g

3. Bạn là m nghề gì? T ô i là 1 sin h viên.
ID
1 giáo viên.
BỒ
28

4. Nghề nghiệp của họ là gì? Họ là những bồi bàn.

người quét dọn.
công an.
ƠN
D. ðặt câu hoàn chỉnh theo mẫu sau:
NH
1. th is / key: Is th is your key? No, i t is n ’t
or Is th a t your key over there? Yes, i t is.
UY
2. th is / case.
.Q
3. th a t/ pen.
TP
4. th a t/ um brella.
O
5. these/ apples.
ĐẠ
6. these/ tables.
7. those/ oranges.
NG
8. those/ houses.
HƯ
ẦN
TR
1. PRESENTATION
B
00
A. Tính từ (Adjective)
10
ĩ. T ín h từ là tiế n g xác ñ ịn h thêm ñặc ñiểm của m ột tiế n g danh từ.

+3
2. T ín h từ tro n g tiế n g A nh có 2 v ị trí:

• ðứng sau ñộng từ TO BE
P2
Ex: She is cold.

CẤ
• ðứng trước danh từ

Ex: I t ’s a b is house.
A
HÓ
B. Học thêm số ñếm:

25. tw e n ty -five 30. t h ir t y 80. e ighty
Í-
26. tw e nty-six 40. fo rty 90. n in e ty

-L
27. twenty-seven 50. f ift y 100. one hundred

ÁN
28. tw e nty-eig h t 60. sixty

29. tw e nty-n ine 70. seventy
TO
c. Mầu câu với THERE IS / ARE

NG
1. M ẫu câu với there is / are có nghĩa là “có cái gì hay những cái gì
ƯỠ
ñó” m ộ t cách chung chung, không nói rõ ai hay cáí gì có. (Nó khác
với ñộng từ H A V E GOT ta sẽ học sau).
ID
Ex: There is a kitchen. (Có m ộ t nhà bếp)

BỒ
29

There are some glasses (Có m ộ t và i cái ly).

2. Sau ñây là các cách dùng của cấu trú c này:
ƠN
A ffirm a tiv e N egative In te rro g a tiv e
+ ?
NH
SỐ There is a book on There is n o t a Is there a book on
UY
ít the table. book on the table. the table?
.Q
Số There are some There are n ot any A re there any books
TP
nhiều books on the table. books on the table. on the table?
N otes: Cách trả lờ i câu h ỏi c ạng ngắn:
O
ĐẠ
• Is there a book on the table?
- Yes, there is.
NG
- No, there is n ’t.
• A re there any books on the table?
HƯ
- Yes, th e re are.
ẦN
- No, the re are not.
D. Câu hỏi với WHERE (ỏ ñâu)
1. Số ít:
TR
W here’s the chair? I t ’s in the liv in g room.
B
2. Sô" nhiều: W here are the glasses? T h ey’re on the shelf.
00
N o te s : Các n hó m từ cần nhớ:

10
a t the blackboard in the classroom

+3
a t the desk in the room

P2
a t the door in the box

a t the w indow in the bookcase
CẤ
A in the playground
A
on th e w a ll in the schoolgarden
HÓ
on the table in the bag

on the desk in the living -ro o m
Í-
on th e sh e lf
-L
*
ÁN
under the s in k
under the cupboard
TO
E. Hỏi và trả lời về giá cả.

NG
1. H ỏ i: H ow much + are + th e + danh từ số nhiều?

ƯỠ
' is + th is / th a t / the + danh từ sô' ít?

C ái n à y / cái ñó giá bao nhiêu.
ID
n.
BỒ
30

I t ’s
2. T rả ỉời: + money.
T h ey’re
Ex: pen / £1.40 : How much is the pen? I t ’s one pound fo rty.
ƠN
pens / £2.80 : How much are the pens? T h e y’re tw o pounds eighty.
NH
soup/ 30p : How much is the soup? I t ’s t h ir t y pence.
chips/ 45p : H ow much are the chips? T h e y’re fo rty -fiv e pence.
UY
F. Cáchñọc số tiền và sô diện thoại.
.Q
1. Số tiề n : 15p fifte e n pence.
TP
£1.38 one pound th ir t y eig ht.
O
£6.08 s ix pounds eight.
ĐẠ
2. Sô' ñiệ n th o ạ i: 90537 nice 0 five th re e seven.
72258 seven double tw o fiv e eight.
NG
G. Lời yêu cẩu lịch sự.
HƯ
L Cách n ói: Could you pass the sa lt, please?
ẦN
2. Cách trả lời: C e rta in ly .
II. PRACTICE TR
B
A. Luyện viết và luyện miệng những câu sau:
00
1. I ’m cold. 4. I t ’s big.
10
hot.. sm all.
+3
2. He’s ugly. old.

P2
old. new.
CẤ
ric h . cheap.
poor. expensive.
A
HÓ
fat. short.
th in . long.
Í-
strong. th ic k .
-L
weak. th in .
ÁN
3. She’s beautiful. 5. T h ey’re ta ll.

TO
young. short.
fu ll.
NG
em pty.
ƯỠ
B. Translate into English:

ID
1. C húng tô i th ì dói.
BỒ
2. N hữ ng ñứa trẻ th ì kh á t.
31

3. Bà B row n th ì nghèo.
4. Ô ng B lack th ì khỏe.
5. Họ th ì giàu.
ƠN
6. ð ây có p h ả i là cái ñài của bạn không? K hông, nó không p hả i. (Ô n
NH
u n it 2)
7. K ia có p hải là cái ñài của bạn không? P hải, nó là.
UY
8. Tên của cô ấy là gì? Côấy là Lan.
9. Họ là m nghề gì? Họ là thợ máy.
.Q
10. ð ây có p h ả i là những chìa khóa của bạn không? P hải, chúng là.
TP
c. Trả lời những câu hỏi sau theo hoàn cảnh của bạn:
O
ĐẠ
1. A re you ta ll? 6. Is your teacher tall?
2. A re you rich? 7. Is your m o ther old?
NG
3. A re you strong? 8. Is your fa th e r fat?
4. A re you heavy? 9. Is your teacher thin?
HƯ
5. A re you young? 10. Is your m other beautiful?
ẦN
D. ðặt câu theo mẫu, rồi chuyển sang phủ ñịnh và nghi vấn:
1. a sofa.
TR
There’s a sofa in the liv in g room.
There is n ’t a sofa in the liv in g room.
B
00
Is the re a sofa in the liv in g room?

2. a telephone
10
3. ch airs
+3
4. cupboards
P2
5. magazines
CẤ
E. ðặt câu hỏi vối WHERE rồi trả lời, dùng các cụm từ chỉ nơi
A
chốn.
HÓ
1. glasses 5. pens
Í-
2. cupboard 6. desk
-L
3. b ottles 7. lam ps
ÁN
4. sofa 8. tables
F. Dịch sang tiếng Anh ñoạn văn sau:
TO
N h à của tô i th ì rộng. Có m ộ t phòng khách và có 3 phòng ngủ.

NG
Trong phòng khách có m ộ t m áy thu than h, m ộ t tru yề n hình , và m ột

ghế salon. T ro ng nhà bếp có m ộ t tủ lạ n h , m ộ t n ồi cơm ñiệ n và m ộ t tủ
ƯỠ
chén dĩa. Trong phòng của tô i có cái bàn và có 4 cái ghế. T rê n bàn có
ID
m ộ t v à i cây v iế t mực, m ộ t ñ iện th o ạ i và m ột cái ñèn. Có m ộ t v à i cuốh

BỒ
32

sách trê n kệ. Căn phòng của tô i th ì ñẹp.

G. Translate into English:
ƠN
1. C ái ñó giá bao nhiêu? 19 xu.
2. Cuốn sách giá bao nhiêu? 60 xu.
NH
3. Những cái ñài giá bao nhiêu? 7 bảng 84 xu.
4. Những quả táo giá bao nhiêu? 50 xu.
UY
5. M ộ t l i w h is k y lớn giá bao nhiêu? 1 bảng 50 xu.
.Q
6. Có m ộ t trường học gần ñây không? Có.
TP
7. Có m ộ t cái chợ gần ñâykhông? Không có.
8. L àm ơn bán cho m ộ t l i bia. Thưa ông ñây.
O
9. L àm ơn chuyển giùm lọ ñường. Sẵn sàng.
ĐẠ
10. Số ñ iện th o ạ i của bạn là bao nhiêu? 10443.
NG
H. ðặt câu hỏi về gỉá cả cho các món hàng sau:
HƯ
1. fr u it 5. green salad
2. juice 8. roast chicken
ẦN
3. mushrooms 7. g rille d lam b chops
4. peas 8. teaTR
B
I. Viết cac số sau bằng chữ số rồi ñọc lại:
00
1. £1.51 6. £1.10 12. £4.80 18.27445

10
2. £7.84 7. £10.78 13. Ip , 2p 19.88179

+3
14. 13p 20. 42478

3. £11 17 8. £22.39
P2
15. 19p 21. 01-7729912

4. £3.92 9. £16.96 16. 40p 22. 051-7483319
CẤ
5. £1.47 10 . £12.65 17. 14p 23. 061-821285

11 . £8.23
A
HÓ
K. Hoàn tất bài dối thoại sau:

You : W aite r!
Í-
W a ite r : Yes, sir?

-L
You menu, please. (1)

ÁN
W a ite r : Here you are, sir.

You : ___. ỰA)
TO
W a ite r : Chicken soup?

You : ___ some lam b chops. (3)
NG
W a ite r : Yes, s ir, and w h ich vegetables would you like?

ƯỠ
You : ___ a salad, please. (4)

W a ite r : C e rta in ly, sir.
ID
BỒ
33

You : O h ,___wine, please. (5)

W aiter : W hich w ine would you lik e , sir?
ƠN
You : __ w ine, please. (6)
NH
UY
.Q
I. PRESENTATION
TP
A. Hỏi ñây / kia là ai?
O
1. H ỏi: Who is th is / that?
ĐẠ
2. T rả lời: I t ’s + name, s + be + job
Ex: • W ho’s this?
NG
I t ’s C aptain Adams. He’s an astronaut.
HƯ
• W ho’s that?
I t ’s M iss P rim . She’s a secretary.
ẦN
B. Hỏi vể màu sắc.
1. Số ít: W ha t colour is it? I t ’s red. TR
B
2. Sô' nhiều: W h at colour are they? T hey’re blue.
00
c. cấii trúc diễn tả màu sắc một hay nhiều vật.

10
1. Sô' ít: M y s h ir t is w hite.

+3
2. Sô' nhiều: T h e ir s h irts are blue.

P2
D. Sỏ hữu cách (The Possessive Case)

CẤ
1. Sở hữu cách ñược dùng ñể chỉ quyền sở hữu. Nó ñược th à n h lập

bằng cách th ê m ’s hay ’ sau danh t ừ có quyền sở h ữ u . .
A
HÓ
Cách 1: The + ñôi tượng sở hữu + o f + (the) + chủ hữu

Í-
The book of the teacher

-L
The houses of my parents

ÁN
The corner of the room

TO
The rooms of the b u ild in g

Cách 2: Chủ hữu + ’s ha.y ’ + ñối tượng sỏ hữu
NG
The teacher’s book (bỏ the)

ƯỠ
M y pare nts’ houses

The corner o f the room không ñổi sang
ID
The rooms o f the b u ildin g } cách 2 ñược

BỒ
3. Notes:
34

• Nếu danh từ chủ hữu ở số í t kh ôn g có s, ta thê m ’s:
ƠN
Ex: M y teacher’s book is yellow .
• Nếu danh từ chủ hữu sô' í t có s, ta vẫn th ê m ’s:
NH
Ex: H e r boss’s car is expensive.
UY
• Nếu danh từ chủ hữu số n hiề u không có s, ta cũng th ê m ’s:
Ex: The c h ild re n ’s shoes are nice.
.Q
• Nếu danh từ chủ hữu sô' n hiề u có s, ta chỉ thê m
TP
Èx: The boys’ books are on the table.
O
4. Cách dùng: Sở hữu cách ’s hay ’ chỉ áp dụng k h i danh từ chủ hữu là
ĐẠ
người hay v ậ t, kh ô n g áp dụng cho danh từ chủ hữu là sự vật. (Trong
trường hợp n ày ta dùng cách th à n h lập 1).
NG
Ex: K hô n g n ói: The room ’s corner.
M à nói: The corner o f the room.
HƯ
E. Câu hỏi với WHOSE (= của ai) chỉ sở hữu.
ẦN
1. Whose cigar is it? I t ’s M r O rson’s cigar.
TR
2. Whose trousers are they? T h ey’re R ichard’s trousers.
F. Cách dùng SOME và ANY.
B
00
1. M ộ t cách tổ n g quát, SOME ñược dùng tro n g câu k h ẳ n g ñ ịn h còn

10
A N Y dùng tro n g câu phủ ñ ịn h và n g h i vấn.

+3
2. SOME và A N Y có thế ñứng trước danh từ sô' ít kh ôn g ñếm ñược

P2
hoặc danh từ sô' nhiều ñếm ñược.

3. D anh từ ñếm ñược là danh từ mà ta có th ể ñ ặ t sô' ñếm 1, 2, 3 trước
CẤ
nó.
Ex: one apple te n glasses five books
A
HÓ
4. Danh từ kh ô n g ñếm ñược là danh từ mà ta kh ôn g th ể d ặ t số ñếm 1,

2, 3 trước nó.
Í-
Ex: eae m ilk tw o sugar fe tff o il s i* money

-L
G. Câu hỏi với HOW MUCH / MANY...?

ÁN
1. T ro n g U n it 3, ta ñã học c á c h 'ñ ặ t câu h ỏ i với H O W M U C H ñể chỉ

TO
giá cả. Nó có th ể dùng với danh từ sô ít không ñếm ñược hoặc danh
từ số nhiều ñếm dược.
NG
Ex: How much is th e sugar?

ƯỠ
(ðường giá bao nhiêu?)

How much are the apples?
ID
2. T ron g b ài này H O W M U C H ñược dùng với ý nghĩa khác hẳn; ñó là

BỒ
BAO N H IÊ U , ch ỉ số lượng. Nó ñược dùng trước danh từ số í t không

ñếm ñược mà th ô i.

Ex: How much b u tte r is there in the fridge?

(Có bao nhiêu bơ tro n g tủ lạnh?)
ƠN
3. Còn H O W M A N Y cũng có nghĩa là B AO N H IÊ U , chỉ số lượng. Nó
NH
chỉ ñược d ùn g trước danh từ sô nhiều ñếm ñược.
Ex: How m any ham burgers are there in the fridge?
UY
(Có bao nhiêu bánh t h ịt bò bằm tro n g tủ lạnh?)
.Q
II. PRACTICE
TP
O
ĐẠ
1. C ái vá y của cô ta màu ñen.
2. C ái áo bludông (jacket) của ông ta m àu nâu.
NG
3. C ái áo ñầm của chị m àu hồng.
4. Những áo sơ m i của chúng m àu vàng.
HƯ
5. Quần tâ y của tô i màu xám.
ẦN
6. Quần g in của cô ta màu xanh da trờ i.
7. ð ô i g ià y của bạn màu cam.
8. Áo chui cổ của anh ấy màu ñỏ. TR
9. A i ñây? ðó là bà M a rtin . Bà ta là n ộ i trợ .
B
00
10. A i kia? ðó là bác sĩ C la rk. (D r.C la rk). Cô ta là m ộ t bác sĩ.

10
11. A i kia? ðó là ông S m ith. Ông ta là m ộ t công an.

12. Cuốn sách màu gì? Nó m àu trắ ng .
+3
13. Những quần tâ y màu gì? Chúng m àu ñen

P2
14. C ái b ú t m àu gì? Nó màu cam.

CẤ
B. Hãy viết vể vật dụng của bạn và của thẩy giáo bạn.
A
Ex: Today m y s k ir t is green.

HÓ
m y blouse is yellow,
Í-
m y pullove r’s green,

-L
m y shoes are brown,

my handbag is green.
ÁN
Today his...
TO

NG
1. Nó là xe ñạp của ai? Nó là xe ñạp của Tom.

2. Nó là xe hơi của ai? Nó là xe hơi của ba tôi.
ƯỠ
3. Nó là mũ của ai? Nó là mũ của Peter.

ID
4. Chúng là những cái l i của ai? Chúng là của M ary.

5. Chúng là quần tâ y của ai? Chúng là của những ñứa trẻ .
BỒ
6. Chúng là g ià y của ai? Chúng là của ông chủ cô ấy.
36
7. Ông ta là ba của M ike.

8. Bà ta là m á của Sue.
ƠN
9. A n h ấy là anh của Sue.
NH
10. Cô ấy là chị g ái của M ike.
12. A n h ấy là con tra i của họ.
UY
12. Cô ấy là con gái của anh.
.Q
D. Viết lại những câu sau, dùng qui tắc sở hữu cách ’s vi ph n
TP
gạch dưới nếu có thể:
O
1. T h is is the h a t o f m y frie n d.
ĐẠ
2. T h a t is the room o f m y fathe r.
3. These are the books o f m y m other.
NG
4. Those are the bags o f the pupils.
HƯ
5. Those are the desks o f the pupils.
6. The room o f m y siste r is large.
ẦN
7. The notebooks o f the pupils are on the desk.
8. The name o f m y sis te r is Lan.
9. Hong is th e sis te r o f Quang. TR
B
10. Quang is the son o f m v teacher.
00
11. I t ’s the door o f the car.

10
12. It's the ta il o f the dog.

+3
13. I t ’s the corner o f the s tre e t.

P2
14. I t ’s the ro o f o f the house.

15. The w in dow o f the house is new.
CẤ
E. Xếp các danh từ sau thành 2 ioại danh fừ không ñếm ñược vè
A
ñếm ñược rồi ñặt câu vói THERE IS / ARE + SOME + DANH TỪ:
HÓ
apples, w a te r, rice, w ine, bananas, onions, cheese, tomatoes,

Í-
mushrooms, beer, meat, oil, ham burgers, peas, eggs, sugar, oranges,
-L
salt, m ilk , lemons.

F. ðặt câu phủ ñịnh THERE ISN’T / AREN’T + ANY + DANH TỪ vổi
ÁN
các từ sau:
TO
sugar, tomatoes, o il, eggs, onions, rice, ham burgers, wine.

NG
G. ðặt câu hỏi với IS/ARE THERE + ANY + DANH TỪ vói các từ
sau, rồi ỉrả lời một câu với YES, một câu với NO:
ƯỠ
milk, water, peas, grapes (nho), eggs, margarine (bơ thực vật), oil,
ID
lemons, cheese, ham burgers, rice.

BỒ
37
4 . Translate into English:
ƠN
1. Có bao nhiêu bơ? Có nhiều.
NH
2. Có bao nhiêu chuôi? Có nhiều.
3. Có bao nhiêu phó m át? Có nhiều.
UY
4. Có bao nhiêu táo tro n g hộp? Có 1.
.Q
5. Có bao nhiêu sữa? Có nhiều.
TP
8. Có bao nhiêu quả chanh tro n g tủ lạnh? Có 5.
O
ĐẠ
NG
HƯ
ỉ. PRESENTATION
ẦN
A. Cách diễn tả ñiểu mình muốn hay mời mọc một cách lịch sự:
1. Ta dùng dộng từ ñặc b iệ t W O U L D L IK E (v iế t tắ t ’D L IK E ) với ngôi
TR
thứ 1 số í t là I và ngôi th ứ h a i số í t hoặc số nhiều là ■'ĨOU ñể diễn
B
tả ñiều m ìn h m uôn hay người thứ h a i muôn m ộ t cách lịc h sự.
00
Ex: I’d like some chips, please.

10
W hich w ine w ould you like?

+3
I ’d lik e some in fo rm a tio n about tra in s , please.

P2
I ’d lik e a p a ir o f shoes, please.

2. M ời mọc lịc h sự:
CẤ
H ow about a biscuit? Yes, please. No, thanks.

A
How about d in n e r to n ig h t? I ’d love to.

HÓ
How about the square? A ll rig h t.

3. Câu mệnh lệnh (Imperative sentence)
Í-
-L
1. M ệ n h lệ n h kh ẳ n g ñ ịn h : ¥e u + verb
S it down, please.
ÁN
Stand up, please.

TO
2. M ệ n h lệ n h phủ ñ ịn h : Don’t + verb.

NG
Don’t s it down.
Don’t stand up.
ƯỠ
N o te : T rê n ñây là cách ra lệ n h cho ngôi thứ h ai ñang ñôi tho ạ i với

ID
m ình.
BỒ

c. ðại từ nhân xưng làm tân ngữ (Object Pronouns) (liên hệ với
Unit Two, phần F)
ƠN
I my me Ex: T ô i yêu anh
You your you A n h yêu tô i
NH
He his h im I love you
UY
She her h er You love me
It its it
.Q
We our us
TP
You your you
They th e ir them
O
ĐẠ
ðại từ nhân xưng Tính từ sở hữu ðại từ nhân xưng
làm chủ ngữ ñứng trước danh từ làm tân ngữ
NG
ñứng trước ñộng từ ñứng sau ñộng từ
HƯ
D. HỎI nhãn hiệu của một món hàng (ñồ)
• W h a t make is your car? ~|
ẦN
; „ y I t ’s a Datsun.
it? J
• W h a t make are your pens?
, „
1
I TR
They’re Parkers,
they? J
B
00
E. Cách ñọc số chì năm

10
1980: nineteen eighty.

+3
1959: nineteen fifty -n in e

P2
F. ðộng từ khiếm khuyết CAN (T h í Defective Verb CAN)

CẤ
1. CAN có nghĩa là “ có th ể ” . Nó là ñộng từ k h u y ế t v ì k h ô n g có ñủ cá(

th ì. Nó thường ñ i kè m với m ộ t ñộng từ khác.
A
2. Ba th ể của ñộng từ CAN:

HÓ
+ s + C AN + V ER B
Í-
-L
He can sew.
s + CANNOT
ÁN
+ VER B
TO
C A N ’T
He cannot (can’t) sew.
NG
? C AN + s + VERB ?
ƯỠ
Can he sew? — Yes, he can.

ID
he can’t.
BỒ
1
*y*

ĨỈ. PRACTICE
A. Dùng các từ gợi ý, viết các bài dối thoại theo mẫu:
ƠN
1. A: W ould you lik e a glass o f water?
NH
B: Yes, please.
A: How about an orange?
UY
B: No, thanks.
2. cup o f coffee / piece o f cake.
.Q
3. sandwich / glass o f beer.
TP
S. Dùng các ỉừ gợi ý, viết các bài ñối thoại hỏi vể kích thước
O
quần áo theo mẫu:
ĐẠ
1. A: I ’d lik e a p a ir o f shoes, please.
NG
B: W hat size are you?
A: Seven.
HƯ
2. a pair of socks
ẦN
3. a p a ir o f shorts
4. a p a ir o f trousers
TR
5. a p a ir o f tig h ts (quần n ịt, vớ d à i = p a n ty hose)
B
6. a p a ir o f gloves
00
7. a p a ir o f jeans
10
8. a pair of glasses (cặp kính mắt)

+3

P2
1. H ã y tắ t ñiện ñi.
CẤ
2. H ã y mặc áo bludông vào (jacket).

A
3. H ã y m ang cà v ạ t (tie).
HÓ
4. H ãy mở m áy th u th an h.
5. H ã y cởi giày ra.
Í-
6. H ã y m ang vớ vào. (socks)

-L
7. H ã y m ang ñồng hồ ñeo tay.

8. H ã y t ắ t tru y ề n hình.
ÁN
9. H ãy mở m icrô.
TO
10. H ã y cồi áo khoác ra.

11. H ãy n h ìn vào bảng.
NG
12. ðừng uống bia.

ƯỠ
13. ðừng ăn ñường, (eat)

14. ðừng uống rượu
ID
15. ðừng n ó i chuyện tro n g lớp. (ta lk )

BỒ
40

D1. Chuyển các danh từ gạch dưới thành ñại từ làm tân ngữ cho
phù hợp.
ƠN
1. Look a t J o h n .
NH
2. Look a t M a ry .
3. Look a t Nelson and H enry.
UY
4. Look a t M a ry and me.
5. Look a t M a ry and H enry.
.Q
6. Look a t h er siste r.
TP
7. Look a t M ax and his brother.
O
8. Look a t H e le n.
ĐẠ
9. Look a t m y teacher, M r Sơn.
10. Look a t his son.
NG
11. Look a t h er daughter.
HƯ
12. Look a t h is siste r.
13. Look a t h is a un t.
ẦN
14. Look a t m v uncle.
15. Look a t those bovs.
16. Look a t th e ir teacher. M iss L v .
TR
B
17. Look a t m v pa rents.
00
D2. Translate into English:

10
1. C ái T V của bạn hiệu gì? N ó hiệu Sony

+3
2. C hai nước hoa này hiệu gì? Nó hiệu Chanel.

P2
3. Chiếc m áy bay n à y hiệu gì? N ó hiệu Boeing.

CẤ
4. Cái ñồng hồ ñeo ta y k ia h iệu gì? Nó hiệu Sekonda.

5. C ái xe hơi của cô ấy hiệu gì? N ó h iệu Mercedes.
A
6. C ái m áy ả nh của họ hiệu gì? Nó hiệu Kodak.

HÓ
7. Xe hơi của John h iệu gì? Nó hiệu F ia t.

8. ðồng hồ deo tay của Anne hiệu gì? Nó hiệu Citizen.
Í-
-L
9. T V của họ hiệu gì? N ó hiệu P h ilip s.

10. Nó là rượu Ý.
ÁN
E. Viết ra chữ các năm sau:

TO
1. 1978 7. 1982
NG
9
iứi. 197-5 8. 1996
3, 1820
ƯỠ
9. 1662
4. 1983 10.1947
ID
5. 1931 11. 1913

BỒ
8. 1748 12.1585
41

F. Viết một ñoạn văn theo mẫu: (ôn lại phần l.c Unit 3)
ƠN
In my room, the re ’s a bed, a lam p, and a desk. There are three
NH
shelves, there are some books and there are two chairs.
In my b edro om ,___.
UY
In m y house,___.
.Q
In my k itc h e n ,___.
TP
O
1. Bạn có thể th ấ y căn nhà dó không? Có, tô i có thể.
ĐẠ
2. A nh ấy có thể chơi quần vợt.
3. C hị ây không th ể n ói tiế n g Pháp.
NG
ị. M ary có thể n ó i tiế n g N h ậ t.
5. Họ có thể lá i xe hơi không? Không, họ không thể.
HƯ
8. Tom có thể h á t nhữ ng b ài h á t tiế n g A nh.
7. Ba bạn có thể chơi g h i ta không? Có, ông ta có thể.
ẦN
8. Chúng tô i có th ể kh iê u vũ.
9. TR
Chồng của S ally có th ể nấu ăn không?
10. Bạn có thể nói bao nhiêu ngôn ngữ? Hai.
B
00
H. ðổi các câu sau sang phủ ñịnh, nghi vấn, rồi trả lời một câu
10
với YES, một Gâu với NO.

+3
I. I can telephone.
P2
2. She can pla y th e piano.

3. He can do his exercises.
CẤ
4. They can m eet a t school.

5. He can go to the cinema.
A
HÓ
6. She can speak French.

7. We can speak m any languages.
Í-
8. Sain can m eet you here.

-L
9. He can swim .
10. He can play th e v io lin .
ÁN
11. T hey can speak Spanish.

TO
12. She can do h e r exercises.

I. Translate into English:
NG
ðây là ông B row n. Ô ng ta là m ộ t ñại uy. ô n g ta to con, khỏe và

ƯỠ
ñẹp tra i. Ô ng ta có th ể chơi th ể thao, ô n g ta có thể chơi bóng ñá và

ID
quần vợt. N hà của ông ta th ì rộ ng và ñ ắ t tiề n . Xe hơi của ông ta hiệu

Cadillac. O ng ta r ấ t giàu và n ổ i tiếng.
BỒ
Và dây là ông W h ite . Ô ng ta là m ộ t giáo viên. Ô ng ta không to
42

con, kh ôn g khỏe nhưng r ấ t th ô n g m in h . Ô ng ta có th ể n ó i 2 tnứ tiế n g

Ông ta có thể nói tiếng Anh và tiếng Pháp. Nhà của ông ta thì nhỏ vồ
rẻ tiề n . Xe hơi của ông ta là m ộ t chiếc M in i. Ô ng ta nghèo nhưng nổi
ƠN
tiến g.
NH
UY
.Q
I. PRESENTATION
TP
A. ðộng từ kép cổ tân ngữ là danh từ hay ñại từ.
O
ĐẠ
P ut on yo ur blouse. P ut i t on.
yo ur tie .
NG
your socks. P ut th e m on.
your w atch.
HƯ
Take o ff your shoes. Take them off.
ẦN
your ja cke t. Take i t off.
T u rn on the lig h ts . T u rn them on.
th e microphone. T u rn i t on. TR
T u rn o ff the lig h ts . T u rn th em off.
B
00
th e television. T u rn i t off.
10
T ry on these trousers. T ry th e m on.

th is pullover. T ry i t on.
+3
B. TO HAVE GOT
P2
1. To have got là ngữ pháp A n h , ngữ pháp M ỹ kh ô n g th ê m GOT.

CẤ
2. To have got cũng có nghĩa là “ có” như T H E R E IS / A R E (xem lạ

A
U n it 3) nhưng cách dùng kh ác nhau.

HÓ
3. D ùng T H E R E IS / A R E k h i kh ô n g n ó i rõ a i h a y v ậ t gì có, nghĩa lồ

n ó i “có” m ộ t cách chung chung. D ù ng H A V E GO T k h i có người, vậ1
Í-
là m chủ ngữ rõ ràng.

-L
Ex: There are s ix people in m y fa m ily .

I ’ve got three sisters and one b ro th e r.
ÁN
4. Bảng chia ñộng từ TO H A V E GOT Ở 3 thể :

TO
+ I / we/ you/ th e y have got m any books.

H e/ she/ i t has got m any books.
NG
- y we/ you/ the y haven’t got m any books.

ƯỠ
He/ she/ i t hasn’t got m an y books.

? Have V w e/ you/ th e y got m a n y books?
ID
'la s he/ she/ i t got m a ny books?

BỒ
43

+ Yes, I have. - No, he hasn’t.

5. V iế t tắ t: I ’ve got...
H e’s got...
ƠN
c. HOW MUCH/ MANY với dộng từ HAVE GOT.
NH
Ta ñã học cách dùng H ow m uch/ m an y ñể h ỏ i sô' lượng với cấu trú c
THERE i s / ARE.
UY
Tro ng b ài n à y ta dùng H ow m uch/ m a n y ñể h ỏ i số lượng với ñộng từ
.Q
H A V E GOT.
TP
Cần lưu ý thê m :
- K h i How much/ m any d i m ộ t m ìn h , chúng dược dùng như ñ ại từ và
O
kh ôn g có danh từ theo sau (danhtừ n à y ñược h iể u ngầm).
ĐẠ
Ex: H ow m uch/ m any have you got?
NG
- Khi dứng trước danh từ ñếm ñược hoặc không ñếm ñược, chúng ñược
dùng như m ộ t tín h từ.
HƯ
Ex: H ow much w a te r have you got?
H o w m any b ottles o f w in e have you got?
ẦN
Nhớ: How much + uncountable noun
How m any + countable noun. TR
D. Số ñếm hàng trăm.
B
00
100: one hundred

10
200: tw o hundred
300: three hundred
+3
154: one hundred and fifty -fo u r.

P2
768: seven hundred and s ix ty-e ig h t.

CẤ
E. ðại từ SỞ hữu (Possessive Pronouns) (xem thêm unit 5 I.C)

A
I me my m ine
HÓ
You you yo ur yours

Í-
He h im h is his
-L
She her her hers

ÁN
It it its X
TO
We us our ours
NG
You you your yours

They them th e ir th e irs
ƯỠ
ð ạ i từ sở hữu là từ ñược dùng ñể th a y m ộ t tiế n g tín h từ sở hữu và m ộ t

ID
danh từ ñã b iế t dể trá n h lậ p lạ i.
BỒ
44

Ex: I t ’s th e ir house. I t ’s th e irs .

I t ’s h er h a t. I t ’s h ers.
I t ’s M a ry ’s car. I t ’s M a ry ’s, (sở hữu cách ẩn thể)
ƠN
F. ðại từ chỉ thị: ONE, ONES
NH
ð ạ i từ chỉ t h ị ONE, ONES ñược dùng ñể trá n h lặ p lạ i m ộ t danh từ ñã
n ó i ñến.
UY
ONE (cái, người) th a y ñanh từ số ít.
ONES (cái, người) th a y danh từ sô' nhiều.
.Q
Ex: T h is class is large. T h a t one is sm all.
TP
W hich buttons would you like? I ’d lik e the round ones.
O
W h ich ones would you like?
ĐẠ
II. PRACTICE
NG
HƯ
1. ð ây là m ộ t áo dầm mới. T ô i có th ể thử nó không?
2. ð ây là ñôi giày ñẹp. T ô i có th ể thử chúng không?
ẦN
3. ð â y là m ộ t áo mưa lớn. T ô i có th ể mặc nó không?
TR
4. Bây giờ là 9 giờ 5. Làm ơn cởi áo khoác của anh ra.
5. H ã y t ắ t tru y ề n hình.
B
6. H ã y cởi áo sơ m i của anh ra v ì trờ i nóng.
00
7. T ô i muốn mua m ộ t ñôi vớ. (ôn lạ i U n it 5: I ’d lik e )

10
8. Cô ấy muốn mua m ộ t cặp m ắ t kính.

+3
9. Bạn th íc h dùng m ộ t l i nước cam không?

P2
10. B ây giờ ỉà 10 giờ.

CẤ
11. T ô i muôn b iế t m ộ t ít th ô n g t in về tiế n g A nh.

12. Ba của bạn th íc h màu gì?
A
HÓ
13. K ích thước của bạn bao nhiêu?

14. T ố i nay ñ i xem p h im nhé?
Í-
-L
B. Write questions and answers:

1. sister. Have you got a sister? Yes, I have.
ÁN
2. b ro th e r
TO
3. radio
4. a lo t o f money
NG
5. cassette player
ƯỠ
6. watch
ID
7. cam era
BỒ
45

c. ðổi những câu sausang phủ ñịnh và nghi vấn

1. They have got a big room.
ƠN
2. We have got red pencils.
NH
3. You have got an E n g lish book.
4. I have got a blue pencil.
UY
5. He has got a th ic k book.
6. She has got a long ru le r.
.Q
TP
D. Trả lời các câu hỏi sau, dùng ỷ trong ngoặc:
1. W ho has got an E n g lish book? (Lan)
O
ĐẠ
2. W h a t has he got in h is bookcase? (m any E ng lish books)
3. W h a t has she got in h e r box? (a blue pencil)
NG
4. How m any b ro th e rs have you got? (three)
5. How m any desks have we got in our classroom? (tw elve)
HƯ
E. ðặt câu hỏi với HOW MUCH/ MANY + ñộngtừ HAVE GOT cho
ẦN
phù hợp, dùng các từ gợi ý:
1. w h isky 7. tea
2. bottles o f w h is k y
TR
8. packets o f tea
B
3. p e tro l 9. coffee
00
4. litre s o f p e tro l 10. ja rs o f coffee

10
5. tobacco 1 L perfume
+3
6. grammes o f tobacco 12' bo ttles o f Perfume

P2
F. ðổi sang phủ ñịnh và nghi vân:

CẤ
1. T h a t is a red pencil.
A
2. These are th ic k books.

HÓ
3. The w a lls are yellow .

4. The pictures are on th e w a ll.
Í-
5. He has got a red scarf.

-L
6. H e r fa th e r is an engineer.
ÁN
7. There is a blackboard in fro n t o f the pupils.

8. There are four chairs in the corner of the room.
TO
G. Dùng WHO, WHAT, HOW MANY ñặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch
NG
dưới trong những câu sau:

L. Tom has got a sm all bag.
ƯỠ
2. M a ry has got a th ic k notebook.

ID
Ỉ. We have got m any desks in our room.

BỒ
16

4. You have got an in k p o t on your desk.
ƠN
5. P eter has got tw o b ro the rs and tw o sisters.
6. She has got three sons.-
NH
H. ðặt câu hỏi cho những câu sau ñây ỏ tấtcả các dạng nếu
UY
có thể.
I. T h is is th e bed o f m y b ro th e r.
.Q
2. The name o f m y frie n d is Nam .
TP
3. H is b ro th e r is an engineer.
O
4. Th ere is a garden in fro n t o f th e house.
ĐẠ
5. The teacher is a t the desk.
6. M y fa th e r has got a radio.
NG
7. She is t h ir t y years old.
8. There are tw e lve m onths in a year.
HƯ
I. Viết lại các câu sau dùng ñại từ sờ hữu hoặc sở hữucách
ẦN
ẩn thể:
1. I t ’s m y pen. I t ’s m ine.
2. T h ey’re o ur books. T h ey’re ours.
TR
B
3. I t ’s his car.
00
4. It’s their house.

10
5. It's J o h n ’s coat.
+3
6. I t ’s h e r hat.
7. I t ’s your fla t.
P2
8. I t ’s M a ry ’s bag.
CẤ
J. ðặt câu hỏi và trả lời theo mẫu, dùng ONE hay ONES:
A
1. record. W h ich record would you like ? I ’d lik e th e classical one.

HÓ
2. car fast
3. ice cream chocolate
Í-
-L
4. te le v is io n big
5. tie p la in
ÁN
6. flo w ers. W h ich flow ers would you like ? I ’d lik e the expensive ones.
TO
7. shoes Ita lia n

8. cassettes expensive
NG
9. envelopes large
ƯỠ
10. buttons square

ID
BỒ
47

K. ðặt câu hỏi và trả lời ỉheo mẫu, dùng ONE + ñại từ sở hữu:
1. W hich house is theirs? The ~ b ig one’s th e irs
ƠN
house his? sm a ll
2. car ? expensive
NH
car? cheap
UY
3. record? classical
record? pop music
.Q
4. television colour
TP
television black & w h ite
O
5. clock b ig
ĐẠ
clock sm a ll
IL. Viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh theo mẫu, dùng các từ gợi ý:
NG
1. I / car ì old / new. ĩ ’ve got an old car, b ut I ’d lik e a new one.
HƯ
2. They / house / sm a ll / big.
3. We / tele vision / b lack and w h ite / colour.
ẦN
4. He / su it / blue / grey.
5. She / watch / E n g lis h / Swiss. TR
6. You / pen / cheap / expensive.
B
00
M. ðặt câu hải và trả Idỉtheo mẫu,dùng từ gỢỈ ý:

10
1. He / sm all / ones. W hich oneswould he like ? H e’d lik e the sm all

ones.
+3
2. They / E ng lish / one.

P2
3. She / new / one.

CẤ
4. You / green / one.

5. They / cheap / ones.
A
HÓ
Í-
-L
I. PRESENTATION ự
ÁN
A. ðộng từ có hai tân ngữ (Verbs with two objects)

TO
1. M ộ t số dộng từ tro n g tiếng A n h như TO SHO W (chỉ cho xem), TO

G IV E (cho)," t o B R IN G (m ang ñến) TO SEND (gởi), TO T A K E (lấy,
NG
mang), TO G ET (lấy, mang), TO W R IT E (v iế t), TO B U Y (mua), TO

ƯỠ
T E L L (kể), TO T E A C H (dạy), TO A S K (hỏi)... có th ể tiế p n hậ n m ộ t

lúc 2 tân ngữ. Tân ngữ chỉ người gọị là tân ngữ gián tiếp (indirect
ID
object) và tân ngữ chỉ vật là tân ngữ trực tiếp (direct object).
BỒ
48

2. Các ñộng từ này ñược dùng tro n g h a i cấu trú c sau:
s V 1 .0 D.o
ƠN
Can you show me some cameras?
NH
Could you b rin g us some more tea?
M a ry a postcard.
UY
Send
W rite h im a le tte r.
.Q
TP
s V D.o Prep D .o
O
ĐẠ
Can you show some cameras to me
Could you b rin g some more tea to us?
NG
Send a postcard to M ary.
HƯ
Get the book for me.
Buy the book fo r me.
ẦN
3. K h i D.o & ĩ.o ỉà pronouns, ta phải dùng cấu trú c 2:
TR
s V D.O PREP. IO
B
it
00
Can you show to me?

10
You can send it to me a t the office.

+3
B rin g them to her.

P2
B. C u trúc c â u có trạng từ chỉ nơi chốn:

CẤ
s V o A d v e r b o f p la c e
A
Can you take me to th e airport?

HÓ
Our parents take us to the zoo every Sunday.

The bus takes the ch ild re n to school.
Í-
-L
They m et us a t th e square.
I see her a t school every day.
ÁN
c. Học thêm số ñếm:

TO
1,000: one thousand.

NG
2,000: tw o thousand.
3,000: three thousand.
ƯỠ
D. Câ'u trúc mô tả tính chất:

ID
1. M uốn h ỏ i về tín h ch ất của người, sự v ậ t, hay h iệ n tượng tro n g tiế n g

BỒ
49

A nh, ta dùng cấu trú c sau:
ƠN
W H A T + BE + S UBJEC T + L IK E ?
NH
(Người, cái gì ñó như th ế nào?)
N o te : L IK E tro ng câu hỏi này là giới từ, không p hả i ñộng từ. Nó có
UY
nghĩa là “ như” , chứ k h ông p hả i “ th ích ” . ______
2. Chú ý cách trả lời: s + BE + A D JE C T IV E
.Q
3. V í dụ: W h a t’s P aris like? I t ’s exciting.
TP
W hat are the people like? T hey’re frie n d ly.
O
ĐẠ
II. PRACTICE
A. ðặt câu theo mẫu, ñổi các danh từ ra ñại từ tân ngữ sau các
NG
ñộng từ có hai tân ngữ:
HƯ
í. I t ’s my pen. B rin g it"to me. 5. I t ’s his briefcase.
2. They’re our pens. 6. I t ’s m y record.
ẦN
3. I t ’s his hat. 7. They’re our cases.
4. They’re th e ir magazines. TR
8. T hey’re th e ir books.
B. Chuyển các câu sau sang câu trúc khác tương ñương.
B
00
1. Send me a postcard. 5. Take h im the book.

10
2. B rin g us the b ill. 6. Get me the coffee.

+3
3. Show h er the pen! 7. Give me the radio.

4. Take them the tea. 8. W rite us some letters.
P2
c. ðặt câu có ñộng từ hai tân ngữ ñều là ñại từ theo cách 2:
CẤ
s + V + D.o + PREP + IO:

A
1. I t ’s a nice camera! Can you show i t to me, please?

HÓ
T hey’re nice watches! Can you show them to me, please?

Í-
2. I t ’s a nice radio!
-L
3. T hey’re nice pens!

4. T hey’re nice clocks!
ÁN
5. I t ’s a nice watch!
TO
6. I t ’s a nice cassette recorder!

7. T hey're nice glasses!
NG
D. Viết ra chữ các số sau:

ƯỠ
1. 4,000 7. 10,000
ID
2. 5,000 8. 15,000
3. 6,000
BỒ
9. 20,000
4. 7,000 10. 21,000
50
5. 8,000 11. 49,000

6. 9,000 12. 92,000
ƠN
E. Complete this conversation:
NH
A: ___some radios, please? (1)
B: C e rta in ly, s ir. T h is one’s very nice.
UY
A: Y e s ,___. (2)
B: £110, sir.
.Q
A: Oh, d e a r !___. (3)
TP
B: Oh, I see. T h a t one over the re is n ’t expensive.
O
A: ___m a k e ___ ? (4)
ĐẠ
B: I t ’s a Sony. I t ’s £70.
A: A h, y e s .___please? (5)
NG
F. ðặt câu hỏi mô tả tính chất người, sự vật và trả lời, dùng các
HƯ
từgợỉý:
1. the weather / rainy. 4. restaurants / expensive
ẦN
2. the teachers / good 5. he / bad
3. the food / delicious.
TR
B
G. Dịch lá thư sau sang tiếng Việt:
00
10
Dear Carlo,
M y nam e’s Ja n e t Cooper. I ’m eighteen. I ’m single. I ’m a secretary.
+3
I ’m fro m B rig h to n . I t ’s in E ngland. T he re’s a beach and there are a lo t

P2
o f cinemas and discos. Please w rite to me in Ita lia n !

CẤ
B est wishes
Janet
A
HÓ
H. Dịch lá thư sau sang tiếng Anh:

Thưa ba má,
Í-
ð ây là bức ản h th à n h phô' O xford. T hờ i t iế t th ì lạ n h. Trường học

-L
của con r ấ t lớn. Con học lớp K 18. Có n hiề u người V iệ t tro n g lớp của
ÁN
con. T ên th ầ y giáo của con là D a vid. T iế n g A n h th ì thú v ị. T h à n h phố

th ì nhộn n h ịp . Có nhiều rạ p h á t và các thứ ở dây th ì d ắ t ñỏ. Thức ăn
TO
th ì ngon và người A n h th ì r ấ t dè dặt. H ẹ n gặp lạ i ba má tro n g 6 tuần

NG
nữa. Cho con gởi những lờ i cầu chúc tố t dẹp n hấ t.

Con gái của ba má
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
51

ƠN
I. PRESENTATION
NH
A. THE PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE (Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)
1. C á c h t h à n h lậ p : T h ì h iệ n tạ i tiế p diễn của m ộ t ñộng từ ñược
UY
th à n h lập bằng cách lấ y th ì hiện tạ i của ñộng từ TO B E cộng với
.Q
ñộng từ dó sau k h i thèm IN G .__________________
s ^
TP
h iê n ta i BE + V -in g 1
I am w o rking.
O
We, You, They are w o rkin g .
ĐẠ
He, She, I t is w o rkin g .
NG
I am not w orking.
HƯ
We, You, They aren’t w orkin g.
He, She, I t is n ’t w orkin g.
ẦN
TR
A m I w orking? Yes, you are. No, you aren’t.
A re (we, you) th e y w orking? Yes, the y are. No, the y aren’t.
B
Is he (she, it) w orking? Yes, he is. No, he is n ’t.
00
N o te : ðộng từ + IN G ñược gọi là h iệ n tạ i phận từ (present p articiple).

10
2. C á c h d ù n g : T h ì h iệ n tạ i tiế p d iễ n ñược dùng ñể d iễn tả:

+3
a/ Một hành ñộng ñang xảy ra lúc ta nói. Thường có các phó từ
P2
(adverbs) Now, R ig h t now, A t present, A t the m om ent ñ i kèm .

Ex: Jack is p la ying foo tball now ,
CẤ
b/ M ộ t hành ñộng tương la i gần có phó từ chỉ th ờ i gian tương la i như

To m orrow , N e xt week, N e xt m onth d i kèm .
A
HÓ
Ex: I 'm buying a new h a t tom orrow.

(Ngày m ai tô i sẽ mua m ộ t cái nón m ới)
Í-
W h a t are you doing th is weekend?

-L
I ’m going away.
W here are you going tom orrow?
ÁN
I ’m going to London.
TO
3. C á c h th ê m IN G v à o ñ ộ n g từ :
a/ Với da số ñộng từ, ta thê m IN G vào sau:
NG
to le a rn - lea rning ,
ƯỠ
to w o rk - w o rk in g
b/ Nếu ñộng từ tậ n cùng bằng E, ta bỏ E trước k h i th ê m IN G :
ID
to smoke - sm oking
BỒ
52

to w rite - w ritin g
but to queue - queueing-
c/ Nếu ñộng từ tậ n cùng bằng IE , ta ñổi IE thà n h y trước k h i thêm
ƠN
IN G :
to die - dying
NH
to lie - ly in g
d/ Nếu dộng từ tậ n cùng bằng m ộ t phụ âm, trước nó là m ộ t nguyên
UY
âm, ta gấp ñôi phụ âm dó lên trước k h i thê m IN G :
.Q
to ru n - ru n nin g
TP
to s it - s ittin g
e/ Nếu ñộng từ có 2 âm tiế t trở lên, tậ n cùng bằng m ột phụ âm, trước
O
ĐẠ
nó là m ộ t nguyên âm, và trọ n g âm ở âm t iế t thứ 2, ta cũng gấp ñôi
phụ âm ñó lê n trước k h i thê m IN G :
NG
to begin - beginning
to a d m it - a d m ittin g
HƯ
but to suffer - suffering
ĨI Nếu ñộng từ tận cùng bằng các phụ âm H, w , X, Y, trước nó là một
ẦN
nguyên âm, ta không gấp ñôi phụ âm:
to fix - fix in g TR
to a llo w - allo w ing
B
00
to enjoy - enjoying
10
to p olish - polishing
+3
B. W h- questions with Present Continuous

P2
1. H e’s re ading a book -» W hat is he reading?

CẤ
WHAT
2. She’s phoning h er boyfriend -> W ho is she phoning?
A
W H O (M )
HÓ
3. T o t i v is p la yin g football —> W ho is p la ying football?

WHO
Í-
-L
II. PRACTICE
ÁN

1. Chúng tô i ñang ñọc m ột cuốn sách tiế n g A nh.
TO
2. A n h ấy ñang tập thể dục buổi sáng.

NG
3. H ọ dang n h ìn (xem) những bức tra n h .

4. La n không ñang v iế t trê n bảng.
ƯỠ
5. N am có dang ngồi ở bàn học của cậu ta khcng?

ID
6. Những ñứa trẻ không ñang ñ i học.

BỒ
53

7. Các học sin h ñang chơi tro n g sân chơi.

8. T h ầy giáo ñang giảng bài.
ƠN
. B. Trả lời các câu hỏi sau, một câu vói YES, một câu với NO:
1. A re you going to school?
NH
2. A re you le a rn in g your lesson?
UY
3. Is he s ittin g at his desk?
4. Is she cleaning h er teeth?
.Q
5. A re the y p la ying in the playground?
TP
6. Is the teacher e xpla in in g the lesson?
7. Is Lan w ritin g on th e blackboard?
O
ĐẠ
8. A re the c h ild re n going to school?
c. Dựa vào bài ñối thoại mẫu, viết thành những bài ñối thoại
NG
mới, dùng thì hiện tại tiếp diễn với nghĩa tương lai và sử dụng
HƯ
các thông tin sau:
1. You / th is weekend / London / a week.
ẦN
- W hat are you doing th is weekend?
- I ’m going away. TR
- W here are you going?
B
- I ’m going to London.
00
- How long for?

10
- For a week.
+3
2. D iana / tom orrow / P aris / 3 days.

P2
3. Rob / on Sunday / Copenhagen / 5 days.

4. Sandra and M a rk / n ext F rid a y / A m sterdam / fo r the weekend.
CẤ
D. Translate into Vietnamese:

A
HÓ
1. M y boy frie n d ’s stu d yin g fo r h is fin a l exams th is term .

2. M y sister is w o rk in g a t home th is week.
Í-
3. I am le a rning to d rive th is year.

-L
4. O ur n ext door neighbour is m oving house th is year.

5. Our teacher is m a k in g us w o rk h a rd th is week.
ÁN
6. Several of my colleagues are taking exams this term.

TO
E. ðặt câu theo mẫu dùng từ gợi ý:

NG
1. She’s reading. 3. ___

W h a t’s she reading? ___ .
ƯỠ
She’s re ading a magazine. ___a le tte r.

ID
BỒ
54

2. 4.
ƠN
___w ine. ___fish.
NH
F. ðặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch dưói, dùng WHO và WHAT:
UY
1. K ate’s pho nin g h e r b o yfrie n d .
.Q
2. The c h ild re n are w a tchin g T V .
TP
3. The teacher is m eeting h is students.
4. L an is h e lp in g h e r m o th e r.
O
G. Trả lời các câu hỏi sau dùng ý trong ngoặc ñòn:
ĐẠ
1. W ho is stan d in g a t the blackboard? (Lan)
NG
2. Who are the children listening to? (the teacher)
3. W ho are the y lo o k in g at? (N am )
HƯ
4. W h a t is she p u ttin g on h e r desk? (h er books)
ẦN
5. W h a t is he w r itin g on the blackboard? (E n g lish words)
6. W h a t are they doing in the playground? (to play).
7. W here are you going? (to the school garden) TR
8. W here are th e c h ild re n playing? (in th e playground)
B
00
9. W here is he sittin g ? (on his chair)

10
10. W ho is e xp la in in g the lesson? (the teacher)

+3
P2
CẤ
I. PRESENTATION
A
HÓ
A. Một Sô' kiểu nói lịch sự

1. W ould you lik e to come to a party?
Í-
- W e ll, I ’d lik e to... b u t w hen is it?

-L
- W h a t a p ity ! I ’m busy.
ÁN
2. Is i t O K i f I s it here?
- Yes, o f course.
TO
- No, I ’m a fra id you can’t

NG
3. M ay I b orro w i t fo r a m inu te, please?

- Yes, ce rtain ly.
ƯỠ
- S orry, I ’m re a din g it.

ID
4. Can I help you?

- Yes, o f course.
BỒ
- No, thanks.
55

5. M ay I see it?
- O f course, here you are.
ƠN
- No, I ’m a fra id you can’t.
NH
B. Cách dùng TOO và EITHER
Cả TOO và E IT H E R ñều có nghĩa lầ “cũng” . Tuy n h iê n , TOO ñược
UY
dùng tro n g câu k h ẳ n g ñ ịn h , còn E IT H E R ñược dùng tro n g câu phủ
.Q
ñịnh.
TP
She’s hot. I ’m hot, too.
They aren’t singing. We aren’t singing, e ith e r.
O
ĐẠ
c. Thứ tự các tính từ giúp nghĩa cho một danh từ.
1. K h i có nhiều tín h từ cùng giúp nghĩa cho m ộ t danh từ th ì danh từ
NG
n ày ñứng cuối cùng và các tín h từ dứng trước theo th ứ t ư sau:
HƯ
OP- S H - A - c - o - M NOUN
(O p inion) (Shape) (Age) (Colour) (O rig in ) (M a te ria l)
ẦN
Cần lưu ý thêm :
TR
Các mạo từ (articles), tín h từ sở hữu (possessives), chỉ t h ị tín h từ
(dem onstratives), tín h từ b ấ t ñ ịn h (in d e fin ite adjectives) như
B
SOME, A N Y , SEVERAL, M U C H , M A N Y ñ i trước.
00
Số thứ tự (o rd in a l num ber) d i trước sô" ñếm (ca rd in al num ber).

10
V E R Y ñ i trước tín h từ.

+3
T ín h từ mô tả (descriptive adjectives) d i trước tín h từ c h ỉ màu sắc.

P2
T ín h từ chỉ quốc tịc h (n a tio n a lity ) hay nguồn gốc ñứng trước danh
từ trừ k h i có m ộ t danh từ khác ñược dùng như tín h từ. D anh từ này
CẤ
ñứng trước danh từ tru n g t âm cuối cùng.

A
3. Ex: I t ’s an orange cotton s h irt

HÓ
c M
I t ’s a long bla ck n y lo n s k irt
Í-
SH c M
-L
There are m any good A m e rica n ra d io program s

indef. descriptive origin N as adj
ÁN
adị adị (nationality}

O ur fir s t six re a din g lessons are n o t easy,
TO
possessive ord. cardinal N as

number number adj
NG
D. Giới từ (Prepositions)
ƯỠ
1. G iới từ là từ ñứng trước m ộ t danh từ hay d ạ i từ ñể chị sự liê n quan

ID
giữa từ n ày với từ kh ác tro n g câu.

2. V í dụ: He’s w a itin g fo r h is frie n d.
BỒ
>6

A m an is going in to th e cinem a.
A m an is s ittin g b eh ind her.
3. Sau ñây là những giới Cừ c h ỉ nơi chôn thô n g dụng:
ƠN
•
e
ửl
NH
• lL i lL i t k IÍI
on under in into out of up down along
UY
.Q
]• I »
“7'J
TP
< □ 'Ồ ' ^
across round inside outside between in front of behind
O
ĐẠ
E. Câu trả lời vổi BECAUSE
1. B EC AU SE có nghĩa là “v ì, bởi v ì” . Nó ñược dùng ñể trả lờ i cho câu
NG
h ỏ i v ố i W H Y (tạ i sao), nêu lê n lí do của m ộ t vấ n ñề nào ñó.
HƯ
2. E x: • W hy is he closin g th e door?
He is closing the door because he’s cold.
ẦN
• W hy can’t she buy it?
TR
She can’t buy i t because it ’s ve ry expensive.
B
II. PRACTICE
00
A. Viết các bài hội thoại ngắn theo mẫu, dùng t gi ý:
10
1. F o o tb a ll m atch / S aturday 3.00 p.m .

+3
A : W ould you lik e to come to a fo o tb a ll m atch?

P2
B: W hen is it?
CẤ
A : On S aturday afternoon.
2. Dance / Tuesday 8:00 p.m .
A
3. Pop concert / F rid a y 8:30 p.m .

HÓ
4. P icn ic / Sunday 2 p.m - 5 p.m .

5. P a rty / T hursday 7:30 p.m .
Í-
6. Barbecue / M onday 7 p.m .

-L
B. Viết lời ñáp thích hợp cho các câu nói lịch sự sau:
ÁN
1. M ay I come ìn?
TO
2. Come here (A says to B)

3. Please s it down.
NG
4. H and in your paper, please.

5. Close th e door, please.
ƯỠ
6. Go now.
ID
7. Don’t smoke in here

BỒ
57

8. M ay I have some coffee?

ƠN
1. A n h ta có m ộ t th ắ t lưng bằng da màu nâu.
NH
2. ðó là m ộ t cái cà v ạ t m àu nâu nhạt..
3. Cô ta ñ i g ià y da màu trắ n g .
UY
4. Nó là m ộ t cái váy ñen dài.
.Q
5. A n h ta mặc m ột áo th u n m àu xám .
TP
6. ð ây là m ộ t cái váy n i lô n g màu ñen d ài.
7. Em tra i tô i có th ể ñ i xe ñạp.
O
8. A nh ấy ñang ñ i xe ñạp. Cô ấy cũng ñang ñ i xe ñạp.
ĐẠ
9. Chúng tô i không th ể n ó i 10 ngôn ngữ. Họ cũng kh ô n g th ể n ó i 10
NG
thứ tiế n g .
10. Ba cô ấy không p h ả i là giáo viên . M á cô ây cũng kh ô n g p h ả i là
HƯ
giáo viên.
D. Rewrite the following in the correct order:
ẦN
1. she got dress te ryle n e p in k s k irt has a.
2. are le a th e r b row n shoes b ig th e y.TR
B
3. w e arin g is she w oollen blue p u llo ve r lo ng a.
00
4. young a student A m erican is he.

10
5. firs t, names d au g hte r’s h e r tw o are C arol Green.

6. I lik e tw o s ilk those dresses blue.
+3
7. the church has p ictures v e ry old some S panish.

P2
8. M rs. Brow n has s u it p re tty a green very.

CẤ
9. the lib ra ry has E n g lish easy books v e ry several.

10. black dress p re tty h e r w ool is in th e w ardrobe.
A
HÓ
E. Translate into English:

1. Thang máy (lift) thứ nha't ñang ñ i lên.
Í-
2. Thang máy thứ h a i dang ñ i xuống (come down).

-L
3. C hiếc xe hơi nhỏ dang chạy (go) vào công v iê n ñể xe.(ca rp a rk)
ÁN
4. C hiếc xe hơi ló n ñang chạy ra k h ỏ i (come out of) công v iê n xe hơi.

5. Con mèo ở trong ghế bành, (a rm ch a ir)
TO
6. Con chuột ở dưổi gầm ghế bành.

NG
7. C hiêc xe hơi ñang chạy dọc theo con ñường, (to come along)
8. Con chó ñang chạy dọc theo con ñường.
ƯỠ
9. Người ñàn ông dang ở trước cái cây. (tree )

10. N h iê u người ở bên trong sân vận ñộng, (in s id e th e stad iu m )
ID
11. Con sư tử (lio n ) ở sau cái cây.

BỒ
58

12. Jo h n ở bên ngoài sân vậ n ñộng.
ƠN
13. P h i trư ờ ng T â n Sơn N h ấ t ở V iệ t Nam .
NH
14. T hủ ðức ở giữa B iê n H òa và S ài G òn.
15. C hiếc xe tả i ñang ñ i vào kh úc quanh (to come around th e bend)
UY
F. Trả lời các câu hỏi với WHY sau, dùng từ gợi ý:
.Q
1. W h y’s she w e a rin g a rin g ? (she’s m a rrie d )
TP
2. W h y’s she openin g th e w indow ? ( it ’s h o t)
3. W hy can’t he understand? (he can’t speak E n g lish )
O
ĐẠ
4. W hy can’t he send the postcard to h e r house? (he hasn’t got h e r
address)
NG
5. W h y can’t she see it? ( it ’s b e h in d th e sofa)
6. W hy is she w e a rin g a dress? (she’s going to a p a rty )
HƯ
7. W hy are you opening th e frid ge ? (th e re is a lo t o f food)
8. W h y can’t th e y und e rsta nd th e lesson? (th e re are m any new w ords)
ẦN
9. W h y can’t she send th e le tte r to h e r frie n ds? (she hasn’t got th e ir
addresses) TR
10. W hy can’t you read yo ur book? ( it ’s d a rk )
B
11. W h y is M a ry unhappy? (th e sm oke is going in to h e r eyes)
00
12. W h y are th e y late? (th e y h aven’t got a w atch)

10
13. W hy can’t Tom and P ete r speak E ng lish ? (th e y are la zy)
+3
14. W hy is th e tea cher angry? (th e stude nts are noisy)

P2
15. W h y are th e people queueing? (th e y are buying tic k e ts )

CẤ

A
HÓ
I. PRESENTATION
Í-
-L
A. Cách nói giờ:

1. Cách h ỏ i: W h a t tim e is it?
ÁN
W h a t’s th e tim e?
TO
C an you te ll m e w h a t tim e i t is?

NG
2. N ó i giờ ñúng: I t ’s + ho u r + o’clock

I t ’s six o’clock.
ƯỠ
I t ’s te n o’clock.
ID
3. N ó i giờ hơn: I t ’s + ho ur + m in u te
BỒ
I t ’s fiv e te n (5 g l0 )
I t ’s tw o fifte e n (2 g l5 )
59
I t ’s te n th ir ty (10g30)
I t ’s + m in u te + past + hour
ƠN
I t ’s te n p ast five .
NH
I t ’s q u a rte r past tw o. (kh ô ng n ó i: fifte e n past tw o)
I t ’s h a lf past ten, (kh ô ng nói: th ir ty past ten)
UY
4. N ó i giờ kém : I t ’s + m in u te + to + hour
.Q
I t ’s fo u r to fo u r (4 giờ th iế u 4 p h ú t)
TP
I t ’s n in e to one (1 giờ th iế u 9 p h ú t)
O
I t ’s fifte e n to th re e (3 giờ th iế u 15 p h ú t)
ĐẠ
(hay: I t ’s Q uarter to th re e )
H a i cách n ó i 15 p h ú t và nửa giờ: T h ay v ì dùng fifte e n (15 p h ú t) và
NG
th ir ty (30 p h ú t, nửa giờ), người ta thường dùng q u a rte r (1 khắc, 15
HƯ
p h ú t) và h a lf (1 nửa giờ, 30 p h ú t) theo công thứ c:
I t ’s + h a lf + p a st/ to + hour
ẦN
______ q u a rte r________________
TR
I t ’s h a lf p ast e ig h t (8g30)
q u a rte r (8 g l5 )
B
00
I t ’s q u a rte r to e ig h t (8g th iế u 15)

10
K hông n ó i: I t ’s h a lf to e ig h t (8 giờ th iế u m ộ t nửa)

+3
M à n ó i: I t ’s h a lf past seven. (7 giờ rưỡi)

P2
B. Số thứ tự:
CẤ
1st; fir s t 7th seventh

A
2nd second 8 th e ig h th
HÓ
2rd th ird 9 th n in th
Í-
4 th fo u rth 1 0th te n th
-L
5th fifth 11th ele ven th

ÁN
3th s ix th 12th tw e lfth

5ô' thứ tự ñược dùng k h i n ó i về ngày tro n g th á n g :
TO
Ex: On M ay th e fir s t (vào ngày 1.5)

NG
O n Ja nu a ry th e tw e lfth (vào ngày 12.1)

ƯỠ
Thì tương lai gần (The Near Future Tense)

. Cách chia: s + am + going to + V
ID
1S
BỒ
are

2. Cách dùng: D iễ n tả m ộ t h à n h ñộng tương la i hầu chắc xảy ra theo

dự ñ ịn h trước.
ƠN
Ex: We are going to have a te s t n e x t week.
NH
3. Chú ý:
e G O IN G TO tro n g th ì này khôn g có nghĩa là “ ñ i” , ch ỉ là phương tiệ n
UY
ñể chia m ột ñộng từ tương la i gần.
• Ta có th ể nói:
.Q
I ’m going to go to D alat. (N e a r F uture)
TP
hay I ’m going to D a lat. (pres.cont. dùng với nghĩa tương la i gần:
O
VI xem lạ i U n it 8, I.A 2)
ĐẠ
4. M ore exam ples:
T hey’re going to open a ll th e ir presents.
NG
T hey’re going to spend th e ir honeym oon in a v illa by th e sea.
HƯ
T hey’re going to be happy fo r ever and ever.
Some people are going to m ake speeches.
ẦN
B oth o f th e m others are going to cry.
IL PRACTICE TR
B
A. Nói các giờ sau sang tiếng Anh, rồi ghi lại trong vồ:
00
1. 12 g 5 7. 1 giờ
10
2. 12 g 10 8. 1 g th iế u 5
+3
3. 12g 15 9. 1 g th iế u 10
P2
4. 12 g 20 10- 1 ẽ th iế u 15
CẤ
K 19 o- 25 11. l g th iế u 20
e.âịĩl SiÌĨSES
A
HÓ
B. Dịch sang tiếng Anh

Í-
1. M ấ y giờ có tin tức? 6g5.

-L
2. M ấ y giờ có dự báo th ờ i tiế t? 6 g l0 .

3. M ấ y giờ có chiếu phim ?
ÁN
4. T i v i chiếu gì trê n kên h 7 lúc 8 giờ? Có phím .

TO
5. Có gì trước chương trìn h chiếu phim ? Có tin tức.

6. K h i ở M êhicô là m ộ t giờ th ì ở Nữu Ước là 2 giờ.
NG
7. K h i ở Nữu Ước là 2 giờ th ì ở Caracas là 3 giờ.

8. Ở Rome bây giờ là m ấy giờ? Tám giờ.
ƯỠ
c. Luyện các câu sau bằng miệng:

ID
1. (Tom ) H e’s going to leave p riso n.

BỒ
61

buy a car.
ƠN
m eet h is g irlfrie n d ,
NH
have a good tim e .
2. (F red) He is n ’t going to re n t a car.
UY
have steak,
.Q
d rin k cham pagne,
TP
have a good tim e .
O
3. (Tom & h is g irlfrie n d ) T hey’re going to have steak.
ĐẠ
re n t a car
d rin k cham pagne
NG
have a good tim e .
HƯ
4. (Fred & h is w ife ) T h ey’re going- to d rin k cham pagne.
have a good tim e ,
ẦN
have steak,
TR re n t a car.
D. ðặt câu hỏi và trả lời theo mẫu, dùng từ gợi ý:
B
00
1. he / cowboy film .
10
W h a t’s he going to do? H e’s going to w atch a cowboy film .

+3
2. She / m agazine
P2
3. We / cham pagne
4. T hey / te n n is
CẤ
5. You / hom ew ork

6. I / a question
A
HÓ
7. The cat / fis h

E. ðặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch dưói trong nhũng câu sau:
Í-
-L
1. H e’s going to the g o lf club.

2. Tom ’s going to wash h is car.
ÁN
3. We are going to w atch te le visio n .

4. They aren’t going to d rin k cham pagne.
TO
5. The students are going to have a good tim e a t school.

NG
6. She’s going to w atch M a ry in Love a t h er m o the r’s,

7. M y paren ts are going to s e ll th e ir car.
ƯỠ
8. H e’s going to re tire because he is o ld .

ID
9. T hey’re going to liv e in th e U .S .A .

10. T hey’re going to leave V N n e xt m o n th .
BỒ
62
F. Translate into English:

1. T ố i nay T V có p h im ñây. B ạn có ñ ịn h xem không?
ƠN
2. Cô ấy ñ ịn h là m gì với số tiề n ñó?
3. Cô ta sẽ ñ i du lịc h vòng quanh th ế giớ i.
NH
4. A n h ấy sắp pha cà phê.
UY
5. H ãy n h ìn nhữ ng ñám m ây den k ia ! T rờ i sắp mưa ñấy.
6. T ô i cảm th ấ y khó chịu quá. T ô i n gh ĩ là tô i sắp b ị bệnh.
.Q
G. Translate into Vietnamese:
TP
T h is year, on h is b irth d a y , Jo hn is g oing to get up a t 6. F irs t, he
O
is going to have a show er. T hen he is going to have b reakfa st. A fte r
ĐẠ
th a t he is going to help m om clean th e house, decorate the room and
NG
prepare th e p a rty .
H. Translate the following dialogue into Vietnamese:
HƯ
P eter : W ha t are you g oing to do to n ig h t?
ẦN
M a ry : I ’m going to w rite a le tte r.
TR
P eter : A re you going to stay a t hom e n e x t Sunday?
M a ry : N o, I ’m not. T’m going to M rs K e lle r’s house.
B
00
P eter : W here is h e r house?

10
M a ry : I t is n ea r here.
+3
I. Answer these quesiions, using the suggested ideas:

P2
1. W h at is she going to buy? (a new dress)

CẤ
2. W h a t are th e y going to learn? (th e ir lessons)

A
3. W h at are you going to w rite ? (some le tte rs )

HÓ
4. W ho are you going to help? (th a t w om an)

Í-
5. W ho is going to read th is story? (Tom )

-L
6. W hen is Tom going to clean h is bicycle? (tom orro w afternoon)

ÁN
7. W here is P eter going to be to n ig h t? (a t hom e)

TO
8. W hen are you going to liv e in you r house? (n e x t m o n th )

NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
63

ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 1] A
ƠN
L PRESENTATION
NH
A. Thì hiện tại thường của ñộng íừ thường
(The Simple Present Tense of Ordinary Verbs)
UY
1. G iớ i th iệ u : T ro n g G ram m ar 1 và 5, ta ñã học ñộng từ TO BE và
.Q
C AN ở th ì hiện tạ i thường. C húng ñược gọi là nhữ ng ñộng từ ñặc
TP
biệt. ðó là những ñộng từ có th ể phủ ñ ịn h bằng cách thêm NO T
vào sau chúng và với th ể n g h i vấn th ì ñảo chúng lê n trước chủ ngữ.
O
ĐẠ
Các ñộng từ khác ñược gọi là ñộng từ thường-, to go, to w o rk, to
play...
NG
T ro ng G ram m ar 8, ta ñã học th ì hiện tạ i tiếp d iễ n của ñộng
từ thường. T ro ng th ì n ày có sự h iệ n d iệ n của ñộng từ ñặc b iệ t TO
HƯ
BE nên ở th ể phủ ñ ịn h ta th ê m N O T và n g h i vấ n th ì ñảo TO BE
lê n trước chủ ngữ.
ẦN
T ro ng b à i này, ta sẽ học th ì hiện tạ i thường của ñộng từ
TR
thường với th ể kh ẳ n g ñ ịn h , phủ ñ ịn h , n g h i vấn kh ác h ẳ n m à ta cần
phân b iệ t.
B
00
2. B ảng chia m ột ñộn g từ thường ở th ì h iệ n tạ i thường ba thể:

10
TO P LA Y FO O T B A LL
+3
I, you, we, the y p la y

fo o tb a ll.
P2
He, she, it plays

CẤ
I, you, we, they do n ot fo o tb a ll.

A
p la y
HÓ
He, she, it does n o t fo o tb a ll.

do n o tv iế t tắ t là don’t,
Í-
does n o t v iế t tắ t là doesn’t.
-L
ÁN
Do I, you, we, the y

p la y fo o tb a ll ?
Does he, she, it
TO
T rả lờ i: • Yes, th e y do. N o, th e y don’t.

NG
Yes, th e y p la y foo tb a ll.

No, th e y don’t p la y fo o tb a ll.
ƯỠ
• Yes, she does. No, she doesn’t.

ID
Yes, she plays fo o tb a ll.

BỒ
64

No, she doesn’t play football.
3. Cách thêm s hoặc ES vào ñộng từ thường ngôi 3 số ít thi
ƠN
hiện tại thường và cách ñọc chúng.
NH
Tương tự như cách thê m s vào danh từ sô' í t k h i d ổi sang số nhiều và
như cách ñọc tậ n s danh từ số n h iề u (xem lạ i G ram m ar 2 I. C & D )
UY
4. Câu hỏi Wh- với ñộng từ thường ở hiện tại:
.Q
1. W ho plays football? The students •s— do.
TP
s \ p la y foo tb a ll.
O
2. What do the students play? They play football.
ĐẠ
3. Where do they play football? They play football in the schoolyard.
4. When do they play football? They play football in the afternoon.
NG
5- Why does he play football? He plays football because he likes it.
HƯ
6- Who does he play football with? He plays football with his friends.
o
ẦN
7. Which book do you like? I like the English one.
5. Câu hỏi WHO với ñộng từ thường ở hiện tại: TR

1. W ho loves Angela? R ick loves A ngela.
B
s
00
2. W ho(m ) does A ngela love? She loves R ick.

10
o
+3
N o te s : • K h i W H O là m chủ ngữ th ì k ế tiế p là ñộng từ ngay ở dạng

P2
khăng ñịnh hay phủ ñịnh, ngôi ba số ít. (Who loves Angela? Who
doesn’t love Angela?) Khi trả lời tùy chủ ngữ ỉà số ít hay số nhiều mà
CẤ
ñộng từ sẽ ở số ít hay sô nhiều.

A
• N ếu W H O là m tâ n ngữ th ì ñộng từ p h ả i ở th ể n g h i vấn. Theo lý

HÓ
phải dùng WHOM làm object, nhưng ngày nay WHO thường ñược dùng
thay cho WHOM khi làm tân ngữ. Nhưng cần lưu ý:
Í-
Who(m) does Angela love?

-L
Who(m) does Angela live with?

(giới từ ở cuối câu, dùng WHO hay WHOM ñều dược)
ÁN
But W ith w hom does A ngela live?

TO
(Giới từ ñứng ñầu câu, buộc phải dùng WHOM,

không dược dùng WHO làm tân ngữ)
NG
ƯỠ
6. More examples with WH-Questions & Yes-No Questions

having verbs in the present:
ID
1. W h a t do you do? I read “The Tim es” .

BỒ
65

2. W hat does he do? H e reads “The T im es” .

3. W hat tim e do th e y do th e ir exercises?
ƠN
They do th e ir exercises a t 8 p.m . in th e evening.
*
NH
**
1. Do you w o rk outside? 5. Do you w o rk w ith your hand?
UY
2. Do you w ear a uniform ? 6. Do you w o rk a t weekends?
.Q
3. Do you w o rk in an office? 7. Do you tra vel?
TP
4. Do you get a b ig salary?
O
B. Cách dùng thì hiện tại thường:
ĐẠ
T h ì này ñược dùng ñể d iễ n tả :
1. M ộ t th ó i quen lậ p ñ i lậ p lạ i tro n g h iệ n tạ i, thường ñược dùng với
NG
các trạ n g từ như u sua lly (thường' xuyên), o fte n (thường thường),
HƯ
always (luôn ỉuôn), som etim es (ñ ô i k h i), e very m o rn in g (m ỗi sáng),
every day (m ỗi ngày):
ẦN
We usually get UP a t fiv e o’clock every m o rn in g .
2. M ộ t sự th ậ t h iể n n h iê n , m ột h iệ n tượng tự n h iê n , khách quan:
TR
The sun rises in th e east. (M ặ t trờ i mọc ở phương ñông)
B
W a ter b o ils a t 100 degrees centigrade. (Nước sôi ở 100°C)
00
II. PRACTICE
10
A. ðổi những câu sau sang phủ ñịnh và nghi vân:

+3
P2
1. The teacher speaks E n g lish .

2. He lives in H anoi.
CẤ
3. We le a rn E ng lish .
A
4. I w o rk in an office.
HÓ
5. She learns Russian.

6. They read books
Í-
7. He leaves home a t seven.

-L
8. Som etim es I go out in the evening.

ÁN
9. We go to our office by bus.

10. M y frie n d w orks in an office.
TO
11. I go back home in the evening.

NG
12. M y w ife lis te n s to the radio.

13. M y c h ild re n go to the cinem a.
ƯỠ
14. He know s E nglish .

ID
BỒ
66

B. Translate the following text into Vietnamese and answer the
ƠN
questions:
NH
M Y W O R K IN G D A Y
I w o rk in an o ffice in H anoi. E ve ry m o rn in g I get up a t five . I do
UY
m o rn in g exercises. T hen I wash m y face, b rush m y te e th and have
b re akfa st. A fte r b re a k fa s t I leave hom e and go to th e office. M y house
.Q
is n o t fa r fro m th e office. I do n o t go th e re by bus.
TP
In th e evening , I go back home. I have d in n e r. A fte r d in n e r I
O
lis te n to th e ra d io .
ĐẠ
Som etim es m y w ife , m y c h ild re n and I go out in the evening. We
go to th e cinem a.
Questions
NG
HƯ
1. W here do you w ork?
2. W h a t tim e do you get up in th e m orning?
ẦN
3. W h a t do you do in the 'm orning?
4. W hen do you leave yo ur house?
5. Is yo u r house fa r fro m yo ur office? TR
B
6. W hen do you go back home?
00
7. W h a t do you do a fte r dinner?

10
8. Do you go to th e cinem a som etim es?

+3
c. Trả lời những câu hỏi sau dùng những từ gợi ý trong ngoặc:
P2
1. W ho is a t th e door? (th e teacher)

CẤ
2. W ho has a hat? (th e boy)

3. W ho teaches you E n g lish ? (M r N am )
A
4. W ho do you lo ok at? (M r Ba)

HÓ
5. W ho does she speak E n g lis h to? (h e r frie n d )

Í-
6. W ho do th e y lis te n to in class? (th e teacher)

-L
7. W h a t is in th e co rn er o f th e room? (a h a t)
8. W h a t te x t does he read? (te x t 1)
ÁN
9. W hen does he come home? (in the e vening)

TO
10. W hen does he do exercises? (in the m o rn in g )

11. W hen does he ta ke a rest? (a t noon)
NG
12. W here do you live ? (in H a n o i)

ƯỠ
13. W here does she w ork? (in a h o s p ita l)

D. Dùng từ nghi vấn thích hợp ñặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch dưới
ID
của những câu sau:

BỒ
1. The teach er is a t the blackboard.
67
2. I see L an a t th e door.
3. Vinh speaks English to his friends.
ƠN
4. We learn Russian at our school.
5. We read Lesson 5 .
NH
6. She reads books at home in the evening.
E. ðặt tất cả các dạng câu hỏi có thể ñược cho những câu sau:
UY
1. He translates the text in class during the lesson.
.Q
2. The children go to school in the morning.
TP
3. She does her exercise at home in the evening.
O
4. T h ey w o rk in a p la n t, (nhà m áy)
ĐẠ
F. ðổi các câu sau sang thể phủ ñịnh và nghi vấn:
NG
1. We liv e on T ra n H ung Dao S treet.
2. T hey lik e th a t film .
HƯ
3. Mary and Tom like coffee.
ẦN
4. The g irls w a n t new clothes.
5. T h e ir c h ild re n w o rk in a fa cto ry.
G. Translate into English: TR
B
1. T ô i sống tro n g m ộ t căn hộ tậ p th ể .
00
2. Họ không thích căn nhà của họ.

10
3. C húng là m việ c tro n g m ộ t bệnh v iệ n .

+3
4. Chúng tôi không sông gần sở thú.

P2
5. Ba tô i kh ôn g th íc h bia.
CẤ
H. Translate into Vietnamese:

Dear Mum,
A
HÓ
I am now in U n cle Jo hn ’s fa rm . T h is is about m y life and w o rk

here.
Í-
Every morning we get up at 5:30 and have breakfast<at 6:0. After

-L
b re a kfa st we s ta rt w o rk on th e fa rm . A t 11:30 we have lun ch. W e s ta rt

w o rk ag ain a t 1:30 and fin is h i t a t 4. A t 5:30 w e have d in n e r and a fte r
ÁN
dinner we watch TV. I have got some friends here - sometimes we go

TO
to th e club in th e evening. W e go to bed a t 9:30.

I. ðể tài nói: Hãy nói về việc bạn làm trong một ngày từ lúc thức
NG
dậy ñến khi ñi ngủ.

ƯỠ
M Y D A IL Y L IF E
ID
(Cuộc sống h àn g ngày của tô i)

BỒ
68

J. ðặt câu hỏi với từ nghi vấn thích hợp và trả lời dựa vào những
thông tin cho sẵn:
ƠN
1. school boys: What do they do? They are school boys.
NH
2. 1 2 .//How old...?
3. school / 5 days a week. // How many days a week...?
UY
4. g e t up / 8:00. // W ha t tim e...?
5. cornflakes / breakfast. // What...?
.Q
6. lu n ch / a t school. // W here...?
TP
7. hom e / 4:00. // W hen...?
O
8. bed / 9:00. // W h a t tim e...?
ĐẠ
K. Bài tập tương tự: Simon stone.
NG
1. Guitarist for “Computer”:
W h a t is Sim on Stone’s job?
HƯ
H e’s a g u ita ris t fo r “ C om puter” , (ban nhạc C om puter)
ẦN
2. Live / flat in Central London.
3. G et u p /1 1 .1 5 .
4. Read “the D a ily M irro r” . TR
5. A rriv e a t the studio / 3.30.
B
00
6. Leave the studio / midnight.

10
7. Have d in n e r / 12.30.
8. Go to bed / three o’clock.
+3
L. Translate into Vietnamese:

P2
W a lte r M oaney is an engineer. He gets up a t 7:00 and has

CẤ
b rea kfa st. Then he goes to w o rk . He s ta rts a t 8:00. He usually has

A
lu n ch in th e canteen. H e fin is h e s w o rk a t 5:30. T hen he goes home and

HÓ
has d in n e r. A fte r d in n e r he u sua lly reads th e paper and watches TV.

He goes to bed a t about 10:30.
Í-
M. Chia dộng từ trong ngoặc ở thì hiện tại thường cho ñúng:
-L
1. I (n o t lik e ) fo o tb a ll.
ÁN
2. She (liv e ) in a fla t.

TO
3. She (not want) coffee.

4. They (read) books in the school library?
NG
5. M y s is te r (w a lk) to w ork.
ƯỠ
6. She (work) in a big factory.

7. She (liv e ) near a pagoda?
ID
8. Ja n e t B row n (lik e ) sweets?

BỒ
9. The teacher (lik e ) a cup o f tea.
69

10. The pupil (learn) English?
ƠN
N. ðọc các câu mô tả sau liên quan ñến một loại nghề nghiệp
NH
nào ñó rồi dùng từ nghi vấn ñặt câu hỏi thích hdp:
A IR HO STESS
UY
X. I speak three lan gu ages. H ow m a n y lan gu a g es does th e air-ho stess
speak?
.Q
2. I m eet a lo t o f fam ous people.
TP
3. I go to New Y o rk every week.
O
4. I tra v e l in m y job.
ĐẠ
5. I liv e near the a irp o rt.
6. I ’m 22 years old.
NG
7. I stay in a lo t o f hotels.
HƯ
8. I liv e in the tow n centre.
FA R M ER
ẦN
.1. I ’m very strong.
2.
3.
I w ork outside
I don’t w ear a u n ifo rm .
TR
B
4. I get up very early,
00
f). I w ork w ith anim als.

10
6. I go to tow n every S aturday.

+3
7. I liv e in the country.

P2
8. I ’ve got a lo rry .

DOCTOR
CẤ
1. I w ear a w h ite coat.

A
2. I ’ve got a re ce ptio n ist.

HÓ
3. I can read L a tin .

4. I w o rk in a h osp ita l.
Í-
5. I w ear glasses.
-L
6. I w ear a uniform .
ÁN
7. I ’ve got a lo t o f diplom as.

8. I get a b ig salary.
TO
0. ðặt câu hỏi với WHERE cho phần gạch dưới trong các
NG
câu sau:
ƯỠ
1. We liv e ỉn a house.
2. M y p aren ts liv e in a suburb o f London.
ID
3. They liv e in Cam den Tow n.

BỒ
4. She live s a t 58 A lb e rt S tre e t.

5. N am ’s uncle w orks in an office.
70
6. Susan w ants to go to Leeds.

7. F red w ants to come here .
ƠN
9. The p u p ils w a n t to go to th e lib ra ry .
NH
10. Susan and F red w a n t to w o rk in a school.
P. Dùng các từ gợi ý, ñặt câu hỏi với WHERE:
UY
1. W here / th e y / buy / tea?
.Q
2. W here / Lan / get / h e r tic k e t?
TP
3. W here / your parents / spend / th e ir holiday?
4. W here / Ja ne t B row n / teach / E ng lish ?
O
ĐẠ
Q. Trả lời các câu hỏi sau:
1. W here does M r Ba w ork? (in a h o s p ita l)
NG
2. W here do th e y buy sw eets, cakes and biscuits? (in a shop)
HƯ
3. W here do m any c h ild re n go? (to h e r shop)
4. W here does th e doctor live ? (in a fla t)
ẦN
TR
B
00
I. PRESENTATION
10
A. Trạng từ chỉ sự năng diễn (Adverbs of Frequency)

+3
1. T rạ n g từ ch ỉ sự năng d iễ n là nhữ ng trạ n g từ n ó i lê n mức ñộ xảy ra

P2
của m ộ t h àn h ñộng nào dó.

CẤ
Ex: He alw ays gets up a t fiv e o’clock.

2. Các trạ n g từ ch ỉ sự năng d iễ n th ô n g dụng:
A
HÓ
alw ays : lu ô n luôn

usua lly ; often ; g e n e ra lly : th ô n g thường
Í-
som etim es ; occasionally : ñ ô i k h i, th ỉn h thoả ng

-L
ra re ly ; seldom : ít k h i
never : kh ô n g bao giờ
ÁN
3. Các trạ n g từ này lu ôn ñứng trước ñộng từ thường (o rd in a ry verbs)

TO
và sau ñộng từ TO BE.

E x: H e alw ays gets up la te .
NG
L___ Ì
ƯỠ
He is alw ays la te fo r w o rk.

ID
B. Câu hỏi với HOW OFTEN:

BỒ
1. HO W O FTE N có nghĩa là thường xuyên như th ế nào, hay m ấy lầ n .
71
Nó ñược dùng ñể h ỏ i mức ñộ xả y ra của m ộ t việc nào ñó.

Ex: How o fte n do you go out? (B ạn thư ờ ng-ñi chơi m ấy lần?)
ƠN
Once o r tw ice a week. (M ỗ i tu ầ n 1 h a y 2 lầ n )
2. ðể trả lờ i cho lo ạ i câu h ỏ i này, ta thư ờng dùng các trạ n g từ ch ỉ
NH
năng d iễ n hoặc có th ể dùng th ê m các k iể u n ó i sau:
Ex: once a day : m ỗi ngày m ộ t lầ n .
UY
tw ice a week : m ỗ i tu ầ n 2 lầ n .
.Q
th ree tim e s a m o n th : m ỗi th á n g 3 lầ n .
TP
ten tim e s a ye ar : m ỗi năm 10 lầ n .
O
c. Thì hiện tại thường ñối chiếu với thì hiện tại tiếp diễn
ĐẠ
(The Simple Present versus the Present Continuous):
1. V í dụ
NG
• They teach E n g lis h in a language school.
HƯ
They aren’t tea ch in g a t th e m om ent.
• He rid e s racehorses b u t he is n ’t rid in g a racehorse a t th e
ẦN
m om ent.
2. N h ận xé t:
TR
S IM P LE PRESENT P R E SE N T C O N TIN U O U S
B
00
• C h ỉ m ộ t th ó i quen (a h a b it) • C hĩ m ộ t h à n h ñộng ñang xảy

10
ra lú c ta n ó i.
• M ộ t h àn h ñộng lặ p ñ i lặ p lạ i • Có tịn h cách n h ấ t th ờ i
+3
(a repeated a ction) (te m p orary)

P2
• T rạ n g từ ñ i kèm : alw ays, • T rạ n g từ ñ i kèm : now , a t th e

CẤ
often, ra re ly , every day, in the m om ent, fo r th e tim e being, rig h t

m o rn in g , every year. now , iu s t now.
A
3. T hêm v í dụ:
HÓ
• I usually have w a te r w ith m y m eals.

Í-
T o n ig h t we’re h a vin g champagne.

-L
• I ’m doing i t now.
ÁN
I do i t every day.
D. Trạng từ chỉ thể cách (Adverbs of manner):
TO
1. T rạ n g từ ch ỉ th ể cách là trạ n g từ n ó i lê n cách th ế xảy ra của ñộng

NG
từ.
ƯỠ
2. Hầu h ế t các trạ n g từ c h ỉ th ể cách ñược th à n h lậ p bằng cách thê m

-L Y vào sau m ộ t tiế n g tín h từ.
ID
E x: quick (adj)" - q u ic k ly (adv)

BỒ
72

w arm - w a rm ly
bad - badly
ƠN
Notes:
NH
• Nếu tín h từ tậ n cùng bằng Y , ta ñ ổ i Y -» I + LY .
E x: happy - h a p p ily
UY
noisy - n o is ily
.Q
• Các tín h từ sau có dạng trạ n g từ ñặc b iệ t, kh ông thêm -L Y :
TP
Ex: good - w e ll (tố t hơn)
O
h a rd - h a rd (chăm ch ỉ, v ấ t vả)
ĐẠ
fa s t - fa s t (nhanh)
3. T rạ n g từ ch ỉ th ể cách dùng ñể bổ nghĩa cho ñộng từ và trả lờ i câu
NG
h ỏ i vớ i HOW .
HƯ
E x: H ow do you do it?
I do i t c a re fu lly / w e ll / fa s t...
ẦN
E. Câu trả lời ngắn gọn:
TR
1. T rả lờ i dồng tìn h vớ i câu h ỏ i: ta dùng s o (như th ế ) sau ñộng từ
T H IN K hay HO PE ỗ khẳng ñ ịn h .
B
00
E x: Can Jo hn speak E nglish? I th in k so.

10
Is i t g oing to be a n ice day tom orrow ? I hope so.

2. T rả lờ i kh ông ñồng tìn h vớ i câu h ỏ i: T a dùng s o sau ñộng từ
+3
T H IN K ở p h ả ñ ịn h hay N O T sau ñộng từ H O PE, hoặc trả lờ i I don’t

P2
know .
CẤ
E x: Do E n g lis h people d rive w ell? I don’t know .

A re you going to be famous? I don’t th in k so.
A
A re you going to have a cold tom orrow ? I hope not.

HÓ
F. Số thứ tự và ngày tháng

Í-
(Ordinal number and dates: See Grammar 10 again).

-L
13th th irte e n th 2 0 th tw e n tie th 2 6 th tw e n ty -s ix th

ÁN
14th fo u rte e nth 21st tw e n ty -firs t 2 7 th tw enty-seventh

15th fifte e n th 22nd tw enty-second 2 8th tw e n ty-e ig h th
TO
16th s ixte e n th 23rd tw e n ty -th ird 2 9 th tw e n ty -n in th

17th seventeenth 2 4th tw e n ty -fo u rth 3 0 th th ir tie th
NG
18th e ig hteen th 2 5th tw e n ty -fifth 31st th ir ty -firs t

ƯỠ
19th n in ete e n th
ID
BỒ
7c

II. PRACTICE
ƠN
A. Complete the sentences with: always, usually, often,
sometimes, occasionally, rarely, never:
NH
1. He lik e s foo tball. He goes to a lo t o f fo o tb a ll m atches. He __
UY
watches football.
2. She goes to the cinem a tw o o r th re e tim e s every year. S h e ___goes
.Q
to the cinema.
TP
3. I lik e classical m usic, and I lik e pop m usic. I ___lis te n to pop m usic,
O
and I __ lis te n to classical m usic.
ĐẠ
4. They don’t lik e m eat. T hey’re vegetarians. T h e y ___eat m eat.
5. E very m orning she d rin k s coffee w ith h e r breakfast. S h e ___d rin k s
NG
coffee w ith h e r b reakfast.
HƯ
6. He doesn’t usually d rin k w in e, b u t a t C h ristm a s, w ith h is d in n e r, he
has a glass o f w ine. H e ___d rin k s w ine.
ẦN
7. They go to bed a t eleven o’clock fro m Sunday to F rid a y , b u t on
S aturday they go to bed a t m id n ig h t. T h e y ___go to bed a t eleven
o’clock.
TR
B
00
10
1. B ạn ñánh ră n g m ấy lần? T ô i ñánh ră n g m ỗ i ngày m ộ t lầ n .

2. A n h ấy chải g ià y m ấy lần? A n h ấy ch ải g ià y m ỗi tu ầ n m ộ t lầ n .
+3
3. Cô ấy gội ñầu m ây lần? Cô ấ y gội ñầu (w ash h e r h a ir) m ỗ i th á n g 2

P2
lầ n .
CẤ
4. C húng ñ i nha sĩ m ấy lần? C húng ñ i nha sĩ m ỗi năm h a i lầ n .

5. P eter ñọc báo m ấy lần? A n h ấy ñọc báo m ỗi ngày.
A
6. Họ ñ i xem kịc h mâ'y lần? Họ í t k h i ñ i xem k ịc h (the play).

HÓ
7. M a ry nghe m áy th u th a n h m ấy lần? Cô ta khôn g bao giờ nghe m áy

Í-
th u thanh.
-L
8. B ọn trẻ xem TV m ấy lần? C húng xem T V m ỗi buổi tô i.

c. Translate into Vietnamese:
ÁN
1. I liv e in W ashington though I ’m s ta vin g in London a t th e m om ent.

TO
2. The car is n ’t here today because S heila is u sing it . She g e n e ra lly

uses th e bus.
NG
3. I come fro m Scotland though I ’m liv in g in London ju s t now.

ƯỠ
4. I ’m s ta v in g w ith m y parents a t th e m om ent though I have m y own

fla t.
ID
5. They u su a lly w o rk , a t the weekends b u t th e y are n o t w o rk in g a t the

BỒ
m oment.
74
6. He teaches in a language school b u t he is w o rk in g in a facto ry a t

th e m om ent.
7. I u sually w o rk a t n ig h t though I am h a vin g a h o lid a y now.
ƠN
8. I am stu d yin g E n g lis h a t present, b u t I do n o t speak i t very w e ll
NH
yet.
D. Read this passage and answer the questions below it:
UY
M r Gross is a ve ry busy m an. H e has a lo t o f business lunches in
.Q
expensive re sta u ra n ts. He u sua lly d rin k s a lo t o f w ine. H e’s very fat.
TP
He w e nt to see th e doctor tw o days ago and th e doctor gave h im a
O
special d ie t. H e’s h avin g h is f ir s t special m eal now . He is n ’t very
ĐẠ
happy.
Questions
NG
1. W here does he have liinch ?
HƯ
2. W ha t does he u su a lly d rin k ?
3. W hy d id he go to see th e doctor?
ẦN
4. W hen d id he go to see th e doctor?
5. W hat d id th e doctor give him ?
6. W h a t’s he doing now? Is he happy? TR
B
E. Viết lại các câu sau theo mẫu:
00
1. T hey p la y w e ll. T h e y’re good players.

10
2. She sings b adly.

+3
3. He dances w e ll.
P2
4. They sw im bad ly.

CẤ
5. She teaches w e ll.

6. They s k i w e ll.
A
7. He d rive s badly.
HÓ
F. Viết lại các câu sau theo mẫu:

Í-
1. H e’s a good p la ye r. H e plays w e ll.

-L
2. She’s a bad singer.

3. H e’s a ca reful d riv e r.
ÁN
4. They are careful d riv e rs

TO
5. I ’m a h a rd w o rke r.
6. She’s a fa s t ty p is t.
NG
7. She’s a b e a u tifu l dancer.

ƯỠ
8. H e is a slow d riv e r.
ID
BỒ
71

G. Oùng các ñộng từ THINK, HOPE và so , NOT ñể trả lời một

cách ngắn gọn các câu hỏi sau:
1. Is i t going to ra in today?
ƠN
2. Can yo ur teacher speak E n g lis h w ell?
NH
3. Can you speak E n g lis h w ell?
4. A re you going to th e cinem a n e x t week?
UY
5. Is E n gla nd g oing to w in th e W o rld Cup?
6. Is Queen E liza b e th S cottish?
.Q
7. A re you going to have 10 ch ild re n?
TP
8. A re you going to le a rn a lo t o f E ng lish ?
O
9. A re you going to have an accident?
ĐẠ
10. A re you going to be rich?
NG
H. Viết ngày tháng cho các sự kiện nêu dưới ñây:
I. M y b irth d a y ’s on M a rch 23rd.
HƯ
2. M y b irth d a y ’s ___.
ẦN
3. M y fa th e r’s b irth d a y ’s ___.
4. M y m o the r’s b irth d a y ’s ___.
5. TR
The N a tio n a l D ay o f m y co un try’s ___.
6. N ew Y ear’s day’s ___.
B
00
7. Today’s ___.
10
I. Trả lời các câu hỏi sau: (Luyện tổng hợp)

+3
1. H ow do you u sua lly come to school?

P2
2. W hat do you u sua lly do in th e evening?

3. H ow o fte n do you go out?
CẤ
4. W hat are you g oing to do n e x t weekend?

A
5. Do you see your teacher every day?

HÓ
6. A re you le a rn in g a lo t o f E ng lish ?
7. Do you speak E n g lis h w e ll o r badly?
Í-
8. Do you lik e television ?

-L
ÁN

TO
I. PRESENTATION
NG
A. Thì quá khứ thường của TO BE (The Simple Past of TO BE)

ƯỠ
1. F o rm a tio n:
ID
BỒ
76

+ s + was/ were
s + was/ were + not
ƠN
? Was/ were + s?
NH
2. E x: He was in C e n tra l London.
He wasn’t in Central London.
UY
Was he in Central London?
3. Q uestions: W here were you? I was a t hom e.
.Q
Were you in Manchester? No, I wasn’t.
TP
B. There was/ were:
O
ĐẠ
1. T a ñã học T here is / are là “có” ở h iệ n tạ i.
2. N ay T here w as/ w ere là “có”
ở quá khứ.
NG
3. E x: T here w ere some hotels.
There weren’t any buses.
HƯ
There wasn’t a restaurant.
Was there a beach? Yes, there was.
ẦN
c . Một vài cấu trúc thông dụng:
1. I t ’s too b ig fo r me.
TR
B
They’re too long for her.
00
2. I think English food is excellent,

10
s, V, S2 v2
+3
Sx V i : m ệnh ñề chính
s2v2: m ệnh ñề phụ dùng như danh từ là m object cho V i.
P2
I th in k m v change is w rong,
CẤ
s, Vi Sì v2
D. Thì quá khứ của dộng từ TO HAVE
A
HÓ
(The Simple Past of TO HAVE)

1. T a ñã học th ì h iệ n tạ i của ñộng từ TO H A V E .
Í-
2. N ay ta học ñộng từ n à y ở quá khứ.

-L
ÁN
+ s + had vớỉ mọi ngôi

TO
— s + did not + have

? Did + s + have?
NG
3. Câu h ỏ i:
ƯỠ
Did you have a bath? Yes, I did. No, I didn’t.'

ID
When did you have a bath? I had a bath in the evening.

BỒ
7
i

W h at did the y have? They had a new house.
ƠN
II. PRACTICE
A. ðặt câu khẳng ñịnh với TO BE ỏ quá khứ. Dùng các từ gợi ý:
NH
1. I / here / tw o o’clock. 5. She I school / yesterday.
UY
2. He / Ita ly / July. 6. I t / cold / January.
3. They / home / Sunday. 7. We / London / W ednesday.
.Q
4. You I here / one o’clock.
TP
B. ðặt câu Yes-No Questions:
O
1. You / New Y o rk / F ebruary. 4. He / E ngland / Novem ber?
ĐẠ
2. She / home / Thursday? 5, You / th e re / fo u r o’clock?
3. I t / h ot / June? 6. They / Russia / Decem ber.
NG
c. ðặt câu W h- Questions và trả lời khác nhau, dùng các cụm từ
HƯ
chỉ nơi chốn. Tập hỏi và trả lời theo cặp:
ẦN
1. W here were you a t one o’clock? I was a t home.
2. W here were you yesterday? I was a t school.
3. W here were you TR
yesterday m orning? I was a t w o rk.
4. W here were you yesterday evening? I was a t the pub.
B
00
5. W here were you la s t n ig h t? I was a t th e cinem a.

10
8. W here were you la s t m onth? I was a t the superm arket.

7. W here were you la s t week? I was a t the lib ra ry .
+3
3. W here were you yesterday afternoon? I was a t th e post office.

P2
D. Chia ñộng từ trong ngoặc ỏ thì quá khứ thường

CẤ
L. T h ere (be) a sofa in the sittin g -ro o m .

Ỉ. These houses (be) sm all.
A
HÓ
Ì. P ete r (be) i l l yesterday.

I. W here (be) the books?
Í-
). There (be) a good film la s t m onth.

-L
z. ðặt câu hỏi cho phẩn gạch dưới trong các câu sau.
ÁN
She was happy because she was w ith h im .

i. T he boy was born yesterday.
TO
>. M a rie C urie was born in Poland

NG
She was good a t m athem atics,

i. H e was a t home th is m orning,
ƯỠ
i. There was a good film on T V la s t n ig h t.

. D a vid was good a t E ng lish la s t year.
ID
BỒ

8. They were th e same age.

9. The doctors were a t th e h o s p ita l an hour ago.
ƠN
10. He was a t the p a rk la s t n ig h t.
NH
1. B ạn n gh ĩ gì về những con gà (chickens) của tôi? T ôi ng hĩ chúng dễ
UY
thương và lá u lỉn h (lo v e ly and liv e ly ).
.Q
2. T ô i nghĩ ñó là m ộ t ý k iế n hay.
TP
3. C húng tô i tin câu lạ c bộ của các anh th ì hấp dẫn (a ttra c tiv e ).
4. Cô ấ y h i vọng anh ấ y tố t.
O
5. C húng nó n gh ĩ M a ry ỉà m ộ t học s in h th ô n g m in h (clever).
ĐẠ
6. T ô i e rằ n g ( I’m a fra id ) anh khôn g th ể ñ i dạo (go fo r a w a lk).
7. M á tô i sợ rằ n g tô i kh ô n g th ể tắ m ñược (ta ke / have a b ath ).
NG
8. C húng tô i e rằ n g bạn kh ô n g th ể ñ i học ñược.
HƯ
9. M á tô i h i vọng chúng tô i luôn luôn khỏe.
10. P hòng học n ày th ì quá tiệ n n g h i ñ ối với chúng tô i.
ẦN
11. C á i áo sơ m i n à y th ì quá rộ n g ñôi vớ i anh ấy.
12. C á i áo d à i của cô ta th ì quá c h ậ t ñối vớ i cô ấy.
TR
G. ðổi ñộng từ HAVE sang quá khứ bằng cách viết tiếp câu
B
ñể trống.
00
10
1. She never has a h o lid a y in June. So la s t June...

2. We alw ays have lu n ch a t 12.30. So yesterday...
+3
3. T hey alw ays have a show er in th e m o rn in g . So ye sterda y m orn in g...

P2
4. He never has a le ctu re on S aturdays. So la s t S aturday...

CẤ
5. She never has b re a kfa s t a t weekends. So la s t weekend...

H. Answer these questions:
A
HÓ
I. W h a t tim e d id you have b re a kfa st yesterday?

2. W ho d id you have b re a k fa s t w ith ?
Í-
3. D id you have a show er th is m orning?

-L
4. D id you have any coffee yesterday?

5. D id you have a b irth d a y p a rty la s t year?
ÁN
6. D id you have any hom ew ork la s t n ig ht?

TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ


I. PRESENTATION
ƠN
A. Thì quá khứ thường của ñộng từ thường
NH
(The Simple Past of ordinary verbs)
UY
1. Cách chia:
s + v + ed o r s + v cộ t 2
.Q
+
TP
- s + didn’t + V
O
? Did + s + V?
ĐẠ
2. Ví dụ:
NG
TO WANT TO GO, WENT, GONE
HƯ
I w anted a book. I w e n t to school.
I didn’t want a book. I didn’t go to school.
ẦN
D id you w a n t a book? D id you go to school?
â. Một vài ñộng từ bất quỉ tắc:
® to go, w e n t, gone
TR
B
» to come, came, come
00
• to get, got, got

10
1. C ách dùng: Chỉ một hành ñộng ñã xảy ra ở quá khứ, thdi gian quá
+3
khứ rõ rệ t. Thường ñ i kèm vớ i các trạ n g từ: ye sterday (hôm qua),

P2
last night (ñêm qua), last month (tháng tníñc), two years ago (cách
ñáy 2 năm ), in 1960 (vào n ăm 1960).
CẤ
E x: We had b re a kfa st a t 6 o’clock th is m o rn in g .

A
>. Cách thêm ED vào ñộng từ quá khứ hợp qui tắc:
HÓ
' V ới ña số ñộng từ , ta c h ỉ việ c th ê m E D vào:

E x: w o rk — w orked; le a rn — learned
Í-
' N hững ñộng từ ñã tậ n cùng bằng E , ta c h ỉ th ê m D :

-L
Ex: hope - hoped; believe - believed

ÁN
N hững ñộng từ tậ n cùng bằng phụ âm Y , trước nó là m ộ t phụ âm ,

ta ñ ổi Y —> I rồ i th ê m E D :
TO
E x: tr y — trie d ; fr y — frie d
Trừ : p la y - played; destro y - destroyed
NG
N hững ñộng từ tậ n cùng bằng m ộ t phụ âm , trước nó là m ộ t nguyên

ƯỠ
âm , ta gấp ñ ô i phụ âm trước k h ỉ th ê m E D :

Ex: stop - stopped; travel - travelled;
ID
control - controlled; admit - admitted

BỒ

Trừ : v is it - v is ite d
6. Cách ñọc tận ED:
• E D ñứng sau /t, d/ dọc là /id /.
ƠN
E x: w anted /id / ; decided /id /
NH
• E D ñứng sau /p, f, k, 0, s, / , t / / ñọc là IV
Ex: laughed /la:ft/, kissed, wished, watched
UY
• E D ñứng sau các âm khác vớ i các âm tro n g 2 trường hợp trê n ñọc
.Q
là /d/
TP
Ex: played /pleid/, learned, travelled, roared /ro:d/
7. Câu hỏi & trả lờỉ:
O
ĐẠ
• Did they go to school on time? Yes, they did. No, they didn’t.
• D id you type it? Yes, I d id . No, I d id n ’t.
NG
• What did the secretary type? She typed the letters.
• Why did he leave school? He left school because he had no money.
HƯ
• Whom did he marry? He married Mary.
ẦN
• How many wives did he have? He had only one wife.
B. Thêm một số ñộng t b t qui tắc:
TR
to see, saw, seen to meet, met, met
B
to eat, ate, eaten to teach, taught, taught
00
to drink, drank, drunk to bring, brought, brought

10
to take, took, taken to shoot, shot, shot

+3
to shine, shone, shone to send, sent, sent

P2
to ride, rode, ridden to leave, left, left

to write, wrote, written to begin, began, begun
CẤ
to fly, flew, flown to wear, wore, worn

A
to spend, spent, spent to lose, lost, lost

HÓ
to find, found, found to break, broke, broken

to speak, spoke, spoken
Í-
-L
II. PRACTICE
ÁN
A. ðổi sang thể phủ ñịnh và nghi vấn:

1. T he p u p ils p la n te d fr u it trees & vegetables.
TO
2. T hey played games a fte r school.

NG
3. The pupils of class 7A raised chickens.

4. They collected pictures and photographs for their English class.
ƯỠ
5. I w e n t to see m y frie n d s.
ID
6. T hey read a sto ry.

BỒ
81

7. He w e n t to H uế by plane.
8. M iss Hoa ta u g h t me E n g lish la s t year.
ƠN
9. They spoke E n g lish to the teacher.
NH
10. I m et h er a t the school lib ra ry la s t Saturday.
11. He got up a t 5.30 th is m o rn in g .
UY
12. They swam in th e riv e r.
13. He had bread fo r b re a kfa st th is m o rn in g.
.Q
14. I helped m y parents w ith housew ork.
TP
15. I did m y lessons fo r th e m o rn in g class la s t M onday.
O
B. Thêm ED vảo các ñộng từ sau và xếp loại ỉheo 3 cách dọc của
ĐẠ
chúng: /ư /d/ /id/:
NG
v is it, sm ile, look, study, w atch, d icta te , play, lik e , re st, love, ca rry,
s ta rt, wash, w an t, lis te n , need, enjoy, dress, repeat, re n t.
HƯ
c. ðặt câu hỏi cho các phần gạch dưới:
ẦN
1. She played ten n is in th e p a rk .
2. He carried th ree cases.
3. They starte d a t six o’clock.
TR
B
4. She re nted the car on S atu rd ay.
00
5. He repeated the exercise.

10
6. They stayed in a h o te l.
+3
D. Write complete sentences, putting the verbs in the Simple

P2
Past:
CẤ
1. Nam / help / fa th e r / garden.

2. Nam / hoe up / e a rth / rake.
A
3. They / p la n t / fr u it trees.
HÓ
4. Nam / w a te r / them .
Í-
5. They / fin is h / w o rk / 11:00.

-L
6. N am ’s fa th e r / need / cup o f tea.

E. Translate into Vietnamese:
ÁN
Y esterday was Sunday. N am helped h is fa th e r w ith th in g s a t

TO
home. He and his fa th e r m ended the ro o f and the w indow s. In the

NG
afternoon, he prepared h is lessons and th e n played fo o tb a ll w ith h is

friends.
ƯỠ
F. Answer these questions, using the suggested ideas:

ID
1. W hat d id he le a rn yesterday? (physics and che m istry)

BỒ
2. W hat d id you read yesterday? (an E ng lish novel)
82

3. W ho ta u g h t you E n g lis h la s t year? (M iss Hoa)

4. W here d id you m eet h e r la s t Saturday? (a t th e schoool lib ra ry )
ƠN
5. W h at tim e d id Quang get up th is m o rning? (a t 5.30)
G. Complete the spaces. Use the past of the following verbs:
NH
come, ride, send, go, take, see, write, shine, bring, meet, is:
UY
A la n ( 1 ) ___to E g yp t la s t sum m er. He ( 2 ) ___ a lo t o f people the re . He
.Q
( 3 ) ___a lo t o f le tte rs , and ( 4 ) ___ the m to a ll h is frie n d s . The sun (5)
__ n e a rly every day. I t ( 6 ) ___ ve ry h o t. H e ( 7 ) ___ th e G re a t P yra m id
TP
(.ð ạ i K im tự thá p ), and he ( 8 ) ___on a cam el (lạ c ñấ). file ( 9 ) ___ a lo t
O
o f photos. He (10) ___ home by B ritis h A irw a y . He (11) ___a lo t o f
ĐẠ
souvenirs w ith h im .
NG
H. Answer these questions:
HƯ
I . W here d id you go fo r yo u r la s t holiday?
2. How d id you go there?
ẦN
3. W h a t d id you see there?
4. W h a t d id you eat?
5. W h a t d id you d rin k ? TR
B
6. W h a t d id you buy?
00
7. H ow d id you come home?

10
8. D id you send a ny postcards?

9. D id you take any photographs?
+3
10. D id i t ra in ?
P2
I. Chuyển các câu sau sang quá khứ và dùng các trạng từ chỉ
CẤ
thể cách trái nghĩa nhau:

A
1. He u sua lly sings w e ll b u t yeste rd a y he sang b a d ly .

HÓ
2. She u sua lly w rite s ca re fu lly ,

3. She u su a lly types slo w ly,
Í-
4. They u su ally p la y bad ly,

-L
5. He u sua lly w orks fa st,

ÁN
6. He u sua lly answ ers c a re fu lly,

TO
J. ðổi sang phủ ñịnh & nghi vân:

1. I s ta rte d school in 1966.
NG
2. N am le arne d E n g lis h la s t m o n th .
ƯỠ
3. T hey w o rked here an hour ago.

4. She hated m aths.
ID
5. The c h ild re n played fo o tb a ll.

BỒ
83

K. Chia ñộng từ trong ngoặc ồ Simple Past:

1. W e (w o rk ) in Moscow la s t year.
2. T hey (n o t lik e ) th e film .
ƠN
3. She (th a n k ) him ?
NH
4. Th e fa rm e r (p la n t) m any trees.
5. We (pass) th e exam?
UY
L. Viết thành câu hoàn chinh, dùng các từ gợi ý:
.Q
1. In d ia n a rm y / fiv e clim b e rs / H im alayas.
TP
2. leave / la s t m on th / M o u n t E verest.
O
3. snow h e a v ily / th re e days ago.
ĐẠ
4. a rm y / some so ld ie rs / tw o days ago.
5. T hey / tw o n ig h ts / m ountains.
NG
6. n o t fin d / clim bers.
7. Prince Charles / school / Manchester / this morning.
HƯ
8. He / blue s u it / d a rk blue tie .
ẦN
M. Answer these questions:
1. H ow d id he go to Chicago?
2. H ow d id he drive?
TR
B
3. When did he die?
00
4- How often did he write home?

10
5. W h at tim e d id he g e t up?
+3
5. Who did she give some money?

P2
7. Which did he sell?

?. W h at colour d id he choose?
CẤ
). Who did the th ief shoot?

10. W hy d id she send a telegram ?
A
HÓ
11. H ow lo ng d id th e jo u rn e y take?
12. W h a t d id she wear?
Í-
13. Where did they build a house?

-L
14. W h a t d id she buy?

ÁN

TO
NG
. PRESENTATION
ƯỠ
t. Tính từ chỉ số lượng (Quantitive Adjectives)

. Trong bài này ta học các tính từ chỉ số lượng sau. Chúng ñược dùng
ID
BỒ

trước danh từ.

2. M U C H và A L IT T L E có nghĩa là N H IỀ U và M Ộ T ÍT , ñược dùng
trước danh từ kh ông ñếm ñược (uncountable nouns).
ƠN
E x: T hey d id n ’t have much w a te r.
NH
T hey had a lit t le chocolate.
3. M A N Y và A FE W cũng có nghĩa là N H IỀ U và M Ộ T V À I, dược dùng
UY
trước ñanh từ ñếm ñược (countable nouns).
E x: T hey d id n ’t have m any th in g s to eat.
.Q
T hey had o n ly a few apples.
TP
B. Cấu trúc câu IT TAKES / TOOK...
O
ĐẠ
1. ðể h ỏ i là m m ộ t việc nào ñó m ấ t bao lâu, ta dùng mẫu cấu trú c h ỏi
và trả lờ i sau:
NG
H ow long íôes/(j j (j i t take s o. to do sth?
HƯ
ẦN
It ta k e s ỵ ^ k s.o. tim e to dó sth.
2. E x:
H ow long does i t ta ke you to go to school?
TR
B
- It takes me fifteen minutes to go to school.
00
H ow long d id i t take h im to prepare th e lesson?

10
- It took him an hour to prepare the lesson.

+3
c. Thì quá khứ tiếp diễn (The Past Continuous Tense)

P2
1. C ách th ản h lậ p (Formation):
CẤ
s + was/were + v ~ing
A
HÓ
s+ wasn’t/w eren>t + V -fag

Í-
-L
Was/w ere + s + V -ing?

ÁN
2. C ách d ù n g (Uses): Thì này ñược dùng ñể diễn tả:

• M ộ t h à n h ñộng ñang xảy rã ỗ m ộ t th ờ i ñiểm tro n g quá khứ, thường
TO
có giờ cụ th ể ñ i kèm .
W e w ere w o rk in g in the school garden a t 2 yesterday afternoon.
NG
• H a i h à n h dộng xả y ra ñồng th ờ i tro n g quá khứ .

ƯỠ
My father was watching TV while my mother was sewing.

• M ộ t hành ñộng ñang xả y ra tro n g quá khứ (kéo d à i, xả y ra lâ u hơn,
ID
ở th ì P ast C ontinuous) th ì có m ộ t h à n h ñộng quá khứ khác xen vào

BỒ
85

(xảy ra nhanh, ngắn, ở th ì S im ple Past)

The telephone rang when I was sleeping.
ƠN
D. Thì quá khứ của CAN (The Simple Past of CAN) (Xem lại
NH
G ram m ar 5A)
1. Quá khứ của CAN là C O U LD c h ỉ k h ả năng là m m ộ t việc gì ñó
UY
tro n g quá khứ.
.Q
E x: She could speak E n g lis h w e ll.
TP
She couldn’t speak E n g lish w e ll.
Could she speak E n g lis h w ell?
O
2. CO ULD còn ñược dùng tro n g các câu n ó i lịc h sự.
ĐẠ
Ex: Could you pass th e s a lt, please?
NG
Could you show me some cam eras, please?
E. MUST and NEED
HƯ
1. M U S T and N E E D cũng là nhữ ng ñộng từ k h iế m kh uyế t.
ẦN
2. M U ST có nghĩa là “ p h ả i” c h ỉ bổn phận p h ả i là m .
• Cấu tạo kh ẳng ñ ịn h , phủ ñ ịn h và n g h i vấ n như C AN .
Ex: You m ust contact her. TR
B
• Chú ý ở th ể phủ ñ ịn h M U S T N ’T có nghĩa là “ cấm ” là m việc gì ñó.
00
Ex: You m ustn’t contact her.

10
• V ì vậy m uốn d iễ n tả ý n gh ĩa “ kh ôn g p h ả i” ta dùng N E E D N ’T /

DO N’T N E E D TO hoặc D O N ’T H A V E TO (kh ô ng cần, không p h ả i)
+3
ñể tha y thế.
P2
Ex: You needn’t co nta ct her.

CẤ
You don’t need to co nta ct he r.

You don’t have to conta ct he r.
A
3. ð ộng từ N E ED vừa là ñộng từ dặc b iệ t, vừa là ñộng từ thường. Chú

HÓ
ý các v í dụ sau:
• ð ộng từ ñặc b iệ t: You need contact h er. (ra re )
Í-
-L
You needn’t contact her.

Need you contact her?
ÁN
• ðộng từ thường: You need to contact her.

TO
You don’t need to contact her.

Do you need to contact her?
NG
F. Một số kiểu nói thường dùng khi gọi diện thoại.

ƯỠ
1. G iớ i th iệ u trê n ñ iệ n th o ạ i.
ID
• T h is is Tom P ip e r here.
• P ip e r speaking.
BỒ
86

2. Nhờ ñ iệ n th o ạ i v iê n g iú p:
• Can I d ia l d ire c t to Zurich?
ƠN
• I ’d lik e to m ake a c a ll to M a d rid .
NH
3. ðể lạ i lờ i nh ắ n : C ould you take a message?
4. Yêu cầu chờ: H ang on a m in ute .
UY
G. Năm phần của một lá thư (Five parts of a letter)
.Q
1. H eading (Thượng ñề): ở góc ta y p h ả i bên trê n gồm ñ ịa c h ỉ của người
TP
v iế t, ngày th á n g v iế t thư.
2. G re e tin g (L ờ i chào): D ear John , D ear M um ...
O
ĐẠ
3. B ody (N ộ i dung thư).
4. C lo sin g (L ờ i k ế t th ú c thư ): Love, Yours sin ce re ly, ...
NG
5. S ignature (Chữ ký).
HƯ
II. PRACTICE
A. Dùng các tính từ chì số lượng dể ñiền vào chỗ trống trong các
ẦN
câu sau cho phù hợp.
1. H e hasn’t g o t __frie n d s. TR
B
2. H e’s got o n ly __ frie iid s .
00
3. He hasn’t g o t__w ine .

10
4. H e’s got o n ly __ w ine .

5. She d id n ’t h a v e ___Sw iss francs.
+3
6. She had o n ly ___F re nch francs.

P2
7. T here is n ’t ___p e tro l.

CẤ
8. W e’ve g o t o n ly ___p e tro l.

B. Translate into Vietnamese:
A
HÓ
L a s t Sunday Tom w e n t to see h is uncle a t a v illa g e about five

k ilo m e tre s fro m h is hom e. H e got th e re e a rly in th e m o rn in g , so he
Í-
had a lo t o f tim e to h e lp h is uncle w ith h is w o rk in th e m aize fie ld

-L
(cánh ñồng bắp). In th e afte rn oon , he swam in th e riv e r w ith his

ÁN
uncle’s sons. H e had a jo lly good tim e indeed.

c. Trả lời các câu hỏi sau, dùng gợi ý trong ngoặc:
TO
1. H ow lo n g does i t ta ke h e r to tra v e l to Hue b y tra in ? (2 days)

NG
2. H ow lon g does i t ta ke them to go to school on foot? ( th irty m inutes)

ƯỠ
3. H ow lo ng d id i t ta ke us to fly fro m H a N o i to H C M C ity? (aboul

th re e hours)
ID
4. H ow lo n g d id i t take h im to come back home b y bus? (about h a lf ar

BỒ
hour)

5. How lon g does i t ta ke th e students to do these exercises? (2 hours)

D. Answer these questions:
ƠN
1. W here are you now?
NH
2. How lon g ago d id you a rriv e here?
3. W h a t d id yo u r frie n d s give you fo r yo u r b irth d a y?
UY
4. H ow much m oney d id you spend yesterday?
5. D id you lose a n y th in g la s t year?
.Q
6. W hat d id you lose?
TP
7. Did you find anything last year?
O
8. W hat d id you fin d ?
ĐẠ
NG
1. Vào 3 giờ chiều hôm qua cô ấ y ñang la u n hà .
2. Bà B row n ñã ñang nâu ă n vào lú c 10 giờ sáng nay.
HƯ
3. Cô C la rk ñã ñang ñ án h m áy vào lú c m ộ t giờ rưỡi chiều.
ẦN
4. Cô ấy có ñang là m việc trê n lầ u vào lú c 8 giờ sáng hôm qua không?
5. C húng tô i ñang học tro n g k h i chúng nó ñang là m b à i tập.
6. TR
Các học s in h ñang lắ n g nghe giáo v iê n tro n g k h i giáo v iê n dang
g iả n g b à i.
B
00
7. T rờ i mưa k h i chúng tô i ñang bơi ở sông.

8. Cô ấy ñang xem T V k h i anh ấ y ñến.
10
F. Translate into Vietnamese:

+3
P2
1. I was d oing m y E n g lis h exercises w hen he came in .

2. The c h ild re n w ere doing th e ir hom ew ork w hen th e ir fa th e r came
CẤ
back fro m w ork.

3. W hen I g ot hom e, m y b ro th e r was s t ill w o rkin g .
A
HÓ
4. W hen I m et h im , he was going to school.

5. W hen th e b e ll ra n g , I was h a v in g lun ch.
Í-
6. Hương was h e lp in g h e r m o th e r in th e k itc h e n w hen h e r frie n d came

-L
to see h er.
7. W hen th e ra in sta rte d , th e y w ere p la n tin g flo w e rs in the garden.
ÁN
8. The teacher was e x p la in in g th e lesson w hen th e headm istress

TO
knocked a t the door.

G. Translate into Vietnamese:
NG
T o n ig h t S im on S m ith is p la y in g in a concert w ith the B ritis h

ƯỠ
Sym phony O rchestra. H e’s o n ly te n years o ld. H e could p la y the piano

when he was fiv e . H e could also read m usic. H e was a ve ry cle ve r
ID
ch ild . He could ta lk and w a lk w hen he was 9 m onths old. He could

BỒ
88

read and w rite w hen he was th re e and he could understand algebra

and speak French w hen he was six.
H. Translate into English:
ƠN
I . C húng ta có p h ả i là m lạ i các b à i tậ p n à y không? Có, chúng ta p h ả i.
NH
2. C húng ta có p h ả i v iế t những câu tr ả lờ i không? K hông, chúng ta
kh ôn g cần.
UY
3. T ô i p h ả i ñọc lạ i b à i học này.
.Q
4. A n h ấ y kh ô n g cần lau bàn bây giờ.
TP
5. Các s in h v iê n p h ả i v iế t b à i ch ín h tả này.
6. A n h ta p h ả i ñánh ră n g sau các bữa ăn.
O
7. C húng p h ả i ñ ì ngủ và thức dậy sớm.
ĐẠ
8. Các bạn cấm kh ôn g ñược vắng m ặ t.
9. C húng ta cấm kh ôn g ñược n ó i chuyện tro n g lớp.
NG
10. C húng ta p h ả i n ó i tiế n g A n h tro n g giờ học tiế n g A n h của chúng ta.
HƯ
I. Complete the following dialogue:
ẦN
A : Good m o rn in g . Dona Taxis.
B: (1)
A : W hen? TR
B : ___, (2)
B
00
A : W here are you a t th e mom ent?

10
B : ___, (3)
A : A n d yo ur nam e... W hat’s yo u r name?
+3
B : ___. (4)
P2
A : E ig h t. T h a n k you ve ry m uch.
CẤ
J. ðiền từ thích hợp vào mỗi một chỗ trống trong lá thư sau:
1054 Sunshine Avenue
A
Los A ngeles, Ca.

HÓ
2 0 th M ay.
D ear A nna ,
Í-
L a s t S aturday I ( 1 ) ___on an excursion to N ia g ara F a lls . I w e nt

-L
w ith m y b ro th e r. I ( 2 ) ___up a t 5.30 and ( 3 ) ___ h im ( 4 ) ___ th e bus

ÁN
sta tio n . In th e afternoon, we v is ite d th e F a lls. T hey (5) ___ very

fa n ta s tic. W e ( 6 ) ___th e riv e r. We had lu n ch ( 7 )___ a h o te l and we (8)
TO
___coffee. ( 9 ) ___ th e evening we (1 0 )___ hom e. We (11) ___a g ir l (12)

___ Quebec. She d id n o t (13) ___ E n g lis h (14) ___ we had to speak
NG
F ren ch (1 5 )___th e tim e .

ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
8Í

ƠN
I. PRESENTATION
NH
A. Thì hiện tại hoàn thành (The Present Perfect Tense)
UY
1. C á ch c h ia :
.Q
g + îa ve /jia s + past p a rtic ip le
TP
O
s + h aven t /jia s n »t + past p a rtic ip le
ĐẠ
NG
^ av6/has + s + p ast p a rtic ip le ?
2. Cách dùng:
HƯ
• D iễ n tả m ột h à n h ñộng xả y ra tro n g quá khứ. T h ờ i gian quá khứ
ẦN
không rõ rệ t. (N ếu rõ rệ t như Y ES TE R D A Y , LA S T N IG H T ..., ta
p hả i dùng S im ple P ast). Các trạ n g từ sau ñây thường ñ i kèm với th ì
TR
Present P erfect: A LR E A D Y (ñã), EV ER (có bao giờ), N E V E R (chưa
bao giờ), N O T Y E T (chưa).
B
00
Ex: We have seen th a t film a lre ad y.

10
Have you ever been to France?

• D iễn tả m ộ t hành ñộng vừa m ới xả y ra . Thường có trạ n g từ JU S T
+3
ñ i kèm.
P2
Ex: They have iu s t fin is h e d th e ir w ork.

CẤ
• D iễn tả m ột hành ñộng b ắ t ñầu từ quá khứ và còn tiế p tục ñến h iệ n
tạ i. Thường có các g iớ i từ S IN C E (từ k h i), FOR (ñược, tro n g vòng)
A
và trạ n g từ UP TO NO W (cho ñến giờ) ñ i kèm .

HÓ
Ex: We have learned E n g lis h I since 1990.

Í-
I fo r 6 years.
-L
B. Phân biệt HAVE BEEN TO và HAVE GONE TO.

ÁN
• Have been to: d i ñâu ñó và ñã về rồ i.

• Have gone to: ñ i ñâu ñó và chưa về.
TO
E x: We have been to D a la t C ity .

NG
They have gone to D a la t C ity .

c. Trạng từ JUST & ALREADY vñi thì Present Perfect.
ƯỠ
1. J u s t và A lready thường dùng với th ì P resen tP erfect. >

ID
2. Just diễn tả một hành dộng vừa mới hoàn tất. Ị

BỒ
E x: She has ju s t le ft. 1

3. A lre a d y d iễ n tả m ộ t h à n h ñộng ñã ñược hoàn th à n h tro n g quá khứ

nhưag kh ô ng rõ th ờ i g ian. '
ƠN
Ex: I have already seen this film.
NH
D. Thì Present Perfect dùng vói HOW MUCH / MANY.
1. K h i HO W M U C H / M A N Y dược dùng ñể h ỏ i số lượng, số lầ n ñã
UY
là m , ñã có, ñã thự c h iệ n tro n g quá khứ , ta dùng dộng từ tro n g c â u ở
.Q
th ì P resent P erfect.
TP
Ex: How m any postcards has he sent?
How m uch m oney has he spent?
O
ĐẠ
H ow m any cig a re tte s have you smoked?
H ow much perfum e has she sold?
NG
2. T rá i lạ i k h i h ỏ i vớ i H O W LO N G , ta thường d ặ t ñộng từ tro n g câu ổ
th ì P resent P e rfe ct C ontinuous.
HƯ
E x: How lo n g have th e y been le a rn in g E n glish?
ẦN
E. Thì Present Perfect ñối chiếu với thì Simple Past.
P R ESE N T P ER FEC T TR S IM P L E PAST
1. Luôn luôn cớ liê n hệ ñến h iệ n 1. C h ỉ n ó i về quá khứ. Có thờ i
B
00
tạ i. N ó i khác ñ i nó d iễ n tả m ộ t g ia n quá khứ h ay tìn h huống

10
h à n h ñộng quá khứ m à còn quá khứ rõ rệ t. H à n h ñộng ñó

liê n quan ñến h iệ n tạ i hay k ế t ñã chấm dứt h ẳ n , kh ông liê n
+3
quả của h à n h ñộng còn kéo d à i quan gì ñến h iệ n tạ i.

P2
ñến h iệ n tạ i.
CẤ
2. Thường có các từ : since, fo r, 2. Các từ ñ i kèm : ago, yesterday,

A
never, ever, a lre ad y, ju s t, so la s t n ig h t, la s t ye ar, in 1960...

HÓ
fa r, th is week d i kèm .
3. E x: Tom has lo s t h is kev. (Tom E x: Tom lo s t h is ke v vesterdav.
Í-
(T a kh ô n g b iế t Tom ñã tìm
-L
vẫ n chưa tìm th ấ y chìa khóa:

hậu quả còn ñến giờ) th ấ y chìa khóa của anh ta hay
ÁN
chưa)
TO
F. Thì Present Perfect với SINCE và FOR.

NG
1. FOR & S IN C E thường ñược dùng vớ i th ì P resent P erfect.

2. FO R dược dùng ñể c h ỉ m ộ t khoảng th ờ i g ian.
ƯỠ
E x: He has been here fo r 2 days/ a few m onths.

ID
3. S IN C E ñược dùng dể c h ỉ m ộ t th ờ i ñiểm cụ th ể :

E x: I ’ve been th e cham pion since 1990.
BỒ
91
II. PRACTICE
ƠN
1. Xe lửa vừa m ới rờ i ga.
NH
2. Cô ta vừa m ớ i ă n sáng.
3. A nh ấy chưa xem cuốn p h im này.
UY
4. Cô ấ y ñã thứ c dậy chưa? Chưa.
.Q
5. Các bạn ñã tắ t ñèn ñ iệ n chưa? R ồi.
TP
ð. Viết câu theo mẫu dựa vào tình h u n g ch o trc, dùng HAVE
GONE TO hay HAVE BEEN TO.
O
ĐẠ
1. M a ry has got toothache. She is n ’t here. She has gone to th e d e n tis t.
2. They were in London last month. They are here now. They have
NG
been to London.
HƯ
3. John needs some money. He isn’t here now.
4. Janet broke her arm. She isn’t here now.
ẦN
5. Paul needs some stamps. He isn’t here now.
6. Mary was at home a moment ago. She is here now.
7. TR
He was at the bank this morning. He is here now.
B
8. She was in Paris last year. She is here now.
00
9. Tom was in hospital last month. He is here now.

10

+3
1. You mustn’t look at me. I haven’t looked at you.

P2
2. You mustn’t kiss the bride. I haven’t kissed her.

3. You mustn’t borrow money. I haven’t borrowed it.
CẤ
4. You mustn’t close the door. I haven’t closed it.

A
5. Is she going to sig n h e r name? She’s alre ad y signed it.

HÓ
6. A re you going to clean th e floor? I ’ve a lre ad y cleaned it.

7. What has he just done? He has just scored a goal.
Í-
D. Mary is 65 years old. She has had an interesting life. Write

-L
sentences about the things she has done, using the Present
ÁN
Perfect.
TO
1. She / do / m any d iffe re n t jobs...

2. She / be / to m any places.
NG
3. She / do / a lot of interesting things.

ƯỠ
4. She / w rite / te n books.

5. She / m eet / a lo t o f in te re s tin g people.
ID
6. She / be / married five times.

BỒ
92

E. Put in GONE or BEEN:

lr He’s on holiday at the moment. He’s __ to Spain.
ƠN
2. W here’s J ill? She’s n o t here. I th in k she’s __to th e bank.
NH
3. H e llo , P at. W here have y o u ___? I ’v e ___to th e bank.
4. H ave you e v e r___to M exico? N o, never.
UY
5. My parents aren’t at home this evening. They’v e __ out.
6. There’s a new restaurant in town. Have you __ to it?
.Q
7. Paris is a wonderful city. I’v e __ there many times.
TP
8. Helen was here earlier but I think she’s __ now.
O
F. Make sentences using the words given:
ĐẠ
1. I sm oke / 20 ciga rettes yesterday.
NG
2. H ow m any ciga rettes / you / sm oke / today?
3. I / be / i l l tw ice so fa r th is year.
HƯ
4. How many tim es be / you ill last year?
5. I / n o t d rin k / any coffee so fa r today.
ẦN
6. H e / be / la te th re e tim es th is week.
7. How many games / the team win last season? TR
8. How many games / the team / win / so far this season?
B
G. Put the verb in the correct form, Present Perfect or Simple
00
10
Past.
1. I (not I play) golf when I was on holiday last summer.
+3
2. M r. C la rk (w o rk) in a bank fo r 15 years. Then he gave i t up.

P2
3. Molly lives in Dublin. She (live) there all her life.

CẤ
4. Bob and Alice are married. They (be) married for 20 years.
5. When we were on holiday, the weather (be) awful.
A
6. The weather (be) very nice recently, don’t you think?

HÓ
7. My grandfather died 30 years ago. I (never / meet) him.

8. I don’t know Carol’s husband. I (never / meet) him.
Í-
-L
H. Use the words in brackets to answer the questions:

ÁN
I . Have you lo s t your key? (yesterday). Yes. I lo s t i t yesterday.

2. Have you seen Alan? (ten minutes ago). ___.
TO
3. H ave you p a in te d th e gate? (la s t w e e k ).__ .

4. Has S arah gone to France? (on F rid a y )___ .
NG
5. H ave th e y had dinner? (a t 7 o’c lo c k )__ .

ƯỠ
6. H as he sta rte d h is new job? (y e s te rd a y )___.

ID
BỒ
9Í

I. Xác ñịnh các ñộng từ gạch dưới trong các câu có ñúng thì
ƠN
không. Nếu sai, sửa lại cho ñúng.
1. Tom a rrive d la s t week.
NH
2. Have you seen Pam la s t week?
UY
3. I have fin ish e d m y w ork.
4. I have fin ish e d m y w o rk a t 2 o’clock.
.Q
5. W hen have you fin is h e d your w ork?
TP
6. George has le ft school 3 years ago.
7. W here’s Ann? She’s gone to the cinem a.
O
ĐẠ
8. Napoleon B onaparte has died in 1821.
9. Have you ever been to B rita in ?
NG
10. I haven’t seen you a t the p a rty on S aturday.
11. The w eather has been very bad la s t week.
HƯ
J. Put in FOR or SINCE
ẦN
1. I t ’s been r a in in g __ lunch tim e .
2. Tom’s fa th e r has been doing th e same jo b ___20 years.
3.
TR
Have you been le a rn in g E n g lis h __ a long tim e?
B
4. Sarah has liv e d in L o n d o n ___ 1985.
00
5. __ C hristm as, th e w eather has been quite good.

10
6. Please h u rry up! W e’ve been w a itin g ___an hour.

+3
7. K evin has been lo o kin g fo r a jo b ___ he le ft school.

8. The house is ve ry d irty . We haven’t cleaned i t __ ages.
P2
CẤ
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR T7A

A
HÓ
I. PRESENTATION
Í-
A. TOO MUCH - TOO MANY - ENOUGH

-L
Các tín h từ này ñược dùng như sau:

ÁN
• Too much ñ i trước uncountable noun (danh từ không ñếm ñược)

• Too m any ñ i trước countable noun (danh từ ñếm ñược).
TO
• Enough có thể ñ i trước cả danh từ ñếm ñược và khôn g ñếm ñược.

NG
Ex: There’s too much p o llu tio n .

There are too m any problem s.
ƯỠ
There isn ’t enough w ater.

ID
There aren’t enough jobs.

BỒ
94

B. TO HAVE TO
• ð ộng từ H A V E TO + V có n gh ĩa là “ p h ả i” d iễ n tá m ộ t bổn phận
ƠN
phải làm, tương ñương vởi MUST +v.
NH
• Nó ỉà m ộ t ñộng từ thường m ặc dầu nó còn có th ể dùng như m ột
ñộng từ dặc b iệ t.
UY
• H A V E TO có ñử các th ì. Còn M U S T th ì ch ỉ có h iệ n tạ i. Quá khứ
p h ả i dùng H A V E TO th a y.
.Q
• Cách chia:
TP
O
T h ì H iệ n T ạ i
ĐẠ
I (we, you, th e y) have to le a rn hard.
NG
H e (she) has to le a rn hard .
I don’t have to le a rn hard.
HƯ
He doesn’t have to le a rn hard.
ẦN
Do you have to le a rn hard?
Does he have to le a rn hard?TR
T h ì Quá K hứ
B
00
I (we, you, th e y) had to le a rn hard.

10
He (she) had to le a rn h ard.

+3
I d id n ’t have to le a rn h a rd .
P2
He d id n 't have to le a rn h ard .

CẤ
D id you have to le a rn hard?

A
D id he have to le a rn hard?
HÓ
c. Thì tương lai thưòng (The Simple Future Tense)

Í-
1. Cách chia:
-L
I (we) s h a ll + V
ÁN
You (th e y, he, she) w ill + V

TO
I (we) sh a ll n o t + V (shan’t)
NG
You (th e y, he, she) w ill n o t + V (w on’t)

S h a ll I (we) + V?
ƯỠ
W ill you (th ey, he, she) + V?

ID
2. C á c h d ù n g : D iễ n tả m ộ t h à n h ñộng sẽ xả y ra tro n g tương la i

BỒ
nhưng kh ôn g chắc chắn bằn g th ì tương la i gần. T h ì này thường có
95

các từ ñ i kèm : to m o rro w , n e xt year, to m orro w m o rn in g , th e day

a fte r tom orro w (ng ày m ố t)
Ex: W e s h a ll have a te s t tom orrow .
ƠN
W ill you go to th e cinem a w ith me?
NH
D. ðại từ bất ñịnh (Indefinite pronouns)
UY
1. ð ạ i từ b ấ t ñ ịn h là nhữ ng từ c h ỉ số lượng m ộ t cách chung chung,
kh ôn g n ó i rõ bao n h iê u người h ay vậ t.
.Q
2. T ro n g tiế n g A n h ta có các ñ ạ i từ b ấ t ñ ịn h sau: (K h i là m chủ ngữ,
TP
chúng ñ i vớ i ñộng từ số ít.)
O
Some body E ve ry body
ĐẠ
one one
th in g th in g
NG
w here w here
HƯ
A ny body No body
ẦN
one one
th in g th in g
w here TR w here
B
3. Exam ples:
00
• I don’t see anybody in th e room .

10
• I see nobody in th e room .

+3
• A n y one can do th is .
• E verybody is here.
P2
• There’s someone in m y room .

CẤ
• D id you go anyw here la s t summer?

• E veryw here in th is c ity is b e a u tifu l.
A
HÓ
E. ðại từ chỉ số lượng (Quantitive pronouns)

1. Ta có các ñại từ chỉ số lượng sau: One, both, neither, same, all,
Í-
none.
-L
2. B o th có nghĩa là “cả h a i” (dùng k h i có 2 người, 2 v ậ t)

ÁN
3. All có nghĩa là “tất cả” (dùng khi có từ 3 người, 3 vật trở lên).
4. Neither có nghĩa là “không có ai / cái nào” trong 2 người/ vật.
TO
5. None có nghĩa là “ kh ô n g a i / kh ô n g c á i nào” tro n g 3 người/ v ậ t trở

NG
lê n .
6. T a có th ể dùng O F + danh từ số n h iều h a y O F + object pronoun:
ƯỠ
the m , us sau các ñ ạ i từ trê n .

ID
7. ð ộng từ theo sau A L L O F + (P ro)N oun có th ể ở số í t hay số n h iề u

tù y vào tiế n g danh từ theo sau ñếm ñược h a y k h ô n g ñếm ñược:
BỒ
96

• A ll o f th e fu rn itu re is new.
_ • A ll o f th e students are good.
• A ll o f them are good
ƠN
NH
II. PRACTICE
UY
1. T ô i kh ô n g có ñủ tiề n ñể ñ i n g h ỉ m át.
.Q
2. K hô n g có ñủ ghế cho m ọi người ngồi.
TP
3. A n h â y ñã kh ôn g nhận ñược việc là m ñó vì anh ây không có ñủ
O
k in h n ghiệm .
ĐẠ
4. T ô i dã kh ôn g là m xong b à i th i v ì tô i ñã không cóñủ giờ.
5. C húng tô i ñã tiê u x à i n h iều tiề n .
NG
6. A n h có n hiề u bạn không?
7. T ô i kh ôn g th ể uống trà này. Có n hiều ñường tro n g ñó quá.
HƯ
8. ðã kh ô n g có n h iều người ở bữa tiệc.
ẦN
9. Cô ta là m ộ t người trầ m lặ n g . Cô ta kh ông n ó i quá nhiều.
B. Translate into English, using the verb HAVE TO:
TR
1. C húng p h ả i ñ i ngủ sớm.
B
2. A n h â y ñã kh ô n g p h ả i ở tro n g khách sạn trước trậ n th i ñâu.
00
3. M a ry ñã p h ả i ăn bò b ít tế t và xà lá ch cho bữa trưa không?

10
4. Tom kh ô n g p h ả i chạy 2 km m ỗ i ngày.

+3
5. B ạn có p h ả i lu yệ n tậ p tiế n g A n h 3 giờ m ỗi ngày không?

P2
6. Cô ấy dã p h ả i ăn kiê n g.
7. C h ị g á i tô i p h ả i thức dậy sớm dể rửa dọn.
CẤ
8. T ô i p h ả i pha trà và cà phê cho ba má tô i m ỗi sáng.

A
c . Tr lời một câu với Yes, một câu với NO.
HÓ
1. W ill you come here again n e x t week?

Í-
2. W ill you be here tom orrow ?

-L
3. W ill he have tim e to go to th e lib ra ry tom orrow ?

4. S h a ll we have tim e to fin is h th e lesson?
ÁN
5. Will there be an English lesson next Monday?

TO
6. W ill you be on d uty n e x t week?

7. S h a ll I see you n e xt week?
NG
8. W ill th e re be tim e to p la y fo o tb a ll a fte r classes?

ƯỠ
D. Trả lời các câu hỏi sau, dùng từ gợi ý:

ID
1. W ho w ill come to th e lib ra ry w ith me? (Nam )

2. W ho s h a ll we m eet n e x t week? (o tir o ld teacher)
BỒ
97

3. W hen sh a ll I see you again? (n e xt Sunday)

4. W hen w ill you be on duty? (n e xt week)
ƠN
5. W hen w ill there be new books fo r us? (n e xt m onth )
NH
6. W here sh a ll we m eet again? (a t the lib ra ry )
7. W hat w ill he do tom orrow ? (to go to H C M c ity )
UY
8. W hat lesson s h a ll I prepare fo r n e xt week? (lesson 5)
9. How w ill you get home? (by bus)
.Q
10. How long w ill he be here? (fo r te n days)
TP
E. ðiền vào chỗ trống trong các câu sau với những ñại từ bất
O
ñịnh thích hợp.
ĐẠ
1. Is th e re __ in the bathroom ?
NG
2. __ is in th e garden.
HƯ
3. __ is here.
4. I ’m lo o kin g f o r __ fo r m y son. I t ’s h is b irth d a y n e x t week.
ẦN
5. __ is very expensive. Have you g o t___ cheaper.
6. I ’m sorry, s ir . __ is cheap nowadays.
7. __ from th e office was a t the w edding. TR
8. I love weddings. D id __ cry?
B
00
9. N o ,__ cried.
10
10. ___danced on th e tab le a t the p a rty.

+3

P2
1. A ll o f the cars have wheels.

2. None o f th is m oney is m ine.
CẤ
3. Some o f the people are frie n d ly .

A
4. J im th in k s th a t a ll o f the museums are boring.

HÓ
5. N e ith e r o f Tom ’s parents is E ng lish .

6. Both o f my siste rs are s till a t school.
Í-
7. N e ith e r o f the 2 shops has an E nglish-V ie tnam ese d ictio n a ry.

-L
ÁN

TO
NG
I. PRESENTATION: Các dạng so sánh của tính từ (Comparisons

of Adjectives)
ƯỠ
A. So sánh bằng & không bằng:

ID
„ . sh o rt
s2
BỒ
Si + be + as adj + as +
_____________ long_______
98
M y fa th e r is as old as m y m other.
ƠN
T h is car is as expensive as th a t car.
as sh o rt
NH
Si + be + n o t + adj + as + S2
so long
UY
M y fa th e r is n ’t as/ so o ld as m y m other.
T h is car is n ’t as/ so expensive as th a t car.
.Q
TP
B. So sánh hơn và kém hơn:
Si + be + s h o rt adj + ER + th a n + s2
O
ĐẠ
G reenland is colder th a n Canada.
M o u nt Evere s t is h ig h e r th a n M o n t B lanc.
NG
S i + be + m ore + long ad.j + th a n + S2
A car is m ore expensive th a n a m otorcycle.
HƯ
Y our room is m ore com fortable th a n m y room .
ẦN
sh o rt
S i + be + less adj + th a n + S;
long
Canada is less cold th a n G reenland.
TR
B
A m otorcycle is less expensive th a n a car.
00
10
So sánh nhất và kém nhất:

+3
s + be + the + s h o rt adj + EST

P2
She is the shortest.

CẤ
M a ry is the ta llest.
s + be + the m ost + long adj
A
T h is b u ild in g is th e m ost m odern.

HÓ
T h is lesson is the m ost d iffic u lt.

Í-
sh o rt
s + be + the le a st + adj
-L
long
ÁN
Tom is th e le a st in te llig e n t.
You are th e le a st heavy.
TO
N o te s :
NG
1. Các tín h từ ngắn (sh o rt adjs) là những tín h từ có m ộ t hay 2 âm

tiế t.
ƯỠ
Ex: hot, young, n arro w , busy...

ID
2. Các tín h từ d à i (lo n g adjs) là những tín h từ có từ 2 âm tiế t trở lên.

E x: m odern, happy, b e a u tifu l, d iffic u lt...
BỒ
3. Các tín h từ sau có dạng so sánh hơn và n h ấ t b ấ t qui tắc:

good b e tte r the best
99
bad/ i l l worse th e w o rst

m any/ much m ore th e m ost
ƠN
little less th e le a st
fa r fa rth e r th e fa rth e s t
NH
4. Cách thê m ñuôi ER, EST vào tín h từ ngắn dể th à n h lậ p so sánh
hơn và so sánh n h ấ t:
UY
• Cứ việ c thê m ñuôi ER, EST vào các tín h từ.
.Q
Ex: younger, o ld e r, new er
TP
• Nếu tín h từ tậ n cùng bằng m ộ t phụ âm , trước nó là m ộ t nguyên
âm , ta gấp ñ ô i phụ âm rồ i m ới th ê m ER, EST:
O
ĐẠ
E x: th in - th in n e r; fa t - fa tte r; b ig - b ig ge r
• Các tín h từ có h a i âm tiế t tậ n cùng bằng Ỵ , L E , E T, o w , ER ñều
NG
ñược xem là tín h từ ngắn, thê m ER h ay EST k h i so sánh hơn và
n h ấ t. R iêng Y p h ả i ñ ổ i th à n h I trước ñã.
HƯ
Ex: noisy - n o is ie r happy - h a p p ie r
ẦN
noble - n o b le r q u ie t - q u ie te r
n a rro w - n a rro w e r clever — cle ve rer
TR
II. PRACTICE
B
00

10
1. Phan Rang th ì nón g hơn ðà L ạ t.

+3
2. Nước A nh th ì rộ n g bằng nước Pháp.

P2
3. C ái cặp của bạn th ì ñẹp bằng cái cặp của tô i,

4. T i v i màu th ì kh ôn g rẻ bằng t i v i trắ n g ñen.
CẤ
5. A nh tra i tô i th ì cao hơn tô i.

6. Cô ấy th ì th ô n g m in h hơn em g á i cô ấy.
A
HÓ
7. M ôn ð ịa lí th ì kém th ú v ị hơn m ôn Toán.

8. M ôn Toán th ì kh ó hơn m ôn tiế n g A nh .
Í-
9. N hà của tô i th ì tiệ n n g h i hơn nhà cô ấy.

-L
10. Con ñường n ày th ì í t ồn ào hơn ñường N guyễn V ãn T rỗ i.

ÁN
B. ðiển vào chỗ trống bằng tính từ ở dạng so sánh nhất.

1. T h is i s ___room in th e house, (larg e)
TO
2. A utum n i s __ season o f th e year, (fin e )

NG
3. He is ___boy in m y class, (ta ll)

4. L an i s ___p u p il in m y class, (h a rd -w o rkin g )
ƯỠ
5. T h is i s ___o f our lessons, (d iffic u lt)

ID
6. W in te r i s __ season o f th e year, (cold)

7. Sum m er i s ___season o f th e year, (h o t)
BỒ
100

c. ðiền vào chỗ trống bằng tính từ ồ dạng so sánh hơn.

1. Ja nu a ry i s ___F ebruary, ([long)
ƠN
2. Boys a re ___g irls , (stro n g )
3. Sum m er i s S prin g , (h o t)
NH
4. W in te r i s ____A utum n, (cold)
UY
5. Lan is ___Hương, (d ilig e n t)
6. N am i s ___Ba. (clever)
.Q
7. F rench i s ___E n g lis h , (d iffic u lt)
TP
D. ðiển vào chỗ trống bằng tính từ ỏ dạng so sánh bằng hay
O
không bằng.
ĐẠ
1. Is L a n ___Nam? (clever)
NG
2. T here a re ___days in J u ly as in A ugust, (m any) ,
3. T he moon i s ___th e sun. (b rig h t)
HƯ
4. A re y o u ___your frie n d ? (stro n g )
5. There aren ’t ___days in F e b ru a iy as in M a rch , (m any)
ẦN
6. The moon is n ’t ___th e sun. (b rig h t)
7. You aren’t ___you r frie n d , (clever) TR
B
00
1. A n h ấy th ì xấu người (ngpại h ìn h ) hơn ch ị ấy.

10
2. Ô ng ấy là người giàu n h ấ t th ế giớ i.

+3
3. Ô ng ấ y giàu hơn th ầ y giáo của chúng tô i.

P2
4. B oeing là lo ạ i m áy bay n h a n h n h ấ t.
5. M o u nt E verest là ngọn n ù i cao n h ấ t.
CẤ
6. M ộ t chiếc xe m in i th ì kh ô n g tiệ n n g h i bằng m ộ t chiếc xe R olls-

A
Royce.
HÓ
7. B rutus C ray th ì g iỏ i hơn Joe Freezer.

8. B à i học n à y th ì kém th ú v ị n h ấ t.
Í-

-L
SEASONS A N D W E ATH E R
ÁN
S p rin g is th e firs t season o f th e year. I t is n o t so cold as w in te r

and n o t so h o t as sum m er. S p rin g is th e season o f hope. P la n ts begin
TO
to grow , buds appear on th e trees and th e fie ld s are green again. I t is a

NG
ve ry busy season fo r farm e rs and gardeners.

A fte r s p rin g comes sum m er. I t is th e h o tte s t season o f a ll. The
ƯỠ
days are lo nge r and th e n ig h ts are sh o rte r. In sum m er i t is ve ry

ID
pleasant to bathe and sw im in th e riv e r.

A utum n b rin g s w ith th e h a rv e s t tim e . I t is th e season o f p le n ty.
BỒ
101

The field s are ye llo w w ith rip e corn. The w e a th e r is cool. M any people
ƠN
say th a t autum n is th e fin e s t season o f th e year.
W hen w in te r comes, the days get s h o rte r and the n ig h ts lon ger. I t
NH
is very cold. B ut w in te r is a ve ry good season fo r sports.
UY
.Q
1. ðó là lo ạ i rượu vang ngon n h ấ t (best) m à anh ta từ ng uống.
TP
2. ðó là cuốn p him h ồ i hộp n h ấ t (th e m ost e x c itin g ) mà họ từng xem .
3. ðó là chiếc xe hơi n ha nh n h ấ t m à cô ta từ ng lá i.
O
4. ðó là lo ạ i bột g iặ t (d e te rg e nt) tố t n h ấ t m à bà ta từng dùng.
ĐẠ
5. ðó là lo ạ i nhạc hay n h ấ t (th e m ost in te re s tin g m usic) mà anh ta
từng nghe.
NG
H. Write the comparative form or the superlative form of the
HƯ
adjectives in parentheses:
ẦN
I. H elen is (young) Bob.
2. T h is book is (in te re s tin g ) th a t one.
3. Oranges are (sweet) lem ons. TR
B
4. The weather today is (w arm ) it was yesterday.
00
5. T his exercise is (easy) th e la s t one.

10
6. Lisa is (in te llig e n t) h e r siste r.

7. I am (tire d ) I was la s t n ig h t.
+3
8. H er cold is much (bad) m ine.

P2
9. Joy is (ta ll) g irl in our class.

CẤ
10. She is (a th le tic) stud ent in the school.

A
11. New Y ork is (la rge ) c ity in th e U.S.

HÓ
12. A ỉice is (good) stud ent in our class.

Í-
13. P ark Avenue is (w ide) s tre e t in N ew Y o rk C ity .

-L
14. M r. G ilb e rt is (busy) teacher in our school.

ÁN
15. Grace is (frie n d ly ) g ir l in our group.

TO
16. He is (bad) student in our class,

i. ðặt câu theò mẫu:
NG
1. H e’s ve ry busy. He’s one o f th e b usie st m en in th e w o rld .

ƯỠ
2. She’s very im p o rta n t.

ID
3. H e’s ve ry ric h .
4. She’s ve ry in te llig e n t.
BỒ
5. H e’s ve ry strong.
6. She’s v e ry b e a u tifu l.
102
ƠN
I. PRESENTATION
NH
A. Mầu câu có ñộng từ nguyên mẫu
s+V
UY
1. + TO IN F IN IT IV E
Ị w a n t to have some beer.
.Q
TP
She w ants to cook th e d in n e r.
T hey w anted to h elp you.
O
ĐẠ
He lik e s to go w ith you.
M a ry hopes to see you again.
NG
2. s + V + o + TO IN F IN IT IV E
HƯ
He w anted you to reserve a table .
I expect you to come e arly.
ẦN
T hey asked us to s it down.
Tom to ld me to te ll a story. TR
B
M y m o the r advised me to le a rn com puter.
00
He requested th e p olice to show th e way.

10
They begged us to h elp them .

+3
B. Mầu câu với TOO, ENOUGH + ñộng từ nguyên mẫu:

P2
adj
CẤ
1. s+V + too +
adv
+ fo r someone + to do s th
A
I t is too fa r fo r me to w a lk .
HÓ
He speaks too s o ftly fo r us to hear.

Í-
adj
2. s +V + + enough + fo r someone + to do s th
-L
adv
ÁN
We a re n’t ric h enough to tra v e l everyw here by ta x i.

He speaks lo u d ly enough fo r us to hear,
TO
c. ðộng từ nối (Linking Verbs)

NG
1. ðộng từ n ố i là nhữ ng ñộng từ tương ñương với TO BE, v ì vậy theo

ƯỠ
sau chúng p h ả i là m ộ t tiế n g tín h từ.

2. Hầu h ế t các lin k in g verbs là nhữ ng ñộng từ c h ỉ giác quan.
ID
• M ộ t sô' lin k in g verbs: look (trô n g có vẻ), fe e l (cảm th â y ), taste (nếm

BỒ
có v ị), sound (nghe có vẻ), sm e ll (ngử i th ấ y ), become (trở nên), ta rn
103

(hóa th à n h )
Ex: They became lazy
ƠN
I feel sleepy
NH
She looks young.
The leaves tu rn e d yellow .
UY
D. Câu nối kết (Connected Statements)
.Q
1. Câu n ô i k ế t là câu liê n k ế t vớ i m ộ t câu ñã n ó i ở trước v ì có cùng ý
TP
hoặc kh ẳ n g ñ ịn h hoặc phủ ñ ịn h .
O
2. Câu n ố i k ế t kh ắ n g ñ ịn h : tiế n g V iệ t dịch là “cũng vậ y” .
ĐẠ
A ffirm a tiv e state m e n t + and + s + V + too
She w e n t to college and he d id , too.
NG
He is tire d and I am, too.
HƯ
A ffirm a tiv e state m e n t + and + so + V + s
John is young and so is B ill.
ẦN
She w e n t to college and so d id he.
TR
N o te : Nếu ñộng từ ở phần ñầu là ñộng từ ñặc b iệ t (be, can...), ở phần
n ố i k ế t, ñộng từ ñó ñược lặ p lạ i. N ếu là ñộng từ thường ở h iệ n tạ i hay
B
quá khứ, th ì dùng DO, DOES, D ID ở phần n ố i k ế t.
00
3. Câu nôi k ế t phủ ñ ịn h : tiế n g V iệ t d ịch là “ cũng không” .

10
N egative state m e nt + and + s + V + n o t + e ith e r

+3
The engine d id n ’t w o rk and th e com puter d id n ’t, e ith e r.

P2
B ill w on’t be th e re and D ic k w on’t, e ith e r.__________

CẤ
N egative state m e n t + and + n e ith e r + V + s

She doesn’t w o rk and n e ith e r do th e y.
A
B ill w on’t be th e re and n e ith e r w ill D ick.

HÓ
N o te : Nếu dùng cấu trú c vớ i N e ith e r, ñộng từ ở kh ẳn g ñ ịn h .

Í-
4. M ore exam ples:

-L
• She doesn’t w o rk and n e ith e r do th e y.

• B ill w on’t be th e re and D ic k w on’t, e ith e r.
ÁN
• John is young and so is B ill.

TO
5. Connected statem ents o f co n tra st (câu n ố i k ế t tương phản)

• They understood you b u t I d id n ’t .
NG
• J im can’t sw im b u t B ill can.

ƯỠ
E. The Simple Past, Simple Future & Present Perfect of

TO HAVE TO.
ID
1. Ta ñã học h iệ n tạ i của TO H A V E TO . N ó ñồng nghĩa vớ i M U S T.

BỒ
104

T h ì quá khứ của nó là H A D TO.

W hy d id you have to wash your h a ir la s t n ig ht?
ƠN
I had to wash m y h a ir ỉa s í R ig h t because I ’m going to the opera
to n ig h t. _____________ __________
NH
s h a ll
2. S im ple Future: s -j- -f- have to + V
UY
w ill
You w on’t have to clean the to ile t.
.Q
You w ill have to w o rk hard.
TP
have
3. P resent P erfect: s + ; + had to + V
O
has
ĐẠ
I ’ve never had to clean the to ile t.
NG
F. To be able to + V: Present, Past, Future & Present Perfect.
HƯ
1. To be able to + V tương ñương vớ i ñộng từ C AN . Nó thường ñược
dùng ñể th a y cho C AN tro n g các th i (tenses) m à C A N không có.
ẦN
2. He can d riv e = He is able to d rive.
He could d riv e = He was able to d rive .
He w ill be able to d rive .
TR
B
He has been able to d rive .
00
3. Chú ý : C O U LD ở quá khứ có nghĩa hơi khác vớ i W AS A B LE TO.

10
W AS A B L E TO thường bao hàm nghĩa “th à n h công tro n g việc làm

+3
m ộ t cá i gì” hơn là “k h ả năng là m m ộ t việc gì ñó” tro n g quá khứ k h i

dùng C O U LD :
P2
Because he w orked h a rd he was able to fin is h th e jo b in tim e.

CẤ
The house was on fire . He was able to save th e ch ild .

She was able to pass th e te st.
A
HÓ
II. PRACTICE
Í-

-L
1. M a ry th íc h lau các phòng.

ÁN
2. Cô ta cũng m uốn nấu m ón bò rô t i (roa st beef)

3. Họ ñề n g h ị ñ i chơi ngoài trờ i.
TO
4. Ô ng B row n quyết ñ ịn h bán xe hơi của ông ấy.

5. Họ không m uôn giúp ñỡ chúng tô i.
NG
6. Cô ấy th íc h du lịc h bằng xe lửa hơn.

ƯỠ
?. B a m á tô i khuyên tô i học chăm chỉ.

8. T h ầ y giáo bảo Cuúng tô i n h ìn lê n bảng.
ID
9. A n h ấy giúp cô ấỵ là m b à i k iể m tra .
BỒ
105

10. Nam m ong cô ấy ñ i với anh ấy.
ƠN
B. Nối các câu sau hoặc trả lời theo mẫu:
NH
» He can’t lif t it. I t ’s ve ry heavy.
I t ’s too heavy fo r h im to lift .
UY
• Can he lif t the boxes?
.Q
No, he is n ’t stro n g enough to lif t them .
TP
1. They can’t d rin k it. I t ’s ve ry hot.
O
2. She can’t buy it. I t ’s too expensive.
ĐẠ
3. He can’t answ er it. I t ’s ve ry d iffic u lt.
4. We can’t see it. I t ’s ve ry sm a ll.
NG
5. Can you touch th e ceiling ? (ta ll)
HƯ
6. Can th e y buy th a t house? (ric h )
7. Can he understand the questions? (clever)
ẦN
8. Can th a t cat catch th e bird ? (quick)
TR
1. T his perfum e looks lo ve ly. 6. These vegetables taste fresh.
B
2. T h is room feels w arm . 7. T h a t ra d ia to r feels hot.
00
3. T h a t record sounds loud. 8. T h is music sounds ve ry good.

10
4. T h is beef tastes excellent. 9. T h is cheese tastes aw ful.

+3
5. T h a t house looks m odern. 10. These flow ers look nice.

P2
D. Thêm TOO hoặc EITHER vào chỗ trống ñể hoàn chỉnh các câu
CẤ
sau. Sau ñó viết lại dùng s o hoặc NEITHER.

A
1. I ’m happy and th e y a r e __.

HÓ
2. I ’m not h un g ry and S ơ n__ .

3. I ’m tire d and she is __ .
Í-
4. I t ra in e d on S aturday and i t d id on S u n d a y___.

-L
5. A nn can’t d riv e a car and she can’t rid e ab ic y c le ___.

ÁN
6. I don’t smoke and m y fa th e r doesn’t ___.

7. Jane’s m o the r is a teacher and m y fa th e r is ___.
TO
E. Nối tiếp các câu nói sau bằng cách dùng câu iiên kết khẳng
NG
ñịnh, phủ ñịnh hay tương phản.

ƯỠ
1. You lik e m usic and I __.

2. You were here la s t week and I ____
ID
3. You haven’t g ot a car and I __.

BỒ
4. You don’t lik e potatoes and I __.

5. You w e re n’t in London yesterday and I ___.
106
6. You d id n ’t come to school la s t Sunday and I ___.

7. You come to school on Sundays b ut I .
ƠN
8. You had w ine d in n e r la s t n ig h t b u t I ___ .
9. You haven’t got any m oney b u t I ___.
NH
10. You d id n ’t p la y sp o rts a t school b u t I .
UY
1. George ñã cần m ộ t v à i con tem . A n h ta ñã p h ả i ñ i ñến bưu ñiện.
.Q
2. M a ry ñã cần m ộ t í t th ịt. Cô ta dã p h ả i d i ñến tiệ m người bán th ịt.
TP
3. D a isy ñã cần m ộ t í t bơ. Cô ấ y ñã p h ả i ñ i ñến tiệ m người bán thực
O
phẩm (th e grocei'’s).
ĐẠ
4. P e te r ñã cần m ộ t v à i v iê n a s p irin . A n h ta ñã p h ả i ñ i ñến tiệ m của
dược sĩ.
NG
5. A n h ấ y ñã cần m ộ t v à i tờ tạ p chí. A n h ấ y ñã p h ả i ñ i ñến tiệ m sách.
HƯ
G. Viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh, dùng các từ gợi ý và ñặt ñộng từ ỏ
Simple Future và Present Perfect thể khẳng ñịnh.
ẦN
1. Florence / w ear / a u n ifo rm .
F lorence w ill have to w ea r a u n ifo rm .
TR
B
F lorence has had to w ea r a u n ifo rm .
00
2. Bobby / w o rk a t n ig h t.
10
3. B renda and A nd re w / pass an exam.

+3
4. T hey / co rre ct th is hom ew ork.

P2
5. She / m ake beds.

6. L an / w rite re p o rts.
CẤ
7. Sơn / study judo.

A
8. We / p ra ctise E n g lis h .
HÓ
H. Viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh, dùng BE ABLE TO ở thì hiện tại
Í-
hoàn thành.
-L
I . M r B ro w n / d riv e / fo rty years.

ÁN
M r B ro w n has been able to d riv e fo r fo rty years.

2. M a ry M a ckin to sh / n o t pass / te s t ye t.
TO
3. Bob B re w e r / d riv e / tw o years.

4. Bob B re w e r / n o t save enough m oney.
NG
5. M r. and M rs. W ilso n / n e ve r / d riv e .

ƯỠ
I. Hoàn tâ't bài ñối thoại sau:

ID
A gent : ___. (1)

BỒ
L y n e tte : Good m o rn in g . M y nam e’s L y n e tte K ey.
107

A gent : ____ . (2)

L yn e tte : W e ll, m y fir s t question is th is . W ill I be able to g e t a job?
ƠN
A gent : ___ ? (3)
L yne tte : I ’m a teacher.
NH
A gent : ____ . (4)
UY
L yn e tte : W e ll, th a t’s O .K. W h a t about accom m odation?
.Q
A gent : ____ . (5)
TP
L yn e tte : I t sounds fin e . C ould I have some in fo rm a tio n about the
O
tow n?
ĐẠ
J. Translate into Vietnamese:
NG
1. H ow long have you been able to sw im ?
HƯ
I ’ve been able to sw im fo r 2 years.
2. He has been able to p la y th e g u ita r fo r several years.
ẦN
3. She has never been able to speak E n g lis h .
4. W ill th e y be able to come to m y party?
I’m sorry, they won’t be able to come.
TR
B
5. S h a ll we be able to m eet th e Dean o f th e M a them a tics D e partm ent
00
a t 10 tom orrow m orning?

10
Yes, you w ill.

+3
P2

CẤ
A
I. PRESENTATION
HÓ
A. Questions with How + adjective

Í-
1. The p a tte rn : HOW + ADJECTIVE + BE + SUBJECT?

-L
2. Exam ples: How old is your little sister?

How hot is it in Egypt in July?
ÁN
How long are the sides of the pyramid?

TO
How deep is the Suez Canal?

How tall is that building over there?
NG
How far is it from London to Bristol?

How heavy are you?
ƯỠ
How wide is the table?

ID
BỒ
108

B. Comparisons of Adverbs (dạng so sánh của trạng từ)

1. So sánh bằng, không bằng, kém hơn:
S ị + V + as + adv + as + Sạ
ƠN
H e d rive s as c a re fu lly as L ______
NH
S ị + V (neg.) + so/ as + adv + as + s?
He doesn’t d riv e so/ as c a re fu lly as I.
UY
S i + V + less ± adv + th a n + s2
.Q
He d rive s less c a re fu lly th a n I.
TP
2. So sánh hơn:
O
ĐẠ
NG
I d riv e m ore c a re fu lly th a n he.
So sánh n h ấ t:
HƯ
s + V + th e m ost + lo n g adv
ẦN
I d riv e th e m ost ca re fu lly.
s + V + th e + s h o rt adv + est
I d rive th e fastest. TR
sh o rt
B
s + V + the le a st + adv
00
long
10
d riv e th e le a st ca re fu lly,
+3
the ỉeast fast.

P2
4. Chú ý th ê m các cấu trú c so sánh tín h từ ñ i vớ i danh từ:

Si + V + as + m uch + uncountable noun + as + Sạ
CẤ
Budgies d o n 't need as m uch space as pa rro ts.

Si + v + as + m any + countable noun + as + Sg
A
HÓ
I have as m any books as you.

c. Tag-questions (câu hỏi ñuôi)
Í-
-L
1. Examples:
ÁN
S tatem ent Tag-question

, aren’t you?
TO
You’re 31
You can speak E n g lis h , can’t you?
NG
You’ve been to F rance , haven’t you?

ƯỠ
You aren’t 31 , are you?

, can you?
ID
You can’t speak E n g lis h

BỒ

You haven’t been to France , have you?

He speaks E n g lis h w e ll , doesn’t he?
ƠN
P eter learned to type a t school , d id n ’t he?
NH
He doesn’t speak E n g lish w e ll , does he?
P eter d id n ’t le a rn to type a t school , d id he?
UY
2. R e m a rk s : (n h ậ n x é t)
.Q
• Câu h ỏ i ñuôi gồm h a i phần: phần n hận ñ ịn h (sta tem en t) và phần
TP
ñuôi (tag)
• Cấu tạo:
O
ĐẠ
- Nếu phần nhận ñ ịn h ñộng từ ở khẳ ng ñ ịn h , phần ñuôi sẽ là phủ
ñ ịn h và ngược lạ i.
NG
- Trong phần ñuôi, ñộng từ ñ i trước chủ ngữ. Chủ ngữ p hả i là ñ ạ i từ.
- Nếu dộng từ ở phần n hậ n ñ ịn h là ñặc b iệ t (B E , C AN , H A V E ...)
HƯ
nó âược lặp lạ i ở phần ñuôi. Nếu là ñộng từ thường ở h iệ n tạ i
hay quá khứ, phần ñuôi dùng DO, DOES, D ID .
ẦN
D. Complex sentences having adverb clauses of time (câu phức
có mệnhñê' trạng từ chỉ thời gian) TR
B
M a in clause (clause 1) C onjunction A dv clause (clause 2)
00
10
Past C ontinuous S im ple Past

(kéo d ài)
+3
P2
I was h a vin g a re st when th e volcano erupted.

CẤ
The ship was le a vine w hen th e lava h it the tow n.

The 2 vouths were w hen M rs E ile v crossed th e stre et.
A
s ittin g on the ground

HÓ
Í-
M a in clause C onjunction A dv clause

-L
S im ple Past Past C ontinuous

ÁN
(kéo d ài)
TO
The volcano erupted w hen I was h a vin e a re st.

The lava h it the tow n
NG
when the shio was leaving'.

M rs R ile v crossed the stre e t w hen the 2 youths w ere
ƯỠ
s ittin g on the ground

ID
BỒ
110

ƠN
P ast C ontinuous P ast Continuous
M v fa th e r was re a din g w h ile m v m o th e r was sewine.
NH
new spapers
UY
M v m o th e r was sewinsr w h ile m v fa th e r was reading
.Q
new spapers.
TP
O
ĐẠ
S im ple P ast S im ple Past
The ta ll youth h eld w h ile th e o th e r youth trie d to
NG
h e r from b eh in d snatch h e r handbag.
HƯ
C onjunction A dv clause
ẦN
M a in clause
S im ple Future S im ple P resent
TR
The band w ill s ta rt o la v in e when the tra in stops.
B
00
W e’l l £0 to th e Tow n H a ll a fte r she opens the school.

10
E. ðộng từ MAY
+3
1. M A Y cũng là ñộng từ kh iế m k h u y ế t như C AN , M U ST.

P2
2. Nó có nhiều nghĩa:
• Có th ể (vớ i ngụ ý dược phép):
CẤ
You m ay go to th e cinem a to n ig h t.
A
• X in phép m ộ t cách lịc h sự:

HÓ
M ay I search you now?

M ay I see it?
Í-
• Sự tiê n ñoán kh ô n g chắc:

-L
I t m ay ra in th is evening.
ÁN
F. ðại từ VÓI SELF (self-pronouns)

1. Các ñ ạ i từ S E LF tro n g tiế n g A n h là :
TO
1st m ys e lf ourselves
NG
2nd y o u rs e lf yourselves
ƯỠ
3rd h e rs e lf them selves

ID
h im s e lf
BỒ
its e lf
111

2. C húng ñược gọi là re fle xive pronouns (ñ ạ i từ phản th â n ) k h i chúng

là tâ n ngữ của ñộng từ (th e object o f th e ve rb ) và kh ô n g th ể bỏ
chúng ñ i ñược.
ƠN
Ex: He shot h im s e lf.
NH
f Direct object
UY
You m ust look a fte r yourself.
Ị_____ I Prepositional object
.Q
TP
She made h e rs e lf a new dress,
t I Indirect object Direct object
O
ĐẠ
3. C húng dược g ọi là E m p hasizing pronouns (ñ ạ i từ n hấ n m ạnh) k h i
NG
chúng theo sau từ chúng n h ấ n m ạn h hay ở cuối câu, hoặc sau g iớ i
từ BY. Có th ể bỏ chúng ñ i ñược.
HƯ
Ex: I do i t m yse lf. (= I m y s e lf do it.)
ẦN
I to ld N am h im s e lf to do it. (= I to ld N am to do it h im s e lf.)
The m achine w orks b ỵ its e lf.
N o te : By + oneself: alone, w ith o u t h elp. TR
B
G. Two common expressions of invitations (2 kiểu mời mọc
00
thông dụng)
10
1. W ould you lik e some m ore wine?

+3
salad?
P2
bread?
CẤ
vegetables?
coffee?
A
2. How about a d rin k before d in ner?

HÓ
a cigar?
Í-
a w a lk before dinner?
-L
a no the r d rin k?
ÁN
II. PRACTICE
TO
A. Translate into Vietnamese:

1. How fa r is i t fro m B ie n Hoa to H C M city? I t ’s 32 kilo m e tre s.
NG
2. How ta ll is M aria? She’s s ix fe e t ta ll.

ƯỠ
3. How o ld is your fath e r? H e’s 60 years old.

4. H ow heavy is your daughter? She’s 12 kilo g ra m s.
ID
5. How h ig h is M ount Everest? I t ’s 8,848 m etres h ig h .

BỒ
112


1. C aro lin e lá i xe cẩn th ậ n hơn Robin.
ƠN
2. R obin ñánh m áy nhanh hơn C aroline.
NH
3. R obin n ó i tiế n g Pháp g iỏ i hơn C aroline.
4. R obin n ó i tiế n g T â y Ban N ha chậm hơn C aroline.
UY
5. C arolin e là m việc tệ hơn Robin.
.Q
TP
1. B iê n Hòa khô n g có nhiều rạ p h á t như T h à n h phô' H C M .
2. Phan Rang kh ôn g có nhiều mưa như các nơi khác ở V N .
O
ĐẠ
3. T ô i không bơi g iỏ i như anh ta .
4. Jo hn n ó i tiế n g Pháp kh ô ng g iỏ i bằng M a ry.
NG
5. A nh ấy n ó i kh ôn g nhanh bằng tô i.
6. T h ầy giáo tô i có n hiề u sách tiế n g A nh như cô giáo tô i.
HƯ
D. Translate into English:
ẦN
1. H ôm nay trờ i r ấ t lạ n h , có p h ả i không?
2.
3.
C húng ta kh ôn g trẻ , có p h ả i không?
T ô i ñúng, có p h ả i không?
TR
B
4. Họ ñã yêu nhau, có p h ả i không?
00
5. Họ sắp ñ i Luân ð ôn, có p h ả i không?

10
6. C húng dã về nhà cuối tu ầ n qua, có p h ả i không?

+3
7. B ạn không th íc h b à i tậ p này, có p h ả i không?

P2
8. B ạn dã không ñ i ñ ạ i học, có p hả i không?

CẤ
E. Choose the best answer:

1. M y fa th e r liv e d h e re ,__ ?
A
a. did he b. didn't he c. was he d. wasn’t he

HÓ
You m ust lis te n to the m o rn in g n e w s ,___?

c. mustn’t you d. must not you
Í-
a. don’t you b. must you

The p ilo t needs to w a rn u s , _ _ ?
-L
a. does he b. doesn’t he c. needs he d. needn’t he

ÁN
You had b e tte r sta y h e re ,___?

a. hadn’t you b. had you c. wouldn’t you d. would you
TO
You would ra th e r ta lk to h e r, _ ?
NG
a. didn’t you b. would you c. wouldn’t you d. hadn’t you

She would ra th e r die th a n liv e w ith h im , ___?
ƯỠ
a. hadn’t she b. would she c. wouldn’t she d. had she

Y our fa th e r m ig h t go o u t,___?
ID
a. might he b. m ightn’t he c. mightn’t you d. might not he

BỒ
113

8. L e t me have a look a t it a g a in ,__ ?

a. will you b. won’t you
ƠN
c. either is correct d. neither is correct
NH
1. T ô i ñang lá i xe th ì nghe tin ấy trê n ñài p h á t thanh.
UY
2. O swald ñã bắn tổ n g thôn g K ennedy k h i ông ta ñang thă m Texas.
.Q
3. M ọ i người ñang là m gì k h i trậ n ñộng ñ ấ t xảy ra?
TP
4. C húng tô ì ñang làm việc tro n g văn phòng th ì vụ cháy bộc p hát.
5. R ichard ñang chơi tro n g vườn th ì bạn g á i anh ta ñến.
O
*
ĐẠ
1. B ạn sẽ là m gì k h i bạn về nhà?
NG
2. B ạn sẽ ăn gì sau k h i bạn dùng bữa tôi?
HƯ
3. B ạn sẽ uống gì trước k h i bạn ñ i ngủ?
4. Lũ trẻ sẽ xem tru yề n h ìn h ngay k h i chương trìn h b ắt ñầu.
ẦN
5. C húng tô i sẽ nghe ñ à i V O A ngaý k h i thức dậy.
6. Lan sẽ ñọc sách k h i cô ta có giờ.
7. A nh ấy sẽ n ó i gì k h i gặp cô ây? TR
B
8. C húng tô i sẽ ñợi ở ñây cho tớ i k h i cô ta ñến.
00
G. Complete these sentences:

10
1. W hen we w ere crossing the s tre e t___.

+3
2. I t began to ra in w h e n __ .
P2
3. W hen th e postm an came, s h e __ .

CẤ
4. W hen th e earthquake happen ed___.

5. She was d ic ta tin g th e le tte rs to h e r s e c re ta ry _________ .
A
6. W hen i t is fin e ___.

HÓ
7. I’ll tell you a story as soon as

Í-
8. They w ill have lunch b e fo re __ .

-L
9. W hat w ill she do a fte r ___ .

10. I ’l l w o rk fo r you w h e n __ .
ÁN
H. Translate into Vietnamese:

TO
I. L an is n o t in the garden; she m ay be in th e kitch en .

NG
2. N am is n ’t in the schoolyard; he m ay be in class.

3. N am and Lan aren’t in class; th e y m ay be in the playground.
ƯỠ
4. T an is n ’t a t school today; he m ay be sick.

ID
5. Ba is n ’t here; he may be in the garden.

6. T he pens are n ot on the desk; th e y m ay be on the flo or.
BỒ
7. M ay I fis h here?
114
8. I t m ay be sunny tom orrow .

I. Translate into Vietnamese:
ƠN
1. She is lo o kin g a t h e rs e lf in the m irro r.
2. D on’t h u rt yourself.
NH
3. Romeo and J u lie t k ille d them selves.
UY
4. We a ttended th e p a rty la s t n ig h t. W e enjoyed ourselves ve ry m uch.
5. She d id th is exercise by herself.
.Q
K. Write answers to the following questions. These sentences
TP
may help you:
O
No, th a n ks N o m ore fo r me
ĐẠ
None fo r me I ’m try in g to stop
NG
I ’m going away O h, no, I can’t
N o t th is week N o m ore fo r me
HƯ
I ’m on a d ie t T h an ks... b ut I ’m d riv in g hom e.
No, th a n k you
ẦN
1. W ould you lik e some m ore brandy?
2. W ould you lik e a cigarette? TR
3. W hy don’t you have some m ore scotch?
B
00
4. Do you w a n t to go to the cinem a on Saturday?

10
5. H ow about some chocolate?

+3
P2
CẤ
A
HÓ
Í-
-L
ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
115

ƠN
NH
UY
.Q
TP
O
Part Two
ĐẠ
NG
HƯ
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR
ẦN
TR
B
00
10
+3
P2
CẤ
A
HÓ
Í-
-L
ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ

INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 16
ƠN
I. RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS (Đại từ hỗ tương)
NH
• They are pronouns which indicate reciproxity between subjects.
UY
• O NE A N O T H E R is used fo r m ore th a n 2 people.
.Q
Ex: Love one another as God loves you.
TP
• E A C H O TH E R is used fo r 2 persons.
Ex: Those 2 children often fight with each other.
O
ĐẠ
Romeo & J u lie t loved each o th e r.
NB: Nowadays, there is no distinction in use between these 2
NG
pronouns.
HƯ
PRACTICE
TranslateintoEnglish:
ẦN
1. TR
C húng tô i chẳng n ó i chuyện vớ i nhau n h iề u tu ầ n nay.
2. P ete r và M a ry yêu nhau.
B
00
3. Họ ñã gặp lạ i nhau sau bao năm xa cách.

4. T ro n g xã h ộ i, chúng ta cần lẫ n nhau.
10
5. Họ ñã quen nhau 10 năm rồ i.

+3
6. Họ v iế t th ư cho nhau thường xuyên.

P2
II. PREPOSITIONS USED AFTER ADJECTIVES

CẤ
1. In English, prepositions coming after adjectives cause a lot of

A
trouble to learners. We have to learn them by heart.

HÓ
2. Some exam ples:

• I ’m in te re s te d in p o litic s .
Í-
• H e’s good a t E n glish , but h e’s bad a t m athem atics.

-L
• I ’m w o rrie d about m oney.

ÁN
• She’s tire d o f th is tow n.

• His teacher is very pleased with her English.
TO
NG
PRACTICE
Fillineachblankwithasuitableword:
ƯỠ
Dear John,
ID
W e ll, how are you? I ’m a litt le w o rrie d ( 1 ) ___ m y French. I ’m ve ry (2)

BỒ
117

__ in it, b ut I ’m not very good ( 3 ) ___it. I ’m ( 4 ) ___ a t speaking, but

I ’m (5) __ a t w ritin g . Also, I ’m ê ry tire d (6) ___ going to school
ƠN
everyday. M y teacher is usually ve ry nice, but ye sterda y I d id n ’t do m y
hom ew ork and he was ( 7 ) __ w ith me. Oh, w e ll I fe el ( 8 ) ___ fo r h im .
NH
I ’m n o t a very good student! I ’l l w rite again soon.
Love,
UY
M a ry
.Q
TP
III. SOME USEFUL EXPRESSIONS OF AGREEMENT &
DISAGREEMENT (Một vài thành ngữ hữu ích ñể diễn tả ñồng
O
ĐẠ
ý hay không ñồng ỷ)
Agreement
NG
1. Yes, th a t’s rig h t.
HƯ
2. T h a t’s correct.
3. O f course.
ẦN
4. T h a t’s true.
5. I agree. TR
Disagreement
B
00
1. No, th a t’s w rong.

10
2. T h a t is n ’t correct.
+3
3. O f course not.
P2
4. T h a t is n ’t true.
5. I disagree.
CẤ
6. I don’t know .
I ’m n o t c e rta in (không chắc chán).
A
7.
HÓ
8. I ’m n o t sure.
Í-
PRACTICE
-L
ÁN
1. X in hãy dóng cửa ra vào. X in lỗ i tô i ñang bận.

TO
2. T ô i có th ể vào ñược không? Cồ, d ĩ n h iê n là ñược.

3. B ạn có th ể chuyển lọ m uối g iù m ñược không? Có, ñược chứ.
NG
4. H a i cộng v ố i hai có p h ả i là 4 không? ðúng.

ƯỠ
5. B ạ n có chắc chắn về giá chiếc xe hơi ñó không? T ô i kh ô n g chắc.

6. H ã y ñể anh ấy làm cái ñó cho anh. T ô i ñồng ý.
ID
7. H ã y b ã i bỏ lệ n h cấm vận ñ ố i vớ i Cuba. T ô i ñồng ý .

BỒ
8. Cô ấ y ñã bỏ nhà ñ i hở? ð iều ñó khô n g ñúng.
118

IV. ðỘNG TỪ CHỈ THÓI QUEN TRONG QUÁ KHỨ USED TO
ƠN
• Used to có n ghĩa là “ trước ñây từng” (nay không còn nữa) diễn tả
NH
m ộ t th ó i quen tro n g quá khứ m à nay không còn nữa, hay m ộ t tình
trạ n g tro n g quá kh ứ nay cũng h ế t rồi.
UY
E x: I used to go to w o rk by bus.
(Trước ñây tô i thường ñ i là m bằng xe b uýt.)
.Q
He used to be a custom s o ffice r.
TP
(Trưốc ñây anh ta từ ng là m ộ t nhân v iê n th u ế quan.)
O
• Used to là ñộng từ vừa ñặc b iệ t vừa thường nên ở phủ ñ ịn h và nghi
ĐẠ
vấ n có 2 cách (nhưng nó thường ñược dùng như m ộ t ñộng từ thường)
+ H e used to go sw im m in g .
NG
- He used n o t to go sw im m ing .
HƯ
H e d id n ’t use to go sw im m ing.
? Used he to go sw im m ing?
ẦN
D id he use to go sw im m ing?
• ðừng lầ m lẫ n used to vớ i:
+ T h is m achine is used to cut grass. TR
B
M á y này ñược dùng ñể cắ t cỏ (ñộng từ use ở th ụ ñộng)
00
I am used to s ta v in g up late.
10
am accustom ed to (T ô i ñang trở nên quen

+3
get used to với việc thức khuya)

P2
become used to
Sau các cụm từ trê n ñộng từ p h ả i ở d ạn g IN G còn sau used to là ñ ộ n g
CẤ
từ nguyên mẫu.
A
HÓ
PRACTICE
PutintoEnglish:
Í-
-L
1. Cô ấy trước dây thường n ó i d ố i, nhưng bây giờ th ì không.

2. A n h ấy trước ñây từ ng là m ộ t cậu bé ngỗ nghịch.
ÁN
3. M a ry trước dây có thường m ặc vá y không?

TO
4. Trước ñây cô ta thường kh ô n g tra n g ñiểm , nhưng bây giờ cô ta

thường ñến m ỹ v iệ n .
NG
5. A n h ấy ñã trở nên quen vớ i việ c v iế t m ộ t lá thư bằng tiế n g Anh.

ƯỠ
V. REPORTED SPEECH (Ldi nói gián tiếp)

ID
A. Giới thiệu:
BỒ
• Có 2 lo ạ i lờ i n ó i: lờ i n ó i trự c tiế p và lờ i n ó i g iá n tiế p (d ire c t speech
119
and in d ire c t o r re p o rte d speech)

Ex: D ire c t: He said, “ I am busy” .
ƠN
In d ire c t: H e said th a t he was busy.
• Có 3 lo ạ i lờ i n ó i trự c tiế p chuyển sang lờ i n ó i g iá n tiế p .
NH
D ire c t statem ents -> In d ire c t statem ents
D ire c t com m ands —> In d ire c t com m ands
UY
D ire c t questions -> In d ire c t questions
.Q
B. Luật chung
TP
1. Thay đểi vể thì động từ (verb tenses)
O
• Lờ i n ó i trự c tiế p thường gồm 2 p hần: p h ần người n ó i và lờ i n ó i trực
ĐẠ
tiế p .
He said, “ I ’m busy” .
NG
He says. “I ’m busy” .
HƯ
1 2
• Nếu ñộng từ ở p hầ n 1 ở h iệ n tạ i, ñộng từ ỗ ph ầ n 2 kh ô n g ñ ổ i k h i
ẦN
chuyển sang g iá n tiế p .
D ire c t: He says, “ I ’m busy” .
In d ire c t: H e says th a t he is busy.
TR
B
• Nếu ñộng từ ở p h ầ n m ộ t ỗ quá khứ , ñộng từ ở p hầ n 2 sẽ th a y d ổ i
00
như sau k h i chuyển sang g iá n tiế p .

10
D ire c t In d ire c t
+3
v2: p re sen t
P2
V f. past V 2: p ast
v2: past
CẤ
V 2: p a st p e rfe ct
v2: pres. cont. V 2: p a s t continuous
A
v2: pres p e rf
HÓ
V 2: p ast p erfe ct
V 2: w ill/ can V 2: w o u ld / could
Í-
D ire ct: H e sa id , “ I ’m busy” .

-L
V, v2
ÁN
In d ire c t: H e said th a t he was busy.

D ire c t: T h ey said. “ We have m e t h e r.”
TO
vt V*
In d ire c t: T hey said th a t th e y h ad m e t h e r.
NG
2 . Thay đổi vể đại từ và tính từ sở hữu (pronouns & possessive adjectives)

ƯỠ
K h i chuyển sang g iá n tiế p , chúng th a y d ổ i như sau:

® N gôi thứ 1 sẽ th a y ñ ổ i theo chủ ngữ của p h ầ n người nói.
ID
Ex: He said, “ I ’m busy h e lp in g m ỵ p arents.

BỒ
120

He said t t ia t he was busy h e lp in g h is parents.

• N g ô i thứ 2 sẽ th a y ñ ổ i theo tú c từ của phần người nói.
E x: He said to h e r. “You are m a kin g a lo t o f progress
ƠN
t------- 1 in your E n g lis h .”
NH
H e to ld h e r th a t she was m a k in g a lo t o f progress
in h e r E ng lish .
UY
• N g ô i thứ 3 giữ nguyên
E x: H e said, “They came to th e ir school on tim e ”
.Q
H e said th a t the y had come to th e ir school on tim e .
TP
3. Những thay đếì khác:
O
Các từ sau ñây cũng th a y ñ ổ i k h i chuyển sang g iá n tiế p .
ĐẠ
D ire c t In d ire c t
NG
now th e n
HƯ
yesterday th e day before
ẦN
th is day th a t day
la s t n ig h t th e n ig h t before, th e previous n ig h t
tom orrow
TR
th e fo llo w in g day
B
00
th e dav a fte r tom orrow in tw o days’ tim e

10
tom o rro w m o rnin g th e nexư fo llo w in g m o rn in g

+3
n e xt week th e fo llo w in g week

P2
to n ig h t th e n ig h t before
CẤ
here th e re
th is th a t
A
theẹe those
HÓ
ago before
Í-
c. Cách ñổi câu phát biểu sang giắn tiếp

-L
1. N ếu phần người n ó i là H e said ta giữ nguyên. N ếu là H e (said) to

ÁN
me th ì ñ ổ i th à n h He to ld me.
TO
2. Thêm T H A T
3. Bỏ ngoặc, chuyển d ổ i d ạ i từ, tín h từ sở hữu, th ì ñộng từ , các từ phụ
NG
kh á c theo qui tắ c chung ở phần B:

E x: D ire c t: H e said, “I was here yesterday.”
ƯỠ
In d ire c t: H e said th a t he had been th e re th e day before.

ID
BỒ
121

D. Cách ñổi câu m ệnh lệnh sang gián tiế p .

1. ð ổi He said hay He said to me th à n h He asked/ to ld / begged/
ƠN
ordered me.
NH
2. Bỏ ngoặc, nếu câu trự c tiế p là m ệnh lệ n h kh ẳ n g ñ ịn h th ì th ê m TO
vào trước ñộng từ ở m ệnh lệ n h . Nếu là m ệnh lệ n h phủ ñ ịn h th ì ñối
UY
DO N’T th à n h N O T TO rồ i thực h iệ n các b iế n ñ ổ i theo qui tắc
chung.
.Q
Ex: She said, “Please phone me a t s ix .”
TP
She to ld me to phone h e r a t six.
O
She said to me, “ Don’t see me tom orro w , please.”
ĐẠ
He to ld me n ot to see h er the n e xt day.
NG
E. Cách ñổi câu hỏi (Questions) sang gián tiếp:
HƯ
1. ð ổi He said hay He said to me th à n h He asked me.
2.Bỏ ngoặc. Nếu là câu h ỏ i Yes-No th ì th ê m IF vào sau He asked me
ẦN
rồ i ñổi câu h ỏi sang kh ẳ n g ñ ịn h và thực h iệ n các b iế n ñổi khác.
Nếu là câu h ỏ i W h th ì giữ tiế n g W h lạ i rồ i ñ ổi câu h ỏ i sang kh ẳ n g
TR
ñịnh và thực h iệ n các biến ñ ổ i khác. Nhớ bỏ dấu h ỏ i.
Ex: He said, “ Is it easy to lea rn E ng lish ? ”
B
00
He asked me i f it was easy to le a rn E ng lish .

10
He said, “W here w ill we m eet tom orrow ?”

+3
He asked h e r where the y would m eet the fo llo w in g day.

P2
PRACTICE
CẤ
A.Changethefollowingsentencesintoreportedspeech
A
1. M r. B row n said, “ M y c h ild re n w ill be here n e x t w eek.”

HÓ
2. She said, “ We don’t love each o th e r anym ore”

Í-
3. They said to US, “T h is is our fir s t v is it to E ng la n d.”

-L
4. He says, “ I can’t do it . ”
5. She said to h im , “R in g me la te r.”
ÁN
6. She said to M a ry, “ Don’t use the office phone.”

TO
7. The policem an ordered, “ Show me your d riv in g licence.”

8. The teacher said to us, “ Don’t w rite yo ur lessons in p e n cil.”
NG
9. M y m other said to me, “ D id you b rin g the m oney w ith you?”

ƯỠ
10. They said to us, “ W ill you w o rk fo r us?”

11. He said, “W ho live s n e xt door?”
ID
12. She said to me, “ W hy have you got tw o passports?”

BỒ
122

B. Changethedirect questionsinthefollowingsentencesintoreported
speech.
ƠN
NH
YES-N O Q U E ST IO N S :
1. “ Do you lik e M a rlo n Brando?” she asked.
UY
2. “ A re you e n jo yin g yourself?” he asked.
3. “ Does yo ur fa th e r w o rk here?” she asked.
.Q
4. “ Have you m et D anny before?” he asked.
TP
5. “ D id you b orro w m y d ic tio n a ry ? ” he asked.
O
6. “ Does your b ro th e r liv e in London?” she asked.
ĐẠ
7. “ Do you know w ho broke th e w indow ?” he asked.
8. “ Have you fin is h e d yo ur exams?” she asked.
NG
W H -Q U E S TIO N S :
HƯ
1. “ W hen does th e tra in leave?” I asked.
2. “W ho d id you see a t th e m eeting?” m y m o the r said.
ẦN
3. “ W hy d id you ta ke m y w a lle t? ” He asked.
4. “ How d id you get to school?” she asked.
5. “W here do you live ? ” th e boy asked. TR
B
6. “W hy d id n ’t th e p olice re p o rt the crim e?” the judge asked.
00
7. “ W hy w on’t you le t me in ? ” he shouted.

10
8. “W ho do you w a n t to ta lk to?” she said.

c.Reportthefollowingsentences using“Shesaid...”
+3
,
P2
1. I t ’s nice to be hom e again.

CẤ
2. I ’ve come to m ake a new film .

3. M y c h ild re n w ill be here n e x t week.
A
4. M y husband w on’t be w ith me.

HÓ
5. I ’m going to divorce h im .
6. W e don’t love each o th e r any m ore.
Í-
7. I sold m y house in H ollyw ood la s t m o nth .

-L
8. I can’t te ll you an y m ore.

D.Putthefollowingintoreportedspeech:
ÁN
TO
1. He said, “ D on’t w a lk on th e ice, it is n ’t safe.”

2. “ M iss B row n , th is is M iss W h ite . M iss W h ite , M iss B ro w n ,” he said.
NG
3. “ Please, please, don’t te ll anyone,” she said.

ƯỠ
“ I w on’t, I prom ise ,” I said.

4. “W ould you lik e m y to rc h .” I said, h o ld in g it out.
ID
“N o, th a n k s ,” he said. “ I have one o f m y ow n.”

BỒ
5. “H e expects a lo t o f w o rk fo r ve ry lit t le m oney,” com plained one o f
123

the ty p is ts .
“Yes, he does” agreed th e oth e rs.
E.Putthefollowingintodirectspeech:
ƠN
NH
1. Tom in v ite d A nn to come fo r a d riv e th e fo llo w in g day. (Tom : W ould
you like ...? )
UY
2. A nn accepted w ith pleasure and asked w here he was th in k in g o f
.Q
going. (A nn: I ’d love to.)
TP
3. He said he’d leave i t to h e r. (Tom : I ’l l leave...)
4. She suggested S tra tfo rd . (A n n : W h a t about S tra tfo rd ...)
O
ĐẠ
5. a dding th a t she hadn’t been th e re fo r ages. (A n n: I haven’t been
th e re ...)
NG
6. Tom agreed and said th a t th e y m ig h t go on th e riv e r i f i t was a fin e
day. (Tom : Good idea o r a ll rig h t. W e m ig h t...)
HƯ
7. A nn w ondered w h a t was on a t th e R oyal Shakespeare T heatre.
(A nn: I w onder...)
ẦN
8. Tom said th e y’d fin d o u t w hen th e y g o t th e re . (Tom : We’l l fin d ...)
TR
9. adding th a t it was usua lly possible to g et seats on th e day o f the
play. (Tom : I t ’s u sually...)
B
00
10. He asked A nn i f she could be re ady b y te n . (Tom : Can you be...?)

10
+3
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 2B
P2
CẤ
I. Present & past participles used as adjectivẹs

(Hiện tại phân từ và quá khứ phân từ dùng như tính từ)
A
HÓ
H iệ n tạ i & quá khứ phân từ của m ộ t sô' ñộng từ có th ể ñược dùng như
tín h từ.
Í-
to bore b o rin g bored chán

-L
to in te re s t in te re s tin g in te re s te d quan tâ m , th íc h th ú
to w o rry w o rry in g w o rrie d lo lắ n g
ÁN
to frig h te n frig h te n in g frig h te n e d SỢ

TO
to excite e x c itin g excited h ồ i hộp

to em barrass em barrassing em barrassed b ố i rố i
NG
to tire tir in g tire d m ệt

ƯỠ
to surprise s u rp ris in g su rp rise d ngạc n h iê n

T ín h từ tậ n IN G có nghĩa chủ ñộng và thường dùng cho v ậ t. T ín h từ
ID
tậ n ED có nghĩa th ụ ñộng và thường dùng cho người.

BỒ
Ex: - T h is book bores me.
124

I t is b o rin g .
I am bored w ith th is book.
ƠN
- The w a r w o rrie d h e r
I t was w o rry in g
NH
She was w o rrie d about the w ar.
UY
PRACTICE
Viếttiếpcâuthứhaitrongcáccâusau,dồngtínhtừEDtươngñươngvới
.Q
tínhtừlNGỞcâuthứnhất.
TP
O
1. The s to ry is in te re s tin g . The c h ild re n a re ___th e story.
ĐẠ
2. The film is b o rin g . She’s __film .
NG
3. The long w a lk is tirin g . We’r e ___th e lo n g w a lk.
4. H is success is s u rp ris in g . H is frie n d s ___a t h is success.
HƯ
5. The fu n n y s to ry is am using. T hey’re ___th e fu n n y sto ry.
6. The ghost was frig h te n in g . The baby w a s ___th e ghost.
ẦN
II. The verb expressing advice: SHOULD
(ðộng từ diễn tả lời khuyên SHOULD)
TR
B
• S H O U LD ỏ ñây không p h ả i là quá khứ của S H A L L . Nó ñược dùng
00
cho tìn h huống h iệ n tạ i và d iễ n tả lờ i khuyên (d ù n g với m ọi ngôi).

10
E x: You should go on a d ie t.
+3
• Các ñộng từ kh ác cũng diễn tả lờ i khuyên: had b e tte r, ought to.

P2
E x: You had b e tte r go on a d ie t.

You ought to go on a d ie t.
CẤ
• N egative: Should + n o t + V.
A
H ad b e tte r + n o t + V
HÓ
O ught + n o t + to + V.
• Q uestions: Should + s + V?
Í-
-L
H ad + s + b e tte r + V?
Ought + s + to + V?
ÁN
PRACTICE
TO
Answerthequestions:
NG
1. W h at should we do to lose w eight?

ƯỠ
2. W hat shouldn’t we do to lose w eight?

3. W hat should we do to le a rn E n g lish better?
ID
4. W hat should we do to become a m illio n a ire ?

BỒ
125

5. Should I go fo r an in te rv ie w fo r a jo b in a bank?
6. Should you go to bed early?
ƠN
III. ADJECTIVE CLAUSE (Mệnh ñề tính từ)
NH
A. Khái quát
UY
• M ệnh ñề tín h từ là m ệnh ñề ñóng va i trò của m ột tiế n g tín h từ giúp
.Q
nghĩa cho danh từ ñứng trước nó. Danh từ ñó ñược gọi là tiề n t r í từ
TP
(antecedent).
Ex: He’s the m an who is w e a rin g a black s u it.
O
ĐẠ
t_______ _ _ J
• M ộ t m ệnh ñề tín h từ thường ñược mở ñầu bằng m ột ñ ạ i từ quan hệ
NG
(re la tiv e pronoun) như W H O, W H O M , W H IC H ...
• Ta nên b iế t rằ n g có 3 lo ạ i câu tro n g tiế n g A nh:
HƯ
+ Câu ñơn (sim ple sentence) chỉ có m ột s + V
ẦN
+ Câu kép (compound sent.) có 2 m ệnhñề chính.
but
Si + V1 + and TR
+ Sọ + Vọ
B
or
00
main clause main clause

10
+ Câu phức (com plex sent.): có m ộ t m ệnh ñề ch ính và m ộ t m ệnh

+3
ñề phụ.
P2
Sị V ị + jo in in g w ord + SgVg
m.cl. (từ nối) sub.cl.
CẤ
noun cl. adj cl. adv cl.

A
HÓ
B. Mệnh ñề tính từ:

1. Mở đầu bàng Who (ỉhay cho danh từ chỉ người, làm s, dịch là
Í-
“ ngứời mà” )
-L
s, V,
ÁN
+ The man is our teacher.

S2 v 2
TO
The man is stan d ing in fro n t o f the board.

NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
126
The m an / who is sta n d in g... / is our teacher
ƠN
s, Si v2 Vi
NH
s, V,
+ He is the m an
UY
s2 V,
.Q
The m an is sta n d in g ...
TP
WHO Ị------------ 1
-> He is th e m an / who is sta n d in g ...
O
S. V, s2 v2
ĐẠ
2. Mở ñầu bằng WHOM (thay cho người, làm 0)
NG
s, V,
+ The m an is our teacher.
HƯ
s 2 v2 o
You m et th e m an yesterday.
ẦN
WHOM
-> The m an / w hom you m e t ye sterd a y / is o ur teacher.
sT o s2 v2 V,
TR
B
Si V, -
00
+ He is th e m an .
10
s2 v2 o
+3
You m et the m an yesterda y.

P2
W HOM V.
—> He is the m an / w hom you m et yesterday.
CẤ
3. MỒ đẩu bằng WHICH (thay cho vật, sự vật làm s hay 0)

A
s, V,
HÓ
+ T he book is m ine.
2 Vỉ
Í-
The book is on th e table .

-L
WHICH
-» The book / w h ich is on th e ta b le / is m ine.
ÁN
. s, s2 v2 V,
s, V,
TO
+ T h is is the book.
s2 v2
NG
The book is on th e table .

ƯỠ
WHICH
T h is is th e book / w h ich is on th e tab le .
ID
s, V! s2 v2
BỒ
s, ' V,
127

+ The book is m ine.

s2 v2 o
You are re a d in g th e book.
ƠN
WHICH
—» T he book / w h ich you are re a d in g / is m ine.
NH
s, o s2 v2 V,
s, V,
UY
+ I lik e th e book.
s2 v2 o
.Q
You are re a din g th e book.
TP
WHICH
-*■ I lik e th e book / w h ich you are re a d in g ,
O
s, V, 0 s2 v2
ĐẠ
4. Mở đầu bằng THAT (thay cho người, vật, sự vật, ỉèm s hay 0)
NG
+ The m an / th a t is sta n d in g ... / is our teacher
Si s2 V2 V,
HƯ
+ He is th e m an / (th a t) you m e t yesterday.
s, V, o s2 v 2
ẦN
+ I lik e th e book (th a t) you are re a d in g .
s, V, o Si v2
N o te : K h i T H A T là m o CO th ể bo ñ i.
TR
r>. Mở đầu bằng WHOSE + NOUN (thay cho người, vật, sự vật chỉ sở hữu,
B
00
làm s hay 0)
10
s, Vi
+3
+ She is th e wom an.

s, v2
P2
H e r son is an engineer.
CẤ
WHOSE SON
-» She is th e wom an / whose son is an engineer.
A
s, V! s2 v2
HÓ
Si V,
+ The ta b le is old.
Í-
s2 v2 o
-L
You broke its legs.

WHOSE LEGS
ÁN
-> The tab le / whose lees you b roke / is old.

Si o s2 v2 V,
TO
6. Mở đẩu bằng WHEN, WHERE, WHY. (relative adverbs) (phó từ quan hệ)
NG
+ I s till rem em ber th e day / w hen we fir s t m e t.

s, Vi tSs-----^2
ƯỠ
+ T h is is th e place / w here Nsruven Du was b o rn .

ID
s, V, . t---------fe2 v2
BỒ
128

4- I don’t know the reason / w h y she le ft hom e.

Si . V , fS 2 v 2|
ƠN
PRACTICE
NH
A Combine these sentences with WHO, WHOM, WHICH, THAT\ WHOSE,
WHEN, WHERE.
UY
1. We saw the reader. The reader was re a d in g a newspaper.
.Q
2. The woman is M rs Thu. The woman w orks in th e lib ra ry .
TP
3. These are the picture-books. They in te re s t the pupils.
O
4. The books are fo r reference. They are on the stacks {hàng) near the
ĐẠ
lib ra ria n .
5. They ke p t ta lk in g about the lio n tam ers (người huấn luyện sư tử).
NG
They adm ired the m ve ry much.
HƯ
6. They saw the clow ns. They lik e them ve ry much.
B . Translate into English:
ẦN
1. ðó là con ngựa ñã th ắ n g cuộc ñua.
2. ðó ỉà TR
b à i th i họ ñã ñậu (th e y ’ve passed)
3. Họ là những người trự c th ă n g ñã cứu.
B
00
4. ðó là n ú i lửa (m à ñã) phurỊi.

10
5. ðó là b iệ t thự mà anh ta ở (th a t he stays in ).

6. Gô ta ỉà n gôi sao ñ iệ n ảnh mà anh ta sắp phỏng vấn.
+3
7. ðó là món ăn cô ta ñã nấu.
P2
8. ðó là m áy chụp ảnh mà cô ta dùng.

c. TranslateintoEnglish:
CẤ
A
1. ðó có p h ả i là chuyến xe lửa ñ i Luân ð ôn không?

HÓ
2. ðó có p h ả i là chuyến xe b u ýt kh ở i h àn h lú c 6 giờ không?

3. ðó có p h ả i là chuyến m áy bay (flig h t) hạ cánh ở p h i trường
Í-
H ea thro w không?
-L
4. ðó có p h ả i là chuyến du lịc h (th e to u r) viế n g thă m D in h

ÁN
B uckingham không?
5. ðó có p h ả i là chuyến xe b u ý t ñậu ở trạ m không? (stops a t the
TO
sta tio n )
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
129

ƠN
I. THE PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS
NH
1. Formation:
UY
• Continuous: s + BE + V -in g
.Q
• Pres P e rf C ont: s + pres p e rf o f B E + V -in g
(has / have been)
TP
Ex: We have been p la y in g fo o tb a ll a ll afternoon.
O
2. Use:
ĐẠ
• I t is used th e same as th e P resent P e rfe ct tense b u t th e c o n tin u ity
NG
o f the action is em phasized.
• Don’t use th is tense w ith the questions “ H ow m any” o r “ H ow m uch” .
HƯ
I t is often used w ith the question “ H ow lo n g .”
ẦN
PRACTICE
PuttheverbsinbracketsinthePresentPerfecttenseorthePres.Perf.
TR
Continuous:
B
00
10
1. I (read) th is book.
2. I (read) th is book fo r 2 hours.
+3
3. I often (th in k ) o f them since th e y w e n t away.

P2
4. They ju s t (fin is h ) a d iffic u lt exercise.

CẤ
5. I never (m eet) th a t man.

6. He (be) in London m any tim es.
A
7. I (w a it) fo r h im since 2:30.

HÓ
8. I (w a it) fo r h im m any tim es.

Í-
9. You (see) th is film ? '

-L
10. He (sleep) fo r th re e hours.

11. He (w ork) here fo r 4 m onths.
ÁN
12. He (w rite ) a novel fo r th e la s t 2 years.

TO
13. The c h ild (play) w ith th e cat fo r th e la s t 20 m inutes.

14. They (ta lk ) since th e y m et an h o u r ago.
NG
II. NOUN CLAUSE (Mệnh ñề danh từ)

ƯỠ
M ệnh ñề danh từ là m ệnh ñề ñóng v a i trò như m ột danh từ. Nó có th ể

ID
làm :
BỒ
1. Chủ ngữ và thường ñược mở dầu bằng T H A T (liê n từ) và các n g h i

vấn ñ ạ i từ và trạ n g từ như: w h a t,w here, w hen, w hy, how ,w h ich ,
130
whose, w h e th e r o r n ot.
Ex: T h a t she g o t m a rrie d is tru e.
ƠN
W hy she d id n ’t come to m y p a rty was a secret.
NH
W h e th e r o r n o t th e y can do th is is a problem .
2. Túc từ và cũng ñược mở dầu bằng các từ trê n .
UY
E x: I th in k th a t E n g lis h food is e xcellen t.
.Q
I don’t kn ow w h a t i t is.
T e ll me w here she liv e s .
TP
3. Bổ túc từ theo sau T O BE
O
Ex: T h is is how I w ill do m y exercise.
ĐẠ
I t was w h y he was absent fro m class.
The question is w ho w ill come.
NG
4. ð ồng v ị cách cho m ộ t danh từ trừ u tượng
HƯ
Ex: T he fa c t th a t he was successful in life surprised everybody.
The ru m o u r th a t I love you spread everyw here.
ẦN
The hope th a t we s h a ll be happy is p ra ctica l.
5. Túc từ cho g iớ i từ TR
E x: O ur success depends upon w h a t we do.
B
A re you sure o f w hen th e class begins?
00
We are in te re s te d in whose ca r i t is.

10
T hey lis te n to w h a t th e teacher is saying.

+3
P2
PRACTICE
Viết5câuphứccóchứamệnhñềdanhtừlàm5chứcnăngnhưñãhọc.
CẤ
Phântíchxemñâulàmệnhñềchính,mệnhñêphudanhtừvàchứcnăng
A
cửamệnhñềdanhtừñó.
HÓ
III. THE PRESENT PERFECT & THE PRESENT PERFECT

Í-
-L
CONTINUOUS
ÁN
1. HO W LO N G
I ’ve been sa vin g fo r tw o years.
TO
I ’ve been re a d in g i t fo r a m on th.

NG
I ’ve been d riv in g a ll day.

H ow lo n g have you been typ ing ?
ƯỠ
2. HO W M A N Y / H O W M U C H / HO W FA R
ID
H ow m uch have you saved?

How m any pages have you read?
BỒ
H ow fa r have you driven?
131
How m any exercises have you done?
PRACTICE:
ƠN
Translate in to English:
NH
1. A nh ta ñã và còn ñang uống quá n hiề u cà phê.
UY
2. C húng tô i ñã và còn ñang là m ba m á chúng tô i lo lắng.
3. Cô ta ñã và còn ñang kể quá n hiều câu chuyện.
.Q
4. C hị ây ñã v iế t những bưu th iế p bao lâ u rồi? C h ị ấy ñã v iế t những
TP
bưu th iế p từ lúc 10 giờ.
O
5. C h ị ấy dã v iế t ñược bao n hiê u cái? C h ị ấy ñã v iế t ñược 7 cái.
ĐẠ
6. A nh ấy ñã ñánh m áy ñược 2 tiế n g ñồng hồ. A n h ấ y ñã ñánh ñược 9
lá thư.
NG
7. C húng dã v iế t dược m ột giờ dồng hồ. C húng ñã v iế t tấ t cả các bài
HƯ
tập về nhà.
8. B ạn ñã học ñược bao nhiê u từ mới? K hoảng 2000 từ.
ẦN
IV.ADVERB CLAUSE (Mệnh ñề trạng từ)
M ệnh ñề trạ n g từ là m ệnh
TR
ñề ñóng v a i trò như m ộ t trạ n g từ. Nó có
B
th ể là:
00
1. M ệ n h ñ ề tr ạ n g từ c h ĩ th ờ i g ia n : mở ñầu bằng các liê n từ when,

10
w h ile , as soon as, ju s t as, since, as.

+3
Ex: We le ft as soon as th e postm an came.

P2
Si Vi Vz
adv. cl.
CẤ
2. M ệnh ñề tra n g từ ch ỉ nơi chốn: mở ñầu bằng: w here, w herever.

Ex: She’l l go w herever you go.
A
HÓ
S! V, s2 v2
3. M ệnh ñề trạn g từ chỉ th ể cách: mở ñầu bằng as (như), as if, as
, 1__________, ,__ ,
Í-
J.T _
though (như th ể )
-L
Ex: Please do as I to ld you. (S i là you hiểu ngầm )

V, s 2 Vị_____________
ÁN
He spoke E n g lishas i f / as though he w ere an E nglishm a n.

TO
4. M ệnh ñề trạng từ chỉ ñ iều kỉện: mở ñầu bằng if, unless, on the
conditio n th a t, provided th a t (m iễn là )
NG
Ex: I f I have tim e I s h a ll read th is book.

ƯỠ
5. M ệnh ñề trạn g từ ch ỉ m ục ñích: mở ñầu bằng so th a t, in order

th a t (ñể).
ID
BỒ
132

Ex: We come here everyday so th a t we can le a rn E nglish.

6. M ệ n h d ề tr ạ n g tữ c h ỉ k ế t q u ả : mở ñầu bằng so... th a t, such (a)...
th a t.
ƠN
Ex: He is such a la zy boy th a t nobody lik e s h im .
NH
T h is tea is so h o t th a t I can’t d rin k it.
7. M ệ n h ñề tr ạ n g từ c h ỉ so s á n h : mở ñầu bằng th a n hay as (so
UY
sánh bằng và so sánh hơn / khôn g p h ả i so sánh nhâ't vì so sánh
.Q
n h ấ t là câu ñơn ch ỉ có m ột s + V)
TP
Ex: She is as good as he (is).
s, V , s2 v2
O
She is b e tte r th a n he (is).
ĐẠ
8. M ệ n h ñ ề tr ạ n g từ c h ỉ nhượng b ộ ; mở ñầu bằng although,
NG
though, even though, even i f (m ăc dầu)
Ex: A lthou gh he is poor, he is honest.
HƯ
s2 v 2 . s, Vi
9. M ệ n h ñề tr ạ n g t ừ c h ỉ lý d o : mở ñẩu bằng because, since, as...
ẦN
Ex: I d id n ’t go to school yesterday because I was ill.
Si V! TR s 2 :V2
PRACTICE
B
Viết 8câuphứctrongñócómệnhñêtrạngtừcácịoại. Rồiphântích

00
mệnhñềchính/ phụtrongcáccâuñó.
10
+3
P2
CẤ
I. THE GERUND (Danh ñộng từ)

A
HÓ
1. D anh ñộng từ là dạng IN G của ñộng từ. N ó tương tự như Pres.

P a rtic ip le (h iệ n tạ i phân từ) nhưng ñược dùng như m ột danh từ
Í-
tro n g k h i h iệ n tạ i phân từ ñược dùng như m ộ t tín h từ và tro n g các

-L
th ì tiế p diễn.
ÁN
E x: A sleeping ch ild , (pres, pa rt)

S leeping w e ll is n o t easy fo r me. (gerund)
TO
2. N hư là m ộ t danh từ, danh ñộng từ có th ể là chủ ngữ hay tâ n ngữ

của m ộ t ñộng từ.
NG
s
Ex: E a tin g carrots is good.
ƯỠ
o
I lik e e a tin g carrots.
ID
3. D anh ñộng từ ñược dùng tro n g các trường hợp sau:

BỒ
133

a. Sau m ộ t giở i từ:
ƠN
- to be tire d o f
- to be fed up w ith
NH
- to be a fra id o f
UY
- to be in tere ste d in
- to be scared o f
.Q
TP
- to be fond o f
b„ Sau những ñộng từ: lik e , hate, rem em ber, enjoy, avoid, deny,
O
suggest, postpone, pra ctise, fo rg ive , keep, m ind , ris k , can’t stand,
ĐẠ
can’t bear.
E x: M y parents can’t stand seeing me a t home a ll day.
NG
c. Sau những th à n h ngữ: it ’s no use, i t ’s w o rth , can’t help.
HƯ
E x: I t ’s no use cryin g over the s p ilt m ilk .
ẦN
PRACTICE
TranslateintoEnglish: TR
B
I . Cô ta sợ tự lập.
00
o
C húng tô i chán ñợi xe buýt.

10
C
A n h ấy trá n h gặp cô ấy.

Õ
+3
H ọ ñề n g h ị du lịc h bằng tàu lửa.

àõ <£>
Các bạn quan tâm ñến việc là m cái gì?

P2
H ắn ta phủ nhận ñã ñánh cắp chiếc m áy v i tín h của trư ờ ng chúng

CẤ
tô i.
A
II. THE MODAL VERB “MAY”

HÓ
® E x: I t m ay snow.
Í-
We m ay n o t be able to fin d a h ote l.

-L
They m ay be closed.
We m ay have b ea u tifu l w eather.
ÁN
We m ay go to S cotland.
TO
® W h a t does “M A Y ” in these sentences express?

- P ro b a b ility .
NG
ƯỠ
PRACTICE
TranslateintoVietnamese:
ID
BỒ
1. He m ay go to the cinem a o r he m ay go to the the a tre .

2. They m ay stay in o r th e y m ay go out.
134
3. She m ay w atch T V o r she m ay lis te n to the radio.

4. H e m ay p la y fo o tb a ll o r he m ay p la y te n n is.
ƠN
5. I m ay d rin k tea o r I m ay d rin k coffee.
NH
6. We m ay fly o r we m ay go by tra in .
III. QUANTITIVE ADJECTIVES - THE VERB “GET” (Tính từ
UY
định lượng - Động từ GET)
.Q
TP
A. Some quantitive adjs.
O
[U ] [C ]
ĐẠ
p le n ty o f p le n ty o f
a lo t o f a lo t o f
NG
lo ts o f lo ts o f
HƯ
enough enough
much m any
ẦN
a lit t le a few
lit tle TR few
N o te : Q uite a few : m any, a lo t.
B
T here are q uite a few stds absent fro m class today.
00
10
B. The linking verb GET.

+3
G ET tro n g trường hợp n ày có ngh ĩa là B EC O M E và ñược theo sau bởi

P2
m ột tín h từ.
E x: H e’s g e ttin g angry.
CẤ
M ộ t v à i lin k in g verbs khác:

A
sm ell get
HÓ
lo ok become
feel tu rn
Í-
-L
taste go
sound
ÁN
seem
TO
appear
NG
PRACTICE
Makeonesentenceusingeachofthefolowingwords:little, quiteafew,
ƯỠ
get+ adj.
ID
BỒ
135
IV. QUESTIONS ỈN REPORTED SPEECH WITH DIFFERENT

INTRODUCING VERBS
ƠN
W hen changing a question in to th e rep orte d speech, we usually use the
NH
in tro d u cin g verb A S K E D b u t we can s till use such o th e r verbs as
Do you know ...?
UY
I don’t know ...
I ’ve got no idea...
.Q
I w onder...
TP
i w a n t to know ...
O
Have you get any idea...?
ĐẠ
I w anted to know ...
Ỉ dem anded to know ...
NG
I in q uired ...
HƯ
PRACTICE
ẦN
A. Change each o f the questions given below to in d ire c t form . B egin each
TR
o ne With the words given a fte r i t in the parentheses.
B
1. W here is the d ire c to r’s office? ( I don’t know ...)
00
2. In w h ich file is th e le tte r? (M r. Jones w a n ts to know ...)

10
3. How much does th is cost? (I should lik e to know ...)

+3
4. H ow is he g e ttin g along? (The d ire c to r w an ts to know ...)

P2
5. W hen is he le a ving fo r th e coast? (N o one seems to kn ow ...)

6. W hen w ill M r. S m ith get back? (H e asked m e...)
CẤ
7. W h at is th e price o f th is book? (She said she d id n ’t know ...)

8. W here d id you p u t it? ( I fo rg e t...)
A
HÓ
9. W hat tim e is he com ing back? (H e d id n ’t te ll m e...)

10. Is he com ing back today? ( I’m n o t sure...)
Í-
B. Completethefollowingsentencesbyaddingquestionsintheindirect
-L
form .
ÁN
1. A sk h im w hy...
TO
A sk h im w hy he d id n o t come to class today.

2. Can you te ll me w he the r...
NG
3. I should lik e to know w h e th e r...

ƯỠ
4. I asked h im w h a t tim e ...

5. I don’t know how ...
ID
6. He asked me w here...
BỒ
136

7. He w ants to know ...

8. T e ll me w h a t...
ƠN
V. ADDITIONAL NOTES ON ADJECTIVE CLAUSES
NH
1. Two kinds of adj clauses:
a. Defining or restrictive:
UY
E x: The d ic tio n a ry w h ich is on th e desk is new.
.Q
The engineer who w o rks here has got a w ife .
TP
b. Non-defining or non-restrictive:
O
E x: M r J e ff S hepiierd, w ho live s in W aterm outh. re turn e d home.
ĐẠ
B oats, w h ich are c a rry in g deterg en t, are sp ra ying the o il.
N o te s : - D on’t use T H A T in n o n -d e fin in g adj clauses
NG
- P u t the m betw een th e 2 commas.
HƯ
- The antecedent is a lre a d y clear.
2. Prepositions in adj clauses
ẦN
E x: H e’s the person to w hom I lik e to ta lk .
TR
w hom I lik e to ta lk to.
th a t I lik e to ta lk to.
B
00
te th a t I lik e to ta lk .
I lik e to ta lk to.
10
T h is is th e school in w h ich I le a rn .
+3
w h ich I le a rn in .
P2
w here I le a rn ,
CẤ
th a t I le a rn in .
ia th a t I le a rn .
A
I le a rn in .
HÓ
3. Obligatory use of THAT.

Í-
• A fte r a m ixe d antecedent.

-L
The m an and h is donkey th a t came here yesterday belong to a

ÁN
circus.
• A fte r th e in te rro g a tiv e pronoun W H O & W H A T.
TO
W ho is th e g iri th a t loves you?

W h a t was th e tim e th a t you le ft home?
NG
« A fte r su p e rla tive adjs and a fte r F IR S T , LA S T.

ƯỠ
H e is th e la s t candidate th a t ente red fo r th e p re s id e n tia l election.

• A fte r M U C H , L IT T L E , A L L , E V E R Y (T H IN G * O N E) VERY, O NLY,
ID
ANY (THING, ONE), NO (THING, ONE).

BỒ
137

A ll th a t g litte rs is n o t gold.
ƠN
N o te : T H A I' is n o t used ___ before a prep.
N . in a n o n -d e fin in g adj cl.
NH
PRACTICE
UY
A.Combinethesesentences,usingnon-restrictiveadjclauses.
.Q
TP
1. The “ S.P. T ita n ” is a su pe rta n ke r. I t crashed in to a cargo ship.
2. M r. Shepherd lo st h is house. He is sleeping in a h o te l.
O
3. The th ie f stole a van. H e’s going to get a su rp rise .
ĐẠ
4. The house was on th e edge o f a c liff. I t fe ll in to th e sea.
5. The van belonged to London Zoo. I t contained tw o boxes o f snakes.
NG
6. The local re sid en ts are spending th e n ig h t in a school. They are
HƯ
a fra id to go home.
B. TranslateintoVietnamese,payingattentiontotheobligatoryuseof
THATandPREPOSITIONSin a d j clauses.
ẦN
1. TR
T h is is th e book about w h ich I was ta lk in g .
2. The people w ith w hom V irg in ia live s are M r and M rs M ille r.
B
00
3. The person fo r w hom I am w a itin g is m y siste r.

10
4. The house a t w h ich we w ere lo o kin g is on D K stre e t.

5. The sp ort in w h ich I am m ost in te re ste d is sw im m in g.
+3
6. T h is is the c h a ir in w h ich he lik e s to s it.

P2
7. Is the re someone here who can speak E ng lish ?

CẤ
8. Is the re som ething th a t I can do fo r you?

9. There wasn’t anybody who could h e lp me. There was nobody who
A
could help me.

HÓ
10. There isn ’t a n y th in g th a t you can do fo r me. There is n o th in g th a t

you can do fo r me.
Í-
11. I w ill lik e a n y th in g th a t you choose.

-L
12. He lik e d n o th in g th a t he looked a t.

ÁN
13. Do you understand e ve ry th in g th a t I say?

14. T here was sth th a t I w anted to see.
TO
VI. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES (Câu ñiều kiện)

NG
» Câu ñiều k iệ n là m ột câu phức có 2 m ệnh ñề: m ệnh ñề chính và

ƯỠ
m ệnh ñề If.
ID
• Có 3 lo ạ i câu ñiều kiệ n :

1. Possible co n d itio n s (= Real co nd ition s)
BỒ
138

I f clause M a in clause
ƠN
S im p le P re se n t S im p le F u ture
NH
E x: I f I have tim e , I s h a ll read th is book.
2. U n re a l co n d itio n s in th e present.
UY
.Q
S ubjunctive P ast S im p le C o n d itio n a l
TP
(w ould + V )
O
E x: I f I w ere you, 1 w ould m a rry h er.
ĐẠ
I f i t ra in e d now , we w ould sta y here.
NG
3. U n re a l co nd itio n s in th e past.
HƯ
P ast P e rfe ct S ub ju nctive C o n d itio n a l P erfe ct
ẦN
E x: I f you had been here la s t n ig h t, e v e ryth in g w ould have been
d iffe re n t. TR
B
00
PRACTICE
A.TranslateintoEnglish:
10
+3
1. N ếu là hoa, tô i sẽ là m ộ t ñóa hướng dương.

P2
2. N ếu là ch im , tô i sẽ là lo à i bồ câu trắ n g .
CẤ
3. N ếu là m ây, tô i sẽ là m ộ t vầ n g m ây ấm .
4. N ếu là người, tô i sẽ ch ế t cho quê hương.
A
5. N ếu bạn có m ộ t triệ u ñô la bạn sẽ ỉà m gì?

HÓ
6. N ếu bạn có chứng c h ỉ A n h vă n , b ạn sẽ có th ể k iế m ñược việ c làm

tố t hơn.
Í-
7. C á i gì sẽ xả y ra nếu bạn th i rớ t?
-L
8. C húng tô i sẽ ở lạ i ñây nếu tr ò i mưa.

ÁN
9. N ếu tố i là vua, vợ tô i sẽ là hoàng hậu.

10. Nếu bạn là th ủ tướng, bạn sẽ là m gì?
TO
B.Makeupconditionalsentences,usingthesuggestedwords.
NG
1. th e a ir / th in n e r / te m p e ra tu re / ris e up.
ƯỠ
2. a bow l o f w a te r i placed in th e sun, i t / evaporate.

3. th e ice on the poles begin / to m e lt / sealevel / rise .
ID
4. we / b u ild / m ore h o sp ita ls, we / ta ke b e tte r care o f people.

BỒ
5. th e v / im prove p u b lic bus service, th e y / g e t rid o f p o llu tio n in the
139

city.
6. people / m ake good advance in th e p re v e n tio n o f diseases, th e y /
ƠN
reduce th e num ber o f deaths.
7. have enough m oney / buy a new house.
NH
8. th e flood / n o t ta ke I place / produce / m ore w heat.
9. th e epidem ics / n o t happen / s e ll / m ore ca ttle .
UY
10. b acteria stop w o rk in g , life on e a rth / cease to exist.
.Q
11. n o t be a sto rm , th e crop / good.
TP
12. w h a t / do / be / overw eight?
c. Rewritethefollowingsentences:
O
ĐẠ
1. She is too o ld ; she can’t go bush w a lk in g .
if ■
NG
2. I t ’s too cold; th e y can’t go sw im m ing.
HƯ
3. The questions are too d iffic u lt; th e y can’t a nsw er them .
4. He is too old; he can’t a p p ly fo r th e jo b.
D.Completethefollowingsentences:
ẦN
1. TR
I f the w o rld p o p u la tio n continued to in c re a s e ___.
2. O ur fa rm w ould have produced m ore ric e i f ___.
B
00
3. I f you eat too m u c h ___.

4. I f th e e a rth stopped m oving round th e s u n ___.
10
5. M any o f our ra re a n im als w ould be e x tin c t___.

E.TranslateintoVietnamese:
+3
P2
1. I f you don’t w o rk h a rd, you w on’t pass th e exams.

CẤ
2. You won’t pass th e exams unless you w o rk hard.

3. W ork h ard o r you’l l fa il in th e exam s.
A
HÓ
4. Y our p aren ts w ill be unhappy unless you behave yourself.

5. They won’t le t you in unless you cut yo u r h a ir (you have your h a ir
Í-
cut)
-L
6. O ur sources o f energy w ill soon end unless o th e r sources are found.

7. L ife on e a rth w ill be destroyed unless nuclea r tests stop.
ÁN
8. W orld pop u la tion w ill continue to ris e unless we tr y to reduce it.

TO
9. A ll our b e a u tifu l forests w ill be destroyed unless we do s th to

preserve them .
NG
10. We s h a ll be able to liv e on o th e r p la ne ts i f science develops.

11. W ha t w ould you do i f you could speak E n g lis h w ell?
ƯỠ
12. I f the w a te r resource is contam inated, th e epidem ic w ill happen.

ID
13. The e a rth w ould have been flooded i f fo rests hadn’t existed.
BỒ
140

14. The o utput w ill be increased i f w o rk is done by m achines.

15. I f the e a rth stopped m oving round th e sun, life w ouldn’t exist.
16. M any o f our ra re anim als w ould bee x tin c t i f people continued
ƠN
k illin g them .
F.MatchAwithB:
NH
A
UY
1. I f you p a rk in th e w rong place...
.Q
2. I f you d riv e too fast...
TP
3. I f you d rin k and drive ...
4. I f you don’t p u t w a te r in the ra d ia to r...
O
5. I f you don’t d riv e ca re fu lly...
ĐẠ
6. I f you d riv e over broken glass...
NG
B
a. ... you’l l get a puncture.
HƯ
b. ... the engine w ill overheat.
c. ... you’l l have an accident.
ẦN
d. ... you’l l get a spee d in g-ticket / fin e .
e. ... you’l l lose your license. TR
f. ... you’l l get a p a rk in g -tic k e t.
B
00
10
+3
P2
I. MORE ABOUT CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

CẤ
Ã. Zero Conditional
a There is a no th e r c o n d itio n a l w h ic h is often called zero co nd itio n a l.
A
HÓ
9 Form
Í-
-L
S im ple P resent S im ple P resent

ÁN
E x: I f you press th e b utto n, th e m achine sw itches off.

I f you go in th e best seats, you get a free d rin k .
TO
• Use: “ I f ’ in th is case has th e same m eaning as “w hen” . The zerc

co n d itio n a l is used:
NG
aI fo r in s tru c tio n s : I f th e cam era is on, a red lig h t appears,

ƯỠ
b/ fo r general tru th s : He alw ays says h ello i f he sees you.

ID
BỒ

PRACTICE
ƠN
1. W ater freezes i f the tem p e ra ture fa lls below zero.
NH
2. I f he’s angry, h is face alw ays goes b rig h t red.
UY
3. I f you put your m oney in a savings account, you g e t te n percent
in te re st.
.Q
4. I f the m icrophone is n ’t w o rk in g , you cannot hea r w h a t he’s saying.
TP
5. The rad io does n o t w o rk i f th e b a tte rie s are fla t.
O
6. I f there are o n ly a few students, we u sua lly close one o f th e classes.
ĐẠ
7. The m achine does n o t w o rk i f i t doesn’t have enough o il.
8. I f a balloon is fille d w ith h o t a ir, i t rises.
NG
9. I f w a ter boils, i t changes in to steam .
HƯ
10. The m achine stops a u to m a tic a lly i f som ething goes w rong.
B. Words other than IF
ẦN
• Other words can be used instead of IF in conditional clauses.
a/U N LE S S = i f not. TR
I ’ll go home soon i f th e film doesn’t s ta rt.
B
00
I ’ll go home soon unless th e film s ta rts ,

10
b/ PROVIDED (THAT), ON CONDITION (THAT) AS LONG AS, s o

LO N G AS.
+3
P rovided th a t everybody agrees, w e ll have th e m e eting on

P2
Tuesday.
CẤ
c/ (JU S T) SUPPOSE, SUPPO SING (T H A T ), W H A T IF , IM A G IN E .

Ju st suppose i t d id n ’t ra in fo r 6 m onths, w ould we have enough
A
water?
HÓ
N o te : The w ords are n o t alw ays interchangeable.

Í-
T h e ir use depends on th e co nte xt o f th e sentence.

-L
• Sentences containing hidden conditions

“ James d id n ’t come to th e p a rty .”
ÁN
“ W hat a p ity . I ’m sure he w ould have enjoyed it . ”

TO
> M ixed ten se conditionals

I f I ’d stayed a t school, I w ould be in u n iv e rs ity now . (p a st event
NG
w ith consequence in th e present)

ƯỠ
I ’ll ta ke yo ur pla te i f you’ve fin is h e d . (S im p le F uture is often

dependent on Pres. P erf. event)
ID
BỒ
L42
PRACTICE
Choosethecorrect wordor wordstoreplacetheunderlinedwordsin
thesesentences:
ƠN
NH
1. I ’l l give you £100 i f you say n o th in g about th is , (p ro vid ed th a t, w h a t
if, unless)
UY
2. I f you r com pany w e n t b a n k ru p t, w h a t w ould you do? (ju s t suppose,
.Q
on c o n d itio n , as lo n g as)
TP
3. I f you had to liv e in a n o th e r co u n try w here w ould you go? (on
O
co n d itio n , unless, im a g in e )
ĐẠ
4. W e’l l le t h im out o f p ris o n i f he re p o rts to th e police s ta tio n every
NG
day. (supposing, as lo n g as, unless)
HƯ
5. I ’l l ta ke the m to co urt i f th e y don’t pay me w h a t th e y owe. (im agine,
p ro vide d th a t, unless)
ẦN
II. COMPOUND NOUNS (Danh từ kép)
TR
A com pound noun is form ed b y jo in in g tw o o r m ore w ords together.
B
00
N o u n + n o u n : horse race, racehorse, m o o n lig h t, postm an.

10
P o s s e s s iv e ca se + n o u n : sportsm an , kin sm a n (người thâ n thuộc),

cra ftsm a n {thợ th ủ công), landsm an (người ở ñ ấ t liề n ).
+3
A d j+ n o u n : g ra n d p are n t, gen tle m a n, blackboard, sw eetheart.

P2
V e rb + n o u n : pickpocket, c u tth ro a t {kẻ sát nh ân ), b re akfa st,

CẤ
b re a kw a te r (ñê ngăn nước).

A
G e ru n d o r p a r tic ip le + n o u n : looking -glass, re a d in g lam p, sin g in g

HÓ
b ird , fly in g fis h .

u pla n d (cao nguyên), in sid e , d o w n fa ll, foreleg.
Í-
A d v o r p re p . + n o u n :
-L
A d v + v e rb : incom e, o u tb re ak, o ffs p rin g (con cháu), u p s ta rt (kẻ g ià u

sổi).
ÁN
V e rb + a d v e rb : draw back (trở lực), se n d -o ff (lờ i tiễ n biệt), s ta n d s till

TO
(sự bế tắc), go-by (sự trá n h m ặt).

S e v e ra l w o rd s : forge t-m e -n o t, m an o f w a r (tàu chiên).
NG
ƯỠ
PRACTICE
Whatdoyoucal?
ID
BỒ
1. a horse w h ich ru n races.
143

2. a race w here horses run.

3. a pool in w h ich you m ay sw im .
ƠN
4. a lam p w hich burns o il.
5. o il used in a lam p.
NH
6. a pot in w h ich tea is made.
7. a basin in w h ich you m ay get sugar.
UY
8. a dog used in h u n tin g .
.Q
9. a b o ttle used to c on ta in beer.
TP
10. a tab le used fo r w ritin g .
O
III. B U SIN ESS LETTERS
ĐẠ
® The fo rm a t o f a business le tte r is th e sameas th a t o f a frie n d ly one
NG
but it tends to be sh o rt and to th e p o in t.
® People often use the beginning s & endings in business le tte rs as
HƯ
follow s:
Mr
ẦN
M rs
B eginnings: D ear S ir / M adam /
TR
M iss
S m ith
B
Ms
00
E ndings: Yours fa ith fu lly , tru ly , sin ce rely

10
® B ut in frie n d ly le tte rs , th e y use:

B eginnings: D ear John / M a ry
+3
E ndings: Y our sin ce rely, B est wishes

P2
CẤ
PRACTICE
RewritethisletterWiththecorrectpunctuation:
A
HÓ
T h a n k you fo r yo ur e nq u iry o f 8 th A ugust we co n firm you booking

fo r the n ig h ts o f 2 6-30th A ugust in clusive could you please send £20 as
Í-
a re serva tion fee we are sure you w ill enjoy yo u r sta y in Y o rk.
-L
IV. THE PAST PERFECT (Thì Quá khứ Hoàn thành)

ÁN
A. Formation:
TO
s + had +■ past p a rtic ip le

NG
B. Use:
ƯỠ
ðược dùng ñể d iễ n tả m ộ t h àn h ñộng quá khứ xả y ra trước m ộ t h àn h

ñộng quá khứ hay m ộ t th ờ i ñiểm quá khứ khác.
ID
E x: The police questioned three people who had seen th e robbery.

BỒ
144

The w orkers had fin is h e d th e ir w o rk before 5 p.m . yesterday.
ƠN
PRACTICE
1. K hi công an ñến, bọn cướp ñã ñ i k h ỏ i.
NH
2. Khi anh ấy ñến p h i trường, m áy bay ñã cất cánh.
3. K hi sin h v iê n ấy vào lổp, b à i học ñã b ắ t ñầu.
UY
4. K hi trự c th ă n g ñến, chiếc tàu ñã chìm .
.Q
5. K hi cô ta ra ngoài, trờ i ñã tạ n h mưa (cơn mưa ñã tạ n h ).
TP
V. SIMPLE PAST & PAST PERFECT
O
S e n te n c e p a tte rn s w ith P a s t P e rfe c t
ĐẠ
Clause 1 W hen Clause 2
NG
As soon as
HƯ
S im ple P ast P ast P erfect
ẦN
Past P erfect S im ple P ast
TR
E x: I t happened when I had ju s t le ft u n ive rs ity.
W hen I a rriv e d , th e y had gone in to class.
B
As soon as I had parked the car, I rushed back to th e bank.
00
10
PRACTICE
+3
1. K h i cô ta dến nơi th ì b à i học ñã b ắ t ñầu

P2
2. K h i công an ñến h iệ n trường th ì những tê n cưñp ñã bỏ ñ i.

3. K h i chúng tô i ñến rạ p h á t th ì p h im ñã b ắ t dầu.
CẤ
4. K h i chúng ñến quảng trường th ì cuộc m ittin g ñã k ế t thúc.

5. K h i lũ trẻ ñến sở th ú th ì trờ i b ắ t ñầu mưa.
A
6.
HÓ
K h i chúng tô i ra trường, chúng tô i ñã 30

7 K h i họ ñến tiệ c cưới của cô ta , ba má cô ta ñã ñọc d iê n vă n xong
Í-
xuôi.
-L
8. K h i họ ñến p h i trường, m áy bay ñã cấ t cánh.

ÁN
VI. THE PAST PERFECT CONTINUOUS

TO
A. Formation: _________________
s + had been + V-ing
NG
B. Use:
ƯỠ
Nó ñược dùng tương tự như P ast P erfect nhưng tín h liê n tục của hành
ID
ñộng dược nhấn m ạnh.

BỒ
145

Ex: I ’d been w a lk in g in the fo re st a ll day so I w ent to bed early.
ƠN
I don’t know how lo ng we’d been s ta rin g a t each o th e r w hen
suddenly I shouted.
NH
PRACTICE
UY
.Q
TP
1. He had been w a itin g fo r 15 m inutes w hen the bus a rrive d .
2. They had been s ittin g fo r one hour and a h a lf w hen the w a ite r
O
brought the m enu.
ĐẠ
3. The house had been b u rn in g fo r 20 m in utes w hen the fire bridge got
NG
there.
4. She had been ty p in g fo r one hour when the boss came in .
HƯ
5. Joe Freezer had been a boxer fo r 12 years before he became the
w orld cham pion la s t m onth, (kh ông dùng Past. P erf. C ontinuous
ẦN
ñược vì BE là ñộng từ tìn h trạ n g không p h ả i hành ñộng).
TR
6. E a stfie ld U n ite d had been p la y in g fo r h a lf an hour when the y
scored th e fir s t goal.
B
6. They had been s ittin g in the re sta u ra n t w hen the police a rrive d .
00
8. She had been w o rk in g in London when she m et him .

10
9. He had been liv in g in Canada w hen h is w ife died.

+3
10. I ’d been d oing i t fo r a lon g tim e w hen m y frie n d s came to v is it me.

P2
vn. THE PASSIVE VOICE

CẤ
A. ðịnh nghĩa:
A
1. Câu chủ dộng (a ctive sentence) là câu tro n g ñó chủ ngữ là m chủ
HÓ
hành ñộng.
Ex: Con mèo ăn con chuột
Í-
s V
-L
2. Câu th ụ ñộng (passive sentence) là câu tro n g ñó chủ ngữ tiế p n hận
hành ñộng.
ÁN
E x: Con chuôt b i ăn bởi con mèo.

TO
s V
B. Cách ñổi câu Active - Passive
NG
M uốn ñổi m ộ t câu active sang passive, câu active p h ả i có 3 yếu tố sau:
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
146

A ctive : s V o
ƠN
NH
Passive: s + be + F F + by + 0
cùng thì với thì câu chủ ñộng
UY
c. Ví dụ:
.Q
1. S im ple P resent: W e m eet h e r a t school.
TP
O
She is m e t b y us a t school.
ĐẠ
2. S im ple P ast: W e m e t h e r a t school.
She was m e t by us a t schoool.
NG
3. S im ple F u ture: We s h a ll m eet h e r a t school.
HƯ
She w ill be m e t b y us...
4. P resent C ontinuous: W e are a s k in g h e r a t school.
ẦN
She is b e in g asked by us...
5. P ast C ontinuous: TR
We w ere a sk in g h e r a t school
B
She was b eing asked by us...
00
6. P resent P erfect: W e have m e t h e r a t school.

10
She has been m e t by us...

+3
7. P ast P erfect: We had m e t h e r a t school.

P2
She had been m e t by us...

CẤ
8. M odal verbs: W e can m eet h e r a t school.

A
She can be m et by us...

HÓ
Oi O2
9. Double passive: W e asked h e r a question.
Í-
She was asked a question b y us.

-L
A question was asked h e r by us.

ÁN
10. Vague subject: Someone m e t h e r a t school.

TO
She was m e t b y -someone a t school

NG
11. Im p e ra tiv e : W rite yo u r nam e on th e blackboard.

L e t yo u r nam e be w ritte n ...
ƯỠ
12. Passive In fin itiv e : I t is necessary fo r you to do th is exercise.

I t is necessary fo r th is exercise to be done.
ID
BỒ
147

PRACTICE
A.Changethefollowingsentencesintothepassivevoice.
ƠN
1. We have done a ll th e exercises in th e textbook.
NH
2. They are now using new E n g lish textbooks.
3. You m ust fin is h th e te s t on tim e.
UY
4. She gave m y younger s is te r a d oll.
.Q
5. People speak E n g lis h everyw here.
TP
6. Close the door because i t is w in d y.
7. I t is necessary fo r th e m to le a rn th e ir lessons.
O
ĐẠ
8. The p u p ils w ill buy new u niform s.
B. Turn the fo llo w in g sentences in to the passive voice.
NG
1. The teacher alw ays explain s the lessons cle a rly.
HƯ
2. G u lliv e r broke th e ropes ve ry e asily.
3. People p la y fo o tb a ll everyw here.
ẦN
4. We m ust do these exercises a t home.
TR
5. The little men b ro ug h t h im food and d rin k .
6. They made a ve ry b ig c a rt to b rin g G u lliv e r to the c ity o f the kin g .
B
7. We w a te r th e flo w e rs in th e school-garden everyday.
00
8. T h ey teach E n g lish everyw here.

10
9. They fastened th e arm s and th e legs o f G u lliv e r.

+3
10. We p la n t fr u it trees in th e school-garden. *

P2
11. W hen he came to th e cinem a, th e y had sold a ll th e tick e ts.

12. He said someone had to rn h is new d ic tio n a ry .
CẤ
13. Nobody has answ ered th e question ye t.

A
14. They had closed th e store by the tim e he got there.

HÓ
15. They have b u ilt a new th e a tre in th is stre e t.

16. A frie n d has g iven h im a ve ry good pen.
Í-
17. B y th e tim e N am responded, someone had g ive n the corre ct

-L
answ er.
c. Turnintothepassivevoice.
ÁN
TO
1. Ba has w atered th e flow ers.

2. N am ’s b ro th e r has to rn th e p ictu re book.
NG
3. Tam has p la n te d potatoes in the garden.

4. Someone has a lre ad y sh ut the door.
ƯỠ
5. H is s is te r has b ro ken several glasses.

ID
6. Someone can p ick th e m up a t th e h ote l.

7. Someone m ust serve d in n e r on th e plane.
BỒ

8. Someone should d e live r the message soon.

D. R e w rite this newspaper article, p u ttin g the unde rlined active verbs
ƠN
in to the passive ones.
NH
D A R IN G R A ID A T LO C A L H O T E L
Thieves (1) h eld the m anager o f th e Ridgew ay H otel la s t n ig h t
UY
d u rin g a d a rin g ra id in w hich th e y (2) too k n e a rly £50,000 fro m the
h o te l safe. They also (3) broke in to several o f th e bedrooms and (4)
.Q
rem oved a rtic le s o f value.
TP
The thieve s made th e ir escape throu g h th e kitch e n , w here the y (5)
O
damaged several pieces o f equipm ent. T hey (6) in ju re d the ch ef when
ĐẠ
he trie d to stop them and (7) le ft h im ly in g unconscious on the flo or.
Police (8) a rrested th e thieves e a rly th is m orning.
NG
E.Puttheverbsinbracketsinthecorrectforms.
HƯ
1. I ’ve collected a ll the documents th a t (need) fo r the house sale. Can
ẦN
you take them to th e la w ye r’s office t o ___ (sign)?
2. Look, th is is a secret. Come in to the garden w here we __ _ (not
overhear) TR
3. I f you hadn’t been so la te fo r w ork, y o u __ _ (sack).
B
00
4. The office is ve ry in e ffic ie n t. The telephone __ (never answ er)

10
p ro m p tly, no p roper re c o rd s __ (keep) and w o rst o f a ll, no re p orts

__ (w rite ) fo r weeks.
+3
F. Turn in to the passive voice.

P2
1. D id n ’t he fin d the box?

CẤ
2. W here d id your c h ild fin d the key?

A
3. W hich book do people prefer?

HÓ
4. W hat plays d id Shakespeare w rite ?

5. W ho made the fin a l decision?
Í-
6. I believe someone d e lib e ra te ly set fire to the house.

-L
7. Queen E liza b e th I sle p t in th is bed.

8. He had a good b re akfa st before he w e n t to w ork.
ÁN
TO
VIII. REVISION OF PASSIVE VOICE WITH MODAL VERBS.

• A n o th e r doctor w ill be k ille d tom orrow .
NG
• T h is k ille r m ust be found by tom orrow .

ƯỠ
© I t can’t be done. I t m ust be done.

© Places m ust be checked.
ID
0 I m ay be k ille d next.
BỒ
149

• He couldn’t be found in tim e.
ƠN
PRACTICE
Turnthefolowingsentencesintotheactivevoice. Wherenoagent is
NH
mentioned,onemustbesupplied.
UY
1. School notice: T h is door m ust be k e p t shut.
.Q
2. W hy don’t you have you r eyes tested?
TP
3. T h is speed lim it is to be in trod uce d g ra du a lly.
O
4. I t is now 6 a.m . and a t m ost o f th e h osp ita ls in th e co u n try p a tie n ts
ĐẠ
are being aw akened w ith cups o f tea.
5. B yro n is said to have liv e d on v in e g a r and potatoes.
NG
6. B y tra d itio n , any sturgeon th a t are caught b y B ritis h ships m ust be
offered to the Queen.
HƯ
7. The ow ners w e n t aw ay la s t M a rch and since th e n th e ir houseboat
ẦN
has been used continuously by squatters.
8. Have a li f t p u t in and th e n you w on’t have to clim b up a ll these
sta irs. TR
B
9. L a st year a p ro fit o f tw o m illio n pounds was m ade in th e fir s t six
00
m onths b u t th is was cancelled by a loss o f seventeen m illio n pounds

10
which was made in the second six months.

+3
10. The e a rth is said to be th e ce ntre o f th e universe.

P2
IX. THE CAUSATIVE FORM (Dạng sai bảo)

CẤ
The causative form m ay be expressed in tw o ways:

1. To focus on the thing done, we use:______________
A
HÓ
s + have/ g e t + th in g + p ast p a rtic ip le

I had / got my hair cut.
Í-
She had / got her clothes ironed.

-L
2. To focus on th e p erson n e ed ed , w e use:________ _

ÁN
s + have + person + bare inf

_______ get________ TO infinitive
TO
I had the barber cut my hair.

NG
got to cut
She had her mother iron her clothes,
ƯỠ
got to iron
ID
BỒ
150

PRACTICE
A.TranslateintoVietnamese:
ƠN
1. T hey are g o ing to have a new v illa g e school b u ilt.
NH
2. He’s ju s t g o t a s u it made.
3. She had h e r p o rtra it p a in te d .
UY
4. D id you g et th is re p o rt typed?
.Q
5. Th ey’re going to have th e ir w e d din g cards p rin te d th e re .
TP
6. We g o t th e v ic tim ta k e n to h o s p ita l.
7. She has h ad h e r te e th p ulle d .
O
ĐẠ
8. The boss g o t th e fo rm fille d in .
9. I ’m g oin g to have m y ca r re p a ire d .
NG
10. T h ey have g o t a new a ir-c o n d itio n e r fix e d in th e liv in g -ro o m .
11. Tom has ju s t had a telephone in s ta lle d in h is fla t.
HƯ
12. I got m y shoes p olished .
B.Changetheabovesentencestothecausativeform,active.
ẦN
TR
B
00
10
I. FORMAL & INFORMAL ENGLISH

+3
A. Greetings:
P2
1. Formal: A: H ow do you do.

CẤ
B: H ow do you do.
2. In fo r m a l: A: H e llo or A : H i!
A
B: H e llo B : H i!
HÓ
3. N e u tr a l: A: Good m o rn in g
Í-
B: Good m o rn in g
-L
B. Introductions:
ÁN
1. F o rm a l: • I ’d lik e to m eet M r. B ro w n .
• M a y I in tro d u ce m y s e lf to you?
TO
2. In fo rm a l: H e llo , I ’m H ung.
NG
c. Polite enquiries and responses:

ƯỠ
1. F o rm a l: A : H ow a re you?
ID
B : V e ry w e ll, th a n k s . A n d you?
A : I ’m fin e , th a n k s.
BỒ
2. In fo r m a l: * A: H ow ’s w ork?
151
H ow ’s th e fam ily?
H ow ’s thin g ?
ƠN
How are you g e ttin g on?
B: A ll rig h t.
NH
OK.
UY
N o t bad.
.Q
Fine.
TP
EXERCISE
O
F ill in the gaps in the fo llo w in g conversations:
ĐẠ
Tom : Jake, (1)___ lik e you to (2) m v frie n d A lice .
NG
A lice : H ow (3)___ .
HƯ
Jake: H ow (4)___ .
*
ẦN
A nn : A nd y, (5)___ is Louise.
A ndy:
TR
H e llo , Louise. I ’m (6)___ to (7)___ you.
Â
B
00
Joe: H e llo , P h il. H ow (8)___ ?

10
P h il: F in e , (9)___ . Joe, (10)_____ to see you again.

Ã
+3
P2
Judy: (11)___ I introduce (12)________? M y (13)__Judy G ow er.

R uth: H e llo . I ’m R uth C o llin s. I ’m s o rry I d id n ’t (14)____your name.
CẤ
II. THE FUTURE CONTINUOUS TENSE

A
HÓ
A. Formation:
s + Shall / will + be + V-ing
Í-
B. Use:
-L
I t is used to in d icate an a ction w h ich w ill continue fo r some tim e in

ÁN
the future.
TO
Ex: N e x t week we’l l be reh ea rsin g fo r th e concert.

A t th a t tim e Jason w ill be w a lk in g to the studio.
NG
EXERCISE
ƯỠ
Writecompletesentences, puttingtheverbsintheFutureContinuous
ID
tense.
BỒ
152

1. A t 9 on S aturday, we / take / c h ild re n to the zoo.

2. A t 11, I / pla y / g o lf w ith B ill.
3. 'A t 11.30, A nn / h a ving a d riv in g lesson.
ƠN
4. A t 7.30, we / lis te n / concert in the F e stiva l H a ll.
5. On Sunday m o rn in g, we / d riv e / to Seven Oaks.
NH
6. We / have / lunch w ith A n n ’s parents.
UY
7. B ill and M a ry / have / supper.
.Q
III. FUTURE PERFECT & FUTURE PERFECT CONTINUOUS
TP
Â. Future Perfect:
O
ĐẠ
1. Form ation:
sh a ll + kave + past p a rtic ip le
NG
w ill
HƯ
2. U se : The Future P erfect expresses an a c tiv ity th a t w ill be
com pleted before a nother tim e o r event in the future.
ẦN
Ex: B y the n e x t tim e I see you, I w ill have graduated.
TR
1 w ill have fin ish e d m y hom ew ork by th e tim e I go out on a date
to n ig h t.
B
00
B . Future P e rfe c t Continuous:

10
1. Formation:
+3
sh a ll
+ have been + V -in g
P2
w ill
CẤ
2. U se: I t emphasizes the d u ra tio n o f an a c tiv ity th a t w ill be in

progress before a nothe r tim e o r event in the future.
A
Ex: I w ill have been sleeping fo r 2 hours by the tim e he gets home.
HÓ
W hen professor Jones re tire s n e xt m onth, he w ill have been

Í-
tea ch in g fo r 45 years.
-L
EXERCISE
ÁN
Use the Future Perfect o r F uture P erfect Continuous.

TO
1. I ’m g e ttin g tire d o f s ittin g in th e car. Do you re a lize th a t by the

NG
tim e we a rriv e in P hoenix, we (d rive ) fo r 20 s tra ig h t hours?

2. M a rg a ret was b orn in 1950. B y the ye ar 2000, she (liv e ) on th is
ƯỠ
e a rth fo r 50 years.
ID
3. Go ahead and leave on your vacation. D on’t w o rry about th is w ork.

B y the tim e you (get) back, we (ta ke) care o f e veryth in g .
BỒ
153

4. I don’t understand how th e m a ra th o n ru n n e rs do it ! T he race began

over an hour ago. B y th e tim e th e y reach th e fin is h lin e , th e y (i "0
ƠN
stea d ily fo r m ore th a n 2 hours. I don’t th in k I can ru n m ore th a n 2
NH
m inutes.
5. W hat? He got m a rrie d again? A t th is ra te , he (have) a dozen w ives
UY
by th e tim e he dies.
.Q
6. We have been m a rrie d fo r a lo n g tim e . B y our n e x t a n n ive rsa ry we
TP
(be) m a rrie d fo r 40 years.
O
IV. GERUND
ĐẠ
A. D efinition:
NG
A gerund is th e In g -fo rm o f a verb b u t i t is used as a noun.
B. Uses:
HƯ
A gerund is used in th e fo llo w in g cases:
ẦN
1. After the follow ing verbs:
a dm it fo rg e t keep TR suggest
avoid g ive up m in d lik e
B
consider hate pra ctise d is lik e
00
enjoy re g re t begin s ta rt
10
fancy p u t o ff ris k deny

+3
fin is h postpone stop

P2
Ex: She enjoys p la y in g te n n is.

CẤ
They suggested tra v e llin g b y trains

W ould you m in d com ing e a rlie r n e x t tim e .
A
Please excuse m y be in g so la te .
HÓ
Ì. After these expressions:

can’t help
Í-
can’t stand / bear

-L
it ’s no use
ÁN
it ’s w o rth
to be a fra id o f / te rrifie d o f / frig h te n e d o f / scared o f
TO
to be tire d o f / bored w ith / fed up w ith

NG
to be interested in
to be used to
ƯỠ
)x: I ’m n o t used to g e ttin g up e a rly.

ID
I t ’s no use crying.
L ife is w o rth liv in g .
BỒ
She is tire d o f being a t home a ll day.
54

EXERCISE
Translate into English:
ƠN
1. T rá n h ñ i lạ i tro n g giờ cao ñ iể m th ì tố t hơn.
NH
2. B ạn v u i lò n g v ặ n nhỏ m áy th u th a n h ñược chứ?
3. B ạn có tiế c dã k h ô n g n h ậ n công việc ñó không?
UY
4. A n h ấ y ñã thừ a n h ậ n kh ô n g có g iấ y phép lá i xe.
.Q
5. Tom dã ñề n g h ị ă n cá cho bữa tố i.
TP
6. B ạn có th íc h chơ i quần vợ t chiều n ay không?
7. H ã y ngừng g ã y ồn ào quá!
O
ĐẠ
8. T rá n h tu n g tóe nước lê n sàn nhà.
9. Ja ck ñã từ bỏ h ú t thuốc.
NG
10. B ạn ñã g ộ i ñầu xong chưa?
11. A n h ấ y ñã phủ n h ậ n việ c lấ y cây b ú t của tô i.
HƯ
12. Cô ấ y tín h học A nh vă n và v i tín h .
13. T ạ i sao anh cứ tiế p tụ c n h ìn tô i như thế?
ẦN
14. H ọ ñã hoãn lạ i việ c d i T h à n h phố H C M .
15. ðừng liề u m ạ n g chơi vớ i gấu. TR
B
V. INFINITIVE WITH TO AND WITHOUT TO
00
A. Infinitive with TO:

10
It is used in the following cases:

+3
1. After these verbs:

P2
hope cease
CẤ
refuse pretend
A
plan wish
HÓ
o ffe r
agree
Í-
want
-L
would like
ÁN
intend
expect
TO
promise
NG
manage
attempt
ƯỠ
prefer
ID
Ex: Nobody refused to make a trip to Tay Ninh.

We don’t want to make her sad.
BỒ
She offered to help me.

2. After su ch ad jectives as:

d e lig h te d ready
ƠN
happy su rp rised
pleased w illin g
NH
glad upset
so rry disappointed
UY
sad
.Q
Ex: I was re a lly surp rised to h ear it.
TP
He was alw ays ready to h elp everyone
W e’re w illin g to go w ith you.
O
3. A fter a q u estion word:
ĐẠ
ask ,
NG
J . J w ha t
decide V* "
, “ _ w here
know k
HƯ
s + rem em ber + V + to in fin itiv e .
c _ I w hen
ẦN
fo rg e t "
w hy
e xp la in 1*. 1
_J _1 w h ich
understand TR
Ex: We asked how to get to th e s ta tio n .
B
00
Have you decided w here to go fo r your holidays?

I don’t know how to change th is ty re .
10
4. After THE FIRST, THE SECOND, THE THIRD, THE LAST:

+3
Ex: W ho was the fir s t m an to reach t he top o f M t Everest?

P2
He was th e la s t person to leave t he b u ild in g la s t n ig h t.

She’l l be th e fir s t g ir l to come here.
CẤ
5. In th is structure:
A
advise
HÓ
a llo w , p e rm it
ask
Í-
beg
-L
cause
ÁN
s + “ m £el + O bject + to in fin itiv e ,

TO
urge
encourage
NG
expect
ƯỠ
force
get: nhờ
ID
BỒ
156

te ll
w ant
in v ite
ƠN
persuade
NH
te m p t
order
UY
Ex: I persuaded h im to come.
.Q
She expected us to go w ith her.
TP
He ta u g h t me to p la y the g u ita r.
B. Infinitive without TO. it is used:
O
ĐẠ
1. A fte r verbs o f perception: w atch, hear, see, sm ell...
sing
NG
Ex: I heard h e r in the n e xt room ,
sin g in g
HƯ
cross
We saw the bear . the street,
crossing
ẦN
set
They w atched the sun behind th e m ountain.
se ttin g TR
2. A fte r th e s e v e rb s ; le t (ñể), m ake {làm , k h iế n cho), help (g iú p )
B
00
Ex: L e t us stay here.

Don’t le t h im escape.
10
He made h is parents w o rk too hard.

+3
She helped me êarn E n g lish .

P2
to le a rn
CẤ
EXERCISE
A
Translate in to E nglish:
HÓ
1. T ô i khôn g b iế t Jack nhưng tô i th íc h gặp anh ấy.

Í-
2. A nh ấy ao ước trồ th à n h m ột lậ p trìn h v iê n v i tín h .

-L
3. A n h ấy hứa sẽ lấ y cô ấy.
4. B ạn ñ ịn h là m gì sau k h i bạn có bằng B tiế n g Anh?
ÁN
5. Chúng tô i th íc h du lịc h bằng xe lửa hơn.

TO
6. C húng tô i rấ t buồn nghe tin ta i nạn của cô ấy.

7. Các học s in h phấn kh ở i ñ i n gh ỉ hè.
NG
8. A n h ta kh ôn g th ể quyết ñ ịn h làm cái gì.

ƯỠ
9. H ãy n ó i cho chúng tô i k h i nào di:

10. A nh ấy h ỏ i gặp nhau ở dâu sau giờ học.
ID
11. T ô i không b iế t n ó i th ế nào với cô ta.

BỒ
157

12. B ạn có b iế t cách ñến nhà Jo hn không?
ƠN
13. B ạn có b iế t là m gì k h i có hỏa hoạn không?
14. Cổ ta ñã quyết ñ ịn h nấu gì cho bữa tố i chưa?
NH
15. N e ìl A m stro n g là người ñầu tiê n ñ i bộ trê n m ậ t tră n g .
16. A n h ấy lu ô n luôn là người ñến cuối cùng.
UY
17. Ô ng Thom pson ñã yêu cầu m ọi người giữ yên lặng.
.Q
1 8 . A n h ấ y k h u y ê n t ô i n g h ỉ n g ơ i.
19. Ba má cô ấ y ñộng viê n cô ấy học y khoa, (to study m edicine)
TP
20. Cuốn p h im ây ñã là m cô ta khóc.
O
21. Ông ấy không ñể b ấ t cứ a i h ú t thuốc tro n g vãn phòng của ông ấy.
ĐẠ
NG
HƯ
L DO AND MAKE
ẦN
A. Some idiomatic expressions with DO:
1. Do shopping sắm sửa TR
2. Do w o rk là m việc
B
00
3. Do hom ew ork là m b à i tậ p về nhà

10
4. Do housework là m công việ c n hà

5. Do cle a n in g lau chùi
+3
6. Do w a shing up rửa chén b á t

P2
7. Do garden ing là m vườn

CẤ
8. Do m ilita ry service th i h à n h n ghĩa vụ quân sự

9. Do m athem atics học toá n
A
10. Do h is to ry học sử
HÓ
11. Do lite ra tu re học vă n chương

12. Do som ething in te re s tin g là m cái gì ñó lý th ú
Í-
13. Do a (b orin g) jo b là m m ộ t việc (nh àm chán)

-L
14. Do a crossword chơi ô chữ

ÁN
E x: We have to do m ilita ry service in our co untry.

I ’d gone to London to do some shopping.
TO
I alw ays enjoy doing crossw ord puzzles.

NG
B. Some idiomatic expressions with MAKE:

ƯỠ
1. M ake arrangem ents sắp xếp (công việc)

2. M ake an o ffe r dâng h iế n
ID
3. M ake a suggestion ñề n g h ị
BỒ
4. M ake a decision quyết ñ ịn h
158

5. M ake an a tte m p t cô' gắng, thử

6. M ake an e ffo rt cố gắng
ƠN
7. M ake an excuse x in lỗ i
NH
8. M ake a m ista ke là m lỗ i
9. M ake a noisegây tiế n g ñộng
UY
10. M ake a phone c a ll g ọi ñ iệ n th o ạ i
11. M ake a date hẹn hò
.Q
12. M ake a p ro fit k iế m lờ i
TP
13. M ake a bed dọn giường
O
14. M ake a cake là m bánh
ĐẠ
15. M ake a speech ñọc d iễ n văn
16. M ake tro u b le gây rố i
NG
17. M ake a fuss là m ầm ĩ
HƯ
18. M ake a sound gây tiế n g ñộng
E x: I never m ake a fuss.
ẦN
I made m y bed th is m o rn in g
I ’d m ake some arrangem ents.
I d id n ’t w a n t to m ake a sound. TR
B
00
EXERCISE
CompletethespaceswiththeappropriateformsofDOandMAKE.
10
+3
1. 1 ___o n ly 2 job s in a m onth.

P2
2. I don’t u s u a lly __ £1,000 in a m onth.

CẤ
3. “W h a t__you w a n t me t o ___ ?” he asked.

4. I b e g a n ___a crossw ord.
A
5. “__ me a favour,” I said.

HÓ
6. I ’ve got a jo b t o __ .
7. A la d y h a s __________________ a co m p la int.
Í-
-L
8. H e r fa th e r ____ a fo rtu n e out o f soya beans.

9. Do you e v e r___your own bread?
ÁN
10. The fir s t th in g t o ___is to cut up th e onions.

11. D on’t ju s t stand th e re .___som ething.
TO
12. S h e __ a ll h e r ow n clothes.
NG
13. I ___no w o rk a t a ll yesterday.

14. I t ’s re a lly b o rin g t o ___housew ork a ll day.
ƯỠ
15. We need t o ___a p lan fo r the holidays.

ID
16. Can I ___a phone c a ll fro m yo ur office?

17. The c h ild re n r a r e ly ___a m ista ke in th e ir d ic ta tio n .
BỒ
159

II. INFINITIVE CONSTRUCTIONS

I t + be + adj + o f somebody + to in fin itiv e .
ƠN
nice
k in d
NH
mean: hèn hạ
UY
stupid
s illy
.Q
clever
TP
p o lite
O
ĐẠ
careless
generous
NG
® I t was nice o f you to take me to th e sta tio n .
e I t was careless o f Ja ck to leave the door unlocked w hen he w en t
HƯ
out.
ẦN
® I t ’s stu p id o f h im to give up h is jo b w hen he needs the m oney.
® I t was ve ry generous o f A nn to lend us the money.
2. TR
s + be + adj + enough + to in fin itiv e .
B
9 She doesn’t look in te llig e n t enough to be a professor.
00
3 P eter is n ’t old enough to get m a rrie d .

10
® We are quick enough to catch th e bus.

+3
3. Noun + to in fin itiv e .

<9 I ’ve got 3 m ore s h irts to pack.
P2
<9 Have you got a book to read?

CẤ
» W hich key? The key to lo ck th e case.

4. Pronoun or adverb + to in fin itiv e
A
HÓ
• Ỉ S the re anyw here to p u t in?
» T here’s n o th in g to w o rry about.

Í-
« You’ve got som ewhere to stay to n ig h t.

-L
EXERCISE
ÁN
TO
1. B ạn ñã là m xong việc chưa? T ô i còn n hịều lá thư nữa ñể v iế t.

NG
2. B ạn ñã là m tấ t cả b à i tậ p về nhà của bạn chưa? T ô i còn 2 b à i tập

nữa ñể làm .
ƯỠ
3. B ạn chưa ñọc xong cuốn sách ñó à? T ô i còn 4 tra n g nữa ñể ñọc.

ID
4. B ạn ñã g h i ñ ịa c h ỉ tấ t cả các lá thư chưa? T ô i còn m ộ t v à i lá thư

BỒ
160

nữa ñể g h i ñ ịa ch ỉ.
5. Bạn ñã th u xếp xong xuôi tấ t cả chưa? T ô i còn 1, 2 cú ñiện th o ạ i
nữa p h ả i gọi.
ƠN
6. T h ậ t là quí hóa việc anh giúp tô i học tiế n g A nh.
7. Con g ái chúng tô i ñủ cao ñể với tớ i bảng ñen.
NH
8. T h ậ t là ngớ ngẩn việc anh ấy n ó i như thế .
UY
9. C hẳng có gì dể n ó i về anh ta cả.
10. C húng ta p h ả i tìm m ộ t nơi nào ñó dể ăn trư a.
.Q
TP
III. SPECIAL PASSIVE FORMS
O
1. Someone gave M rs Lee an award.
ĐẠ
M rs Lee was given an aw ard.
A n aw ard was give n to M rs Lee.
NG
2. They made me do it.
HƯ
I was made to do it.
3. We can’t le t the m a tte r re s t here.
ẦN
The m a tte r can’t be allow ed to re s t here.
4. • I saw h e r d riv in g a R olls Royce.
She was seen d riv in g a R olls Royce.
TR
B
• We forced h im to a d m it th a t.
00
He was forced to a d m it th a t.
10
• He expected us to give h im a job.

+3
We were expected to give h im a job.

P2
5. AH o f them d id n o t accept our jo b o ffer.

O ur jo b o ffe r was n o t accepted by any o f them .
CẤ
6. • We believe th a t the y are honest.

A
I t is believed th a t th e y are honest.

HÓ
They are believed to be honest.

• We believe th a t he d id it.
Í-
I t is believed th a t he d id it.
-L
He is believed to have done it.

ÁN
EXERCISE
TO
Changethefollowingsentencesfromactivetopassive.
NG
1. W h a t on e a rth b ro ug ht you here?

ƯỠ
2. We saw them go out.

3. He made us w ork.
ID
4. They le t us go.
BỒ
161

5. W rite your name on the blackboard.

6. I t is im possible fo r you to do th is .
ƠN
7. People rum oured th a t th e re had been a te rrib le accident the re.
8. They said th a t the e a rth was round.
NH
9. Do not ta lk in class.
10. They are going to get divorced.
UY
11. I hate people lo o kin g a t me.
.Q
12. She ke p t on rea ding h er book.
TP
13. They began to b u ild a new house.
14. Smoke fille d th e room.
O
ĐẠ
IV. REVISION OF INFINITIVE WITH TO AND WITHOUT TO
NG
1. They forced us to get up a t 5 o’clock.
HƯ
They d id n ’t a llo w us to smoke in our cells.
2. They made me lie on the ground.
ẦN
They le t me w a lk about the camp
3. He was seen d riv in g h is Land Rover.
TR
B
EXERCISES
00
A. P ut the verbs in brackets in the correct form w ith TO o r w ith o u t TO.

10
1. He made me (do) it a ll over again.

+3
2. She can (sing) quite w e ll.

P2
3. He w ill be able (sw im ) very soon.

CẤ
4. I used (liv e ) in a caravan.

5. You ought (go) today. I t m ay (ra in ) tom orrow .
A
6. W hy d id you le t your room m ate (copy) your paper.

HÓ
B.Combinethese2sentences,followingthismodel.
Í-
Somebody saw h im . He was d riv in g a Land Rover.

-L
He was seen d riv in g a Land Rover.

ÁN
1. Somebody heard h im . He was shouting fo r Help.

2. Somebody film e d her. She was w a vin g to the crowds.
TO
3. Somebody saw it. I t was m oving slow ly.

NG
4. Somebody recorded them . They were te llin g jokes.

5. Someone photographed them . They were sw im m ing in the sea.
ƯỠ
V. VERBS EXPRESSING LIKES & PREFERENCES

ID
1. • I p re fe r th a t coat to th is one.
BỒ
162

s + p re fe r + noun + to + noun.
a I p re fe r d riv in g to tra v e llin g by tr a in .
ƠN
s + p re fe r + gerund + to + gerund.
NH
a Ĩ p re fe r to d riv e ra th e r th a n tra v e l by tra in .
s + p re fe r + to in fin itiv e + ra th e r th a n + bare in fin itiv e .
UY
I w ould p re fe r to tra v e l by car. (w ith TO )
.Q
s + w ould p re fe r + to in fin itiv e
TP
I w ould ra th e r tra v e l by car. (w ith o u t TO )
s + w ould ra th e r + bare in fin itiv e
O
I w ould ra th e r stay a t home th a n so to th e cinem a.
ĐẠ
s + w ould ra th e r + bare in fin itiv e f th a n + bare in fin itiv e
NG
o I w ould ra th e r you cooked the d in n e r now .
I w ould ra th e r she came w ith us.
HƯ
I ’d ra th e r he d id n ’t te ll anyone w h a t I sa id .
s + w ould ra th e r + s + P ast Subjunctive.
ẦN
EXERCISE TR
Translate in to Vietnamese a nd make com ments on the pa ttern s o f the
B
00
sentences.
10
1. Ỉ p re fe r P a ris to London.
+3
2. I p re fe r p h o n in g to w ritin g le tte rs .
P2
3. I p re fe r to phone ra th e r th a n w rite le tte rs .

CẤ
4. She’d p re fe r to eat a t home.

5. She’d ra th e r e at a t home.
A
6. H ung p re fers to stay a t home ra th e r th a n go to the cinem a.

HÓ
7. H ung w ould ra th e r stay a t home th a n go to th e cinem a.

8. H e’d ra th e r th in k about it.
Í-
9. H e’d p re fe r to th in k about it.

-L
10. I ’d ra th e r Tom phoned you.

ÁN
11. She’d ra th e r you to ld h e r about it.

12. W e’d ra th e r she w e n t w ith us.
TO
VI.VERBS EXPRESSING ADVISABILITY

NG
We have th e fo llo w in g verbs to express a d v is ib ility :

ƯỠ
1. SHOULD
ID
You should go now.

You shouldn’t go now.
BỒ
Should I go now?
163

2. O U G H T TO
T hey ought to do it.
They ought n o t (oughtn’t) to do it.
ƠN
W h at ought th e y to do?
NH
3. H A D B E T T E R
We’d b e tte r do it.
UY
We had b e tte r n o t do it .
.Q
H adn’t we b e tte r do it?
TP
EXERCISES
A. Fromthesituationsgiven, writesentencesgivingadvice. UseHAD
O
ĐẠ
BETTER.
NG
1. I need some m oney, and th e b a n k closes in 10 m inu tes.
HƯ
-> You’d b e tte r go now (o r you’d b e tte r h u rry )
2. We’ve got a long jo u rn e y, and th e p e tro l ta n k is a lm ost em pty.
ẦN
3. He’s g e ttin g m a rrie d on S aturday, b u t he hasn’t g ot a su it.
TR
4. H er car’s in a “ no p a rk in g ” area and a policem an’s com ing.
5. H e’s ju s t s p ilt coffee on h e r new dress.
B
6. Th ere’s a fire in th e k itc h e n , and th e y can’t p u t i t out.
00
B.MakesentenceswithHADBETTERNOT...fromthedirections.
10
+3
1. No sm oking -> You’d b e tte r n o t smoke.

2. H o sp ita l. Silence.
P2
3. No p a rkin g .
CẤ
4. D anger! Deep w ater.

5. Beware o f th e dog.
A
c.MakesentenceswithOUGHT(NOT)TO,usingsuggestions.
HÓ
1. spend m ore m oney on education.

Í-
-» I th in k th e y ought to spend m ore m oney on education.

-L
2. stop b u ild in g new roads.

ÁN
3. b u ild m ore houses.

4. in trodu ce free buses fo r o ld people.
TO
5. increase local taxes.

NG
6. spend m ore m oney on th e police.

7. b u ild a new m otorw ay.
ƯỠ
8. spend less on social services.

ID
9. b u ild an .a irp o rt nea r th e tow n.

BỒ
164

INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR ÔB
&GERUNDS
ƠN
I. REVISION OF INFINITIVES
Put the verbs in brackets in the correct form“DO”, “TODO” or
NH
“DOING”
UY
1. P ut th a t cig a re tte out! You are n o t a llo w e d ___in here, (sm oke)
.Q
2. I t ’s h o t in here. W ould you m in d __th e w indow ? (open)
TP
3. He found the w o rk d iffic u lt, b u t he m anaged th e exam ina tio n
(pass).
O
ĐẠ
4. I never read Shakespeare now, because th e y made me __ i t a t
school, (study)
NG
5. She alw ays tra v e ls by tra in o r boat because she’s a fra id o f __ (fly ).
6. “ L e t’s go out to n ig h t!” “A ll rig h t. W here do you w a n t__ _?” (*go)
HƯ
7. You’re overw eight. You o u g h t__ m ore exercise, (take)
ẦN
8. T h is is a ve ry b ea u tifu l villa g e , b u t th e re ’s no w here __ in the
evening, (go)
TR
9. W hen I fir s t v is ite d B rita in , I couldn’t get used t o ___on th e le ft.
B
(d rive )
00
10. T h ere ’s a lo t o f tra ffic . W e’d b e tte r n o t___th e road here, (cross)
10
11. I gave u p __ fiv e years ago. (smoke).

+3
12. I ’m bored w it h ___th e same clothes everyday, (w ear)

P2
13. The book was ve ry d iffic u lt___. (understand)

14. N e ith e r o f them could fin d a jo b, so th e y b oth decided ___.
CẤ
(em igrate)
A
15. She’s v e ry co nfid e nt. She expects___ th e electio n, (w in )

HÓ
16. I ’m n o t h e re ___m y tim e ! (waste)

17. They w on’t le t y o u __ the U n ite d S tates w ith o u t a visa, (en ter)
Í-
-L
18. He jo in e d th e n a v y __ th e w o rld , (see)

19. I w onder i f you’d be k in d e no ug h__ me? (he lp)
ÁN
20. C h a rlie C h a p lin film s alw ays make m e ___. (laugh)

TO
21. H e’s n o t in te re ste d i n __ money; h is fa th e r’s a m illio n a ire , (earn)

22. D on’t give up y e t; we m ust k e e p __ . (try )
NG
23. I ’d ra th e r__ happy th a n ric h , (be)

ƯỠ
24. He needed bodyguards because several people had th re a te n e d __

h im . (k ill)
ID
25. I was very h a p p y __ your news. (hear).

BỒ
165

26. Take your tim e . I don’t m in d __ L (w a it)

27. I ’d ra th e r n o t___about th a t. (ta lk ).
ƠN
28. W e’re going to O xford tom orrow . W ould you lik e ___ w ith us?
NH
(come)
29. He w on’t be long. He’s ju s t got tw o m ore phone c a lls __ . (m ake)
UY
30. She d id n ’t w a n t to go to w o rk, so she p re te n d e d ___ill. (be)
.Q
II. SPECULATING ABOUT THE PRESENT SITUATIONS
TP
» W hen speculating about the present situ a tio n s, we use m odal verbs.
O
» The degree o f c e rta in ty o f those speculations depends on the
ĐẠ
m eaning o f each m odal verb,
NG
a There are 3 ways to speculate about a present action.
1. Positive speculation
HƯ
3 s + pres, o f BE: He is sick. (The degree o f c e rta in ty is 100%)
ẦN
» s + m ust + be: He m ust be sick. (90% ) •
m ay m ay
» s + m ig h t + be: H e m ig h t be sick. (50%) TR
B
could could
00
2. Negative speculation
10
* s + be + not: He is n ’t hungry. (100%)

+3
couldn’ t
P2
. couldn t . .
» s + can t + be: He be hungry. (90%)
CẤ
can t
m ustn t
A
m ay n o t raay n o t
HÓ
as + + be: He be hungry. (50%)

m ig h t n o t m ig h t n o t
Í-
3. Speculation about an action in progress

-L
m ust
ÁN
s + ma^ + be + V -in g = s + be + probably + V -in g .

TO
m ig h t
can
NG
They m ust / may / m ig h t / can be sleeping.

ƯỠ
= They are probably sleeping.

ID
BỒ
166

EXERCISES
A. Complete the sentences by using M U ST OR M A Y / M IG H T / COULD
ƠN
w ith the suggested words:
NH
1. A: Have you n otice d th a t P rofessor Adam s w ear som ething green
everyday?
UY
B: I know . H e ___. (lik e green).
.Q
2. A : Look a t th e m an s ta n d in g outside th e w in dow on the fifte e n th
TP
flo o r o f th e b u ild in g .
B: H e ___ . (be crazy).
O
A : I agree. O n ly a n u t w ould do som eth in g lik e th a t.
ĐẠ
3. A : W here’s M s Adam s? She’s n o t in h e r office.
NG
B: I don’t know . She _ _ (be a t th e m eeting).
A : I f you see h e r, w ould you te ll h e r I ’m lo o k in g fo r her.
HƯ
B: C e rta in ly , M r. W h ite .
4. A t H ello?
ẦN
B: H e ỉỉo . M a y I speak to Ron?
A : I ’m s o rry. You TR
(have th e w ron g num ber). T here’s no one
here by th a t nam e.
B
5. A : H ow lo n g has i t been since you la s t saw yo ur fam ily?
00
B: O ver a year.
10
A : Y o u ___. (m iss the m ve ry m uch).

+3
B: I do.
B. Makespeculation about thepresent time negative, following the
P2
CẤ
model.
A
M odel: W h a t’s th a t in th e sky? Is i t fro m o ute r space? (im possible).

HÓ
-> I t can’t be fro m outer space.

1. Is th is ta b le V ic to ria n ? (possible)
Í-
2. W ho’s th a t? I th in k i t ’s P rin ce C harles! (possible, b u t u n lik e ly ).

-L
3. H e’s g o t a p riv a te plane. Is he v e ry rich ? (a lm o st ce rta in )

ÁN
4. T h a t wom an bays she’s 130 years old. (a lm o st im possible).

c. W hat do yo u th in k these people are doing? M ake inferences using
TO
MUST/MAY/MIGHT/CAN’T+ BE+V-INGwhenpossible.
NG
M odel: C a th e rin e ’s s ittin g in th e cinem a.

ƯỠ
-> She m u st be w a tch in g a film .

1. Jam es is s ittin g in a re sta u ra n t.
ID
2. S arah’s w a lk in g th ro u g h an a rt g a lle ry .
BỒ
3. R ich a rd ’s s ittin g in a fo o tb a ll stadium .
167

4. E m m a’s in h e r car on th e m otorw ay.

5. Thom as and V ic to ria are s ittin g in th e lib ra ry .
ƠN
III. VERBS EXPRESSING OBLIGATIONS OR DUTIES
• V erbs expressing o blig a tio n s o r duties are:
NH
1. S H O U LD
UY
O U G H T TO
HAD BETTER
.Q
2. TO BE (N O T) SUPPOSED TO : lẽ ra , dung ra p h ả i,
TP
không nên...
O
TO BE TO : p h ả i
ĐẠ
E x: I am to go now = I m ust go now.
• We use “to be supposed to ” to give th e idea th a t someone expects a
NG
p a rtic u la r person to do som ething.
HƯ
Ex: You are supposed to obey th e re gula tions.
You are supposed to be m ow ing th e law n.
ẦN
You are n o t supposed to w a lk on th e grass.
• “To be to ” is stro ng e r and m ore d e fin ite th a n “to be supposed to ” .
TR
Ex: The com m ittee is to m eet tom orrow .
B
The game is to begin a t 10.
00
10
EXERCISE
Writecompletesentenceswith“tobe(not) supposedto” and“tobeto”
+3
fromthegiveninstructions:
P2
CẤ
1. No sm oking. You are n o t supposed to smoke.

You are n o t to smoke.
A
HÓ
2. Keep o ff th e grass.
3. No e atin g o r d rin k in g in th is room .
Í-
4. M ove to th e re a r o f th e bus.
-L
5. Do n o t jo ke w ith a irp o rt personnels w h ile hand luggage is being

inspected.
ÁN
6. Use th e s ta irs in case o f fire . Do n o t use the elevators.

TO
7. No litte rin g .
NG
ĨV. SPECULATING ABOUT THE PAST

ƯỠ
1. Affirmative speculation:
ID
• f s + S im ple P ast o f B E I
He was sick. (100%)
BỒ
168

s + m ust have + past p a rtic ip le

He m ust have been sick. (90%)
may
ƠN
s + m ig h t + have + past p a rtic ip le
NH
could
may
UY
He m ig h t have been sick. (50%)
.Q
could
TP
Negative speculation
O
s + past o f BE + not
ĐẠ
He wasn’t hungry. (100%)
NG
couldn’ t
s + c a n 't + have + past p a rtic ip le
HƯ
m u s tn 't
ẦN
couldn’ t
He c a n 't have been hungry. (90%)
TR
m u s tn 't
B
m ay
00
s + . + n o t + have + past p a rtic ip le

10
may
He . n ° t have been h un g ry (50%)
+3
P2
3. Speculating about the past with SHOULD

CẤ
s + should have + past p a rtic ip le

T h is structure expresses a past d uty b u t i t wasn’t fu lfille d .
A
HÓ
Ex: You should have to ld h im th a t th e p a in t on th a t seat was w et.

Í-
EXERCISE
TranslateintoEnglish,usingthepastspeculation
-L
ÁN
1. Chắc h ẳn anh ta ñã rấ t m ay m ắn.

2. Có lẽ anh ta ñã lấ y m ộ t phụ nữ giàu có.
TO
3. Có lẽ bạn ñã sử dụng c á i th ắ n g này quá lâu.

NG
4. Có thể anh ta ñã cưứp ngân hàng.

5. K hông th ể có chuyện anh ta dã n h a i kẹo cao su tro n g giờ âm nhạc.
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
169

V. REVISION OF PASSIVE VOICE
ƠN
EXERCISE
NH
P ut the fo llo w in g in to the passive voice:
UY
1. Some d is tric t farm e rs use pigs to fin d tru ffle s . (nấm. thơm)
.Q
2. Someone sw itch ed on a lig h t and opened th e door.
TP
3. W hy d id n ’t th e y m end th e ro o f before i t fe ll in?
4. The mob broke a ll the shop w indow s in re ce n t rio ts .
O
ĐẠ
5. The lib ra ria n said th a t th e y were s ta rtin g a new system because
people were n o t re tu rn in g books.
NG
6. People are spending fa r m ore m oney on food now th a n th e y spent
ten years ago.
HƯ
7. I t is h ig h tim e someone to ld h im to stop b e ha ving lik e a ch ild .
8. The judge gave h im 2 weeks in w h ich to pay th e fin e .
ẦN
TR
B
00
I. SPECULATING ABOUT A PAST ACTION IN PROGRESS

10
1. Modal Perfect Continuous constructions:

+3
P2
m ust
could
CẤ
They + m ay + have been + V -in g .

A
m ig h t
HÓ
________ should______________________
Í-
ĩx : The g irls m ust have been p la y in g w ith the boys.

-L
c o u ld n 't
ÁN
They + c a n 't + have been + V -in g .

________sh o u ld n 't_____________________
TO
Cx: They couldn’t have been e a tin g ice cream

NG
2. These m odal P erfect Continuous constru ctions are used the same as
th e constructions in gram m ar 8 .IV b u t th e d u ra tio n o f th e actions is .
ƯỠ
em phasized.
ID
3. M ore exam ples:

• T hey m ust have been e ating w hen th a t in c id e n t happened.
BỒ
• The c h ild m ust have been p la y in g w hen th e y in te rru p te d her.
170
• The ca pta in m ig h t have been w a tching th e d r ill whon the

accident happened.
ƠN
• He should have been d riv in g in the r ig h t w hen the patrolm an
NH
a rriv e d ,
UY
EXERCISE
PutthefollowingintoEnglish:
.Q
TP
1. K h ô n g th ể có chuyện cô ấ y ñang n ó i tiế n g Pháp lúc bấy giờ.
O
2. K hô n g th ể có chuyện anh ấ y ñã dang n gồi tro n g quán cà phê.
ĐẠ
3. K h ô n g th ể có chuyện em bé 2 tu ổ i nà y ñã ñang ñọc Shakespeare.
4. Lẽ ra cô ta ñã và còn ñang kh ô n g nên h ú t thuốc gần trạ m bơm
NG
xăng.
HƯ
5. Lẽ ra anh ấy ñã và còn ñang kh ô n g nên cười tro n g ñám tang.
6. Lẽ ra cầu th ủ ñó ñã và còn ñang kh ô n g n ên cãi nhau vớ i trọ n g tà i.
ẦN
II.APOLOGY AND RESPONSE
1. Apology and Response: TR
B
• Formal:
00
a. Apology b. Response
10
- Forgive me. I’m terribly sorry. - T h a t’s quite a ll rig h t.

+3
- I would lik e to apologize for... - I u nderstan d com pletely.

P2
- I ’m sorry. - You re a lly don’t have a n y th in g

to apologize for...
CẤ
- I w ou ldn’t w o rry about i t i f I

A
were you.
HÓ
• Informal:
a. Apology b. Response
Í-
- Oh, sorry. - Oh, w e ll, th a t’s life .

-L
- I t ’s OK.
ÁN
- No problem .
TO
- F o rg et it.
2. Offer to remedy the mistake.
NG
- I didn’t m ean to do it.

ƯỠ
- I d id n ’t realize I had done it.

ID
- I t was so s illy o f me to do it.

BỒ
- I t w on’t happen again.
171

- W h a t more can I say?

EXERCISE
MatchtheproblemsinpartI withtheexplanationsoftheproblemsand
ƠN
offerstoremedytheproblemsinpartII.
NH
II
UY
A. Hey! T h a t’s m y coat. 1. I ’m te r r ib ly sorry, officer. I ju s t
.Q
B. Can I see yo u r d riv in g licence, d id n ’t see the red lig h t.
sir? 2. Yes, you’re rig h t. I t was very
TP
c . Who? I ’ve never heard o f h im . careless o f me. I ’m sorry. I
O
D. You should be more careful. hope you’re n o t h u rt.
ĐẠ
E. W hy d id n ’t you say “h e llo ” to 3. I m ust have d ia lle d the w rong
me yesterday? num ber. Sorry.
NG
F. You can’t come in here. You 4. Is it? Oh, yes. I ’m te r rib ly
HƯ
m ust be a member. sorry. I t looks ju s t lik e m ine.
G. I ’m a fra id you’re s ittin g in m y 5. Re ally! I d id n ’t kno w i t was a
ẦN
seat. p riv a te club. Sorry.
H. You can pay n e xt tim e . You are 6. I ’m a w fu lly sorry. I tho ught
a re gular customer.
TR th e y w ere a ll reserved.
B
7. I re a lly m ust apologize. I
00
tho u g h t I had m y w a lle t w ith

10
me.
+3
8. I ’m sorry. I d id n ’t mean to
ig nore you.
P2
CẤ
III.MORE ABOUT INFINITIVE AND GERUND - FULL FORM

AND NOTE FORM
A
HÓ
A. More about infinitive and gerund

1. A num ber o f verbs in E n g lish are always follow ed by an in fin itiv e
Í-
w ith TO o r a gerund.
-L
Ex: I w a n t to speak E ng lish w e ll.

ÁN
She avoids m ee ting me.

2. Some o th e r verbs can be follow ed b y e ith e r an in fin itiv e w ith TO or
TO
a gerund. I t is, however, necessary to d istin g u ish the difference in

m eaning o f these 2 uses.
NG
Ex: • I lik e to swim .

ƯỠ
I lik e sw im m ing.
• I stopped to ta lk to her.
ID
BỒ
172

I stopped ta lk in g to her.
• I t r y to le a rn English.
ƠN
I tr y le a rn in g E n glish .
• I w e n t on to e xpla in the lesson.
NH
I w e n t on e xp la in in g the lesson.
UY
• I m ust rem em ber to post th is le tte r.
I can’t rem em ber postin g th is le tte r.
.Q
• I can’t forget to b rin g the raincoat.
TP
I forgot b rin g in g the raincoat.
O
• I re g ret to say I don’t have sym pathy w ith you.
ĐẠ
I re g re t saying I don’t have sym pathy w ith you.
• I re g re t to spend a ll th a t money.
NG
I re g re t spending a ll th a t money.
HƯ
EXERCISE
ẦN
TranslateintoEnglish,usingtheinfinitiveformorthegerundform.
1. A n h ta dừng lạ i ñể uống rượu. TR
B
2. A n h ta th ô i kh ôn g uống rượu.
00
3. Cô ta th íc h sưu tầ m te m (ngẫu hứng)

10
4. Cô ta th ích sưu tầ m tem (sở thích).

5. B ạn có th ể nhớ dã là m gì ở trường tiể u học không?
+3
6. T ô i sẽ nhớ gọi ñ iệ n th o ạ i cho B ill.

P2
7. T ô i sẽ kh ôn g quên ñọc b à i báo ñó.

CẤ
8. T ô i ñã quên ñọc b à i báo ñó.

B. Full form and note form
A
HÓ
1. To summ arize th e biography o f a famous person we can use the note

form . B ut when we w a n t to describe h is/ h e r life in d e ta il, we use
Í-
th e fu ll form .
-L
2. Exam ple: B iography o f H ow a rd Hughes, a m illio n a ire .

ÁN
Note form : - 1905: born in Houston, Texas.

- 1925: m a rrie d E lla Rice.
TO
F u ll form : - H ow ard Hughes was born in Houston,

Texas in 1905.
NG
- He m a rrie d E lla Rice in 1925

ƯỠ
EXERCISE
WritetheMlformofthesenotesaboutJohnLennon.
ID
BỒ
17

- 1940: B orn L iverpool.

- 1942: Lennon fa m ily deserted. M o th e r leaves. John brought up by
ƠN
aunt.
NH
- 1968: Lennon divorced by wife.
- 1973: Lennon and Joko Ono separate.
UY
- 1974: D rin k problem.
.Q
V. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
TP
Three common types of conditional sentences:
O
. Real condition.
ĐẠ
If-clause M a in clause
NG
S im ple Present Sim ple F uture
HƯ
Ex: I f I have tim e , I sh a ll read th is book.
. Unreal condition in the present.
ẦN
If-clause TR M a in clause
B
Past Subjunctive Sim ple C o nditio nal
00
(V+ed / column 2 / BE-VW ERE) (would + V)

10
Ex: I f i t ra in e d now, we would stay here.

+3
I f I were you, I would m a rry her.

P2
. Unreal condition in the past.

CẤ
A
Past Perfect Subjunctive C o n d itio n a l Perfect

HÓ
(had + past p a rticip le ) (would have + PP)

Í-
Ex: I f i t had rained, we would have staved here.

-L
I f I had been you, I would have m a rrie d her.

ÁN
. Other ways of expressing conditions:

Real condition.
TO
NG
ƯỠ
Should + verb Command

(im probable condition)
ID
Ex: I f he should come, le t h im go s tra ig h t in .

BỒ
Ĩ4

2. Omission of “ IF” .
W hen the if-clause contains S H O U LD , W ERE o r H A D + PAST
ƠN
P A R T IC IP L E , we can o m it “ IF ” b u t rem em ber to use th e in version o f
NH
the subject and verb.
Ex: I f he should come, le t h im go s tra ig h t in.
UY
I f I were you, I would m a rry her.
I f i t had rain ed , we would have stayed here.
.Q
-» Should he come, le t him ...
TP
W ere I you, I would...
O
H a d i t rain ed, we would have...
ĐẠ
3. Unless = If not.
I f + negative verb = unless + a ffirm a tiv e verb
NG
Ex: I f you don’t tru s t me, I ’l l resign.
HƯ
U nless you tru s t me, I ’l l resign.
ẦN
EXERCISES
A. Translate in to E ng lish :
TR
1. M a ry kh ôn g th ể nghe trừ k h i bạn la lớn.
B
00
2. T ô i sẽ khô n g ñ i dự tiệ c trừ k h i bạn cũng ñi.

10
3. B ạn kh ô n g ñược phép vào câu lạc bộ trừ k h i bạn là h ộ i viên.

4. A n h ấy sẽ kh ôn g n ó i với bạn trừ k h i bạn h ỏ i anh ấy m ộ t câu hỏi.
+3
5. T rừ k h i chúng ta n h a n h lê n, chúng ta sẽ lỡ chuyến xe buýt.

P2
B. R e w rite these sentences, o m ittin g I F when possible:

CẤ
1. I f I were you, I ’d go away alone.

A
2. I f I had know n th is before, I would have in fo rm e d you.

HÓ
3. I f you should w a n t fu rth e r details, don’t h esita te to ask.

4. I f you should leave me, don’t b o th e r to say good-bye.
Í-
5. I f he m et her, he would give h e r a rin g .

-L
6. I f you hadn’t studied film in d u stry, you’d never have hea rd o f them .
ÁN
7. W ould you phone me i f you came to England?

8. I f you saw Jane, ask h e r to contact me.
TO
9. You w ouldn’t have passed your exam i f you had n’t w orke d harder.
10. He would be i l l i f he d id n ’t stop w o rryin g .
NG
ƯỠ
V. REVISION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

ID
EXERCISE ON TYPE 2
BỒ
175

1. T ô i sẽ kh ôn g mua cái ñó trừ k h i nó có bảo hành.

2. Nếu tô i là anh, tô i sẽ ñ i bác sĩ xem bệnh ho~ñó.
ƠN
3. Bạn sẽ h ỏ i ai nếu bạn kh ôn g b iế t cách là m việc ñó?
NH
4. T ô i sẽ mua nó nếu tô i có khả n ă n g tr ả tiề n .
5. T ô i sẽ khô ng mua nó trừ k h i tô i có kh ả n ă n g trả tiề n .
UY
6. T ô i sẽ từ chối d i trừ k h í họ trả chi p h í cho tôi.
7. Cô ta r ấ t lười. Cô ta sẽ ñậu nếu cô ấy cô' gắng hơn.
.Q
8. A n h ấy sẽ kh ông th ể ñ i trừ k h i chúng ta có th ể k iế m cho anh ấy
TP
m ột người coi trẻ .
O
ĐẠ
VI. REVISION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
NG
EXERCISE ON TYPE 3
HƯ
Read the fo llo w in g sentences a n d w rite co n d itio n a l sentences o f type 3 :
1. She d id n ’t eat a n y th in g because she wasn’t hugry.
ẦN
I f she had been hungry, she would have eaten som ething.
TR
2. The accident happened because the d riv e r in fro n t stopped
suddenly.
B
3. I d id n ’t wake George because I d id n ’t kn ow he w anted to get up
00
early.
10
4. I was able to buy th e car because J im le n t me th e money.

+3
5. She wasn’t in ju re d in the crash because she was w e a ring a seat-

P2
belt.
6. You’re h un gry now because you d id n ’t have breakfast.
CẤ
7. She d id n ’t buy th e coat because she d id n ’t have enough money on

A
her.
HÓ
Í-

-L
L SENTENCE PATTERN WITH UNREAL OBJECT

ÁN
® Pattern:__________________________________________________
TO
s + V + i t + adj / noun phrase + to in fin itiv e phrase

NG
unreal object real object

ƯỠ
• Examples:
- I fin d i t h a rd to believe in w h a t she said la s t week.
ID
- We consider i t our in te re s t to send more aids to the

BỒ
176

underdeveloping countries.
- I 't h i n k i t im p o rta n t to emphasize the need for greater cooperation
ƠN
w ith them .
• R ecall pattern w ith u n real subject:___________
NH
I t + be + adjective + to in fin itiv e phrase
UY
unreal subject real subject
.Q
I t is d iffic u lt to make friends.
TP
I t is in te re s tin g to take p a rt in a football m atch.
O
EXERCISE
ĐẠ
Translate in to English, using the p a tte rn w ith u nre a l object:
NG
1. Chúng tô i th ấ y việc luyện tậ p tiế n g A nh m ỗi ngày là cần th iế t.
2. H ọ coi việc ầóng thu ế là bổn phận của họ.
HƯ
3. Cô gái này n gh ĩ việc bảo vệ h ạn h phúc gia ñình là quan trọng.
4. N hữ ng ñứa trẻ n ày cảm th ấ y việc bơi lộ i ở sông cả ngày là thoải
ẦN
m ái.
5. Cô ta th â y việc g h i nhớ từ vựng là khó. TR
B
II. IF ONLY
00
Cấu trú c với IF O N L Y có 3 t rường hợp:

10
rr I present
I f only + 4 expresses a future wish.
+3
w ill + verb
P2
Ex: - I f only he comes in tim e.

CẤ
(= we hope he w ill come in tim e )

- I f only he w in lis te n to me.
A
(= I hope he w il l lis t en to me)

HÓ
f past
2. expresses a present or a past wish.
l f 0 n l y * i past perfect
Í-
Ex: - I f only he d id n ’t smoke.

-L
(= We w ish he didn ’t smoke)

ÁN
- I f o nly he were here.

(= We w ish he were here).
TO
- I f only we had had our grandchildren.

(= We w ish we had had...)
NG
3. I f only + would + V also expresses a future w ish, but is not

ƯỠ
hopeful in com parison w ith p atte rn 1.

ID
BỒ
177

Ex: - I f only he would d riv e more slow ly.
ƠN
(= We w ish he would drive...)
- I f only the ra in would stop.
NH
(= We w ish the ra in would stop)
UY
EXERCISES
.Q
A. Translate in to E ng lish :
TP
1.ước chi những tr á i chuối chín. Lúc bây giờ chúng ta có th ể ăn ñược.
O
2.Ước chi tủ ñá rẻ. Lúc bấy giờ chúng ta có th ể mua m ộ t cái.
ĐẠ
3.Ước chi sữa ñược khử trù ng . Lúc bấy giờ chúng ta có th ể uống nó.
4.Ước chi những quả dâu tâ y ñược ưởp lạ n h. Lúc bấy giờ chúng ta có
NG
thể giữ chúng ñược tươi.
HƯ
5. Ước gì lúc này tô i m ệt. Lúc bấy giờ tô i có th ể ngủ.
B. Make sentences w ith I F ONLY, fo llo w in g the examples.
ẦN
1. He w orks too hard. I f only he d id n ’t w o rk so hard.
TR
He w orked too hard. I f o nly he hadn’t w orked so hard.
B
2. She w orries too much.
00
She w orried too much

10
3. They drive too fast.

+3
They drove too fast.

P2
4. He spends too much money.

CẤ
He spent too much money.

5. I ta lk too fast.
A
HÓ
I talked too fast.

Í-
-L

ÁN
I. FUNCTIONS OF A GERUND PHRASE

TO
A gerund phrase can be the:

NG
1. Subject:
ƯỠ
E a tin g carrots is good fo r the eyes,

D rin k in g coffee stops you sleeping.
ID
2. Object:
BỒ
He has appreciated rov.doing th a t d iffic u lt task.
178
3. Object of a preposition:
ƠN
T hey objected to m y w o rk in g in the ra in a ll d a y.
4. Complement after BE:
NH
Seeing is b e lie v in g .
UY
EXERCISES
.Q
A.Identitythefunctionofthegerundinthefollowingsentences:
TP
O
1. W o rk in g in these conditions is a pleasure.
ĐẠ
2. W o rk in g makes us happier.
3. H is a im is m a s te rin g E ng lish .
NG
4. I tho u g h t o f going to see m y re la tive s today.
HƯ
5. He le ft w ith o u t sa vin g a w o rd .
6. There was lit t le hope o f re aching home in th e a fte rn o on .
ẦN
7. Before s ta rtin g , we should get e v e ry th in g ready.
8. Excuse me fo r g iv in g you so much trouble.
TR
9. He doesn’t deny h is ta k in g p a rt in th is w ork.
B
10. A fte r b eing exam ined bv th e doctor, th e young m an was a d m itte d
00
to th e sports club.
10
B. Translate in to E nglish :
+3
1. B ạ n có th ể th ấ u t r iệ t tiế n g A n h bằng cách n ó i nó m ỗ i ngày.

P2
2. Sự bận rộ n của cô ta kh ô n g ngăn cản cô ta th a m g ia vào việc này.

CẤ
3. T ô i kh ô n g th íc h dược người ta n ó i chuyện vớ i cung cách như thế.

4. A n h ta th íc h học toán.
A
5. B ạn cảm p h iề n ñóng cửa sổ ñược không?

HÓ
6. Cô ta chông lạ i việc a nh ta ñược m ời ñến chỗ cô ta ở.

Í-
7. C húng tô i tiế p tục là m b à i tậ p của chúng tô i.

-L
8. A n h ấy th íc h k ể những câu chuyện như th ế .

9. A n h ấ y th íc h ñược kể cho nghe nhữ ng câu chuyện như thế.
ÁN
10. N g à y th á n g a n h ta trở lạ i quê hương k h ô n g rõ rà n g (kh ô ng chắc

TO
chắn)
II. THE USES OF “WISH”

NG
ƯỠ
1. I w is h to see h e r soon.
ID
2. I w is h h e r to re tu rn home soon.
BỒ
3. Three m a in uses o f W IS H : I t is used w hen th e speaker w ants

re a lity to be d iffe re n t. V erb form s a fte r W IS H are, therefore,
179
s im ila r to those in c o n ditio n a l sentences.

• P re se n t w ish:
I w ish I were a t home now in fro n t o f th e television w ith a cup of
ƠN
cocoa.
NH
I sometim es w is h I w orked the re , in th a t b uilding .
• P ast wish:
UY
I w ish th a t I had washed th e clothes yesterday.
She wishes th a t h e r husband could have been there.
.Q
• Future wish:
TP
I w is h he w ould w rite m ore often.
O
I w is h he would w ear a coat.
ĐẠ
N o te s :
• Don’t use I w ish I would be ric h .
NG
or I w ish I would be ta lle r.
HƯ
Please say: I w ish I were ric h .
I w is h I were ta lle r.
ẦN
The subject o f W IS H cannot be the same as the subject o f W O U LD +
TR
V w hen we w a n t to express future w is h because th is w o u lj be
illo g ica l. Ju st p ut th is w ish in the present situ atio n , (see examples
B
above)
00
Use W O U LD a fte r I w ish o n ly w ith actions w hic h the subject o f

10
wou: |D + V can control.

+3
I w ish he would w rite m ore often.

P2
I w ish he would w ear a coat.

CẤ
• W ISH & W OU]LD never used w ith the same subject

A
EXERCISE
Writesentenceswith/ WISH...
HÓ
Í-
1. I don’t know how m any people, (and I ’m lonely)

-L
I w ish I kn ew more people.

2. I can’t give up sm oking, (but I ’d lik e to)
ÁN
I w is h ___.
TO
3. I haven’t any cigarettes, (and I need one)

I w is h ___.
NG
I
4. George is n ’t here, (and need h im )
ƯỠ
I w is h ___.
5. I t ’s cold, (and I hate cold w eather)
ID
I w is h ___.
BỒ
180

6. I liv e in London, (and I hate London)

I w is h ___.
7. T in a can’t come to the pa rty, (she’s your best frie n d)
ƠN
I w is h ___.
NH
8. I have to w o rk tom orrow, (b u t I ’d lik e to stay in bed)
I w is h ___.
UY
9. I don’t know a n y th in g about cars, (and m y car has ju s t broken
down)
.Q
I w is h ___.
TP
10. I ’m n o t ly in g on beautiful sunny beach, (and th a t’s a p ity )
O
I w is h ___.
ĐẠ
NG
HƯ
I. DIFFERENT WAYS TO EXPRESS REGRET ABOUT THE PAST
ẦN
1. Should have + pp
T h ey should have ta u g ht us a few basics. TR
B
H e has fa ile d in the exams. He should have w orked much harder.
00
2. Conditional sentence type 3

10
+3
I f th e y had taug ht us a few basics, I would have been happier.

P2
3. Wish + past perfect subjunctive

CẤ
I w is h th e y had ta u g ht us a few basics.

N o te ; Do n o t use W O U LD H A V E B E E N a fte r W IS H .
A
HÓ
I w is h I i t I had been warm er. (NOT: would have been)

4. If only + past perfect subjunctive
Í-
-L
I f o nly th e y had tau ght us a few basics.

5. Regret + gerund
ÁN
I re g re t being unable to a tte n d th e m eeting la s t n ig h t.

TO
(pres)
Notes:
NG
1. Regret + gerund —>■gerund is the e a rlie r action

ƯỠ
I re g re t being unable to a tte n d the m eeting la s t n ig h t.

ID
2. Regret + in f -» re g re t is th e e a rlie r action.

BỒ
181

I re g re t to be unable to ... to n ig h t.
ƠN
EXERCISE
WritesentenceswithI REGRET(not) + GERUND.
NH
1. I bought a calculator. I t d id n ’t w ork.
UY
I w ish I ha d n ’-t-bougbfe-i t . I re g re t b uying it.
.Q
2. M y frien ds w e n t to London. I d id n ’t go.
TP
3. I failed th e exam ination.
O
ĐẠ
4. I was v e ry rude to h e r yesterday.
5. I never played games a t school.
NG
6. I had to w ear a u n ifo rm to school.
HƯ
7. I chose th e w ro n g jo b.
ẦN
II. REVISION OF WISHES
A wish about She will not tell me. TR
-»1 wish she would tell me.
B
the future He isn’t going to be here. -> 1wish he were going to be here.
00
She can’t come tomorrow. -»1 wish she could come tomorrow.
10
+3
A wish about 1don’t know French. -► 1wish 1knew French.

P2
the present It is raining right now. -» 1wish it weren’t raining now.

CẤ
1can’t speak Japanese. 1wish 1could speak Japanese.

A
A wish about John didn’t come. 1wish John had come.

HÓ
the past Mary couldn’t come. -> 1wish Maty had been able to come.
Í-
-L
EXERCISE
Supplyanappropriateform.
ÁN
TO
1. I need some help. I w is h A lfre d (b e )___here now. I f he (b e )___ we

could fin is h th is w o rk v e iy quickly.
NG
2. We had a good tim e in Houston over vacation. I w is h you (co m e )___

ƯỠ
w ith us. I f you (com e)___w ith us, you (h a v e )___ a good tim e .
3. I w is h i t (be, n o t ) ___so cold today. I f i t (be, n o t ) ___ so cold, I (go)
ID
___sw im m ing .
BỒ
4. I missed p a rt o f th e lecture because I was daydream ing, a nd now
182

m y notes are incom plete. I w is h I (pay) m ore a tte n tio n to the

lecturer.
ƠN
5. A : Do you have enough money to buy th a t antique lamp?
B: No, b u t I c e rta in ly w ish I ___.
NH
6. A : H ow lo ng have you been sick?
UY
B: F o r o ver a week.
A : I w is h you (go) ___ to see a doctor today. You should fin d out
.Q
w h a t’s w ro n g w ith you.
TP
O
ĐẠ
I. DEFINING RELATIVE CLAUSES WITH WHO(M), WHICH &
NG
THAT
HƯ
• W H O , W H IC H , T H A T are th e subjects o f th e verbs in the re la tiv e
ẦN
clauses (W H O -> people; W H IC H -> th in g s ; T H A T -» people or
th in g s ). We cannot leave the m out. TR
E x: - The g ir l / w ho (th a t) w a n ts to dothe exam / m ust e nte r
B
before n e x t F rid a y .
00
- I don’t lik e stories / w h ic h (th a t) have unhappy endings.

10
• W H O (M ), W H IC H , T H A T are also th e objects o f th e verbs in the

+3
re la tiv e clauses and we can leave th e m out.

P2
E x: — T he w om an / w ho (th a t) 006 m e t / is H e id i,
CẤ
or T he wom an / 006 m e t / is H e id i.
- W h a t was th e name o f th e horse / w h ic h (th a t) you bought
A
yesterday.
HÓ
or W h a t was th e nam e o f th e horse / you bought yesterday.

Í-
EXERCISE
-L
ÁN
1. A n h ấ y là m việc cho m ộ t công t y có th ể nuôi sống anh ta.

TO
2. Cuốn sách n ó i về m ộ t cô g á i trố n nhà ra ñi.

NG
3. T ê n của con ngựa m à th ắ n g cuộc ñua là gì?

4. Công an ñã b ắ t những người ñ àn ông ă n cắp xe hơi của tô i.
ƯỠ
5. A le xan der B e ll là người dã p h á t m in h ra ñ iệ n th o ạ i.

6. ðâu là những bức tra n h họ thường tre o trê ri bức tường ñó?
ID
7. Công an v ẫ n còn ñang cô' gắng xác ñ ịn h cái xác ch ế t ñược tìm th ấ y
BỒ
tu ầ n qua.
183

8. M ộ t cuốn từ ñiể n là m ột cuốn sách cho bạn b iế t các ý nghĩa của các
từ.
ƠN
9. T ô i không th ích những người không bao giờ ñúng giờ.
10. Xem ra trá i ñ ấ t là h àn h tin h duy n h ấ t có sự sông.
NH
11. RELATIVE CLAUSES WITH WHERE & WHOSE
UY
1. We u se WHOSE in relative clau ses in stead o f h is/ h er/ th eir.
.Q
The m an had a pass. 006 had stolen h is uniform .
TP
The m an whose u nifo rm he’d stolen had a pass.
2. We u se WHERE in a relative clau se to talk about places:
O
He w e nt to W ashington. He m et agents from U.S. Inte lligence
ĐẠ
there.
NG
He w e n t to W ashington, where he m e t agents fro m U.S.
Intelligence.
HƯ
3. We u se THAT/ WHEN or w e leave it out w h en w e say the day
/ th e yea r / th e tim e (etc.) th at som ethin g happened.
ẦN
Do you s t ill rem em ber the day (th a t/ when) we f ir s t met?
TR
The la s t tim e (th a t/ when) I saw her, she looked ve ry w ell.
B
EXERCISE
00
Completethesentenceswitharelativeclause,usingthesentencesinthe
10
box.
+3
P2
a. I can buy postcards there.

CẤ
b. She had bought i t there.

c. People are b urried there.
A
d. We spent our holidays there.

HÓ
e. We can have a re a lly good meal there.

f. (H er) dog b it me...
Í-
g. John is sta ying (there)

-L
h. (H is/ her) parents are dead.

ÁN
i. T hey haven’t got a car (fo r th is reason)

k. I did n ’t w rite to you (fo r th is reason)
TO
1. The Second W o rld W a r ended (in th a t year)

NG
m. You telephoned (th a t evening)._____________

ƯỠ
1. T he dress d id n ’t f i t her, so she took i t back to th e shop

ID
2. Do you know a re s ta u ra n t___?

3. Is there a shop near h e r e ___ ?
BỒ
184

4. The p la c e __ was re a lly beautiful.

5. A cemetery is a p la c e __ .
6. A n orphan is a c h ild ___.
ƠN
7. The re a s o n ___was th a t I d id n ’t know your address.
8. U n fo rtu n a te ly I wasn’t a t home the e v e n in g ___.
NH
9. I protested to the w o m a n ___.
10. The re a so n ___is th a t th e y can’t afford one.
UY
11. Do you know th e name o f th e h o te l___.
.Q
12. 1945 was the y e a r___.
TP
O
ĐẠ
NG
I. REVISION OF RELATIVE CLAUSES
1. Summary o f d ifferent rela tiv e clau ses.
HƯ
T h is is the place W H E RE i t happened.
ẦN
T h a t’s the day W HEN i t happened.
He’s the man W HO d id it.
I t ’s the th in g W H IC H TR
d id it.
She’s the one W HOSE frie n d did it.
B
00
T h a t’s the reason WHY she was absent.

10
2. S p ecial n otes on rela tive clauses (See GRAMMAR 4B part

V.3 again).
+3
In d e fin in g re la tiv e clauses, T H A T (not W H O or W H IC H ) is used:

P2
• A fte r superlative adjectives.

CẤ
- SM ASH was the biggest crim e syndicate T H A T got involved

in th a t project.
A
- SLOJOB was th e strongest k ille r T H A T 006 had ever met.

HÓ
• A fte r ordinals.
- 006 was the f ir s t person T H A T had a chance to bre ak in to the
Í-
-L
complex.
- I t was th e la st tim e T H A T I saw h im .
ÁN
• A fte r most in d e fin ite pronouns.

- A ll T H A T g litte rs is n o t gold.
TO
- He never says a n y th in g T H A T is w o rth lis te n in g to.

NG
• A fte r the words O N LY , V ER Y, SAME

- She is th e o nly person T H A T I love w ith a ll m y heart.
ƯỠ
- T h a t is the ve ry m an T H A T k ille d 003.

ID
• A fte r a m ixed antecedent (i.e. one denotes a person and the other
BỒ
185

denotes an a n im a l o r th in g .
ƠN
- The book was about the m en and the anim als T H A T the
author had m et on his journey.
NH
EXERCISE
UY
Write complete sentences w ith re la tiv e clauses.
.Q
TP
1. A p r il 23rd / S t George, the p a tro n S a in t o f E ngland
2. widow / husband dead.
O
ĐẠ
3. gym nasium / do exercises.
NG
4. video recorder / records television program m es.
5. J u ly 14th / the French Revolution.
HƯ
6. record p la yer / plays records.
ẦN
7. w idow er / w ife dead.
TR
8. b u ild in g society / borrow money to buy a house.
B
9. vet / treats sick anim als.
00
10. Novem ber 11th / end o f W orld W a r I

10
11. optician / tests people’s eyes.

+3
12. orphan / parents dead.

P2
CẤ
II. NON-DEFINING RELATIVE CLAUSES

1. N on-de finin g re la tiv e clauses are the clauses w h ic h do n o t re s tric t
A
HÓ
the m eaning o f the antecedent. T hey ju s t give us e xtra in fo rm a tio n

about th e antecedent (the person o r th in g ). Therefore th e y are n o t
Í-
proper adjective clauses and are called n o n -d e fin ing re la tiv e clauses.
-L
Ex: Tom ’s fathe r, who is 78. goes s w im m in g everyday.

antecedent
ÁN
2. D e fin in g re la tiv e clauses are th e clauses w h ich re s tric t th e m e aning

TO
o f the antecedent o r te ll us w h ic h person o r th in g th e speaker

w ants to re fer to.
NG
Ex: The m an who lives nextdoor is v e ry frie n d ly .

ƯỠ
3. In these “e xtra in fo rm a tio n ” re la tiv e clauses, we have to use W H O

fo r people and W H IC H fo r th in g s . We cannot use T H A T and we
ID
cannot leave out W HO or W H IC H . A n d we also have to p u t commas

BỒ
(,) a t the b e g in nin g and a t the end o f the clause.
186

C arolin e R olan, w ho police have been lo o k in g for since la s t

M onday, has been found sound and safe.
ƠN
4. W e can also use W H O SE, W H O M and W H E R E in n on -d e fin in g
NH
re la tiv e clauses.
M a rtin , whose m o th e r is Spanish, speaks both E n g lis h &
UY
Spanish flu e n tly .
M r. Hogg is going to Canada, w here h is son has been liv in g fo r
.Q
years.
TP
EXERCISE
O
ĐẠ
C ircle th e co rre ct e xpla n a tion ị a o r b ị o f the m e a ning o f each sentence.
NG
1. T he teacher th a n k e d the students, who had given h e r some flowers.
a. The flow ers w ere fro m o n ly some o f th e students.
HƯ
b. T he flow ers were fro m a ll o f th e students.
2. The teacher th a n k e d th e students w ho had g ive n h e r some flowers.
ẦN
a. The flo w e rs w ere fro m o n ly some o f th e students.
TR
b. T he flow ers were fro m a ll o f th e students.
3. Th ere was a te rrib le flood. The villa g e rs who had received a
B
00
w a rn in g o f th e im p e n d in g flood escaped to safety.

a. O n ly some o f th e villa g e rs had been w arned; o n ly some escaped.
10
b. A ll o f th e v illa g e rs had been w a rned; a ll escaped.

+3
4. Tom got in to th e c a r w h ic h was parked behin d th e house.

P2
a. T h e re was o n ly one car ne a r th e house.

CẤ
b. There was m ore th a n one car n e ar th e house.

5. Tom got in to th e car, w h ic h was parked b eh in d th e house.
A
a. There was o n ly one car nea r th e house.

HÓ
b. There was m ore th a n one car n e a r th e house.

Í-
-L
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR Ị5B

ÁN
I. PREPOSITIONS IN RELATIVE CLAUSES

TO
1. I n v e ry fo rm a l E n g lis h , the pre po sitio n comes a t th e b eg in n in g o f

NG
th e re la tiv e clause.
She is th e wom an about w hom I to ld you.
ƯỠ
The music to w h ic h we liste n ed la s t n ig h t was good.

ID
2. U su a lly, how ever, in everyday usage, the p re po sitio n comes a fte r

BỒ
th e subject and ve rb o f th e re la tiv e clause:
187

She is the woman whom I to ld you about

The music we liste ned to la s t n ig h t was good.
ƠN
3. I f the preposition comes a t the b eg in n ing o f the adjective clause,
only W H O M o r W H IC H can be used (as show n in the examples of
NH
num ber 1)
UY
EXERCISES
.Q
A. Make a re la tiv e clause w ith a preposition from each o f th e follow ing
TP
suggestions a nd p u t th a t suggestion in the suitable sentence.
O
You were w ith h er la s t n ig h t I am liv in g in it.
ĐẠ
T hey were ta lk in g about the m She is m a rried to h im .
NG
We w anted to tra v e l on i t I applied for i t
I w o rk w ith them We w e n t to it.
HƯ
1. The b e d ___was too soft. (I sle pt in it)
The bed in w h ic h I slept was too soft.
ẦN
2. I d id n ’t get the j o b __ .
3. TR
The m a n ___has been m a rrie d tw ic e before.
4. The p a r ty __ wasn’t very enjoyable.
B
5. Who was th a t g i r l __ .
00
6. The f l i g h t ___was fu lly booked.

10
7. I enjoy m y jo b because I lik e the people__.

+3
8. I wasn’t in te rested in the th in g s ___.

P2
9. The hou se___is n ot in very good condition.

B.Jointhesesentences.Followtheexample.
CẤ
We trie d several garages. None o f th em had the p arts in stock.

A
HÓ
We trie d several garages, none o f w h ich had the...

1. I spoke to tw o counter assistants. One o f them was e xtrem ely rude.
Í-
2. We bought tw o b atteries. N e ith e r o f the m worked.

-L
3. We have employed m any tem porary secretaries from your agency.

M ost o f them were relia ble and e fficient.
ÁN
4. We have several holiday fla ts vacant in June. A ll o f them are

TO
equiped to the h ig he st standards.

5. There are 20,000 fans a t E astfle ld U n ite d. O nly a few o f the m
NG
misbehave a t matches.
6. There are e ig h t candidates. Three o f the m are v e ry w e ll qualified.
ƯỠ
7. We bought 2,000 lig h t bulbs fro m your company. M a n y o f the m have

ID
since proved to be faulty.

8. We spoke to tw o o f your representatives. B oth o f the m refused to
BỒ
188

comment.
9. There are 600 students. The m a jo rity o f them are Spanish speakers.
ƠN
10. We received 30,000 ro o f tile s. About 10% o f them were cracked on
delivery.
NH
11. REVIEW OF RELATIVE CLAUSES
UY
EXERCISES
.Q
A. Combine the tw o sentences, using the second sentence as an adjective
TP
clause (relative clause).
O
1. I apologized to the woman. I spilled h er coffee.
ĐẠ
2. I m et the wom an. H e r husband is the president o f the corporation.
3. The professor is excellent. I am ta k in g h er course.
NG
4. I come from a country. Its h is to ry goes back thousands o f years.
HƯ
5. M r N o rth teaches a group o f students. T h e ir n a tive language is not
E nglish.
ẦN
B. Complete the sentences w ith a d j clauses (relative clauses).
1. A sk Jack. H e’s the o nly o n e ___. TR

B
2. I have a question. There is s o m e th in g ___________________________
00
3. He can’t tru s t anyone. There’s no o n e ___________________________ .

10
4. I ’m powerless to help her. There’s n o th in g __ .

5. Susan makes a good f ir s t im pression. She charms everyone. Susan
+3
makes a good fir s t im p re s s io n ___

P2
6. W h a t was M rs Wood ta lk in g about? I d id n ’t understand a n yth in g

CẤ
7. You can believe h im . E v e ry th in g __.

A
8. A ll o f the students are seated. The teacher is the only o n e ___.

HÓ
Í-

-L
ÁN
I. ADJECTIVES MODIFYING NOUNS

TO
1. W hen we use adjs to qu a lify a noun, several varia tio n s o f order are
possible, b ut a fa irly usual ord er is:
NG
adjectives of:
ƯỠ
a. general description (beautiful, nice, d irty , cheap)

b. size ( little , sm all, large, big, long)
ID
c. shape (square, round, fla t, oval)

BỒ
189

d. age (five-year-old, 21st-century)

e. colour (blue, w h ite , black)
ƠN
f. p a tte rn (striped, p la in, flowered, spotted)
g. o rig in (French, German, E ng lish )
NH
h. m a te ria l (cotton, leath er, gold, paper)
UY
i. purpose (w a lkin g stick, rid in g boots)
2. In A m erican E nglish, adjs o f size often precede those o f general
.Q
description: She has big lovely eyes.
TP
EXERCISE
O
ĐẠ
R ew rite these sentences, p u ttin g the adjectives in the m ost appropriate
order.
NG
1. He’s got a __ car. (French, old, ru sty, d irty )
HƯ
2. I t ’s a __ p a in tin g , (landscape, valuable, 18th century)
ẦN
3. She lives in a ___fla t, (three-bedroomed, spacious, studio)
4. I ’ve ju s t bought a __ briefcase, (le a ther, brow n, sm art)
5. TR
I ’d l i k e ___eggs (dozen, two, fresh, brow n, large)
6. He’s got a n __ recorder (Japanese, video, expensive, portable)
B
00
7. Look a t th o s e __ figures (antique, porcelain, French)

10
8. I ’m lo o king fo r a _ pullover.- {V-neck, green, machine-washable,

lambswool)
+3
9. I was b itte n by a __ dog (black, huge, A lsa tia n , savage)

P2
10. She drives a ___car (blue, F ia t, lig h t, little , lovely)

CẤ
11. DESCRIBING PEOPLE

A
Here are some words, expressions & structures th a t can be used to

HÓ
describe people’s appearances.

Í-
1. W o rd s : good-looking, p re tty , beautiful, a ttra ctive , p la in,

-L
well-dressed.
2. E x p re s s io n s : in his e a rly th irtie s , in h e r m id -fiftie s,
ÁN
in th e ir late fo rties, o f m edium height.

TO
3. S tr u c tu re s : a woman w ith blue eyes & brow n h a ir.

a blue-eyed, b row n-ha ired woman,
NG
a man w ith a beard

ƯỠ
a woman in a blue dress

ID
a g irl w ith glasses

BỒ
a man in a grey ja cke t
190

EXERCISE
Complete the te x t w ith words from the box (and then w rite a description
ƠN
o f yourself)
NH
bald beard blue casually e a rly
UY
ears fa ir glasses good-looking sm ile
.Q
h e a vily look n arro w serious
TP
s tra ig h t strong th in
O
I ’m in m y ( 1 ) __ fiftie s . I ’m ve ry ta ll, and quite ( 2 ) ___ b u ilt, but I
ĐẠ
have ra th e r ( 3 ) ___shoulders. I ’m little overw eight.
I have ( 4 ) __ m edium -len gth ( 5 ) ___ h a ir, but I ’m going ( 6 ) ___ , so
NG
there is n ’t a lo t o f i t le ft. I have a grey ( 7 ) ___and moustache. M y eyes
are ( 8 ) ___, and I wear ( 9 ) ___ I ’ve got a ra th e r long face, w ith a (10)
HƯ
__ ch in , a b ig nose and b ig ( 1 1 ) ___ . I have (1 2 )___lip s , and I usually
ẦN
have a ( 1 3 ) ___ expression. M y face changes a lo t w hen I (14) __ . I
have a h ig h forehead: I lik e to th in k th a t it looks in te llig e n t.
TR
Clothes are not very im p o rta n t to me, and I ’m usually very (15)
B
__ dressed.
00
I don’t th in k I ’m very (16) ___, but I ’m n o t a ll th a t bad-looking,

10
either. I pro bab k' ( Ỉ ? ) ___a b it younger th a n I am.

+3
P2

CẤ
I. INFINITIVES EXPRESSING PURPOSES: s o AS (NOT) TO -

A
HÓ
IN ORDER (NOT) TO
Í-
1. There are d iffe re n t ways to express purposes

-L
a. • We shouted to w a rn everyone o f the danger.

• T h is w a ll is to keep people out o f the garden
ÁN
• I ’m going to Spain to la a rn Spanish.

TO
• W ould you lik e s th to eat?

NG
• She’s got nobody to ta lk to .

ƯỠ
• Have you got a lo t o f w o rk to do th is evening?

• D id you have tim e to answ er a ll the questions?
ID
b/ We shouted in order to (so as to) w a rn everyone o f th e danger.

BỒ
2. The phrase B E USED FOR expresses the ty p ic a l o r general purpose
191

o f a th in g . I t is follow ed by an in g- fo rm .
Ex: A saw is used fo r c u ttin g wood,
or A saw is used to cut wood.
ƠN
However to express PURPOSE or A P A R T IC U L A R T H IN G OR
NH
S IT U A T IO N , B E U S ED + TO IN F is used.
• I ’m going to Spain to le arn Spanish.
UY
(not “ fo r le a rn in g ” )
• They gave me some money to buy some food.
.Q
(not “ fo r b uying” )
TP
• A chain saw was used to cut down th e old oak tre e .
O
(p a rtic u la r th in g )
ĐẠ
(Don’t use “fo r c u ttin g down the old oak tree” )
NG
EXERCISE
Makeupcompletionstothefolowing.Expressthepurposeoftheaction.
HƯ
ẦN
1. I w en t to Chicago t o ___.
2. Tom w en t to Chicago f o r ___.
3. I w e nt to the m a rk e t t o __ . TR
4. M ary w e n t to the m a rk e t f o r ___.
B
00
5. I w e n t to the doctor t o .
10
6. M y son w e n t to the doctor f o r ___.

7. I sw im everyday t o ___.
+3
8. M y frie n d swim s everyday f o r ___.

P2
9. I drove in to th e service statio n t o ___.

CẤ
10. They stopped a t the service s ta tio n f o r ___.

A
11. CLAUSES OF PURPOSE WITH s o THAT...

HÓ
1. SO T H A T expresses the same m eaning as IN ORDER TO + V. B ut

Í-
a fte r s o T H A T , the re m ust be a clause.

-L
Ex: They increased tobacco d uty in order to / so as to raise £60

m illio n . ,
ÁN
They increased tobacco d uty so th a t th e y could raise £60

TO
m illio n .
2. B ut SO T H A T is often used instead o f IN ORDER TO when
NG
• th e idea o f a b ility is expressed (can, could, may, m ig h t are used

ƯỠ
in the adv clause o f purpose)

Ex: I ’m going to cash th is check so th a t I can (may) buy m y
ID
textbooks.
BỒ
192

I c a s h e d t h e c h e c k so t h a t 1 c o u ld ( m ig h t ) b u y ĩn y te x tb o o k s .
5 th e p u rp o s e is n e g a tiv e .
ƠN
Sx: I h u rrie d so th a t I wouldn’t be ỉate.
L e a v e e a r ly so t h a t y o u w o n ’t / d o n ’t m is s t h e bus.
NH
3. I N O R D E R T H A T h a s th e s a m e m e a n in g as s o T H A T b u t i t is le ss
UY
com m on.
I tu r n e d a f f th e T V i n o r d e r t h a t / so t h a t m y r o o m m a te c o u ld
.Q
s tu d y i n p e a c e &. q u ie t.
TP
EXERCISE
O
ĐẠ
Combine the ideas by using s o THAT.
NG
1. P le a s e t u r n d o w n th e r a d io . 1 w a n t to b e a b le to g e t to s le e p .
—> P le a s e t u r n d o w n th e r a d io so t h a t I c a n g e t to s le e p .
HƯ
M)
M y w if e t u r n e d d o w n t h e r a d io . I w a n t e d to be a b le to g e t to s le e p ,
p u t t h e m i l k i n t h e r e f r ig e r a t o r . W e w a n t to m a k e s u re i t w o n ’t (o r
ẦN
Do
d o e s n ’t ) s p o il.
TR
4. I p u t t h e m i l k i n th e r e f r ig e r a t o r . I w a n te d to m a k e s u re i t d id n ’t
3 "O lL
B
00
5. P le a s e b e a u ie t. I w a n t to b e a b le to h e a r w h a t S h a r o n is s a y in g .
10
8. I a s k e d t h e c h ild r e n to b e q u ie t. Ĩ w a n te d to be a b le to h e a r w h a t
S h a r o n w a s s a y in g .
+3
7. I ’m g o in g to c a s h a c h e c k . I w a n t to m a k e s u re t h a t I w i l l h a v e ( o r
P2
h a v e ) e n o u g h m o n e y t o go t o t h e m a r k e t.
CẤ
8, Ĩ cashed a c h e c k y e s te r d a y . Ĩ w a n te d to m ake s u re th a t I had

e n o u g h m o n e y to go to th e m a r k e t.
A
HÓ
____________ IN TE R M E D IA T E GRAMMAR-.18B____________
Í-
-L
I. OTHER WAYS TO EXPRESS A-NEGATIVE PURPOSE

ÁN
1. As you know, when the purpose is negative, we often use s o TH A T.

TO
Sx: I h u rrie d so th a t I wouldn’t be late.

2. O r w e c a n use s o A S N O T T O , I N O R D E R N O T T O . ■
NG
Ex: W ashing should never be hung out in public view as as n ot to /

ƯỠ
i n o r d e r n o t to cau se o ffe n c e .
ID
3. O r we can use the follow ing structụres:

BỒ
193

TO
ƠN
SO AS TO
NH
IN ORDER TO
W ashing should never be hung out in public view to / so as to / in
UY
order to avoid offence / causing offence.
.Q
TP
T0 V -IN G
so AS TO + PR E V E N T + STH / SB + FR OM + V_IN G
O
IN ORDER TO
ĐẠ
W ashing should never be hung out in public view
NG
r to prevent causing offence,
to prevent the natives fro m being offended.
HƯ
EXERCISE
ẦN
Answ er these questions, fo llo w in g the model:
M odel:
TR
W hy shouldn’t you drop matches or cigarette ends?
B
-» So as not to s ta rt fires.
00
1. W hy shouldn’t you leave gates open?

10
2. W hy shouldn’t you le t your dog “ run free”?

+3
3. W hy shouldn’t you w ander away from paths?

P2
4. W hy shouldn’t you clim b over hedges or fences?

5. W hy shouldn’t you d isturb w ild life?
CẤ
II. SO... THAT AND SUCH... THAT

A
HÓ
1. Instead o f using BECAUSE... + m a in clause to express cause &

effect, we can use: s o ... T H A T and SUCH... TH A T .
Í-
a1 Because the w eather was nice, we w e nt to the zoo.

-L
b/ I t was such nice w eather th a t we w e n t___.

ÁN
c/ The weather was so nice th a t w e __ .

2. SO... TH AT encloses an adj or an adv:
TO
so + adj/ adv + th a t.
NG
• The people were so frie n d ly th a t he fe lt welcome.

3. SUCH... TH AT encloses a noun: SUCH + adj + noun + th a t.
ƯỠ
• I t was such a beautiful house th a t they bought it.

ID
4. SO... TH A T is also used w ith M A N Y , FEW , M U C H & L IT T L E .

BỒ
• She made so many m istakes th a t she faile d the exam.

• He has so few friends th a t he is always lonely.
194
® She has so much money th a t she can buy w hatever she wants.
• He had so lit t le trouble w ith the te st th a t he le ft 20 m inutes
ƠN
early.
NH
EXERCISE
UY
Combine the sentences by using so... THAT o r SUCH... THAT.
.Q
1. The classroom has com fortable chairs. The students fin d i t easy to
TP
fa ll asleep.
2. Ted couldn’t get to sleep la s t n ig h t. He was w o rrie d about the exam.
O
ĐẠ
3. J e rry got angry. He p ut h is fis t through the w a ll.
4. I have m any problem s. I can use a ll the help you can give me.
NG
5. The tornado struck w ith g reat force. I t lifte d automobiles o ff th e
ground.
HƯ
6. D u rin g the summer, we had h o t and hum id weather. I t was
ẦN
uncom fortable ju s t to s it in a ch a ir doing nothing.
7. I can’t figure out w h a t th is sentence says. H is h a n d w ritin g is
illeg ib le . TR
8. D a vid has too m any g irlfrie n d s . He can’t rem em ber a ll o f th e ir
B
00
names.
10
9. Too m any people came to the m eeting. There were not enough seats
fo r everyone.
+3
10. In some countries, few students are accepted by the universities. As

P2
a result, adm ission is v irtu a lly a guarantee o f good job upon

CẤ
graduation.
A
HÓ

Í-
-L
I. REVISION & CONSOLIDATION OF RELATIVE CLAUSES

ÁN
AND VERBS OF PERCEPTION

• There was a lounge w h ich had a dance floor.
TO
w ith a dance floor.

NG
• M a n y o f w hom
Some
ƯỠ
H a lf
ID
T h irte e n
• They heard h im . He was screaming.
BỒ
They heard h im screaming.
195
N o te : Verbs used in th is p a tte rn [S X V X (pro)noun X Ing-form ]

indicate physical perceptions. They are: feel, hear, lis te n to, look at,
notice, observe, perceive, see, sm ell, watch. -
ƠN
• A n o th e r structure: s + V + o + V -in g
He im ita te s the m fro w n in g .
NH
UY
EXERCISES
A. Combine these tw o sentences in to one, using the p a tte rn s + V T
.Q
(pro)noun + In g form . F o llow the exam ple:
TP
They heard the com mentator. He was screaming.
O
ĐẠ
They heard h im screaming.
L They saw the a irsh ip . I t was w a itin g to land.
NG
2. K e saw the a irsh ip . I t was fla shing.
3. We watched the tra in . I t was steam ing past.
HƯ
4. Can you sm ell it? Som ething was burning .
ẦN
5. We listen ed to the band. They were p la y in g in the park.
6. We looked a t the ra in . I t was com ing down.
7. TR
He saw the a irsh ip . I t was d is in te g ra tin g .
8. They saw the people. They were ju m p in g fro m the window.
B
00
B. R e w rite the follo w in g sentences, using the p a tte rn s + V + o + V-itiQ

10
Model: He videotapes them when th e y are p erfo rm in g on television.

+3
He videotapes them p e rfo rm in g on TV.

P2
1. He photographs them when the y are s m ilin g &, fro w ning .

CẤ
2. He im ita te s p olitic ia n s w hen the y are g iv in g speeches.

3. He watches singers every tim e th e y appear on TV.
A
4. He copies the m w hen the y move th e ir hands.

c. Changetheadjectiveclause(relativeclause)intoanadjectivephrase.
HÓ
F o llow the example.

Í-
-L
Model: There was 25 cabins w h ich had a ll the am enities o f a firs t

ÁN
class hotel.
—» There was 25 cabins w ith a ll the am enities...
TO
1. There was a lounge w h ich had a dance floor.

2. There were 25 cabins w h ich had electric heating.
NG
3. There was a lounge w h ic h had a baby g rand piano.

ƯỠ
4. There were lu xu ry cabins w h ich had h ot and cold w ater.

D. Combine these 2 sentences in to one, using a re la tive clause. Follow
ID
the example.
BỒ
196

There were 50 passengers. Some o f the m died

There were 50 passengers, some o f w hom died.
J. There were 50 passengers. M ost o f them escaped.
ƠN
2. There were 50 passengers. 13 o f them died.
3. There were 47 crew. About h a lf o f the m escaped.
NH
4. There were 47 crew. 22 o f them died.
5. The ship had 16 w a te r-tig h t com partm ents. Five o f them had
UY
already been flooded.
.Q
6. The bridge is suspended from 4 huge cables. Each o f them contains
TP
26,108 le ngth o f w ire.
O
IL ADVERB CLAUSES OF REASONS & CONCESSIONS,
ĐẠ
1. Adv clause of reason with because / as / since.
NG
® W e use B E C A U S E , n o t A S w h e n w e a r e a n s w e r in g a q u e s tio n .
HƯ
W hy did you go? I w ent because Tom to ld me to go.
• BECAUSE, not AS, is used afte r NOT, B U T , O NLY.
ẦN
He was angry not only because we were late but also because we
•
made a noise. TR
W ith m ost clauses o f reason we can use BECAU SE, AS or SINCE.
B
Because (as, since) the le tte r was in Japanese, Ĩ couldn’t read it.
00
• N o te :
10
BECAUSE + s + V.
+3
BECAU SE OF + A N O U N or A N O U N -E Q U IV A LE N T (V-IN G ).
P2
We couldn’t go out because it was ra in in g heavily.

We couldn’t go out because o f the heavy rain,
CẤ
2. Â d v c ia u s e o f c o n c e s s io n w ith A LT H O U G H , TH O U G H , EVEN'
A
THO U G H.
HÓ
• A LT H O U G H +S + V
Í-
THOUGH
-L
E V E N T H O U G H (is stronger th a n A LT H O U G H )
although
ÁN
I d idn’t get the job though I had a ll the necessary

TO
even though
NG
qualifications.
. a l t h o u g h = D ES PITE, IN SPITE OF + N O U N / PRONOUN /
ƯỠ
THIS / or DESPITE THE FACT THAT + s + V

A lthough i t rained, we enjoyed our holiday.
ID
Despite the ra in , we enjoyed our holiday.

BỒ
197

In suite o f the fact th a t i t rained, we enjoyed our holiday.

She wasn’t w ell, but in spite o f th is she w e n t to w ork.
ƠN
Despite w h at I said la s t n ig h t, I s till love you.
I ’m n o t tire d in spite o f w o rk in g h a rd a ll day.
NH
EXERCISES
UY
A. Complete the spaces w ith B E C A U S E /A LTH O U G H
.Q
TP
1. She applied fo r the jo b as personnel m a n a g e r___she like s m eeting
people.
O
2. He got good grades in h is e x a m in a tio n s ___he never seemed to do
ĐẠ
much work.
NG
3. __ he is very w ell-off, he drives a cheap second-hand car.
4. The w orkers were offered a good pay rise ___ production had
HƯ
increased by 20%.
5. I ’m going to buy the new “T u m b lin g Dice” LP ___ th e y ’re m y
ẦN
favourite group.
TR
6. H is car refused to s t a r t ___i t had ju s t been serviced.
B. Read these sentences and then w rite a new sentence w ith the same
B
00
m eaning. Use the word(s) in brackets in y o u r sentences.

10
1. I couldn’t sleep although I was tire d (despite).

+3
-> 1 couldn’t sleep despite being tire d .

P2
despite th e fa ct th a t I was tire d .

2. A 'thou gh he’s got an E ng lis h name, he is in fact German, (despite).
CẤ
3. In spite o f her in ju re d foot, she managed to w a lk to the village,

A
(although)
HÓ
4. I decided to accept the job although th e salary was low. (in spite of)
5. We lo st the m atch although we w ere the b e tte r team, (despite).
Í-
6. In spite o f not h aving eaten fo r 24 hours, I d id n ’t feel h un g ry (even

-L
though)
ÁN
TO

NG
I. PAIRED CONJUNCTIONS: NOT ONLY... BUT ALSO /

ƯỠ
EITHER... OR / NEITHER... NOR

ID
® W hen tw o subjects are connected by N O T O N LY... B U T ALSO,

BỒ
E IT H E R ... OR or N E IT H E R ... NOR, the subject th a t is closer to the
198

verb determ ines w h e th e r th e ve rb is s in g u la r or p lu ra l.

N o t o nly m y parents b ut also m y s is te r is here.
ƠN
N o t o n ly m y s iste r b u t also m y pa ren ts are here.
NH
N e ith e r m y parents n o r m y s is te r is here.
• N otice the p a ra lle l stru cture in the examples. The same
UY
g ra m m a tical form s should fo llo w each w ord o f the p air.
Yesterday i t n o t o nly ra in e d (verb) b ut also snowed (v).
.Q
He was n o t only lazy b u t also stupid (adjs).
TP
EXERCISES
O
ĐẠ
A. Combine the fo llo w in g sentences th a t contain p a ra lle l structure. Use
ap prop ria te p a ire d conjunctions: both... and; n o t only... b ut also,
NG
e ith e r... or, n e ith er... nor.
HƯ
1. He does n o t have a pen. He does n o t have paper.
ẦN
He has n e ith e r a pen n o r paper.
2. Ran enjoys horsback rid in g . Bob enjoys horseback rid in g .
B oth Ron and B o b ___. TR
B
3. We can fix d in n e r fo r the m here, o r we can take them to a
00
restaura nt.
10
We can e ith e r ___.

4. The leopard faces e x tin c tio n . The tig e r faces e xtinctio n .
+3
B o th ___.
P2
5. The p resident’s a ssista nt w ill n o t co n firm the story. The p reside n t’s
CẤ
assistan t w ill no t deny th e story.

The preside n t’s a ssistan t w ill n e ith e r ___.
A
HÓ
6. H e r roommates don’t kn o w w he re she is. H e r b ro th e r doesn’t know

where she is.
Í-
N e ith e r h e r ro o m m a te s ___.
-L
7. Coal is an irreplaceable n a tu ra l resource. O il is an irreplaceable

n a tu ra l resource.
ÁN
B oth c o a l___.
TO
8. S m all-pox is a dangerous disease. M a la ria is a dangerous disease.

B oth s m a ll-p o x ___.
NG
B. E rro r analysis: F in d a n d co rre ct th e erro rs in p a r a lle l structures ỉn

ƯỠ
the fo llo w in g sentences:

ID
1. By obeying the speed lim it, we can save energy, lives, and i t costs
BỒ
us less.

2. M y h o m e o ffe rs m e a f e e l in g o f s e c u r ity , w a r m a n d lo v e .
3. T h e p io n e e r s la b o u r e d to c le a r a w a y th e f o r e s t a n d p l a n t i n g c ro p s .
ƠN
4. W h e n I re fu s e d to h e lp h e r , s h e b e c a m e v e r y a n g r y a n d s h o u t (n ) a t
me.
NH
5. I n m y s p a r e tim e , I e n io y t a k i n g c a re o f m y a q u a r iu m a n d to w o r k
on m y stam p collection.
UY
6. E it h e r M r . A n d e r s o n o r M s W ig g in s a re g o in g t o te a c h o u r cla s s
.Q
to d a y .
TP
7. 1 e n jo y n o t o n ly r e a d in g n o v e ls b u t a ls o m a g a z in e s .
8. O x y g e n is p l e n t i f u l . B o t h a i r c o n ta in s o x y g e n a n d w a t e r .
O
ĐẠ
II. MORE ABOUT ADVERB CLAUSES OF REASON &
NG
CONCESSION OR CONTRAST
3 DU E TO (= Because of) + noun.
HƯ
DU E TO T H E FA C T T H A T + noun clause.
ẦN
- T h e y h a d to c a n c e l t h e ra c e d u e to t h e b a d w e a th e r
- D u e to t h e fa c t t h a t t h e w e a th e r w a s b a d , t h e y h a d to c a n c e l th e
ra c e . TR
B
® NO M A T T E R W H A T the w eather was, they...
00
N O M A T T E R H O W g o o d t h e w e a th e r w a s , t h e y . . .
10
3 H O W E V E R , N E V E R T H E L E S S : O p p o s it io n o r u n e x p e c te d r e s u l t c a n
+3
a ls o b e e x p re s s e d b y s u c h t r a n s i t io n s a s N e v e r th e le s s , N o n e th e le s s ,
H o w e v e r.
P2
I t was cold; however, I w e n t sw im m ing,

CẤ
n e v e r th e le s s
n o n e th e le s s
A
HÓ
EXERCISES
A. Usingtheideagiveninparentheses, completethesentences.
Í-
-L
1. (M y parents are generous). A ll o f the c h ild re n in our fa m ily have

ÁN
re c e iv e d t h e b e s t o f e v e r y t h in g b e c a u s e o f m v p a r e n t ’s g e n e r o s ity .
2. (The tra ffic was heavy). We were late fo r the m ee ting due t o _
TO
3. ( B ill’s w ife is ill) . B ill has to do a ll o f the cooking and cleaning

NG
because o f ___.
4. (D r. Robinson has done excellent researches on wolves). Due t o ___,
ƯỠ
w e u n d e r s t a n d a l o t a b o u t th e m .
ID
5. ( I t was noisy in the n ext apartm ent), I couldn’t get to sleep la st

n ig h t because o f ___.
BỒ
200

6. (C ir c u m s ta n c e s a re b e y o n d m y c o n tr o l) . D u e t o ___ 1 r e g r e t to s a y 1
- c a n n o t b e p r e s e n t a t y o u r d a u g h te r ’ s w e d d in g .
ƠN
B. Give sentences with the s a m meaning by using INSPỈTẼ OF or
D ESPITE
NH
1. E v e n , th o u g h her g r a d e .V s e re lo w , she w as a d m itt e d to th e
UY
university.
In spite o f / despifcs her low grades, she was...
.Q
2. I l i k e l i v i n g i n th e d o r m it o r y , e v e n th r o u g h i t is n o is y .
TP
3. E v e n th o u g h th e w o r k w a s h a r d , t h e y e n jo y e d th e m s e lv e s .
O
4 . T h e y w a n te d to d i r lb th e m o u n t a in e v e n th o u g h i t w a s d a n g e ro u s .
ĐẠ
5 . A lt h o u g h t h e w e a th e r w a s e x tr e m e ly h o t, t h e y w e n t jo g g in g i n th e
park.
NG
6 . H e is u n h a p p y e v e n th o u g h h e h a s a v a s t fo r tu n e .
HƯ
7. N o m a t t e r w h a t h e s a y s , I won’t believe h im .
ẦN
TR
B
00
10
+3
P2
CẤ
A
HÓ
Í-
-L
ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
201

ƠN
NH
UY
.Q
TP
O
ĐẠ
Part Three
NG
HƯ
ẦN
ADVANCED GRAMMAR TR
B
00
10
+3
P2
CẤ
A
HÓ
Í-
-L
ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
202

ƠN
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 1C
NH
L REDUCING A CLAUSE INTO A PHRASE - REVISION OF ADV
UY
CLAUSES - COMPOUND ADJECTIVES
.Q
1. F ir s t th e y overpowered the woman. T h en th e y charged h e r w ith
TP
arm ed robbery.
O
-> A fte r overpow ering the w om an, th e y charged h e r w ith armed
ĐẠ
ro b b e ry .
2. A m an who is 40 years old -» a 40-year-old man.
NG
EXERCISES
HƯ
A. Reduce th e firs t clauses in to phrases.
ẦN
1. F ir s t she refused to pay th e fare. T h en she h it the d river.
TR
2. F ir s t she h it the d riv e r. T hen she fought th e police who came to his
aid.
B
00
3. F ir s t she got home. T hen she had a large w h is ky .

B.Continuethefollowingsentences,usingcompoundadjs.
10
+3
1. A contra ct w h ic h is w o rth 15 m illio n pounds is a ___.

P2
2. A s u it w h ic h cost 200 d ollars i s ___.

CẤ
3. A jo u rn e y w h ich takes 2 hours i s __.

4. A w o rk in g w eek o f 38 hours i s ___.
A
5. A lesson o f 50 m inutes i s ___.

HÓ
6. A fis h w h ic h is 15 inches lo n g i s ___.

7. A bag o f potatoes w h ic h weighs 5 kilo s i s ___.
Í-
8. A ta n k w h ich holds 72 litre s i s ___.

-L
c. Completethesesentencesinyourownwords.
ÁN
1. The fis h was so dangerous thfc-t___.

TO
2. I t b it h e r fin g e r w h ile she w a s ___.

3. H e r m o th e r was so te rrifie d t h a t ___.
NG
4. F ra n k ’s hobby i s ___.
ƯỠ
5. The p ira n h a ’s (cá ă n th ịt th ú vậ t) te e th w ere so sharp th a t i t ___.

6. The fis h was k e p t i n ___
ID
BỒ
203
II. RELATIVE PRONOUN “WHAT”

Study these examples.
ƠN
® Ĩ gave h er ju s t the money th a t she needed, (antecedent + th a t)
NH
Ĩ gave h e r ju s t w h a t she needed.
® The th in g (th a t) he says is n ot im p o rta n t. W ha t he says is not
UY
im p o rtan t.
N o te : We don’t use W H A T i f the re is already an antecedent.
.Q
TP
EXERCISE
O
ĐẠ
1. T ô i sẽ kể cho anh cái tô i có thể . J- '',<$■ C ữ .ũ— ,
NG
2. Họ dã kể cho anh ta diều họ b iế t/Ị^ Ự ' KA/"' ;,d/\rJ- iRsajbnMS
3. Cô ta gói những cái cô ta có thể. ’'L.Kipf&rJ a í í "íím ổ C Cd,fl
HƯ
4. A nh ta ñã tiê u những cái anh ta ñể dành. ’ * ỏ
ẦN
5. Cô ta g h i chép những cái cần th iế t.
6. Cái tô i th ấ y là m tô i sửng sốt.
TR
7. ð iều anh ta ñã n ó i là m p h ậ t lò ng nhiều người.
8. Cô ta ñã học cái m à sẽ có ích.
B
00
9. A n h t a ñ ã t h â y cái t r ô n g n h ư m ộ t cá i d ĩa b ay . ,
10
10. Họ ñã p h ả i là m cái xem ra lã n g phí th ờ i gian. , >

(W&GS ( í V' (X ñ ạ ụ ù ị ị .
+3
11. C ái anh cần là m ộ t ngày n gh ỉ. \LÍw xf

12. C ái họ nên là m là ñể dành nhiều tiề n hơn. ^ oỗ
P2
CẤ
III. INTENSIFIERS WITH EVER

1. W hoever, w hatever = i t doesn’t m a tte r who I w h a t
A
HÓ
Keep calm w hatever happens.

W hoever i t is, I don’t w a n t to see them .
Í-
2. W henever, w herever, how ever = no m a tte r w hen / where / how. (in

-L
complex sentences)
ÁN
You can phone me w henever you lik e .

W henever you come, you’l l be welcome.
TO
W herever you go, you’l l fin d Coca Cola.

NG
However you tra ve l, i t ’l l take you a t least 2 days.

3. E V E R can be used as a separate w ord w ith the question words
ƯỠ
W HO , W H A T , W H E N , W H E R E , W H Y / H O W to express emotions.
ID
I t is the same as HO W , W HO, W H A T... +* on E A R T H or T H E

H E L L , (usually in sim ple sentences)
BỒ
204

H o w e v e r d id y o u m a n a g e to g e t th e c a r s ta r te d ? (= H o w o n e a r t h
did you...)
Who ever said th a t I was a fool? (= W ho on earth...)
ƠN
W h at ever d id n ’t you te ll me you were coming?
NH
How the h e ll are we going to get th is th in g down?
UY
EXERCISES
.Q
•A Complete these “ ads” using: whatever, whichever, whoever,
TP
whenever, wherever, however.
O
ĐẠ
1. C LA SS IC A L, POP, JAZZ?
___you lik e your music, i t w ill sound better on SONY H I-F I.
NG
2. COCA COLA!
HƯ
You’l l fin d i t __ you go.
3. ___the weather,
ẦN
LU S H PUPPY SHOES {giày hiệu Lush P uppy) care fo r your feet.
4. __ you’re in London,
you m ust v is it us TR
B
T H E H O N G KO NG
00
FOR T H E BEST IN O R IE N T A L FOOD

10
Regent Square T e l 0158972

5. BRITISH MOTORS CALYPSO
+3
C hoice o f 7 m o dels. you choose th e r e ’s a th r e e y e a r g u a ra n te e .

P2
6. T in k e r (thợ hàn n ồi xoong)), ta ilo r, soldier, sailor?

CẤ
____you are, the re’s som ething fo r you a t the

E A R L’S COURT E X H IB IT IO N .
A
B. Respond to these statem ents using a question w ord: w h a t / which /

HÓ
w h o / w h y /h o w Ỉ when / where 4- ever.

Í-
M odel: He said he was Julius Caesar.

-L
W ho ever said that?

ÁN
or W hy ever did he say that?

1. They said the w o rld would end n ext Tuesday.
TO
2. E ngland once beat B ra z il 8-0 a t football.

NG
C.O
. He jum ped o ff the E iffe l Tower and trie d to fly .

. He painted a moustache on the Mona Lisa.
ƯỠ
. They both proposed m arriage to h er on the same day.

ựi
. She broke one arm , tw o legs and fractured h èr skull.

ID
ợ>
7. I saw a ghost once.

BỒ
20

8. She said I could have the Rolls, the C adillac or the F e rra ri.
9. She le ft a ll her money to h e r dog.
ƠN
NH
III. COMPOUND NOUNS & COMPOUND ADJECTIVES
Glasses w ith gold rim s are gold-rim m ed glasses.
UY
N + N + ED
A. person who tells your fortune is a fo rtu n e -te lle r.
.Q
N + V + ER
TP
EXERCISE
O
ĐẠ
ựin d 20 words having the same form ation as “ gold-rim m ed ” a nd
‘fo rtun e -telle r”
NG
HƯ
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 2C
ẦN
THE FORMATION OF COMPOUND NOUNS
TR
Noun + noun : horserace, racehorse, m o n lig h t, postm an
B
Possessive case + noun : sportsm an, kinsm an (người thă n thuộc),
00
craftsm an {thơ th ủ công), landsm an (người ở ñ ấ t liề n )

10
A djective + noun : grandparents, gentlem an, blackboard,

+3
sweetheart
P2
Verb + noun : pickpocket, cu t-throa t (kẻ sát nhân), breakfast,

CẤ
breakw ater (ñê)

Gerund/ p a rticiple + noun : looking-glass, reading-lam p, sin g in g
A
bird, fly in g fish.

HÓ
A dv/ prep + noun : upland (cao nguyên), inside, d o w n fa ll (sự rơi

Í-
xuống), foreleg (chân trước)

-L
Adverb + verb : income, outbreak, offspring (con cháu), u p sta rt

(fee g ià u sổi)
ÁN
V erb + adverb : drawback (trở lực), send-off (lờ i tiễ n biệt),

TO
s ta n d s till (sư bế tắc), go-by {sư trá n h m ăt)

Several words : forget-m e-not (hoa lư u ly), m an-of-w ar (tàu chiến),
NG
son-in-law (con rể)

ƯỠ
EXERCISE
ID
rck o u t a ll the compound nouns in the te x t below.

BỒ

T H E E N G L IS H A N D T H E S E A
ƠN
A fte r our own island, the sea is our n a tu ra l home, the Norse blood
is in us, and we rove over the waters, fo r business or pleasure, as
NH
eagerly as our ancestors. F o u r-fifth s o f the carryin g -tra de o f the w orld
is done by the E ng lish . When we grow rich , our ch ie f d eligh t is a
UY
yacht. W hen we are w eary w ith h ard w ork, a sea-voyage is our most
.Q
congenial re tre a t (sự n g h ỉ ngơi dễ chịu). O n th e ocean no postman
TP
brin gs us le tte rs w h ich we are compelled to answer. No newspaper
tem pts us in to readin g the la s t n ig h t’s debate in P arliam e nt, or sends
O
our a tte n tio n w a ndering to the ends o f the earth. The sea breezes carry
ĐẠ
health upon th e ir w ings, and fan us a t n ig h t in to sweet dreamless
sleep.
NG
(F rom J.A . FRO UDE, Oceana )
HƯ
II. THE FORMATION OF COMPOUND ADJECTIVES
ẦN
1. N oun/ adj + adjective : snow -w hite, sea-sick, deep-green (xanh
ñậm ), red-h ot (nóng ñỏ)
TR
2. N oun/ adj / adv + pres, part. : h e a rt-re n d in g (n á t long), home-
B
keeping (ru rú ở nhà), duỉì-loo kin g (trô n g buồn tẻ), sw eet-sm elling
00
{thơm tho), h a rd-w orkin g, e ver-la sting (m ã i m ã i)

10
3. N oun/ ad.ị/ adv + past p a rt : horse-draw n, home-made, w h ite -

+3
washed, fine-spoken (khéo nói), new ly-born, w e ll- lit (sáng trư ng)
P2
4. N oun/ adj + noun + ed : lion-hearted, earth-coloured (có màu ñất),

CẤ
quick-eared (th ín h tai), long-legged (chân d à i)

5. Several w ords : up-to-date, up-to-the m in ute (m ới nhất), well-to-do
A
{phong lưu)
HÓ
EXERCISES
Í-
-L
A. E xplain th e form a tio n o f these adjectives:

ÁN
troublesome, godlike, stainless, southern, mountainous, Vietnamese,

daily, funny, ch ild is h , ox-driven, gay-looking, snow-covered, tree-lined
TO
B. W hat do you c a ll:

NG
1. a m an who has only one eye?

2. a car w h ich is draw n by a horse?
ƯỠ
3. a flo w er w h ich sm ells very sweet?

ID
4. a c h ild w ho h a s j u s t b e e n b o rn ?
BỒ
5. a s u it w h ic h is m a d e a t h o m e ?
207

6. a h o u s e w h ic h is c o v e re d w i t h th a tc h ?
ƠN
7. a boy who works very hard?
8. a street w hich looks dull?
NH
III. THE PAST SUBJUNCTIVE
UY
The Past Subjunctive is used in the follo w in g structures:

1.3 So u 1b ject
.Q
• i. would ra th e r _ _ __^
+ + som eon e + p a st. SUDJ.
TP
would sooner
I ’d ra th e r/ sooner she w ent there.
O
(d id n’t go)
ĐẠ
2. I t ’s tim e + someone + Past Subjunctive.
I t ’s h i g h / a b o u t tim e . .. (m o re e m p h a t ic )
NG
E x : o I t ’s la t e . I t ’s t i m e w e l e f t .
HƯ
e I t ’s t i m e s.o. d id s t h a b o u t i t . E v e r y o n e is a n n o y e d ,
a Come on! I t ’s tim e you stopped cheating me!
ẦN
® Ĩ t h i n k i t ’s tim e th e g o v e r n m e n t d id s t h a b o u t p o llu t io n .
® I t ’s tim e you behaved lik e a man.
TR
e You’re very selfish. I t ’s h ig h tim e you thought about th e people
B
around you.
00
3. “ I t is n ’t as i ĩ i as th o u g h ” is used when we w ant to say th a t sth. is

10
not true.
Ex: « I t isn ’t as i f I were Rockefeller (= Ĩ am not rich)
+3
(Dường như tô i k ^ ệ n a p hải là Rockefeller)

P2
®I t isn ’t as i f th is (w ereA iv f ir s t v is it to London. ạ 'i

CẤ
(= I t is n ot m y fir s t v is it to London) 'I

• I can’t understand w hy she likes h im so much. I t isn^'ias though/
A
he were good-looking (= he isn ’t good-looking). ...c ị~v£(Ị

HÓ
EXERCISE "
Í-
Translate in to Vietnamese:
-L
1. I t ’s tim e the c hildren w en t to bed.

ÁN
2. I t ’s (about) tim e sth were done about the tra ffic problem in the c ity
TO
centre.
3. I t ’s tim e I had a holiday.
NG
4. I t ’s tim e th e g o v e rn m e n ts c o n c e n tra te d o n ra is in g th e s ta n d a r d o f
liv in g o f the people.
ƯỠ
5. I ’d ra th e r we staved in .
ID
6. I ’d ra th e r we had a Chinese meal tonig ht.

BỒ
208

7. I t isn’t as i f I were a child.
ƠN
8. I t is n ’t as i f I d id i t d e lib e r a t e ly . •
9. I t is n ’t as i f s h e w e r e s tu p id .
NH
10. I t isn’t as i f he were a m illiona ire.
11. I t isn’t as i f they came late everyday.
UY
12. W e ’d r a t h e r s h e w e n t to F r a n c e fo r h e r h o lid a y .
.Q
IV. PHRASAL VERBS WITH “PUT”
TP
H e r e a re so m e o f th e m a n y p h ra s a l v e rb s w i t h P U T .
O
1. H e g u t h is o w n n a m e f o r w a r d to th e c o m m itte e , [p ro p o s e ]
ĐẠ
2. H e ’s g o o d a t p u t t in g h is id e a s a c ro s s [c o m m u n ic a te to o th e r s ]
NG
3. P le a s e p u t a w a y a l l y o u r to y s a t once , [ t id y ]
4 . H e is a lw a y s p u t t in g h e r d o w n , [m a k e s.o lo o k s m a ll]
HƯ
5. W e h a d c e n t r a l h e a t in g c u t i n la s t y e a r , [ i n s t a l l ]
6. I ’m going to put i i / an application for th a t job. [subm it]
ẦN
7. Every now and then she would put in a rem ark, [inte rje ct]
TR
8. T h e y ’v e p u t o f f m a k in g t h e i r d e c is io n f o r a n o th e r w e e k , [p o s tp o n e ]
9. H er sn iffin g re a lly puts me o ff my dinner, [discourage]
B
10. The school is p u ttin g H am let (5n)next year, [present]
00
10
11. He’s good a t p u ttin g on a ll sorts o f accents, [pretend to have]

12. The firem an quickly put out the fire, [extinguish]
+3
P2
13. Please don’t le t me put you out, [inconvenience (v) gây phiền hà]
14. You’re n o t allow ed to p u t UP p o s te rs h e re , [fix]
CẤ
15. I can gut you ug for the weekend [give accommodation to]
A
16. T h e g o v e rn m e n t is su re to p u t UP ta x e s soon, [raise]

HÓ
17. How do you p u t UP w ith such ru d e n e ss? [to le ra te]

Í-
EXERCISES
-L
A. W rite down the three nouns which could follo w each o f the verbs.
ÁN
Remember th a t th e ir meanings m ig h t be d iffe re n t depending on the

TO
noun which follows.

NG
Ex: put in money/ a comment / a telephone system.

1. put out 2. put forw ard 3. put o ff
ƯỠ
4. put across 5. put up 6. put on

ID
7. put away 8. put up w ith

BỒ
209

B. Complete the responses to the fo llow ing statements o r questions using

any appropriate phrasal verb.
ƠN
Ex: He’s always so rude. I wouldn’t put UP w ith i t i f I were you.
NH
1. How should we publicise our play?
UY
L e t’s __ some posters.
2. T his room is in a te rrib le mess.
.Q
I haven’t had tim e t o __ th in g s ___ yet.
TP
3. A ny chance o f a bed on your floor th is weekend?
Yes, o f course, I c a n __ y o u ___ .
O
ĐẠ
4. W hy have you suddenly lo st in te re s t in the project?
The lik e ly cost o f i t a ll h a s __ m e ___ .
NG
HƯ
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 3C
ẦN
L MORE ABOUT THE PASSIVE VOICE
1. Active: TR
He told me th a t his dog b it his child.
Passive 1: I was told by h im th a t his dog b it his child.
B
00
Passive 2: He told me th a t his c h ild was b itte n by his dog.

10
Passive 3: Ĩ was to ld by h im th a t h is c h ild was b itte n by h is dog.

PRACTICE
+3
She had found the key before I finish ed m y exercise.

P2
CẤ
2. Active: The man who beat your dog last week gave a lecture
th is m orning.
A
Passive: The man by whom your dog was beaten la st week gave
HÓ
a lecture th is m orning.
Passive:
Í-
The man whom yo ur; dog was beaten bỵ la st week gave

-L
a lecture th is m orning.
ÁN
3. Active: People begin to beat wooden drums on a ll the boats.

TO
Passive: Wooden drums begin to be beaten on a ll the boats.

PRACTICE
NG
3.1. She is going to punish th a t student.

3.2. They w ill have to sign these documents.
ƯỠ
3.3. M y grandfather continues to te ll m any in te restin g stories every

ID
• evening.
3.4. Your b ro th e r ought to overcome these difficulties.
BỒ
210

4. Active: A t th a t tim e, scientists began discovering Pluto.

Passive: A t th a t tim e, Pluto began being discovered by scientists.
ƠN
NH
A ctive: John gave me a good E nglish book
John gave a good E n glish book to me.
UY
Passive: I was given a good E ng lish book by John.
.Q
A good E ng lish book was given to me by John.
TP
Active: I bought m y b ro th e r some books.
I bought some books for m y bro the r.
O
ĐẠ
Passive: M y b ro th e r was bought some books by me.
Some books were bought fo r m y b ro th e r by me.
NG
r
HƯ
6. Active: Bobby read the sign in th e d e n tis t’s office.
t ___________ I
ẦN
Passive 1: The sign in the d e n tist’s office was read by Bobby.
t___ __ ___J TR
Passive 2: The sign was read by Bobby in the d e n tist’s office.
B
t____________ 1
00
10
N o te : The fo llow in g sentences do n o t have tw o-function phrases.

+3
• Columbus discovered Am erica in 1492

t_____ ________ J
P2
• The teacher praised the student on the le ft.

CẤ
t J
A
HÓ
7. Active: We showed h im how to do i t .

Passive: He was shown by us how to do i t .
Í-
PRACTICE
-L
7.1. Can you advise me w hich to buy?

7.2. She to ld h im when to sta rt.
ÁN
TO
8. Active: He treats her sister as i f she were o nly a servant.

Passive: H is siste r is treated by h im as i f she were only a
NG
servant.
ƯỠ
PRACTICE
8.1. I told the m an th a t he was m istaken.
ID
8.2. I warned you th a t he would be late.

BỒ
211

8.3. She reminded h im th a t he must be here early.
ƠN
NH
9. Active: He ke p t me w a itin g .
Passive: I was ke p t w a itin g by him .
UY
PRACTICE
9.1. I heard h im g iv in g orders.
.Q
9.2. I found h im w o rk in g a t his desk.
TP
9.3. She le ft me standing outside.
O
9.4. We watch the tra in leaving the station.
ĐẠ
9.5. Do you feel the house shaking?
9.6. I saw h im ru n n in g off.
NG
HƯ
10. Active: I to ld the servant to open the window.
Passive: The servant was to ld to open the w indow.
ẦN
PRACTICE
10.1. I asked h im not to do it.
10.2. She helped me to carry the box.
TR
B
10.3. Your teacher expects you to w o rk hard.
00
10.4. I warned h im not to be late.

10
10.5. The commander allowed the soldiers to take h im prisoner.

+3
P2
11. A ctive: We proved h im (to be) wrong.

Passive: He was proved (to be) wrorig (by us).
CẤ
PRACTICE
11.1. She believed h im (to be) innocent.
A
HÓ
11.2. Do you consider he r (to be) honest?

11.3. Tom ’s teacher th in k s h im (to be) the cleverest boy in the class
Í-
-L
12. A ctive: I heard h im come in.

Passive: He was heard to come in (by me).
ÁN
PRACTICE
TO
12.1. We saw them go out.

12.2. We fe lt the house shake.
NG
12.3. She watches me do it.

ƯỠ
12.4. D id you notice the th ie f leave the house?

12.5. I made h im do it.
ID
12.6. I have never know n h im behave so badly before.

BỒ
12.7. She helped me carry the box.
212
13. Active: I found the box empty.
ƠN
Passive: The box was found empty (by me).
PRACTICE
NH
13.1. We painted the door green.
UY
13.2. The governm ent set the prisoners free.
13.3. Can you push the door open?
.Q
13.4. The sun keeps us warm .
TP
13.5. He makes her uneasy.
13.6. The cold w eather turns the leaves red.
O
ĐẠ
13.7. He wished h is opponent dead.
NG
14. Active: We elected h im chairman.
Passive: He was elected chairm an (by us).
HƯ
PRACTICE
ẦN
14.1. D id you choose M r Nam president?
14.2 We call the dog “ SPOT” .
14.3. M y b ro th e r named his son Henry. TR
14.4. The people crowned Richard king.
B
00
14.5. Thev made Newton president o f the Royal Society.

10
0 s
'f 11 ị
+3
15. Active: Don’t le t Nam hear you.

P2
Passive: Don’t le t vourself be heard by Nam.

CẤ
PRACTICE
He le t people cheat him .
A
HÓ
16. Active: She is going to prosecute him .

Passive: He is soinff to be prosecuted bv her
Í-
N ot: He is beeing gone to prosecute by her.

-L
ÁN
17. A ctive: Everyone reported h im to be the best man for the job.
Passive: He was reported to be the best man for the job.
TO
PRACTICE
NG
They knew the man to have been a spy.

ƯỠ
18. Active: W rite your name on th is piece o f paper.

L e t your name be w ritte n on...
ID
Passive:
BỒ
19. Active: I t is necessary to do th a t now.
213

Passive: I t is necessary for th a t to be done now.
ƠN
20. Active: The litt le g irl cleaned the floor carefully.
NH
Passive: The floor was carefully cleaned by the...
Active: Our teacher w ill explain th a t lesson tom orrow .
UY
Passive: T h a t lesson w ill be explained by the teacher tom orro w .
Active: M y daughter put the school-bag here.
.Q
Passive: The school-bag was put here by m y daughter.
TP
II. CAUSATIVE FORM
O
ĐẠ
1. Causative active
NG
s + have + o + bare in fin itiv e .
s + get + 0 + to in fin itiv e .
HƯ
have
ẦN
hâd
Ex: I m y servant iro n m y clothes,
shall have
TR
have had
B
00
get
10
got . , -
+3
I m y servant to iro n m y clothes,

shall get
P2
have got
CẤ
2. Causative passive
A
HÓ
s + + o + past participle
get____________________ _
Í-
Ex: I get/ have m y shoes shined.

-L
3. Different structures with GET

ÁN
• I can’t get m y hand w arm (adj)

• T ry to get the car m oving (pres, part.)
TO
• L e t’s get her to buy us lunch (fu ll inf.)

NG
• Get your h a ir cut (past, part.)

ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
214

ƠN
4. D ifferent structures w ith HAVE
NH
f • Have M r S m ith come in now, please, (bare in f)
Í
UY
< • We’l l soon have your car going again, (the in f form )
.Q
• I re a lly must have m y watch repaired, (past part)
TP
MORE EXAM PLES
O
ĐẠ
• I had everybody f ill out a form.
NG
■< • He had us laughing a ll through the meal.
• I f you don’t get out o f m y house, I ’l l have you arrested.
HƯ
r ® I t ’s lovely to have people smile a t you in the street.
ẦN
• I woke up in the n ig h t and found we had w ater d rip p in g through
the ceiling. TR
B
^ • K in g Charles I (1) had his head cut o ff
00
10
I won’t have you te n / te llin g me w ha t to do.

+3
I w ill not have m y house turned in to a hotel.

P2
EXERCISE
CẤ
A
HÓ
1. Ông ñã cho in những th iệ p cúới này ở ñâu?

2. Ông ta nhờ kh ám sức khỏe tuần rồi.
Í-
3. Ông ta ñã ñưa sửa cái t i v i chưa?

-L
4. Bà ta ñã nhờ khám m ắ t rồ i.
ÁN
5. Hôm qua cô ta di uốn tóc.

6. Ngày m ai tô i sẽ ñi cắt tóc.
TO
7. Em tr a i tô i thường ñ i trá m ră ng ở phòng nha sĩ ñó.

8. Chúng tô i thường ñưa chiếc xe honda ñi sửacùng m ột cửa tiệm .
NG
9. Cô gái tro ng xóm tô i chỉ d i là m tóc tạ i những thẩ m m ỹ viện có

ƯỠ
tiếng.
10. ðứa con tra i cạnh nhà tô i ñ i nhổ răn g ở bệnh viể n hôm qua.
ID
11. Chúng ta phả i ñưa hành lý ñi cân và kiể m soát í t n h ấ t m ộ t ngày

BỒ
215

trư ớ c n g à y k h ở i h à n h .
ƠN
12. N g ư ờ i ta ñ ã ñư a N a p o le o n d i ñ à y ỗ ñ ả o R e u n io n .
NH
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 4C
UY
L REPORTED SPEECH
.Q
TP
A. C o m m a n d s : Change to reported speech
O
1. He rem inded her, “Go to the post office.”
ĐẠ
2. He asked her, “ Lend me some more money.”
3. She said to h im , “V is it m y school.”
NG
4. He said to her, “ Sw itch on and press the record button.”
5. He w arned them , “ Don’t eat because i t is poisonous.”
HƯ
6. He ordered the soldier, “ Salute when you meet an officer.”
ẦN
B. S ta te m e n ts : Begin w ith “He said to her...”
1. I ’m th in k in g o f going to liv e in Canada.
2. TR
Nora and J im are g e ttin g m a rried next m onth.
3. I ’ve been p la ying tennis a lo t recently.
B
00
4. I don’t know w h at Fred is doing.

10
5. I h a rd ly ever go out these days.

8. I ’l l te ll J im I saw you.
+3
7. You can come and stay w ith me i f you are ever in London.
P2
8. Tom had an accident lastweek but he wasn’t injured.

CẤ
c. Q u e s tio n s : Change to reported speech, beginning w ith “He asked

me...”
A
1. How are you?

HÓ
2. How long have you been back?

3. W hat are you doing now?
Í-
4. W here are you living ?

-L
5. Are you glad to be back?

ÁN
6. A re you going away again?

7. W hy d id you come back?
TO
8. Do you s t ill smoke?

NG
II. REPORTED SPEECH: MIXED TYPES

ƯỠ
1. Statement + Statement
ID
She said, “M y fa th e r doesn’t go to the movie. He has seen th is film .”

She said th a t h e r fa th e r d idn’t go to th e movie and (th at) he had sees
BỒ
216

th a t f i l m .
ƠN
2. Question -f- Question
She s a id to m e , “ W h e re a re y o u g o in g ? H a v e yo u m e t y o u r f a t h e r y e t? ”
NH
S he a s k e d m e w h e re I w a s g o in g a n d a s k e d i f I h a d m e t m v f a t h e r y e t.
UY
3. Command + Command
.Q
T h e te a c h e r s a id to t h e b o y , “ S it d o w n . W r it e t h i s . ”
TP
T h e te a c h e r to ld t h e b o y to s i t d o w n a n d to w r i t e t h a t .
4. Statement - Question
O
ĐẠ
H e s a id , “ F m b o re d . I s th e r e n o t h in g e ls e to do?”
H e s a id t h a t h e w a s b o re d a n d a s k e d i f t h e r e w a s n o t h in g else to do.
NG
5. Command - Statement
HƯ
S h e s a id tc m e. “ P le a s e h e lp m e w it h th is e x e rc is e . I c a n ’t QO i1
ẦN
m yself.”
S h e a s k e d m e to h e lp h e r w i t h t h a t e x e rc is e a n d ;o ỉd m e t h a t shf
c o u ld n ’t do i t h e r s e lf, TR
B
S. Question - statement
00
M v m o t h e r s a id to m e , “ W h a t a re y o u io G Ỉậ n g fo r? I c a n ’t see a n y th in ị
10
under the table.”

+3
M y m o t h e r a s k e d m e w h a t Ĩ w a s lo o k in g f o r a n d t o ld m e t h a t sh'
P2
c o u ld n ’t see a n y t h in g u n d e r t h e ta b le .
CẤ
EXERCISE
A
Turn to in d ire ct speechỈ

HÓ
1. S h e s a id to m e , “ D o yo u w a n t a cu p o f coffee ? I t ’s ju s t b e e n m ad e.”
Í-
‘2 . S h e s a id to m e , “ W h e r e a re th e S m ith s s p e n d in g t h e i r h o lid a ys '

-L
C a n vo u t e l l m e ? ”
ÁN
3. T h e m o t h e r s a id to th e d a u g h te r , “Y o u a re la te fo r h o m e . W h a t havi
you been doing?” nijh' **, i?
TO
4. H e s a id to h e r , “ Is t h a t t h e p o s tm a n ? I h o p e h e h a s a le t t e r fo r m e.’
5. M y f a t h e r s a id to m e , “ I t is t im e to go. H a v e y o u g o t a ll you
NG
t h in g s ? ”
ƯỠ
6. M y teacher o f E nglish said to me, “ How long have you bee:

le a r n in g E n g lis h ? Y o u r a c c e n t is v e r y g o o d .”
ID
7. The teacher said to the students, “ Keep quièí. Do you understan

BỒ
the lesson?”
21

8. She said to me, “Who do you th in k is England’s greatest dram atist?

I lik e Bernard Shaw best.”
ƠN
9. He said to his frien d, “How fa r is i t to B irm ingham ? I hope we can
get there before dark.”
NH
10. The w ife said to her husband, “The dog has stolen the meat. W hat
UY
are we to do?”
.Q
TP
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 5C
O
BRITISH ENGLISH &AMERICAN ENGLISH
ĐẠ
The differences between B ritis h E nglish and A m erican E nglish are not
NG
very great. The m ain differences are as follows: ,
HƯ
I. GRAMMAR
ẦN
U.S. G.B.
1. He ju s t w ent home. 1. H e’s ju s t gone home.
2. Do you have a problem? 2. TR
Have you got a problem?
B
3. I ’ve never re a lly gotten to know 3. I ’ve never re a lly got to know
00
him. him .
10
4. I t is essential th a t he be 4. I t is essential th a t he should be

informed. inform ed.
+3
5. One should tr y to get to know 5. One should t r y to get to know

P2
his neighbours. one’s neighbours.

CẤ
6. F ill out a form 6. F ill in a form

Stay home. Stay at home.
A
HÓ
Monday through F riday Monday to F rida y

Í-
II.VOCABULARY
-L
U.S. G.B.
ÁN
apartm ent fla t

automobile (auto)car
TO
bar pub
NG
b illfo ld w alle t
cab taxi
ƯỠ
can tin
candy sweets
ID
closet cupboard
BỒ
218

cookie biscuit
corn maize
crazy mad
ƠN
drugstore chem ist(’s)
NH
elevator l if t
eraser rubber
UY
expressway m otorway
s ta ff (of a university)
.Q
faculty
fa ll autumn
TP
faucet tap
O
fir s t floor / ground floor
ĐẠ
fla s h lig h t torch
garbage-can dustbin
NG
garbage-collector dustman
HƯ
gas petrol
generator dynamo
ẦN
highw ay m ain road
hood bonnet (of a car)
interm ission
TR
in te rva l (in an entertainm ent)
B
intersection crossroads
00
m a il post
10
m ailm an postman
+3
m ath maths
m otor engine
P2
movie film
CẤ
the movies the cinema

one-w ay-ticket single tic ke t
A
HÓ
pants trousers
panty-hose tig h ts
Í-
patrolm an constable (policeman)

-L
potato chips crisps

private hospital nursing home
ÁN
ra ilroa d ra ilw ay
TO
raise rise (in salary)

restroom public to ile t
NG
rou n d -trip re tu rn (ticket)

ƯỠ
schedule tim etable

sedan saloon (car)
ID
shorts underparts
BỒ
219

sick ill
sidew alk: vỉa hè pavement: vỉa hè
ƠN
sneakers tennis-shoes
NH
store shop
stove cooker
UY
subway tube, underground (tra in )
tra ffic circle roundabout
.Q
tra ile r caravan
TP
tru c k van, lo rry
O
tru n k boot (o f a car)
ĐẠ
und e rsh irt vest
vacation holiday(s)
NG
vest waistcoat
wheat corn
HƯ
w indshield windscreen (of a car)
zipper zip
ẦN
pavement: ỉòng ñường roadway: lòng ñường
EL SPELLING TR
B
00
U.S. G.B.
10
traveler, tra v e lin g tra ve lle r, tra v e llin g

+3
theater, center theatre, centre

P2
labor, honor, color labour, honour, colour

catalog, dialog, analog catalogue, dialogue, analogue
CẤ
realize realise
A
check cheque
HÓ
ja il gaol
je w e lry je w e lle ry
Í-
pajamas pyjamaB
-L
plow plough
ÁN
practice (v) practise (v)

program programme
TO
specialty speciality
tire ty re (on a car)
NG
IV.PRONUNCIATION
ƯỠ
U.S. G.B.
ID
1. can’t /ae/, castle, fast, glass, c , 1. can’t /ũ/

BỒ
220

staff, after, pass, example.

2. w rite r /ñ/ = rid e r ■ . I 2. w rite r III, rid e r /d/
ƠN
NH
EXERCISE
Put these words ỉn the correct columns: British or American.
UY
gas / m ailm an / hood / boot / fillin g station / petrol / postman / sedan /
.Q
gas station / movies / film s / pharmacy/ chem ist’s / l i f t / elevator /
TP
pavement (yỉa /lè) / sidewalk / apartm ent / fla t / m ain road / highway /
O
faucet / tap / autumn / fa ll / bonnet /' saloon car / pavement (/0«£
ĐẠ
ñường) / roadway dường) / trunk.
NG
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 6C
HƯ
I. PREFIXES & SUFFIXES
ẦN
A p re fix is a syllable joined to the beginning o f another word.
Ex: asleep, re-establish TR
B
A suffix is a le tte r joined to the end o f another word.
00
Ex: darkness, expectantly.

10
EXERCISE
+3
Put a ring around a m prefixes or suffixes in the list of words.

P2
1. ra in y 2. thoughtful
CẤ
3. careless 4. lib era lism

A
5. attendant 6. accountant;. s
HÓ
7. m in is k irt 8. po liticia n ■
9. prerecord 10. sadness
Í-
11. neighborhood (place) 12. arrangem ent

-L
13. d islike 14. sm allest

ÁN
15. misuse 16. unusual

TO
17. careful 18. thoughtless

19. realism 20. government
NG
21. m in i - computer 22. overeat

ƯỠ
23. dishonour 24. nearest

ID
25. mislead 26. weaken

BỒ
221

27. strengthen 2 8 .teacher

29. thoughtlessness 30. overcharge
ƠN
II. REVIEW OF SIMPLE PAST & FAST CONTINUOUS
NH
1. He was paddling on his surfboard when the shark attacked him .
UY
2. When the shark attacked h im , he fe ll o ff h is surfboard.
3. When hẹ M l o ff his surfboard, the shark attacked him .
.Q
4. The shark attacked h im w hile he was paddling on his surfboard.
TP
5. I t seemed as though he wasn’t looking a t a n yth in g when / w h ile he
O
was looking a t me.
ĐẠ
EXERCISE
NG
Translate into Vietnamese:
HƯ
1. She had an accident w hile she was d riv in g to work.
2. He was le a rnin g to ski when he broke his ankle.
ẦN
3. We bumped in to the princess o f Wales w h ile we were shopping in
Oxford street.
TR
4. He was w andering along the beach when-he fir s t saw the injured
B
dolphin.
00
5. M y pen ran out o f in k w hile I was w ritin g a letter.

10
III. ADJECTIVES WITH “UN-”

+3
P2
U N - gives an opposite meaning when it is added to a word,

unborn: chưa sinh ra (~ ch ildre n) unpleasant
CẤ
uncomfortable unnecessary
A
unconscious unofficial
HÓ
uncountable unprofessional
Í-
uneconomic: không thực tế unreasonable

-L
unemployed u n tid y
ÁN
unfortunate u n tru th fu l: không th ậ t thà

unhappy không chân th ậ t
TO
ungrateful unw ell

NG
unhealthy unusual
u nkind
ƯỠ
unknown
ID
unlucky
BỒ
222

ƠN
EXERCISE
Complete the sentences using words from the list above.
NH
1. He lost his job la st year. H e’s b e e n ____ .
UY
2. A Rolls-Royce does 10 m iles to the gallon. I t ’s a v e r y ____ car.
3. The society for the protection o f t h e ____ c h ild campaign against
.Q
TP
abortion (ñẻ non).
4. Five years ago, Johnny Rabid was a n ____ singer, now he’s world
O
famous.
ĐẠ
5. “W a ter” , “rice” and 1ÕÌ.PÍ are a l l ____ nouns.
6. Do you m in d i f I leave w o rk early? I ’m feeling r a t h e r ____ .
NG
7. Liverpool played very w ell. They w e re ____ n ot to score a goal.
HƯ
8. I don’t lik e c a llin g anyone a lia r, but he’s c e r ta in ly ____ .
ẦN
ÍV. REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS
• myself, yourself, him self, herself, its e lf, oneself, ourselves,
TR
yourselves, themselves, each o th e r, one another
B
• A reflexive pronoun (not emphasizing), p la yin g the role o f the
00
object, refers to the subject o f a sentence.

10
He looked a t h im s e lf in the m irro r.

+3
• In form al style we use “ each o ther” for tw o people. We use “one

another” for more tha n 2 people. In in fo rm a l style we can use “each
P2
other” fo r more tha n 2: They looked a t each o th e r.

CẤ
EXERCISE
A
HÓ
In which o f these sentences w ould you use a reflexive pronoun?

1. A fte r the accident she was in plaster for three weeks. I t was a great
Í-
t h r ill when she was able to w a s h ____ again.

-L
2. H old on. I won’t be long. I ’ve ju s t got to s h a v e ____ before we go

ÁN
out.
3. You’re soaked! You’d both b e tte r h u rry and d r y ____ . There’s a cold
TO
w in d , and we’ve o nly got a sm all towel.

NG
4. A fte r a long journey, I ’m always d ying to have a shower and get

clean.
ƯỠ
V. RELATIVE PRONOUS IN FORMAL STYLE

ID
Preposition + W H O M / W H IC H
BỒ
223

n Ỉ Ĩ 1 fo r m a l E n g lis h , ( o f f ic ia l le t t e r s <k s p e e c h e s ), th e p r e p o s itio n
ƠN
c o m e s a t th e b e g in n in g o f th e a d j c la u s e .
S h e is th e m a n a b o u t w h o m I t o ld you.
NH
T h e p ic t u r e a t w h ic h y o u a re lo o k in g is h i g h ly a p p r e c ia te d .
UY
N ote: W H O o r T H Ạ T c a n n o t b e u s e d a f t e r p re p o s itio n s .
3 In every day usage, the preposition comes after the verb o f the adj
.Q
c la u s e :
TP
She is the w o m a n ( w h o / t h a t ) I t o l d y o u a b o u t.
O
The p ic t u r e ( w h ic h / t h a t ) YOU are lo o k in g at is h ig h ly
ĐẠ
a p p r e c ia te d .
NG
EXERCISE
HƯ
Tram form these sentences into a more, formal style.
1. He’s the m an I bought it from .
ẦN
2. The person I spoke to was very rude.
3. Ĩ bought a carton o f eggs, and six were bad. TR
4. T h e p e o p le who th e p o lic e b ro u g h t c h a rg e s a g a in s t bad lo n g
B
00
crim in a l records.
10
5. H e r e ’s th e b o o k t h a t I fo u n d t h e Q u o ta tio n in .
o. D o u g la s Adams is t h e m a n the e x t r a c t w a s w r it t e n b y .
+3
7. I t ’s s o m e th in g t h a t I k n o w n o t h in g a b o u t.
P2
8. She’s the woman I was te llin g you about.

CẤ
9. T h e g o o d s , w h ic h I s e n t y o u c h e q u e fo r , h a v e n e v e r a r r iv e d .
10. S h e ’s a p e rs o n w h o m w e r e l y o n v e r y m u c h .
A
HÓ
VL ADJECTIVES WITH “IN-”

I N - is a n o t h e r B r e f ix w h ic h m a v g iv e o p p o s ite m e a n in g ÍO a w o rd .
Í-
-L
in a c c u ra te in c o n v e n ie n t in s a n e
in a c t iv e in c o r r e c t in s e c u re
ÁN
in a d e q u a te in c r e d ib le ' ]s. in s e n t it i v e
TO
'in a n i m a t e in d e c is iv e in s e p a r a b le
NG
in a r t ic u la t e in d e fin ite in s ig n i f ic a n t
ƯỠ
in a t t e n t iv e in d ir e c t in t o le r a b le
in c a p a b le in v is ib le
ID
BỒ
224

EXERCISE
ƠN
Complete these sentences with words from the list above.
NH
1. The re p ort was ____ . I t said 100 people were kille d . In fact, only
57 were kille d .
UY
2. The volcano had b e e n ____ fo r 500 years when i t erupted.
.Q
3. The true story sounded s o ____ th a t nobody could believe it.
4. There are tw o routes. T h is one’s r a t h e r ____ but i t passes through
TP
beautiful countryside along the way. T h a t one’s a motorway.
O
5. U ltra -v io le t and in tra -re d rays are . in norm al lig h t.
ĐẠ
VII. USES OF ARTICLES
NG
• A/AN:
HƯ
- Before a noun o f profession
Ex: She’s an engineer.
ẦN
- Before a singular countable noun to mean “one” .
Ex: I have a book. TR
• NOT A/AN:
B
00
- Before an uncountable.
10
Ex: money, music.

+3
• THE:
P2
- Before a noun defined: Rome is the capital o f Ita ly .

CẤ
- Before unique things: the sun, the moon, the world.

- Before: cinema, theatre, bank, post office, doctor, den tist, toilet.
A
Ex: A re you going to the post office?

HÓ
I m ust go to the bank today.

- Before: republic, states, kingdom , union.
Í-
Ex: The central A frica n Republic

-L
The U n ite d States

ÁN
The Soviet U nion, the U n ite d Kingdom

- Before: riv e r, ocean, sea.
TO
Ex: the A tla n tic Ocean, the M editerranean Sea

NG
The N ile, the Suez Canal

- Before: hotel, restaurant, cinema, theatre, museum.
ƯỠ
Ex: the H ilto n (Hotel), the Science museum, the N ational

theatre, the S tar o f In d ia (restaurant)
ID
The Odeon (Cinema), the Tate G allery (a rt gallery)

BỒ
- Before: group o f islands & mountains:
225

Ex: The N etherlands, the Canary Islands, the P hilippine s,

the Andes, the Him alayas, the Truong Son Range
o Not THE:
ƠN
- Before: meals or foods
NH
Ex: We have fis h and meat fo r dinner.
- Before: school, church, bed, prison, m arke t, u nive rs ity, tow n, hospital
UY
Ex: She has gone to school, (study)
.Q
/ She has gone to the school, (v is it)
TP
- Before: general ideas:
Ex: I lik e music.
O
Life is not possible w ith o u t w a te r.
ĐẠ
- Before games & sports.
NG
Ex: M y favourite sports are tennis & s kiin g.
- Before a language & a subject.
HƯ
Ex: Do you th in k E ng lish and ch em istry are difficult?
- Before a placename: continent, state, city, tow n, village, country,
ẦN
province.
Ex:
TR
Europe, France, London, D ongnai.
- Before the names o f streets / roads, parks, a irp orts, stations, castles,
B
universities, abbey, zoo.
00
Ex: M unich A irp o rt

10
W estm inster Abbey

+3
Paddington S tation.
P2
Edinburgh Castle
CẤ
Cambridge U n iv e rs ity
A
London Zoo
HÓ
EXERCISE
Í-
F ill in the blanks w ith A, A N o r THE o r leave blank:

-L
1. ____ Alaska is the largest state i n _____ U n ite d States.

ÁN
2. She was d riv in g a t a speed o f n in e ty m ile s ____ hour.

TO
3. _____corn is the most im p o rta n t o f a ll Am erican crops.

4. _____w ater in th is glass is n o t good.
NG
5. Jane and I h a d ____ lunch a t _____ school cafeteria.

ƯỠ
6. _____ Rocky M ountains stre tch a ll the way from ___ Mex
A rctic.
ID
7. Richard wants to s tu d y ____ Computer E ngineering a t _____ Ohio

BỒ
226

State U n iv e rs ity .
8. H C M tr a il is i n _ Truongson Range.
VIII. ADJECTIVES WITH IV- IR- IM-
ƠN
They a ll give opposite meaning. I L - is used before the le tte r “1” ; IR -
NH
before “ r ” and I M - before “ m, p .
UY
ille g a l irre le va n t im personal
.Q
ille g ib le irreparable im p olite
TP
illite ra te irresponsible impossible
illo g ica l irre s is tib le im practical
O
ĐẠ
irra tio n a l im m oral improbable
irre g u la r im p a tie n t
NG
EXERCISE
HƯ
Make sentences w ith five o f the above words.
ẦN
IX.ADJECTVES WITH NON-
•
TR
“N O N ” can be used to make the opposite o f adjs and nouns:
B
EX: v io le n t non-violent (adj);
00
violence -» non-violence.
10
• “N O T” can also be used in the place o f a negative adjective.

+3
Ex: They’re unhappy -» They’re not happy.

P2
• Some people w rite many n o n - words w ith a hyphen (-).

• O ther examples:
CẤ
/3/ non-paym ent

A
nonsense non-aggression
HÓ
non-smoker: 3 ai
Í-
người không h ú t thuốc non-aligned: không liê n m in h

-L
n o n -B ritish non-combatant: không trực tiếp

ÁN
non-stick: không dín h chảo chiến dấu

non-stop non -p ro life ra tion : không sinh sôi
TO
non-standard n on -in te rve ntio n : không can th iệ p

NG
non-member non-conform ist: Ịthông theo quốc giáo

ƯỠ
non-starter: ý k iế n , người
không ñáng quan tâm
ID
BỒ
227

EXERCISE
ƠN
Com plete the te x t below:
NH
The U n ite d States and the S oviet U nion are in tereste d in the (1)
UY
____ o f atom ic weapons. They also w a n t to sign a (2) _____ tre a ty ,
w hich w ill include .(3 )____ in the a ffa irs o r ( 4 ) _____ n atio n s and the
.Q
pro te ction o f (5 ) ____ people in w a r zones.
TP
O
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 7C
ĐẠ
NG
I. TWO- OR THREE-WORD VERB OR PHRASAL VERBS WITH
“LOOK” & “BREAK”.
HƯ
In E n g lish , the re are m any tw o and three w ord verbs. They can be
ẦN
separable [S] o r inseparable. A ll tra n s itiv e phrasal verbs are separable.
LOOK TR
1. look down upon : scorn
B
00
2. look out on to : be facing

3. look over [S] : inspect
10
4. look up [S] : search fo r

+3
5. look up to : respect
P2
BREAK
CẤ
1. break away fro m : escape from

2. break down : a) stop fu n ctio n in g
A
HÓ
b) collapse through i l l h ea lth o r g re at em otion

3. break in : e n te r a b u ild in g b y force.
Í-
4. break o ff [S ] : stop, d is ru p t
-L
5. break up [S] : b re ak in to pieces.

ÁN
EXERCISE
TO
1. Cô ta rởm ñời và k h in h k h i tấ t cả những người hàng xóm của cô ta .

NG
2. Căn nhà n hìn ra phía trường ñua.

ƯỠ
3. M ọ i học sin h tro n g trường k ín h trọ n g th ầ y hiệu trưởng.

4. A nh ta lá n h xa các bạn bè xâu.
ID
5. K h i cô ta nghe tin buồn ñổ, cô ta m ấ t b ìn h tĩn h và khóc.

BỒ
228

ƠN
II. WORDS WITH DIS-
NH
• D IS - is a p re fix w h ich usually makes th e adj, noun or ver
negative.
UY
• Sam ple words:
.Q
dishonest d iso rde r displeasure
TP
dishonesty d ista ste fu l disrespect
O
d islo ya l d istaste d is b e lie f
ĐẠ
d is lo y a lty disapproval disconnection
NG
disobedient disagreem ent disadvantage
HƯ
disobedience disappearance d is lik e
d iso rd e rly (adj) discom fort disapprove
ẦN
EXERCISE TR
Completethesentenceswithwordsbeginningwith“dis-“. Theremaybi
B
morethanonecorrectanswerforeach.
00
10
1. He lo st h is jo b because he w a s ____ .
+3
2. I tho ught the joke she to ld was ■

P2
3. I couldn’t do it because o f m y p a re n t’s ____ .

CẤ
4. I ’m a fra id I look a t th e s ta tis tic s w ith _____.

A
HÓ
III.REVISION OF TENSES
12 basic tenses + 4 co n d itio n a l tenses = 16 active tenses + 16 passive
Í-
tenses = 32
-L
S im ple nrespnt Continuous r>i-ocont

ÁN
TO
NG
Perfect nresent P erfect C ontinuous nrAcont

ƯỠ
ID
BỒ

EXERCISE
Puttheverbsinbracketsintotheirmostappropriateform:
I (1. explore) rem ote places fo r the la s t 20 years. T h is (2. happen)
ƠN
w h e n I (3. tra v e l) by canoe along the Am azon. I (4. tra v e l) fo r 12 days
NH
a n d I (5. stop) a t a sm a ll cle a rin g fo r th e n ig h t. I ju s t (6. go) to sleep
when som ething (7. w ake) me. I (8.open) m y eyes and there i t (9. be)!
UY
it (10. be) a boa co n s tricto r and it (11. come) in to the te n t, w e ll, about
a qua rter o f it (12. come) in , the re st was outside. I could (13. see) i t in
.Q
the lig h t o f m y camp fire . I t (14. be) the longest snake I ever (15. see)
TP
in my e n tire life . I never (1'6. be) so scared. I t (17. cra w l) rig h t through
O
the te n t and out o f th e o th e r side. I (18. ju m p ) to m y feet, and (19. p ick
ĐẠ
up) m y gun, b u t w hen I (20. ru n) outside, it already (21. go).
w. PHRASAL VERBS WITH “COME”
NG
HƯ
1. come along : a) progress b) h u rry
2. come down : descend
ẦN
3. come o ff : be detached rờ i ra.
4. come over / round / across : v is it casually.
5. come up : ascend TR
B
EXERCISE
00
1. N hanh lê n nếu không chúng ta sẽ b ị trễ .

10
2. “Xuống ñ i!” Bà B lig h quát th ằ n g bé ñang ở trê n thang.

+3
3. K im chỉ p h ú t của chiếc ñồng hồ ñeo ta y của tô i ñã sú t ra.

P2
4. H ãv ghé thă m và dùng cơm vớ i chúng tô i thứ h a i tớ i.

H ãy ñ i lê n và xem phòng ngủ ñi.
CẤ
5.
V. WORDS WITH MIS-

A
HÓ
•» M IS - m eaning W R O N G (LY) is used to change the m eaning o f adjs,

nouns and verbs.
Í-
'» Sam ple words:

-L
m ista ken m isbehaviour

ÁN
m istim ed m isjudgem ent

m isunderstood m ischance
TO
m ishappen m isfortune
NG
m istake m iscalculation
ƯỠ
m isquote m isconduct
m isunderstanding
ID
BỒ
230

EXERCISE
Rewrite these sentences using words from the list above.
ƠN
1. I ’m sorry, but th e re are several w rong calcu lations in your report.
NH
2. He was asked to leave the school because o f h is bad behaviour and
poor conduct.
UY
3. She used to be ric h , b ut she had several b its o f bad lu ck.
4. The a rtic le was fu ll o f Quotes from the chairm an. In fact he had not
.Q
said these th in g s.
TP
5. The s trik e r kicke d the b a ll, b u t h is shot was b adly tim e d .
O
VI. PHRASAL VERBS WITH GO.
ĐẠ
1. go along w ith : accompany
NG
2. go down w ith : be i l l w ith
3. go in : e nter
HƯ
4. go in fo r : specialize in , take as one’s subject o r hobby
5. go over : to cross
ẦN
EXERCISE TR
B
00
1. A i sẽ d i theo tôi?
10
2. N hiều cậu bé ñã b ị cảm cúm học k ì vừa qua.

+3
3. C ái d in h không chịu vào; cho tô i mượn cái búa.

4. Bạn tô i ñã n ó i rằ n g anh ấy th íc h 4' chuyên về cơ k h í dân sự.
P2
5. A nh ta d i tớ i dể n ó i chuyện vớ i người bạn cũ của anh ta.

CẤ
VII. VERBS NOT USED IN CONTINUOUS TENSES

A
• We ra re ly p u t - in g a t the end o f these verbs:

HÓ
appear hear rem em ber

Í-
appreciate know resem ble

-L
believe lik e see

ÁN
feel look lik e th in k

TO
fo rge t notice understand

• The above verbs describe m enta l states th a t e xist. B u t some o f them
NG
can appear in th e continuous fo rm w hey th e y show the a ctivite s

th a t are in progress.
ƯỠ
I am th in k in g about th is gram m ar.

ID
BỒ
231

I am h aving trouble.
ƠN
She is h aving a good tim e .
NH
The ch ef is ta s tin g th e sauce.
UY
Don is sm e llin g th e roses.
The doctor is seeing a p a tie n t.
.Q
TP
Sue is fee lin g th e cat’s fu r.
I am lo o kin g out th e w indow .
O
ĐẠ
The a ctor is appearing on th e stage.
The grocer is w e ig hing the bananas.
NG
Tom is being foo lish.
HƯ
EXERCISE
Givethecorrectformoftheverbsinbrackets:
ẦN
TR
“ Some people s till (1. believe) the w o rld is fla t” , he said. “You (2.
B
joke), “ I re p lie d ” . I (3. n o t know ) anyone who does” “W e ll, you (4. know )
00
me,” he re p lie d. I (5. believe) th a t the e a rth is fla t. I m et a m an the

10
o the r day. I (6. forget) h is name now. He said th a t the e a rth (7. look)
lik e a fla t d ish ” "... you (8. try ) to te ll me th a t you (9. believe) him ?” I
+3
asked.
P2
“I c e rta in ly do,” he answered. “ I (10. th in k ) th a t he is rig h t.”

CẤ
“A nd w hich side o f the dish... you (11. liv e ) on?”

“Oh, I (12. n o t know ). He d id n ’t te ll me th a t!”
A
V III. REVISION OF PREFIXES

HÓ
M ake these words negative by adding “un” “in ” “ i l ” “ im ” etc. Use

Í-
“ not” i f n o th in g else is possible.

-L
1. expensive 11. re g ula r -»

ÁN
2. fo rm a l -> 12. obedient -»

TO
3. leg al -» 13. conscious ->

NG
4. p o lite —> 14. possible -»

5. clean -> 15. understood
ƯỠ
6. v io le n t —> 1 6 .lo ya l -»
ID
7. honest -» 17. correct ->

BỒ
8. probable -» 18. tim e d ->
232
ƠN
9. tid y -» 19. lo g ica l ->
NH
10. responsible -> 20. s k ille d
UY
IX. PHRASAL VERBS WITH “RUN”
.Q
1. run on : a) ta lk incessantly b) continue w/o a break.
2. ru n over : overflow
TP
3. ru n through : pierce w ith a sword (g e n e ra lly separated)
O
4. run up : increase q uickly
ĐẠ
5. ru n up a g a in s t: encounter
NG
EXERCISE
HƯ
1. M ộ t k h i bà ta ñã b ắ t ñầu n ó i th ì bà ta n ó i không ngừng tro n g n h iề i
giờ.
ẦN
2. A i ñó chắc hẳn ñã ñể vòi nước chảy, v ì nước ñang chảy trà n và làiT
ngập phòng tắm .
TR
3. H iệ p sĩ ấy dã ñâm tê n ñộc ác ñó bằng lưỡi gươm của chàng ta.
B
4. G iá cuốn sách ấy ñã tă n g nhanh qua m ộ t dêm.
00
5. H ãng ấy ñã ñụng p h ả i cuộc cạnh tra n h gay gắt.

10
X. ADJECTIVES WITH -Y AND -LY

+3
• M any adjectives are form ed by adding —L Y o r - Y to nouns.

P2
• Sam ple lis t:

CẤ
sandy m o th e rly
frie n d ly
A
foggy
HÓ
h e a lth y d a ily
greasy h o u rly
Í-
-L
sunny liv e ly
ra in y shapely
ÁN
w in d y hom ely
TO
snowy le isu re ly
NG
s ilv e ry
ƯỠ
EXERCISE
Rewritethesesentences,usingwordsendingin“y”or“ly”:
ID
BỒ
1. The sky was covered w ith clouds.

2. H e r dress was made o f a m a te ria l lik e s ilk .

The m agazine is published every qua rter.

She’s a good teacher. She’s lik e a s is te r to h e r students.
The cupboard was covered w ith dust.
ƠN
She’s a person who alw ays has d iffe re n t moods.
NH
UY
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 8C
.Q
PHRASAL VERBS WITH “TURN”
TP
. to tu rn down : to re je ct [S].
O
ĐẠ
. to tu rn inside out : to reverse (g e ne ra lly separated)
. to tu rn out : to prove to be
NG
. to tu rn over : to upset, capsize (usually boats, cars, etc.)
. to tu rn up : to appear, a rriv e
HƯ
EXERCISE
ẦN
. Quân ñ ộ i ñã lo ạ i anh ta ra v ì lý do kém sức khỏe của anh ta.
TR
. A nh ta ñã lộ n tấ t cả các tú i áo quần ra nhưng khôn g th ể tìm th ấ y
chìa khóa.
B
. Cuối cùng m ọi cái tỏ ra cũng êm xuôi
00
. Chiếc ca-nô lậ t úp ngay k h i nó ñến chỗ nước chảy x iế t, (the rap ids)
10
. N hiều bạn bè của tô i ñã xuâ't h iệ n tạ i cuộc họp.

+3
P2
í. INTERJECTIONS
CẤ
In te rje c tio n s o r exclam atory w ords serve the purpose o f expressing

strong fe e lin g o r sudden em otion. They have no gram m ar re la tio n to
A
any w ord o r group o f words in the sentence. They are independent

HÓ
elem ents.
Some common in te rje ctio n s: A las! Hey! Heavens! H o rro rs!
Í-
'h! : surprise U gh! : disgust

-L
h! A h! : reco gn itio n, un de rstan ding Ooh! : pleasure; pain

ÁN
Ĩow! : g re at surprise, excitem ent T u t, tu t! : disapproval

agh! : agony Yum ,yum ! : appreciation
TO
'w! O uch!: p ain (o f food)

/hew ! Mm!
NG
Hum ph!
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
34

EXERCISE
Com plete the spaces in these sentences w ith an in te rje c tio n from the
ƠN
above lis t:
NH
1. ___ I knew th a t ages ago.
2. ____ I cut m y fin g e r instead o f the clo th !
UY
3. ____ Look a t th a t h at!
4. ____ W h a t a day!
.Q
5. ____ T h a t’s the end o f e veryth in g .
TP
6. ____ Do you know where you’re going?
O
ĐẠ
III. SUFFIXES - LIKE TO FORM ADJS, AND -STYLE, -TYPE TO
FORM NOUNS
NG
• Below are some common exam ples w ith -L IK E .
HƯ
c h ild lik e , businesslike, life lik e , god like, w o rkm a n like , w a rlik e
• A n d some exam ple w ith -S T Y L E -T Y P E . These suffixes are often
ẦN
added to p roper nouns to m ake nouns o r more unusual adjectives:
R o llin g stones type (n)
D a llas s ty le (n)
TR
R o llin g Stones type songs (adj)
D alla s style T V soap opera (adj)
B
• The s u ffix -L IK E can also be used in th e same way.
00
He plays th e g u ita r in a w h o -like way.

10
A nh ta chơi g h i ta theo k iể u của a i ñó.

+3
EXERCISE
P2
Completethesentences, usingtheabovesuffixesaddedtopropernouns
CẤ
to form adjectives:
A
HÓ
1. They’re an E verle y B ro th e rs ____ _ harm ony group.

2. “P re cin ct 41” is a “H ill S tre e t Blues” _____ police adventure series.
Í-
3. He’s a sing e r in the Boy George ____ w h ich is so popular

-L
nowadays.
4. He conducts in a V on K a ra ja n ______m anner.
ÁN
5. She plays th e piano in a L ib e ra c e ______way.

TO
6. Thè new “ BM M ia m i” is a M ercedes__________ lu x u ry car.

NG
IV. PHRASAL VERBS WITH GET

ƯỠ
1. get along : a) make progress b) liv e in harm ony w ith .

2. get beh ind : fa il to keep up w ith .
ID
3. get down : a) descend b) depress

BỒ
235

ƠN
4. get in : board a vehicle * get o ff: dism ount
5. get through w ith : fin is h (w ith )
NH
EXERCISE
UY
1. Cậu học sin h m ới xem ra rấ t hòa ñồng với các bạn còn lạ i trong
.Q
lớp.
TP
2. Jones chậm trễ tro n g việc th a n h toán tiề n thuê nhà.
3. Những b iế n cố có tín h b i k ịc h này ñang dần dần là m tô i suy sụp.
O
4. Người soát vé bảo người khách lạ xuống xe ộ trạ m sắp tớ i.
ĐẠ
5. K h i tô i hoàn tấ t bản báo cáo này tô i sẽ ñ i xi-n ê.
NG
V. PHRASAL VERBS WITH “TAKE”
HƯ
1. take aback : surp rise (separable b ut g e n e ra lly used in the passive)
2. take along : escort [S]
ẦN
3. take down : w rite dow n, m ake a note o f [S]
4. take over : assume c o n tro l o f [S]
5. take up
TR
: a) occupy space, one’s tim e , energies [S]
B
b) begin to fo llo w a profession, a hobby, a way o f life [S]
00
10
EXERCISE
+3
1. Chúng tô i rấ t ñỗi ngạc n h iê n bởi tin ra ñ i của anh ấy.

2. T ô i hộ tống em g á i tô i d i kh iê u vũ.
P2
3. Phóng viê n g h i chép toàn bộ b à i diễn văn.

CẤ
4. B ill ñảm trá c h việc k in h doanh.

5. a) Công việc của tô i chiếm hầu h ế t th ờ i g ia n của tô i.
A
b) S in h v iê n y khoa ấ y quyết ñ ịn h theo ngành g iả i phẫu.

HÓ
VI. SUFFIXES -ABLE, -IBLE TO FORM ADJS

Í-
-L
• -A B L E gives an idea o f “being able to do th is ” ; -IB L E “h aving th is

q u a lity ” .
ÁN
• Exam ples:
TO
adm irable co nve rtib le

avoidable - unavoidable edible
NG
desirable - undesirable fle x ib le

probable - im probable h o rrib le
ƯỠ
valuable - invaluab le te rrib le

ID
capable - incapable intelligible - unintelligible

m em orable d iv is ib le — in d iv is ib le
BỒ
respectable le g ible - ille g ib le
236

ƠN
taxable ' possible - im possibl
w ashable responsible - irresp o nsible
NH
EXEROSE
UY
Add “-a b le ” to' these w ords to fo rm adjectives. Take care w ith sp elling ,
.Q
accept depend reason
TP
believe d rin k recognize
O
change love re ly
ĐẠ
VII. PHRASAL VERBS WITH BRING
NG
- b rin g about : cause to happen [S]
HƯ
- b rin g back : re ca ll (generaly n o t separated w ith a noun)
- b rin g down : low er, reduce [S]
ẦN
- b rin g out : p ub lish [S ]
- b rin g up : re a r, educate [S3TR
B
EXERCISE
00
1. C ái gì ñã gây ra sự hiểu lầ m này?

10
2. Chủ cửa tiệ m giảm giá của ông ta xuống 5 ñô la .

+3
3. T ô i nhớ lạ i những ngày d i học.

P2
4. K h i nào bạn xu ấ t bản cuôn tiể u th u y ế t k ế tiếp?

5. Cặp vợ chồng g ià tố t bụng ñồng ý n uô i dạy ñứa trẻ mồ côi ñó.
CẤ
VIII. SUFFIXES -LESS -FUL TO FORM ADJECTIVES

A
HÓ
• F U L is a s u ffix m eaning “h a vin g th e q u a lity o r

LESS means “ n o t h a vin g the q u a lity o r.
Í-
• Exam ples:
-L
b e a u tifu l aim less

ÁN
g ra te fu l life le ss
p la y fu l pointless
TO
s k ilfu l speechless
NG
w onderful reckless
ƯỠ
EXERCISE
Writedownthewordsoppositeinmeaningtothosebelow.Useaprefixỉn
ID
each case.
BỒ
231

1. countable 11. to lerate

2. accurate 12. standard
ƠN
3. sense 1 3 .reasonable
NH
4. credible 14. fortune
15. ta ste ful
UY
5. responsible
6. legal 16. tru th fu l
.Q
7. g ra te fu l 17. probable
TP
8. possible 18. honest
O
ĐẠ
9. ra tio n a l 19. logical
10. v is ib le 20. usual
NG
HƯ
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 9C
ẦN
. SUFFIX -ISH TO FORM ADJECTIVES - THE MEANING OF
ADVERTISING, PUBLICITY &PROPAGANDA TR
B
UFF1X -1SH: I t conveys the m eaning of:
00
looking o r behaving lik e : c h ild is h , foolish, se lfish,

10
n a tio n a litie s : S panish, B ritis h , Iris h , S cottish

+3
approxim ate colours : d a rkish, reddish, ye llo w ish

P2
vague ch aracte ristics : fa ttis h , thuggish, qu ie tish

CẤ
approxim ate ages : tw e n tyish , th irty is h , youngish, oldish.

OVERUSING / PUBLICITY / PROPAGANDA
A
HÓ
“A d ve rtisin g ” is used in th e context o f com m erce.

“ P u b licity ” is used in the context o f m a king people aware o f a
Í-
person, an event o r a program m e: pop and film stars, concerts,

-L
sports fixtu re s , conferences film s and T V program m es

“Propaganda” has a negative im age in E ng lish . I t is often p o litic a l
ÁN
or religious.
TO
EXERCISE
ranslatethisdescriptionofanewdesklightintoEnglish. ;
NG
ƯỠ
ðây là m ột cái ñèn ñể bàn m ới, là m bằng m ột lo ạ i k im lo ạ i ñỏ hơị

ID
|m . Nó cũng có m ột sợi dây ñ iên màu hơi ñỏ. Nó rấ t tu yệ t ñối với

lữ n g căn phòng hơi tố i, và những bàn g iấ y nho n hỏ.
BỒ

II. PHRASAL VERBS WITH PUT

put across : successfully convey [S]
ƠN
put aside : save [S]
put down : a) suppress,crush [S] b) w rite [S]
NH
put forw a rd : propose [S]
put up w ith : to le ra te , suffer,bear.
UY
EXERCISE
.Q
TP
1. Vâng, anh ta hiểu vấn ñề tố t nhưng anh ta có thể diễn ñ ạ t nó m ột
cách th à n h công không?
O
ĐẠ
2. M ỗ i thá n g anh ñã ñể dành ñược bao nhiêu tro n g k h i anh là m việc ở
nước ngoài?
NG
3. a) C hính phủ ñã sớm ñập ta n / ñàn áp cuộc n ổ i dậy.
b) H ãy g h i tê n tô i vào cuộc th i.
HƯ
4. C húng tô i ñã dề ngh ị / ñưa ra ý k iế n này cho ủy ban.
5. T hầy giáo khước từ việc chịu ñựng tín h lười biếng của cậu học s i n h
ẦN
này.
III. FORMAL &BUSINESS LETTERS TR

B
FORMAL & BUSINESS LETTERS: Pay a tte n tio n to the greetings and
00
closings in form al and business le tte rs :

10
+3
Addressed to Beginning Ending

P2
- The personnel Manager, Forest Dear Sir,

CẤ
Insurance Co., Dear Madam,

- The Sales Manager, Southern Dear Sir or
A
Computers Ltd., Madam, Yours,

HÓ
- The Managing Director, Hampton PLC Yours faithfully, (GB)

Í-
- Natwest Bank PLC Dear Sirs, (GB) Yours truly, (U.S)

-L
- Wessex Transport Gentlemen, (US)

ÁN
- Messrs Smith and Jones Dear Sir or

Madam,
TO
- M r M. Smith / Michael Smith Dear M r Smith, Yours sincerely,

NG
- M. Smith, Esq (GB formal) Yours,

ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
23Í

ƠN
- Mrs Smith / Miss Smith - Ms Smith / Dear M rs Smith,
Jane Smith Dear Miss Smith,
NH
Dear Ms Smith,
UY
N o te : “M essrs” is an old fashioned term . I t is used w hen th e names o f
.Q
tw o o r m ore people make up the name o f the firm . I t is n o t used
fo r lim ite d companies (L td ) o r public lim ite d com panies (PLC).
TP
A B B R E V IA T IO N S : H ere are some common abbreviations in form a l &
O
business le tte rs. W rite them in fu ll.
ĐẠ
1. A/C 18. inc. 35. ref.
NG
2. advt 19. in fo. 36. RSVP
HƯ
3. approx 20. J n r. 37. S nr.
4. a.s.a.p. 21. km . 38. St.
ẦN
5. Bros 22. Lb. 39. te l.
6. cf 23. L td . TR 40. U K
7. Co. 24. max. 41. V IP
B
00
8. c/o 25. m in. 42. vs.

10
9. COD 26. m isc. 43. w .p.m .

+3
10. cont 27. N B 44. Xmas

P2
11. dept 28. OHMS 45. y r.

CẤ
12. enc 29. para.

13. etc 30. PLC
A
HÓ
14. fw d 31. pp.

15. govt 32. p.p.
Í-
16. H Q 33. p.w.

-L
17. h r 34. reed.

ÁN
IV. PUNCTUATION - APOSTROPHES

TO
PU N C TU ATIO N : P unctuation is im p o rta n t because, i f you don’t use i t '

NG
correctly, people can m isunderstand. Look a t these 2 exam ples:

• Everybody said Ja ne t was crying . (Janet was cryin g )
ƯỠ
• “Everybody,” said Ja net, “was cryin g ” . (E verybody was cryin g )

ID
Below are punctuation marks in English:

(fu ll) stop, period . dash -
BỒ
comma , brackets 0
240

ƠN
question m a rk ? quotation m arks
exclam ation m a rk ! in v e rte d commas " <>
NH
colon : apostrophe ,
se m i-colon ; hyphen -
UY
APO S TR O P H E S: Apostrophes are used in several ways:
.Q
- to in d ica te le tte rs w h ich have been le ft out: don’t, flu (influenza) ’8£
TP
(1985).
( 3 to make th e p lu ra l o f a w ord w h ich n o rm a lly has no w ritte n p lu ral
O
ĐẠ
He liste n ed to m y idea, b u t brough t up a lo t o ffifs jm d b ut s.v
- to m ake p lu ra ls o f le tte rs and num bers: in th e 1590’s, tw o 1’s.
NG
- to show possessives: The e a rth ’s atm osphere, C harles’s w ife .
Iizl
HƯ
EXERCISE
ẦN
Punctuatethesesentences: TR
1. W e ll take a vote on h e r proposal and 111 count th e nos.
B
2. Live rpools bus service is b e tte r th a n birm ingh am s.
00
3. A ll th e cricke te rs m eet a t a special crickete rs evening or

10
W ednesdays a t th e local pub.

+3
4. A re you a frie n d o f hers. Ive never seen you before.

P2
5. Its engines are m ore pow erful th a n a Boeing 747s.

6. W ed m eet in the w in te r o f 83 a t James house.
CẤ
7. Im w o rrie d about m y grandfathers h ea lth . Hes had flu and hei

A
n e a rly 85.
HÓ
8. Its about tim e the fo o tb a ll club and its players d id som ething abou
its te rrib le re p uta tio n fo r violence.
Í-
-L
V. COMPOUND ADJECTIVES
ÁN
TO
NG
a lio n - hearted m an
ƯỠ
a quick - eared dog

e a rth - coloured clo th
ID
a lo ng - legged s to rk
BỒ
a near - sighted m an
an absent - m inded professor
24]
a w h ite - h a ire d woman
EXERCISE
ƠN
1. Someone w ith fa ir h a ir i s ___
NH
2. Someone who behaves w e ll i s _____ .
3. Someone w ith a stro n g w ill i s _____ .
UY
4. Someone w ith a quick tem per i s ____ .
.Q
5. Someone who w rite s w ith th e ir le ft hands is ____ .
TP
6. Someone w ith an open m in d is ____ .
7. Someone w ith blue eyes is ____ .
O
ĐẠ
VI. PHRASAL VERBS WITH KEEP
NG
- keep down (o r under): subject, repress [S]
- keep in : confine, d e ta in (ge ne ra lly separated)
HƯ
- keep in (w ith ): continue on good term s w ith
- keep out: p re ven t persons o r th in g s from e n te rin g [S]
ẦN
- keep up (w ith ): keep pace (w ith ) (lite ra lly or m e tap horica lly)
TR
EXERCISE
B
00
1. Quốc gia này ñã b ị kìm kẹp / khống chế lâu dài ñến n ỗi không a i có
khả năng ñưa ra m ộ t sự kh áng cự nào h iệ n nay.
10
2. Thầy giáo dã giam giữ tô i lạ i sau giờ học.

+3
3. Lời khuyên là bạn nên tiế p tục quan hệ tố t với ông chủ của bạn.
P2
4. Người giữ cửa ngăn không cho những người lạ vào.

CẤ
5. a) Cậu bé có chân b ị thương th ấ y khó mà theo k ịp những người còn

lạ i tro n g nhóm .
A
b) Gia ñình T a ylo r th ấ y khó theo k ịp những người hàng xóm của họ.
HÓ
VII. SUFFIXES TO FORM ADJS OF NATIONALITY

Í-
- ESE : Japanese, Chinese, Portuguese, Sudanese, Burmese,

-L
Lebanese.
ÁN
- IA N : A rg e n tin ia n , A u stra lia n , E g yp tian, B ra z ilia n , Ita lia n .

- AN : A m e rican, Venezuelan, G erm an, M exican, European.
TO
- ISH : P olish, E n g lish , T u rk ish , D anish, F in n is h .

- I : P a k ista n i, Ira q i, Is ra e li, Yem eni, Saudi
NG
- OTHERS : Czech, French, D utch, Swiss, Greed, T h a i /

ƯỠ
EXERCISE
ID
F in d n a tio n a lity adjectives fo r these countries:

BỒ
242

1. V ie tnam 11. Scotland

2. Russia 12. H ungary 'ụ
ƠN
■ u
3. S pain 13. Belgium
NH
4. Ire la n d 14. Uruguay .
UY
5. Q atar \ J 15. Cam bodia CcuiA.
6. In d ia 16. Sweden
.Q
TP
7. Singapore f c 17. M a lta
8. B rita in ị ý ỉ ^ ^ ’' 18. U.S .A I js ■
O
ĐẠ
9. L ib ya u 19. A lg e ria
10. Peru 20. N orw ay V
NG
VIII. PHRASAL VERBS WITH HOLD
HƯ
- h o l d back (in ) : re s tra in [S]
ẦN
(^ y hold fo rth : speak p u b licly
- hold on : continue, proceed
hold out : give out one’s hand TR
B
- hold up : a) raise [S]
00
b) e x h ib it, present [S]

10
c. delay [S]
+3
d. stop and rob (a carriage, a car, a tra in ) (s)

P2
EXERCISE
CẤ
1. Cô ta tìm cách kìm chế cảm xúc cho ñến k h i các khách mời ñã ñ i
kh ỏ i.
A
HÓ
2. V ị bác sĩ n ổ i tiế n g ñã n ó i chuyện vớ i m ộ t cử tọa hơn m ột tră m

chuyên gia.
Í-
3. V iệc xu ấ t khẩu bông v ả i th ô vẫ n tiế p tục n hiều năm sau chiến

-L
tra n h .
4. A nh ta ñã chìa ta y ra x in m ộ t í t tiề n .
ÁN
5. a) H ãy giơ cánh ta y tr á i của bạn lê n .

TO
b) Họ ñã nêu hà nh v i của anh ta lê n như m ộ t tấ m gương cho những

người khác.
NG
c) Xe lửa ñã b ị hoãn lạ i v ì các trậ n lụ t.

d) Bộn cưởp ñã chặn cứng chuyến xe lửa.
ƯỠ
ID
IX. ADJECTIVES WITH -1ST -AL AND -IC

- 1ST : com m unist, B ud dhist, d efe atist, fascist, n a tio n a lis t.
BỒ
243

ƠN
- AL : c rim in a l, usual, stru ctu ra l, fo rm a l, n orm al, n a tio n a l
- IC : dom estic, s c ie n tific , graphic, e nth u siastic, m agnetic,
NH
rom a ntic.
UY
EXERCISE
.Q
Make these adjectives opposite, by adding U N - IL - IN - ỈM - ĨR -.
TP
1. system ic 5. personal 9. lib e ra l
O
6. fo rm a l 10. dem ocratic
ĐẠ
2. m o ra l
7. enth usiastic
3. s c ie n tific 11. ra tio n a l
8. legal
NG
4. professional 12. usual
HƯ
X. PHRASAL VERBS WITH FALL
ẦN
fa ll back : recede, re tre a t
fa ll behind : be passed by others
fa ll behind w ith TR
: fa il to pay a sum w h ich is due
B
fa ll o ff : decrease
00
fa ll to : begin eagerly, s ta rt vigorously

10
EXERCISE
+3
P2
1. Ngay k h i ñ ạ i ñ ộ i ñịch rú t lu i, những nhà á i quốc trở về là n g của họ.

2. V ận ñộng v iê n chạy của chúng ta dường như dã b ị rớ t lạ i sau.
CẤ
3. Jones ñã không trả n ổ i những khoản th a n h toán cho cái m áy th u

tha n h và ñã p h ả i mượn tiề n .
A
HÓ
4. M ới ñầu 40 s in h v iê n ñăng k í là m h ộ i v iê n câu lạc bộ, nhưng sô này

bây giờ ñã giảm ñể c h ỉ còn 20.
Í-
5. Những th a n h n iê n chẳng bao lâu ñã háo hức ñốn cây và xây dựng
-L
m ột căn chòi.
ÁN
XI. ADVERB CLAUSES OF FUTURE TIME

TO
• They are introduced b y subo rd in a tin g conjunctions o f tim e (w h ile ,

when, as soon as, a fte r, before, u n til etc...) and a present tense, n o t
NG
a future tense, m ust be used.

ƯỠ
w h ile w a it / are w a itin g

/ have been w a itin g .
ID
w ill do it when
He you
w on’t once
BỒ
ask / have asked

u n til / have been a skin g h im to.
244
ra s soon as
ƠN
• Four pre sent tenses (sim ple pres, pres cont, pres p e rf, pres p e rf
NH
cont) can be used in tim e clauses.
EXERCISE
UY
Combine these sentences w ith the w ords in brackets.
.Q
TP
1. People w ill leave the area. P ro pe rty values w ill fa ll, (once)
2. The re a ctor w ill begin operating. I t won’t need m any w orkers,
O
ĐẠ
(w hen) ,
3. They w ill be b u ild in g the reactor. The area w ill be very busy,
NG
(w h ile )
4. They w ill be tra in in g w orkers. They w ill be b u ild in g the reactor,
HƯ
(w h ile )
ẦN
5. We w on’t know how m any the y w ill need. They w ill have fin ish e d
th e plans, (u n til)
TR
6. W e’l l be w o rrie d about accidents. The reactor w ill open, (as soon as)
7. W e’l l have p ro te st m eeting. The e nq uiry w ill begin, (im m e d ia te ly)
B
00
8. The coal m ine w ill have closed. 2,000 m en w ill be unem ployed,
10
(a fte r)
+3
P2
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 1PC

CẤ
I. SUFFIXES TO FORM ADJECTIVES OF QUALITY

A
- IC Ạ L : m usical, m agical, chem ical, lo g ical, economical

HÓ
- ORY : com pulsory, illu s o ry , co n cilia to ry, accusatory

Í-
- ARY : re vo lu tio n a ry, re actiona ry, contem porary

-L
EXERCISE
ÁN
MakeadjectivesfromthesenounSrWhichdescribeareasofknowledge:
TO
ccii . ị<M«cca' _ .
ch e m istry , geology p o litic s , a rith m e tic 1
NG
physics m edicine nrwckai b iolog y"0-1" s ta tis tic s '

ƯỠ
g e o g ra p h y ^ ^ J music c■S -' geom etry Q jotanyj

h is to ry ^ philosophy lo g icoj 'zoology ;
ID
BỒ
245
IĨ. PHRASAL VERBS WITH SEND

- send away : a) cause to go away [S]
ƠN
b) dism iss [S ]
NH
- send down : a) cause to go down [S]
UY
b) suspend or expel an undergraduate fro m a
u n iv e rs ity [S]
.Q
- send in : a) send to th e proper person o r a u th o rity [S]
TP
b) e n te r fo r a com p etition o r an e x h ib itio n [S]
O
- send o ff : dispatch [S]
ĐẠ
- send out / round :d is trib u te [S]
NG
EXERCISE
HƯ
1. Ông hiệu trưởng ñã sa th ả i / ñuổi học Hicksonu I
2. A nh ấy ñã b ị ñ ìn h c h ỉ / trụ c xu ấ t v ì h ạn h kiể m xấu.
ẦN
3. a) A nh ñã gởi ñơn x in việc chưa?
b) A nh ấy ñã gỏi (nộp) dự th i n hiều b à i thơ và m ộ t tru y ệ n ngắn.
TR
4. A nh ây ñã gởi h ế t thư từ ñ i ngày hôm qua.
B
5. Các thông tư / t r i ñã ñược phân p h á t.
00
10
III. FUTURE TENSES

+3
® There are 4 futu re tenses: sim ple futu re , futu re continuous, future
perfect and future p erfect continuous.
P2
® The sim ple future describes a fu tu re action.

CẤ
Ex: Don’t get im p a tie n t. She w ill come soon.

® The future continuous describes an action in progress a t a future tim e.
A
HÓ
Ex: Ĩ w ill be w o rk in g in th e garden w hen you come.

• The future perfect tense describes an a c tiv ity th a t w ill happen
Í-
before another tim e o r event in th e future.

-L
Ex: By 1993, I w ill have w orked fo r th is fa c to ry fo r 20 years.

• The future perfect continuous is used th e same as th e futu re perfect
ÁN
tense but the d u ra tio n o f th e a ction is em phasized.

TO
Ex: B y 1993, I w ill have been w o rk in g fo r th is factory...

NG
EXERCISE
ƯỠ
Complete these sentences w ith FOR, SINCE, BY, U NTIL

1. C a ll me back a t six. I ’l l have fin is h e d the re p o rt sCnf£- .then.
ID
2. A t C hristm as, we’l l have been liv in g here /fiy " exactly ten years.
BỒ
246

3. S orry I can’t m eet you a t 5.30. I ’l l be b u s y ____ six.

4. I won’t know the answ er sixiSl ■the post a rrive s.
ƠN
5. I ’ve had th is c a r____ 1984.
6. I ’m exhausted. I t ’s n e a rly 8, and by 8 I ’ll have been w o rk in g ____
NH
12 hours w ith o u t a break.
7. I won’t have com pleted i t ____ th is tim e n ext week.
UY
8. I hope to have th e a n s w e r_____n e xt S aturday.
.Q
IV. ADJECTIVE CLAUSES WITH WHERE
TP
• W HERE is used in an adj clause to show a place.
O
• I f W HERE is used, a p re po sitio n is no t included in the adj clause.
ĐẠ
• I f W H ER E is n o t used, a p re po sition m ust be included.
Ex: The house in w h ich we staved is h is.
NG
The house w here we stayed is h is.
HƯ
The house th a t we stayed in is his.
ẦN
EXERCISE
Join these sentences in the same w ay: TR
B
1. M y mum to ld me about a shop. She’d seen bo ttle s in the w indow .
00
2. You should look under bridges. People th ro w bottles away there.

10
3. You should look in rubbish dumps. People used to bury th e ir rubbish

+3
there.
P2
4. O ld people can rem em ber the places. People used to th ro w old

bottles away there.
CẤ
5. I never buy them fro m sp ecia list shops. Some collectors buy bottles
there.
A
HÓ
V. PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES

Í-
• S u ffix -L E S S -
-L
homeless, careless, hopeless.

• P refixes ũ ề h and D O W N -
ÁN
upsetting, uptow n, upbeat, upm arket, up-to-date

TO
dow nhearted, dow ntrodden, d o w n rig h t, dow ntow n.

• S uffixes -P R O O F and -W ID E
NG
-P R O O F means able to re sis t o r w ith stand: b ullet-pro o f, sound-

ƯỠ
- proof, w ater-proof.
(- W i d e ) gives the m eaning o f “across th e ...” : n ation-w ide , country-
ID
— wi de, w orld-w ide.

BỒ
247

Translateth is advertisement intoVietnamese, payingattentiontothe
ƠN
meaningofthewordswithUP- DOWN- PROOFand- WIDE:
NH
Flashdance Disco
UY
I f you lik e upbeat m usic in up-to-date surroundings, i f you’re
.Q
fee ling dow nhearted and you w a nt to cheer up, i f you’re fe e lin g u n rig h t.
TP
and you w a n t to rela x, then lose your troubles a t flashdance in
dow ntow n Houston.
O
ĐẠ
VI.PHRASAL VERBS WITH WORK
NG
- / w o rk .in / : introduce [S]
w ith ^ : f it in w ith
HƯ
: get rid of, get over [S ]
- w o rk up to : progress g radua lly to
ẦN
- w ork out X/' : a) p lan ca re fu lly, solve
TR
b) exhaust by w o rkin g [S]
c) produce the desired re sult.
B
00
EXERCISE
10
1. Tác giả ñó giớ i th iệ u m ột v à i n é t về chính cuộc ñời của ông ta.

+3
2. Những ý tưởng của anh ta về m ột nhà m áy mới khôn g phù hợp với
P2
những ý tưởng của các ông chủ của anh ta.

3. A nh ta lo ạ i bỏ sự tu y ệ t vọng / suy sụp tỉn h th ầ n bằng cách ñ i dạo ỗ
CẤ
m iền quê.
4. Câu chuyện tiế n dần ñến tộ t ñ ĩn h h ồ i hộp.
A
HÓ
5. a) B ạn ñã phác thảo ra cách trố n chưa? B ạn có th ể g iả i câu ñố này

không?
Í-
b) A i cũng b iế t cá i mỏ cũ này ñã b ị k h a i thá c k iệ t quệ.

-L
c) K ế hoạch của chúng ñã không m ang lạ i k ế t quả.

ÁN
VII. SOME IDIOMATIC VERBS

TO
• The exercise lacks a p o in t = The exercise has no p o in t.

is w ith o u t = The exercise is pointless.
NG
is devoid o f
ƯỠ
o We’ve run out o f flo u r

We’ve (rig h t) out o f
ID
could do w ith some

BỒ
need some

can’t do w ith o u t
ƠN
We’re sh o rt o f
NH
EXERCISE
Complete the spaces using “ could do w ith ” “ re sh o rt o f” , “ run out oP\
UY
“can’t do w ith o u t” “ lacks” :
.Q
1. Oh, no! W e ____ o f glasses. We’ve only got tw elve.
TP
2. We’ve only got th re e bottle s o f w ine. We’l l ____ w ine before nine
O
o’clock.
ĐẠ
3. A re these the o nly nuts we’ve got? I ’d b e tte r go to th e shop. We
some m ore.
NG
4. The h i-fi! I t ’s n ot w o rkin g , and y o u ____ m usic a t a p a rty !
HƯ
5. The rooms looks w rong. I t ____ som ething.
VIII. SUFFIXES -ATE, -ENT TO FORM ADJECTIVES
ẦN
- A T E : adequate, separate, ve rte b ra te, affectionate, passionate.
- TR
E N T : dependent, in te llig e n t, perm anent, m a gnifice nt, p a tie n t.
B
00
EXERCISE
Findtheadjectivesendingin-ENTand-ATEfromthefollowingnouns:
10
+3
efficiency accuracy
P2
violence m oderation
CẤ
separation innocence
A
independence obedience
HÓ
association urgency
excellence tem perance
Í-
-L
confidence presence
ÁN
IX. PHRASAL VERBS WITH CALL

TO
- c a ll fo rth : e lic it [S]

- c a ll in : a) v is it (b rie fly o r casually) b) send fo r [S]
NG
- c a ll o ff : cancel [S]
- c a ll out : shout, cry, exclaim [S ]
ƯỠ
- c a ll up : a) rem em ber, recolle ct (rare ) [S]

ID
b) summon fo r m ilita ry service [S]

c. telephone [S]
BỒ
24Í

EXERCISE
1. Kế hoạch m à anh ta ñảm n hậ n bộc lộ tấ t cả sự n h iệ t tìn h của anh
ta. ^
ƠN
2. a) Ông F ry ghé th ă m tô i k h i ông ta ñang th ă m các nhà m áy gần
NH
nhà tô i.
b) Họ tìm m ột bác sĩ ñến k h i ông bố của họ tỏ ra không có dấu hiệu
UY
bình phục nào.
3. ðôi vợ chồng trẻ ñã quyết ñ ịn h hủy ñám cưới.
.Q
4. Anh ta gọi lớn tiế n g tê n cô ta.
TP
5. Người ñàn ông già ñâ nhớ lạ i n hiều k ỉ n iệ m th ờ i còn trẻ của m ình.
O
ĐẠ
X. SEQUENCE WORDS
in a d d itio n to fin a lly
NG
fir s t
in itia lly also u ltim a te ly
HƯ
fir s t o f a ll fo llo w in g on from la s t o f a ll
ẦN
to begin w ith furth e rm o re la s t b u t n o t least
le t us begin by before to sum up
TR
second a fte r in conclusion
B
00
secondly beforehand
10
n ext a fte rw ard s

+3
then la s t
P2
subsequently la s tly
CẤ
EXERCISE
Writethecorrect sequencewordsandphrasesinthespacesprovided:
A
ĩrst of all, lastly, in adddition, when, furthermore, before/ goon,

HÓ
ifterwards,assomeofyouknow.
Í-
-L
L. ____ she was going to u n ve il a plague outside the h o sp ita l

entrance.
ÁN
I. I ’d lik e to welcome you a ll to T a dw orth Tow n H a ll.

TO
3- _____she pulled th e cord, th e plaque fe ll in to h e r head.

1- ____ we are a ll delighted th a t she was n o t seriously h u rt.
NG
>. _____I ’d lik e to apologize fo r th e in c id e n t a t th e opening o f the new

ƯỠ
hosp ital.
5- ____ I m ust say w h a t an honour it was to have h e r M ajesty n ot
ID
o nly open our new h o sp ita l, b u t also be its fir s t p a tie n t.

BỒ
Ỉ50

7. ____ she was absolu tely ch arm ing about the accident, and we w ill
be m a rkin g a new plaque.
8. ____ _ I ’d lik e to assure h e r th a t we have checked the plaque a t the
ƠN
school she is going to open a fte r lunch.
NH
XI.PAST TENSES
• B oth the sim ple past and past perfe ct can be used in the m ain
UY
clause or in the subordinate clause.
.Q
• Exam ples: M y flig h t le ft / had le ft before I a rrive d .
TP
s, ______ V, S2 V,
I a rriv e d a fte r m y flig h t le ft / had le ft.
O
S,- V, s2 v2
ĐẠ
EXERCISE
NG
Read the fo llo w in g passage, a n d p u t th e verbs in brackets in to the most
HƯ
appropriate tense.
ẦN
The Burglar Alarm
There 1. _____ (be) several b u rg la rie s in m y neighbourhood, and
TR
although m y house 2. ____ (be) p re tty sm a ll, and I haven’t got
B
a n y th in g to steal, I 3. ____ (n o t w a n t) a ll the fuss and mess o f a
00
burgla ry. So I 4. ____ (decide) to buy a b u rg la r ala rm . They 5 . ____

10
(come) in a ll shapes and sizes, fro m th e sim p le st, a sim ple, em pty red
+3
m etal box 6 . ____ (la b el) “b u rg la r a la rm ” , to elaborate system s w hich

7. (have) in fra - red and body heat sensors and a d ire ct
P2
connection to th e police sta tio n . I 8. ____ alw ays ____ (believe) in

CẤ
buying the best, and once it 9 ._____(be) in s ta lle d I 10. _____ (relax). A
few weeks la te r, w h ile I 1 1 .____ (be) a t w o rk, I 12. _____ (have) my
A
HÓ
fir s t burglary.
The police 13. ____ (w a it) fo r me w hen I 14. ____ (get) home
Í-
from w ork. F o rtu n a te ly th e b urgla rs 15. ____ (ta ke) o n ly one th in g ,

-L
m y b u rg la r a la rm system . As th e police 1 6 ____ (say) it 1 7 _______(be)

the m ost valuable th in g in th e house.
ÁN
XII. SUFFIXES TO FORM ADJECTIVES

TO
• -O U S , -IO U S : enormous, gorgeous, serious, re ligio u s, previous.

NG
• -A N , -IA N : A frica n , R epublican, P a rlia m e n ta ria n , vegetarian,

ƯỠ
C h ris tia n
• -IV E : explosive, a d m in is tra tiv e , in te n s iv e , destructive,
ID
I
BỒ
/ 251

responsive.
EXERCISE
ƠN
Make adjectives from these:
NH
Shakespeare G erm any glo ry com m unicate
UY
D ickens K in g George a m b itio n construct
.Q
K in g E dw ard Jefferson m isch ie f progress
TP
Queen V ic to ria m ystery carnivore destroy
O
S t F rancis fame zeal im press
ĐẠ
M a ch ia ve lli courage herbivore a ttra c t
NG
XIII. SOME PHRASAL VERBS WITH BE
HƯ
1. be
about to : be on the p o in t o f doing sth
2. be
a fte r : search fo r, w a nt (slang)
ẦN
3. be
fo r: be in favour o f
4. be
in : be a t home TR
5. be
o ff: a) go away (colloquial) '
B
00
b) s ta rt
c) be free from d uty
10
6. be out a) be away from home

+3
b) be no longer b u rnin g
P2
7. be over be fin ish ed

CẤ
8. be w ith support, accompany
EXERCISE
A
HÓ
1. Bệnh tậ t ập xuống anh ta k h i anh ta sắp sửa rờ i ñ i M ỹ.

2. A nh thực sự ñang tìm kiế m cái gì? T ô i ñang tìm chân lý .
Í-
3. T ô i ủng hộ kế hoạch của anh.

-L
4. A rth u r h iệ n không có ở nhà, làm ơn gọi lạ i sau.

ÁN
5. A nh hãy cút ñ i.
6. Bà già ñó bảo chúng tô i rằ ng con tra i của bà vắng nhà.
TO
7. Phần tệ n h ấ t của chuyến ñ i ñã qua (chấm dứt); chuyến ñ i dễ chịu từ

NG
bây giờ trở ñi.

8. ðừng có lo, chúng tô i sẽ ủng hộ anh tro n g cuộc ñấu tra n h cho công
ƯỠ
lý-
ID
BỒ
252

ADVANCED GRAMMAR l i e
ƠN
I. PARTICIPLES USED AS ADJECTIVES
NH
• A djectives w ith -IN G and -E D :
- IN G b o r in g , shocking, e n te rta in in g , tirin g , w o rryin g + nounJ
UY
person / o r th in g (active m eaning).
.Q
-E D : bored, shocked, pleased, unexpected, reserved + person /
TP
o r th in g (passive m eaning).
• Compound adjectives w ith -IN G and -E D o r IR E G U LA R PAST
O
ĐẠ
P A R T IC IP LE
-E D : well-behaved, w e ll-b u ilt, w ell-dressed, well-educated
NG
deep-frozen, a ir-con dition ed, dry-cleaned.
- IN G : tim e-saving, thought-provoking, fast-m oving.
HƯ
EXERCISE
ẦN
Complete the sentences w ith the p a rtic ip ia l adjectives com ing from th í
verbs in parentheses: TR
B
1. The (s te a l)___ _ je w e lry was recovered.
00
2. Success in one’s w o rk is a (s a tis fy )____ experience.

10
3. The dragon was a ( te r r ify ) ____ s ig h t fo r th e villa g e rs .

+3
4. The ( te r r ify ) ______ villa g e rs ra n fo r th e ir lives.

P2
5. I found m yse lf in an (em barrass) ____ situ a tio n la s t n ig h t.

6. A k id accidentally th re w a b a ll a t one o f th e school windows
CẤ
Someone needs to re p a ir the (b re a k )______ w indow .

A
7. A (dam age)______earthquake occurred re cently.

HÓ
8. People are s till in th e process o f re p a irin g th e m any (dam age)____

buildings and streets.
Í-
9. I elbowed m y way through the (cro w d )______ room .

-L
10. The value endures. A g ift given in love has (e n d u re )____ value.
ÁN
11. PHRASAL VERBS WITH CARRY

TO
1. ca rry away : take to a nother place, remove

NG
2. ca rry on : continue
3. c a rry on w ith : f lir t w ith (colloquial)
ƯỠ
4. ca rry out : p ut in practice

ID
5. c a rry through : accom plish in th e face o f d iffic u lty o r delay

BỒ
25c

rJ ( o
v;.'4 ■* ... EXERCISE
Xe cứu thương dã m ạng ngựời ñàn ông b ị thương ñi.
ƠN
NH
UY
.Q
® Form ation:
TP
Comp adjs o f m easurem ent = C a rd in a l num ber + sin g u la r noun
® Exam ples: a tw e lve -ce n tim e tre disc.
O
ĐẠ
a te n -d o lla r tic k e t
a te n -m in u te w a lk
NG
a 75 ce ntim etre b o ttle
HƯ
a tw elve-year-old boy a firs t-cla ss seat
ẦN
a ten-pound note a second-year student
a 250-gram packet a 19th-century table
a 6 4 -kilo b yte com puter
TR
a fifth -flo o r fla t
B
a 24-hour clock a firs t-ra te h otel
00
10
a three-piece su it
+3
EXERCISE
P2
Complete the spaces w ith a (n) and a com pound adjective of

CẤ
m easurem ent:
A
1. car 2. _____tru ck
HÓ
3. h o te l 4. _____cassette
5. m eal 6. ____ b u ild in g
Í-
7. book 8. __; flig h t

-L
9- ____ bag 10. _____ trip

ÁN
IV.PHRASAL VERBS WITH PA SS

TO
1. pass along : circu la te chuyền

2. pass aw ay: a) fade away, disappear b) die
NG
3. pass back : re tu rn [S] /

ƯỠ
4. pass by : go by
5. pass dow n: hand down [S]
ID
BỒ
254

EXERCISE ọ ị
1. Làm ơn chuyền bảng thôn g báo này. ^ ^ ■
2. a) ðám m ây ñen chẳng m ấy chốc, ta n b iến.
ƠN
b) Ô ng già ấy qua ñời (k h u ấ t n ú i) tuầ n qua.
3. H ãy trả lạ i cuốn sách k h i bạn ñọc xong.
NH
4. T ô i ñang ñ i ngang qua k h i tô i nghe tiế n g va chạm .
5. Chuyển trá i táo xuống cho tô i.
UY
.Q
V. ADJECTIVES FROM LATIN & GREEK WORDS
TP
T here are several nouns w hich have tw o corresponding adjectives,
one fo r o rd in a ry , everyday references, the o th e r fo r s c ie n tific uses. The
O
s c ie n tific vocabulary o f E n g lish is la rg e ly based on L a tin and Greek.
ĐẠ
Ex: sun - sunny - so la r
NG
(noun) (o rd in a ry adj) (s c ie n tific adj)
HƯ
EXERCISE
F in d the s c ie n tific adjectives to f i l l in the blanks.
ẦN
Noun Ordinary A djective Scientific Adjective
1. body bod ily
TR ____
B
00
2. eye eye (noun used as adj) _____

10
3. hand hand ____

+3
4. home hom ely ____

P2
5 . la w la w j / r .,,.
CẤ
6. m in d m in d ____
7. moon moon ___
A
HÓ
8. m outh m outh ____

9. n ig h t n ig h tly _____
Í-
-L
10. sea sea Q jW JjX, -

11. s ta r s ta rry ____
ÁN
12. sun sunny Calsif

TO
13. to o th to o th _____
NG
14. tow n tow n ____

15. ye ar ye a rly ___
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
255

VI. PHRASAL VERBS WITH MAKE
ƠN
1. make away : h u rry away
NH
2. make out : a) draw up a docum ent[S] b) understand
3. make over: tra n s fe r (fo rm a lly )
UY
4. make up : a) in v e n t (a sto ry, an excuse) [S]
b) a pply cosmetics.
.Q
5. make up fo r : compensate fo r
TP
EXERCISE
O
ĐẠ
1. T ron g k h i những người khác ñang cãi cọ, tô i vô i lá n h xa trẽ n chiếc
xe ñap (ñạp xe vộ i lá n h xa).
NG
2. a) Cha tô i ñang v iế t m ột ngân phiếu cho tô i mua m ộ t m áy ảnh.
HƯ
b) T ô i không thể hiể u diều anh ta dang cố gắng n ói.
3. A nh ta chuyển tấ t cả tà i sản của anh ta cho con tra i.
ẦN
4. a) A nh ta dựng nên m ột câu chuyện khó tin về k ì n g h ỉ của anh ta.
b) Sandra tra n g ñiểm rấ t cẩn th ậ n trước k h i cô ta gặp bạn tra i.
TR
5. A nh ta cố gắng h ế t sức ñể bù lạ i th iệ t h ạ i anh ta ñã làm .
B
VIL PHRASAL VERBS WITH STAND
00
10
1. stand about : stand aim lessly

2. stand by : stand near a person o r a th in g
+3
3. stand in fo r : substitute fo r
P2
4. stand out : a) be p ro m in en t b) continue to oppose, re s is t

CẤ
5. stand up fo r : support
A
EXERCISE
HÓ
1. N h iều người ñ ìn h công ñang dứng thơ th ẩ n õ góc ñường.

Í-
2. A nh ta ñứng bên cạnh nhưng th ậ m chí chẳng tìn h nguyện giúp tô i.

-L
3. Joyce có ñược cơ h ộ i lớ n k h i cô ta th a y th ế nữ d iễn v iê n ấy.

4. a) L ỗ i của anh ấy n ổ i rõ tro n g bản báo cáo.
ÁN
b) Sáu công nhân vẫn còn chống ñối th ậ m chí sau k h i m ột thỏa
thuậ n ñã ñ ạ t dược vớ i công ñoàn của họ.
TO
5. V iê n ch ỉ huy (th ủ trưởng) ủng hộ cho nhân v iê n của anh ta tro n g

NG
cuộc tra n h cãi.

ƯỠ
VIII. GENDER OF NOUNS

ID
• Sexism in words = M asculine and fem in ine nouns. There are several
ways o f m aking nouns re la te d to m en and women.
BỒ
256

M a s c u lin e F e m in in e . ' N e u tra l
ƠN
^b a ch e lo r ^sp in ste r ^
NH
^ w idow %vidower
UY
hero heroine
actor actress actor
.Q
TP
w a ite r w aitress
host hostess
O
ĐẠ
m anager manageress
prince princess
NG
duke duchess
HƯ
usher usherette
ẦN
m ale nurse fem ale nurse
m ale p a tie n t fem ale p a tie n t
d riv e r wom an d riv e r
TR
B
doctor lad y doctor
00
10
businessm an business woman businesspeople

salesman saleswoman salesperson
+3
chairw om an chairperson
P2
chairm an
<rấự^ãtẹwãr«Ị) air-stew ardess flig h t a tte n d a n t
CẤ
house husband housewife hom em aker

A
he she the y
HÓ
Exercise
Í-
F in d the fem in ine nouns fro m :

-L
1. lad 7. count
ÁN
2. uncle 8. m anservant
TO
3. horse 9. la n d lo rd
4. cock 10. h e ir
NG
5. m aster 11. boy student

ƯỠ
6. em peror 12. b rid e

ID
BỒ
257

ADVANCED GRAMMAR 12C

[. SUFFIX -ION TO FORM ABSTRACT NOUNS
ƠN
- I0 N /\'( : discuss discussion, confess confession.
NH
- TIO N : obbige o b lig a tio n , p ro h ib it p ro h ib itio n , regulate
UY
re g u la tio n
- SIO N : explode explosion, persuade persuasion, decide decision
.Q
TP
- SSION : p e rm it perm ission, a d m it adm ission, procede
procession, succeed succession.
O
ĐẠ
- VER SIO N : conver conversion, p e rve rt perversion
- A T IO N : a lte r a lte ra tio n , explore e xplo ra tio n , he sita te
NG
h e sita tio n
HƯ
- IT IO N : compete com petitio n, define d e fin itio n
- P TIO N : receive reception, deceive deception, subscribe
ẦN
su bscription , consume consum ption.
Votes:
I. -S IO N is used w ith verbs ending “-D E ”
TR
B
ì. -S S IO N is used w ith some o f th e verbs ending -D
00
Ì. -V E R S IO N is used w ith concrete nouns and verbs e n din g “-V E R T ” .

10
EXERC
EXERCISE
+3
P2
Make a bstra ct nouns froom

m these verbs:
CẤ
1. definee rlja í ' í\í.ị\5 V L .l- invade C^~cz%\6Y}

^ D L ir X " 2. recede
2. a lte r
A
f 3. oppose ....
HÓ
3. receive tỹ 4. co n trib u te ‘ (H e»^ V

4. he sita te '•-i.mto.C'teA 5. prom ote
Í-
-L
5. succeed 6* in fo rm ' ^ ’ị\Ê§ỵj

6. p e rm it ?««.,,c i a t I “ ” ? >licate T /
ÁN
n ] \ ?jr : _ ' 8. regress

7. explode ỹ m anipu late ựVâ,
TO
8. confess J 10. segregate V ,.

NG
9. regulate Ị^ s ịtu ạ te
ƯỠ
10. convert
11. decide 4c I3 7 re ia x
ID
BỒ
Ỉ58

12. explore 14. te m p t

13. subscribe 15. consider
ƠN
14. compete .'y
NH
15. a d m it ^ C '^ c
UY
II. PHRASAL VERBS WITH SET '4 ịff '
1. s e t a s id e (o r by) : p u t OĨ1 one sid e fo r u se la te r .
.Q
TP
2. set back : put back, stop th e progress o f a person o r th in g .
3. set down as : consider, reckon (ge ne ra lly separated)
O
ĐẠ
4. set fo rth : a) s ta rt on a jo u rn e y b) expound (s)
5. set up : erect
NG
EXERCISE
HƯ
1. Cô ta cấ t quần áo mùa ñông và lấ y ra những áo ñầm mùa hè.
ẦN
2. T ô i sẽ c h ỉn h lạ i ñồng hồ của tô i 5 phút.
3. T ô i coi anh ta như là võ sĩ quyền A nh chuyên nghiệp.
4. a) C húng tô i kh ở i hàn h lú c rạ n g ñông. TR
B
b) T h ầ y giáo khoa học của chúng tô i g iảng rõ nguyên tắc trọ n g lực
00
cho cả lớp.
10
5. Các hướng ñạo sin h nhanh chóng dựng những chiếc lều lên.
+3
III. SUFFIXES TO FORM NOUNS

P2
Nouns ending in -T Y , -IT Y , -IE T Y

CẤ
-T Y : p ity , beauty, d iffic u lty , cru e lty, lib e rty , duty

-IT Y : e q u a lity, s tu p id ity , g ra v ity , a u th o rity , m a jo rity , v a n ity
A
-IE T Y : a nxie ty, society, v a rie ty , so briety, gaiety, n o to rie ty

HÓ
EXERCISE
Í-
-L
Make nouns fro m these adjectives:

ÁN
1. b ea u tifu l 16. possible

TO
2. p itifu l 17. sane

3. grave 18. tra n q u il
NG
4. social 19. m odest

ƯỠ
5. va rie d 20. cruel

ID
6. anxious 21. anxious

BỒ
259

7. gay 22. certain
ƠN
8. va in 23. generous
NH
9. stupid 24. capable
UY
1 0 .sober 25. royal
11. equal 26. m in o r
.Q
12. notorious 27. able
TP
13. d iffic u lt 28. probable
O
ĐẠ
14. d u tifu l 29. loyal
15. m ajor 30. obscene
NG
IV. LANGUAGE STUDY
HƯ
Somepatternsofquestionshavingthesamemeaning:
ẦN
W hat do you mean by that? W hat’s wrong?
I don’t see your p oint. TR W hat’s the m atter?
B
W hat exactly are you try in g to say? W hat’s the trouble?
00
W hat precisely are you g e ttin g at? W hat’s the problem ?

10
W hat p o in t are you try in g to make? W hat’s happened?

+3
W hat’s going on?

P2
W hat’s a ll the fuss about?

CẤ
EXERCISE
A
Completethisconversation.Someofthephrasesarettttheabovelist:
HÓ
Í-
Robbie : D a rlin g ! W hat’s (1) ?

-L
M elanie : I t ’s n oth in g . Ju st, som ething in m y eye.

Robbie : You’re crying. Come on, te ll me (2 ) ____
ÁN
M elanie : I t is n ’t ( 3 )____ . R eally.

TO
Robbie : I t m ust be (4) _ W hy won’t you (5) _

M elanie : I t ’s ju s t T L . S om ething he ( 6 ) ___
NG
Robbie : W hat ( 7 ) _____ say?

M elanie : Oh, Robbie, i f there was a secret, som ething I ’d never
ƯỠ
to ld you, could you forgive me?

ID
Robbie : W hat ( 8 ) ____ ?

M elanie : You re a lly don’t know w h a t (9) ?
BỒ
Robbie : No.
260
M elanie : Then > ask your b ro th e r. He’l l te ll you soon enough,
ƠN
anyway!
NH
V. SUFFIX -MENT TO FORM NOUNS
UY
Nouns with -MENT:
• -M E N T is usually added to a verb.
.Q
• Exam ples: amuse amusem ent, argue argum ent, em barrass
TP
embarrassment.
O
ĐẠ
EXERCISE
Completethesesentenceswithnounsendingin-MENT:
NG
1. The th ea tre lig h ts w e n t dow n, th e m usic came up, the audience
HƯ
w aited w ith ____ .
2. Suddenly there was a ro ll o f drum s, and the audience w ere fu ll oi
ẦN
when the fir s t dancer descended from the a ir on a w ire.
TR
3. The background was a b ea u tifu l _____o f p ainte d m irro rs.
4. Suddenly the dancer stopped m oving. She was stuck in the a ir. T h í
B
00
audience reacted with Some of them began to laugh.

10
5. “H e]p, I ’m stuck]” Shouted th e dancer, the n h e r dress began to tear

She w e nt red w ith ____ .
+3
6. “G et me down” she yelled. We could hear th e producer shouting a t £

P2
stage-hand. They had a terrible

CẤ
7. T h e ____ fo r the show had said “a e ria l b a lle t.”

8. The show had to stop. I t was a g re a t____ fo r everyone.
A
HÓ
VL PHRASAL VERBS WITH SEE

1. see in : welcome in (ge ne ra lly separated)
Í-
2 /s e e o w \ : accompany a person to the door (genera lly separated)

-L
S LG
3 \s e e 00 / : accompany a person to the point of departure

ÁN
(generally separated)
4. see through : ensure th a t a ta sk is com pleted
TO
5. see about : to inve stigate

NG
EXERCISE
ƯỠ
1. T ấ t cả họ chờ ñể ñón năm m ới ñến. Ị

2. Tôi ñã tiễn các bạn tôi ở nhà ga. s^ <ỊrìPnơ$
ID
3. Làm ơn ñừng p hiền tiễ n tô i ra cửa, tô i có th ể dễ dàng th â y ñườni

BỒ
^ 'í ì
w ; m'nj ỗíemñ: me.,, aj: \

c' J 26:
M ộ t k h i anh ta ñã b ắ t ñầu xem x é t v ấ n ñề ấy, anh ta quyết tâm

làm cho xong.
Công an ñã ñiều tra vụ cướp ngân hàng năm ngoái.
ƠN
I. FORMS OF ADDRESS
NH
mal forms of address Informal forms of address
UY
ỉir / Madam: shop assistants to Love - women to women
.Q
customers, not to a stranger politely Dear - to strangers in a friendly
TP
used in letters. Darlin why
.adies / Gentlemen: to audience, on
O
íĩiMPPthpart ► - shopkeepers to customers
ĐẠ
toilet doors, Gentlemen replaces of the opposite sex or to
Dear Sirs in Am, business letters My love children.
NG
ầy lord: to a lord, ã bishop, a judge Dearie
J
HƯ
Your Honor: to American judges
Chum '
Your Excellency: to ambassadors or
ẦN
high government officials Mate men to men
Mr President: to presidents TR
Friend
Your Majesty: to the Queen Pal
B
.
00
Your Highness: to royal princes or

10
princesses. Old man

Old chap
+3
Faiftsr: to catholic priests in literary texts

P2
Vic It: to Anglican priests Old follow

Old bean
CẤ
d
Minister: to protestant priests Note: All of the above forms can be
A
Captain, Major: for military ranks offensive if used at the wrong time,
HÓ
with the wrong tone of voice. None of

Captain: to pilots, ship captains
these would be considered polite.
Í-
Doctor, Nurse, Sister, Matron,

-L
Operator, Officer, Constable: job

titles can be used as forms of
ÁN
address. Waiter and Driver are

TO
possible, but might be thought rude

if said wrongly, other job titles are
NG
not used as forms of address. /

ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
162
V

VIII. SUFFIX -NESS TO FORM ABSTRACT NOUNS

• Exam ples: sadness, business, kindness, happiness, usefulness
ƠN
carelessness, carefulness, hopelessness, s illin e s s
N o te : A djectives end in g in -F U L and -L E S S fre q u e n tly form abstract
NH
nouns w ith -N E S S
UY
EXERCISE
.Q
M ake nouns fro m these adjectives.
TP
1. ready 6. se lfish 11. helpless
O
7. nervous
ĐẠ
2. frie n d ly 12. thoughtless
8. s lim
3. g re a t 9. th o u g h tfu l 13. useless
NG
4. d u ll 10. h e lp fu l 14. harm less
HƯ
5. mean 15. shapeless
ẦN
IX, PHRASAL VERBS WITH GIVE
1. give back : re tu rn a th in g to its ow ner.
2. give in
TR
: a) hand books, papers etc to th e prope r person o r
B
a u th o rity . (W õn -vcưva cò *^3 £uxbfl'ú<j~
00
b) surre nd er, y ie ld .
10
3. give o ff / out : e m it (g e n e ra lly n o t saparated w ith a noun).

+3
4. give out : d is trib u te [S ]

P2
5. give up to : devote oneself to

CẤ
EXERCISE
1. A n h p h ả i trả lạ i cuốn sách ngay lậ p tức.
A
HÓ
2. N ộp b à i th i của bạn bây giờ.

3. C h ấ t lỏ n g ấy tỏa ra m ộ t m ù i nồng nặc (stro n g sm ell).
Í-
4. A i sẽ giú p tô i p h á t sách?
-L
5. Ca sĩ n ày công h iế n cho việ c n g h iê n cứu sâu về Shakespeare.

ÁN
X. PUNCTUATION - CAPITALIZATION
TO
CAPITAL LETTERS ARE USED:

NG
1. To b egin a sen tence: She bought the machine. It didn’t work.

2. For the names of people, places, things* and dates. Queen
ƯỠ
E liza b e th , The Pope, B ra z il, B arcelona, The P a cific Ocean, The

ID
Tow n H a ll, M onday, F ebruary 3 rd .

BỒ
263

3. For nam es com ing from proper nouns: Elizabeth ->
ƠN
E lizabethan; S pain -> Spanish; England -> E ng lish
4. In itia ls , in names and the names o f organizations. John F Kennedy,
NH
U N IC E F
UY
5. The m ain words in the title o f a book o r play. L ife on E a rth . The
re tu rn o f the k in g .
.Q
6. A t the b eg in n ing o f s.o’s spoken w ords, even i f the sentence has
TP
been started : The P rim e M in is te r said, “Please come in ” .
7. F o r p a rtic u la r people and th in g s only: New Y ork C ity , G eneral
O
ĐẠ
D aniel James.
NG
EXERCISE
Changesmallletterstocapitalswheretheyneedtobechanged:
HƯ
1. Have you read “a passage to India?” I t ’s by e.m fo rste r.
ẦN
2. I liste n ed to a lo t o f professors a t u n iv e rsity , and professor d.j.
TR
freem an, fro m the u n iv e rs ity o f sussex, was the m ost in te re stin g .
He’s an expert on Ita lia n h isto ry .
B
3. In A rg e n tin a , people have th e ir sum m er holidays in January.
00
4. The Spanish fo o tb a ll team w ill be p la yin g against Scotland in

10
glasgow n e xt m arch, gonzalez is th e ir best player.

+3
5. I once saw “H a m le t, prince o f D enm ark” on BBC tele visio n , i t was

P2
the famous Russian version.

CẤ
XL SENTENCE TRANSFORMATION
® A lthough he was frie n d ly , I d id n ’t lik e h im .
A
HÓ
In sp ite o f h is frie n d lin e ss , I d id n ’t lik e h im .

e N o te s : A fte r A LTH O U G H , we use a clause.
Í-
A fte r IN S PITE O F, we use a noun phrase.

-L
EXERCISE
ÁN
Transformthesesentencesinthesameway:
TO
1. A lthough we’re nervous, we’re going to do it.

NG
2. A lthough he’s se lfish , he’s n o t re a lly mean.

3. A lthough he’s ta ll, he wasn’t able to reach it.
ƯỠ
4. A lthou gh she’s happy, she ke p t on cryin g .

ID
5. A ltho u gh they’re sad, th e y never stop s m ilin g .

6. A ltho u gh i t was d u ll, I d id n ’t get bored.
BỒ
7. A lthough she was k in d , I d id n ’t p a rtic u la rly lik e her.
264

8. A ltho ugh he was h e lp fu l, I d id n ’t say, “th a n k you” .
ƠN
9. A lthough it ’s harm less, I w ouldn’t eat it.
NH
10. A lthough it ’s useless, I d id n ’t th ro w it away.
UY
.Q
TP
I. SUFFIXES TO FORM NOUNS
O
Nouns w ith -A N C E -E N C E -A N C Y -E N C Y
ĐẠ
-A N C E : rom ance, finance, perform ance, nuisance, substance
NG
-E N C E : violence, absence, silence, conference, innocence
HƯ
-A N C Y : accountancy, pregnancy, vagrancy, tru an cy, buoyancy
-E N C Y : efficiency, currency, fluency, agency, emergency
ẦN
EXERCISES
Makenounsendingwith-ENCEfromthesewords: TR
B
00
1 re fe r 5. tra n s fe r 9. p a tie n t 13. innocent

10
2^ confer 6. coincide 10. absent 14. eloquent

7. depend ,- __ ,
+3
3. p re fe r ‘ 11. perm anent 15. v io le n t

P2
4. in te rfe re ■corespond 12. m a gnifice nt 16. s ile n t

Makenounsendingwith-ANCEfromthesewords:
CẤ
A
1. perform 10. ra d ia n t
HÓ
2. a d m it 11. d e fia n t
Í-
3. to lorate 12. dom inant

-L
4. appear 13. luxurious

ÁN
5. disappear 14. in p o rta n t

6. accept 15. rom an tic
TO
7. annoy 16. p e rsista n t

NG
8. re s is t 17. re le van t
ƯỠ
9. arrog an t 18. annoying

Completethespaceswithnounsendingin-ANCYor-ENCY:
ID
1. _____n o rm a lly la s t n in e m onths. -

BỒ
2. I f you go to T ra v e l_____they can change your tic k e t.
2<
The yen is th e _____o f Japan.

In a n ____ you should d ia l 999.
ƠN
i. He s tu d ie d ____ fo r s ix years before becom ing an accountant.
j. The new boss is ve ry keen on _____.
NH
1. PHRASAL VERBS WITH CUT
UY
. cut down : a) fe ll [S ] b) reduce [S ]
.Q
cut o ff : a) separate by c u ttin g [S ] b) disconnect [S ] c) k ill o r
TP
seriously in ju re (g e n e ra lly used in th e passive)
5. cut out : a) rem ove by c u ttin g [S ] b) cut paper, c lo th etc in to a
O
sm a lle r, desired shape
ĐẠ
t. cut out fo r: have th e desired q u a litie s fo r; be suitable fo r
NG
>. cut up : cut in to pieces
HƯ
EXERCISE
L. a) Những người thợ ñốn gô (lu m b e ija cks) ñã ñốn cây sồi ñồ sộ
ẦN
(huge) ñó.
TR
b. Bạn p h ả i cố gắng cắ t giảm ch i p h í trô n g coi nhà cửa (house-
keeping b ill).
B
2. a) Cô ta cắ t m ột m iếng bánh nhỏ và ñưa cho tô i.
00
b) N hân v iê n ñ iệ n th o ạ i cắ t ngang sự liê n lạ c của chúng tô i giữa

10
cuộc ñiện ñàm.

+3
c) A nh ta m ấ t ñang tu ổ i th a n h xuân (in th e p rim e o f life ).

P2
3. a) A nh có p h ả i là người dã cắ t bỏ bức ả nh n à y không?

b) Thợ m ay quần áo nữ ñã cắ t m ộ t cái vá y cho cô bé này.
CẤ
4. A nh ta có phẩm ch ấ t của m ộ t giáo v iê n (anh ta th íc h hợp là m giáo

A
viên).
HÓ
5. Bà B row n cắ t cái bánh n g ọ t và ñưa cho m ỗi ñứa chúng tô i m ột

m iếng.
Í-
-L
III. LANGUAGE STUDY: WAYS OF EXPRESSING THE

ÁN
PURPOSE
TO
Q uestions A n sw ers
W hat’s i t for? I t ’s fo r...
NG
W hat does i t do? I t ’s fo r doing...

ƯỠ
W hat’s i t supposed / m eant to do? I t ’s used for...

ID
W hat do you do w ith it? I use i t fo r...

BỒ
S66

W hat’s th e purpose o f it? I use i t soth a t I can.

How does i t w ork? I use i t in order to...
ƠN
EXERCISE
NH
Look a t the purpose o f each o f the fo llo w in g gadgets and LMSwer th is
UY
question: W hat does i t do? ĩề’s used fo r...
.Q
1. F a cia l sauna : to re lie ve th e discom forts o f nasal congestion
TP
(n g hẹ t m ũ i) í 1
2. N a il brush : beauty tre a tm e n t
O
3. Soap ho ld e r : to keep yo ur soap d ry
ĐẠ
4. Foot care system : to re lie ve tire d acHIng feet
NG
5. A ir p u rifie r : to give out fre sh e r a ir
6. B a tte ry operated autom atic toothbrush : to b e tte r d en tal h ea lth
HƯ
IV.SUMMARY OF PHRASAL VERBS & WORD STUDY
ẦN
Below is th e in dex o f th e tw o w o rd verbs and w ord b u ild in g you
have learnt. TR
In this part, you’ll have the complete index of all the phrasal verbs
B
and word formation presented in the previous parts.
00
10
Number Phrasal Word Formation

Verb
+3
P2
1 took Prefixes and Suffixes

CẤ
2 Adjectives: UN-
A
3 Adjectives: iN -
HÓ
4 Adjectives: IL- IR- IM-

Í-
5 look Adjectives and Nouns N O N -, NOT

-L
6 come Adjectives and i'ouns D IS -

ÁN
7 go Adjectives and Nouns M IS -

TO
8 ran DIS- NON- NOT IN- MS-IL- IM- IR-

NG
r\
turn Adjectives Formation - Y - L Y
ƯỠ
10 get Adjective Formation - like, style - type

ID
11 take Adj Formation -A B L E , -IB L E

BỒ
267

ƠN
12 bring Adjectives -LESS -FUL
NH
13 put Adjectives -ISH
14 keep Apostrophes - ‘s -s ’
UY
15 hold Nationality adjs -AN -IAN -ESE -ISH, -I
.Q
TP
16 fall Adjectives -1ST -AL -1C —ISTIC
O
17 send Adjectives -ARY -ORY -ICAL
ĐẠ
18 work Adjs, Nouns & Verbs -LESS UP- DOWN- -PROOF -WIDE
NG
19 call Adjs-ATE-ENT
HƯ
20 be Adjs -ous -AN -IVE
ẦN
21 carry Adjs & Compound adjs -ING -ED
22 pass Measurement adjs: a three-minute walk
TR
23 make Scientific adjs: sunny, solar; compound nouns: eyelid, eye-
B
00
strain
10
24 stand Masculine & feminine -man -Sion -ssion -ette -person

+3
25 set Nouns -tion -woman -ess -version

P2
26 pull Nouns -TY -ITY -IETY

CẤ
27 see Nouns -MENT

A
28 give Nouns -NESS

HÓ
29 cut Nouns -ANCE -ENCE -ANCY -ENCY

Í-
-L
30 do and let Nouns -y -ie -acy -archy

ÁN
V. PHRASAL VERBS WITH DO AND LET

TO
1. do away w ith : rem ove, destroy, abolish

2. do up : tid y , p u t in o rd er
NG
3. do down : cheat, get th e b e tte r o f (slang)

ƯỠ
4. le t down : disa pp o int o r fa il (a person)

5. le t in : a dm it, a llo w to e n te r
ID
6. le t oneself in fo r : in vo lve oneself in a d iffic u lty [S ]

7. le t o ff: explode
BỒ
8. le t out : disclose
268
EXERCISE
ƠN
1. George là m bạn anh ta th ấ t vọng ê chề k h i anh ta từ chối cho bạn
NH
anh mượn tiề n .
2. N h iề u khách không dược m ời ñược phép vào.
UY
3. N hiều ngựời A n h ñ ố t pháo bông vào ngày 5-11.
.Q
4. T ạ i sao anh không tiế t lộ b í m ậ t ấy?
5. N ền văn m in h h iệ n d ạ i của chúng ta cuối cùng ñã xóa bỏ sự nô lệ.
TP
6. T ay con buôn quỉ quyệt ñã lừa tô i k h i h ắn ta bán chiếc xe ñạp nà}
O
cho tô i.
ĐẠ
7. G ia n h â n của ông ta ñã xếp ñ ặ t nhà cửa gọn ghẽ tro n g k h i ông tc
ñ i vắng.
NG
8. T ô i ñã không b iế t cái mà tô i vướng vào k h i tô i hứa là m công việ(
HƯ
ñó.
ẦN
VI. NOUNS WITH -Y -ACY -ARCHY
-Y : honesly, jealousy, harm ony, comedy, tragedy
-A C Y
TR
: democracy, diplom acy, supremacy, obstinacy, autocracy
B
-A R C H Y : m onarchy, anarchy, h ie ra rc h y
00
-Y : baby, aunty, nappy, n ig h ty , granny

10
- IE : b ird ie , budgie, doggie, m ovie, cookie

+3
N o te : - Y and - I E can be used to m ake a w ord sound affectionate o

P2
c h ild is h . Some o f these words can be found w ith e ith e r sp e llin g •

Y o r - IE , such as doggie / doggy; budgy / budgie.
CẤ
EXERCISES
A
HÓ
Make a bstra ct nouns from these words:

Í-
11. p itifu l
-L
12. riv a l
ÁN
13. h ila rio u s

14. h is to ric
TO
4. a n a rch ist 10. harm onious

5. d ip lo m at 15. geographic
NG
Make affectio na te versions o f these m u m w ith - Y o r -IE :

ƯỠ
1. horse 7. budgerigar
ID
2. aunt 8. dog
BỒ
3. grandm other 9. k itte n

4. n a p k in 10. n ightdress
5. sweet 11. pot
ƠN
6. b ird 12. pinafo re
NH
1L SUFFIX -ILITY TO FORM NOUNS
UY
Nouns ending in -A B IL IT Y and -IB IL IT Y ofte n come fro m
.Q
A djectives ending in -A B L E -IB L E
TP
Exam ples: probable -» p ro b a b ility
O
v is ib le -> v is ib ility
ĐẠ
EXERCISE
NG
orm nouns from these adjectives:
HƯ
1. possible 6. audible
ẦN
2. le g ib le 7. credible
3. able TR
8. desirable
B
4. respectable 9. fle x ib le
00
5. capable 10. im possible

10
+3
ĨL PHRASAL VERBS WITH CATCH AND DROP

P2
catch up on : b rin g up to date (Colloquial)

CẤ
catch up w ith : become le ve l w ith

drop in a t : v is it casually (a place)
A
HÓ
drop o ff : a) fa ll down b) fa ll asleep

Í-
drop in on : v is it casually (a person)

-L
EXERCISE
ÁN
T ô i p hả i cập n h ậ t hóa việ c ñọc sách của tô i.

TO
M ặc dầu cậu học sin h vắ ng m ộ t khóa học 3 th á n g (te rm ), nhưng

chẳng bao lâ u cậu ta ñã b ắ t k ịp những người khác.
NG
H ãy ghé nhà chúng tô i b ấ t cứ k h i nào anh có m ặ t ở huyện.

a) Vào mùa th u lá cây b ắ t ñầu rụng.
ƯỠ
b) N hiều người lă n ra ngủ tro n g buổi d iễ n th u y ế t lâ ụ giờ.

ID
H ãy ghé thă m chúng tô i k h i bạn th ă m Luân ð ôn lầ n tớ i.

BỒ

IX. SUFFIXES TO FORM NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES

Nouns and adjs ending in -1S T , -IS M -IV E
ƠN
• Exam ples:
-1S T : so cia list, ra c ist, M a rx is t, m o narchist, G a u llis t
NH
-IS M : socialism , racism , M a rxism , m onarchism , G aullism
-IV E : m a n ipu la tive , supportive, p reven tive , assertive
UY
• N o te : W ords ending in -1S T can be adjs o r nouns; w ords ending in
.Q
-IS M are usually nouns and w ords ending in -IV E are usually
TP
adjectives.
O
EXERCISES
ĐẠ
W rite down w h a t these people believe in o r fo llo w :
NG
1. a com m unist 6. a m o n e ta rist
HƯ
2. a p a c ifis t 7. a M a rx is t
3. a s o cia list 8. a F ascist
ẦN
4. a L e n in is t 9. a M a o ist
5. a S ta lin is t 10. a B u d d hist
Make adjectives fro m these verbs:
TR
B
00
1. p re ve nt 2. suggest
10
3. m an ipu la te 4. support
5. assert 6. depress
+3
P2
X. PHRASAL VERBS WITH DRAW AND LAY

CẤ
1. draw in : become sh o rte r

2. draw out : become longer
A
3. draw up : compose a document

HÓ
4. la y by / aside : save up [S]

Í-
5. la y down : stop fig h tin g [S]

-L
6. la y o ff : discharge (usually te m p o ra rily ) [ S ] ;

7. la y on : supply (gas, e le c tric ity etc) [S]
ÁN
8. la y out : arrange
TO
EXERCISE
NG
1. N gày ñang trở nên ngắn hơn vì mùa ñông ñang ñến gần.
2. K h i mùa hè ñến gần, ngày b ắ t ñầu trở nên d à i hơn.
ƯỠ
3. Ô ng chủ ñ ấ t th ảo m ột hợp ñồng thuê ñ ấ t hôm qua.

ID
4. A nh ta có m ộ t m ón tiề n lớn ñể dành cho lúc anh ta về hưu.

BỒ
271

5. Những kẻ phản loạn hạ vũ k h í và ñầu hàng.
ƠN
6. N h iề u người thợ dã b ị sa th ả i tro n g cuộc khủng hoảng h iệ n nay.
NH
7. ð iệ n không ñược cung cấp ở căn nhà m ới, tu y n h iê n , công ty ñã
cung cấp nước.
UY
8. T ên ñầy tớ ñã sắp xếp quần áo của ông chủ sẵn sàng cho buổi kh iê u
vũ có tín h n g h i ửiức (tra n g trọ n g ).
.Q
TP
XI. PUNCTUATION: THE COMMA
O
Commas are used
ĐẠ
- to separate item s in a lis t. You do n o t need a comma before A N D
- to separate phrases
NG
- before and a fte r a n yth in g th a t in te rru p ts the sentence
HƯ
- before and a fte r a p a rt o f th e sentences w h ich gives more
in fo rm a tio n about the subject
ẦN
- a fte r a dve rb ia l phrases and clauses, and phrases w/o a verb th a t
come before the m a in verb
- TR
to separate m ain clauses jo in e d b y a conjunction
B
- a fte r w ords lik e YES, NO and T H A N K YO U
00
- before tag-questions
10
- to break up num bers in to groups. Don’t use commas fo r dates (1986)

o r fo r decim als
+3
- in d ire c t speech
P2
- a fte r names o r sh o rt phrases a t th e beg inn ing o f sentences

CẤ
- a fte r adverbs, and words lik e HO W EVER, NE VER TH ELESS a t th e

s ta rt o f a sentence.
A
HÓ
EXERCISE
P ut commas in to these sentences where necessary:
Í-
-L
1. “No, I ’ve never m et h im ” he said. -

2. The men who came fro m E nglan d wore fo rm a l ja cke ts w h ite s h irts
ÁN
black shoes and bow tie s.

TO
3. “ A nd I ’d also lik e some cheese a packet o f b iscu it 250 gram s o f

b u tte r and a b o ttle o f w ine.”
NG
4. H is car w hich he bought te n years ago has done n e a rly 250.000

kilo m e tre s.
ƯỠ
5. The best m eal in th e re sta u ra n t fille t steak in cream sauce is also

ID
th e m ost expensive.
6. She’s ve ry fond o f sw im m ing ly in g on the beach w a te r a k iin g
BỒ
272

reading books and sunbathing.
ƠN
7. K athleen had alw ays hoped to v is it Ire la n d b u t had never had the
NH
tim e fo r a holiday.
8. I w a n t to question h im about th is £10000 contra ct he’s been ta lk in g
UY
about.
.Q
TP
O
ĐẠ
I. SUFFIXES TO FORM NOUNS
Nouns ending in -O R -O U R -U R E
NG
-O R : agent nouns usually use the -O R ending: actor, doctor, food
HƯ
processor
N o te : a bstract nouns w ith -O R : e rro r, h o rro r, te rro r, trem or
ẦN
-O U R : ab stract nouns usually use the —OUR ending: honour, labour,
behaviour, hum our, glam our, fla vo u r
TR
N o te : In A m erican E ng lish , -O U R n e a rly always become -O R
B
-U R E : nature, measure, closure, tem perature, adventure, pleasure,
00
pressure, treasure, gesture, leisure

10
EXERCISE
+3
Completethesentencesusingthewordsyouhavejustlearnt:
P2
CẤ
1. B ritis h A irw a ys announce th e ____ o f flig h t B A 172 to M adrid.

2. He lik e s to w atch film s lik e D racula, in h is ____ tim e.
A
3. The E a r th _____ shook the house. W e fe lt r e a l_____ to experience

HÓ
the pow er o f____________a t such close quarters.

4. The isobar is a ____ o f b a ro m e tric _____ .
Í-
5. I lik e ____ stones, you know , ones about p ira te _____ and desert
-L
islands.
ÁN
6. Oh, p in k ice cream ! I hate t h e ____ b u t when I eat it, I lik e the
s tra w b e rry ____ .
TO
II. PHRASAL VERBS A - E

NG
add up b u ild up
ƯỠ
ask out clea r up

ID
beat up close down

BỒ
blow out dress up
27Ỉ

blow up end up
book up
ƠN
brush up
EXERCISE
NH
M atch th e sentences in Colum n A w ith the explanations in Colum n B , by
UY
w ritin g the num ber o f th e sentences in the a ppropriate boxes:
.Q
Column A Column B
TP
1. I asked her out a. It punctured and burst.
O
2. I’ll clear up b. He’s gradually developed it.
ĐẠ
3. It doesn’t add up c. You should reserve seats in advance.
4. The bomb blew up d. The figures are not correct or I don’t
NG
understand it.
HƯ
5. Children love dressing up e. There’s a mess. I’ll tidy the mess.
6. Someone beat him up. f. The result of his behaviour will one day be
ẦN
He was in hospital for 2 days. prison.
7. He’ll end up in prison. g. He was hit, kicked and punched badly.
8. I’m trying to brash up my German. TR
h. They like putting on different clothes and
costumes.
B
00
9. It’s closed down. i. I invited her to go out with me.

10. My tyre suddenly blew out at 75 k. It exploded.
10
mph!
+3
11. He’s built up a good business. 1.1 wish to improve my German.

P2
12. His concerts are very popular. ID. It’s closed completely and permanently.
You’ll have book up.
CẤ
III. EXPRESSIONS INDICATING CERTAINTY, BELIEF/

A
HÓ
DOUBT, UNCERTAINTY AND TRUTH

Expressions of certainty or belief:
Í-
-L
s u re -
1. I ’m ce rtain ... 2. I t ’s obvious...
ÁN
convinced... ce rta in...

TO
know ... doubt...

3. I don’t doubt...4. There’s no question...
NG
have no d o u b t- dispute...
ƯỠ
bound
S. I t ’s sure — to happen
ID
ce rta in
BỒ
274

6. It must...
m ust be...
ƠN
m ust have been...
NH
can’t ...
UY
can’t be...
.Q
can’t have been...
TP
7. W ith o u t doubt...
No doubt...
O
ĐẠ
Doubtless...
I believe...
NG
I t ’s m y b e lie f...
HƯ
Expressions of doubt or uncertainty:
1. I ------------ don’t know ...
ẦN
am n o t sure / ce rta in / convinced...
TR
doubt i f / w hether...
B
00
doubt / suspect / m is tru s t / question / dispute...

10
am unsure / unce rta in ...

+3
P2
2. There are some doubts

CẤ
is some doubt
Expressions of truth:
A
HÓ
to te ll th e tru th ... in re a lity ... in p o in t o f fa c t-

in fact... as a m a tte r o f fa ct...
Í-
-L
in tru th ... in actual fact...

ÁN
IV. SUFFIXES TO FORM NOUNS

TO
-H O O D : neighbourhood, m otherhood, m anhood, priesthood,

nationhood (= th e state o f b eing sth )
NG
-D O M : kingdom , stardom , o fficia ld om , serfdom , earldom , w isdom ,

freedom , boredom .
ƯỠ
-S H IP : frie n d s h ip , re la tio n s h ip , ow nership, consorship,

* sportsm anship (= the state o f being sth ), scholarship,
ID
fe llo w sh ip , professorship.
BỒ
275

EXERCISE
ƠN
Makeabstractnounsfromthesenounsbyadding-HOOD:
NH
1. fa th e r 2. boy
UY
3. m other 4. c h ild
.Q
5. w idow 6. p a re n t
TP
7. b ro th e r 8. k n ig h t
Filltitthespaceswithwordsendingin-SHIP:
O
ĐẠ
1. W h a t a b e a u tifu l ch a ir! I t ’s 18th century and you can see how good
th e ____ was in those days.
NG
2. A fte r th e goalkeeper came round, he got up and shook hands w ith
HƯ
the fo rw a rd who had knocked h im out. The crow d applauded his
ẦN
3. I ’ve know n h im w e ll fo r te n years, and I ve ry much value h is ____ .
4. Is she h is aun t o r h is cousin? I ’m n o t sure o f th e ir ____ .
5. I t ’s m ine, even though I can’t prove m y ____ o f it.
TR
Somewordsendingin-DOMhavebeenmissedoutofthesesentences.
B
00
Fillineachspacewiththeappropriateword:
10
1. M ich a el Jackson a chieved ____ a t an e a rly age.

+3
2. The ow l is famous fo r it s ____ .

P2
3. ____ am ong teenagers is th e reason fo r a lo t o f vandalism .

CẤ
4. W illia m T e ll fought f o r ____ fo r S w itze rlan d.

5. M y passport says “The U n ite d ____ o f G reat B rita in and N o rth e rn
A
Isla n d ."
HÓ
V. PHRASAL VERBS F-M

Í-
■ ■ s . * t-" V " '. p

-L
fed up pJigrow up x®'-' ! hang on liv e in J

f i l l in r .hand in vv1^ la s t out lock-up
ÁN
fin is h o ff c hand out laugh o ff ' ' m iss out 'fị/\Ẫ

TO
fo llo w up hang about / around liv e down m ix up ịỵ íh '3

NG
dao
EXERCISE
ƯỠ
Completethesentenỉạạss
ID
1. A fte r th e ir ship sank, th e y o n ly had a little food, b u t th e y made it

BỒ
____ _ out fo r 15 days.

2. The police caught h im . I hope th e y ____ h im up and th ro w away
276
the key. *
ƠN
3. Someone’s o ff the m ilk ! N ow , 1*11 have to have black coffee.
NH
4. I t was a te rrib le scandal. I t w ill take h e r years t o _i t down.
5. M r S m ith? H e’s in the o the r room . J u s t__ on fo r a m om ent. I ’ll
UY
go and fe tch him .
6. H is jo b is to ____ up a ll phone enquiries w ith a le tte r and a
.Q
catalogue.
TP
7. “Excuse me. T h a t’s m y case.” “ Oh, so rry, th e y m ust have g o t____
O
up on th e flig h t.”
ĐẠ
8. There’s n o th in g to do in the evenings fo r teenagers, except to £. n '
round on stre e t corners.
NG
«L SOME VERBS WHICH TAKE THE -ING FORM
HƯ
The-tngformhereisthegerundwhichmustbeusedaftertheses
ẦN
1. enjoy 16. burst out 31. think of 46. get used to'
2. dislike 17. commence 32. afraid of TR 47. like
33. scared of 48. love
B
3. hate 18. recollect
00
4. loathe 19. recall 34. frightened of 49. stop

10
5. fancy 20. admit 35. terrified of 50. start verbs

+3
6. can’t stand 21. deny 36. tired of 51. continue from 47

P2
7. can’t bear 22. suggest 37. interested in 52. leave off -6 0

can take
CẤ
8. can’t face 23. imaaine 38. bored with 53. remember

an
9. finish 24. mind 39. excited about 54. forget infinitive
A
10. cease 25. can’t help 40. fond of 55. try or a

HÓ
11. give up 26. resent 41. keen on 56. propose gerund

Í-
12. carry on 27. risk 42. worried about 57. intend

-L
13. delay 28. miss 43. annoyed about 58. omit

44. fed up with 59. recommend
ÁN
14. keep (on) 29. spend time

15. end up 30. plan on 45. be used for 60. advise
TO
VII. SUFFIXES TO FORM NOUNS

NG
-A L is often added to verbs to form nouns

ƯỠ
E x: d en ial, refusal, proposal, w ith d ra w a l

ID
-O ID is also a su ffix to form nouns. The m eaning is “lik e ” or

“resem bling” . These nouns often appear in science fic tio n stories or
BỒ
film s .
277
Ex: hum anoid : an in h a b ita n t o f a no ther p la n e t w ho looks lik e man.

a ndroid : a rob ot designed to loo k lik e m an.
hom inoid : m an lik e creatures on e a rth (th e y e ti o r abom inable
ƠN
snowm an)
NH
EXERCISE
UY
Form nouns from these verbs:
.Q
1. a rriv e 6- w ith d ra w
TP
7. renew
2. survive Ó "
O
8. reverse
ĐẠ
3. deny 9. dism iss
4. propose 10. re cite
NG
5. refuse
Finishthese sentences.Useadictionaryifnecessary.
HƯ
ẦN
1. S om ething lik e a hum an is a ___ .
2. S om ething lik e a cube is a ___
3. S om ething lik e a p la n e t is a __. TR
4. S om ething lik e a s ta r (L a tin a stra ) is a n .
B
00
VIII. PHRASAL VERBS: o - s (REVIEW)

10
1. open up : cut open

+3
2. pass aw ay: die (review )

P2
3. p u t across: successfully convey

CẤ
4. ru n through : pierce w ith a sw ord

5. set down as : consider, reckon
A
HÓ
EXERCISE
1. Bác sĩ giải phẫu cắt mở bắp ñui của người thanh niên gắp bo viên
Í-
ñạn ra. (th ig h : bắp d ù i; to rem ove th e b u lle t)

-L
2. Ô ng già ñó ñã qua ñời tu ầ n qua.

ÁN
3. Vâng, anh ấy h iể u vấn dề tố t nhưng anh ấ y có th ể chuyển d ạ t nó

m ột cách th à n h công không?
TO
4. Người h iệ p sĩ ấy ñã ñâm tê n ñộc ác ñó bằng gươm.

NG
5. T ô i coi anh ta như là m ộ t võ sĩ quyền A n h chuyên nghiệp.
IX. SUFFIXES TO FORM NOUNS OF PROFESSION

ƯỠ
ID
-IAN : musician, politician, mathematician, physician (= doctor).

BỒ
278

N ote th a t g en e rally - IC (S) becomes IC IA N ), lib ra ria n ,

ve getaria n, h is to ria n , m agician.
-A N T : accountant, a tte n d a n t, co nsultant, im m ig ra n t.
ƠN
-ENT : president, superintendent, patient, resident.
NH
EXERCISE
UY
Writedownthenounfor thepersonwhopractises, or workswiththe
folowing:
.Q
TP
1. m u s ic _____. 4. h is to ry _
O
2. lib ra rie s ____ 5. s ta tis tic s
ĐẠ
3. m a th s _____ 6. m a g ic __
Completethesesentences:
NG
1. Someone who gives information is a n ____ .
HƯ
2. Someone who in h a b its a place is a n ____ .
ẦN
3. Someone w ho m akes a claim is a ____ .
4. Someone w ith w hom you correspond is a _____.
5. Someone who assists is an ____ .. TR
6. Someone you consult about something is a ____ .
B
00
7. Someone w ho resides somewhere is a _____.

10
8. Someone w ho superintends som ething is a ____ .

+3
X. PHRASAL VERBS: T-W

P2
Review
CẤ
1. Take aback: surprise (separable but generally used in the passive)

A
E x^W e w ere g re a tly taken aback by the news o f h is d eparture.

HÓ
%
fT a k e upfvfregin to follow a profession, a hobby, a way of life...
E x: The m edical student decided to take up surgery.
Í-
3. Turn over: upset, capsize (usually boats, cars...)

-L
E x: The canoe turned over as soon as i t reached the rapids.

ÁN
4. T u rn up: appear
TO
Ex: S everal frie n d s o f m ine turn e d up a t th e m eeting.

5. W o rk o u t: exhaust by w o rk in g
NG
. E x: Everyone know s th a t the old m ine has beeji w orked out.

ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
279

ƠN
NH
I. PHRASAL VERBS WITH AWAY
UY
The a dverbial p a rtic le A W A Y in phrasal verbs m ay suggest the
fo llo w in g shades o f m eaning:
.Q
1. at a distance, not near:
TP
- The doctor is awav on h o lida y th is week.
O
- He staved awav fro m school fo r 2 m onths.
ĐẠ
- Keep away o r else I s h a ll c a ll th e police.
2. to another place, to a distance:
NG
- The beggar ra n awav w hen he saw the dog.
HƯ
- He turne d away w hen he saw th e in ju re d man.
- The fierce dog frig h te n ed me aw av.
ẦN
- S h a ll I th ro w awav a ll th is rubbish.
3. disappearance, loss or destruction: TR
- The w a te r has boiled aw av.
B
- The snow m elted awav when th e sun started sh in in g .
00
- He washed awav the sta in.

10
- R ust has eaten th e iro n aw av.

+3
P2
II. THE ORDER OF ADJECTIVES

Iftherearealotofadjsmodifyinganoun,theirorderisasfolows:
CẤ
A
1. Quantity: How much / many? An One Five

HÓ
2. Quality : What’s it like? ugly beautiful cheap

Í-
3. Size : How big? little medium sized

-L
4. Shape : What shape? flat round thin

ÁN
5. Age : How old? old modern 1984

TO
6. Colour : What colour? pale-red light brown bright-green

7. Pattern : What pattern? striped plain check
NG
8. Origin : Where’s from? China Greek Roman

ƯỠ
9. Material: What is it made of? wood metal leather

ID
10. Object: What is it? box table vases

BỒ
280
EXERCISE
ƠN
R ew rite these sentences, p u ttin g the adjectives in the m ost appropriate
order:
NH
1. M y g ra nd fath e r has (1984, cheap, th in , sized, five , check, Roman,
UY
green, le a th e r) vases.
.Q
2. There are (clean, long, some, square, 1920s, dark-blue, plastic,
TP
spotted, C a lifo rn ia ) s h irts.
3. (A few, average, d irty , oval, black, 15th century, flow ered, European,
O
alum inum ) houses are being b u ilt.
ĐẠ
4. He washed (few , a, old, d irty , cotton, strip e d ) s h irt.
5. She’s got (ugly, Pekinese, fiv e , little ) dogs.
NG
HƯ
III. PHRASAL VERBS WITH BACK
The adverb ial p a rticle B A C K in phrasal verbs m ay suggest the
ẦN
follo w in g shades o f m eaning:
1. to the rear: TR
- The policem an stood back to le t th e queen pass.
B
00
- He pulled h is son back from th e te rrib le sig h t.

10
- He could n o t h old back th e angry dog.

+3
2. to an original position or state:

P2
- Please come back to our house w hen th e m eeting is over.

CẤ
- We decided to w a lk back.
A
- Take th is book back to M rs Jones.

HÓ
- I w ill pay back e veryth in g I owe.

3. Used after BE to mean "have returned”:
Í-
-L
- Is she back yet?

- I ’m back a t la s t fro m th e long journey.
ÁN
TO
IV. WAYS OF EXPRESSING

A d d itio n C ontrast Supposition
NG
and bu t to be supposed
ƯỠ
in a d d itio n although thought

ID
also said
BỒ
281

fu rtherm ore
no t only... bu t also
ƠN
EXERCISE
NH
"ranslate in to E ng lish :
UY
.. Các cô gái này quyến rũ nhưng nông cạn.
.Q
ỉ. M ặc dầu họ rộ ng rã i nhưng họ cũng có th ể tha m lam .
TP
i. Họ không những quyến rũ m à còn hào h iệ p (generous).
I. Cậu bé này ñầy n g h ị lực. Hơn nữa, cậu ta có th ể k iê n tr ì
O
(persiste nt).
ĐẠ
5. Những người này ñược coi là những thương g ia g iỏ i.
NG
V. PHRASAL VERBS WITH FORWARD
HƯ
FORW ARD(S) can be used w ith alm ost any verb w h ich suggests
movement o r the cause o f m ovem ent. I t m eans TO W ARDS TH E
ẦN
FRONT.
TR
- He ran forw a rd to greet h is old frie n d .
- The circusm an stepped fo rw a rd and bowed h is head.
B
- The students p u t fo rw a rd th e ir ideas about th e liv in g conditions in
00
the dorm itory.

10
- I ’m lo o king forw a rd to seeing you again soon.

+3
- C a rry th is figu re fo rw a rd to th e n e xt page before e n te rin g up next

m onth’s results.
P2
(ca rry forw ard : tra n s fe r to a new page o r account)

CẤ
VI: WAYS OF EXPRESSING “ONE AND SAME”

A
HÓ
Ways of expressing ONE:

U n i- : u niform , unisex, unique, u n it, u n ite , u n ion
Í-
M ono- : m onopoly, m o n orail, m onolingual, m onochrom e, monotonous

-L
O ne - : one-way, one-side, one-tim e, one-off, one-eyed, one-legged

S in g le - : single - m inded, single - handed, single - p a re n t
ÁN
Ways of expressing “SAME”

TO
H om o- : homogeneous, hom opathy, hom osexual

NG
S ym - : sym bol, sym m etry, sym pathy, sym ptom

S im - : s im ila r, sim ultaneous, sim ile) '
ƯỠ
S yn- : synchronize, synonym "

ID
BỒ
282

EXERCISE
Writeinthemeaningofthewordsbelow.Eitherguessthemorusea
dictionarytohelpyou.
ƠN
NH
1. uni - cy cle_____
2. m onoplane_____.
UY
3. m onocle____ -
4. m onogamy_____.
.Q
5. m onoural____ .
TP
6. one-track-mind
7. singular____ .
O
ĐẠ
8. single b a r____
NG
VII. WAYS OF EXPRESSING “TWO”
B I- : bicycle, binoculars, bigam y, b ila te ra l, bifocals
HƯ
D I- : dilem m a, dichotom y, dialogue, d ivide
D U A L- : dual carriagew ay, dual purpose, dual ow nership, dual
ẦN
language
TWO— : two-faced, tw o-piece, TR
tw o -tim e , tw o-seater, tw o-w ay
switch
B
D O U B LE - : double-bed double-glazing, double-bass, double-cross,
00
dquble-check
10
T W IN - : jiw ij*-b e d , tw in -s e t, tw in -h e a d lig h ts C rO 'S^ K'dcxc

+3
A M B I- : am biguous, am bidextrous, a m b iva le n t

P2
DUO- : íhỹỉ, duologue

DU- : duel, duet I
CẤ
A
Findthewordsinthelist ab, ovBBME

.............
ewhichares im ila r inm eaning tothe
HÓ
phrasesbelow:
Í-
-L
1. a sword o r p is to l fig h t b/w tw o people.

2. a la rg e bed fo r tw o people.
ÁN
3. tw o id e n tic a l sin g le beds.

TO
4. a song fo r tw o voices.
5. spectacles w ith tw o types o f lens.
NG
6. a s in g in g group w ith tw o people.

ƯỠ
7. a conversation b/w tw o people.

8. a pedal machine with two wheel.
ID
BỒ
283

9. h a vin g tw o possible m eanings.
ƠN
10. to check ve ry ca re fu lly.
NH
11. being able to use b oth hands equally.
12. tw o sets o f h ea d ligh ts on a car.
UY
VIII. PHRASAL VERBS WITH OUT-
.Q
TP
The ad ve rb ia l p a rtic le O UT in phrasal verbs m ay suggest the
fo llo w in g shades o f m eaning.
O
1. towards th e outside
ĐẠ
- He has ju s t gone o u t.
- The m an ra n to th e w indow and lum ped out.
NG
- B rin g th e a n im al out now.
HƯ
- He managed to d riv e out th e in tru de rs.
2. not at hom e
ẦN
- He staved out u n til ve ry la te .
-
TR
B ill’s frie n d trie d ha rd to keep th e police out w h ile B ill destroyed
th e evidence.
B
- The fence serves to keep out stra y ca ttle .
00
- Is the doctor s till out?

10
3. to express disappearance.
+3
- The fire has died out and o n ly the ashes re m ain.

P2
- He tho u gh t out th e w hole plan.

- E v e ry th in g has been sold out.
CẤ
- He blew th e candle out.

- The se rva nt managed to wash out th e sta in.
A
HÓ
4. Used with verbs to mean distribute or circulate:

- Please give these books out.
Í-
- He shared out th e p ro fits .

-L
5 . Clearly, completely.
- Speak out, please. I can’t hear you.
ÁN
- He spent a lo n g tim e copying the poem out.

TO
- He w rote out th e whole essay.

NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
284

ƠN
NH
I. PREFIXES RELATED TO NUMBERS
Number Prefix Examples
UY
Three tri- triangle, tricycle, tripod, trinity, triple, triplets
.Q
TP
three three-dimensional, three-piece suit, three-figure number
Four quad-
O
quadruple, quadruplets, quadrangle
ĐẠ
quart- quarter, quartet, quarterly
tetra— tetrahedron
NG
four- four-stroke engine, four-cyclinder engine, four-speed gears, four-
HƯ
wheel drive, four-seater
ẦN
Five pent— pentagon, pentangle
quint- quins (quintuplets), quintet
five— five-speed gearbox
TR
B
00
Six sex- sextuplets, sextet

10
hex- hexagon
six— six-cyclinder car
+3
P2
Seven sept- septet, September

CẤ
seven- seven-sided
Eight oct- octopus, octave, octet, October
A
HÓ
eight- eight-week
Nine non- November, nonagenarian
Í-
-L
nine— nine hour

Ten dec- decimal, decade, December
ÁN
ten- ten-day
TO
Twelve duodec- duodecimal, dozen

NG
twelve- twelve-man
ƯỠ
Hundred cent- centipede, century, centenary, centigrade, centimetre,

percentage
ID
Thousand mill- milipede, millenium

BỒ
281

Many multi- multiple, multiply, multiplication, multitude, multi-coloured, multi-

purpose, multi-storey car park, multi-national
poly- polygamy, polytechnic, polyglot
ƠN
NH
EXERCISE
Find the w ords in th e above lis t w hich are s im ila r in m eaning to the
UY
ữhrasesbelow:
.Q
TP
2. three ch ild re n re s u ltin g fro m the same pregnancy.
2. m arriage to several people a t th e same tim e .
O
3. a five-sided b u ild in g .
ĐẠ
4. a period o f ten years.
NG
5. one h un d redth o f a d o lla r.
8. an in sect w ith a hundred legs.
HƯ
7. a three-legged cam era stand.
8. an a th e le tic e vent w ith fiv e separate sections.
ẦN
9. to change to a decim al system .
10. kn ow ing m any languages. TR
11. a ve ry larg e crow d o f people.
B
00
12. a thousand years.

10
13. a hundred years.

+3
14. a group of three friends.

P2
15. a group o f fo u r frie n d s .

CẤ
IL TWO-WORD VERBS WITH FROM, INTO &TO

A
- do to, go to, hold to, stick to

HÓ
- be from , b re ak fro m , come fro m , go fro m , keep fro m

Í-
- be in to , break in to , come in to , cut in to , fa ll in to , get in to

-L
- go in to , la y in to , lo o k in to , ru n in to , tu rn in to
ÁN
EXERCISE
TO
Nowcompletethesentences.Becarefultousethecorrecttense:
NG
1. The in tru d e r____ in to th e house throug h a d o w n sta ir^ w indow .

ƯỠ
2. W hen h e r uncle died, she in to £200,000.

3. H ans____ from Munich in Germany.
ID
4. The detective is ___ _ in to th e robbery.

BỒ
286

5. I ____ in to a frie n d I hadn’t seen fo r years.

6. I ’m h oping t o ____ to u n iv e rs ity when I fin is h school.
7. I made a prom ise and I in te n d to ■ to it.
ƠN
8. I ’d o n ly in v ite d a few people, b u t th e y in v ite d m ore, so i t ____ in to
a b ig p a rty.
NH
9. M r. M okobai doesn’t w a n t th e local people t o ____ _ fro m tra d itio n .
UY
10. The tw o w re stle rs r e a lly _____in to each other.
.Q
III. SUFFIX -E N TO FORM VERBS
Herearesomeverbsformedbyadding-ENtoadjectivesornouns:
TP
O
- b lack : blacken, blackened, b lackening
ĐẠ
- w h ite : w h ite n , w hitened, w h ite n in g
NG
- h e ig h t : h e ig h t, h eigh ten, heightened, h e ig h te n in g
- stro ng : stre n g th , stre n gthen , strengthened, stre n g th e n in g
HƯ
- long : le n g th , lengthen, lengthened, le n g th en in g
ẦN
EXERCISE
Formverbsfromtheseadjectives: B
TR
1. w h ite 13. red
00
2. b r ig h t 14. sad
10
3 . b ro a d 15. sick
+3
4 . cheats 16. s h o rt
P2
5. d a m p 17. sofit
CẤ
6. d ark 18. s tra ig h t

A
7. deep 19. th ic k
HÓ
8. fa t 20. tough
Í-
9. glad 21. weak

-L
10. hard 22. w ide

ÁN
11. lig h t 23. b lack

12. m oist 24. quick
TO
IV. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH LIKE, WITH &WITHOUT

NG
- be lik e , look lik e

ƯỠ
- be w ith , break w ith , do w ith , go w ith , hold w ith

ID
- be w ith o u t, do w ith o u t
BỒ
287

EXERCISE
ƠN
Choose 3 verbs and make sentences with them.
NH
V. LANGUAGE STUDY: SEVEN WAYS OF BEING RUDE IN
UY
ENGLISH ..
1. T one o f voice: Even the most polite phrases can sound rude if said
.Q
in a certain way.
TP
I’ll tell him if you do that.
O
2. T hreats an d w arnings:
ĐẠ
Stop doing that or else!
NG
Don’t you dare do it!
HƯ
You dare!
ẦN
I warn you not to do it.
TR You’d better not do it.

' You’d b e tte r do it.
B
00
3. F rien d ly / fam ilia r term s u se d to strangers:

10
boy, son, mate, old chap, old boy, old fellow, my lad, chum, friend,
love
+3
4. Sarcasm : polite formulas and ways of addressing people can be

P2
used sarcastically, sometimes by being too polite or too formal:

CẤ
Miss, Sir / Madam...

5. A g gressiv e exp ressio n s:
A
HÓ
Hey you! M in d yo ur own business! Don’t be stupid!

Look here! Watch out! Go to h e ll!
Í-
W atch it! Ju st w atch yourself.

-L
your step!
6. U se o f tab oo w ords: taboo words are words which are deliberately
ÁN
designed to shock and outrage people.

TO
7. U se o f so c ia l role: In a conflict situation people try and establish

some kind of superiority by making it clear what their social role is.
NG
A middle-class motorist might become very condescending in an

ƯỠ
argument, while a working-class motorist might play up his role as

an honest but tough working-man.
ID
BỒ
288

EXERCISE
ƠN
Com plete the dialogues below, using the words o r phrases in the above
lis t. D on ’t use any taboo words as i t is d iffic u lt to use these in a foreign
NH
language.
UY
A: (1 )____ th a t’s m y seat!
.Q
B: I ’m sorry, (2 )_____b u t you shouldn’t have le ft it, should you.
TP
A: ( 3 ) ____ , I o n ly w ent to get a d rin k .
O
B: Bad luck, (4 )_____ . You’ve lo s t it, haven’t you?
ĐẠ
A: (5 )____ .
B: Oh, yes? W e ll, ( 6 ) ____ ,
NG
C: I ’m sorry, (7 )_____b u t can you read?
HƯ
D: A re you try in g to be funn y, (8 )____ ?
C: Oh, no, ( 9 ) ____ . I t ’s ju s t th a t you’ve parked rig h t n e xt to a “No
ẦN
waiting” sign.
D:
C:
TR
T h a t’s quite a ll rig h t, (1 0 )____ I sh a ll o nly be a m om ent.
I ’m so rry, (1 1 )____ , but (1 2 )_____a p a rk in g tic k e t.
B
D. (1 3 )____ , I ’m a frie n d o f th e C h ie f Constable.
00
C: I don’t care i f you are the C h ie f C onstable, you s till can’t p ark here
10
and it’s going to cost you £10.

+3
VL SUFFIXES TO FORM VERBS

P2
-IFY: electrify, horrify, identify, justify, simplify

CẤ
N o te : -IF Y means “to cause o r to m ake.”

A
Ex: e le c trify = to m ake s th ele ctric.

HÓ
-IS E / IZ E : apologize, c ritic iz e , organize, sym pathize, recognize

N o te : These verbs m ay be spelled w ith IS E o r IZ E . B oth are
Í-
correct.
-L
-ISE: advise, surprise, televise, promise, practise, advertise

N o te : These exam ples m ust be spelled -IS E , as in these cases
ÁN
“-ISE” is not suffix, but part of the basic word.

TO
EXERCISE
NG
F in d the verbs from the d e fin itio n s below.

ƯỠ
1. to m ake som ething clear

ID
2. to make s.o. m ore peaceful.

3. to m ake s.o. frig h te n e d
BỒ
28S

i. to make a group u n ite d

). to make sth la rg e r
>. to d ivid e sth in to classifica tio n s
ƠN
Ĩ. to make sth louder
Ỉ. to te ll s.o. about sth fo rm a lly, in w ritin g
NH
). to m a k e s th m odern Si
UY
10. to give sth p u b lic ity
.Q
11. to make s th s te rile
TP
12. to exaggerate the ro m an tic side o f a sto ry
O
13. to make sth m ore sensational
ĐẠ
14. to try to save m oney, o r use less o f sth
15. to give s.o. a u th o rity to do sth
NG
16. to sing, o r move, in harm ony
HƯ
17. to make a place in d u s tria l
ẦN
18. to make somewhere a colony
Complete the sentences, using a verb from the lis t below. Be c a re fu l to
use the co rre ct form o f the verb.
TR
B
00
A D VER TISE R E VIS E EXERC ISE T E LE V IS E IM P R O V IS E

10
1. H e ____ h is dog everyday.

2. I h a te ____ fo r exams.
+3
3. The BBC are going t o ____ the game.

P2
4. I ’ve seen i t _____on te le visio n .

CẤ
5. We haven’t got th e rig h t tools, we’l l have t o ___

A
¥11. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH AFTER, AGAINST & FOR

HÓ
- ca ll a fte r, chase a fte r, look a fte r, ru n a fte r, take a fte r

- be against, go against, run against, turn against, work against
Í-
- be fo r, c a ll fo r, fa ll fo r, ru n fo r, w o rk fo r
-L
ÁN
EXERCISE
TO
Complete the sentences w ith the a p pro pria te tw o -w o rd verb. Be ca re fu l

to use the correct tense:
NG
1. I ’m a fra id I ____ the pla n. I don’t agree w ith it a t a ll. /

ƯỠ
2. H e ____ a wom an h a lf h is age, but she d id n ’t w a n t to know h im .

3. H e ____ h is m other. He looks so much lik e her.
ID
BỒ
290

4. Some M Ps a re _____new -law to p ro te ct ten an ts from landlords.

5. He’s had t o ____ h is fa th e r since an accident tw o years ago.
6. I ____ ABC com puters pic. I ’m th e ir sales representative.
ƠN
7. He used to be a good frie n d , but he’s _____me now.
NH
8. In the sum m er th e office w indow s are open and we have t o ____ a
background o f tra ffic noise.
UY
9. In the O lym pics Steve Roe ____ S tan O wzat in the thousand
m etres.
.Q
10. Ted’s a lw a y s ____ dream s, w ith o u t re a lis in g he’ll never catch.
TP
VIII. LANGUAGE STUDY: WORDS SHOWING CONTRAST
O
ĐẠ
• A LTH O U G H , TH O U G H , E V E N TH O U G H are subordinating
conjunctions used to introduce adverb clauses o f co ntra st (or
NG
concession)
Ex: Even though I have had a b ig b re akfast, I s till feel hungry.
HƯ
• IN S P ITE OF and D E S PITE are on ly prepositions o f contrast, they
ẦN
m ust go w ith nouns.
Èx: I s till feel h ung ry despite a b ig b re akfa st I ’ve had.
TR
EXERCISE
B
00
Make 2 sentences fo r each o f these, one w ith ALTHOUGH o r THOUGH,

10
one w ith D ESPITE o r IN SPITE OF:

+3
1. He was angry. He ke p t s m ilin g .

P2
2. She was annoyed. She d id n ’t show it.

3. They were happy. They d id n ’t laugh o r sm ile.
CẤ
4. He was young. He had a ve ry im p o rta n t job.

A
5. She was old. She was s till f it and energetic.

HÓ
Sentence b u ild in g : W rite com plete sentences fro m these sets o f words o r
phrases, using ALTHOUGH:
Í-
-L
1. ve ry la te she / n o t sleep
2. te rrifie d / w e nt to w indow
ÁN
3. very frig h te n e d / opened the w indow

TO
4. ra in / w earing ju s t a s h irt and trousers

5. ra in / w orkers continue / w o rk
NG
IX. VERBS ENDING IN -ATE

ƯỠ
-A T E : accelerate exaggerate
ID
BỒ
291

accommodate investiga te
ƠN
a n ticip a te im ita te
NH
assassinate le g isla te
UY
concentrate operate
dem onstrate separate
.Q
TP
educate te rm in a te
tolerate
O
ĐẠ
EXERCISE
NG
W rite down the verbs w hich these nouns are form ed.
HƯ
1. accom m odation 11. education
2. co-operation 12. dom ination
ẦN
3. em ig ration 13. estim a tion
4. im m ig ra tio n
TR 14. generation
B
5. fascination 15. illu m in a tio n
00
6. com plication 16. autom ation

10
7. irrig a tio n 17. exaggeration

+3
8. irrita tio n 18. in fla tio n

P2
9. to le ra tio n 19. v io la tio n

CẤ
10. ra d ia tio n 20. contam m ination

A
X. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH ABOUT

HÓ
The adverbial p a rtic le A BO U T in phrasal verbs m ay suggest the

Í-
fo llo w in g shades o f m eaning:

-L
1. here and there:

ÁN
- Several ch ild re n were ru n n in g about w hen I a rriv e d a t the school.

TO
- Some others were stan ding about in th e playground.

NG
- A few boys were k ic k in g a b a ll about.

2. rudely, roughly, impolitely
ƯỠ
- The sergeant ordered h is men about w ith a sadistic sa tisfa ctio n.

ID
- Don’t p u ll the little g ir l’s to y about.

BỒ
3. In th e opp osite direction
292

— W hen we turned about, we saw a lio n w atching us.
ƠN
- He suddenly faced about and looked in to the eyes o f h is assailant.
NH
XI. THE QUESTION MARK
UY
It is used
.Q
a fte r a question: H ow lo ng is it?
<
TP
a fte r a tag-question: I t ’s a nice day, is n ’t it?
O
ĐẠ
a fte r How do you do? (although some people are beg inning t
NG
drop the? in th is exam ple)
HƯ
to show doubtful facts.
< Ex: Shakespeare, born 1564 (?)
in side in ve rted commas.

10
00
B
TR
ẦN
Ex: “ Is th is th e way?” asked Ken.

+3
it is n o t used a fte r an in d ire c t question.

P2
Ex: I asked h e r w h a t tim e i t was.

CẤ
A
EXERCISE
HÓ
Add question m arks o r fu ll stops w here necessary:

Í-
1. John H askins, 1742-1803 (nobody’s sure about the date o f death as

-L
he died on a desert island).

2. He’s always asking questions, is n ’t he?
ÁN
3. “ How do you do” he w hispered.

4. I ’ve no idea how fa r it is
TO
5. “How fa r is i t to B ris to l” he’d asked.

NG
ƯỠ

ID
I. PREFIXES
BỒ
Prefixes EM- and EN-

EM - : e m b itte r, embody, em power, em ploy, emphasize
20S
EN- : enable, encourage, enlarge, ensure, enjoy
Đóng gópNPDF
o te :bởi
EM - is
GV. used before
Nguyễn p and b, E N is used beforeWWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON
Thanh Tú o th e r le tte rs.
Prefixes PR E- and POST-

r erbs : p re - arrange, prejudge, p re - pay, p re d ict, precede
ƠN
Nouns : precaution, p re fix , preference, prejudice
NH
Adjectives : p re m a rita l, prem ature, precautionary, p re ju d icia l
Verbs : postpone, postdate
UY
Nouns : p o s tc rip t (PS), post-m ortem , postgraduate, p.m . (post
.Q
m e rid ie m )
TP
EXERCISE
O
ĐẠ
Replace the u n d e rlin e d w ords w ith verbs fro m the above lis t:
NG
1. The Queen represents th e pow er o f the state.
2. I gave a job to her.
HƯ
3. I had a ve ry good tim e a t th e p a rty.
4. He was fin d in g th e w o rk d iffic u lt, b u t a few good m arks made him
ẦN
feel much b e tte r about i t .
•5. They’re m a kin g th e ir house la rg e r.
8.
TR
Ĩ gave h im th e pow er to sign le tte rs fo r me.
B
7. We use ita lic s to m ake a w ord lo ok m ore obvious.
00
8. The death o f h e r husband made h e r v e ry re se n tfu l and b itte r.

10
II. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH ACROSS

+3
come across
P2
cut across
CẤ
g et across
A
go across
HÓ
p u t across
Í-
ru n across
-L
EXERCISE
ÁN
R ew rite these sentences using tw o -w o rd verbs w ith ACROSS.

TO
1. He’s a clever p o litic ia n , he de livers h is message ve ry w e ll on TV.

NG
2. I ’m n o t going by th e long route, I ’m going to take a sh o rte r route

along sm all coun try roads. /
ƯỠ
3. When I see h im on T V , he gives th e im pression o f being a re a lly

nice person.
ID
BỒ

4. I m et an old frie n d in th e street.

5. I can’t com m unicate w h a t I w a n t to say.
ƠN
III. LANGUAGE STUDY: PRECAUTIONS
NH
H ere are some ways to express / precautions.
UY
1. Be careful! M in d out! W atch out! Look out!
.Q
2. You m ust do i t ca re fu lly in case you b urn y o u rs e lf / in case o f burns.
TP
3. You m ust be careful to avoid burns.
b u rn in g yourself.
O
4. Firem en w ear special clothes to p re ve n t them from b urning
ĐẠ
them selves.
NG
EXERCISE
HƯ
Make sentences, using the above ways o f expressing precautions:
ẦN
Ex: He w arned them to w atch out.
I ’d p ut in some s tic k in g p la s te r in case I cut m yself.
TR
IV. SUFFIXES TO FORM NOUNS OF JOBS AND SOCIAL ROLES
B
00
-O R : doctor, s a ilo r author, inspector, s o lic ito r, ta ilo r, bachelor,

10
surveyor, professor *
-E R : teacher, d riv e r, w rite r, la w ye r, banker, plum ber, grocer,
+3
butcher, clim be r, sw im m er
P2
-1ST : a rtis t, d e n tis t, to u ris t, c y c lis t, jo u rn a lis t, econom ist, v io lin is t,

CẤ
o rg a n ist, chem ist, p s y c h ia tris t

A
EXERCISE
HÓ
Give some m ore words fo r each s u ffix you have learned.

Í-
V. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH ALONG

-L
b rin g along move along

ÁN
come along pass along

TO
get along ru n along

NG
go along send along

h u rry along ta ke along
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
295

EXERCISE
ƠN
Complete the sentences using verbs from the list above:
NH
1. “____ along” , said th e conductor, “We haven’t got a ll day ____
along th e buSj the re are people w a itin g to get on.”
UY
2. W hen you go to th e lecture, don’t forge t t o ____ along a pen and
.Q
some paper.
TP
3. “A h, M a rily n ” , said th e teacher, “I f you see Janice, can y o u ____
h er along to m y office?”
O
4. We’ve been frie n d s fo r years. W e ____ along together ve ry w e ll.
ĐẠ
5. I t looks lik e ra in . You’d b e tte r___ _ along an um brella.
NG
VI. PREFIXES D IS- AND MIS-
HƯ
D IS - : disappoint, disapprove, disbelieve, discontinue, d is lik e
M IS - : m isbehave, m isd ire ct, m islead, m isrepresent, m istake
ẦN
N o te s: • These prefixes can be used w ith verbs (disagree) nouns
TR
(disagreem ent / and adjectives (disagreeable).
• D IS - carries negative m eaning.
B
• M IS - carries th e m eaning o f doing sth w ro n g ly o r badly.
00
10
EXERCISE
+3
F in d verbs w hich mean th e fo llo w in g . Use a d ictio n a ry i f necessary.

P2
1. judge w ro n g ly w ron gly

CẤ
„ 7. spell w ro n gly
2. pronounce w ro n gly ' _ J
8. read w ro ngly
A
3. understand w ro n g ly 9 in fo rm w ro n gly
HÓ
4. manage bad ly 10 use w ro ngly

Í-
5. calculate w ro n g ly
-L
VII. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH AROUND

ÁN
ca rry around ru n around

TO
get around see around

NG
go around stand around

ƯỠ
look around tu rn around

pass around
ID
BỒ
296
EXERCISE
ƠN
Write 3 sentences using two-word mrbs with AROUND
NH
VIII. GIVING ADVICE & MAKING SUGGESTIONS
UY
Giving Advice
- You w a n t / ought to do th is .
.Q
TP
- You should / had b e tte r do th is .
- I ’d advise / advise i stro ngly.
O
ĐẠ
advise you to do th is.
- I f I were you, I ’d do th is .
NG
- W hy don’t you do this?
HƯ
- The best th in g to do is...
- The best th in g you can do is...
ẦN
- I would recomm end you to do th is .
Making Suggestions
TR
B
- I suggest we do th is .
00
- S h all / should we do this?

10
- L e t’s (n ot) do th is .
+3
- H ow / w h a t about (doing) this?

P2
- W hy n o t do this?
CẤ
- W hy don’t you do this?

A
- We m ig h t / could do th is .
HÓ
- We can do th is , i f you lik e .

Í-
- Do you fancy doing this?

-L
- Fancy doing this?

ÁN
EXERCISE
TO
NG
1. B iều tố t n h ấ t bạn có th ể là m là thực th i chính sách “xóa ñói giỉ'

nghèo” ,
ƯỠ
2. T ô i m ạnh mẽ khuyên bạn là m cuộc phỏng vấn vớ i những yếu nh

ID
tro n g chính phủ.

3. T ô i khuyến cáo bạn ñừng n gh iện m a tú y .
BỒ

4. A nh â'y ñề n g h ị chúng ta là m một. chuyến du khảo ñến hang Pác

Bó.
5. Bạn có th ích là m m ộ t chuyến dạo thuyền trê n bến cảng N hà Rồng
ƠN
không?
NH
IX. PREFIXES: R Ẹ - FO R E - CO-
UY
R E - (agaim, a se co n d tim e)
Verbs: re co nd itio n, re w rite , reorganize, redo, recognize, replace
.Q
Nouns: re tu rn , recount, re fle ctio n
TP
F O R E - (h a p p e n in g b e fo re )
O
Verbs: foresee, forecast, forew arn, foreshadow
ĐẠ
Ncuns: forearm , forenam e, forehead, foreground
C O - (to g e th e r w ith )
NG
Verbs: co-operate, coincide, com m unicate, cohere, coexist
HƯ
Nouns: co a litio n , coincidence, co-star, co -w rite r, co-operative
ẦN
EXERCISE
M atch the words in the lis t o f nouns in the above p a rt w ith the d e fin itio n s
below:
TR
B
00
1. a group o f people sh a rin g th e ow nership o f and w o rk fo r a company.

10
2. fir s t name.
3. the p a rt o f your face above your eyebrows.
+3
4. tw o p o litic a l p artie s w o rk in g together.

P2
5. one o f the tw o m ajor actors in a film .

CẤ
6. a tic k e t b oth to and fro m a place.

7. the th in g s in th e fro n t o f a p icture or photo.
A
8. tw o s im ila r th in g s happening by chance a t the same tim e .

HÓ
X. TWO“WORD VERBS WITH BEFORE

Í-
come before
-L
go before
ÁN
p u t before
set before
TO
NG
EXERCISE
Translate in to E n glish :
ƯỠ
1. M ẫu tự nào ñ i trưốc Q?
ID
BỒ
298

2. Số nào ñ i trước 44 tro n g dãy số 11, 22, 44, 55?

3. Dấu chấm câu nào bạn ñ ặ t trước lờ i b ắ t ñầu của lờ i n ó i g ián tiếp?
4. Nếu nữ hoàng nước A nh ñến nhà bạn dùng cơm tố i, bạn sẽ dọn
ƠN
m ón gì trưñc m ặ t bà ta?
NH
UY
ADVANCED GRAMMAR T8C
.Q
I. PREFIXES OUT- UNDER- OVER-
TP
O UT-
O
Verbs: o u tlive , outnum ber, outshine, o u tw it, outm anoeuvre
ĐẠ
Nouns: outlaw , o u t-p a tie n t, outsider, outpost, outdoors
NG
UNDER-
Verbs: under-cook, under-pay, undergo,"Under em phasize
HƯ
Nouns: undercarriage, underw ear, underdog, undergro w th
OVER-
ẦN
Verbs: overeat, o ve r-sim p lify, o ve r-stra in , over-produce
TR
Adjs: over-am bitious, over-confident, over-em otional
B
Nouns: over-anxiety, over-confidence, over-indulgence
00
10
EXERCISE
+3
F in d w ords in the lis t w hich are s im ila r in m eaning to the phrases below:
P2
1. liv e longer tha n

CẤ
2. become more succcessful th a n

3. someone who is n o t p a rt o f th e group
A
4. defeat by being m ore cle ver th a n

HÓ
5. be greater in num ber th a n

Í-
II. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH BEHIND

-L
be behind
ÁN
keep behind
TO
go behind
fa ll b ehind
NG
iro p behind
ƯỠ
put behind
ID
get behind
BỒ
299

EXERCISE
ƠN
Now complete the sentences below with appropriate verbs.
NH
1. W hen she le ft p riso n, the governor said, “You m u s t____ the past
UY
behind you and s ta rt a new life .”
2. Nobody lik e d her, especially h e r boss. She was a lw a y s ____ behind
.Q
h is back, and co m plaining to th e m anaging d ire ctor.
TP
3. The teacher was iu riou s. “I f no one a dm its to doing th a t silly
O
dra w in g, I ’m going t o ____ th e w hole class behind a fte r school for
ĐẠ
an hour.
NG
III. PUNCTUATION: THE HYPHEN
® The hyphen ( - ) is a sm a ll dash, (about h a lf the le n g th o f a dash
HƯ
____ ) used to jo in double or compound w ords.
ẦN
E x: w e ll-kno w n, m o th e r-in -la w , out-of-date
e People d on 't agree on w hen a w ord is one w ord and when it is
TR
hyphenated. B u t one ru le is to use hyphens in compounds lik e CO-
OPERATE and P R E -E M IN E N T w here a p re fix ends in th e same
B
00
vow el as th e fir s t le tte r o f the w ord.

• W hen you break a w ord, you should p u t a hyphen b/w the ro o t and
10
its p re fix o r s u ffix . You should n o t break i t in ano ther place.

+3
Ex: O x-ford U n i-v e rs ity E n g -lis h som e-tim e engage-ment

P2
EXERCISE
CẤ
P u t hyphens in these sentences w here necessary:

A
HÓ
1. He was w h ite h aired , m iddle aged and bad tem pered.

2. M y great g ra n d fa th e r came fro m the U n ite d States o f A m erica. .
Í-
3. The new h ig h speed tra in w ill replace th e out o f date diesel electric
-L
ra ilw a y engines now being used by B ritis h R a il.

4. H is son in la w was an undergraduate a t Cam bridge U n iv e rs ity in
ÁN
the post w a r period.

TO
5. “A ll rig h t,” he said a h ig h p itc h voice. “I ’l l cooperate w ith you. The

money is in th e bank v a u lt.”
NG
IV. LANGUAGE STUDY: TALKING ABOUT ASSUMPTIONS &

ƯỠ
FACTS %
ID
About assumptions
BỒ
- M ore fo rm a l : I presume / assume / believe
300

- N e u tra l : Ị th in k / suppose / understand
ƠN
- Less form a l : I reckon / guess
NH
About facts
• A c tu a lly
UY
As a m a tte r o f fact
.Q
In fact..., in fa ct
TP
The fa ct is...
O
The fa ct o f the m a tte r is...
ĐẠ
On a p o in t o f fact...
NG
• As fa r as I know ...
As fa r as I can m ake out...
HƯ
To the best o f m y know ledge...
ẦN
As fa r as I can te ll...
From w h a t I ’ve been to ld ...
TR
As fa r as I ’ve heard...
B
00
I ’ve alw ays

10
Understood th a t...
+3
EXERCISE
P2
Translate in to E ng lish:
CẤ
1. - Mẹ n gh ĩ là con ñã kiế m ñược việc.

A
- Thực ra . con chưa kiế m ñược việc. Con dang tìm việc.
HÓ
2. ðám cưới ngày nay rấ t tố n kém . T ô i ñoán là ch ị sẽ p h ả i trả hi

những chì p hí ñó.
Í-
3. - T ô i tin rằ n g anh học ñ ạ i học O xford.

-L
ðúng, nhưng thưc ra tô i chưa tố t nghiệp.

ÁN
4. Sự thực là họ ñã duểi tô i.
5. T ô i th iế t n gh ĩ anh không m uôn kể cho tô i tạ i sao.
TO
V. PREFIXES UN-AND D E -
NG
UN- : undo, uncover, unseat, unearth, unblock

ƯỠ
DE- : depopulate, de-ice, deform , dehydrate, deport

ID
BỒ

EXERCISE
W rite th e opposite o f each verb:
ƠN
1 cover 6. w rap
NH
7. zip
? dress
8. freeze
UY
3. pack 9. hook
4. lock
.Q
10. fasten
TP
5. w in d
’ũmpễete the sentences 1 -1 0 w ith the verbs below. B e ca re fu l to use the
O
ữ rre c t form o f the verb: decapitate, dehydrate, deodorize, devalue,
ĐẠ
■e com pose, de-ice, depopulate, defuse, dem oralize, deport.
NG
. The g u illo tin e was used t o ____ crim in a ls.
HƯ
. A fte r th e fam ine, th e country w a s _.
. The soldiers w e re ____ a fte r th e ir defeat.
ẦN
. A fte r p la y in g ten n is in the m idday sun, she w a s ____ .
. I t was so cold. I had to _____ the doorlocks before I could get in .
TR
They w ere arrested in M andanga, a n d ____ to th e ir own country.
B
They used stron g -sm e llin g d isin fe c ta n t t o ____ the room .
00
The police found the dead body. I t had begun t o _____ .

10
The soldiers m anaged t o ____ th e te rro ris t bomb.

). M andanga has decided to its currency.
+3
P2
L TWO-WORD VERBS WITH BY

CẤ
pass by : 1) go past 2) o m it, disregard

stand by : 1) stand near a person o r a th in g .
A
2) be ready to help o r to act.

HÓ
put by : 1) save [S] 2) neglect, set on one side [S]

get by : 1) pass 2) manage (xoay sỗ,lo liệ u )
Í-
-L
EXERCISE
ÁN
'ãnsỉate in to E nglish:
TO
Á nh ta ñã bỏ sót ñiểm ñó tro n g b ài d iễ n văn của anh ta.

Sáu xe cứu hỏa từ th ị trâ n k ế bên túc trự c sẵn sàng ứng cứu tro n g
NG
trường hợp có thêm m ột vụ cháy nữa bộc phá t. 1

ƯỠ
a) Ô ng Jones ñã ñể dành 1.000 bảng A n h cho việc sử dụng tro n g

tương la i. (ñể sử dụng sau này)
ID
b) A nh ta không ñể ý ñến ý tưởng ñó và rồ i quên nó luôn.

BỒ
*
2

4. a) Làm ơn d i chuyển sang m ột bên; chúng ta không thể vượt qua

ñược.
b) Người chồng bảo vợ ông ta rằ n g họ sẽ xoay sở nếu họ sông chung
ƠN
với nhau, (to keep together)
NH
VII. PREFIXES SEMI- FELLOW- EX-
UY
S E M I- : s e m i-lite ra te (bán học thức), se m i-tro p ica l (bán n h iệ t
ñới), se m i-skille d (bán chuyẽn nghiệp), sem i-circle,
.Q
se m i-circular (nửa vòng trò n ), sem i-colon, sem i-
TP
conscious, sem i-detached, se m i-fin a l, se m i-o fficia l (bán
O
chính thức)
ĐẠ
FE LLO W - : fe llo w -c itiz e n , fellow -countrym an, fe llo w -tra v e lle r
E X - (out of) : extension, ex-directory telephone num bers, e xtro ve rt,
NG
to e x tra d ite
E X - (past) : ex-president, ex-w ife, ex-m em ber
HƯ
EXERCISE
ẦN
Complete these sentences:
TR
1. L ive rpo o l beat A rsena l 3 -0 , to go through to th e ____ w here th e y ’ll
B
m eet Southam pton.
00
2. For s a le house in pleasant neighbourhood.

10
3. The class was s ittin g in a ____facing th e teacher.

+3
4. I t ’s tru e , I can te ll you th a t. B ut don’t quote me, th is is o n ly _______ .

P2
5. I was ____ fo r a w h ile before I came round com pletely (=

recovered).
CẤ
VIII. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH DOWN

A
HÓ
1. b rin g down : low er, reduce [S]

2. n ut down : a) suppress, crush [S ] b) w rite [S]
Í-
3. tu rn down : re ject [S] bác bỏ, lo ạ i bỏ.

-L
4. look down (up) on : scorn k h in h k h i, coi thường

ÁN
EXERCISE
TO
Translate in to E n g lish :
NG
1. Người chủ tiệ m giảm giá xuống 5 ñô la.

2. C hính phủ sớm ñập ta n cuộc khở i nghĩa (n ổ i dậy).
ƯỠ
3. Quânỳñội lo ạ i bỏ anh ta vì lý do sức khỏe kém .

4. Cô ta rởm ñời (trưởng giả học làm sang) và coi k h in h tấ t cả những
ID
BỒ
303

người h àn g xóm của cô ta.
ƠN
IX. PREFIXES ANTI- PRO-
NH
B oth A N T I- and P R O - can be added to proper nouns and nouns
UY
as you choose. A N T I- means “opposed to o r against” . P ro - means in
favour of, in support o f’.
.Q
A N T I- : a n tis e p tic, a n tib io tic , anticyclone, a ntifreeze, antidote,
TP
a n tiso cia l, anti-clockw ise
O
PR O - : pro-governm ent, pro-S m ith, p ro -B ritis h , pros and cons
ĐẠ
EXERCISE
NG
Look a t the lis t above:
HƯ
1. F in d th ree words w h ich m ig h t be used by a doctor.
ẦN
2. F in d one w ord w hich m ig h t be used in a w eather forecast.
3. F in d one w ord w h ich describes som ething you would p u t in your car
in w in te r in a cold country. TR
4. F in d one w ord w h ich describes th e d ire c tio n you would take when
B
00
tu rn in g .
10
5. F in d tw o words w hich m ig h t be used in a p o litic a l re p o rt.

+3
X. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH ỈN-

P2
1. b rin g in : a) introduce (du nhập) [S ] b) earn [S ]

CẤ
2. c a ll in : a) v is it b rie fly o r casually. b) send fo r [S]

3. draw in : become sh orte r
A
4. give in : surrender, yie ld ñầu hàng, nhượng bộ

HÓ
5. keep in : confine, d eta in (g e ne ra lly separated)

6. take in : a) ca rry inside a house, a room ... [S]
Í-
b) subscribe to buy re g u la rly

-L
EXERCISE
ÁN
1. a) Những người nước ngoài ñã du nhập nhiều phong tục riê n g của họ.
TO
b) M ỗ i tuần họ kiế m ñược nhiều tiề n .

NG
2. Họ ñã cho gọi m ột bác sĩ ñến k h i cha họ tỏ ra không có dâu hiệu

bìn h phục.
ƯỠ
3. N gày ñang trở nên ngắn hơn v ì (now th a t) mùa ñông ñang ñến.
ID
4. Quân ñịch cuối cùng ñã ñầu hàng.

5. T h ầy giáo gọi tô i lạ i sau giờ lớp.
BỒ
6. T ô i vừa m ới b ắ t ñầu ñăng k í mua báo ð ồng N ai.
304
XL PUNCTUATION: INVERTED COMMAS AND QUOTATION
ƠN
MARKS
NH
Inverted commas or quotation marks:
UY
1. A re used to show s.o.’s d ire c t words.
.Q
“W hat exactly do you w ant?” he said suspiciously.
TP
2. a) A comma, a question m a rk or an exelam ation m ark are used
inside the quotation m arks.
O
ĐẠ
“H e llo ,” he said. “W hat?” she asked.
3. Use a comma, n o t a fu ll stop a fte r th e statem ent in quotation
NG
m arks.
“ I love you,” he said.
HƯ
4. A re used fo r quoted th in g s, extracts, names o f books, plays o r film s,
ẦN
also fo r fo reign words (though th e y are less com m only used
nowadays), w ords used hum orously, sa rcastically.
TR
The “ p la t du jo u r” is alw ays excellent a t th a t re staura n t.
B
I t ra in e d every day du rin g the “sum m er” holidays.
00
5. I f you need to use in ve rte d commas w ith in a quotation, show the

10
difference.
+3
He said, “Have you ever read ‘Don Q uixote’ by Cervantes?”

P2
EXERCISE
CẤ
P ut quotation m arks in to these sentences w here necessary:

A
HÓ
1. Do you lik e Paul Sim on’s records? I asked. Yes, she replie d. I love
h is ly ric s . Do you rem em ber th a t lo ve ly lin e in h is song, Am erican
Í-
Tune? W hich lin e , I asked. Oh, you know , she said, the lin e that
-L
goes. I t ’s so h a rd to feel b rig h t and bon v iv a n t, so fa r away fro ir

home, so fa r away fro m home.
ÁN
2. Oh, excuse me, he said, I was try in g to choose between the table d
TO
hôte and à la carte. W hich w ould you suggest?

(N otes: - ta b le d’ hôte /ta b l daơư bữa ăn ở khách sạn giá cố ñ ịn h
NG
- à la carte /a la ka:ư kêu từng m ón)

ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
30Ỉ
ƠN
[. L A T IN PREFIXES
NH
ỊlN T E - (before) : a nte n a ta l, anteroom , antedate
'N - / IM - (in , on) : in ta k e , im p rin t, in flo w
UY
N - / IM - / I L - / IR (not) : in fin ite , illic it, im m oral, irre le v a n t .
.Q
N T E R - (between) : in te rn a tio n a l, in te r-p la n e ta ry , interchange
TP
VĨAL- (ba d, w rong) : m a ln u tritio n , m aladjusted, m a ltre a t,
O
m a lp ractice
ĐẠ
\fO V - (new) : novel, no ve lty, nova
NG
5R E - (before, in fro n t) : preface
3Q S T- (a fte r, behind) : post-w ar, p.m ., post-operative, posthumous
HƯ
tE T R O - (backwards) : re trospect, retrograde, retrogressive, re tro -
ẦN
ro cke t
5ƯPER- Í above)
TR
: superstructure, supernatural, superhum an
TRANS- (across) : tra n s a tla n tic , tra n s p la n t, tra n sla te ,
B
tra n sfo rm
00
10
EXERCISE
+3
1dd prefixes to these wordsỈ

P2
1. date. 7 . ____form ed
CẤ
8 . _____ w ar
2. p la n t
9 . _____ adjustm ent
A
3. rocket
HÓ
10. ______ stru cture

4. existence
11 . ____fin ite
Í-
5. determ ined
-L
12 . ______ take
6. practice
ÁN
I. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH OFF

TO
.. d riv e o ff : a) go away, leave in a car. b) cause to leave [S]

NG
Ỉ. set o ff : s ta rt on a jou rne y

Ì. take o ff : a) remove b) ris e in to the a ir i
ƯỠ
cle a r C ÍĨ. : clear away, get rid o f

ID
I. die OS’ : die one by one

i. k ill o ff : get r id o f in la rg e num bers,exte rm ina te (khử trừ )
BỒ

7. wear o ff : d im in is h , cease g ra d u a lly
EXERCISE
ƠN
1. V iê n cộng an b ắ t dám ñông tả n di.
NH
2. Họ ñã khở i hàn h lúc m ấy giờ?
3. M áy bay ñược chỉ ñ ịn h cấ t cánh lúc 3.30 chiều.
UY
4. A nh ấy lo ạ i bỏ những cuộn băng cũ k h ỏ i tủ sách.
.Q
5. T ấ t cả những con chim lần lượt chết tro n g mùa ñông giá lạ n h .
TP
6. L oạ i thuốc sá t trù n g mới ñã g iế t h àng lo ạ t tấ t cả những con v ậ t
phá hoại, (pests)
O
7. Cơn ñau ră n g của tô í giờ ñây ñã giảm .
ĐẠ
III. MORE LATIN PREFIXES
NG
A D - (tow ards) advance, adapt, adventure, a d d itive ,
HƯ
addendum , a d d itio n .
CO M - (to ge th er w ith ) com bine, com bat, commune, com bination,
ẦN
com m unist.
CO NTR A- (against) TR
co n tra d ict, contravene, contraband,
contraceptive
B
DE (down from , o ff, from ) depart, d e b ility , declassify, debar,
00
deodorant.
10
E, E X - (out of) expel, e vict, evolve, extend, extension

+3
SU B- (below, under) subm arine, subconscious, subcontract,

P2
subdue, sub-lieutenant
CẤ
EXERCISE
A
Write p refixes to com plete the words below. Use a d ic tio n a ry to help you.
HÓ
1 9. b in a tio n
1. m unal
Í-
2. consciousness 10. dendum

-L
3. m unism 11. band

ÁN
4. pulsion 12. a p ta tion

TO
5. b ilitv 13. v o lu tio n

6. vention 14. bat
NG
7. ception 15. ventuFes

ƯỠ
8. odorize
ID
BỒ
307

IV. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH ON
ƠN
1. c a rry on : a) continue b) manage, conduct [S]
NH
2. come on : try harde r, do b e tte r (used as an in te rje c tio n )
3. get on : manage, suceeed (xoay sở làm cái gì)
UY
4. go on : continue, keep on
.Q
5 hang on : w a it a m om ent w h ile going on doing sth (colloquial)
TP
6. hold on : stop doing sth fo r a m om ent (colloquial)
O
EXERCISE
ĐẠ
1. Công việc k in h doanh ñang ñược tiế n hành như thường lệ.
NG
2. Cố gắng lê n ! K ì th i dã ñến gần.
3. Tom ñang xoay sở th ế nào? (có tiế n bộ chưa?)
HƯ
4. D iễ n giả tiế p tục n ó i rằ n g ông là m ột người tự lậ p th â n .
5. A nh có th ể ñợi m ộ t lá t tro n g k h i tô i d i kiế m m ộ t tách trà ñược
ẦN
không?
TR
6. H ãy bảo anh ta rigừng tro n g g iâ y lá t; tô i sẽ ñến ngay.
B
V. PUNCTUATION: THE DASH
00
10
is twice as long as the hyphen

+3
B
P2
1. A single dash m arks a change o f idea or sense in a sudden way.

CẤ
Romeo was w a itin g fo r J u lie t - b u t h e r fa th e r came to the window

instead.
A
2. T w in dashes are used to show a separated phrase o r tho ught in a

HÓ
sentence.
Í-
C a ll me - i f you have any tim e - and I ’ll e xplain it a ll to you.

-L
3. Dashes also separate a lis t in th e m iddle o f a sentence fro m the

b egin ning and end (tá ch k h ỏ i phần dầu và phần ñuôi của câu).
ÁN
The group - tw o g u ita rs, bass and drum s - played fo r over 2 hours.
TO
EXERCISE
NG
P u t dashes in these sentences where necessaryi

ƯỠ
1. We saw m ost o f the anim als a t the zoo lio n s, bears elephants and so
ID
on b u t we d idn ’t have tim e to see the crocodiles.

2. Bob D yla n probably one o f th e m ost famous m usicians in the w orld
BỒ
played in Newcastle in 1984:
308
3. I w a n t you to wash up b u t be ve ry careful w ith the w ine glasses.
ƠN
4. Shakespeare, D ickens, Jane Austen, D .H . Law rence a ll o f them
were on our re adin g lis t fo r E ng lish lite ra tu re .
NH
5. G ive your hom ew ork in i f you manage to fin is h i t by Monday
m orning.
UY
.Q
VI. COMPOUND ADJECTIVES WITH -ING
TP
te a r - je rk in g
O
fa s t - m oving
ĐẠ
tim e - saving
e a rth - s h a tte rin g
NG
ear - s p littin g
HƯ
long - su ffe rin g
ẦN
tim e - consum ing
w o rld - sh aking
TR
B
EXERCISE
00
F in d words fro m the above lis t w hich could be used to describe the
10
follow ing.
+3
1. a person who p a tie n tly puts up w ith m any problem s.

P2
2. a jo b th a t takes a lon g tim e .

CẤ
3. a sports car.
4. a ve ry se n tim e n ta l film .
A
5. a loud ro ck group.
HÓ
6. an idea w h ich w ill save a lo t o f tim e .

Í-
7. an event o f m a jo r im portance in th e news.

-L
VII. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH OVER

ÁN
1. b rin g over : convert [S]

TO
2. hold over : defer, postpone [S]

3. take over : assume c o n tro l o f [S]
NG
4. go over : cross
5. look over : inspect, scru tin ise [S]
ƯỠ
6. ta lk over : discuss [S]

ID
7. th in k over : consider
BỒ
309

EXERCISE
Hơn 1.000 dân bản xứ ñã quay trở lạ i vớ i tô n giáo củạ chúng tô i.
ƠN
. Mục cuối cùng tro n g chương trìn h n g h ị sự dã ñược hoãn lạ i cho ñến
tuần tớ i.
NH
. B ill ñã ñảm trá c h công việc k in lí doanh.
. A nh ấy tiế n ñến n ó i chuyện vớ i người bạn cũ của anh ta .
UY
. Chúng tô i xem x é t tấ t cả nhữ ng chiếc xe hơi cũ trước k h i lựa chọn
.Q
lầ n cuôi.
TP
. Chúng tô i ñã thảo lu ận vấn ñề ñó nhưng ñã kh ô n g th ể ñ i ñến m ột
thỏa thu ậ n (n h ấ t trí: agreem ent)
O
. Chúng tô i ñã xem x é t vấn ñề ñó và ñã ñ i ñến m ộ t q uyết ñ ịn h .
ĐẠ
III. NON- STANDARD FORMS OF ENGLISH
NG
Rock songs try to show sounds o f spoken E n g lish . H ere is a b rie f
HƯ
ntroductory lis t o f o th e r words in non -stand ard o f re g io n a l form s o f
English.
ẦN
Scottish
wee : sm a ll TR
B
b a irn : c h ild
00
bonny : p re tty
10
eye : yes
+3
laddie : boy
P2
lassie : g irl
CẤ
k irk : church
A
dram : sm a ll glass o f s p irits , u sua lly w h isk y

HÓ
sla in te : Good h e a lth !

Í-
Small children
-L
bye - byes : bed

ÁN
choo - choo : tra in

doggy, horsy, pussy etc : dog, horse, ca t etc
TO
Northern English
NG
thee, th y , th y s e lf : you, your, y o u rse lf

ƯỠ
Irish
ID
I ’m a fte r doing : I ’m going to do

BỒ
310

sure : o f course
poteen : ille g a lly made w h iske y
Australian
ƠN
cobber : frie n d
NH
tube : a can o f beer
UY
outback, bush : co untry
.Q
EXERCISE
TP
W rite down a n y o th e r re g io n a l words o r expressions you conce across in
O
Vietnamese.
ĐẠ
E x: mô (ñâu) dọi, chén (b á t) m ần (là m )
NG
IX. PREFIXES FROM GREEK WORDS
HƯ
C H R O N O - (o f tim e ) : chronology, chronom eter, synchronize
ẦN
E LE C TR O - (o f e le c tric ity ) : e le ctric, e le c tric ia n , e le c trify , electrocute
H YD R O - (o f w a te r) : dehydrated, h y d ra n t, hydro-ele ctric
M IC R O - (sm a ll) TR
: m ic ro film , microscope, m icrowave
N E O - (new ) : neo-classical, neologism
B
00
O RTHO R- (co rrect, stan dard): orthodox, o rthog raphy, orthopaedic

10
PH O NO - (o f sound) : phonetics, phonogram , phonology

PHO TO - (o f lig h t) : photocopy, photogenic, photograph
+3
P H Y S IO - (o f body) : physiology, p hysiotherap y, physique

P2
P S Y C H O -(o f m in d ) : p s y c h ia tris t, psychic, psychology

CẤ
PSEUDO- (fa lse ) : pseud, pseudo, pseudonym

PROTO- (firs t, o rig in a l) : protocol, protoplasm , prototype
A
T E L E - (lin k in g across distances) : telegram , telephone, telescope,

HÓ
te le visio n
TEC H N O - (a p plied science) : technology
Í-
SYM - / S Y N - (s h a rin g w ith ) : sym pa the tic, sym pathy, synchronize

-L
ÁN
EXERCISE
L ist the w ords in y o u r language w hich are the same (o r n e a rly the same)
TO
as one o f th e w ords in th e lis t above.

NG
X. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH ROUND

ƯỠ
1. go round : be s u ffic ie n t fo r everyone to receive a share.

ID
2. hand round : d is trib u te o r show round [S ] chuyền xem.

BỒ
311

3. come round : recover consciousness, revive
ƠN
4. pop round : v is it a person
NH
5. b rin g round : persuade (g e ne ra lly separated)
6. get round : spread
UY
7. ta lk round : persuade a person by ta lk in g (generally separated)
.Q
EXERCISE
TP
1. Có ñủ bánh ngọt ñể chia cho m ọi người không? (cake: uncountable)
O
2. A nh ấy chuyền cho m ọi người xem lá thư anh ấy vừa m ới nhận.
ĐẠ
3. Cuối cùng người d i xe ñạp ñã h ồ i tĩn h sau ta i nạn.
4. H ãy ghé thă m b ấ t cứ k h i nào bạn có giờ.
NG
5. H a i th a n h n iê n cuối cùng ñã th u y ế t phục ông già theo quan ñiểm
HƯ
của chúng.
6. Câu chuyện tung ra là anh ta b ị tù .
ẦN
7. A nh ñã tìm cách (manage) th u y ế t phục cha anh cho phép anh ñ i với
chúng tô i không?
TR
B
00

10
I. FOREIGN SUFFIXES TO FORM PLURALS

+3
P2
Some words can form th e ir p lu ra ls according to th e rules o f the

language th e y come from .
CẤ
- ae (L a tin ) : la rva -»• larvae

- X (French) : bureau -*■ bureaux; m ilie u -» m ilie u x
A
HÓ
- ices (L a tin ) : index -> indices

- es (L a n tin / G reek) : basis bases
Í-
- a (G reek) : phenom enon -» phenom ena

-L
- a (L a tin ) : datum -» data, m edium -» m edia

- i (L a tin ) : fungus -> fu n g i
ÁN
N o te : These words “data” and “ m edia” are now ra re ly used in the

TO
singular. Don’t say one ite m o f th e data “ o r one o f th e m edia.”

NG
EXERCISE
ƯỠ
Make these words p lu ra l according to the ru le s given above.

ID
1. cactus 5. chateau 9. syllabus 13 ra tjjus

2. plateau 6. appendix 10. bacterium 14 thesis
BỒ
3. nebula 7. alum na
312
4. c ris is „8 . axis 11. datum 15. addendum
ƠN
12. b a cillu s 16. analysis
NH
II. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH THROUGH
UY
1. be through (w ith ) : have fin ish e d w ith (colloquial)
2. look through : exam ine, inspect [S]
.Q
3. get through (w ith ) : fin is h (w ith ) (colloquial)
TP
4. see through : ensure th a t a ta sk is completed (generally
O
separated)
ĐẠ
5. put through : connect by telephone (generally separated), be
throug h, get through
NG
EXERCISE
HƯ
1. A n il ấy ñã chấm dứt quan hệ vớ i cô ấy.
ẦN
2. Bạn ñã xem k ĩ b à i th i chưa?
3. K h i tô i hoàn tấ t bản báo cáo này, tô i sẽ ñ i x i nê.
4. TR
M ộ t k h i anh ấy b ắ t ñầu ñiều tra vấn ñề ñó, anh ấy quyết tâm hoàn
B
tấ t nó.
00
5. Làm ơn cho tô i liê n lạc với số d iệ n th o ạ i phụ 104.

10
III. THE PUNCTUATION: BRACKETS (= PARENTHESES)

+3
P2
( )
1. Brackets are used to separate a d d itio n a l in fo rm a tio n from the rest
CẤ
o f a sentence. They are stro nger th a n dashes and less in fo rm a l in

A
style. In exam inations, i t is safer to use brackets th a n dashes.

HÓ
The Beatles (John, George, Paul & R ingo) broke up in 1970.

2. I f the w ords in brackets are p a rt o f th e sentence, a fu ll stop goes
Í-
outside.
-L
He w rote tw o books (“Tom Sawyer” , “The old M an and the Sea” ).

ÁN
3. I f the words in brackets are a com plete sentence, put the fu ll stop
in side the brackets.
TO
I ’l l m eet you a t ten. (M ake sure you’re ready.)

NG
EXERCISE
Putbracketsinthesentenceswherenecessary.
ƯỠ
ID
1. Jenny’s got the jo b b ut don’t te ll h e r th a t I to ld you.

BỒ
2. The M 39 from T a dw orth to Sandpool is being b u ilt now.
313

3. Fox and Box the estate agents are d ea lin g w ith th e fla ts .
4. The rin g s are made o f gold. I t ’s m ined in W ales.
5. The Rats, Johnny, V ince, S id and P h il are on T V today.
ƠN
IV. CONSTRUCTIONS WITH FIRST, SECOND & THIRD
NH
F IR S T - : firs t-a id , firs t-c la s s , firs t-h a n d , fir s t nam e, firs t
UY
n ig h t, fir s t offender, firs t-ra te , fir s t la dy
SEC O N D - : second-hand, second-best, second ra te , second
.Q
sig h t, second w in d , second natu re , second
TP
thoughts, second childhood
O
T H IR D - : th ird w o rld , th ird degree, th ird p a rty , th ird ra te
ĐẠ
F IF T H -, S IX T H - : fifth colum n, s ix th sense, s ix th fo rm
S E V E N T H -, E L E V E N T H - : seventh heaven, a t th e e le ven th hour
NG
EXERCISE
HƯ
F in d words in the lis t above w hich m ean th e sam e as the phrases below.
ẦN
1. a t the la s t m om ent, ju s t in tim e .
2. the US p residen t’s w ife. TR
3. developing countries n o t in the W estern o r S oviet blocks.
B
00
4. b ru ta l tre a tm e n t
10
5. not new
6. top q u a lity
+3
7. extrem e old age

P2
8. the opening o f a p la y or film .

CẤ
9. someone who has com m itted one crim e.

10. tra ito rs , people w o rkin g w ith th e ir country’s enemy.
A
HÓ
11. extra - sensory perception (2 w ords)

12. extrem e happiness
Í-
13. reconsidering a decision

-L
14. emergency m edical help

ÁN
15. poor q u a lity

TO
16. autom atic, n a tu ra l, easy

NG
17. w h at happens to an a th le te a fte r being exhausted once, w hen she /

he regains breath.
ƯỠ
L8. n o t very good

ID
BỒ

V. TWO-WORD VERBS WITH UP

1. b rin g up : re a r, educate [S]
2. come up : arise
ƠN
3. speak up o r out : speak lo u d ly & cle a rly
4. tu rn up: appear, a rriv e
NH
5. do up : tid y , p u t in order [S]
UY
6. shut up: stop ta lk in g (slang)
7. serew up : g a th e r up courage [S] thu h ế t can
.Q
ñảm
TP
EXERCISE
O
ĐẠ
1. Cặp vợ chồng g ià tố t bụng ñồng ý nuôi nấng ñứa trẻ mồ côi này.
2. T ô i sẽ tha m dự lễ n g h i ñó trừ k h i có b ấ t cứ ñiều gìnghiêm trọ n g
NG
p h á t sin h.
3. N ó i to lê n ! C húng tô i không th ể nghe bạn ở cuối phòng.
HƯ
4. N hiều bạn bè của tô i xu ấ t h iệ n tạ i cuộc họp.
5. G ia n hân của ông â y ñã sắp ñ ặ t nhà cửa gọn ghẽ tro n g k h i ông ta
ẦN
ñ i vắng.
6. Cầm m iệng d i và lắ n g nghe ba của con. TR
7. T ô i th u h ế t can ñảm ñể n ó i vớ i cô ta.
B
00
VI. PREFIX SELF-

10
SELF : self-assured, se lf-co nfid ent, self-conscious, self-contained,

+3
self-defence, se lf-co n tro l, self-service, se lf-su fficie n t, self-

P2
respect, self-righteous, se lf-sa tisfie d , se lf-sa crificin g

CẤ
EXERCISE
A
F in d w ords w hich co u ld a p p ly to the fo llo w in g :

HÓ
1. a new ly independent country.

Í-
2. an a p artm e n t w ith a separate entrance fo r another a pa rtm e n t in

-L
the same house.

3. a person w ho had no fo rm a l education.
ÁN
4. a re sta u ra n t w ith o u t w aiters.

TO
5. judo, ka ra te
6. a person w ho w orks alone and is th e ir own boss.
NG
VII. SOME THREE-WORD VERBS

ƯỠ
1. back out o f : w ith d ra w fro m

ID
BỒ
315

2. be up to be doing w rong o r m isch ie f
ƠN
3. c a rry on w ith continue w ith
NH
4. cash in on take fin a n c ia l advantage o f
5. catch up on b rin g w o rk / oneself up to date
UY
6. check up on in ve stig a te
7. come down w ith become i l l w ith
.Q
8. come in fo r suffer fro m ; get
TP
9. come up against meet
O
10. cut down on reduce consum ption o f
ĐẠ
11. do away w ith get rid of, stop, delete
12. face up to accept
NG
13. fa ll behind w ith fa ll to w o rk q u ickly enough
14. get away w ith succeed in doing sth bad (ly )
HƯ
15. get on w ith be frie n d ly w ith
ẦN
EXERCISE
TR
Complete the sentences w ith three - w ord verbs from the above lis t.
B
1. I ’d b e tte r check and see w h a t th e kid s ____ . You know the re ’s
00
alw ays trouble when they’re alone.

10
2. I ____ influenza ju s t before m y h oliday.

+3
3. Don’t le t me in te rru p t y o u __________ your w ork.

P2
4. I hear th e y’re going to _____ the Im p e ria l measurements

com pletely.
CẤ
5. I ’m going t o ____ sm oking.

A
6. Jane and I ____ each o th e r ve ry w e ll.

HÓ
7. You prom ised you’d help. You can’t ____ it now!

8. I ’ve ____a lo t o f problem s re cently.
Í-
9. The police have b e e n W ith e rs. They w a n t to know w here his

-L
money comes from .

ÁN
10. They reckon he’s com m itted several robberies and so fa r he’s ____
a ll o f them .
TO
11. I f they catch h im , he’l l have t o ______ the penalties.

12. I ’m so fa r behind w ith w ork. I ’l l have to w o rk la te u n til I ’v e ____
NG
it.
ƯỠ
13. Yes, I ’ve b e e n ____ w ork, too.

14. I t ’s a w onderful business idea. You’d b e tte r____ i t before someone
ID
else th in k s o f it!
BỒ
15. The governm ent h a s ____ a lo t o f c ritic is m recently.
316

VIII. PUNCTUATION: THE COLON
ƠN
(:) is used:
NH
1. before a lis t
UY
You should have the fo llo w in g item s w ith you: passport, a ir tic k e t,
money, tra v e lle r’s cheques.
.Q
2. before d ire c t speech
TP
He said: “I would lik e to welcome you a ll here today.
O
3. to separate 2 p arts o f a sentence w here th e fir s t p a rt leads you to
ĐẠ
expect the second p a rt.
He poured m y beer on the ground, stam ped on m y foot and laughed:
NG
th a t’s when I decided to h it h im !
4. when w ritin g dialogues in place o f invested commas
HƯ
John: I love you, M ary.
ẦN
M a ry: I love you, too.
EXERCISE TR
B
Put colons in to these sentences where necessary.
00
1. The new road made our house ve ry noisy the noise o f cars, lo rrie s
10
and buses was te rrib le .

+3
2. The Queen turne d and said “T ha n k you ve ry much” .

P2
3. I w aited and w aited fo r the news. A t la s t it came he was going to be

a ll rig h t.
CẤ
4. T his is w h a t I need a screw driver, a .h a m m e r, same n a ils and a

A
d rill.
HÓ
5. H am let “To be or n ot to be” O phelia “ Sorry? W h a t was the

question?”
Í-
-L
IX. WORDS THAT REPRESENT SOUNDS

ÁN
W ords th a t represent sounds are called “ O NO M ATO PO EIA” .

Onomatopoeia is th e form a tio n o f a w ord fro m a sound resem bling th a t
TO
associated w ith th e th in g named.

Ex: Cuckoo (from the sound o f a k in d o f b ird )
NG
Sizzle (the h issin g sound ch a ra cte ristic o f fry in g fa t)

ƯỠ
EXERCISE
ID
Match the sound in lis t A w ith the anim als o r th in g s happening in lis t B.
BỒ
Write each num ber in the appropriate box.
317

LIST A LỈSĨ B
1. bray be be (lừa) a) sheep
2. miaow / m i 3 0 / b) snake
ƠN
3. hiss sột soạt, lướt c) cow
NH
4. squeak kêu chít chít d) lion
e) bee
UY
5. quack cạp cạp
6. cock-a-doodle-doo cúc cù cu f) duck
.Q
7. roar gầm, rống g) dog
TP
8. squawk kêu ken két (vẹt) h) cock
O
i) cat
ĐẠ
9. buzz kêu vo ve (ong)
10. baa kêu be be (cừu) k) donkey
NG
11. pop tiếng phụt I) a door slamming shut
HƯ
12. splash sự tóe lên m) a chanypagne bottle opening
13. bang tiếng sập cửa n) an alarm ringing
ẦN
14. boom sự bùng nổ 0) something falling into the water
15. tick-íock tiếng tích tấc ñổng hồ TR p) a door being knocked
16. ting-a-ling tiếng reng ñổng hồ báo thức q) a bell / buzzer being pushed
B
00
17. tat-tat-tat tiếng cóc cóc gõ cửa r) a clock ticking

10
18. buzz tiếng chuông ñiện reng s) an explosion

+3
19. moo tiếng bò rống t) mouse

P2
20. woof sủa gâu gâu u) parrot

CẤ
X. THREE-WORD VERBS
A
1. go back on : fa il to keep a prom ise

HÓ
2. go in fo r : take p a rt in , be interested in
3. hold out fo r : continue a struggle or dispute fo r
Í-
4. jo in in w ith : p a rtic ip a te in
-L
5. keep out o f : avoid

ÁN
6. liv e up to : achieve w h a t is expected o f oneself

7. look back on : th in k about the past
TO
8. look down on : feel superior to

NG
9. look forw ard to : a n ticip a te w ith pleasure

10. make up fo r : com pensate fo r
ƯỠ
11. put up w ith : tolerate

ID
BỒ
318

12. ru n out o f : have none le ft

13. send away fo r : w rite to ask fo r
14. w a lk out on : leave, desert
ƠN
15. w rite o ff fo r : order goods by post
NH
EXERCISE
Complete the spaces w ith three-w ord verbs from the lis t above.
UY
1. I can’t ____ h is rudeness any longer!
.Q
2. I t ’s m a il order. I ____ it.
TP
3. G ive me the address. I ’l l ____ ; one too.
O
4. H e ____ h is w ife and fa m ily.
ĐẠ
5. The w orkers are on s trik e . They’r e ______ b e tte r conditions.
6. B ut you prom ised! You can’t _ _ _ your word.
NG
7. I ’m ____ m y holiday.
HƯ
8. He’s a te rrib le snob. H e _____everyone.
9. S m ith was in prison fo r 3 years before they found out he was
ẦN
innocent. N o th in g c a n ____ th a t lo st tim e.
10. Come o n !____ ! <?. We’re h aving a great game o f footb all.
11. No, than ks. I ’ve n e v e r_foo tb all. TR
B
12. I t ’s d iffic u lt fo r h im to _____ h is parents’ expectations.
00
13. Oh, no. I ’ve _ _ _ p etro l, and i t ’s m iles to a garage.

10
1 4 .1 o fte n _____m y schooldays.

15. Look, try a n d _____trouble, i f you can!
+3
P2
XI.PUNCTUATION: THE SEMI-COLON

CẤ
(;)
1. The sem i-colon is n o t an essential punctuation m a rk, as i t can be
A
HÓ
replaced by a comma or fu ll stop.

2. I t is useful, how ever, w here fu ll stops w ould break th e flo w and
Í-
commas w ould n ot be strong enough, p a rtic u la rly in lis ts o f

-L
exam ples sta rte d w ith a colon.

I lik e to spend weekends re la xin g: p la yin g w ith the c h ild re n ; doing
ÁN
the garden; m eeting m y frie n d s and neighbours.

TO
3. I t is p a rtic u la rly useful in lis ts w here th e re are abready a lo t o f

commas.
NG
The plane fille d up w ith passengers: to u rists w ith cameras, sunhats,

ƯỠ
sun glasses and big sm iles; businessm en w ith calculators, briefcases

and p orta ble computers.
ID
BỒ
319

EXERCISE
ƠN
Change commas to sem i-colons where necessary.
NH
1. The villag e square was alw ays crowded on m a rke t day: farm ers with
sheep, cows, and goats, young c h ild re n ru n n in g round looking a t the
UY
sta lls, anim als and people, woman shopping fo r fresh eggs,
.Q
vegetable and d a iry produce.
TP
2. I often th in k o f m y schooldays: the h o t afternoons try in g to
concentrate on F rench verbs, h is to ry dates and m aps, the cold, wet,
O
w in te r afternoons on the fo o tb a ll fie ld , covered w ith mud, and the
ĐẠ
grey, autum n days w hen tim e seemed to pass slow ly.
NG
XII. SUMMARY OF WORD STUDY AND TWO-WORD VERBS
HƯ
N° WORD FORMATION PHRASAL N° WORD FORMATION PHRASAL
ẦN
VERBS VERBS
31 Nouns: -ability, -ibility catch TR 46 Nouns: -or -er -ist V + along
B
drop
00
10
32 Nouns and adjs: -ist, draw 47 Prefixes dis- mis- V + around

-ism , -ive lay
+3
P2
33 Nouns: -or, -our, -ure A - E 48 Prefixes re- fore- co- V + before

CẤ
34 Nouns: -hood, -dom; F - M 49 Prefixes out- under- V + behind

-ship over-
A
HÓ
35 Nouns: -al, -Old o-s 50 Prefixes unde- V + by

36 Nouns: -ian, -ant, -ent T -w 51 Prefixes semi- V + down
Í-
fellow- ex- under-

-L
37 Adjective V + away 52 Prefixes anti- pro- V + in

ÁN
38 Review of adjectives V + back 53 Latin prefixes v + off

TO
39 Ways of expressing V + forward 54 Latin prefixes V + on

NG
“one and same”

ƯỠ
40 Ways of expressing V + out 55 • Coupsound adjs V + over

“two” “double” and with -ING
ID
“both" • Non standard

BỒ
forms of English
320
ƠN
41 Prefixes related to V + from 56 Greek prefixes V + round
numbers
NH
42 Verbs formed by V + like 57 Plurals: words of V + through
UY
adding EN to adjs or V + with foreign origin
nouns
V + without
.Q
TP
43 Verbs: -ify, -ize, -ese V + after 58 Construction with V + up
FIRST, SECOND,
O
V + against
ĐẠ
THIRD
V + for
NG
44 Verbs: -ate V + about 59 Prefix self- Three-word
verbs
HƯ
45 Prefixes em -, en- pre-, V + across 60 Words which Three-word
ẦN
post- represent sounds verbs
N o te : T h is p a rt is the co ntin u ation o f P a rt IV G ram m ar 13C.
TR
B
00
10
+3
P2
CẤ
A
HÓ
Í-
-L
ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ

LANGUAGE STUDY TEST
ƠN
(For learners of c level)
NH
Tim e: 90 m inutes
UY
Score: 60
.Q
I. PHRASAL VERBS
TP
In the fo llo w in g sentences, circle the form in parentheses th a t
O
means the same as th e u nd erlin ed w ord o r w ords.
ĐẠ
1. Louis was depending on the P ittsb u rg h Steelers to w in the
cham pionship, (p ic kin g out / counting on)
NG
2. D r. C lem ents d is trib u te d the m a te ria ls a t th e dean’s conference,
HƯ
(passed out / bro ug ht up)
3. Archeologists continue searching fo r buried E gyp tia n treasures,
ẦN
(keep on / do aw ay w ith )
4. Four arm ed m en robbed the bank la s t week and escaped w ith an
TR
undeterm ined am ount o f cash, (held up / pointed out)
B
5. We had to postpone the m eeting because too m any people had the
00
flu . (drop out o f/ p ut off)

10
6. W hen K aren became ill, h e r colleagues had to manage w ith o u t her.

+3
(get along / take o ff)

7. The D epartm ent C hairm an asked h is s ta ff to help w ith the
P2
re g is tra tio n , (called on/ counted on)

CẤ
8. I f we te rm in a te our re la tio n s w ith th a t country, we’l l have to find

another supplie r o f ra w m a terials, (break o ff / draw up)
A
9. A fte r a rriv in g a t th e check-in counter, D ennis discovered th a t he

HÓ
was in the w rong a irp o rt, (found out / pointed out)

Í-
10. K evin q u it the engineering program because he found i t too

-L
d iffic u lt, (checked out / dropped out of)

11. The gasoline fumes caused M ike to fa in t, (pass out / break ofiD
ÁN
12. The baseball game had to be postponed because o f the inclem ent
TO
w eather, (put o ff / p ut on)

13. A ll bids fo r the p roject had to be subm itted by N ovem ber 1.
NG
(turned in / draw n up)

14. Because she is so ta ll, Sandy doesn’t lik e high-heeled shoes, (care
ƯỠ
fo r / pick out)
ID
15. M y advisor indicated numerous errors in m y proposal and to ld me

BỒ
322

to rew rite it. (figured out / pointed out)

II. WORD BUILDING OR FORMATION
ƠN
A. The -ER -OR -EE -1ST suffixes. Use the suffixes to give the
NH
name of the following.
UY
E x a m p le : A person w ho plays jazz on the piano: a ja zz p ia n is t.
1. The th in g th a t w ipes ra in o ff your car w in d scre e n :____ .
.Q
2. A person who takes professional ph o to gra p hs:___
TP
3. A m achine fo r w ashing d is h e s :____ .
O
4. A person who donates th e ir kidneys upon th e ir d e a th :____ .
ĐẠ
5. The person to w hom a le tte r is addressed:____ .
B. Rewrite each sentence by changing the underlined words,
NG
using a suffix. Make any spelling changes needed.
HƯ
1. M ost o f h is crim es can be fo rg ive n .
M ost o f h is crim es a re _____.
ẦN
2. The club refuses to a d m it anyone n o t w earing a tie .
TR
The club refuses ____to anyone n o t w earing a tie .
3. H er o nly fa u lt is th a t she is la zy.
B
H er o n ly fa u lt i s ____ .
00
4. T his firm has produced a lo t in recent years.

10
T h is firm has been v e ry ____ in recent years.

+3
5. I found the book ve ry easy and pleasant to read.

P2
I found the book v e ry ____ .

c. Practise using words with negative prefixes. Contradict the
CẤ
following statements in the same way as the example.

A
E x a m p le : H e’s a very honest m an. I don’t agree. I th in k he’s

HÓ
dishonest.
1. I alw ays fin d h im ve ry sen sitive .
Í-
-L
2. T hat’s a ve ry re le v a n t p o in t.
ÁN
3. She’s alw ays obedient.

TO
NG
4. He’s ve ry e ffic ie n t.
ƯỠ
5. He’s a to le ra n t person.
ID
BỒ
323

D. RepSace the underlined parts in these sentences by suitable

words with prefixes which have the same meanings.
ƠN
E x a m p le : He’s in favour o f the A m erican approach = He’s pro-
NH
A m erican.
1. The BBC trie s to avoid pronouncing foreign w ords in c o rre c tly .
UY
.Q
2. M ost people say the y have to w o rk too ha rd b u t are paid too lit t le .
TP
3. He dated h is cheque w ith a date th a t was la te r th a n the re a l date.
O
ĐẠ
4. She’s s till on good term s w ith the man who used to be h e r husband.
NG
5. He made so m any m istakes in th e le tte r th a t he had to w rite it
HƯ
again.
ẦN
E. Complete this table by giving the person nouns, the adjectives
TR
and the abstract nouns from the given verbs.
B
VERB PERSON NOUN ADJECTIVE ABSTRACT N0ÌBỈ
00
10
Convert Convert Convertible conversion

+3
Produce
P2
Conduct
CẤ
Impress
A
Support
HÓ
impose
Í-
-L
F. Pair the formal verbs below with their phrasal verb

equivalents.
ÁN
(1) (2)
TO
1. support a. p u t o ff
2. oppose b. p ut down
NG
3. deposit c. go against
ƯỠ
4. postpone d. tu rn away
5. d iv e rt e. hold up
ID
BỒ
324

G. Can you work out the meanings of the underlined words in the
sentences below? To help you, here are the meanings of the
ƠN
main Latin prefixes:
NH
IN TR O = w ith in , in w a rd OB, o : against DE : down, from
IN , Im = in to , in RE : again, back E X : out
UY
SUB = under TR A N S : across
.Q
1. She’s a ve ry in tro sp e ctive person and he’s also very in tro v e rte d .
TP
[lo o k in g a t oneself] [reserved]
2. He alw ays seems to oppose e ve ryth in g I suggest.
O
ĐẠ
[ ]
3. I don’t th in k i t is h e a lth y to repress one’s em otions too much.
NG
[ ]
4. The docum entary exposed co rru p tion in h ig h places.
HƯ
[ ]
5. Perhaps you can deduce w h a t th e w ord meams from the way it is
ẦN
form ed. [ ]
TR
H. Fill each of the blanks to form a new compound adjective.
B
1. -e ve d 2. - p ro of
00
3. -m in d e d 4. - necked
10
5. - made 6. - free
+3
7. - headed 8. - hearted
P2
9. - sighted 10. - o ff
CẤ
TH E END
A
^ J t m d íi& e k . Ễ ú - ụ m d
HÓ
Í-
-L
ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
325

ANSWER KEYS
ƠN
TO PART ONE
NH
UY
.Q
LEMENTARY GRAMMAR
TP
O
ĐẠ
II. A,
NG
1. H e llo. I ’m M in h . 6. A re you fro m V ie t Nam?
HƯ
2. H e llo . I ’m Lan. Yes, I am.
3. A re you a teacher? 7. W here are you from ?
ẦN
No, I ’m not. I ’m fro m France.
4. A re you a student? TR 8. H e llo . How are you?
Yes, I km. 9. F in e , th a n ks. A nd you?
B
5. A re you from Japan? 10. I ’m ve ry w e ll, than ks.
00
No, I ’m not.
10
B
+3
B: H ello. (1) B : Yes, I am. (4)

P2
B: I'm Peter B row n. (2) B : N o, I ’m not. (5)

CẤ
B: No, Fm not. (3) B : I ’m fro m A m erica (6)

c.
A
HÓ
1. A re you E nglish? Yes, we are.

2. A re you Ita lia n ? Yes, we are.
Í-
3. A re you M exican? No, we aren’t.

-L
4. A re you Russian? N o, we aren’t.

ÁN
5. A re you a businessman? N o, I ’m not.

6. Is he a to u rist? Yes, he is.
TO
7. Is she a teacher? No, she is n ’t.

NG
8. A re you students? Yes, we are.

ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
326

ƠN
II. A.
1. W ha t is it? I t ’s a spoon.
NH
2. W hat are they? They are forks;
UY
3. W ha t is it? I t ’s an ice cream.
4. W hat are they? They are keys.
.Q
5. W hat is it? I t ’s a watch.
TP
6. W hat are they? T hey are oranges.
O
B.
ĐẠ
books ÍS Ỉ chairs /z / beds Izi windows /z / knives in women
/7J houses tvii
NG
cups /S/ eggs oranges /z / shelves /z / children
HƯ
students /S/ umbrellas /z / buses /IZ / watches /IZ / feet
forks /S/ trains /z / countries Izl lorries ItJ teeth
ẦN
pìates /S/ glasses /IZ / ashtrays Izl keys / z / men
c. TR
B
1. W hat’s h is job? H e’s a m anager.
00
a p o rte r,
10
a cook,
+3
a p ilo t,
P2
a m echanic.
CẤ
a ta x i d riv e r.
A
2. W hat’s h er job? She’s a re ce ption ist.

HÓ
a secretary.
an a ir hostess.
Í-
-L
3. W hat’s your job? I ’m a student.

a teacher.
ÁN
4. W hat are th e ir jobs? They’re w a ite rs.

TO
cleaners.
policem en.
NG
D.
ƯỠ
2. Is th is your case? No, i t isn ’t.

ID
3. Is th a t your pen over there? Yes, i t is.

BỒ
327

4. Is th a t your um bre lla over there? Yes, i t is.
ƠN
5. A re these your apples? Yes, th e y are.
NH
6. A re these your tables? No, th e y aren ’t.
7. A re those your oranges over there? No,th e y aren’t.
UY
8. A re those your houses over there? Yes, th e y are.
.Q
TP
91 A. No answer key
O
B.
ĐẠ
1. We are hungry.
NG
2. The ch ild re n are th irs ty .
3. M rs. B row n is poor.
HƯ
4. M r. B lack is strong.
5. They are ric h .
ẦN
6. Is th is your radio? No, i t is n ’t.
TR
7. Is th a t your ra d io over there? Yes, i t is.
8. W hat’s h e r name? She’s Lan.
B
00
9. W hat are th e ir jobs? They are m echanics.

10. A re these your keys? Yes, th e y are.
10
G.
+3
P2
1. Yes, I am. 6. Yes, he is.

2. No, I ’m not. 7. Yes, she is.
CẤ
3. Yes, I am. 8. No, he is n ’t.

4. Yes, I am. 9. No, he isn ’t.
A
HÓ
5. No, I ’m n ot. 10. Yes, she is.

D.
Í-
2. There’s a telephone in the liv in g room .

-L
There isn ’t a telephone in th e liv in g room .

ÁN
Is the re a telephone in th e liv in g room?

3. There are some ch airs in th e liv in g room .
TO
There aren’t any chairs in th e liv in g room.

NG
A re the re any chairs in th e liv in g room?

4. There are some cupboards in th e kitch e n .
ƯỠ
There aren’t any cupboards in th e kitch e n .

A re th e re any cupboards in th e kitchen?
ID
5. There are some magazines in th e liv in g room .

BỒ
There aren’t any magazines in th e liv in g room.

Are th ere any magazines in th e living room?
ƠN
E.
1. W here are the glasses? They are on the shelf.
NH
2. W here is th e cupboard? I t is in the kitch en .
UY
3. W here are the bottles? They are in the cupboard.
4. W here is th e sofa? I t is Lr. the liv in g room .
.Q
5. W here are the pens? They are on the desk.
TP
6. W here is th e desk? I t is in th e room .
O
7. W here are the lamps? They are on th e ce ilin g.
ĐẠ
8. W here are the tabifis? They are in the classroom.
F.
NG
M y house is large. There is a liv in g room and there are three
HƯ
bedroms. In th e liv in g room , the re is a ra d io, a te le visio n and a sofa.
ẦN
In th e kitch e n , th e re is an e le ctric cooker, a frid g e and a cupboard. In
ray room the re is a tab le w ith four chairs. On the table, there are some
TR
pens, a telephone and a lam p. There are some books on the shelf. M;y
B
room is nice.
00
G.
10
1. H ow much is tha t? I t ’s 19p / pence.

+3
2. H ow much is the book? I t ’s 60p / pence.

P2
CẤ
3. How much are the radios? They’re £7.84 / seven pounds

eighty-four.
A
HÓ
4. H ow much are th e apples: T hey’re 50p / pence.

5. How m uch is th e double w hisky? I t ’s £1.50 / one pound fifty .
Í-
-L
6. Is the re a school near here? Yes, the re is.

ÁN
7. Is the re a m a rke t near here? N o, th ere is n ’t.

TO
8. A glass o f beer, please. H ere yoi; are, s ir.

9. Could you pass th e sugar, please? Yes, c e rta in ly .
NG
10. W hat’s your phone num ber? I t ’s 10443.

ƯỠ
H.
ID
I. How much is th e fru it?

BỒ
2. H ow m uch is th e juice?
32Í

3. How much are the mushrooms?

4. How much are the peas?
5. How much is the green salad?
ƠN
6. How much is th e ro a st chicken?
7. How much are th e g rille d lam b chops?
NH
8. How much is th e tea?
UY
I.
.Q
1. one pound fifty -o n e
2. seven pounds e ig h ty-fo u r
TP
3. eleven pounds seventeen
O
4. three pounds n in e ty-tw o
ĐẠ
5. one pound forty-seven
6. one pound ten
NG
7. te n pounds seventy-eight
HƯ
8. tw e n ty-tw o pounds th irty -n in e
9. sixteen pounds n in e ty -s ix
ẦN
10. tw elve pounds s ix ty -fiv e
11. e ig h t pounds tw e n ty-th re e
12. four pounds e ig h ty
TR
B
13. one penny, tw o pennies o r tw o pence
00
14. th irte e n pence / pennies

10
15. nineteen pence

16. fo rty pence
+3
17. fourteen pence

P2
18. tw o seven double fo u r fiv e

CẤ
19. double e ig h t one seven n in e

20. four tw o four seven e ig h t
A
21. o one double seven tw o double n in e tw elve

HÓ
22. o five one seven four eight double three nineteen

23. o six one e ig h t tw o one tw o e ig h t fiv e
Í-
-L
K.
ÁN
You : I ’d lik e th e m enu, please. (1)

You : I ’d lik e some soup. (2)
TO
You : Yes, please. A nd I ’d lik e some lam b chops. (3)

You : I ’d lik e some peas and a salad, please. (4)
NG
You : A nd I ’d lik e w ine, please. (5)

ƯỠ
You :,A b o ttle o f red w ine, please. (6)

ID
BỒ
330

II. A.
ƠN
1. H e r s k ir t is black.
2. H is ja c k e t is brow n.
NH
3. Y our dress is p in k .
4. T h e ir s h irts are yellow .
UY
5. M y trousers are grey.
.Q
6. H e r jeans are blue.
TP
7. Y our shoes are o rarge.
8. H is p u llo ve r is red.
O
9. W ho is this? I t ’s M rs. M a rtin . She’s a housewife.
ĐẠ
10. Who is that? It’s Dr. Clark. She’s a doctor.
NG
11. W ho is th a t? I t ’s M r. S m ith . He’s a policem an.
12. W h at colour is th e book? I t ’s w h ite .
HƯ
13. W hat colour are th e trousers? They’re black.
14. W hat colour is th e pen? I t ’s orange.
ẦN
B.
Today his trousers are green, TR
B
his shirt is white,
00
his pullover is blue

10
his shoes are black.

+3
His briefcase is brown.

P2
c.
CẤ
1. Whose bicycle is it? It’s Tom’s (bicycle)

A
2. Whose car is it? I t ’s m y fa th e r’s.

HÓ
3. Whose hat is it? It’s Peter’s.

4. Whose glasses are they? They are Mary’s.
Í-
5. W hose trousers are they? T hev are c h ild re n ’s.

-L
6. Whose shoes are they? They art her boss’s /’bDSiz/

ÁN
7. He’s M ik e ’s fa th e r.
8. She’s Sue’s m other.
TO
9. H e’s Sue’s b ro th e r.
10. She’s M ik e ’s old er siste r.
NG
11. He’s th e ir son.

ƯỠ
12. She's your daughter.

ID
BỒ

ƠN
NH
1. T h is is m y frie n d ’s hat.
2. T h a t is m y fa th e r’s room .
UY
3. These are m y m other’s books.
4. Those are the pupils’ bags.
.Q
5. Those are the pupils’ desks.
TP
6. M y siste r’s room is large.
7. The pup ils’ notebooks are on. th e desk.
O
ĐẠ
8. M y s is te r’s name is Lan.
9. Hong is Quang’s sister.
NG
10. Quang is m y teacher’s son.
11. I t ’s the door o f th e car.
HƯ
12. I t ’s the dog’s ta il.
13. I t ’s the corner o f the stre et.
ẦN
14. I t ’s the ro o f o f th e house.
15. The w indow o f the house is new.TR
E.
B
00
1. There are some apples. 11. There is some w a ter.

10
2. There are some bananas. 12. There is some rice.

3. There are some onions. 13. There is some w ine.
+3
4. There are some tom atoes. 14. There is some cheese.

P2
5. There are some m ushrooms. 15. There is some beer.

CẤ
6. There are some ham burgers. 16. There is some m eat.

7. There are some peas. 17. There is some o il.
A
8. There are some eggs. 18. There is some sugar.

HÓ
9. There are some oranges. 19. There is some sa lt.

10. There are some lem ons. 20. There is some m ilk .
Í-
F.
-L
1. There is n ’t any sugar. 5. There aren’t any onions.

ÁN
2. There aren’t any tom atoes. 6. There isn ’t any rice.

3. There isn ’t any o il. 7. There aren’t any ham burgers.
TO
4. There aren’t any eggs. 8. There is n ’t any w ine.

NG
G. •
ƯỠ
1. Is th e r e a n y m ilk? Y es, th e re IS.

2. Is th e re any water? No, the re is n ’t.
ID
3. A re there any peas? Yes, the re are.

BỒ
4. A re there any grapes? No, there aren’t.

ƠN
5. A re there any eggs? Yes, there are.
6. Is there any m argarine? No, the re is n ’t.
NH
7. Is there any oil? Yes, the re is.
8. A re there any lemons? No, the re aren’t.
UY
9. Is there any cheese? Yes, the re is.
.Q
10. A re the re any ham burgers? No, th e re aren’t.
11. Is the re any rice? Yes, there is.
TP
H.
O
ĐẠ
I. How much b u tte r is there? There’s a lo t.
2. How m any bananas are there? There are a lo t.
NG
3. How much cheese is there? There’s a lo t.
4. How m any apples are there in the box? There is one.
HƯ
5. How much m ilk is there? There’s a lo t.
6. How m any lem ons are there in the fridge? There are five.
ẦN
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 5Â
TR
SI. Ầ.
B
00
2. A: W ould you lik e a cup o f coffee?

10
B: Yes, please.
A: How about a piece o f cake?
+3
B: No, thanks.
P2
3. A: W ould you lik e a sandwich?

CẤ
B: Yes, please.
A: How about a glass o f beer?
A
3: No, thanks.
HÓ
B.
Í-
2. A: I ’d lik e a p a ir o f socks, please.

-L

ÁN
A: Ten.
3. A: I ’d lik e a p a ir o f shorts, please.
TO

NG
A: T h irty .
4. A: I ’d lik e a p a ir o f trousers, please.
ƯỠ

ID
Á: T h irty -tw o .
BỒ
5 . À : ■I ’d l i k e a p a i r o f t ig h t s , p le a s e .
õỉỗẫ


A : T w enty-five.
ƠN
6. A : I ’d lik e a p a ir o f gloves, please.
NH
UY
A: Tw elve.
7. A : I ’d lik e a p a ir o f jeans, please.
.Q
TP
A: T h irty -tw o .
8. A : I ’d lik e a p a ir o f glasses, please.
O
ĐẠ
A: Five.
NG
c.
HƯ
1. T u rn o ff the lig h ts . 9. T u rn on th e m icrophone.
2. P ut on your ja cke t. 10. Take o ff yo ur coat.
ẦN
3. P ut on your tie . 11. Look a t th e blackboard.
4. T u rn on the radio. 12. Don’t d rin k beer.
5. Take o ff your shoes. TR
13. Don’t eat sugar.
B
6. P ut on your socks. 14. Don’t d rin k alcohol.
00
7. P ut on your w atch. 15. D on’t ta lk in class.

10
3. T u rn o ff the tele vision .

+3
Ol
P2
L. Look a t him . 10. Look a t h im .

Ỉ. Look a t her. 11. Look a t her.
CẤ
t. Look a t them . 12. Look a t her.

A
L Look a t h e r and me. 13. Look a t her.

HÓ
i. Look a t them . 14. Look a t h im .

i. Look a t her. 15. Look a t them .
Í-
. Look a t them . 16. Look a t her.

-L
. Look a t her. 17, Look a t them .

. Look a t him .
ÁN
'2-
TO
. W hat make is your TV? I t ’s a Sony.

NG
W hat make is th is b o ttle o f perfume? I t ’s a C hanel. i

ƯỠ
W hat make is th is plane? I t ’s a Boeing.

ID
W hat m ake is th a t watch? I t ’s a Sekonda.

BỒ

5. W hat m ake is h e r car? I t ’s a Mercedes.

6. W ha t m ake is th e ir camera? I t ’s a Kodak.
ƠN
7. W ha t m ake is John’s car? I t ’s a F ia t.
NH
8. W hat m ake is A nne’s watch? I t ’s a C itize n .
9. W h a t m ake is th e ir TV? I t ’s a P h ilip s .
UY
10. I t ’s Ita lia n w ine.
.Q
E.
TP
1. n ineteen seventy-eight 7. nineteen eighty-tw o
O
2. nin eteen seventy-five 8. nineteen n in e ty -s ix
ĐẠ
3. eighteen tw e n ty 9. sixteen sixty-tw o
4. nineteen sixty-th re e 10. nineteen forty-seven
NG
5. nineteen th irty -o n e
11. nineteen th irte e n
HƯ
6. seventeen fo rty -e ig h t
12. fifte e n e ig hty-five
ẦN
F.
- In m y bedroom , there’s an e le ctric fan, an a ir-c o n d itio n e r and a
w ardrobe.
TR
B
- In m y house, the re ’s a liv in g room . There are three bedrooms and
00
tw o bathroom s.
10
- In m y k itc h e n , there ’s a frid g e , a cooker, and a cupboard.

+3
G.
P2
1. Can you see th a t house? Yes, I can.

CẤ
2. He can p la y tennis.
3. She can’t speak French.
A
HÓ
4. M a ry can speak Japanese.

5. Can th e y d rive a car? No, th e y can’t.
Í-
6. Tom can sin g E n g lish songs.

-L
7. Can your fa th e r play the guitar? Yes, he can.

8. We can dance.
ÁN
9. Can S a lly’s husband cook?

TO
10. H ow m any languages can you speak? Two.

H.
NG
1. I can’t telephone. Can you telephone? Yes, I can!

ƯỠ
2. She can’t p lay the piano. Can she p la y the piano? No, she can’t.
3. H e can’t do h is exercises. Can he do h is exercises? Yes, he can.
ID
BỒ
335

ƠN
4. They can’t meet a t school. Can the y m eet a t school? No, th e y can’t.
5. He can’t go to th e cinem a. G ail he go to th e cinema? Yes, he can.
NH
6. She can’t speak French. Can she speak French? No, she can’t.
7. We can’t speak m any languages. Can you speak m any languages?
UY
No, we can’t.
8. Sam can’t m eet you here. Can Sam m eet you here? Yes, he can.
.Q
9. He can’t sw im . Can he swim ? No, he can’t.
TP
10. He can’t play th e v io lin . Can he p la y th e vio lin ? Yes, he can.
O
11. They can’t speak Spanish. Can the y speak Spanish? No, the y can’t.
ĐẠ
12. She can’t do h er exercises. Can she do h e r exercises? Yes, she can.
S.
NG
T h is is M r. B row n. He is a captain. He’s b ig , strong and
HƯ
handsome. He can p la y sports. He can p la y fo o tb a ll and te n n is. H is
house is large and expensive. H is car is a C adillac. He is ric h and
ẦN
famous.
A nd th is is M r. W hite . He is a teacher. He is n o t b ig and strong
TR
b u t he’s very in te llig e n t. He can speak tw o languages. He can speak
B
E n g lish and French. H is house is sm all and cheap. H is car is a M in i.
00
He is poor b ut famous.
10
+3
P2
II. Â.
CẤ
1. T h is is a new dress. Can I tr y i t on?

2. T h is is a nice p a ir o f shoes. Can I tr y them on?
A
HÓ
3. T his is a b ig raincoa t. Can I w ear i t / p ut i t on?

4. I t ’s five past nin e. Please take o ff your coat.
Í-
-L
5. T u rn o ff the te le visio n .
6. Take o ff your s h irt because i t is hot.
ÁN
7. I ’d lik e a p a ir o f socks.
TO
8. She’d lik e a p a ir o f glasses.

NG
9. W ould you lik e a glass o f orange juice?

ƯỠ
10. I t ’s te n o’clock.
ID
11. I ’d lik e some in fo rm a tio n about E ng lish.

BỒ

12. W hat colour w ouỊíỉ your fa th e r like?
ƠN
13. W hat size are you?
NH
14. How about a ÍÌỈIĨ 1 tonigh t?
UY
B.
.Q
2. H ave you got a brother? Yes, I have.
TP
3. Have you got a radio? Yes, I have.
O
4. Have you got a lo t o f money? No, I haven’t.
ĐẠ
5. H ave you got a cassettle player? Yes, I have.
NG
6. Have you got a watch.? Yes, I have.
HƯ
7. Have you got a camera? N g , I haven’t.
c.
ẦN
1. They haven’t got a b ig room . Have the y got a b ig room?
2. TR
We haven’t got red pencils. Have you got red pencils?
3. You haven’t got an E n g lish book. Have you got an E n g lish book?
B
00
4. I haven’t got a blue pencil. H ave you got a blue pencil?

5. He hasn’t got a th ic k book. Has he got a th ic k book?
10
6. She hasn’t got a long ru le r. Has she got a long ruler?

+3
D.
P2
1. Lan has got an E n g lish book.

CẤ
2. He has got m any E n g lish books in h is bookcase.

3. She has got a blue p e n cil in h e r box.
A
4. I havé got th ree brothers.

HÓ
5. We have got tw elve desks in our classroom .

Í-
E.
-L
1. H ow much w h isk y have you got?

ÁN
2. How m any bottles o f w h isky have you got?

3. H ow m uch p e tro l
TO
4. How m any litre s o f p e tro l

NG
5. H ow much tobacco
ƯỠ
6. H ow m any gram m es o f tobacco

ID
7. H ow much tea
BỒ
337

8. How m any packets o f tea

9. How much coffee
ƠN
10. H ow m any ja rs o f coffee
11. How much perfum e
NH
12. How m any b o ttle s o f perfum e
UY
F.
.Q
1. That isn’t a red pencil. Is that a red pencil?
TP
2. These aren’t thick books. Are these thick books?
3. The walls aren’t yellow. Are the walls yellow?
O
ĐẠ
4. The pictures aren’t on the wall. Are the pictures on the wall?
5. He hasn’t got a red searf. Has he got a red scari?
NG
6. Her father isn’t an engineer. Is her father an engineer?
7. There isn ’t a blackboard in fro n t o f th e p up ils.
HƯ
Is there a blackboard in front of the pupils?
ẦN
8. Thera aren’t four chairs in the comer of the room.
Are there four chairs in the comer of the room?
G.
TR
B
1. W ho has g o t a sm a ll bag?
00
10
2. W ho has g ot a th ic k notebook?
+3
3. W hat have you got in yo u r room?

P2
4. W hat have you g o t on yo u r desk?

CẤ
5. How many brothers and sisters has Peter got?

6. How many sons has she got?
A
HÓ
H.
I. What is this? Is this the bed of your brother? Whose bed is this?
Í-
2. Is the name of your friend Nam? What is the name of your friend?
-L
3. Who is an engineer? Is his brother an engineer? What’s his

ÁN
brother’s job?
4. What is there in front of the house? Is there a garden in front of the
TO
house?
NG
5. Who is at the desk? Is the teacher at the desk? Where’s the

teacher? /
ƯỠ
6. Who has got a radio? What has your father got?

Has ya ur fa th e r g ot a radio?
ID
BỒ
338

7. Who is thirty years old? Is she thirty years old? How old is she?
8. Are there twelve months in a year? How many m on th s are there in
a year?
ƠN
1.
NH
3. It’s his 6. It’s hers
UY
4. It’s theirs 7. It’s yours
5. It’s John’s 8. It’s Mary’s
.Q
J.
TP
2. Which car would you like? I’d like the fast one.
O
3. icecream chocolate one.
ĐẠ
4. television big
5. tie plain
NG
6. Which flowers would you like? I’d like the exepensive one.
HƯ
7. shoes Italian
8. cassettes expensive
ẦN
9. envelopes large
10. buttons square TR
K.
B
00
1. W hich house is his? The sm a ll one’s h is .

10
2. Which car is theirs? The expensive one’s theirs.

+3
Which car is his? The cheap one’s his.

P2
3. Which record is theirs? The classical one’s theirs.

Which record is his? The pop music one’s his.
CẤ
4. Which television is theirs? The colour one’s theirs.

A
Which television is his? The black and white one’s his.

HÓ
5. Which clock is theirs? The big one’s theirs.

Which clock is his? The small one’s his.
Í-
-L
L.
2. They’ve got a small house, but they’d like a big one.
ÁN
3 We’ve got a black and white television, but we’d like a colour one.
TO
4. He’s g ot a blue s u it, b u t he'd lik e a grey one.

5. She’s got an English watch, but she’d like a Swiss one.
NG
6. You’ve got a cheap pen, but you’d like an expensive one.

ƯỠ
M.
ID
2. Which one would they like? They’d like the English one.
BỒ
339

ƠN
3. W hich one would she like ? She’d lik e the new one.
4. W hich one would you like ? I ’d lik e the green one.
NH
5. W hich ones would th e y like ? They’d lik e the cheap ones.
UY
ELEMENTARY* GRAMMAR 7A
.Q
S ỉ. A .
TP
2. B rin g them to us. 5. B rin g i t to him .
O
3. B rin g it to h im . 6. B rin g i t to me.
ĐẠ
4. B rin g them to them . 7. B rin g them to us.
8. B rin g them to them .
NG
B.
HƯ
1. Send a postcard to me. 5. Take th e book to him .
2. B rin g the b ill to us. 6. G et th e coffee fo r me.
ẦN
3. Show th e pen to her. 7. G ive the ra d io to me.
4. Take the tea to them . TR 8. W rite some le tte rs to us.
c.
B
00
2. Can you show i t to me, please?

10
3. Can you show them to me, please?

+3

P2

CẤ

D.
A
HÓ
1. four thousand 7. ten thousand

2. five thousand 8. fifte e n thousand
Í-
3. six thousand 9. tw e n ty thousand

-L
4. seven thousand 10. tw enty-one thousand

ÁN
5. e ig h t thousand
11. fo rty -n in e thousand
6. nine thousand
TO
12. n in e ty-tw o thousand

E.
NG
A : Could you show me some radios, please? (1)

ƯỠ
A : Yes, i t is... How much is it? (2)

A : Oh, dear! T h a t’s ve ry expensive. (3)
ID
A : W ha t make is it? (4)

BỒ
A : A h, yes. Could you show i t to me, please? (5)

ƠN
NH
1. W hat’s the w eather like? I t ’s ra in y.
2. W hat are the teachers like? They are good.
UY
3. W hat’s the food like ? I t ’s delicious.
4. W hat are the restaurants like ? They’re expensive.
.Q
5. W hat’s he like ? He’s bad.
TP
G.
O
ĐẠ
Carlo th â n mến,
T ô i tê n là Janet Cooper. T ô i 18 tuổ i. T ô i ñộc thâ n . T ô i là m ột thu
NG
ký. Quê tô i ỏ B rig h to n . Nó ở nước A nh. Có m ột b ã i tắm và có nhiều
rạp chiếu phim và phòng khiêu vũ. Nhớ v iế t thư cho tô i bằng tiế ng Ý!
HƯ
Thân
ẦN
Janet
H.
TR
Dear parents,
B
T h is is a picture o f O xford. The w eather is cold. M y school is ve rj
00
big. I ’m in class K18. There are a lo t o f Vietnam ese in m y class. M )

10
teacher’s name is D avid. E ng lish is in te re stin g . The town is busy

+3
There are a lo t o f theatres, and th in g s are very expensive. The food i:

P2
delicious and E n g lish people are ve ry reserved. See you in 6 weeks.

Best wishes
CẤ
Your daughte:
A
HÓ
A.
Í-
-L
I. We are reading an E ng lish book.

2. He is doing m o rn in g exercises.
ÁN
3. They are lo o king a t the pictures.

TO
4. Lan isn ’t w ritin g on the blackboard.

5. Is N am s ittin g a t h is desk?
NG
6. The ch ild re n aren’t going to school.

7. The pupils are p la y in g in th e playground.
ƯỠ
8. The teacher is e x p la in in g the lesson.

ID
B.
BỒ
1. Yes, I am. 5. Yes, the y are.

2. No, I am not. 6. No, he isn ’t.
M
3. Yes, he is. 7. Yes, she is.

4. No, she isn’t. 8. No, they aren’t.
ƠN
c.
2. What is Diana doing tomorrow?
NH
She’s going away.
UY
Where is she going?
She’s going to Paris.
.Q
How long for?
TP
For 3 days.
O
3. What is Rob doing on Sunday?
ĐẠ
He’s going away.
Where is he going?
NG
He’s going to Copenhagen.
How long for?
HƯ
For 5 days.
4. What are fianH ra and Mark doing next Friday?
ẦN
They’re going away.
Where are they going? TR
They’re going to Amsterdam.
B
00
How long for?

10
For the weekend.

+3
D.
P2
1. Bạn trai của m ìn h sẽ học th i cuối kh óa học k ỳ này.

ở
2. Chị gái mình sẽ làm việc nhà tuần này.
CẤ
Mình sẽ học lái xe năm nay.

cò 'é ưì
nămnay.
A
Người hàn g xóm k ế bên của m ình s ẽ dọn nhà

HÓ
Thầy giáo của chung mình bắt chúng mình làm việc nhiều năm
nay
Í-
3. Nhiều bạn ñồng nghiệp của mình sẽ dự thỉ học kỳ này.

-L
E.
ÁN
2. He’s drinking. 3. She’s writing.

What’s he drinking? What’s she writing.
TO
He’s drinking wine. She’s writing a letter.

NG
4. They’re eating.
What are they eating?
ƯỠ
They’re eating fish.

ID
BỒ
342

F.
1. Who’s phoning her boyfriend? Who’s Kate phoning?
2. Who is watching TV? What are the children watching?
ƠN
3. Wh.c is meeting his students? Who is the teacher meeting?
NH
4. W ho is h e lp in g h e r m other? W ho is L an helping?
G.
UY
1. L an is sta n d in g a t th e blackboard.
.Q
2. They are lis te n in g to th e teacher.
TP
3. They’re lo o k in g a t N am .
4. She’s p u ttin g h e r books on h e r desk.
O
5. He’s w riting E nglish words on th e blackboard.
ĐẠ
6. They’re p la y in g in th e playground.
NG
7. We are going to th e school garden.
8. They are playing in the playground.
HƯ
9. H e’s s ittin g on h is ch a ir.
10. The teacher’s explaining the lesson.
ẦN
TR
11. A.
B
00
2. A : W ould you lik e to come to a dance?

10
B: When is it?
+3
A: On Tuesday evening.
3. A: Would you like to come to a pop concert?
P2
B: W hen is it?
CẤ
A: On Friday evening.
A
4. A: Would you like to come to a picnic?

HÓ
B: When is it?
Í-
A: On Sunday afternoon.
-L
5. A : W ould you lik e to come to a party?

ÁN
B: When is it?
A: On Thursday evening.
TO
6. A: Would you like to come to a barbecue?

NG
B: When is it?
A: On Monday evening.
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ

B.
ƠN
1. Yes, o f course. S orry, you can’t.
NH
2. W a it a m inute (B says to A ). O K (B says to A)
3. T hank you. I p re fe r to 'sta n d , th a n k you.
UY
4. I haven’t fin ish e d ye t. Yes, M r. W ilson.
.Q
5. Yes, c e rta in ly. W hy? S orry, I ’m busy.
TP
6. A ll rig h t. T h a t’s fin e w ith me. S orry, I can’t.
7. W hy not? I ’m sorry.
O
8. C e rta in ly. H elp yourself. S orry, i t ’s tim e to go.
ĐẠ
c.
NG
1. He has got a brow n le a th e r b elt.
2. T h a t’s a lig h t brow n tie .
HƯ
3. She’s w earing w h ite le a th e r shoes.
4. I t ’s a long black s k irt.
ẦN
5. He’s w earing a grey pullove r.
6. T h is is a long black nylon s k irt. TR
7. M y younger b ro th e r can rid e a bicycle.
B
00
8. He’s rid in g a bicycle. She’s rid in g a bicycle, too.

9. We can speak 10 languages. They can speak 10 languages, too.
10
10. H er fa th e r isn ’t a teacher. H e r m other is n ’t a teacher, e ith e r.

+3
D.
P2
1. She has got a sh o rt p in k teryle ne s k irt.

CẤ
2. They are b ig brow n le a th e r shoes.

3. She’s w earing a long blue w oollen pullover.
A
4. He’s a young A m erican student.

HÓ
5. H er daughter’s tw o fir s t names are C arol Green.

Í-
6. I lik e those tw o blue s ilk drusses.

7. The church has some ve ry old Spanish pictures.
-L
8. M rs. B row n has a very p re tty green suit.

ÁN
9. The lib ra ry has several ve ry easy E ng lish books.

10. H e r p re tty black dress is in the wardrobe.
TO
E.
NG
1. The fir s t lif t is going up.

ƯỠ
2. The second lif t is com ing down.

3. The sm all car is going in to th e carpark.
ID
4. The b ig car is com ing out o f the carpark.

5. The cat is in the arm chair.
BỒ
344

6. The mouse is under the a rm chair.
ƠN
7. The car is com ing along the street.
NH
8. The dog is ru n n in g along th e road.
9. The m an is in fro n t o f the tree.
UY
10. M any people are insid e the stadium .
11. The lio n is behind the tree.
.Q
12. John is outside th e stadium .
TP
13. T an Son N h a t a irp o rt is in V ietnam .
14. Thu Due is between B ien Hoa and Saigon.
O
ĐẠ
15. The tru c k is com ing around the bend.
F.
NG
1. Because she’s m arried .
HƯ
2. Because i t ’s hot.
3. Because he can’t speak E ng lish.
ẦN
4. Because he hasn’t got h er address.
5. Because i t ’s behind the sofa.
6. Because she’s going to a p a rty. TR
B
7. Because there is a lo t o f food.
00
8. Because there are m any new words.

10
9. Because she hasn’t got th e ir addresses.

+3
10. Because i t ’s d ark.

P2
11. Because the smoke is going in to her eyes.

12. Because they haven’t got a w atch.
CẤ
13. Because the y are lazy.

A
14. Because the students are noisy.

HÓ
15. Because they are buying ticke ts.

Í-

-L
II. A.
ÁN
1. I t ’s fiv e past tw elve. 7. I t ’s one o’clock.

TO
2. I t ’s ten past tw elve. 8. I t ’s fiv e to one.

NG
3. I t ’s qua rter past tw elve. 9. I t ’s te n to one.

ƯỠ
4, I t ’s tw enty, past tw elve 10. I t ’s q u a rte r to one.

5. I t ’s tw e n ty-fiv e past tw elve. 11. I t ’s tw e n ty to one.
ID
6. I t ’s h a lf past tw elve. 12. I t ’s tw e n ty -fiv e to one.

BỒ
34Ỗ

B.
1. W hat tim e is th e news on? I t ’s on a t fiv e p ast six.
2. What time is the weather report on? It’s on at ten past six.
ƠN
3. W hat tim e is th e film on?
NH
4. W hat’s on on C hannel 7 a t e ig h t o’clock?
There’s a film on on C hannel 7 a t 8 o’clock.
UY
5. What is on before the film programme? There’s the news before the
.Q
film .
TP
6. When it’s one o’clock in Mexico, it’s two o’clock in New York.
7. When it ’s tw o o’clock in N ew Y o rk, i t ’s th re e o’clock in Caracas.
O
8. W hat tim e is i t in Rome? I t ’s e ig h t o’clock in Rome,
ĐẠ
c . No answ er key.
NG
D.
2. What is she going to do? She’s going to read a magazine.
HƯ
3. What are we going to do? We are going to drink champagne.
4. What are they going to do? They are going to play tennis.
ẦN
5. What are you going to to? We are going to do our homework.
TR
6. What am I going to do? You are going to ask a question.
7. What is the cat going to do? It is going to eat fish.
B
00
E.
10
1. W here’s he going?
+3
Ì. W ho’s going to wash h is car?

P2
3. W hat are you going to do?

1. W hat aren’t th e y going to d rin k?
CẤ
5. Where are the students going to have a good time?

3. What is she going to watch at her mother’s?
A
HÓ
Ĩ. Whose car are your parents going to sell?

i. W hy is he going to re tire ?
Í-
Ì. W here are th e y going to live?

-L
LO. W hen are th e y going to leave VN?

ÁN
L. There’s a film on TV tonight. Are you going to watch it?

TO
Ỉ. W hat is she going to do w ith th a t sum o f money?

NG
Ỉ. She’s going to travel around the world. ,

L He’s going to m ake the coffee.
ƯỠ
i. Look a t those black clouds! I t ’s going to ra in .

ID
ì. I feel te rrib le . I th in k I ’m going to be sick.

BỒ
!46

G.
Năm nay, vào ngày sinh nhật, John sẽ thức dậy lúc 6 giờ. Trước
h ết, anh ấ y sẽ tắ m . R ồi anh ấ y sẽ ă n sáng. Sau ñó, anh ấy sẽ giúp mẹ
lau nhà, trang trí phòng và chuẩn bị tiệc.
ƠN
H.
NH
Peter : T ố i nay bạn sẽ là m gì?
UY
M a ry : T ô i sẽ v iế t m ộ t lá thư .
P eter : B ạn có ở nhà chủ n h ậ t tứ i không?
.Q
M ary : K hông, m ình sẽ ñến nhà bà K e lle r.
TP
Peter : N hà bà ta d ñâu?
O
M ary : Ớ gần ñây th ô i.
ĐẠ
I.
1. She’s going to buy a new dress.
NG
2. They’re going to learn their lessons.
HƯ
3. I ’m going to w rite some le tte rs .
4. I ’m going to help th a t wom an.
ẦN
5. Tom is going to read th is sto ry.
6. He’s going to clean his bicycle tomorrow afternoon.
7. He’s going to be a t hom e to n ig h t.
TR
B
8. I ’m going to liv e in m y house n e x t m onth.
00
10

+3
II. A.
P2
1. The teacher doesn’t speak E n g lish . Does the teacher speak E nglish?
CẤ
2. He doesn’t liv e in H anoi. Does he liv e in Hanoi?

3. We don’t le a rn E n g lish . Do you le a rn E nglish?
A
4. I don’t w o rk in an office. Do you w o rk in an office?

HÓ
5. She doesn’t le a rn Russian. Does she le a rn Russian?

6. They don’t read books. Do tìie y read books?
Í-
7. He doesn’t leave home at seven. Does he leave home at 7?

-L
8. Sometimes I don’t go out in the evening. Do you sometimes go out in

ÁN
the evening?
9. We don’t go to our office by bus. Do you go to your office by bus?
TO
10. M y frie n d doesn’t w o rk in an office. Does your frie n d w o rk in an

NG
office?
11. I don’t go back hom e in th e evening. Do you go *back home in the
ƯỠ
evening?
ID
BỒ
347

12. M y w ife doesn’t lis te n to the radio. Does your w ife lis te n to the
ƠN
radio?
13. M y ch ild re n don’t go to the cinem a. Do your ch ild re n go to the
NH
cinema?
14. He doesn’t know E ng lish . Does he know E nglish?
UY
B.
.Q
Ngày làm việc của tôi
TP
T ô i là m việc tạ i m ột cơ quan ở Hà N ộ i. Sáng nào tô i cũng thức
O
dậy lúc 5 giờ. T ô i tập thể dục buổi sáng. Rồi tô i rửa m ặt, ñánh ră n g và
ĐẠ
ăn sáng. Sau bữa sáng tô i rờ i nhà ñến cơ quan. N hà của tô i không xa
cơ quan. T ô i ñến ñó bằng xe buýt.
NG
Vào buổi tố i, tô i trở về nhà. T ô i dùng cơm tố i. Sau cơm tố i, tô i
HƯ
nghe ñài.
ð ôi k h i vợ tô i, con tô i và tô i ñ i chơi tố i. Chúng tô i ñ i xi-nê.
ẦN
ANSWERS
1. I w ork in an office in H anoi. TR
B
2. I g e t up a t five in th e m o rn in g .
00
3. I do m o rning exercises, wash m y face, brush m y teeth and have

10
breakfast.
4. I leave m y house a fte r breakfast.
+3
5. No, it is n ’t.
P2
6. I go back home in the evening.

CẤ
7. A fte r d in ne r, I lis te n to the radio.

8. Yes, I do.
A
HÓ
c.
1. The teacher is a t the door.
Í-
2. The boy has a hat.

-L
3. M r. Nam teaches me E ng lish .

ÁN
4. I look a t M r. Ba.
TO
5. She speaks E ng lish to h e r frie n d .

NG
6. They lis te n to the teacher in class

7. A h a t is in the corner o f the room .
ƯỠ
8. He reads te x t 1.
ID
9. He comes home in the evening.

BỒ
10. He does exercises in the m orning.
348

11. H e ta k e s a r e s t a t n o o n .
ƠN
12. I liv e in H anoi.
13. She w orks in a hosp ita l.
NH
D.
UY
1. Who is a t the blackboard?
.Q
2. W h o d o y o u see a t t h e d o o r?
TP
3. W ho does V in h speak E n g lish to?
O
4. W hat do you le a rn a t your school?
ĐẠ
5. W hat do you read? W hat lesson do you read?
NG
6. W hen does she read books a t home?
E.
HƯ
1. Who tra nsla te s the te x t in class d u rin g th e lesson?
ẦN
W hat does he do? W hat does he tra nslate ? W here does he translate
the text? W hen does he tra n sla te the text?
TR
2. W ho goes ÍO school in th e m o rn in g ? W h a t do th e c h ild re n do?
B
W here do the ch ild re n go? W hen do th e c h ild re n go to school?
00
3. Who does h e r exercise a t home in the evening?

10
W hat does she do? W here does she do h e r exercise?

+3
W hen does she do h er exercise?

4. Who w orks in a plant? W hat do the y do? W here do th e y work?
P2
F.
CẤ
1. We don’t liv e on TH D S treet. Do you liv e on TH D Street?

A
2. They don’t lik e th a t film . Do the y lik e th a t film ?

HÓ
3. M a ry and Tom don’t lik e coffee. Do M a ry and Tom lik e coffee?

4. The g irls don’t w a n t new clothes. Do the g irls w a n t new clothes?
Í-
5. T h e ir ch ild re n don’t w o rk in a facto ry. Do th e ir ch ild re n w ork in a

-L
factory?
ÁN
G.
TO
1. I liv e in a fla t.
2. They don’t lik e th e ir house.
NG
3. They w o rk in a h osp ita l.

ƯỠ
4. We don’t liv e n ear the zoo.

5. M y fa th e r doesn’t lik e beer.
ID
BỒ
34!

H.
M á yêu,
Hiện giờ con ñang ở nông trại của cậu John. Cuộc sống và công
ƠN
việc của con như sau.
NH
Sáng nào chúng con cũng thức dậy lúc 5g30 và ăn sáng lúc 6 giờ.
Sau bữa sáng chúng con b ắ t ñầu công việc ở nông trạ i. Lúc llg 3 0
UY
chúng con dùng cơm trư a. C húng con b ắ t ñầu là m việc lạ i lúc lg 3 0 và
làm xcng việc lúc 4 giờ. Lúc 5g30 chúng con dùng cơm tối và sau cơm
.Q
tố i chúng con xem ti-v i. Con có m ộ t v à i người bạn. ở ñây - ñ ô i k h i
TP
chúng con ñi câu lạc bộ vào buổi tối. Chúng con ñỉ ngủ lúc 9g30.
O
S. No answ er key.
ĐẠ
J.
NG
2. How old are they? They are twelve years old.
3. How m any days a w eek do th e y go to school?
HƯ
They go to school 5 days a week.
4. W h a t tim e do th e y get up? T h ey get up a t 8 o’clock.
ẦN
5. W h a t do th e y have fo r breakfast? They have cornflakes for
breakfast. TR
6. Where do they have lunch? They have lunch at schoool.
B
7. W hen do th e y go home? T hey go home a t 4 o’clock.
00
8. W hat tim e do the y go to bed? They go to bed a t 9 o’clock.

10
K.
+3
2. Where does he live? He lives in a flat in Central London.

P2
3. W h at tũ n e does he g et up? H e gets up a t 11.15.

CẤ
4. What does he read? He reads “the Daily Mirror”.

5. What time does he arrive at the studio?
A
He arrives at the studio at 3.30.

HÓ
6. What time does he leave the studio?

He leaves the studio at midnight.
Í-
7. W h a t tim e does he have dinner?

-L
He has d in n e r a t 12.30.
ÁN
8. W hat tim e does he go to bed? H e goes to bed a t 3 o’clock.

TO
L.
Walter Moaney là một kỹ sư. Anh ta thức dậy lúc 7 giờ và ăn
NG
sáng. Rồi anh ta ñi làm. Anh ta bắt ñầu lúc 8 giờ. Anh thường ăn trưa
ƯỠ
ở că n g -tin . A n h là m xong việ c lú c 5g30. R ồ i anh về n hà ăn tố i. Sau

bữa tố i anh thường dọc báo và xem ti-v i. A nh ñ i ngủ khoảng 10g30.
ID
BỒ
350

M.
1. I don’t like... 2. She lives..- 3. She doesn’t want... 4. Do they
ƠN
read...? 5. My sister walks... 6. She works... 7. Does she live...? 8. Does
Janet Brown like...? 9. Does the teacher like...? 10. Does the pupil
NH
learn English?
N.
UY
.Q
Air-hostess
TP
2. Whom does she meet?
O
3. Where does she go every week?
ĐẠ
4. When does she travel?
NG
5. Where does she live?
HƯ
6. How old is she?
7. Where does she stay?
ẦN
8. W here does she live?
TR
Farmer
B
1. How strong is fee? 5. What does he work with?
00
2. Where does he work? 6. When does he go to town?

10
3. What doesn’t he wear? 7. Where does he live?

+3
4. When does be get up? 8. What has he got?

P2
Doctor
CẤ
1. What does he wear? 5. What does he wear?

A
2. What has he got? 6. What does lie wear?

HÓ
3. What can he read? 7. What has he got?

4. Where does he work? 8. What does he get?
Í-
-L
0.
1. Where do you live?
ÁN
2. Where do your parents live?

TO
3. Where do they live? / What town do they live in?

NG
4. At what address does she live?

ƯỠ
5. Where does Nam’s uncle work?

6. Where does Susan want to go?
ID
BỒ
351

7. W h e r e d o e s F r e d w a n t to com e ?
ƠN
8. W here does L inda w a n t to come?
NH
9. W here do the pupils w a n t to go?
UY
10. W here do Susan and F red w a n t to work?
p
.Q
TP
1. W here do the y buy tea?
2. W here does Lan get h e r ticke t?
O
ĐẠ
3. W here do your parents spend th e ir holiday?
4. W here does Jane t B row n teach English?
NG
Q.
HƯ
1. He w orks in a h o sp ita l.
ẦN
2. They buy them in a shop.
3. They go to h e r shop.
4. He live s in a fla t. TR
B
00
10
11. A.
1. alw ays 2. ra re ly 3. som etim es, occasionally
+3
4. never 5. always 6. ra re ly 7. o fte n / usually

P2
B.
CẤ
1. How often do you brush yo ur teeth? I brush m y te e th once a day.

A
2. How often does he brush h is shoes? He brushes h is shoes once a

HÓ
week.
Í-
3. How often does she wash h e r hair? She washes h er h a ir tw ice a

-L
m onth.
ÁN
4. How often do th e y go to the de ntist? They go to the d e n tis t twice a

year.
TO
5. How often does P eter read newspapers? He reads newspapers every

NG
day.
6. How often do th e y go to the play? They ra re ly go to the play.
ƯỠ
7. How often does M a ry lis te n to the radio? She never liste n s to the
ID
radio.
BỒ
8. How often do c h ild re n w atch TV? They w atch T V every n ig h t.
352

ƠN
1. T ô i sông ở W ashington mặc dầu lúc n à y tô i ñang ở Luân Eôn.
2. H ôm nay xe hơi kh ôn g có ở ñây vì S heila ñang dùng ::ió. Cô tỉ
NH
th ư ờ n g sử d ụ n g s e b u ý t.
3. T ô i quê ở S cotland mặc dầu h iệ n giờ tô i ñang sống ỗ Luân ðôn.
-<p> U
Y
4. H iệ n n a y t ô i ñ a n g ỗ v ở i ba m á t ô i m ặ c d ầ u t ô i có n h à r i ê r g.
.Q
5; Họ thường lầ m việc vào cuối tuần nhưng lúc này họ không ỉàm v i
TP
6. ô n g t a d ạ y h ọ c ở m ộ t trư ờ n g n g ô n n g ữ n h ư n g h i ệ n ĩ ia v ô r.g ta ñ a n |
là m -việc ở m ộ t nhà máy.
O
ĐẠ
7. T ô i thường là m việc ban ñêm mặc dầu bây g iờ 'tô i ñang á i nghỉ.
8. H iệ n n a y t ô i ñ a n g h ọ c t iế n g Á n h , n h ư n g t ô i n ó i ti ế n g A n h chư a tố !
NG
lắ m .
D:
HƯ
1. H e h a s lu n c h i n e x p e n s iv e r e s ta u r a n ts .
ẦN
2. H e u s u a lly d r i n k s a l o t o f w in e .
3. B e c a u s e h e ’s v e r y f a t.
4. H e w e n t to see t l i e d o c to r tw o d a y s ago. TR
B
5. T h e d o c to r g a v e h im a s p e c ia l d ie t.
00
6. H e ’ s h a v in g h is f i r s t s p e c ia l m e a l n e w .
10
N o , h e i s n ’t.
+3
E.
P2
2. S h e ’s a b a d s in g e r. 5 . S h e ’s a g o o d te a c h e r.
6. T h e y a re goo d s k ie r s
CẤ
3. H e ’s a g o o d d a n c e r.
4. T h e y ’r e b a d s w im m e r s . 7. H e ’s a b a d d r iv e r .
A
F.
HÓ
2. She sings badly. 8. S h e ty p e s fa s t.

Í-
3. H e d r iv e s c a r e f u lly . 7. S h e d a n c e s b e a u tifu l
-L
4. T h e y d r iv e c a r e fu lly . 8. H e d r iv e s s lo w ly .
5. I w o r k h a r d .
ÁN
G.
TO
1. I d o n ’t t h i n k so. 8 . I d o n ’t k n o w
NG
2. I t h i n k so. 7 . I h o p e n o t.
ƯỠ
3. I ầ o p e so. 8. I t h i n k so.
ID
4. I d o n ’t k n o w . 9 . I h o p e n o t.
BỒ

5. I don’t know . I th in k so. 1 0 .1 hope so.

H.
ƠN
2. M y b irth d a y ’s on A ugust 3 rd.
NH
3. M y fa th e r’s b irth d a y ’s on Ja nu a ry 1st.
UY
4. M y m other’s b irth d a y ’s on A ugust 4 th .
.Q
5. The N a tio n a l D ay o f m y country’s Septem ber 2rd.
TP
6. New Y ear’s day’s on Ja nu a ry 1st.
O
7. Today’s novem ber 2 9th.
ĐẠ
I.
NG
1. I usually come to school on honda.
HƯ
2. I usually w atch T V in th e evening.
ẦN
3. I ra re ly go out.
TR
4. I ’m going to go to a p a rty n e x t weekend.
5. Yes, I do.
B
00
6. Yes, I am.
10
7. I speak E n g lish w e ll.

+3
8. Yes, I do.
P2
CẤ

II. A.
A
HÓ
1. I was here a t tw o o’clock

2. He was in Ita ly la s t Ju ly.
Í-
3. They were a t home la s t Sunday.

-L
4. You were here a t one o’clock.

ÁN
5. She was a t school yesterday.

6. I t was cold la s t January.
TO
7. We were in London la s t W ednesday.

NG
B.
ƯỠ
1. W ere you in New Y o rk la s t February?

2. W as she a t home la s t Thursday?
ID
3. Was it h o t la s t June?
BỒ
354

4. Was he in E nglan d la s t Novem ber?

5. W ere you th e re a t fo u r o’clock?
6. W ere th e y in Russia la s t December?
ƠN
c. No answ er key.
NH
D. 1. was 2. were 3. was 4. were 5. was
E.
UY
1. W hy was she happy?
.Q
2. W hen was th e boy bom ?
TP
3. W here was M a n e C urie bom ?
4. W hat was she good at?
O
ĐẠ
5. W here was he th is m orning?
6. What was there on TV last night?
NG
7. Who was good at English last year?
8. Who was th e same age.
HƯ
9. W here w ere she doctors an hour ago?
10. W hen was he a t th e park?
ẦN
F.
TR
1. W hat do you th in k about m y chickens? I th in k th e y are lo ve ly and
B
liv e ly .
00
2. I th in k th a t i t ’s a good idea.
10
3. We believe th a t yo ur club is a ttra c tiv e .

+3
4. She hopes th a t he is good.

P2
5. They th in k th a t M a ry is a clever p u p il.

CẤ
6. I ’m a fra id th a t you can’t go fo r a w a lk.

7. M y m o th er is a fra id th a t I can’t take / have a bath.
A
8. We are a fra id th a t you ca n 't go to school.

HÓ
9. M y m o the r hopes th a t we are alw ays h e a lth y.

Í-
10. T h is classroom is too com fortable fo r us.

-L
11. T h is s h irt is too b ig fo r h im .

12. H e r lo n g dress is too n arrow fo r her.
ÁN
G.
TO
1. So last June she didn’t have a holiday.

NG
2. So yesterday we had lunch a t 12.30.

ƯỠ
3. So yesterday m o rn in g th e y had a show er in th e m orning.

ID
4. So la s t S aturday he d id n ’t have a lecture.

BỒ
355

5. So last weekend she didn’t have breakfast.
ƠN
H.
NH
I. I had bre akfa st a t 8 yesterday.
UY
2. I had breakfast w ith m y fa m ily .
.Q
3. No, I d id n ’t.
TP
4. Yes, I did.
O
ĐẠ
6. Y e s , I d id .
NG
HƯ
II. Â.
ẦN
1. The p up ils d id n ’t p la n t... D id t h e p u p ils p la n t...?
2. They d id n ’t play...
3. The pupils o f class 7A d id n ’t raise.
TR D id th e y p la y ...?
D id t h e y ra is e ...?
B
4. T h e y d i d n ’t c o lle c t... D id t h e y c o lle c t...?
00
5. I d i d n ’t go to see... D id y o u g o to see...?
10
6. T h e y d id n ’t re a d ... D id t h e y re a d ...?
+3
7 H e d i d n ’t g o ... D id h e go...?
P2
8. M iss Hoa d id n ’t teach... D id M is s H o a te a c h ...?

9 . T h e y d id n ’t s p e a k ... D id t h e y s p e a k ...?
CẤ
10. Ĩ d i d n ’t m e e t... D id y o u m e e t...?

11. He d id n ’t get up...
A
D id h e g e t u p ...?
HÓ
12. T h e y d id n ’t s w im ... D id t h e y s w im ...?

13. H e d id n ’t h a v e ... D id h e h a v e ...?
Í-
14. I d id n ’t help... D id y o u h e lp ...?

-L
15. I d id n ’t do. . D id y o u do...?

ÁN
8.
1. v i s it e d / i d / 6 . d ic t a t e d / i d / 1 1 . c a r r ie d l à i 16. ne e d e d /id /
TO
2. s m ile d /d / 7. p la y e d /d / 1 2 . s t a r te d / i ñ / 1 7 . e n jo y e d / ñ /
NG
3. lo o k e d /Ư 8. l ik e d /Ư 13 . w a s h e d /Ư 1 8 . d re s s e d II I
ƯỠ
4. s tu d ie d /d / 9. r e s te d / ỉ d / 14. w a n te d h á ! 1 9 . r e p e a te d / i ñ /
5. w a tc h e d ix i 10. lo v e d /d / 15. lis t e n e d /d / 2 0 . re n te d /IỔ/
ID
c.
BỒ
i. W h e r e d id s h e p la y te n n is ?
356
‘2. How m any cases d id he carry?
ƠN
3. W hat tim e d id the y start?
NH
4. W hen d id she re n t th e car?
5. W hat d id he repeat?
UY
6. W here d id th e y stay?
.Q
D.
TP
1. Nam helped h is fa th e r in the garden.
O
2. Nam hoed up th e e a rth by ra kin g .
ĐẠ
3. They p la nte d m any fru it trees.
NG
4. Nam w atered them .
HƯ
5. They fin is h e d th e ir w o rk a t 11:00.
ẦN
6. Nam ’s fa th e r needed a cup o f tea.
E. TR
Hôm qua là chủ n h ậ t, Nam giúp òa việc nhà. Cậu ta và ba cậu ta
B
00
sửa m á i nhà và cửa sổ. Buổi chiều, cậu ta soạn b à i rồ i sau ñó chơi bóng
10
ñá với bạn bè.

F.
+3
P2
1. He learned physics and che m istry yesterday.

CẤ
2. I read an E n g lish novel.

A
3. M iss Hoa ta u g h t me E n g lish la s t year.

HÓ
4. I m et h e r a t th e school lib ra ry la s t S aturday.

Í-
5. He got up a t 5.30 th is m orning.

-L
G.
ÁN
1. w ent 2. m et 3. w rote 4. sent 5. shone

TO
6. was 7. saw 8. rode 9. took 10. came 11. brought

H.
NG
I. I w e n t to D ala t.
ƯỠ
2. I w en t the re by car.
ID
3. I saw a lo t o f b e a u tifu l sights there.

BỒ
4. I ate m eat and vegetables there.

5. I d ra n k w ine.
6. I bought a lo t o f souvenirs.
ƠN
7. I came home by car.
NH
9. Yes, I did.
UY
10. No, it did n ’t.
.Q
TP
9.
2. ... but yesterday she w rote carelessly.
O
3. ... but yesterday she typed q uickly.
ĐẠ
4. ... but yesterday th e y played w e ll.
NG
5. ... but yesterday he w orked slow ly.
S. ... b ut yesterday he answ ered carelessly.
HƯ
ẦN
1. I d id n ’t s ta rt... D id you start...?
2. Nam d id n ’t le arn... D id N am learn...?
3. They d id n ’t w ork... TR
D id th e y w ork...?
4. She d id n ’t hate... D id she hate...?
B
00
5. The ch ild re n d id n ’t play... D id the ch ild re n play.

10
K.
+3
1. w orked 2. d id n ’t lik e 3. D id she thank...?

P2
4. planted 5. D id we pass...?
CẤ
L.
1. The In d ia n arm y looked fo r fiv e clim bers in th e H im alayas.
A
2. They le ft la s t m onth to c lim b M ount E verest.

HÓ
3. I t began to snow h e a vily th re e days ago.

4. The arm y sent out some soldiers tw o days ago.
Í-
5. They spent tw o n ig h ts on the m ountains.

-L
6. They d id n ’t / couldn’t fin d th e clim bers.

ÁN
7. P rince C harles opened a new school in M anchester th is m ornin g.

8. He wore a blue s u it and a d a rk blue tie .
TO
M.
NG
1. He w e nt to Chicago by car.
ƯỠ
2. He drove very fast.

3. He died la s t year. ’
ID
4. He w rote home once a m onth.

BỒ
358

5. He got up a t five .
6. She gave some m oney to h e r parents.
ƠN
7. H e sold h is house.
NH
8. H e chose green.
9. He shot the shop ow ner
UY
10. Because she needed some m oney
11. I t took 3 hours
.Q
12. She wore a w h ite s k irt and an orange pullover.
TP
13. T hey b u ilt i t n e xt to m ine.
O
14. She bought sea food.
ĐẠ
NG
II. A.
HƯ
1. m any 2. a few 3. much 4. a little
5. m a n y 6. a few 7. m uch 8. a little
ẦN
B.
TR
Chủ n h ậ t vừa qua Tom ñến thă m chú ở m ột ngôi là n g cách nhà
cậu ta 5 cây sô'. Cậu ta ñến ñó vào sắng sớm, v ì vậy cậu có n hiều th ờ i
B
gian giúp chú những công việc trê n cánh ñồng bắp. Vào buổi chiều cậu
00
di bơi ở sông vớ i những ñứa con tr a i của chú. Cậu thực sự cảm th ấ y vui
10
vẻ.
+3
c.
P2
1. I t took h e r 2 days to tra v e l to Hue by tra in .

CẤ
2. I t takes them th ir ty m inutes to go to school on foot.

3. I t took us about three hours to fly fro m H anoi to H C M c ity .
A
4. I t too k h im about h a lf an hour to come back home by bus.

HÓ
5. I t takes th e students 2 hours to do these exercises.

Í-
D.
-L
1. I am a t home now.
ÁN
2. I a rriv e d here te n m inutes ago.

3. They gave me a d o ll fo r m y b irth d a y .
TO
4. I spent one hundred thousand dong yesterday.

5. Yes, I did.
NG
6. I lo s t money.
ƯỠ
8. I found nothin g.
ID
BỒ
359

ƠN
1. A t three o’clock yesterday afternoon she was cleaning the floor.
NH
2. M rs. Brow n was cooking the m eal a t ten th is m orning.
UY
3. M iss C la rk was ty p in g a t h a lf past one in the afternoon.
.Q
4. Was she w o rkin g up sta irs a t 8 yesterday m orning?
TP
5. We were le a rn in g w h ile the y were doing th e ir exercises.
O
ĐẠ
6. The pupils were lis te n in g to the teacher w h ile the teacher was
explain in g th e lesson.
NG
7. I t rained when we were sw im m ing in the riv e r.
HƯ
3. She was w a tching T V when he came.
ẦN
1. T ô i ñang là m b à i tậ p tiế n g A nh th ì anh ấy bước vào.
TR
2. Lũ trẻ ñang làm b à i tậ p về nhà th ì cha chúng ñ i làm về.
B
00
3. K h i tô i về nhà, anh tr a i tô i vẫn ñang làm việc.

10
4. K h i tô i gặp anh ta , anh ta ñang ñ i học.

+3
5. K h i chuông reo, tô i ñang ăn trưa.

P2
8. Hương ñang giúp mẹ tro n g bếp th ì bạn của cô ta ñến thăm .

CẤ
7. K h i cơn mưa b ắ t ñầu, chúng ñang trồ n g hoa tro n g vườn.

A
8. Giáo viê n ñang g iả ng b à i th ì cô hiệu trư ỗng gõ cửa.

HÓ
':3 .
Í-
T ối nay Sim on S m ith sẽ chơi tro n g dàn nhạc hòa tấu A nh Quốc.
-L
Cậu ta m ối 10 tu ổ i. Cậu ñã có th ể chơi dương cầm k h i m ới 5 tu ổ i. Cậu

ÁN
cũng có thể xướng âm. Cậu là m ột ñứa trẻ rấ t thô n g m in h . Cậu có thể
ló i chuyện và ñ i ñược k h i m ới 9 thá n g tuổ i. Cậu có th ể ñọc và v iế t kh i
TO
ên ba và có th ể h iể u ñ ạ i sô' và n ó i tiế n g Pháp lúc 6 tu ổ i.

NG
ít
ƯỠ
1. M ust we do these exercises again? Yes, we m ust.

ID
2. M ust we w rite down these answers? No, we needn’t.

3. I m ust read the lesson again.
BỒ

4. He needn’t clean ih e table now.
ƠN
5. The students m ust w rite th is d icta tio n .
NH
6. He m ust brush h is te e t h a ft e r raeạls.
7. They m ust go to sỉeap and. g e t up early.
UY
8. You m ust n ot be absent.
.Q
9. You m ust n ot ta lk in class.
TP
10. We m ust speak E ng lish d u ring our E ng lish lessons.
O
ĐẠ
I.
B : I ’d lik e a ta x i, please (1)
NG
B : As soon as possible. (2)
HƯ
B : On the corner o f Phan D in h Phung stre et. (3)
B : Son. M r. Son. (4)
ẦN
J.
1. w ent 6. saw TR
11. m et
B
2. g o t 7. a t / in 12. fro m
00
3. m et 8. d ra nk 1 3 .speak
10
4. a t 9. In 14. so
+3
5. were 10. came 15. a ll

P2

CẤ
II. A.
A
1. The tra in has ju s t le ft the statio n .

HÓ
2. She has ju s t had b reakfast.

Í-
3. He hasn’t seen th is film yet.

-L
4. Has she got up yet? N o t ye t.

ÁN
5. Have you turned o ff th e lig h ts? Yes, we have.

B.
TO
3. John has gone to th e bank.

NG
4. Jansfe has gone to ho sp ita l.

ƯỠ
5. P aul has gone to the post office.

6. M a ry h a s b e e n a t home.
ID
7. He has beea to the bank.

BỒ

8. She has been to P aris.

9. Tom has been to h ospital.
c.
ƠN
NH
1. Bạn không ñược n h ìn tô i. T ô i có n h ìn anh ñâu.
2. Bạn không ñược hôn cô dâu. T ô i có hôn cô ta ñâu.
UY
3. Bạn không ñược mượn tiề n . T ô i có mượn ñâu.
4. B ạn không ñược ñóng cửa. T ô i có ñóng ñâu.
.Q
5. Cô ta có sắp k í tê n không? Cò ta ñã k í rồ i.
TP
s. Bạn có sắp lau nhà không? T ô i ñã lau rồ i.
O
1. A nh ấy vừa m ới làm gì? A nh ấ y vừa m ới g h i m ột bàn thắn g.
ĐẠ
D.
NG
1. She has done m any d iffe re n t jobs.
HƯ
2. She has been to m any places.
3. She has done a lo t o f in te re s tin g th ing s.
ẦN
4. She has w ritte n te n books.
5. She has TR
m et a lo t o f in te re s tin g people.
6. She has been m arried fiv e tim es.
B
00
E.
10
1 gone 2. gone 3. been, been 4. been

+3
5. gone 6. been 7. been 8. gone

P2
F.
CẤ
1. I smoked 20 cigarettes yesterday.

2. How m any cigarettes have you smoked today?
A
3. I have been i l l tw ice so fa r th is year.

HÓ
4. How m any tim es were you i l l la s t year?

Í-
5. I haven’t dru nk any coffee so fa r today.

-L
3. He has been la te three tim es th is week.

7. How m any games d id th e team w in la s t season?
ÁN
3. H ow m any games has th e team w on so fa r th is season?

TO
tà.
NG
L d id n ’t play 2. w orked 3. has liv e d 4. have been

ƯỠ
5. was 6. has been 7. never m et 8. have never m et

ID
BỒ

H.
2. Yes, I m et h im te n m inutes ago.
ƠN
3. Yes, I p ain te d i t la s t week.
NH
• 4. Yes, she w e n t to France on F rid a y.
5. Yes, th e y had d in n e r a t 7 o’clock.
UY
6. Yes, he sta rte d h is new jo b yesterday.
.Q
I.
TP
I. correct 2. w rong -> D id you see Pam la s t week?
O
3. correct 4. w rong -» I fin ish e d ...
ĐẠ
5. w rong -» W hen d id you fin is h ...?
6. w rong —> George le ft...
NG
7. correct 8. w rong -> N .B . died...
HƯ
9. correct 10. w rong -> I d id n ’t see...
I I . w rong -» The w eather was...
ẦN
J.
1. since 2. fo r 3. fo r TR 4. since
B
5. since 6. fo r 7. since 8. fo r
00

10
+3
II. A.
P2
1. I haven’t got enough money to go on holiday.

CẤ
2. There w eren’t enough ch airs fo r everybody to s it down.

A
3. He didn’t get the job because he didn’t have enough experience.

HÓ
4. I didn’t finish my exam because I didn’t have enough time.

Í-
5. W e spent m uch m oney.

-L
6. Have you got m any friends?

ÁN
7. I can’t d rin k th is tea. There’s too much sugar in it.

TO
8. There weren’t many people at the party.

NG
9. She’s a q u ie t person. She doesn’t say too m uch.

ƯỠ
B.
ID
1. They have to go to bed early.

BỒ
363

2. He d id n’t have to stay in the hote l before a m atch.
ƠN
3. D id M a r y have to eat steak and salad fo r lunch?
NH
4. Tom doesn’t have to run 2 kilo m etre s every day.
UY
5. Do you have to practise E ng lish 3 hours a day?
.Q
6. S h e h a d to go on a d ie t.
TP
7. M y sis te r has to get up e arly to do the wash-up.
O
8. I have to make the tea and coffee fo r m y parents every m orning.
ĐẠ
NG
1. Yes, I w ill 5. Yes, there w ill.
HƯ
2. No, I won’t. 6. No, I won’t.
3. Yes, he w ill. 7. Yes, you w ill.
ẦN
4. No, you won’t. 8. No, there won’t.
'ểj.
TR
1. Nam w ill come to the lib ra ry w ith you.
B
2. We s h a ll m eet our old teacher n e xt week.
00
3. You w ill see me again n ext Sunday.

10
4. I sh a ll be on duty n ext week.

+3
5. There w ill be new books fo r you n e x t m onth.

P2
8. We sh a ll meet again a t the lib ra ry .

7. He w ill go to H C M c ity tom orrow .
CẤ
8. You w ill prepare lesson 5 fo r n e xt week.

9. I sh a ll get home by bus.
A
HÓ
10. He w ill be here fo r ten days.

E.
Í-
1. anyone 2. Everyone 3. Everybody 4. som ething

-L
5. E veryth in g , a n yth in g 6. N o th in g 7. Everyone

ÁN
8. anyone 9. nobody 10. Everyone

TO
F.
1. T ấ t cả các xe hơi ñều có bánh xe.
NG
2. K hông ñồng nào tro n g số tiề n này là của tô i.

ƯỠ
3. M ộ t v à i người th ì th â n th iệ n .
4. J im n ghĩ rằng tấ t cả các việ n bảo tà n g ñều chẳng hấp dẫn gì.
ID
5. Không a i tro ng ba má Tom là người Anh.

BỒ
6- Cả h a i em gái tô i ñều ñang ñi.học.

7. Chẳng cửa hàn g ĩìặ£ tro n g 2 cửa hà ng có tự d iể n A n h V iệ t.
ƠN
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR IS A
NH
II. A.
UY
1. P h a n R a n g is h o l i e r t h a n D a la t .
2. England is as la rg e as France.
.Q
3. Your briefcase is as nice as m ine.
TP
4. A c o lo u r T V is n o t a s c h e a p as a b la c k a n d w h it e o n e.
5. M y b ro th e r is ta lle r th a n I.
O
ĐẠ
6. S he is m o r e in t e l li g e n t t h a n h e r y o u n g e r s is te r .
7. G e o g ra p h y is le s s in t e r e s t in g t h a n M a t h s .
NG
8. M aths is m ore d iffic u lt th a n E n g lish .
9. M y house is m ore com fortable th a n hers.
HƯ
10. T h is road is less noisy th a n N V T stre et.
B.
ẦN
1. th e la r g e s t
4. the m ost h a rd -w o rkin g
2. t h e f in e s t
5. the m ost d iffic u lt
TR 3 . t h e t a l le s t
B
6. th e c o ld e s t 7. t h e h o t t e s t
00
c.
10
1. lo n g e r t h a n 2. s t r o n g e r t h a n 3 . h o t t e r th a n
+3
4. c o ld e r th a n 5. m o r e d i li g e n t t h a n 6 . c le v e r e r :h a n
P2
7. more d iffic u lt th a n
CẤ
D.
A
1. as clever as 5. as m any days

HÓ
2. as m any days 6. as b rig h t as

3. n o t as b rig h t as 7. as clever as
Í-
4. as strong as
-L
E.
ÁN
1. He’s u g lie r than-she.

2. H e ’s t h e r ic h e s t m a n i n th e w o r ld .
TO
3. H e ’s r i c h e r t h a n o u r te a c h e r .
NG
4. Boeing is the faste st plane.

5. M o u n t E v e r e s t is t h e h ig h e s t m o u n ta in .
ƯỠ
6. Á M i n i is n o t as c o m fo r ta b le a s a S o ils R o y ce .
ID
7. B r u tu s C r a y is b e t t e r t h a n J o e F re e z e r.
8. T h is le sso n ĨS th e le a s t in te re s tin g .
BỒ
38

Các mùa và thời tiết
ƠN
M ùa xuân là m ùa dầu tiê n tro n g năm . T rờ i khôn g lạ n h bằng mùa
ñông cũng khôn g nóng như m ùa hè. M ùa xuân là m ùa của h i vọng. Cây
NH
eỏ b ắ t ñầu mọc, những chồi non x u ấ t h iệ n trê n cây và các cánh ñồng
sanh trở lạ i. ðó là mùa bận rộ n ñ ố i vớ i các nông dân và người làm
UY
vườn.
.Q
Sau xuân ñến hạ. ðó là m ùa nóng n h ấ t tro n g các m ùa. N gày dài
TP
[lơn và ñêm ngắn hơn. Vào m ùa hè tắ m và bơi ở sông th ậ t th ú v ị.
M ùa th u ñến cùng vớ i m ùa g ặt. ðố là m ùa của sự d ồ i dào. Các
O
:ánh ñồng vàng ươm bắp chín. T hờ i t iế t m á t m ẻ. N h iề u người n ó i rằ n g
ĐẠ
mùa th u là m ùa ñẹp n h ấ t tro n g năm .
NG
K h i ñông ñến, ngày trở nên ngắn hơn và ñêm d à i hem. T rờ i rấ t
ạnh. Nhưng m ùa ñông là m ùa r ấ t tố t cho th ể thao.
HƯ
ả.
ẦN
L. I t ’s the best w in e he’s ever dru nk.
Ĩ. I t ’s the m ost e x c itin g film th e y’ve ever seen.
Ỉ. I t ’s the TR
faste st car she’s ever d rive n ,
B
t. I t ’s the best detergent she’s ever used.
00
). I t ’s the m ost in te re s tin g m usic he’s ever heard.

10
i.
+3
1. younger th a n 9. th e ta lle s t
P2
2. m ore in te re s tin g th a n 10. th e m ost a th le tic

3. sw eeter th a n 11. th e la rg e st
CẤ
4. w a rm e r th a n 12. the best

A
5. easier th a n 13. th e w id e st
HÓ
6. m ore in te llig e n t th a n 14. th e busiest

7. m ore tire d th a n 15. th e m ost frie n d ly
Í-
8. worse th a n 16. th e w o rst

-L
ÁN
. She’s one of the most important women in the w o rld .

TO
. H e’s one o f th e ric h e s t m en in th e w o rld .

. She’s one of the most intelligent students in my class.
NG
. He’s one of the strongest men in the world. /

. She’s one o f the m ost b e a u tifu l girls in V ietn am .
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ


II. A.
ƠN
1. M a ry lik e s to clean th e rooms.
2. She also wants to cook the roast beef.
NH
3. They suggested going out. (N o t: They suggested to go out)
4. M r. B ro w n decided to se ll h is car.
UY
5. They d id n ’t w a n t to h elp us.
.Q
6. She p re fe rs to tra v e l by tra in .
TP
7. M y pa rents advise me to study hard.
8. The teacher told us to look at the blackboard.
O
9. He helped her to do the test.
ĐẠ
10. N am expected h e r to go w ith h im . (N o t: Nam hoped h e r to go w ith
him).
NG
B.
HƯ
1. I t ’s too h o t fo r h im to d rin k .
ẦN
2. I t ’s too expensive fo r h e r to buy.
3. I t ’s too d iffic u lt fo r h im to answ er.
4. I t ’s too sm a ll fo r us to see. TR
5. No, I ’m n o t ta ll enough to touch th e ce ilin g .
B
00
6. No, th e y aren’t ric h enough to buy th a t house.

10
7. No, he is n ’t clever enough to understand the questions.

8. No, i t is n ’t quick enough to catch th e b ird .
+3
c.
P2
1. Nước hoa này trô n g có vẻ quyến rũ .

CẤ
2. Phòng n ày cho cảm giác ấm cúng.

3. Băng nhạc ñó nghe Iñ n tiế n g .
A
HÓ
4. Bò b ít-tế t n ày có v ị hảo hạng.

5. Căn n hà ñó trô n g có vẻ h iệ n d ạ i.
Í-
6. Rau n à y có v ị tươi.
-L
7. B ìn h g iả i n h iệ t dó cho câm giác nóng.

8. N hạc n à y nghe r ấ t hay.
ÁN
9. P hó-m át này có v ị ghê quá.

TO
10. N hững bông hoa nà y trô n g ñẹp.

D.
NG
1. ... too o r so are the y.

ƯỠ
2. ... is n ’t e ith e r o r n e ith e r is Sơn.

ID
BỒ
367

ƠN
3. . . to o o r SQif is s h e .
4 . . . to o o r so d id i t .
NH
£
1/. . e it h e r o r n e i t h e r c a n s h e .
UY
6 . . . e it h e r o r n e i t h e r doe s m y fa t h e r .
7. . . to o o r so is m y f a t h e r .
.Q
E.
TP
1. ... d o to o . 6 . ... d id n ’t e it h e r .
O
2. ... w a s to o . 7. ... d o n ’t
ĐẠ
3. ... h a v e n ’t e it h e r . 8. ... d i d n ’t
4. ... d o n ’t e ith e r . 9. ... h a v e
NG
K ... w a s n ’ t e ith e r . 10 ... d id
HƯ
.1 . George w a n te d some stam ps. He h a d to go to t h e p o s t office.
ẦN
2. M a ry needed some m eat. She had to go to th e butcher’s.
3.
4.
TR
D aisy needed some b u tte r. She had to go to th e grocer’s.
P eter w anted some a sp irin s. He had to go to th e chem ist’s.
B
5. He w anted some m agazines. He had to go to the bookshop.
00
G.
10
2. Bobby w ill have to / has had to w o rk a t n ig h t.

+3
3. B renda and A ndrew w ill have to / have had to pass an exam.

P2
4. They w ill have to / have had to correct th is hom ew ork.

CẤ
5. She w ill have to / has had to make beds.

6. Lan w ill have tở / has had to w rite reports.
A
7. Sơn w ill have to / has had to study judo.

HÓ
8. We w ill have to / have had to practise E ng lish.

Í-
H.
-L
2. M a ry M ackintosh hasn’t been able to pass th e te s t yet.

ÁN
3. Bob B rew er has been able to d riv e fo r 2 years.

4. Bob B rew er hasn’t been able to save enough money.
TO
5. M r. and M rs. W ilson have never been able to d rive .

NG
I.
A : Good m orning (1)
ƯỠ
A : Have you got any questions? (2)

ID
A : W hat do you do? (3)

BỒ
A : You’l l be able to fin d a jo b easily. (4)
368

ƠN
A : You’ll be able to ffnd it. (5)
J.
NH
1. Bạn có thể bơi bao lâu rồ i? T ô i ñã có th ể bơi ñược 2 năm .
UY
2. A nh ấy ñã có th ể chơi g h i ta m ộ t v à i năm rồ i.
.Q
3. Cô ta chưa bao giờ có th ể n ó i ñược tiế n g A nh.
TP
4. Họ sẽ có th ể ñến dự tiệ c của tô i không? T ô i x in lỗ i, họ sẽ không thể
ñến ñược.
O
ĐẠ
5. Chúng tô i sẽ có th ể gặp trưởng khoa Toán vào lúc 10 giờ sáng m ai
không? Có, các anh có thể.
NG
HƯ
■II. A.
ẦN
1. B iê n Hòa cách th à n h phố H C M bao xa? 32 câỳ số.
2. M a ria cao bao nhiêu? Cô ấy cao 6 bộ (1 bộ = 30cm)
3. Cha bạn bao nhiêu tuểi? Ô ng 60 tuổi. TR
B
4. Con g á i bạn nặng bao nhiêu? 12 k í lô .
00
5. Ngọn E verest caó bao nhiêu? 8.848m .

10
B.
+3
1. C aroline drives more ca re fu lly th a n Robin.

P2
2. Robin types fa ste r th an C oroline.

3. R obin speaks French b e tte r th a n C aroline.
CẤ
4. E obin speaks Spanish m ore slo w ly th a n C aroline.

A
5. C aroline w orks worse th a n R obin.

HÓ
c.
1. B ien Hoa hasn’t got as m any theatres as HC M C ity ,
Í-
2. Phan Rang doesn’t have as m uch ra in as any o th e r places in VN .

-L
3. I don’t sw im as w e ll as he.
ÁN
4. John doesn’t speak French as w e ll as M a ry.

5. He doesn’t speak as fa st as I.
TO
6. M y teacher has got as m any E n g lis h books as m y m istress.

NG
D.
1. Today i t is very cold, is n ’t it?
ƯỠ
2. We are n ot young, are we?

ID
3. I am rig h t, aren’t I?
4. They loved each oth e r, d idn ’t they?
BỒ
369

5. They are going to London, aren’t they?

6. They w ent home la s t weekend, d id n ’t they?
7. You don’t lik e th is exercise, do you?
ƠN
8. You d id n ’t go to college, d id you?
NH
E.
UY
1. b 2. c 3. b 4. a
5. c 6. c 7. b 8. a
.Q
F.
TP
1. I was d riv in g w hen I heard th a t news on th e ra d io.
O
2. Oswald shot P re sid ent Kennedy w hen he was v is itin g Texas.
ĐẠ
3. W hat was everybody doing w hen th e earthquake happened?
4. We were w o rk in g in th e office when th e fire broke out.
NG
5. R ichard was p la y in g in the garden w hen h is g irlfrie n d came.
HƯ
*
1. W hat w ill you do w hen you come home?
ẦN
2. W hat w ill you eat a fte r you have dinner?
?. W hat w ill you d rin k before you go to bed?
1.
TR
The ch ild re n w ill w atch T V as soon as th e program m e begins.
B
). We s h a ll lis te n to VO A as soon as we get up.
00
5. Lan w ill read books w hen she has tim e .

10
7. W hat w ill he say w hen he m eets her?

+3
!. We s h a ll w a it here u n til she comes.

■a
P2
i
CẤ
. ... we saw a bear.

... we were p la yin g fo o tb a ll.
A
. ... she was cooking.

HÓ
. ... th e y w ere sw im m ing in th e sea.

. ... when th e b u ild in g shook.
Í-
. ... we s h a ll go to th e p a rk.
-L
. ... I fin is h m y w ork.

ÁN
. ... they have a nap.

. ... she fin ish es h ig h school?
TO
3. ... I graduate fro m college.

NG
Lan không ở tro n g vườn; có lẽ cô ta ở tro n g bếp.

ƯỠ
Nam không ở tro n g sân trường; có lẽ anh ta ởtro n g lớp.

ID
Nam và Lan kh ôn g ở tro n g lớp; có lẽ họ ở sân chơi.

BỒ

4. H ôm nay T ân kh ôn g ở trường; có lẽ cậu ta ñau.

5. Ba khô n g có m ặ t ở ñây; có lẽ anh ta. ở tro n g vườn.
ƠN
6. Những cây v iế t kh ô n g ở trê n bàn; có lẽ chúng ở trê n sàn nhà.
7. T ô i ñược phép câu cá ở ñây không?
NH
8. N gày m ai có lẽ trờ i nắng.
UY
I.
1. Cô ta ñang soi gương.
.Q
2. ðừng là m cho bạn b ị ñau / b ị thương.
TP
3. Romeo và J u lie t tự vẫn.
O
4. C húng tô i dự tiệ c ñêm qua. C húng tô i rấ t vu i vẻ.
ĐẠ
5. Cô ta tự m ìn h là m b à i tậ p này.
K.
NG
1. No, th a n ks. N o m ore fo r me. I ’m. d riv in g to n ig h t.
HƯ
2. N o, th a n k you. I ’m try in g to stop.
3. N o t th is week.
ẦN
4. O h, no, I can’t.
5. No, th a n ks. I ’m on a d ie t.
TR
B
00
10
+3
P2
CẤ
A
HÓ
Í-
-L
ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
371

ƠN
ANSWER KEYS
NH
UY
- TO PART TWO
.Q
TP
O
ĐẠ
INTERMEDIATE ©&ÀMMAR
NG
HƯ
INTERM EDIATE GRAMMAR IB
ẦN
1. W e h a v e n ’t s o o k e n to e a ch o th e r f o r w e e k s .
2. P e te r a n d M a r y lo v e e a ch o th e r . TR
3. T h e y h a v e s e e n e a ch o t h e r a f t e r lo n g y e a rs o f ab s e n ce .
B
00
4. I n s o c ie ty , w e n e e d e a c h o th e r .
10
5. T h e y h a v e k n o w n e a c h o t h e r f o r 10 y e a rs .
6. T h e y w r it e to e a c h o t h e r v e r y o fte n .
+3
IS,
P2
I. about 2 . in t e r e s t e d 3. a t 4 . go o d
CẤ
5. b a d 6. o f 7. a n g r y 8. s o rry
A
SSL
HÓ
1. Close the door, please. S orry, I ’m busy.

2. M ay I come in? Yes, o f course.
Í-
3. Could you pass th e sa lt, please? Yes, ce rta in ly .

-L
4. A re tw o and tw o four? T h a t’s correct.

ÁN
5. A re you sure o f the price o f th a t car? I ’m n o t certain.

6. L e t h im do i t fo r you. I agree.
TO
7. L ift the embargo on Cuba. I agree.

NG
8. Has she le ft home? T h a t is n ’t true.

IV.
ƯỠ
1 . S h e u s e d to t e l l a l ie , b u t s h e d o e s n ’t n o w .
ID
2. H e u s e d to b e a n a u g h ty b o y .
BỒ
3. D id M a r y use to w e a r s k ir t s ? .
372

4. She d id n ’t use ta make up b u t now she usually goes to the beauty
ƠN
p arlour.
5. He became used to w ritin g a le tte r in E ng lish.
NH
V.
UY
(A);
.Q
1. M r. B row n said th a t h is ch ild re n would be there the fo llo w in g week.
TP
2. She said th a t the y d id n ’t love each o ther any more.
3. They to ld us th a t th a t was th e ir firs t v is it to E ngland.
O
4. He says th a t he can’t do it.
ĐẠ
5. She to ld h im to rin g h e r la te r.
NG
6. She to ld M ary n ot to use the office phone.
7. The policem an ordered h e r to show h im h e r d riv in g licence.
HƯ
8. The teacher to ld us n o t to w rite our lessons in pencil.
9. M y m other asked me i f I had brought the m oney w ith me.
ẦN
10. They asked us i f we would w o rk fo r them .
11. He asked me who live d n ext door. TR
12. She asked me w hy I got tw o passports. (Quá khứ của have got (có)
B
là got, chứ không p hả i had got)
00
(B)
10
Yes - No questions:
+3
1. She asked me i f I lik e d M a rlo n Brando.

P2
2. He asked h er i f she was enjoying herself.

3. She asked h im i f h is fa th e r w orked there.
CẤ
4. He asked them i f the y had m et D anny before.

A
5. He asked me i f I had borowed h is d ictio na ry.

HÓ
6. She asked h im i f h is b ro th e r liv e d in London.

7. He asked me i f I knew who had broken the w indow .
Í-
8. She asked us i f we had fin ish e d our exams.

-L
Wfo - questions;
ÁN
1. I asked them when the tra in le ft.

2. M y m other asked h e r who she had seen a t the m eeting.
TO
3. He asked the boys w hy the y had taken h is w a lle t.

4. She asked them how they had got to school.
NG
5. The boy asked me w here I live d .

ƯỠ
6. The judge asked them w hy the police hadn’t reperted th e crim e.

7. He shouted to them w hy they w ouldn’t le t h im in .
ID
8. She asked us who we w anted to ta lk to.

BỒ
375
1. She said th a t i t was nice to be home again.

2. She said th a t she had come to m ake a new film .
ƠN
3. She said th a t h e r c h ild re n w ould be th e re th e fo llo w in g week.
NH
4. She said th a t h e r husband w ouldn’t be w ith her.
5. She said th a t she was going to divorce h im .
UY
6. She said th a t th e y d id n ’t love each o th e r any m ore.
7. She said th a t she had sold h e r house in H ollyw ood th e m onth
.Q
before.
TP
8. She said she couldn’t te ll me any more.
O
(D)
ĐẠ
1. He told him not to walk on the ice and said that it wasn’t safe.
2. He told Miss Brown that that was Miss Whiteand he told Miss
NG
White that that was Miss Brown.
HƯ
3. She told me not to tell any one and I said that I promised I
wouldn’t.
ẦN
4. I asked h im i f he w ould lik e m y torch.
He thanked me and said that he had one of his own.
TR
5. One of the typists complained that he expected a lot of work for
B
very little money. The others agreed that he did.
00
(E)
10
1. Tom : “W ould you lik e to come fo r a d riv e tom orrow , Ann?”

+3
2. A nn: “ I ’d love to. W here are you th in k in g o f going?”

3. Tom : “I ’ll leave i t to you.”
P2
4. A nn: “W ha t about S tratfo rd? ”

CẤ
5. A nn: “ I haven’t been there fo r ages.”

6. Tom: “Good idea / all right. We might go on the river if it is a fine
A
day.”
HÓ
7. Ann: “I wonder what is on at the Royal Shakespeare Theatre.”

Í-
8. Tom: “We’l l fin d out when th e y get th e re .”

-L
9. Tom: “It’s usually possible to get seats on the day of the play.”
10. Tom: “Can you be ready by ten?”
ÁN
TO
!.
NG
1. The children are interested in the story. '

ƯỠ
I. She’s bored w ith th e film .

Ĩ. We’re tire d o f th e lon g w a lk.
ID
BỒ
$74

4. H is frie n d s are surprised a t h is success.

5. They’re amused a t th e fu n n y story.
6. The baby was frig h te n e d o f th e ghost.
II.
ƠN
1. We should p la y sports.
NH
2. We shouldn’t s it a t one place fo r a long tim e .
3. We should pra ctise i t every day.
UY
4. We should have some ca p ita l and shouldn’t h e sita te to in ve st our
.Q
money in business.
TP
5. Yes, you should.
6. Yes, I should.
O
III.
ĐẠ
(A)
NG
1. We saw th e re ader w ho was re a ding a newspaper.
HƯ
2. The wom an who w o rks in th e lib ra ry is M rs. Thu.
3. These are th e p ictu re books w h ich in te re s t th e pupils.
ẦN
4. The books w h ich are on th e stacks near th e lib ra ria n are fo r
reference.
TR
5. They ke p t ta lk in g about th e lio n tam ers whom th e y adm ired.
B
6. They saw th e clowns whom th e y lik e ve ry much.
00
(B)
10
1. I t ’s th e horse th a t won th e race.

+3
2. I t ’s th e te s t th a t th e y have passed.
3. They are th e people th e h e lico p te r saved.
P2
4. I t ’s the volcano th a t erupted.

CẤ
5. I t ’s th e v illa th a t he stays in .
6. She’s the film s ta r th a t he is going to in te rv ie w .
A
HÓ
7. I t ’s th e dish th a t she cooked.

8. I t ’s th e cam era th a t she used.
Í-
(C)
-L
1. Is th a t the tra in th a t goes to London?

2. Is th a t th e bus th a t s ta rts a t 6?
ÁN
3. Is th a t th e flig h t th a t lands in H eathrow A irp o rt?

TO
4. Is th a t th e to u r th a t v is its th e Buckingham Palace?

5. Is th a t th e bus th a t stops a t th e station?
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
375

ƠN
8.
NH
1. have read 8. have w aited
2. have been reading 9. have you seen
UY
3. have often thought 10. has been sleeping
.Q
4. have ju s t fin ish e d 11. has w orked / has been w o rkin g
TP
5. have never m et 12. has been w ritin g
6. has been 13. has been p la ying
O
7. have been w a itin g 14. have been ta lk in g
ĐẠ
NG
1, W hether she comes lor no t depends on th e w eather.
HƯ
s2 v2
I Ncl I
ẦN
S! V!
TR
2. I don’t know I who you are.
B
Si Vj s2 v2
00
10
INell
+3
o
P2
3. T his is how I w ill practise m y E ng lish .

CẤ
Si V, s2 V,
I_________ I Nd I
A
HÓ
Í-
4. The b e lie f th a t he already died was confirm ed.

-L
s2 v2
1 Ncl I
ÁN
I
Apposition ST Vi
TO
5. She is in tereste d in whose (pen it is

NG
Si Vv s2 v2
ị N cl|
ƯỠ
Prepositional object
ID
BỒ
376

Hi.
ƠN
1. He has been d rin k in g a lo t o f coffee.
NH
2. We have been w o rry in g our parents,
3. She has been te llin g too m any stories.
UY
4. How long has she been w ritin g the postcards?
She has been w ritin g them since 10 o’clock.
.Q
5. How m any postcards has she w ritte n ?
TP
She has w ritte n 7 postcards.
O
6. He has been ty p in g fo r 2 hours. He has typed 9 le tte rs .
ĐẠ
7. They have been w ritin g fo r one hour. They’ve w ritte n a ll the
hom ework.
NG
8. How m any new words have you le arnt? A bout 2.000 words.
HƯ
!V.
ẦN
1. The pupils cheered I as soon as I the m ayor came.
2. People can stay w here th e y lik e . TR
3. You shouỉd do Ia s i Romans do when you are in Rome.
B
00
4. T h is tree won’t grow I unless there is enough w ater.

10
5. We tra ve lle d by tra in I so th a t! we could see m ore o f the country.

+3
P2
6. He is such a clever student th a t! everybody adm ires him .

CẤ
7. He is not I as I docile I as I you th in k .

A
8. A lthough it rain ed , he s t ill w e n t to school.

HÓ
9. She said n o th in g ! because! she was sad.

Í-
-L
ÁN
1. She is a fra id o f being independent / on h e r own.

TO
2. We are tire d o f w a itin g fo r the bus.

3. He avoided seeing her.
NG
4. They suggested tra v e llin g by tra in .

5. W hat are you in te re ste d in doing?
ƯỠ
6. He denied h avin g stolen th e com puter o f our school.

ID
II.
BỒ
1. A nh ây ñược phép ñ i xi-n ê hoặc d i xem kịch .
371

2. Họ ñược phép ở nhà hoặc ñ i chơi.

3. Cô ta ñược phép xem ti- v i hoặc nghe ñài.
ƠN
4. A nh ta có th ể chơi bóng ñá hoặc quần vợt.
NH
5. T ô i có th ể uống trà hoặc cà phê.
6. C húng tô i có th ể d i m áy bay hoặc tà u lửa.
UY
(N o te: M A Y có th ể d iễ n tả sự cho phép hoặc sự việc không chắc chắn),
.Q
ill.
TP
1. There is little o il le ft to fry th is b ig fis h .
2. Q uite a few teachers attended th e Teachers’ D ay m eeting.
O
3. They got annoyed by th e loudspeaker, (loa p h á t th a n h )
ĐẠ
ỈV.
NG
(A)
HƯ
1. I don’t know w here th e d ire c to r’s office is.
2. M r. Jones w ants to know in w hich file th e le tte r is.
ẦN
3. I should lik e to know how much th is costs.
4. The d ire c to r w ants to know how he is g e ttin g along.
TR
5. No one seems to know when he is le a vin g fo r th e coast.
6. He asked me w hen M r. S m ith w ould get back.
B
00
7. She said she d id n ’t know w h a t th e p rice o f th a t book was.

10
8. I fo rg e t w here you p u t it.

9. He d id n ’t te ll me w h a t tim e he was com ing back.
+3
10. I ’m n o t sure he is com ing back today.

P2
(B)
CẤ
2. Can you te ll me w h e th e r she w ill help us o r not.

3. I should lik e to know w h e th e r we can change th e tim e ta b le .
A
4. I asked h im w h a t tim e she fin is h e d h e r w ork.

HÓ
5. I don’t know how he is successful in life .

6. He asked me w here I was w o rkin g .
Í-
7. He w ants to know who th e teacher w ill be.

-L
8. T e ll me w h a t you expect fro m me.

ÁN
V.
TO
(A)
1. The “ S .P .T itan” , w hich crashed in to a cargo ship, is a super ta n ke r.
NG
2. M r. Shepherd, who is sleeping in a h o te l, lo s t h is house/

3. The th ie f, who stole a van, is going to g et a surprise.
ƯỠ
L The house, w hich was on the edge o f a c liff, fe ll in to th e sea.

ID
). The van, w h ich contained tw o boxes o f snakes, belonged to London

BỒ
4?
!78

Zoo.
6. T he lo ca l re sid en ts, who are a fra id to go hom e, are spending the
n ig h t in a school.
ƠN
(B)
NH
1. ð ây là cuốn sách tô i ñang n ó i ñến.
2. N hữ ng người mà V irg in ia sống vớ i là ông và bà M ille r.
UY
3. Người m à tô i ñang ñợi là c h ị tô i.
4. Căn n hà m à chúng tô i ñang xem ở ñường ðồng K h d i.
.Q
5. M ôn th ể thao chúng tô i quan tâ m n h ấ t là bơi lộ i.
TP
6. ð ây là cá i ghế ông ta th ích ngồi.
O
7. Có a i ở ñây có th ể n ó i tiế n g A n h không?
ĐẠ
8. Có gì tô i có th ể là m cho bạn không?
9. K hôn g có a i có th ể giúp tô i.
NG
10. C hẳng có g ì anh có th ể giúp tô i cả.
11. A n h sẽ th íc h b ấ t cứ thứ gì em chọn.
HƯ
12. A n h ấ y chẳng th ích những cái anh ấ y xem.
13. B ạn có h iể u m ọi cái tô i n ó i không?
ẦN
14. Có cá i gì ñó tô i m uôn xem.
VI. TR
(A)
B
00
1. I f I were a flo w e r, I w ould be a sunflow er.

10
2. I f I w ere a b ird , I would be a w h ite pigeon / dove.

+3
3. I f I w ere a cloud, I would be a w a rm one.

4. I f I am a m an, I s h a ll die fo r m y country.
P2
5. I f you had one m illio n d o lla rs, w h a t would you do?

CẤ
6. I f you have an E n g lish c e rtifica te , you w ill be able to get a b e tte r

job.
A
7. W h a t w ill happen i f you fa il in yo ur exam?

HÓ
8. W e s h a ll stay here i f i t ra in s.
Í-
9. I f I were a k in g , m y w ife w ould be a queen.

-L
10. I f you w ere a P rim e M in is te r w h a t would you do?

(B)
ÁN
1. If th e a ir becomes th in n e r, th e tem perature w ill rise up.

2. If a bow l o f w a te r is placed in th e sun, i t w ill evaporate.
TO
3. If th e ice on th e poles begins to m e lt, th e sea le ve l w ill rise .

NG
4. If we b u ild m ore h o sp ita ls, w ill w ill take b e tte r care o f people.
5. If th e y im prove th e p ub lic bus service, th e y w ill get rid o f p o llu tio n
ƯỠ
in th e city .
ID
BỒ
379

ƠN
6. I f p e o p le m a k e go o d a d v a n c e i n t h e p r e v e n t io n o f d is e a s e s , th e y w ill
reduce the num ber o f deaths.
NH
7. I f you have enough m oney, you can buy a new house.
8. I f the flood hadn’t taken place, people w ould have produced more
UY
w heat.
.Q
9. I f the epidemics hadn’t happened, people w ould have sold more
TP
ca ttle .
10. I f the bacteria stop w o rkin g , life on e a rth w ill cease to exist.
O
ĐẠ
11. I f the re hadn’t been a storm , the crop would have been good.
12. W hat w ill you do i f you are overw eight?
NG
(C)
HƯ
1. If she were young, she could go bush w alking .
2. If it w eren’t cold, they could go sw im m ing.
ẦN
3. If the questions were easy, th e y could answ er them .
4. If he were young, he could a pply fo r the job.
(0 )
TR
B
1. I f the w o rld population continued to increase, the re w ouldn’t be
00
enough food to feed people.

10
2. O ur fa rm w ould have produced more rice i f i t hadn’t been flooded.

+3
3. I f you eat too much, you’l l get fa t.

P2
4. I f the e arth stopped m oving round the sun, we w ouldn’t e xist.

5. M any o f our ra re anim als w ould be e x tin c t i f people continued to
CẤ
destroy forests.
A
(E)
HÓ
1. Nếu bạn không học chăm , bạn sẽ không th i ñậu.

Í-
2. Bạn sẽ không th i ñậu trừ k h i bạn học chăm.

-L
3. Học chăm nếu không bạn sẽ th i rớ t.

ÁN
4. Ba má bạn sẽ không vu i trừ k h i bạn b iế t cách cư xử.

TO
5. Họ sẽ không cho bạn vào trừ k h i bạn cắ t tóc.

6. Các nguồn năng lượng của chúng ta sẽ sóm cạn k iệ t trừ k h i những
NG
nguồn năng lượng khác ñược tìm thây.

ƯỠ
7. Sự sông trê n tr á i ñ ấ t sẽ b ị hủy d iệ t trừ k h i các vụ thử h ạ t nhân

chấm dứt.
ID
8. D ân sô' th ế giớ i sẽ tiế p tục tă n g trừ k h i chúng ta cố gắng giảm nó.

BỒ
9. T ấ t cả những khu rừng ñẹp của chúng ta sẽ b ị phá hủy trừ k h i
380

chúng ta làm cái gì ñó ñể bảo tồ n chúng.
ƠN
10. C h ú n g ta sẽ có t h ể s ô n g ở n h ữ n g h à n h t i n h k h á c n ế u k h o a h ọ c
NH
p h á t triể n .
11. Bạn sẽ làm gì nếu bạn có th ể n ó i tiế n g A nh g iỏ i.
UY
12. Nếu tà i nguyên nưñc b ị ô nhiễm , nạn dịch sẽ sảy ra.
13. T rá i ñ ấ t ñã b ị ngập lụ t nếu rừng không tồ n tạ i.
.Q
14. N ăng suất sẽ tă n g nếu công việc ñược là m bằng m áy móc.
TP
15. N ế u t r á i ñ ấ t n g ừ n g q u a y q u a n h m ặ t t r ờ i, sự s ố n g sẽ k h ô n g tồ n tạ i.
O
16. N h iề u ñ ộ n g v ậ t h iế m củ a c h ú n g t a sẽ b ị t u y ệ t c h ủ n g n ế u e : n ngư ờ i
ĐẠ
tiế p tụ c g iế t chú ng.
(F)
NG
1. f 2. d 3. c 4. b 5. e 6. a
HƯ
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR SB
I.
ẦN
(A)
1. Nước ñông ñặc nếu n h iệ t ñộ xuống dưới số không. TR
2. Nếu anh ta g iận , m ặ t anh ta luôn ñỏ bừng.
B
00
3. Nếu bạn gởi tiề n vào m ột tà i khoản tiế t kiệ m , bạn sẽ có .ược một
khoản tiề n lờ i 10%.
10
4. Nếu m icro không hoạt ñộng, bạn không thể nghe ñiều anh ;a nói.
+3
5. M á y t h u th a n h k h ô n g h o ạ t ñ ộ n g n ế u h ế t p in .
P2
6. Nếu ch ỉ có m ột v à i sinh viê n , chúng ta thường xóa m ột rong các

lớp ñó.
CẤ
7. M áy ñó không h oạ t ñộng nếu nó không có ñủ dầu nhớt.

8. Nếu m ột tr á i cầu ñược bơm ñầy không k h í, nó sẽ bay lên.
A
HÓ
9.. Nếu nước sôi, nó sẽ chuyển th à n h hơi / bốc hơi.

10. M áy này tự ñộng tắ t nếu có trụ c trặc.
Í-
(B)
-L
1. provided th a t (m iễn ià ), unless

2. Just suppose
ÁN
3. Im agine
TO
4. as long as (bao lâu m à)

5. provided th a t (với ñiều k iệ n là )
NG
11.
ƯỠ
1. a ra ce h o rse 6. a te a po t
ID
2. a h o rse race 7. a su g a r b a s in
BỒ

3. a sw im m ing pool 8. a h u n tin g dog

4. an o il lam p 9. a beer b o ttle
5. lam p o il 10. a w ritin g tab le
ƠN
ill.
NH
T h an k you fo r your e nq u iry o f 8 th August. We co n firm your
UY
booking fo r th e n ig h ts o f 26 - 3 0 th A ugust inclusive. Could you please
send £20 as a reservation fee. We are sure you w ill enjoy your stay in
.Q
York.
TP
IV.
O
1. W hen the police came, th e robbers had gone.
ĐẠ
2. W hen he a rriv e d a t th e a irp o rt, the plane had taken off.
NG
3. W hen th a t student w en t in to class, th e lesson had begun.
HƯ
4. W hen th e h elicop te r a rrive d , th e sh ip had sunk.
5. W hen she w e n t out, the ra in had stopped.
ẦN
V.
1. W hen she came, the lesson had begun.
TR
B
2. W hen th e police came to th e scene, the robbers had le ft.
00
3. W hen we came to th e th e a tre , th e film had begun.

10
4. W hen th e y came to the square, th e m eeting had ended.

+3
5. W hen th e ch ild re n had a rriv e d a t th e zoo, i t began to ra in .

P2
6. W hen we graduated, we had been 30 years old.

CẤ
7. W hen th e y came to h e r w edding p a rty , h er parents had finished

th e ir speech.
A
8. W hen the y a rriv e d a t the a irp o rt, th e plane had taken off.
HÓ
VI
Í-
1. C húng tôi ñã ñợi 15 phút k h i xe buýt ñến.

-L
2. Họ ñã ngồi suốt m ột tiế n g rưỡi b ồ i bàn m ới ñem thực ñơn ñến.

ÁN
3. Căn nhà ñã cháy ñược 20 p h ú t ñ ộ i cứu hỏa m ới ñến.

TO
4. Cô ta ñã ñánh m áy ñược m ộ t giờ k h i ông chủ bước vào.

5. Joe Freezer ñã là m ộ t võ sĩ quyền anh ñược 12 năm trước k h i anh
NG
ta trở th à n h nhà vô ñịch th ế g iớ i th á n g vừa qua.

ƯỠ
6. ð ội E astíĩeld U n ite d ñã chơi ñược nửa giờ k h i họ g h i ñược bàn

th ắ n g ñầu tiê n .
ID
BỒ
382

7. Họ ñang ngồi tro n g nhà hàng k h i công an ñến.

8. Cô ta là m việc ở Luân ð ôn k h i cô ta gặp anh ta.
9. A nh ta sông ở Canada k h i vợ anh ta m ất.
ƠN
10. T ô i ñã làm việc ñó m ột h ồ i lâu k h i các bạn tô i ñến thăm tô i.
NH
VII.
UY
■(A)
1. A ll the exercises in th e textbook have been done.
.Q
2. New E ng lish textbooks are now being used.
TP
3. The te st m ust be fin is h e d on tim e .
O
4. M y younger s is te r was given a d oll.
ĐẠ
A d o ll was g iven to m y younger siste r.
NG
5. E ng lish is spoken everyw here.
6. L e t the door be closed because i t is w ind y.
HƯ
7. I t is necessary fo r th e ir lessons to be learned.
ẦN
8. New uniform s w ill be bought by th e pupils.
(B) TR
1. The lessons are alw ays explained cle a rly b y th e teacher.
B
2. The ropes were broken very e asily by G u llive r.
00
3. F ootball is plaved everyw here.

10
4. These exercises m ust be done a t home.

+3
5. He was bro ught food and d rin k by the little men.

P2
Food and d rin k w ere brought to h im by th e litte men.

CẤ
8. A ve ry b ig car was made to b rin g G u lliv e r to th e c ity o f th e kin g.

7. The flow ers in the schoolgarden are w atered by us everyday.
A
HÓ
8. E n g lish is ta u g h t everyw here.

9. The arm s and th e legs o f G u lliv e r were fastened.
Í-
10. F ru it trees are p lanted in the schoolgarden.

-L
11. W hen he came to th e cinem a, .a ll th e tic k e ts had been sold.

ÁN
12. He said h is new d ic tio n a ry had been to rn .

13. The question hasn’t been answ ered ýet.
TO
14. The store had been closed by th e tim e he got there.

NG
15. A new th e a tre has been b u ild in th is stre et.

16. He has been given a very good pen.
ƯỠ
A ve ry good pen has been given to h im .

ID
17. By th e tim e N am responded, th e correct answ er had been given.

BỒ
383

(C)
ƠN
1. The flow ers have been watered.
2 . T h e p ic tu r e b o o k h a s b e e n t o r n b y N a m ’s b r o t h e r .
NH
3. Potatoes have been planted in the garden by Tam.
4. The door has already been shut.
UY
5. Several glasses have been broken by h is siste r.
.Q
6. They can be Dicked up a t the h otel.
TP
7. D in n e r m ust be served on th e plane.
8. The message should be delivered soon.
O
■ ( D )
ĐẠ
T h e m a n a g e r o f t h e R id g e w a y H o t e l (1 ) w a s h e ld b y th ie v e s la s t
NG
n i g h t d u r in g ÍL d a r in g r a i d i n w h ic h n e a r ly £ 5 0 .0 0 0 (2 ) w a s t a k e n fro m
t h e h o t e l sa fe . S e v e ra l o f t h e b e d ro o m s (3 ) w e re a ls o b r o k e n i n t o and
HƯ
a r t ic le s o f v a lu e (4 ) w e re r e m o v e d .
T h e th ie v e s m a d e t h e i r e sca p e t h r o u g h th e k it c h e n , w h e r e seve ral
ẦN
p ie c e s o f e q u ip m e n t (5 ) w e re d a m a g e d . T h e c h e f (6 ) w a s in ju r e d w hen
TR
h e t r i e d to s to p th e m a n d h e (7 ) w a s l e f t l y in g u n c o n s c io u s o n t h e floo r.
T h e th ie v e s (8 ) w e re a r r e s te d b y t h e p o lic e e a r ly t h i s m o r n in g .
B
(E)
00
1. a r e n e e d e d , be s ig n e d
10
2. can n o t be overhead
+3
3. w ouldn’t have been sacked

P2
4. is n e v e r a n s w e re d , a re k e p t, h a v e b e e n w r it t e n
(F)
CẤ
Ĩ . W a s n ’t t h e b o x fo u n d b y h im ?
A
2. W here was the key found by your child?

HÓ
3. W hich book is preferred?

4. W hat plays were w ritte n by Shakespeare?
Í-
5. B y whom was the fin a l decision made?

-L
6. I believe the house was d e lib e ra te ly set fire to.

ÁN
7. T his bed was sle pt in by Queen E lizabe th I.

8. A g oo d b r e a k f a s t w a s e a te n b e fo re h e w e n t to w o r k .
TO
VIII.
NG
1. Students m ust keep th is door shut.

2. W hy don’t you have the doctor te s t your eyes?
ƯỠ
3. P e o p le a re to in tr o d u c e t h i s s p e e d l i m i t g r a d u a lly .
ID
4. I t is now 6 a.m. and a t m ost o f th e h osp itals in the country patients

a r e a w a k e n in g w i t h cup s o f te a .
BỒ
384

5. People say th a t B yron liv e d on vin e ga r and potatoes.
ƠN
6. B y tra d itio n people m ust o ffe r to th e Queen any sturgeon B ritis h
ships catch.
NH
7. The owners w e n t away la s t M a rch and since th e n squatters have
continuously used their houseboat.
UY
8. Have the Workers put in a lift and then you won’t have to climb up
.Q
all these stairs.
TP
9. L a st ye a r th e company made a p ro fit o f 400 m illio n pounds in the
fir s t s ix m onths b u t a loss o f seventeen m illio n pounds i t made in
O
the second six months cancelled this.
ĐẠ
10. People say that the earth is the centre of the universe.
NG
IX.
(A)
HƯ
1. Họ sắp xâ y m ộ t trường ỉà n g m ới.
ẦN
2. A nh ấ y vừa m ới m ay m ộ t bộ ñồ vé t.
3. Có ấ y ñã cho họa lạ i chân dung của cô ấy.
4. Ánh ñã cho ñánh máy bản báo cáo này chưa? TR
B
5. Họ sẽ cho in th iệ p cưới của họ ỏ ñó.
00
6. C húng tô i cho ñưa n ạ n n hâ n ñến bệnh việ n .

10
7. Cô ta n hổ răn g.
+3
8. Ô ng chủ yêu cầu ñ iề n vào tờ ñơn.

9. T ô i sẽ cho sửa xe hơi của tô i.
P2
10. H ọ ñã cho gắn m áy lạ n h m ới tro n g phòng khách.

CẤ
11. Tom vừa mới cho lắp ñặt ñiện thoại trong căn phòng của anh ta.
12. T ô i ñã cho ñánh bóng ñ ô ỉ g iày.
A
(BỊ
HÓ
1. They are going to have the workers build a new village school.
Í-
2. He’s just got the tailor to make a suit.

-L
3. She had the artist paint her portrait.

4. Did you get the secretary to type this report?
ÁN
5. They’re going to have us print their wedding cards there.

TO
6. We got them to take the victim to hospital.

7. She has had the dentist pull her teeth.
NG
8. The boss got her to fill in the form.

9. I ’m going to have h im re p a ir m y car.
ƯỠ
10. They have got the worker to fix a new air-conditioner in the living-
ID
room.
11. Tom has just had someone install a telephone in his flat.
BỒ
385

1 2 .1 got h im to p o lish m y shoes.
ƠN
NH
1.1 2. introduce 3. do you do 4. do you do
5. th is 6. glad 7. m eet 8. are you
UY
9. thanks 10.happy 11.M ay 12. m yself
.Q
13. name’s 14. rem em ber
TP
Si.
O
1. A t 9 on S aturday we’l l be ta k in g the ch ild re n to th e zoo.
ĐẠ
2. A t 11, I w ill be p la y in g g o lf w ith B ill.
3. A t 11.30 A nn w ill be h a vin g a d riv in g lesson.
NG
4. A t 7.30 we w ill be lis te n in g to th e concert in th e F e stiva l H a ll.
HƯ
5. On Sunday m o rnin g, we w ill be d riv in g to Seven Oaks.
6. We w ill be h a vin g lunch w ith A n n ’s parents.
ẦN
7. B ill and M a ry w ill be ha ving supper.
Oil
TR
1. We sh a ll have been d riv in g .
B
2. She w ill have been liv in g .
00
3. By the tim e you get back, we sh a ll have taken care of...

10
4. They w ill have been ru n n in g .

+3
5. He w ill have had.

P2
6. We s h a ll have been m a rried.

CẤ
ỈV.
1. I t ’s b e tte r to avoid going d u rin g the rush hour.
A
2. W ould you m in d tu rn in g down the radio?

HÓ
3. Do you re g re t n o t accepting th a t job?

Í-
4. He a dm itte d n o t h avin g a d riv in g license.

-L
5. Tom suggested h aving fis h fo r d in ner.

6. A re you fond o f p la yin g ten n is th is afternoon?
ÁN
7. Stop m aking too much noise!

TO
8. A void splashing th e w a te r on th e flo or.

9. Jack has given up sm oking.
NG
10. Have you fin is h e d w ashing your h a ir yet?

11. He denied h a ving take n m y pen. Ì
ƯỠ
12. She considers le a rn in g E n g lis h and C om puter.

ID
13. W hy do you keep on lo o kin g a t me lik e tha t?

BỒ
386

14. They postponed going to HCM C ity.

15. Don’t ris k p la y in g w ith bears.
ƠN
V.
NH
1. I don’t know Jack but I lik e to m eet h im .
2. He wishes to become a com puter program m er.
UY
3. He prom ised to m a rry her.
.Q
4. W hat do you in te n d to do a fte r you have a B c e rtific a te in E nglish?
TP
5. We p re fe r to tra v e l by tra in .
6. We are sad to hear o f h e r accident.
O
7. The pup ils are d elig h te d to go fo r sum m er holidays.
ĐẠ
8. He can’t decide to do a n yth in g .
9. T e ll us when to go.
NG
10. He asks w here to m eet a fte r school.
HƯ
11. I don’t know how to te ll her.
12. Do you know how to go to John ’s house?
ẦN
13. Do you know w h a t to do when th e re is a Fire?
14. Has she decided w h a t to cook fo r dinner?
TR
15. N e il A m stro ng is the fir s t m an to w a lk on th e moon.
B
16. He is alw ays th e m an to come la s t / th e la s t m an to come.
00
17. M r. Thom pson asked everybody to keep s ile n t.

10
18. He advised me to re st.

+3
19. H e r parents encouraged h e r to study m edicine.

20. T h a t film made h e r cry.
P2
21. He doesn’t le t anyone smoke in h is office.

CẤ
A
I.
HÓ
1. do 2. m ake 3. do, do 4. doing

Í-
5. Do 6. do 7. made 8. made
-L
9. make 10. do 11. Do 12. m akes

13. d id 14. do 15. make 16. m ake 17. make
ÁN
II
II.
TO
1. Have you fin is h e d your w o rk yet? I have several m ore le tte rs

NG
w rite .
2. Have you done a ll your hom ework? I have tw o m ore exercises to do.
ƯỠ
3. H aven’t you fin is h e d th a t book yet? I have fo u r m ore chapters to

ID
read.
4. Have you addressed a ll th e le tte rs yet? I have a few more to
BỒ
387

ƠN
address.
5. Have you made a ll th e arrangem ents? I have a couple m ore phone
NH
ca lls to make.
6. I t ’s nice o f you to h elp me le a rn E n glish .
UY
7. Our daughter, is tall enough to reach the blackboard.
.Q
8. I t ’s s illy o f h im to speak lik e th a t.
TP
9. T here is n o th in g to ta lk about h im .
10. We have to fin d somewhere to have lunch.
O
ĐẠ
III.
1. By what on earth were you brought here?
NG
2. T hey w ere seen to go out.
HƯ
3. We were made to w o rk.
4. We were let go or we were allowed to go.
ẦN
5. Let your name be written on the blackboard.
6. It is impossible for this to be done.
7. TR
It was rumoured that there had been a terrible accident there.
8. It was said that the earth was round.
B
00
O r the e a rth was said to be round.

10
9. You are not allowed to talk in class.

10. I t is said th a t th e y are going to g et divorced.
+3
11. I hate being looked at.

P2
12. H e r book k e p t on being read.

CẤ
13. A new house began to be b u ilt.

14. The room was fille d w ith smoke.
A
IV.
HÓ
(A)
Í-
1. do 2. sin g 3. to sw im 4. to liv e 5. to go ra in 6. copy

-L
(B)
ÁN
1. He was heard shouting fo r help.

2. She was film e d w a ving to th e crowds.
TO
3. It was seen moving slowly.

4. They were recorded te llin g jokes.
NG
5. T hey were photographed sw im m ing in th e sea.

ƯỠ
V.
ID
1. T ô i th íc h P a ri hơn Luân ðôn:

BỒ
I to p re fe r + noun + to + nounj
388
ƠN
2. T ô i th íc h gọi ñiệ n hơn v iế t thư:
NH
to p re fe r + gerund + to + gerund
UY
3. T ô i th íc h g ọi ñ iệ n hơn v iế t thơ:
to p re fe r + to do sth + ra th e r th a n + do sth
.Q
TP
4. Cô ta th íc h ăn ở nhà hơn:
O
w ould p re fe r to do sth
ĐẠ
5. Cô ta th íc h ăn ở nhà hơn:
NG
w ould ra th e r + bare in fin itiv e
HƯ
6. H ùng th íc h ở nhà hơn ñ i xi-n ê:
ẦN
p re fe r + to do s th + ra th e r th a n + do sth
7. H ùng th íc h ở nh à hơn ñ i xi-n ê : TR
B
w ould ra th e r + V + th a n + V
00
10
8. A nh ây th íc h n gh ĩ về ñiều ñó hơn:
+3
would ra th e r + V
P2
9. A nh ấ y th íc h n g h ĩ về ñiều ñó hcm:
CẤ
w ould p re fe r to do sth
A
10. T ô i th íc h Tom g ọ i ñ iện cho bạn hơn:

HÓ
w ould ra th e r + s + past subjunctive

Í-
11. Cô ta th íc h bạn kể cho cô ta về chuyện ấ y hơn: như mẫu câu số 10.

-L
12. C húng tô i th íc h cô ta ñ i vớ i chúng tô i hơn: như mẫu câu số 10.

ÁN
VI.
TO
(A)
NG
2. We’d b e tte r f i l l up th e p e tro l ta n k .

3. He’d b e tte r get a w edding suit.
ƯỠ
4. She’d b e tte r p a rk h e r car in th e packing lo t.

ID
5. He’d b e tte r clean h e r new dress rig h t away.

6. They’d b e tte r phone th e fire departm ent fo r help.
BỒ
389
(B)
2. You’d b e tte r not m ake too m uch noise.
ƠN
3. You’d b e tte r not p a rk your car here.
4. You’d b e tte r n ot sw im in th is lake.
NH
5. You’d b e tte r not go s tra ig h t in .
(C)
UY
2. I th in k th e y ought to stop b u ild in g new roads.
.Q
3. I th in k the y ought to b u ild m ore houses.
TP
4. I th in k th e y ought to in troduce fre e buses fo r o ld people.
5. I th in k th e y ought n o t to inerease local takes.
O
0. I th in k th e y oughtn’t to spend m ore m oney on th e police.
ĐẠ
7. I th in k the y ought n o t to b u ild a new m otorw ay.
NG
8. I th in k the y oughtn’t to spend less on social services.
9. I th in k the y oughtn’t to b u ild an a irp o rt near th e tow n.
HƯ
ẦN
1.
1. to smoke 11. sm oking TR 21. e a rnin g
B
2. opening 12. w e a rin g 22. try in g
00
3. to pass 13: to understand 23. be

10
4. study 14. to em igrate 24. to k ill

+3
5. fly in g 15. to w in 25. to hear

P2
6. is go 16. to waste 26. w a itin g

CẤ
7. to take 17. e n te r 27. ta lk

A
8. to go 18. to see 28. to come

HÓ
9. d riv in g 19. to h elp 29. to m ake

Í-
10. cross 20. laugh 30. to be

-L
II.
ÁN
(A)
TO
1. m ust lik e green 4. could have

2. m ay be crazy 5. m ust m iss
NG
3. m ig h t be
ƯỠ
(B)
ID
1. I t m ayn’t be a V ic to ria n table.

BỒ
390

2. I t m ig h t n o t be P rince C harles.
3. He couldn’t be poor.
4. She can’t be 130 years old.
ƠN
(C)
NH
1. He m ay be h a vin g d inne r.
2. She m ig h t be lo o kin g fo r a famous p a in tin g .
UY
3. He m ust be w a tching a m atch.
.Q
4. She can’t be sleeping.
TP
5. They m ust be re a din g som ething.
O
III.
ĐẠ
2. You are supposed to keep o ff th e grass,
NG
are to
HƯ
3. You aren’t supposed to / aren’t to eat o r d rin k in th is room.
4. You are supposed to / are to move to th e re a r o f the bus.
ẦN
5. You aren’t supposed to / aren’t to jo ke w ith a irp o rt personnels w h ile
hand luggage is being inspected.
6.
TR
You are supposed to / are to use th e s ta irs in case o f fire .
B
You aren’t supposed to / aren’t to use th e elevators.
00
7. You aren’t supposed to / aren’t to litte r .

10
IV.
+3
1. He m ust have been ve ry lucky.

P2
2. He m ig h t have m a rrie d a ric h woman.

CẤ
3. You m ig h t have used th is brake fo r a ve ry long tim e .

4. He could have robbed a bank.
A
5. He can’t have chewed the gum d u rin g th e m usic lesson.

HÓ
V.
Í-
1. Pigs are used to fin d fru file s by some d is tric t farm ers.
-L
2. A lig h t was sw itched on and the door was opened.

ÁN
3. W hy w asn’t th e ro o f mended before i t fe ll in?

4. A ll th e shop w indow s were broken in recent rio ts b y th e mob.
TO
5. I t was said by the lib ra ria n th a t th e y were s ta rtin g a new system /

They were said by the lib ra ria n to be s ta rtin g a new system because
NG
books were n o t being re turned.

ƯỠ
6. F a r m ore m oney is being spent on food now th a n i t was spent te n

years ago.
ID
BỒ
391

7. I t is h ig h tim e he were to ld to stop behaving lik e a c h ild .
ƠN
8. He was given 2 weeks in w h ich to pay the fin e .
NH
UY
I.
.Q
1. She couldn’t have been speaking French.
TP
2. He couldn’t have been s ittin g in a coffee shop.
3. T h is 2 - year - old baby couldn’t have been reading Shakespeare.
O
4. She shouldn’t have been sm oking near th e p e tro l pum p.
ĐẠ
5. He shouldn’t have been lau ghing d u rin g th e fune ra l.
6. He shouldn’t have been arguin g w ith the referee.
NG
II.
HƯ
A4 - B1 - C3 - D2 - E8 - F5 - G6 - H7
ẦN
III.
(A)
TR
1. He stopped to d rin k w ine.
B
2. He stopped d rin k in g w ine.
00
3. She lik e s to co llect stam ps.

10
4. She lik e s co lle cting stam ps.

+3
5. W hat do you rem em ber doing w hen you were in p rim a ry school?
P2
6. I w ill rem em ber to telephone B ill.

7. I won’t forget to read th a t a rtic le .
CẤ
8. I forgo t reading th a t a rtic le .

(B)
A
HÓ
- John Lennon was bom in L ive rpo o l in 1940.

- H is fa m ily was deserted in 1942. H is m other le ft and he was
Í-
brought up by h is aunt.
-L
- H is w ife divorced h im in 1968.

- Lennon and Joko Ono separated in 1973.
ÁN
- He got d rin k problem s in 1974.

TO
IV.
(A)
NG
1. M a ry can’t hear unless you shout.

ƯỠ
2. I ’m n o t going to th e p a rty unless you go too.

ID
3. You’re n o t allow ed in to th e club unless you are its m em ber...

4. He won’t speak to you unless you ask h im a question.
BỒ
5. U nless we h u rry, we’l l m iss th e bus.
392

ƠN
1. W ere I you... 6. H adn’t you studied...
NH
2. H ad I know n... 7. 0
3. Should you w ant. 8. 0
UY
4. Should you leave. 9. H adn’t you w orked...
10. 0
.Q
5. 0
V.
TP
O
1. I w ouldn’t buy i t unless it had a guarantee.
ĐẠ
2. I f I were you, I w ould see a doctor about th a t cough.
3. W ho would you ask i f you d id n ’t know how to do it?
NG
4. I ’d buy i t i f I could a ffo rd it .
5. I w ouldn’t buy i t unless I could a ffo rd it.
HƯ
6. I w ould refuse to go unless the y paid m y expenses.
7. She’s ve ry lazy. She’d pass i f she trie d harder.
ẦN
8. He w ouldn’t be able to go unless we could fin d h im a b ab y-sitte r.
VI. TR
B
2. I f the d riv e r in fro n t hadn’t stopped suddenly, the accident w ouldn’t
00
have happened.
10
3. I f I had know n George w anted to get up e arly, I w ould have woken

+3
h im .
P2
4. I f J im hadn’t le n t me the m oney, I w ouldn’t have been able to buy

the car.
CẤ
5. I f she hadn’t been w earing a seat-belt, she w ould have been injure d.
6. I f you had had b re akfa st you w ouldn’t be hungry.
A
HÓ
7. I f she had had enough m oney on h e r, she w ould have bought it.

Í-
-L
I.
1. We fin d it necessary to practise E n g lish every day.
ÁN
2. They consider i t th e ir d uty to pay taxes.

TO
3. T h is g ir l th in k s i t im p o rta n t to m a in ta in th e happiness o f he
fa m ily .
NG
4. These ch ild re n fin d it pleasant to sw im in th e riv e r a ll day.

ƯỠ
5. She fin d s it d iffic u lt to m em orize the vocabulary.

ID
BỒ

2. I f o nly the freezers w ere cheap. T hen we could buy one.

3. I f only the m ilk were pasteurized. Then we could d rin k it.
4. I f o nly the stra w berries were frozen. Then we could keep them
ƠN
fresh.
5. I f o nly I were tire d now. Then I could sleep.
NH
(B)
UY
2. I f o nly she d id n ’t w o rry so much.
If o n ly she hadn’t w o rried so much.
.Q
3. I f o n ly th e y d id n ’t d rive so fast.
TP
If only th e y hadn’t d rive n so fast.
O
4. I f o n ly he d id n ’t spend so m uch money.
ĐẠ
If o n ly he hadn’t spent so much money.
5. I f only I d id n ’t ta lk so fa st.
NG
If o n ly I hadn’t ta lke d so fast.
HƯ
ẦN
1. subject
TR 3. com plem ent
B
4. p re p o sitio na l object
00
8. pre p o sitio na l object

10
8. prep object 10. prep object

+3
P2
1. You can m aster E ng lish by speaking i t every day.

2. H e r being busy d id n ’t p re ven t h e r fro m ta k in g p a rt in th is w ork.
CẤ
ì. I don’t lik e being spoken to in such a m anner / lik e th a t.

1. He is fond o f le a rn in g m athem atics.
A
HÓ
). W ould you m in d closing th e window ?

5. She is against h is being in v ite d to h er place.
Í-
Ĩ. We continue doing our exercises.

-L
Ì. He lik e s te llin g such stories.

h He lik e s being to ld such stories.
ÁN
.0. The date o f h is re ru m in g home is uncertain.

TO
1.
NG
I w ish I could give up sm oking.

ƯỠ
. I w ish I had one cigarette. -

ID
Ĩ w ish George were here.

BỒ

5. 1 w ish i t w eren’t cold.

6. I w ish I d id n ’t liv e in London.
7. I w ish T in a could come to th e p a rty .
ƠN
8. I w ish I d id n ’t have to w o rk tom orrow .
NH
9. I w ish I knew som ething about cars.
UY
10. I w ish I w ere ly in g on a b e a u tifu l sunny beach.
.Q
TP
1.
O
ĐẠ
2. I re g re t n o t going to London.
3. I re g re t fa ilin g th e exam ination.
NG
4. I re g re t being rude to h e r yesterday.
HƯ
5. I re g re t never p la y in g games a t school.
ẦN
6. I re g re t h a vin g to w ear a u n ifo rm to school.
7. I re g re t choosing th e w rong job. TR
B
11.
00
1. were, were
10
2. had come, had come, w ould have had

+3
P2
3. w eren’t, w eren’t, w ould go

4. had paid
CẤ
5. had
A
HÓ
6. went
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR !3B
Í-
-L
I.
ÁN
1. He w orks fo r a com pany w hich can support h is life .

2. The book is about a g ir l who runs away fro m home.
TO
3. W hat was th e nam e o f the horse w h ich / th a t w on the race?

4. The police have caught th e m en who stole m y car.
NG
5. A lexander B e ll was th e m an who in ve nte d th e telephone.

ƯỠ
6. W here are the p ictures w h ich th e y used to hang on th a t w all?

ID
BỒ

7. The police are s till try in g to id e n tify the dead body w hich was found
ƠN
la s t week.
NH
8. A d ictio n a ry is a book w h ich gives you the m eanings o f words.
9. I don’t lik e people who are never on tim e .
UY
10. I t seems th a t the e arth is th e o nly p la n e t w hich has got life .
.Q
11.
TP
lb . ... w here she had bought it.
2e... w here we can have a re a lly good m eal.
O
ĐẠ
3a. ... w here I can buy postcards?
4d. ... w here we spent our holidays was...
NG
5c. ... w here people are buried.
6h. ... whose parents are dead.
HƯ
7k. ... w hy I d id n ’t w rite to you was...
8m. ... w hen you telephoned.
ẦN
9f. ... whose dog b it me.
TR
lO i. ... w hy they haven’t got a car is...
llg . ... w here John is staying?
B
121. ... when the second w o rld w a r ended.
00
10

+3
I.
P2
1. A p ril 23rd is the day w hen people celebrate St. George, th e patron
CẤ
sa in t o f E ngland.
2. The w idow whose husband was dead is now ill.
A
3. A gym nasium is the place w here we do! exercises.

HÓ
4. A video-recorder is a m achine w hich records tele vision program m es.

5. J u ly 14th is th e day when people celebrate the F rench R evolution.
Í-
6. A record player is a m achine w h ich plays records.

-L
7. The w idow er whose w ife was dead is mad.

8. A b u ild in g society is an o rgan ization fro m w hich you can borrow
ÁN
m oney to buy a house.

TO
9. A v e t is a doctor who tre a ts sick anim als.

10. Novem ber 11th is the day when W orld W ar I ended.
NG
11. A n optician is an expert who tests people’s eyes.

ƯỠ
12. A n orphan is a ch ild whose parents are dead.

II.
ID
lb 2a 3a 4a 5b
BỒ
396

ƠN
1.
NH
(A)
UY
2. I didn’t get the job for which I applied.
3. The man to whom she is married hasbeen married twice before.
.Q
4. The parly to which we went wasn’t very enjoyable.
TP
5. Who was that girl with whom you were last night?
O
6. The flight on which we wanted to travel was fully booked.
ĐẠ
7. I enjoy m y job because I like the people with whom 1 work.
8. I wasn’t interested in the things about which they were talking.
NG
9. The house in w h ich I am liv in g is n o t in v e ry good condition.
HƯ
(B)
1. I spoke to two counter assistants, one of whom was extremely rude.
ẦN
2. We bought two batteries, neither of which work.
TR
3. We have employed many temporary secretaries from your agency
most of whom were reliable and efficient.
B
4. We have several holiday flats vacant in June, all of which ari
00
equiped to the highest standards.

10
5. There are 20,000 fans at Eastfield United, only a few of whon

+3
misbehave at matches.
P2
6. There are eight candidates, three of whom are very well-qualified.

CẤ
7. We bought 2,000 light bulbs from your company, many of whicl

have since proved to be fa u lty .
A
8. We spoke to two of your representatives, both of whom refused to

HÓ
comment.
Í-
9. There are 600 students, th e m a jo rity o f w hom are Spanish speakers

-L
10. We received 30,000 roof tiles, about 10% of which were cracked O]
delivery.
ÁN
11.
TO
(A)
NG
1. I apologized to th e wom an whose coffee I sp ille d .

2. Ỉ m et th e wom an whose husband...
ƯỠ
3. The professor whose course I am ta k in g is excellent.

ID
4. I come fro m a coun try whose h is to ry goes......

BỒ
5. M r. N o rth teaches a group o f students whose n a tive language...
39

(B)
1. .. th a t can answ er your question.
2. .. th a t I don’t understand.
3 .. th a t he can tru s t.
ƠN
4. .. th a t I can do to help her.
NH
5. .. th a t charm s every one.
6. .. th a t M rs Wood was ta lk in g about.
UY
7. .. th a t he says is re lia b le .
.Q
8. .. th a t has no seat.
TP
O
I.
ĐẠ
1. He’s got a d irty o ld ru s ty French car.
NG
Ì. I t ’s a valuable 18th century landscape p a in tin g .
Ỉ.She live s in a three-bedroom ed spacious studio fla t,
HƯ
t.I ’ve ju s t bought a sm a rt brow n le a th e r briefcase.
).I ’d lik e tw o dozen fre sh la rg e bro w n eggs.
ẦN
>.He’s got an expensive p ro ta ble Japanese video recorder.
TR
Look a t those antique F rench porcela in figures (tượng, h ìn h ảnh).
I ’m lo o king fo r a m achine-w ashable V -neck green lam bswool
B
pullover.
00
. I was b itte n by a savage huge bla ck A ls a tia n dog.

10
0. She drives a little lo ve ly lig h t blue F ia t car.

+3
P2
e a rly 6. b ald 11. ears 16. good-looking

CẤ
hea vily 7. beard 12. th in 17. look

A
strong 8. blue 13. serious

HÓ
s tra ig h t 9. glasses 14. sm ile

Í-
fa ir 10. n arro w 15. casually

-L
ÍTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR 17B

ÁN
TO
to v is it Anne 6. fo r a m edical e xam ination

NG
fo r a business conference 7. to stre ng th e n m y legs / to lose m y

ƯỠ
to buy some food w e ig h t

ID
BỒ

.4 . fo r ta x collection / some 8. fo r a b e tte r h e a lth

groceries / pleasure 9. to have th e w heel changed
5. to ask fo r some advice. 10. fo r the change o f a wheel / an o il
ƠN
check
NH
II.
2. M y w ife turne d down the ra d io so th a t I could get to sleep.
UY
3. P ut th e m ilk in the re frig e ra to r so th a t it w on’t / doesn’t spoil.
.Q
TP
4. I put the m ilk in th e re frig e ra to r so th a t i t w ouldn’t spoil.
O
5. Please be quiet so th a t I can hear w h a t Sharon is saying.
ĐẠ
6. I asked the c h ild re n to be q u ie t soth a t I could hear...
NG
7. I ’m going to cash a check soth a t I can have...
HƯ
8. I cashed a check yesterday so th a t I w ould have enough money...
ẦN
I.
TR
1. So th a t i t w ouldn’t be broken in by th e thieves.
B
00
So as to pre ve nt m y house fro m being broken in .

10
2. in o rd er to p re ven t i t fro m b itin g strangers.

+3
To avoid rabies.
3. In order not to be lost.
P2
4. To avoid being scratched.

CẤ
So as n o t to h u rt / cut m yself.
5. So as to protect our natural environment.
A
HÓ
In order rio t to e xtin g u ish it.

Í-
II.
-L
1. The classroom has so com fortable chairs th a t th e students fin d ...

2. Ted was so w o rrie d about th e exam th a t he couldn’t ...
ÁN
3. J e rry got so ang ry th a t he p u t h is...

TO
4. I have so m any problem s th a t I can use...

5. The tornado stru ck w ith such g reat force th a t i t lifte d ...
NG
6. D u rin g the sum mer, we had such h o t and hum id le a th e r th a t it was

uncom fortable...
ƯỠ
7. H is h a n d w ritin g is so ille g ib le th a t I can’t fig u re out...

ID
BỒ
399

ƠN
8- D avid has so m any g irlfrie n d s th a t he can’t...
NH
9. So m any people came to th e m eeting th a t th e re w ere n o t e n o u g h -
10. In some countries, so few students are accepted by the universities
UY
th a t adm ission is...
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR Ỉ9B
.Q
TP
I.
O
(A)
ĐẠ
1. They saw th e a irs h ip w a itin g to la n d.
2. H e saw th e a irs h ip fla sh in g .
NG
3. He w atched th e tra in steam ing past.
HƯ
4. Can you sm e ll som ething burning?
5. We liste n ed to th e band p la y in g in th e p a rk.
ẦN
6. We looked a t th e ra in coining dow n.
7. H e saw th e a irs h ip d is in te g ra tin g .
TR
8. They saw the people jumping from the window.
(B)
B
00
1. He photographs them sm ilin g and frow ning.

2. He imitates politicians giving speeches.
10
3. He watches singers appearing on TV .

+3
4. He copies the m m oving th e ir hands.

P2
(C)
1. There was a lounge w ith a dance flo o r.
CẤ
2. There w ere 25 cabins w ith e le c tric h ea ting .

A
3. There was a lounge with a baby grand piano.

HÓ
4. There w ere lu x u rig cabins w ith h o t and cold w a ter.

(B)
Í-
1. There were 50 passengers, m ost o f w hom escaped.

-L
2. There were 50 passengers, 13 o f w hom died.

3. There were 47 crew, about h a lf o f w hom escaped.
ÁN
4. There were 47 crew, 22 o f w hom died.

TO
5. The ship had 16 w a te r-tig h t com partm ents, fiv e o f w h ich had
already been flooded.
NG
6. The bridge is suspended fro m 4 huge cables, each o f w h ich contains

26,108 le n g th o f w ire .
ƯỠ
ỈI.
ID
m
BỒ
1. because 2. although 3. although

ƠN
4. because =*5. because 6. although
(B)
NH
2. He is in fa c t G erm an despite the fa ct th a t he’s got an E nglish name.
3. A ltho u g h h e r fo o t was in ju re d , she managed to...
UY
4. I decided to accept th e jo b in sp ite o f th e fa c t th a t the salary was
.Q
lo w .
TP
5. We lo s t th e m atch despite th e fa c t th a t we were...
6. E ven though I hadn’t eaten fo r 24 hours, I d id n ’t feel hungry.
O
ĐẠ
INTERMEDIATE GRAMMAR20B
NG
1.
(A)
HƯ
2. B o th B on and Bob enjoy horseback rid in g .
3. We can e ith e r fix d in n e r fo r them o r ta k e th e m to a restaurant.
ẦN
4. B o th th e leopard and th e tig e r face extinction.
5. TR
The p re sid e n t’s a ssista n t w ill n e ith e r co n firm n o r deny th e story.
6. N e ith e r h e r room m ates n o r h e r b ro th e r know s (ñộng từ hòa hợp vố i
B
chỏ ngữ th ứ 2}... t ---------- ỉ
00
7. B o th coal and o il are irrep la ceable n a tu ra l resources.

10
8. B oth sm allpox and m a la ria are dangerous diseases.

+3
(B)
P2
1. ... and m oney.

2. ... w a rm th and love.
CẤ
3. ... and to p la n t crops.

4. ... and shouted.
A
5. ... and working 0X1 my stamp collection.

HÓ
6. E ith e r M r. A nderson o r M s. W iggins is going...

t _______ 1
Í-
7. I enjoy re a din g n o t o n ly novels b u t also...

-L
8. A ir contains b o th oxygen and w a ter.

ÁN
II.
TO
(A)
2. due to th e heavy tra ffic .
NG
3. ... because o f h is w ife 's illn e ss.

4. ... Due to D r. Robinson’s e xcellen t researches on wolves...
ƯỠ
5. ... because o f th e noise in the n e x t a partm ent.

ID
6. ... Due to m y unco n trollab le circum stances, I re gret...

BỒ
40:

(B)
2. ... in spite o f its noise. 5. D espite th e h o t w eather, they.
ƠN
3. ... D espite th e ir h a rd w o rk,... 6. ... in spite o f h is vast fortune.
4. ... in spite o f its danger,... 7. D espite w h a t he says, I...
NH
UY
ANSWER KEYS
.Q
TP
TO PART THREE
O
ĐẠ
NG
ADVANCED GRAMMAR
HƯ
ẦN
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 1C
TR
B
(A)
00
10
1. A fte r refusing to pay th e fare, she h it th e d riv e r.

2. A fte r h ittin g th e d riv e r, she fought th e police...
+3
3. A fte r g e ttin g hom e, she had a large w hisky.

P2
(B)
CẤ
1. a 15-m illion-pound co ntra ct 5. a 50-m inute lesson

A
2. a 2 00-dollar s u it 6. a 15-inch fis h

HÓ
3. a 2-hour jo u rn e y 7. a 5 -k ilo bag o f potatoes

Í-
4. a 38-hour w o rk in g week 8. a 7 2 -litre ta n k

(C)
-L
1. ... it b it th e baby.
ÁN
2 . .. tra ilin g h e r hand near th e w a te r (khua ta y gần m ặ t nước)

TO
3. .. she ju s t w anted i t out o f th e house (v ấ t con cá ra k h ỏ i nhà)

4. .. breeding tro p ic a l fis h .
NG
5. .. i t gashed th e baby’s fin g e r badly.

£ .. a ta n k w h ich stands in the fa m ily ’s lounge.
ƯỠ
'
Si. ■ ■ " ,
ID
1. I ’l l te ll you w h a t I can.
BỒ
402

2. They to ld h im w h a t th e y knew .
3. She packed w h a t she could.
4. He spent w h a t he had saved.
ƠN
5. She noted down w h a t was necessary.
6. W hat I saw astonished me.
NH
7. W hat he said offended a lo t o f people.
8. She learned w h a t would be useful.
UY
9. He saw w h a t looked lik e a fly in g saucer.
.Q
10. They had to do w h a t seemed a waste o f tim e .
TP
11. W h at you need is a holiday.
12. W hat th e y ought to do is (to) save m ore m oney.
O
ĐẠ
ill.
(A)
NG
1. H owever 4. W henever
HƯ
2. w herever 5. W hichever
3. W hatever 6. W hoever
ẦN
(B)
1.
2.
W ho ever said th a t the w o rld w ould end...? TR
W hen ever d id E ngland beat B ra z il 8 - 0 a t football?
B
3. How ever d id he jum p o ff the E iffe l Tow er and tr y to fly?
00
4. W hy ever d id he p a in t a moustache on th e M ona Lisa?

10
5. W hen ever d id th e y both propose m arriag e to her...?

+3
6. W hat ever d id she break?

P2
7. W hat ever d id you see once?

8. W hich ever d id she say I could have?
CẤ
9. W ho ever d id she leave a ll h e r m oney to?

A
III.
HÓ
N + N + ED N + V + ER
Í-
gold-rim m ed a fo rtu n e -te lle r

-L
air-conditioned a film m aker

ÁN
man-powered a book e d ito r

TO
cigar-shaped a drug dealer

hook-nosed a h a ir d ry e r
NG
egg-shaped a day dream er

ƯỠ
fan-shaped a shoe m aker

ID
pig-headed a ta x i d riv e r
BỒ

ƠN
hook-shaped a book se lle r
p in e -w o o d e d a dress designer ■
NH
o liv e -s k in n e d a m usic teacher
UY
day-breaked a la w m aker
.Q
ice-creamed a te le visio n presenter
TP
la c e -c u rta in e d a dress m aker: th ợ m ay ñồ nữ
O
h e n - p e c k e d : sợ VỢ a book keeper: n h â n v iê n k ế toán
ĐẠ
silve r-p la te d : m ạ bạc a p a in k ille r: thuốc giảm ñau
heart-shaped: có h ìn h tr á i tim a bulb h older: chuôi ñèn
NG
chicken-hearted: n h ú t n h á t a h a ir re sto re r: thuấc h ồ i phục tóc
HƯ
hare-brained: liề u lĩn h
ẦN
lio n-hea rte d: dũng cảm
diam ond-shaped: cố h ìn h th ò i
TR
death-headed: có h ìn h ñầu lâu
B
00
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 2C
10
I.
+3
1. ca rryin g-tra de 4. new spaper

P2
2. a sea-voyage 5. sea breezes

CẤ
3. postm an
H.
A
HÓ
JAL
1. Noun + S u ffix 2. N oun + P ast p a rtic ip le 3. A d j + Pres, part.
Í-
trouble some ox-driven gay-looking

-L
godlike snow-covered
ÁN
stainless tre e -lin e d

TO
southern
NG
m ountainous
Vietnam ese
ƯỠ
d a ily
ID
fu n n y
BỒ
ch ild is h
404
(B)
ƠN
1. a one-eyed m an 5. a home-made s u it
2. a horse-draw n car 6. a thatch-covered house
NH
3. a sw eet-sm elling flo w e r 7. a h ard -w orkin g boy
UY
4. a new ly-born c h ild 8. a d ull-lo o kin g stre e t
III.
.Q
1. ðã ñến giờ trẻ con ñ i ngủ.
TP
2. ðã ñến ỉú c người ta p h ả i là m g ì ñó ñ ố i vớ i vấn ñề giao thông tro n g
O
tru n g tâ m th à n h phô'.
ĐẠ
3. ðã ñến lú c tô i p h ả i có m ộ t ngày n g h ỉ.
4. ðã ñến lú c chín h phủ tậ p tru n g vào việc nâng cao mức sông của
NG
người dân.
HƯ
5. T ô i th íc h chúng ta ở nhà hơn.
6. T ô i th íc h tố i nay chúng tô i có m ộ t bữa ă n người Hoa nấu hơn.
ẦN
7. Dường như tô i không còn bé.
8. Dường như tô i không cố tìn h là m chuyện ñó.
9. Dường như không p h ả i cô ta ñần ñộn.
TR
B
10. Dường như anh ta không p h ả i là nhà triệ u phú.
00
11. Dường như kh ông p h ả i ngày nào chúng cũng ñến trễ .
10
12. C húng tô i th íc h cô ta sang Pháp n g h ỉ ỉễ hơn.

+3
IV.
P2
(A)
CẤ
1. P ut out a b o n fire / your host / th e ru b b ish / host (kẻ ăn bám )

2. Put fo rw a rd an idea / a proposal / a suggestion.
A
3. P ut o ff a fo o tb a ll m atch / an app o in tm en t / custom ers.

HÓ
4. Put across yo ur feelings / idea / opinions.

5. Put up an umbrella / prices / a picture.
Í-
6. P ut on a concert / a lim p / clothes (a lim p : bộ ñiệu vụng về)

-L
7. P ut away papers / books / file s .

ÁN
8. Put up with someone’s behaviour / bad maimers / temper.

TO
NG
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 3C
ƯỠ
I.
ID
1. The key had been found before m y exercise was fin ish e d.
BỒ
3.1. T h a t student is going to be punished.
405

3.2. These docum ents w ill have to be signed.

3.3. M any in te re s tin g sto rie s continue to be to ld by m y grandfath er
every evening.
ƠN
3.4. These d iffic u ltie s ought to be overcome b y yo ur b ro th e r.
7.1. Can I be advised w h ich to buy?
NH
7.2. He was to ld w hen to s ta rt.
UY
8.1. The m an was to ld th a t he was m istaken.
8.2. You w ere w arned th a t he w ould be la te .
.Q
8.3. He was rem inded th a t he m ust be here e arly.
TP
9.1. He was heard g iv in g orders.
9.2. He was found w o rk in g a t h is desk.
O
ĐẠ
9.3. I was le ft sta n d in g outside.
9.4. The train was watched leaving the station.
NG
9.5. W as th e house fe lt shaking?
9.6. He was seen Tunning o ff.
HƯ
10.1. He was asked n o t to do it.
10.2. I was helped to c a rry th e box.
ẦN
10.3. You are expected to w o rk hard.
10.4. TR
H e was w arned n o t to be la te .
10.5. The soldiers were allowed to take him prisoner.
B
11.1. He was believed (to be) innocent.
00
11.2. Is she considered (to be) honest?

10
11.3. Tom is thought (to be) the eleverest boy in the class.
+3
12.1. They w ere seen to go out.

P2
12.2. The house was fe lt to shake.

CẤ
12.3. I am w atched to do it .
12.4. Was the thief noticed to leave the house?
A
12.5. H e was m ade to do it .

HÓ
12.6. He has'never been known to behave so badly before.

12.7. I was helped to c a n y th e box.
Í-
13.1. The door was p ain te d green.

-L
13.2. The prisoners were set free by the government.

ÁN
13.3. Can th e door be pushed open?

13.4. We are k e p t w arm by th e sun.
TO
13.5. She was made uneasy.

13.6. The leaves are turned red by the cold weather.
NG
13.7. H is opponent was w ished dead.

ƯỠ
14.1. W as M r. N am chosen president?

14.2. T he dog is called “ SPOT” .
ID
BỒ
406

14.3. H is son was nam ed H e n ry by m y b ro th e r.

14.4. R ichard was crowned kin g .
ƠN
14.5. N ew ton was made P re sident o f th e R oyal Society.
15. He le t h im s e lf be cheated.
NH
17. The m an was know n to have been a spy.
UY
II.
1. W here d id you have these w edding cards prin ted ?
.Q
2. He had h is h e a lth checked la s t week.
TP
3. Has he had h is te le visio n set repaired?
O
4. She had h e r eyes exam ined.
ĐẠ
5. She had h e r h a ir waved yesterday.
6. I sh a ll have m y h a ir cut tom orrow .
NG
7. M y younger b ro th e r often has h is te e th fille d in th a t d e n tis t’s office.
8. W e ofte n have our honda re pa ired in th e same re p a ir shop.
HƯ
9. The g ir l in m y neighbourhood o n ly has h e r h a ir done in the famous
ẦN
beauty shop.
10. The boy liv in g next door had h is to o th p re ỉỉe d in th e h osp ita l
yesterday. TR
11. We have to have our luggage w eighed and checked a t le a st one day
B
00
ahead o f th e departure.
10
12. People had Napoleon, e xile d to th e R eunion.

+3
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 4C
P2
I.
CẤ
(A)
1. He rem inded h e r to go to th e post office.
A
HÓ
2. He asked h e r to len d h im some m ore m oney.

3. She to ld h im to v is it h e r school.
Í-
4. He to ld h e r to sw ich on and press th e record button.

-L
5. He w arned them n o t to eat because i t was poisonous.

6. He ordered the so ld ie r to salute w hen he m et an officer.
ÁN
(B)
TO
1. He to ld h e r (change “ said to h e r” to “to ld h e r” ) th a t he was th in k in g

o f going to liv e in Canada.
NG
2. He to ld h e r th a t N ora and J im w ere g e ttin g m a rrie d th e fo llo w in g

ƯỠ
m onth.
3. He told , h er th a t he had been p la y in g te n n is a lo t re ce ntly.
ID
4. He to ld h e r th a t he d id n ’t know w h a t F red was doing.

BỒ
407

5. He to ld h e r th a t he h a rd ly ever w en t out those days.
ƠN
6. He to ld h e r th a t he would te ll J im he had seen her.
NH
7. He to ld h er th a t she could come and stay w ith h im i f she was ever
in London.
UY
8. He to ld h e r th a t Tom had had an accident th e w eek before b u t he
hadn’t been injured.
.Q
(C)
TP
1. H e asked me how I was.
O
2. H e asked me how long I had been back.
ĐẠ
3. He asked me w h a t I was doing the n .
NG
4. He asked me w here I was liv in g .
HƯ
5. He asked me i f I was glad to be back.
6. He asked me i f I was going aw ay again.
ẦN
7. He asked me w hy I had come back.
8. H e asked me i f I s till smoked.
TR
B
II.
00
10
1. She asked me i f I w anted a cup o f coffee and said th a t i t had ju s t

been made.
+3
2. She asked me where the Smiths were spending their holidays and
P2
asked if I could tell her.

CẤ
3. The m other to ld the daughter th a t she was la te fo r home and asked

her what she had been doing.
A
4. He asked h e r i f th a t was th e postm an and said th a t he hoped he

HÓ
had a letter for him.

5. My father told me that it was time to go and asked if I had all my
Í-
things. (The simple past of HAVE GOT is HAD, not HAD GOT)
-L
6. M y teacher o f E n g lish asked me how lo ng I had been le a rn in g

English and said that my acient was very good.
ÁN
7. The teacher to ld the students to keep q u ie t and asked i f they

TO
understood the lesson.

8. She asked me who I tho u gh t was E ngland’s greatest d ra m a tis t and
NG
said that she liked Bernard Shaw best.

ƯỠ
9. He asked h is frie n d how fa r i t was to B irm ingham and said he

hoped they could get there before dark.
ID
10. The w ife to ld h e r husband th a t th e dog had stolen th e m eat and

asked what they were to do.
BỒ
408

ADVANCED GRAMMAR 5C
ƠN
British English American English
NH
- petrol
- postman - mailman
UY
- bonnet - hood: nắp ñậy xe, capot
.Q
- gas station - filling station
TP
- saloon car - sedan: xe du lịc h 4 - 7 chỗ
O
- films - movies
ĐẠ
- chemist’s - pharmacy
NG
- lift - elevator
- flat - apartment
HƯ
- main road - highway
ẦN
- boot (of a car) - trunk
- tap - faucet TR
- autumn - fall
B
00
- pavement: vỉa hè - sidew alk: v ỉa hè

10
- roadw ay: lò n g ñường - pavem ent: lò n g ñường

+3
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 6C
P2
I.
CẤ
i. - y 7. m in i- 13. dis- 19. -ism 25. m is-

A
2. -fu l 8. -ia n 14. -est 20. -m ent 26. -en

HÓ
3. -less 9. pre- 15. m is- 21. m in i- 27. -en

Í-
4. -ism 10. -ness 16. un- 22. over- 2 8 .-e r

-L
5. -a n t 11. -hood 17. - fill 23. d is- 29. -less -ness

ÁN
6. -a n t 12. -m ent 18. -less 24. -est 30. over-

II.
TO
1. Cô ta b ị ta i n ạ n tro n g k h i lá i xe ñ i làm .
NG
2. A n h ta ñang học trư ợ t tu y ế t th ì b ị bể m ắ t cá chân.

3. C húng tô i tìn h cờ gặp công chúa xứ W ales tro n g k h i ñ i mua sắm ỏ
ƯỠ
O xford Street.
4. A n h ta ñang d i thơ th ẩ n trê n b ã i b iể n th ì th ấ y m ộ t con cá heo bị
ID
BỒ
409

thương lầ n ñầu tiê n .

5. B út cua tô i h ế t mực k h ỉ tô i ñang v iế t thư.
III.
ƠN
1. unemployed 5. uncountable
NH
2. uneconomic 6. unlucky / unhappy
UY
3. unborn 7. u nlucky / un fortu na te
.Q
4. unknow n 8. u n tru s tfu l
TP
iV.
O
1. h e rse lf 2. m yse lf 3. yourselves 4. m yse lf
ĐẠ
V.
NG
1. He’s th e man from whom I bought it.
2. The person to w hom I spoke was ve ry rude.
HƯ
3. I bought a carton o f eggs, s ix o f w h ich w ere bad.
Ỉ. The people a ga in st w hom the police bro ught charges had long
ẦN
c rim in a l records.
TR
5. Here’s the book in w h ich I found th e quotation.
3. Douglas Adam s is th e m an by whom th e e xtra c t was w ritte n .
B
1. I t ’s som ething about w h ich I know n oth in g.
00
Ì. She’s the wom an about w hom I was te llin g you.

10
The goods fo r w h ich I sent you cheque have never a rrive d .

+3
10. She’s a person on w hom we re ly very much.

P2
/I.
CẤ
t. inaccurate 2. in a ctiv e 3. in cre dible

1. insecure 5. in v is ib le
A
HÓ
/II.
L. 0 , the 2. an
Í-
Ỉ. 0 4. The
-L
S. 0 , the 6. T he, 0 , th e
ÁN
Ĩ. ,
0 0 8. the
TO
/III.
NG
L. T h e ir m arriage is ille g a l.
Ì. You can’t get a h ig h m a rk fo r your ille g ib le h a n d w ritin g .
ƯỠ
!. The illite ra te people are those who can’t read o r w rite .

ID
1. Y our argum ent sounds illo g ic a l.

BỒ
110

5. H is reasoning proved to be irra tio n a l.

IX .
ƠN
1. non-use
NH
2. non-aggression
3. n o n -in te rv e n tio n
UY
4. non-aligned
.Q
5. non-com batant
TP
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 7C
O
ĐẠ
I.
1. She was snobbish and looked dow n on a ll h e r neighbours.
NG
2. The house looks out on to th e race-course.
HƯ
3. E very student in th e school looked up to th e headm aster.
4. He broke away fro m h is e v il com panions.
ẦN
5. W hen she heard th e sad news, she broke dow n and w ept.
II.
TR /
1. dishonest 3. disagreem ent
B
2. d istaste fu l 4. d is b e lie f
00
10
III. ■-
+3
1. ‘ve been e xp lo rin g 8. opened 15. had ever seen

2. happened 9. was 16. had never been
P2
3. was tra v e llin g 10. was 17. craw led

CẤ
4. have been tra v e llin g 11. was com ing 18. jum ped
5. stopped 12. had come 19. picked up
A
6. was ju s t going 13. see 2 0 .ra n

HÓ
7. woke 14. was 21. had already gone

Í-
IV.
-L
1. Come along now, o r else we s h a ll be late.

ÁN
2. “ Come dow n!” M rs. B lig h shouted to th e boy w ho was up th e ladder.

3. The m inu te hand o f m y w atch has come off.
TO
4. Come over and have a m eal w ith us n e x t M onday.

NG
5. Come up and take a look a t th e bedroom .

V.
ƯỠ
1. m iscalculations
ID
2. m isbehaviour and m isconduct

BỒ
/ 411
I

ƠN
3. m isfortune
4. m isquotes
NH
5. m istim e d
UY
VI.
1. W ho w ill go along w ith me?
.Q
2. Several boys w e n t down w ith in flu e n za la s t te rm .
TP
3. The n a il won’t go in ; lend me th e ham m er.
O
4. M y frie n d sa id he preferred to go in fo r c iv il engineering.
ĐẠ
5. He w e n t over to ta lk to h is old frie n d .
VII.
NG
1. believe 5. believe 9. believe
HƯ
2. are jo k in g 6. forge t 10. th in k
3. don’t know 7. looks / ed 11. do you liv e
ẦN
4. know 8. Do you tr y 12. don’t know
VIII. TR
1. inexpensive 6. non - v io le n t 11. irre g u la r
B
16. d islo ya l
00
2. in fo rm a l 7. dishonest 12. disobedient 17. in co rre ct

10
3 ille g a l 8. im probable 13. unconscious 18. m istim ed

4. im p o lite 9. u n tid y 14. im possible 19. illo g ic a l
+3
5 unclean 10. irresponsible 15. m isunderstood 20. u n skille d

P2
IX.
CẤ
1. Once she began to speak, she w ould ru n on fo r hours.

2. Someone m ust have le ft the tap on fo r th e w a ter was ru n n in g over
A
HÓ
and flo o d in g th e room .

3. The k n ig h t ra n th e v illa in throu gh w ith h is sword.
Í-
4. The sales o f th e book ra n up o vernig ht.

-L
5. T h a t firm has ru n up against g re a t com petition.

ÁN
X.
1. The sky was cloudy.
TO
2. H e r dress was made o f a s ilk y m a te ria l.

NG
3. The m agazine is published q u a rte rly.

4. She’s frie n d ly .
ƯỠ
5. The cupboard was dusty.

6. She’s a moody person (buồn rầu, ủ rũ ).
ID
BỒ
412

ƠN
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 8C
NH
I.
1. The army tu rn e d him down on account o f h is poor h ea lth .
UY
2. H e turne d a ll h is pockets in sid e out b u t couldn’t fin d h is keys.
3. E v e ry th in g tu rn e d out a ll rig h t in the end.
.Q
4. The canoe tu rne d o ver as soon as i t reached th e rapids.
TP
5. Several frie n d s o f m in e turne d up a t th e m eeting.
O
n.
ĐẠ
1. H um ph' 2. Heavens! 3. H o rro rs!
NG
4. W hew! 5. A la s! 6. Hey!
III.
HƯ
1. E verle y B ro th e rs-styỉe 4. V on K a ra ja n -like
ẦN
2. W ill s tre e t B lues-type 5. Lib erace-like
3. Boy-G eorge-style 6. M ercedes-style
IV.
TR
B
1. The new boy seems to be g e ttin g along q uite w e ll w ith the re s t o f
00
th e fo rm (iớ p).
10
2. Jones g ot b ehin d in th e paym ent o f h is re n t.

+3
3. These tra g ic events are g ra du a lly g e ttin g me down.

P2
4. The conductor to ld th e stra ng e r to get o ff a t th e n e xt stop.

5. W hen I g e t th rou g h th is re p o rt, I s h a ll go to th e cinem a.
CẤ
V.
A
1. W e w ere g re a tly take n aback by th e news o f h is departure.

HÓ
2. Ỉ took m y s is te r along to th e dance.

3. The re p o rte r to o k dow n th e w hole speech.
Í-
-L
4. B ill has ta ke n th e business over.

5. a) M y jo b takes up m ost o f m y tim e .
ÁN
b ) The m edical student decided to take up surgery.

TO
VI.
acceptable dependable reasonable
NG
believable d rin k a b le recognizable

ƯỠ
changeable lovable re lia b le

ID
VII.
BỒ
1. W h a t has b ro ug h t about th is m isunderstanding1

.
413

2. The shopkeeper bro ugh t h is price down to fiv e d ollars.

3. I brought back (to m in d ) our schooldays.
4. W hen are you b rin g in g out your n e xt novel?
ƠN
5. The k in d o ld couple agreed to b rin g up th e young orphan.
NH
V III.
UY
1. u n - 6. i l - 11. in - 16. u n -
2. in - 7. u n - 12. n o n - 17. im -
.Q
TP
3. n o n - 8. im - 13. u n - 18. d is -
4. - in 9. i r - 14. m is - 19. i l -
O
ĐẠ
5. ir — 10. in 15. d is - 20. u n -
NG
ADVANCED GRAMMAR 9C
HƯ
Ỉ.
I t ’s a new desk lig h t, made o f some k in d o f d a rkish red m ental.
ẦN
I t ’s got a re d d ish pow er cord, too. I t ’s g re a t fo r d a rkish room s and
sm a llish desks.
TR
II.
B
00
1. Yes, he understands th e subject w e ll - b u t can he p u t it across?

10
2. How m uch d id you p u t aside every m o n th w h ile you w ere w o rkin g

abroad?
+3
3. a) The governm ent soon p u t down th e re v o lt,

P2
b) P u t m y nam e down fo r th e co m p etition .

CẤ
4. We p u t fo rw a rd th is idea to th è com m ittee.

5. The teacher refused to p u t up w ith th e boy’s laziness.
A
HÓ
HI.
1. A/C: account: tà i khoản 24. m ax: m axim um
Í-
2. a dvt: a dve rtisem en t 25. m in : m inim um

-L
3. approx: a p p ro xim a te ly 26. m isc: m iscellaneous

ÁN
4. a.s.a.p.: answ er as soon as 27. N B : nota bene (L ), note ca re fu lly

possible 28. O HM S: on h e r / h is m ajesty’s
TO
5. Bros: B roth ers service: theo lệ n h nữ hoàng, nhà

6. cf: confer (L ), com pare vua.
NG
7. Co. : Com pany 29. para: paragraph, p a ra lle l

ƯỠ
8. do: care o f : chuyển qua 30. PLC : p ub lic lim ite d com pany: cồng
ñ ịa ch ỉ của ... ty quốc doanh hữu hạn
ID
9. COD: Cash on D e live ry: 31. pp: pages, postpaid, parcel post:
BỒ
414

trả tiề n k h i nh ậ n hàng các tra iig , trả sau, cước p hí bưu
10. Cont: continued: tiế p theo phẩm .
11. dept: dep artm ent: bộ 32. pp: p er p ro curatin em (L ): on b e h a lf
ƠN
phận of: ủy n hiệ m .
12. enc. : enclosed gởi kèm 33. p.w. : p er week
NH
tro n g thư này 34. reed: received: ñã nhậ n
13. etc.: e t cactera (L ): and so 35. re f. : reference: th a m khảo
UY
on 36. RSVP: Repondez s’i l vous p la ĩt: x in
.Q
14. fw d. : fo rw a rd : chuyển tớ i trả lờ i
TP
15. govt: governm ent 37. S n r: S enior: cha, chính
16. HQ : H eadquarters 38. st: Street
O
17. h r. : hour 39. te l: telephone
ĐẠ
18. inc. : in corporated: liê n 40. U K : U n ite d K ingdom
NG
hiệ p xã 41. V IP : ve ry im p o rta n t person
19. in fo . : in fo rm a tio n 42. vs: versus (L ): aga in st: ngược với
HƯ
20. jn r. :ju n io r: con, phụ 43. w .p.m .: w ea the r p e rm itte d , words
21. km : kilo m e tre p er m in ute
ẦN
22. lb. : lib ra (L ), pound 44. Xm as: c h ris ts as
45. y r: year
23. ltd . : lim ite d
TR
IV.
B
00
1. W e ll, take a vote on h e r proposal, and I ’l l count the no’s.

10
2. L ive rp o o l’s bus service is b e tte r th a n B irm in g h a m ’s.

+3
3. A ll the cricke te rs meet a t a special c ric ke te rs ’ evening on

P2
W ednesdays a t the local pub.

4. A re you a frie n d o f hers? I ’ve never seen you before.
CẤ
5. Its engines are m ore pow erful th a n a B oeing 747’s.

A
6. We’d m eet in the w in te r o f ’83 a t Jam es’s house.

HÓ
7. I ’m w o rried about m y g ra n d fa th e r’s h e a lth .

He’s had flu and he’s n e a rly 85.
Í-
8. I t ’s about tim e th e fo o tb a ll club, and its players d id som ething about

-L
its te rrib le re p u ta tio n fo r violence.

ÁN
V.
TO
1. a fa ir-h a ire d person 5. a le ft-ha n d e d person

NG
2. a w ell-behaved person 6. an open-m inded person

ƯỠ
3. a stro n g -w ille d person (cởi mở)

ID
4. a quick-tem pered person 7. a blue-eyed person

BỒ
415

(nóng nảy)
ƠN
VI.
NH
1. T h is n a tio n has been k e p t down fo r so lon g th a t nobody is capable
UY
o f o ffe rin g any resistance now.
2. T he teacher k e p t me in a fte r school.
.Q
3. I t is advisable to keep in w ith your boss.
TP
4. The ja n ito r (door keeper / doorm an) ke p t th e strang ers out.
O
5. a) The boy w ith th e in ju re d foo t found i t h ard to keep up w ith th e
ĐẠ
re s t o f th e p a rty.
b) The T a y lo r fa m ily found i t d iffic u lt to keep up w ith th e ừ
NG
neighbours.
HƯ
VII.
ẦN
1. Vietnam ese 11. S cottish
2. Russian 12. H u nga rian
3. Spanish
TR
13. B elgian
B
00
4. Iris h 14. U ruguayan

10
5. Q a ta ri 15. Cam bodian

+3
6. Indian 16. Swedish

P2
7. Singaporean 17. M altese

8. British
CẤ
18. A m erican
9. L ib ya n 19. A lg e ria n
A
10. P eruvian 20. N orgew ian

HÓ
VIII.
Í-
1. She m anaged to h o ld back h e r em otion u n til h e r guests h ad le ft.

-L
2. The famous doctor held forth to an audience of over a hundred

ÁN
specialists.
3. The export o f ra w cotton h e ld on fo r m any years a fte r th e w ar.
TO
4. He h e ld out h is hand fo r some m oney.

5. a) H o ld up your le ft hand.
NG
b) They h e ld up h is behaviour as a m odel fo r th e othe rs.

ƯỠ
c) The tra in was h e ld up on account o f th e floods.

d) The robbers h eld th e tra in up.
ID
BỒ
416

IX.
ƠN
1. un— 5. im - 9. i l -
NH
2. im - 6. in — 10. u n -
UY
3. un— 7. UX1- 11. i r -
.Q
4. un 8. i l - 12. u n -
TP
X.
O
1. As soon as the enem y com pany fe ll back, th e p a trio ts ru tum ed to
ĐẠ
th e ir villa g e .
2. O ur ru n n e r seems to have fa lle n behind.
NG
3. Jones fe ll behind w ith h is paym ents fo r the ra d io and had to borrow
HƯ
money.
4. A t fir s t 40 students en ro lle d as m em bers o f the club, but th is
ẦN
num ber has now fa lle n o ff so th a t th ere are o n ly tw e n ty.
5. The m en soon fe ll to c u ttin g down th e trees & b u ild in g a h u t.
XI.
TR
B
1. People w ill leave th e area once p ro p e rty values fa ll.
00
2. The rea cto r won’t need m any w orkers w hen i t begins operating.
10
3. The area w ill be ve ry busy w h ile th e y are b u ild in g the reactor.

+3
4. They w ill tra in w orkers w h ile th e y are b u ild in g the reactor.

P2
5. We won’t know how m any th e y w ill need u n til th e y have fin ish ed
the plans.
CẤ
6. W e’l l be w o rrie d about accidents as soon as th e re actor opens.

A
7. We’l l have p ro te st m e eting im m e d ia te ly th e e nq u iry begins.

HÓ
8. 2,000 m en w ill be unem ployed a fte r th e coal m ine has closed.

Í-
-L
ÁN
a rith m e tic a l
TO
s ta tis tic a l
b ota nical
NG
zoological
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
411
b) He sent in several poems and a sh o rt s to ry fo r the com petition.

4. He sent a ll the le tte rs o ff yesterday.
5. The circulars have a ll been sent out.
ƠN
Hi.
NH
1. by 5. since
UY
2. fo r 6. fo r
3. u n til 7. u n til
.Q
TP
4. u n til 8. by
JV.
O
ĐẠ
1. M y mum to ld me about a shop w here she’d ...
2. You should look under bridges w here people th ro w bottles away (0
NG
there)
3. You should look in rubbish dumps w here people... b ury th e ir
HƯ
rubbish. ( 0 the re)
ẦN
4. O ld people can rem em ber th e places w here people...
5. I never... shops w here some collectors buy bottle s. ( 0 there)
V. TR
B
Câu lạc bộ khiêu vũ Flashdance
00
Nếu bạn thích nhạc hưng phấn trong m ột khung cảnh h iệ n ñại,
10
nếu bạn cảm th ấ y chán nản và muốn phấn chấn, nếu bạn ñang cảm
+3
th ấ y lo công việc, và bạn m uôn thư g iã n th ì hãy g iả i tỏa lo âu tạ i câu

P2
lạc bộ khiêu vũ Plashdance ở khu thương m ạ i tru n g tâm Houston.

CẤ
VI.
1. The author w orked in a few lin e s about h is own life .
A
2. H is ideas fo r a new facto ry d id n o t w o rk in w ith those o f h is

HÓ
employers.
Í-
3. He w orked o ff h is depression by going fo r a w a lk in the country.

-L
4. The story w orked up to a th r illin g clim ax.

5. a) Have you w orked out a w ay to escape? Can you w o rk th is puzzle
ÁN
out?
TO
b) Everyone know s th a t the old m ine has been w orked out.

NG
c) T h e ir pla n d id n ot w ork out. /

ƯỠ
V II.
ID
1. ‘re sh o rt 4. can’t do w ith o u t

BỒ
418

2. ru n out o f 5.. lacks

3. could do w ith
ƠN
VIII.
NH
e ffic ie n t associate m oderate urgent
UY
v io le n t e xcellen t innocent tem perate
.Q
separate co nfid e nt obedient present
TP
independent accurate
O
IX.
ĐẠ
1. The p roject he had undertaken called fo rth a ll h is enthusiasm .
NG
2. a) M r. F ry called in to see me when he was v is itin g the factories
near m y house.
HƯ
b) They called a doctor in w hen th e ir fa th e r showed no sign o f
ẦN
recovery.
3. The young couple decided to c a ll o ff the wedding.
4. He called h e r nam e out. TR
B
5. The old m an called up m any m em ories o f h is youth.
00
X.
10
1. F irs t o f a ll 4. In a d d itio n 7. As some o f you know

+3
2. Before I go on 5. F u rth e rm o re 8. L a s tly

P2
3. W hen 6. A fte rw a rd s
CẤ
XI.
A
HÓ
1. have been 6. lab elled 10. relaxed 14. got

2. is 7. have 11. was 15. had taken
Í-
3. don’t w a n t 8. hav<
have... believed 12. had 16. said
-L
4. have decided 9. was 13. was w a itin g 17. was

ÁN
5. come
TO
XII.
NG
Shakespearean G erm an glorious * com m unicative

D icke nsia n G eorgian am bitious constructive
ƯỠ
E dw a rd ia n Je ffe rsó n ia n m ischievous progressive

ID
BỒ
419

ƠN
V icto ria n m ysterious carnivorous destructive
NH
Franciscan famous zealous im pressive
M a ch iavéllian courageous herbivorous a ttra c tiv e
UY
[III.
.Q
. Illn e ss stru ck h im w hen he was about to leave fo r A m erica.
TP
W hat are you re a lly after? I am a fte r th e tru th .
. I ’m fo r your pla n.
O
ĐẠ
. A rth u r is n o t in now, please c a ll la te r.
. Be o ff w ith you!
NG
. The old wom an to ld us th a t h e r son was out.
. The w o rst p a rt o f th e jo u rn e y is over, i t ’s easy from now on.
HƯ
Don’t w o rry, we are w ith you in yo ur fig h t fo r ju stice .
ẦN
ADVANCED GRAMMAR l i e
TR
B
. stolen 4. te rrifie d 7. dam aging 9. crowded
00
. sa tisfy in g 5. em barrassing 8. damaged 10. endurin g

10
. te rrify in g 6. broken
+3
I.
P2
. The ambulance ca rrie d away th e in ju re d man.

CẤ
. The w idow c a rrie d on as i f n o th in g had happened.

. A rth u r is ca rry in g on w ith V a le rie a t present.
A
HÓ
. He found i t h a rd to carry out h is th re a t.

. Lloyd George ca rrie d through m ost o f h is reform s.
Í-
II.
-L
1. a firs t-ra te car 6. a five-store y b u ild in g

ÁN
2. a five -ton tru c k 7. a 100-page book

TO
3. a th ird -ra te hote l 8. a six-h our flig h t

NG
4. a go-m inute cassette 9. a 10-kilogram bag

5. a three-course m eal 10. a 2-day tr ip
ƯỠ
V.
ID
. Pass th is notice along, please.

BỒ
a) The black cloud soon passed away.

b) The old m an passed away la s t week.
20
ƠN
3. Pass the book back w hen you have fin is h e d w ith it.
4. I was passing by w hen I heard th e crash.
NH
5. Pass an apple down to me.
UY
V.
.Q
1. physical 6. m en ta l 11. s te lla r
TP
2. optica l 7. lu n a r 12. solar
3. m anual 8. o ra l
O
13. d ental
ĐẠ
4. dom estic 9. n octu rn a l 1 4 .urban
5. legal 10. m arin e 15. annual
NG
V I.
HƯ
1. W h ile the others w ere arguing, I made away on m y bicycle.
ẦN
2. a) M y fa th e r made out a cheque fo r me to buy a camera,
b) I can’t m ake out w h a t he is try in g : to say.
3. He made over a ll h is p ro p e rty to h is son. TR
4. a) He made up an in cre d ib le s to ry about h is ho lida y.
B
00
b) Sandra made up ve ry ca re fu lly before she m e t h e r boyfriend.

10
5. He trie d h a rd to m ake up fo r th e damage he had done.

VII.
+3
P2
1. Several o f the s trik e rs were sta nd in g about on th e stre e t corner.

2. He stood by and d id n o t even o ffe r to help me.
CẤ
3. Joyce got b ig chance w hen she stood in fo r the famous actress.

4. a) H is m istakes stands out in th e re p ort.
A
HÓ
b) S ix w orkers s till stood out even Sifter an agreem ent w ith th e ir

trade union.
Í-
5. The c h ie f stood up fo r h is assistants in th e argum ent.

-L
VIII.
ÁN
1. lass(ie) 7. countess
TO
2. aunt 8. m aid-servant
3. m are 9. la n d la d y
NG
4. hen 10. heiress

ƯỠ
5. m istress 11. g ir l student

ID
6. empress 12. groom

BỒ
421

L
ƠN
1. d e fin itio n 9. re g u la tio n
NH
2. a lte ra tio n 10. conversion
UY
3. reception 11. decision
.Q
4. h e sita tio n 12. e xp lo ra tio n
TP
5. succession 13. subscription
O
6. perm ission 14. co m p etitio n
ĐẠ
7. explosion 15. adm ission
NG
8. confession
*
HƯ
1. invasion 9. m a n ipu la tio n
ẦN
2. recession 10. segregation
3. opposition 11. s itu a tio n
4. co n trib u tio n
TR
12. subversion
B
5. prom otion 13. re la xa tio n
00
10
6. in fo rm a tio n 14. te m p ta tio n

7. com plication 15. consideration
+3
P2
8. regression
CẤ
1. She set aside her w in te r clothes and took out h e r sum m er frocks.
A
2. I sh a ll set m y w atch back by fiv e m inutes.

HÓ
3. I t set h im dow n as a professional boxer.

4. a) We set fo rth a t dawn.
Í-
-L
b) Our science teacher set fo rth th e p rin cip le s o f g ra v ity to the

whole class.
ÁN
5. The scout q u ickly set th e te n ts up.

TO
Ml.
NG
1. beauty 11. e q u a lity 21. a nxie ty

ƯỠ
2. p ity 12. n o to rie ty 22. c e rta in ty

3. g ra v ity 13. d iffic u lty 23. generosity
ID
4. society 14. duty 24. capacity

BỒ
422

5. v a rie ty 15. m a jo rity 25. ro y a lty

6. a n xie ty 16. p o s s ib ility 26. m in o rity
ƠN
7. g aiety 17. sa n ity 27. a b ility
NH
8. v a n ity 18. tra n q u ility 28. p ro b a b ility
UY
9. s tu p id ity 19. m odesty 29. lo y a lty
.Q
10. sobriety 20. cru e lty 30. obscenity
TP
IV.
O
1. th e m a tte r 6. said
ĐẠ
2. w ha t’s happened 7. d id he
NG
3. im p o rta n t 8. ‘s th e trouble?
4. som ething 9. he said
HƯ
5. te ll me
ẦN
V.
1. discouragem ent o r amusem ent TR
5. em barrassm ent
B
2. excitem ent 6. judgem ent
00
3. arrangem ent 7. advertisem ent

10
4. encouragem ent 8. disappointm ent

+3
VI.
P2
CẤ
1. They a ll w a ite d to see the New Y ear in .

2. I saw m y frie n d s o ff a t the sta tio n .
A
3. Please don’t b o the r to see me out; I can easily fin d the way.
HÓ
4. Once he began to in ve stiga te the m a tte r, he was determ ined to see

Í-
it through.
-L
5. The police saw about th e b an k robbery o f la s t year.

ÁN
(la s t year’s bank robbery)

V II. No exercise
TO
VIII.
NG
1. readiness 6. selfishness 11.'helplessness

ƯỠ
2. frie n d lin e ss 7. nervousness 12. thoughtlessness

ID
3. greatness 8. slim ness 13. uselessness

BỒ
423

ƠN
4. dullness 9. thoughtfulness 14. harm lessness
NH
5. meanness 10. helpfulness 15. shapelessness
IX .
UY
1. You m ust give th e book back a t once.
.Q
2. G ive in your exam papers now.
TP
3. The liq u id gave o ff a stro ng sm e ll.
O
ĐẠ
i. Who w ill help me to give th e books out?
5. The sing er gave h im s e lf up to a deep study o f Shakespeare.
NG
X.
HƯ
1. Have you read “A Passage to In d ia ” ? I t ’s by E .M . F o rster.
ẦN
2. I liste n ed to a lo t o f professors a t u n iv e rs ity , and P rofessor D.J.
Freem an, fo rm th e U n iv e rs ity o f Sussex, was th e m ost in te re s tin g .
He’s an expe rt on Ita lia n h is to ry . TR
B
3. In A rg e n tin a , people have th e ir sum m er holidays in January.
00
1. The Spanish fo o tb a ll team w ill be p la y in g a gainst S cotland in

10
Glasgow n e xt M arch; Gonzalez is th e ir best p la yer.

+3
5. I once saw “H am let, P rin ce o f D enm ark” on BBC te le visio n . I t was

P2
the famous Russian versio n, (p h iê n bản bằng tiế n g N ga)

CẤ
L. In sp ite o f our nervousness, we...

A
Ĩ. In sp ite o f h is selfishness, he’s...

HÓ
Ì. In sp ite o f h is ta lln e ss / h e ig h t, he...

I. In sp ite o f h e r happiness, she...
Í-
). In sp ite o f th e ir sadness, th e y...

-L
Ỉ. In spite o f its dullness, I ...

ÁN
Ĩ. In spite o f h e r k in d n e ss ,'!...
5. In sp ite o f h is helpfulness, I...
TO
). In spite o f its harm lessness, I...

NG
LO. In sp ite o f its uselessness, I...

ƯỠ
ID
1. reference 6. coincidence 11.permanence

BỒ
2. conference 7. dependence 12.m agnificience
124

ƠN
3. preference 8. correspondence 13. innocence
4. interfe re n ce 9. patience 14. eloquence
NH
5. transference 10. absence 15. violence
UY
16. silence
.Q
TP
* 1. perform ance 7. annoyance 13. luxuriance
2. adm ittance 8. resistance 14. im portance
O
ĐẠ
3. tolerance 9. arrogance 15. rom ance
4. appearance 10. radiance 16. persistence
NG
5. disappearance 11. defiance 17. relevance
HƯ
6. acceptance 12. dom inance 18. amvoyance
ẦN
* 1. Pregnancy 4. em ergency
2. agency 5. accountancy TR
B
3. currency 6. e fficien cy
00
II.
10
1. a) The lum berjacks cut dow n th e huge oak tre e.

+3
b) You m ust tr y to cut down yo u r house-keeping b ill.

P2
2. a) She cu t o ff a sm a ll piece o f cake and gave i t to me.

CẤ
b) T he telephone operator cut us o ff in th e m id d le of OUI

conversation.
A
c) He was cut o ff in th e p rim e o f life .

HÓ
3. a) Was i t you who cu t th is photograph out?

b) The dress m aker cut out a s k ir t fo r th e little g irl.
Í-
4. He is cut out fo r a teacher.

-L
5. M rs B ro w n cut th e cake up and gave each o f us a piece.

ÁN
III.
TO
1. I t ’s used fo r re lie vin g ...

2. I t ’s used fo r beauty tre a tm e n t.
NG
3. I t ’s used fo r keeping...
4. I t ’s used fo r re lie vin g ...
ƯỠ
5. I t ’s used fo r g ivin g ...

ID
8. I t ’s used fo r b e tte rin g ...

BỒ
425

ỈV. No exercise
ƠN
1. George le t h is frie n d down very b adly w hen he refused to lend h im
the money.
NH
2. Several u n in v ite d guests w ere le t in .
3. M any E n g lis h people le t o ff fire w o rks on N ovem ber 5th.
UY
4. W hy d id n ’t you le t th e secret out?
.Q
-5. O ur m odem c iv ilis a tio n has fin a lly done aw ay w ith slavery.
TP
8. The cunning salesm an d id me down w hen he sold th is bicycle to me.
O
ĐẠ
7. H is servant d id up th e house w h ile he was away.
8. I d id n o t know w h a t I was le ttin g m ys e lf in fo r w hen I prom ised to
NG
do th a t job.
HƯ
VI.
ẦN
1. m onarchy 6. honesty 11. p ity
2. democracy 7. comedy 12. riv a lry
3. autocracy 8 . tragedy
TR 13. h ila ry
B
4. anarchy 9. jealousy
00
14. h is to ry
10
5. diplom acy 10. harm ony 15. geography

+3
1. horsy (adj thuộc về ngựa) 7. budgerigar /á :/ (giống chim k é t nhỏ

P2
2. aunty, auntie (budgie))

CẤ
3. granny 8. doggie
A
4. nappy (kh ă n ăn, tã ló t) 9. k itty (mèo con)

HÓ
5. sweetie (kẹo, người yêu) 10. n ig h ty - dress

Í-
6. b ird ie 11. p o tty (cái bô cho trẻ con)

-L
12. pinafore / ’ p in a fo :/
ÁN
(áo choàng không ta y ) -> p in n y

TO
1. p o s s ib ility 6. a u d ib ility
NG
2. le g ib ility 7. c re d ib ility
ƯỠ
3. a b ility 8. d e s ira b ility

ID
4. re s p e cta b ility 9. fle x ib ility

BỒ
428

5. c a p a b ility 10. im p o s s ib ility

VIII.
1. I m ust catch up on m y reading.
ƠN
2. A ltho u gh the p u p il was absent fo r a te rm , he soon caugut up w ith
NH
th e others.
UY
3. D rop in a t our house w henever you are in th e d is tric t.
4. a) In A ntum n th e leaves begin to drop off.
.Q
TP
b) M any people dropped o ff d u rin g the long lecture.
5. D rop in on us w hen you n e x t v is it London.
O
ĐẠ
NG
* 1. com m unism 6. m onetarism :
2. pacifism : chủ nghĩa dùng tiề n g iả i quyết k in h tế
HƯ
chủ nghĩa duy hòa 7. M a rxism
ẦN
3. socialism 8. Fascism
4. L en in ism 9. M aoism
5. S ta lin ism
TR
10. B uddhism : ñạo P h ậ t
B
00
• 1. preventive 4 supportive
10
2. suggestive 5. assertive
+3
3. m an ipu lative 6. depressive

P2
X.
CẤ
1. The days are drawn in now that winter is approaching.

A
2. As sum m er approaches, th e days begin to draw out.

HÓ
3. The la n d lo rd drew up th e lease yesterday.

4. He had a b ig sum o f m oney la id b y fo r when he re tire d .
Í-
5. The rebels la id down th e ir anus and surrendered.

-L
6. Several w orkm en have been la id o ff d u rin g th e present crisis.

7. N o e le c tric ity had been la id on a t th e new house; however, th í
ÁN
company had la id w a te r on.

TO
8. The servant la id out h is m aster’s clothes ready fo r th e ceremonial

b a ll (cuộc kh iê u vũ)
NG
XI. ■
ƯỠ
1. “ No, I ’ve never m et h im ,” he said.

ID
BỒ
42'i

!. The m an w ho... ja cke ts, w h ite s h irts , b la ck shoes and bow tie s.
ƠN
!. “A nd I ’d also lik e some cheese, a packet o f b is cu it, 250 gram s of
NH
b u tte r and a b o ttle o f w ine.”
. H is car, w hich... years ago, has done n e a rly 250,000 kilom etres.
UY
. The best m eal in the re sta u ra n t, f ille t steak in cream sauce, is
also...
.Q
. She’s very... sw im m ing, ly in g on th e beach, w a te r s k iin g , reading
TP
books...
O
. K ath le en had... Ire la n d , b u t had never...
ĐẠ
. I w ant... th is £10,000 co n tra ct he’s...
NG
ðVANCED GRAMMAR 14C
HƯ
I. closure 4. m easure, pressure
ẦN
Ỉ. leisure 5. glam our, treasures
5. tre m o r, te rro r, nature TR
6. colour, fla vou r
B
00
i 2.e 3-d 4 .k 5.h 6-g

10
f 8.1 9.m 10.a ll. b 12.C

+3
. No exercise
P2
CẤ
1. fatherhood 5. w idow hood

2. boyhood 6. parenthood
A
HÓ
3. m otherhood 7. brotherhood
4. childhood 8. kn ig hth o od
Í-
-L
1. ow nership 4. re la tio n s h ip
ÁN
2. sportsm anship 5. ow nership

3. frie n d s h ip
TO
NG
1. stardom 4. freedom
2. w isdom 5. king dom
ƯỠ
3. Boredom
ID
BỒ

ƠN
1. last 5. hang
NH
2. lock 6. follow
3. fin ish e d 7. mixed
UY
4. live 8. hang
.Q
VI. No exercise
TP
VII.
O
• 1. arrival 6. withdrawal
ĐẠ
2. survival 7. renewal
NG
3. denial 8. reversal
HƯ
4. proposal 9. dismissal
5. refusal 10. re c ita l (bản tường th u ậ t)
ẦN
• 1. hum anoid 3. plane toid
2. cuboid (giống hình khối)
TR
4. asteroid
B
00
VIII.
10
1. The surgeon opened up the m an’s th ig h and rem oved the b u llet.
2. The old m an passed away la s t week.
+3
3. Yes, he understands the subject w e ll - b u t can he p u t i t across?

P2
4. The k n ig h t ra n th e v illa in throug h w ith h is sword.

CẤ
5. I set him down as a professional boxer.

IX.
A
HÓ
• 1. musician 4. historian
2. librarian 5. statistician
Í-
3. mathematician 6. magician
-L
ÁN
• 1. informant 5. assistant
2. inhabitant 6. consultant
TO
3. claimant (nguyên cáo) 7. resident

NG
4. correspondent 8. superintendent
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
429

X. No exercise
ƠN
i. No exercise
NH
If.
1. M y g ra n d fa th e r has fiv e cheap sized th in 1984 green check Roman
UY
le a the r vases.
.Q
2. There are some clean lo ng square 1920s dark-blue spotted
TP
C a lifo rn ia p la s tic s h irts .
3. A few d irty average oval 15th-century b la ck flow ered European
O
ĐẠ
alum inum houses are being b u ilt.
I. He washed a few d irty o ld strip e d cotton s h irts .
NG
). She’s got fiv e ugly lit tle Pekinese dogs.
ỈỈ. No exercise
HƯ
V.
ẦN
.. These g irls are ch arm in g but shallow .
TR
!. A lthough th e y are generous the y can also be greedy.
B
1. They are n o t o n ly charm ing b u t also generous.
00
10
. T h is boy is energetic. F urtherm ore, he can be pe rsisten t.

+3
. These people are tho u gh t / supposed / said to be good businessmen.

P2
No exercise
CẤ
'I.
A
. xe ñạp m ộ t bánh 5. âm th a n h ñcm

HÓ
. m áy bay ch ỉ có m ộ t ñôi cánh (= m onophonic)

Í-
. k ín h m ộ t trò n g 6. suy ng hĩ, ý k iế n m ộ t chiều

-L
(= single-eye glass) 7. số ít
ÁN
. chế ñộ m ộ t vợ m ột chồng 8. th a n h , th ỏ i, xà ñơn

TO
SI.
I. duel 7. duologue
NG
ỉ. double-bed 8. bicycle
ƯỠ
ỉ. tw in-b e d 9. dual purpose

ID
BỒ
10

4. duét (bản nhạc song tấu, ca) 10. double-check

5. bifocals 11. am bidextrous
ƠN
6. duo (cặp song tấu , ca) 12. tw in -h e a d lig h ts
NH
VIII. No exercise
UY
.Q
I.
TP
1. trip le ts 9. decim alize
O
2. polygam y 10. p o lyg lo t
ĐẠ
3. pentagon 11. m u ltitu d e
NG
4. decade 12. m ille n iu m
5. cent 13. a century
HƯ
6. centipede (con rế t) 14. tr in ity
ẦN
7. trip o d /a i/ 15. q u a rte t
8. five - set event TR
II.
B
00
1. broke 6. go
10
2. ra n 7. s tic k
+3
3. comes 8. turn ed
P2
4. lo o kin g 9. break
CẤ
5. ra n 10. got
A
ill.
HÓ
1. w h ite n 9. gladden 17. soften

Í-
2. b rig h te n 10. harden 18. stra ig h te n

-L
3. broaden 11. lig h te n 19. th icke n

ÁN
4. cheapen 12. m oisten 20. toughen

TO
5. dampen 13. redden 21. weaken

6. darken 14. sadden 22. w iden
NG
7. deepen 15 sicken 23. blacken

ƯỠ
8. fa tte n 16. shorten 24. quicken

ID
BỒ
431

ƠN
)V.
NH
1. I could do w ith an e le ctric coffee m aker.
2. We couldn’t dò w ith o u t w a te r b ut we could do w ith o u t TV .
UY
3. The colour o f your s h irt goes w ith your new h at.
.Q
TP
1. H ey you! 8. m y frie n d
O
2. boy 9. look here!
ĐẠ
3. Don’t be stupid! 10. m y la d
4. son 11. sir
NG
5. W atch out! 12. hey you
HƯ
6. Ju st w atch yourself. 13. You dare!
ẦN
7. s i r (o ld fellow )
'5.
TR
1. c la rify 10. publicize
B
00
2. p acify 11. s te riliz e

10
3. te rrify 12. rom anticize

+3
4. u n ify 13. sensationalize

P2
5. m ag nify 14. economize, m in im ize

CẤ
6. classify 15. authorize

7. a m p lify 16. harm onize
A
8. id e n tify , n o tify 17. in d u s tria liz e

HÓ
9. m odernize 18. colonize

Í-
-L
1. exercises 4. advertised
2. re visin g 5. im p rovise
ÁN
3. televise
TO
NG
am aga inst 6. w o rk fo r
ƯỠ
ra n a fte r 7. against
takes a fte r 8. w o rk against
ID
fo r the 9. ra n again st
BỒ

ƠN
5. look after * 10. fallen for
NH
VIII.
• 1. D espite h is anger, he... A ltho ug h he was angry, he...
UY
2. D espite h e r annoyance, she...
.Q
3. D espite th e ir happiness, they...
TP
4. D espite h is youth, he...
5. D espite h e r age, she...
O
ĐẠ
• 1. A ltho ugh i t was very la te, she couldn’t sleep.
2. A ltho u gh I was te rrifie x , I w e n t to th e w indow .
NG
3. A lth ou gh she was very frig h te n e d , she opened th e w indow .
HƯ
4. A ltho u gh it ra ined , I was w ea rin g ju s t a s h irt and trousers.
5. A lthough i t rained, the w orkers continued w o rkin g .
ẦN
IX.
1. accommodate 11. educate TR
B
2. cooperate 12. dom inate
00
3. em igrate 13. estim ate

10
4. im m ig ra te 14. generate (là m p h á t sin h )

+3
5. fascinate 15. illu m in a te

P2
6. com plicate 16. autom ate (tự ñộng hóa)

CẤ
7. irrig a te 17. exaggerate

8. irr ita te 18. in fla te (lạ m p h á t)
A
HÓ
9. to le ra te 19. vio la te (v i phạm )

10. ra d iate 20. com tam inate (là m ô n hiễm )
Í-
X. No exercise
-L
XI.
ÁN
1. ... 1803 (?) 3. ... do you do?

TO
4. ... how fa r i t is. 5. ... to B risto l?

NG

ƯỠ
I.
ID
1. embodies 5. e n la rg in g th e ir house
2. an em ploym ent 6. em powered h im to
BỒ
433

3. enjoyed m yself 7. to em phasize a w ord

4. encouraged h im 8. e m b itte red h e r
ƠN
II.
1. He’s ... p o litic ia n , he puts h is message across on TV .
NH
2. I ’m n ot... route, I ’m going to cut across along sm a ll co untry roads.
UY
3. W hen I come across h im (thoáng th ấ y ), he...
.Q
4. I ra n across an old frie n d ...
TP
5. I can’t get across w h a t...
O
ĐẠ
III. No answ er key
NG
HƯ
1. film d ire c to r 10. fo o tb a lle r
2. em peror 11. drum m er
ẦN
3. n a vig a to r 12. dancer
4. actor TR 13. g u ita ris t
B
5. counsellor (ngườicố vấn) 14. sp ecia list
00
6. co un cillor (ủy viê n h ộ iñồng) 15. s c ie n tis t

10
7. sin ger 16. p ia n is t

+3
P2
8. p a in te r 17. c a p ita lis t

CẤ
9. ru n n e r 18. m o to rist
\ỉ.
A
HÓ
1. come, going / ru n n in g
2. take 4. get
Í-
-L
b. b rin g 5. take
ÁN
TO
1. m isjudge 6. m isquote
2. m ispronounce 7. m isspe ll
NG
3. m isunderstand 8. m isread
ƯỠ
4. m ism anage 9. m is in fo rm
ID
BỒ

5. m iscalculate 10. m isuse

VII.
ƠN
1. H e looked around fo r h is lo s t rin g .
2. They stood around w a itin g fo r a jo b to do.
NH
3. She tu rn e d around before she crossed th e stre et.
UY
VIII.
.Q
1. The best th in g you can do is to im p le m e n t the “E lim in a tin g H unger
TP
and R educing P ove rty” p olicy.
2. I ’d s tro n g ly advise you to in te rv ie w th e governm ent V IP s.
O
ĐẠ
3. I would recom m end you n o t to be addicted to drugs.
4. He suggested we m ake a study tr ip to PacBo Cave.
NG
5. Do you fancy m a kin g a b o a ttrip over the Dragon W h a rf o r Harbour?
HƯ
IX.
1. co-p artn e r (ngườichung cổ phần ) 5. co-star
ẦN
2. forenam e 6. re tu rn tic k e t
3. forehead
TR 7. foreground
B
4. c o a litio n (sự liê n k ế t phe p h á i ch ín h t r ị) 8. coincidence
00
10
X.
+3
1. W h ich le tte r o f th e a lp hab et comes before Q?

P2
2. W h ich num ber comes before 44 in th e sequence 11, 22...?

3. W h a t punctua tio n m arks do you p u t before th e s ta rt o f d ire ct
CẤ
speech?
A
4. I f th e Queen o f E ngland came tó your house fo r d in n e r, w h a t dishes

HÓ
w ould you set before her?

Í-

-L
I.
ÁN
1. o u tlive 4. outm anoeuvre

TO
2. o u tw it 5. outnum ber
3. outsid e r
NG
II.
ƯỠ
1. keep 2. going 3. keep

ID
BỒ
431

ƠN
w h itẹ 4 ia ire d , m iddle-aged, bad-tem pered
NH
gre a t-g ra nd fa the r
high-speed tra in , out-of-date
UY
son-in-law , post-w ar
h ig h -p itc h voice, co operate
.Q
TP
I assume you’ve got a job .
O
ĐẠ
W e ll... as a m a tte r o f fact, I haven’t. I ’m lo o king fo r one.
W eddings are v e ry expensive. I guess you’l l pay fo r a ll th a t.
NG
I believe th a t you w e n t to O xford U n iv e rs ity .
W e ll, yes, b u t I d id n ’t graduate.
HƯ
The fa c t is th a t th e y th re w me out.
I suppose you don’t w a n t to te ll me w hy.
ẦN
TR
1. uncover 6. unw rap
B
00
2. undress 7. unzip (mở khóa, dây kéo)

10
3. unpack 8. unfreeze
+3
4. unlock 9. unhook (th áo móc ra)

P2
5. unw ind /a i/ 10. unfasten

(không lê n dây ñồng hồ)
CẤ
A
. decapitate 6. deported
HÓ
. depopulated 7. deodorize
Í-
. dem oralized 8. decompose (phân hủy)

-L
. dehydrated (m ấ t nước) 9. defuse

ÁN
. de-ice 10. devalue

TO
He passed th e p o in t b y in h is lecture.
NG
S ix fire-engines fro m the n e xt tow n stood by in case o f a fu rth e r

outbreak o f fire .
ƯỠ
a) M r. Jones had p u t £1,000 by fo r fu tu re use.

ID
b) He p u t th e idea b y and the n fo rg o t about it.

a) Please move to one side; we cannot get by.
BỒ

b) The husband to ld h is w ife th a t th e y w ould get by i f they kept
ƠN
together. * . '
VII.
NH
1. se m i-fin a l 4. se m i-o fficia l
UY
2. sem i-detached 5. semi-conscious
3. sem i-circle
.Q
VIII.
TP
1. The shopkeeper brought h is price down to 5 dolla rs.
O
2. The governm ent soon p u t dow n th e re vo lt.
ĐẠ
3. The a rm y turned h im dow n on account o f h is poor h e a lth .
NG
4. She was snobbish and looked down on all her neighbours.
IX.
HƯ
1. a n tise p tic , a n tib io tic , a ntid ote
ẦN
2. anticyclone /x n tis d rls o n / (gió xoáy nghịch) o r a nticlockw ise (adj &
adv: ngược chiều k im ñồng hồ)
3. antifre eze (ch ất chống ñông)
TR
B
4. anti-clockw ise
00
5. pro-govem m ent, p ro -B ritis h

10
X-
+3
1. a) The foreigners brought in m any o f th e ir own customs,

P2
b) They b rin g in a lo t o f m oney every week.

CẤ
2. T hey called a doctor in w hen th e ir fa th e r showed no sign o f

recovery.
A
3. The days are drawing in now that the winter is approaching.

HÓ
4. The enem y fin a lly gave in .

5. The teacher ke p t me in a fte r school.
Í-
6. I have ju s t sta rte d to take in th e Dong N a i Newspaper.

-L
XI.
ÁN
1. “Do you like ...? ” I asked. “ Yes,” she re p lied .

TO
“ I love... Do you... in h is song, <A m erican June1*?”

“W hich line?” I asked. “O h, you know ,” she said, “ the lin e th a t goes
NG
<I t ’s so hard... from hom e*.”

2. “ Oh, excuse me,” he said, “ I w as... between th e ^ a b le d’hote* and <à
ƯỠ
la c a rte l W hich w ould you suggest?”

ID
BỒ
437

1. antedate 7. transform e d / in form e d / deform ed
ƠN
2. tra n s p la n t 8. postw ar
NH
3. re tro ro cke t 9. m a la djustm e nt
4. co-existence 10 superstructure
UY
5. pre-determ ined 11. in fin ite
6. m alpractice 12. in ta k e
.Q
TP
II.
1. The policem an drove th e crowd off.
O
ĐẠ
2. W hat tim e d id th e y set off?
3. The plane is due to ta ke o ff a t 3.30 p.m .
NG
4. He cleared o ff th e old records fro m the bookcase.
5. A ll th e b ird s died o ff d u rin g th e cold w in te r.
HƯ
6. The new in se cticide k ille d o ff a ll th e pests.
7. M y toothache has now w orn off.
ẦN
HI.
TR
1. communal 9. combination
B
00
2. subconsciousness 10. addendum (phụ lục sách)

10
3. communism 11. contraband (n)

+3
4. compulsion 12. adaptation

P2
5. ability, debility 13. evolution

(sự suy nhược, yếu ớt)
CẤ
14. combat
6. intervention 15. adventures
A
7. contraception
HÓ
8. deodorize
Í-
IV.
-L
1. Business is being carried on as usual.

ÁN
2. Come on! The exam is approaching.

3. How is Tom getting on?
TO
4. The speaker went on to say that he was a self-made man.

NG
5. Can you hang on while I go for a cup of tea?

6. Tell him to hold on a moment, I’ll come soon.
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
438

V.
1. ... a t the z o o __lio n s , bears... so o n __
2. Bob D y la n __probably ... in th e w o rld .
ƠN
3. ... wash u p __b u t be...
NH
4. ... D .H . L a w ren ce __a ll o f them ...
5. ... hom ew ork i n __i f you...
UY
V I.
.Q
1. a lo n g-su fferin g person 5. an e a r-s p littin g rock group
TP
2. a tim e-consum ing jo b 6. a tim e -sa vin g idea.
3. a fast-m oving sports car 7. a w o rld -sh a kin g event
O
ĐẠ
4. a te a r-je rk in g film
VII.
NG
1. O ver a thousand n ative s have been brough t over to our re lig io n .
HƯ
2. The la s t ite m on th e agenda was h eld over u n til n e xt week.
3. B ill has taken th e business over.
ẦN
4. He w en t over to ta lk to h is old frie n d .
5. We looked a ll th e second-hand cars over before fin a lly m aking oil]
choice.
TR
B
6. We ta lk e d th e m a tte r over b u t could n o t reach an agreem ent.
00
7. We th o ug h t th e m a tte r over and reached a decision.

10
VIII.
+3
cươi (sân) ch ết giấc (n gất) heo (lợn)

P2
tu i (tô i) eng (anh) h ỉ (nhé)

CẤ
h ấn (hắn) nớ (ñó) không ñời mô

A
biểu (bảo) má (m ẹ) (không bao giờ)

HÓ
thè m hung (th è m dữ) tấ m k iế n g (tấ m k ín h ) anh h a i (anh cả)

Í-
bây chừ (bây giờ) n i (này) tê (k ia )

-L
IX.
ÁN
photocopy -> phô tô cóp-pi

TO
te le visio n -> ti- v i

telephone -> tê -lê -p h ô n (ñ iệ n th o ạ i)
NG
X.
ƯỠ
1. Is th e re enough cake to go round?

ID
2. He handed round th e le tte r he had ju s t received.

BỒ
43

The c y c lis t came round a fte r th e accident.
ƠN
Pop in w henever you have th e tim e .
NH
The 2 youths a t la st brought the old m ạn round to theừ p o in t o f view .
The sto ry soon got round th a t th e m an had been in prison.
UY
D id you manage to ta lk your fath e r round in le ttin g you come w ith us?
.Q
WANCED GRAMMAR 20C
TP
O
ĐẠ
c a c t u s e s o r c a c t i /Q I/ 9. syllabuses
(cây xương rồng) 10. b acte ria
NG
plateaux 11. data
nebulas o r nebulae i l l (m ây) 12. b acillu s /basílas/
HƯ
crises (v i khuẩn h ìn h que)
chateaux (ỉâ u ñ ài) b a c illi /b a s íla i/
ẦN
appendices (phụ lục) 13. ra d ỉỉ /a i/ (bán k ín h )
alum nae /i/ (cựu nữ sin h viê n ) TR
14. theses
axes (cái trụ c) 15. addenda (phụ lục sách)
B
00
16. analyses
10
+3
He was throug h w ith her.

P2
Have you looked the exam papers throug h yet?

W hen I get throu gh w ith th is re p o rt, I s h a ll go to th e cinem a.
CẤ
Once he began to investigate th e m a tte r, he was determ ined to see

it through.
A
HÓ
Please p u t me throu gh to E xtension 104.

Í-
... (b ut don’t... to ld you.)

-L
... (fro m T adw orth... Sandpool) is...

ÁN
... (th e estate agents) are...

... gold. ( I t ’s m ined in W ales.)
TO
... (J o h n n y ,... and P h il) are...

NG
ƯỠ
. a t the eleventh hour 10. fifth colum n

ID
. fir s t la d y 11. second s ig h t o r s ix th sense

. th ird w o rld . 12. seventh heaven
BỒ
. th ird degree 13. second thoughts
0
5. second-hand „ 14. firs t-a id
ƠN
6. firs t-ra te 15. th ird -ra te
NH
7. second childhood 16. second nature
8. fir s t n ig h t 17. second w in d
UY
9. fir s t offender 18. second-rate
.Q
V.
TP
1. The k in d old couple agreed to b rin g up th e young orphan.
O
2. I s h a ll a tte n d th e cerem ony unless a n y th in g im p o rta n t comes
ĐẠ
3. Speak up! We cannot h ear you a t the back o f th e room .
NG
4. Several frie n d s o f m ine turne d up a t th e m eeting.
5. H is se rva nt d id up th e house w h ile he was away.
HƯ
6. S hut up and lis te n to yo ur fa th e r.
7. I screwed up m y courage and spoke to her.
ẦN
VI.
1. self-government 4. self-serviceTR
B
2. self-contained 5. self-defence
00
3. self-taught 6. self-employed
10
+3
VII.
P2
1. are up to 9. cheeking up on
CẤ
2. came down with 10. faced up to

3. to carry on with 11. come in for
A
HÓ
4. do away with 12. fallen behind with

5. cut down on 13. catching up on
Í-
6. get on with 14. cash in on

-L
7. back out of 15. got away with (tránh ñược)

ÁN
8. come up against
TO
VIII.
NG
1. ... very noisy: the noise...

2. ... and said: “Thank...”
ƯỠ
3. ... at last it came: he was...

4. ... what I need: a screwdriver...
ID
5. Hamlet: “To be...” -

BỒ
Ophelia: “Sorry?...?”

IX.
l.k 2 .i 3.b 4 .t 5 .f 6 .h 7.d 8 .U
9.e lO .a ll. m 12.0 13.1 14.S 1 5.r 16.n
ƠN
17-P 18.q 19.C 20.g
NH
X.
UY
1. put up w ith 9. m ake up fo r
2. w rote o ff fo r 10. J o in in w ith
.Q
3. send away fo r 11. gone in fo r
TP
4. w alked out on 12. liv e up to
O
5. h o ld in g out fo r 13. ru n out o f
ĐẠ
6. go back on 14. lo o k back on
7. lo o kin g fo rw a rd to 15. keep out o f
NG
8. looks down on
HƯ
XL
1. ... cows, and goats; young ch ild re n ... anim als and people; wom en
ẦN
shopping...
TR
2. I ... schooldays; th e h o t afternoons... dates and m aps; th e cold, w e t-
covered w ith m ud; and th e grey...
B
00
10
+3
P2
CẤ
A
HÓ
Í-
-L
ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
442

KEY TO LANGUAGE STUDY TEST
ƠN
(For learners of c level)
NH
t
Tim e: 90 m inutes
UY
Score: 60
.Q
I. PHRASAL VERBS
TP
In th e fo llo w in g sentences, c irc le th e form in parentheses th
O
means th e same as th e un d e rlin e d w ord o r words.
ĐẠ
1. Louis was depending on th e P itts b u rg h Steelers to w in t]
cham pionship (p ic kin g out / co un tin g on)
NG
2. D r. C lem ents d is trib u te d th e m a te ria ls a t the dean’s conferenc
HƯ
(passed out / brought up)
3. A rch eólogists continue searching fo r buried E g yp tia n tre asu r
ẦN
(keep 0X1 / do away w ith )
4. F our arm ed m en robbed th e b a nk la s t week and escaped w ith i
TR
u n d e t e r m i n e d a m o u n t o f c a s h , ( h e l d UP / p o i n t e d o u t)
B
5. W e had to postpone th e m eeting because too m any people had t]
00
flu . (drop out of! p ut o ff)

10
6. W hen K aren became ill, h e r colleagues had to manage w ith o u t h i

(get along / take o ff)
+3
7. The D epartm ent C hairm an asked h is s ta ff to help w ith il

P2
re g is tra tio n , (called on/ counted on)

CẤ
8. I f we te rm in a te our re la tio n s w ith th a t country, we’l l have to fil

a no th er su pp lie r o f ra w m a te ria ls, (break o ff / draw up)
A
9. A fte r a rriv in g a t th e check-in counter, D ennis discovered th a t ]

HÓ
was in th e w rong a irp o rt, (found out / pointed out)

Í-
10. Kevin Quit the engineering program because he found it t

-L
d iffic u lt, (checked out / dropped out of)

11. The gasoline fum es caused M ik e to fa in t, (pass out / b re ak o ff (c
ÁN
ñứ t quan hệ))
12. The baseball game had to be postponed because o f th e inclem e
TO
(khắc n g h iệ t) w eather, (p u t o ff / p u t on)

NG
13. A ll bids fo r th e p roject (th ảo ra ) had to be subm itted by Novemb

1. (tu rn e d in / draw n up)
ƯỠ
14- Because she is so ta ll, Sandy doesn’t lik e high-heeled shoes, (ca
ID
fo r / p ic k out)
BỒ
4‐

ƠN
I. M y advisor ind icate d num erous erro rs in m y proposed and to ld me
to re w rite it. (figu red out (suy luận ñưa ra con số) / pointed out
NH
(nêu ra ))
UY
. WORD BUILDING OR FORMATION
.Q
Th e -E R -O R - E E -1S T suffixes. Use th e suffixes to give the
TP
nam e of the follow ing.
O
sa m p le : Â person w ho plays jazz on th e piano: a ja zz p ia n is t.
ĐẠ
The th in g th a t w ipes ra in o ff your car w indscreen: a w indscreen
w iper.
NG
A person who takes professional photographs: a professional
photographer.
HƯ
A m achine fo r w ashing dishes: a d ish w asher.
ẦN
A person who donates th e ir kidneys upon th e ir death: a kidney
donor.
TR
The person to w hom a le tte r is addressed: an addressee (người
nhận).
B
00
R ew rite each senten ce by chang ing th e underlined w ords,

10
using a suffix. M ake any spelling chan g es n eeded.

+3
M ost o f h is crim es can be forgiven .

P2
M ost o f h is crim es are forgiva ble .

The club refuses to a d m it anyone n o t w e a rin g a tie .
CẤ
The club refuses adm ission to anyone n o t w e arin g a tie .

A
H er o nly fa u lt is th a t she is la zy.

HÓ
H er only fa u lt is laziness.
T h is firm has produced a lo t in recent years.
Í-
T h is firm has been ve ry productive in re cent years.

-L
I found the book ve ry easy and pleasant to read.

I found the book ve ry readable.
ÁN
Practise using w ords w ith neg ative prefixes. C o n trad ict the
TO
follow ing statem ents in th e sam e w ay as th e exam ple.

NG
cam ple: He’s a ve ry honest m an. I don’t agree. I th in k he’s

dishonest.
ƯỠ
I alw ays fin d h im ve ry se nsitive . / in s e n sitiv e

ID
T h a t’s a very re le va n t p o in t. / irre le v a n t

BỒ
4
3. She’s alw ays obedient. / disobedient
ƠN
NH
4. H e’s ve ry e ffic ie n t. / in e ffic ie n t.
UY
5. H e’s a to le ra n t person. / in to le ra n t
.Q
D. Replace the underlined parts in th es e sentences by suitable
TP
w ords w ith prefixes w hich have th e sam e meanings:
O
ĐẠ
E x a m p le : He’s in favour o f th e A m erican anproarh = He’s pro-
A m erican.
NG
1. The BBC trie s to avoid pronouncing (m ispronouncing) foreign words
in c o rre c tly .
HƯ
2. M ost people say they have to w o rk too h ard b ut are paid too little
ẦN
(are overworked but underpaid).
3. He dated h is cheque w ith a date th a t was la te r tha n th ft rpial Hate
(postdated his cheque).
TR
B
4. She’s s till on good term s w ith the m an who used to be h e r husband
00
(her ex-husband).
10
5. He made so m any m istakes in the le tte r th a t he had to w rite it

+3
again (rew rite it).

P2
E. C om plete this table by giving th e person nouns, th e adjectives

CẤ
and the abstract nouns from th e given verbs.

A
VERB PERSON ADJECTIVE ABSTRACT NOUN

HÓ
NOUN
Í-
Ex convert convert convertible conversion

-L
1 produce producer productive production, produce, product,

ÁN
producticity
TO
2 conduct conductor conducive conduct conduction

NG
3 impress - impressive impression

ƯỠ
4 support supporter supportive support (n)

ID
5 impose - imposing imposition

BỒ
445

F. Pair the formal verbs below w ith their phrasal verb equivalents.
(1) (2)
ƠN
e 1. support a. p u t o ff
NH
c 2. oppose b. p ut down
UY
b 3. deposit c. go against
.Q
a 4. postpone d. tu rn away
TP
d 5. d iv e rt e. h old up
O
G. Can you w ork out th e m eanings of th e underlined w ords in the
ĐẠ
sentences below? To help you, here are th e m eanings of the
main Latin prefixes:
NG
INTRO = w ith in , in w a rd OB, O: against D E : dow n, from
HƯ
IN , IM = in to , in RE: again, back EX: out
SUB = under TRAN S: across
ẦN
1. She’s a ve ry in tro spe ctive Ilo okin g a t oneself] person and he’s also
very in tro v e rte d [reserved].
TR
2. He always seems to oppose [argue against] e ve ryth in g I suggest.
B
3. I dont th in k i t is h e a lth y to repress [h o ld back] one’s em otions too
00
much.
10
4. The docum entary exposed [m ade p u b lic ] co rru p tion in h ig h places.

+3
5. Perhaps you can deduce [w ork o u t] w h a t th e w ord means fro m the

P2
way it is form ed.

CẤ
H. Fill each of th e blanks to form a new com pound adjective.

I . brown-eyed
A
HÓ
bright-eyed
wide-eyed
Í-
2. w ater-p roo f
-L
b ulle t-p ro o f
ÁN
fool-proo f (ñơn giản)

TO
fire -p ro o f
dust-proof
NG
3. narrow -m inded
ƯỠ
single-m inded (ch ỉ theo ñuổi m ộ t mục ñích)

ID
broad-m inded
BỒ
446

absent-m inded
4. polo-necked (cổ lọ )
ƠN
low -necked
high-necked
NH
5. B ritish -m a d e
UY
ready-m ade
home-made
.Q
6. sugar-free
TP
duty-free (m iễn thuế) = tax-free
O
ĐẠ
problem -free
care-free
NG
7. big-headed (tự kiê u )
HƯ
hot-headed (người bộp chộp)
pig-headed (bướng b ỉn h , cứng ñầu)
ẦN
light-headed (ñầu óc mê sảng)
bald-headed (ñầu h ó i) TR
8. kind -h e a rte d
B
00
soft-hearted
10
lig h t-h e a rte d

+3
hard-hearted
P2
9. near-sighted
CẤ
far-sig h te d
sh ort-sighte d
A
HÓ
10. w e ll-o ff = w e a lth y

one-off (chỉ m ộ t lầ n , kh ông lậ p lạ i)
Í-
-L
THE END
ÁN
í0 & d U udt to- tjrm

TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
44

ƠN
NH
REFERENCES
UY
1. H a rtle y , B erna rd & V ine y, P eter (1982), S tream line E nglish
Departures / Connections / Destinations / Directions. O xford
.Q
U n iv e rs ity Press.
TP
2. H eaton, J.B . (1967), Prepositions & A d v e rtia l Particles. Hongkong:
O
P eninsula Press L td .
ĐẠ
3. Quang, Pham V an (1991), S tream line E ng lish D irections (B ilin g u a l
E d itio n ). HC M C G eneral P u b lish in g House.
NG
4. T hanh, T ra n V an & O thers (1994), S tream line E ng lish Destinations
(B ilin g u a l E d itio n ). HCM C P u b lish in g House.
HƯ
5. T hanh, T ra n V an & T ri, Lam L y (1994), S tream line E ng lish
D irections (B ilin g u a l E d itio n ). T he Y outh P ub lish in g House.
ẦN
6. T hanh, T ra n V an & Yen, N guyen T h anh (1993), S tream line E ng lish
TR
G ram m ar (3 volum es). H CM C: The Y outh P ub lishin g House.
B
00
10
+3
P2
CẤ
A
HÓ
Í-
-L
ÁN
TO
NG
ƯỠ
ID
BỒ
148

D LJBG 8 PM3 W

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

D LJBG 8 PM3 W

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WWW.DAYKEMQUYNHON.UCOZ.COM WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/DAYKEM.

(ELEMENTARY - INTERMEDIATE - 0DVfiNCED)

Gầm: t 3 Cáp ñộ so trung cao cấp

f Mối cáp ñộ gỏm BO bài X 3=60 bái

f Mối bài có 2 phần: lý thuyết + thục hành

ậ Hoán tấ t 3 cấp ñộ trang vòng 5 tháng

ðặc ñiếm: ♦ Phối hạp nhiều trạng tâm ngữ pháp

trang 1 bái, giúp tạa câu hoàn chinh ngay tứ ñẩu

# Bái tập dối dào, phang phú

ậ Có ñâp án cho mọi bái tập

Đóng góp PDF bởi GV. Nguyễn Thanh Tú WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

Đóng góp PDF bởi GV. Nguyễn Thanh Tú WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

Chịu Trách Nhiệm Xuất Bản:

HOÀNG CHÍ DŨNG

Hiêu sách Ngoe M ai giữ.M g ọuvền

S ố DKKHXB: 323-2008/C X B /553-24/H ð .

In x o n s nộp lưu chiểu Quí IV N ăm 2008.

Đóng góp PDF bởi GV. Nguyễn Thanh Tú WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

IN T E R M E D IA T E and A D V A N C E D . Each le vel com prises 20 units.

Each u n it has b oth explanations and exercises. V arious g ra m m a r

p oints are included in the same u n it to h elp le a rn e rs create com plete

sentences r ig h t a t the b e g in n in g o f the course.

W ith concise explanations, abu ndant exercises, and answ er keys to

The beginners can get access to th is m a te ria l w ith o u t any

The w r ite r hopes th a t you w ill fin d th is book a sh o rt w ay and an

Vice-Director of Dong Nai Informatics

Đóng góp PDF bởi GV. Nguyễn Thanh Tú WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

Với những g iả i th íc h ngắn gọn, lượng b à i tập phong phú và ñáp

liệ u m à kh ôn g cần ñiều k iệ n tiê n quyết nào.

Người v iế t h i vọng các, bạn sẽ n h ậ n ra tập sách là con ñường ngắn

và là công cụ hiệu quả ñể có dược m ộ t nền tả n g tố t cũng như m ộ t bàn

Phó Giám ðốc Trung Tâm Tin Học -

Đóng góp PDF bởi GV. Nguyễn Thanh Tú WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

E. ðại từ chỉ thị (Demonstrative Pronouns)........................................................... 26

F. Tính từ sở hữu (Possessive Adjectives)............................................................. 27

G. Hỏi về nghề nghiệp...................................... .................................................. 27

H. Học thêm các số ñếm sau:............................................ ................................. 27

ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 3A ................................................................................29

B. Học thêm số ñếm :............................................... ;......................................... 29

c. Mâu câu với THERE IS / A R E .......................................................................... 29

D. Câu hỏi với WHERE (ở ñ âu )............................................................................ 30

F. Cách ñọc sô' tiền và số ñiện thoại..................................................................... 31

G. Lời yêu cầu lịch sự........................................................................................... 31

ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 4A ................................................................................ 34

A. Hỏi ñây / kia là a i? .......................................................................................... 34

B. Hỏi về màu sắc............................................................................................... 34

D. Sở hữu cách (The Possessive Case).................................................................. 34

Đóng góp PDF bởi GV. Nguyễn Thanh Tú WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

E. Câu hỏi với WHOSE (= của ai) chỉ sở hữu........................................................... 3:

F. ðại từ chỉ thị: ONE, ONES.............. .............................. .................................. 4

ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 7A ...................................................................................;.4t

A. ðộng từ có hai tân ngữ (Verbs with two objects)............................................... 41

B. Cấu trúc câu có trạng từ chỉ nơi ch ố r:........................................................... 4!

D. Cấu trúc mô tả tính c h ấ t:.................................................................................. 4:

B. W h - questions with Present Continuous.............................................................. 5

ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 9 A ...............................................................................5:

A. Một số kiểu nói lịch sự..................................................................................... 5í

B. Cách dùng TOO và E IT H E R .............................................................................. 5t

E. Câu trả lời vổi BECAUSE......................................................... ......................... 5"'

Đóng góp PDF bởi GV. Nguyễn Thanh Tú WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/BOIDUONGHOAHOCQUYNHON

ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 10A.............................................................................59

ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 13A.............................................. ............................. 76

B. There was/ w ere:........................................................................................... 77